Tekla Structures 2018

Create drawings

March 2018

©2018 Trimble Solutions Corporation

Contents

1 Drawings in Tekla Structures..................................................... 15

1.1 Drawings integrated with models................................................................. 17
1.2 Drawing associativity..................................................................................... 17
Associativity symbol.............................................................................................................. 18
1.3 Drawing mode in Tekla Structures................................................................ 19
1.4 Drawing layout and views.............................................................................. 20
1.5 Drawing objects............................................................................................... 22
1.6 How to keep your drawings up to date?.......................................................23
1.7 Different levels of setting up and modifying drawing properties............. 24
Set automatic drawing properties before creating drawings...........................................27
Modify view-level drawing properties................................................................................. 28
Modify drawing properties of an existing drawing............................................................29
Modify drawing object properties....................................................................................... 30
Load saved drawing object properties................................................................................31
Detailed object level settings................................................................................................31
Create detailed object level settings in a general arrangement drawing.................. 32
Example: Apply detailed object level settings on drawing level in a GA drawing..... 33
Create detailed object level settings in cast unit drawings......................................... 36
Example: Apply detailed object level settings on view level in a cast unit drawing. 38

How Tekla Structures applies drawing properties in drawing creation.......................... 40

Settings affecting the recreation of drawings.................................................................... 41
Prevent automatic drawing updates and recreation.........................................................42

2 Create drawings in Tekla Structures......................................... 43

2.1 Drawing types.................................................................................................. 45
General arrangement drawings........................................................................................... 45
Example: Foundation plan.............................................................................................. 46
Example: Slab plan........................................................................................................... 47
Example: Framing plan.................................................................................................... 48
Example: Deck plan.......................................................................................................... 49
Example: Erection elevation drawing.............................................................................50
Example: 3D isometric drawing...................................................................................... 51
Example: Anchor bolt plan.............................................................................................. 52
Single-part drawings..............................................................................................................52
Example: Anchor bolt.......................................................................................................53
Example: Embed...............................................................................................................54
Example: Plate.................................................................................................................. 55
Assembly drawings................................................................................................................58
Example: Beam................................................................................................................. 59
Example: Stairs................................................................................................................. 60
Example: Rail.....................................................................................................................61
Cast unit drawings................................................................................................................. 61

2
 Example: Beam................................................................................................................. 62
Example: Column............................................................................................................. 63
Example: Stairs................................................................................................................. 64
Multidrawings.........................................................................................................................64
2.2 What to do before creating drawings........................................................... 65
2.3 Create general arrangement drawings........................................................ 66
2.4 Create single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings...................................67
2.5 Create AutoDrawings......................................................................................69
Create AutoDrawings............................................................................................................ 69
AutoDrawings wizard files.................................................................................................... 70
Wizard log............................................................................................................................... 72
2.6 Create multidrawings..................................................................................... 72
Link or copy drawing views to empty multidrawings........................................................ 73
Create multidrawings of selected drawings....................................................................... 73
Create multidrawings of selected parts.............................................................................. 74
2.7 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog............................................... 75
Master drawing types............................................................................................................76
Cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog............................................................. 77
Saved settings in Master Drawing Catalog.................................................................... 77
Rule sets in Master Drawing Catalog............................................................................. 79
Wizards in Master Drawing Catalog............................................................................... 80
Apply detailed object level settings in saved settings....................................................... 81
Create general arrangement drawings using saved settings in Master
Drawing Catalog.....................................................................................................................82
Create anchor bolt plans using saved settings.................................................................. 83
Objects included in the anchor bolt plan...................................................................... 85
Define the anchor bolt plan parts using drawing filters..............................................85
Include assemblies in anchor bolt plans....................................................................... 86
Create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using saved settings in
Master Drawing Catalog........................................................................................................86
Example: Create cast unit drawings one by one................................................................87
Example: Create assembly drawings from groups of similar parts.................................90
Create drawings using rule sets or wizards in Master Drawing Catalog.........................92
Example - Create a new rule set and drawings for all parts.............................................93
Create multiple drawing sheets of the same part............................................................. 99
Create multiple drawing sheets with wizards ............................................................. 99
Create multiple drawing sheets using drawing properties ..................................... 100
Search for master drawings and save the results in Master Drawing Catalog............ 100
Customize Master Drawing Catalog.................................................................................. 101
Add master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog......................................................102
Remove master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog...................................105
Modify master drawing properties.............................................................................. 106
Modify saved settings' properties................................................................................ 107
Modify rule set properties.............................................................................................108
Modify properties and contents of wizard files..........................................................109
Modifying cloning template properties....................................................................... 110
Manage Master Drawing Catalog folders....................................................................111
Example: Add, rename, and move folders ................................................................. 112
Copy master drawings to another folder.................................................................... 113
Remove master drawings from a folder......................................................................113
Sample images of drawings.......................................................................................... 114
Create sample images for Master Drawing Catalog.................................................. 114
Add sample and thumbnail images to master drawings.......................................... 115

3
2.8 Clone drawings.............................................................................................. 115
Create drawings using cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog......................... 116
Clone by using cloning templates located in other models........................................... 117
Clone from the Drawing List...............................................................................................118
Example: Clone a general arrangement drawing............................................................ 120
Clone dimensions in selected views only......................................................................... 122
Cloned objects..................................................................................................................... 123
What to check in cloned drawings.....................................................................................123
Refresh drawing associativity after cloning......................................................................125
Copy a drawing to a new sheet.......................................................................................... 125
Clone using drawing templates in template library........................................................ 126

3 Search for and open drawings................................................. 127

3.1 Open Drawing list..........................................................................................128
3.2 What is displayed in the Drawing list......................................................... 128
3.3 Drawing status flags..................................................................................... 131
3.4 How to read the drawing status information............................................ 131
3.5 Select the drawings to show in Drawing List............................................. 134
3.6 Search for drawings and save search results.............................................134
3.7 Select drawings in the Drawing List............................................................135
3.8 Check whether parts have drawings.......................................................... 136
3.9 Open drawings...............................................................................................136
Open a drawing in the model............................................................................................ 137
Open a new drawing when a drawing is already open................................................... 137
Cannot load the selected drawing.....................................................................................137
3.10 Create and view drawing snapshots........................................................... 137
Snapshot overlay................................................................................................................. 139
Snapshot overlay in model........................................................................................... 140
Snapshot overlay in drawings.......................................................................................140
3.11 Close drawings...............................................................................................141

4 Edit drawings..............................................................................143
4.1 Rename drawings..........................................................................................144
4.2 Give titles to drawings.................................................................................. 144
4.3 Create and modify drawing views...............................................................145
Create a section view.......................................................................................................... 146
Create a curved section view..............................................................................................149
Create a detail view............................................................................................................. 150
Define a start number or letter for detail view label and mark..................................... 152
Create additional drawing views of parts......................................................................... 152
Create a drawing view of an entire model view............................................................... 153
Create a drawing view of a selected area in a model view............................................. 154
Create a drawing view of a selected area in a drawing view.......................................... 155
Add single-part views in assembly drawings....................................................................156
Copy drawing views from other drawings........................................................................ 156
Move drawing views to another drawing......................................................................... 157
Link drawing views from other drawings..........................................................................159
Resize the drawing view boundary....................................................................................159
Move drawing views by dragging.......................................................................................161

4
 Align drawing views............................................................................................................. 162
Rotate drawing views.......................................................................................................... 163
Arrange drawing views........................................................................................................163
Modify drawing view properties........................................................................................ 164
Modify section properties in drawings............................................................................. 164
Modify detail properties in drawings................................................................................ 166
4.4 Manual dimensioning................................................................................... 167
Add manual dimensions.....................................................................................................168
Example: Manual dimensions............................................................................................ 170
Add manual dimensions to general arrangement drawings......................................... 174
Add manual dimensions using User Coordinate System............................................... 175
Add tags to dimensions...................................................................................................... 176
Example: How to filter out dimension tag content......................................................... 178
Add dual dimensions manually......................................................................................... 180
Recreate dimensions for all parts......................................................................................181
Add dimensions to reinforcement.....................................................................................182
Add dimension marks or dimension tags to rebar groups....................................... 182
Add dimension lines to rebar groups.......................................................................... 183
Predefined reinforcement dimension settings in the Options dialog box..............185
Examples of rebar dimensions..................................................................................... 187
Dimension rebars with Rebar group dimensioning application....................................191
Add dimensions to rebar groups................................................................................. 191
Rebar group dimensioning settings.............................................................................195
More examples............................................................................................................... 223
Dimension center of gravity (COG).................................................................................... 225
Exaggerate selected dimensions in drawings.................................................................. 229
Modify dimension properties.............................................................................................230
Customize dimension line arrows..................................................................................... 231
Add dimension points in anchor bolt plans..................................................................... 233
Show plate side marks on dimension leader lines.......................................................... 233
Change the location of short outside dimension texts...................................................234
Set a new dimension start point........................................................................................235
Add closing dimensions...................................................................................................... 236
Add or remove dimension points...................................................................................... 237
Link perpendicular dimension lines.................................................................................. 237
Combine dimension lines................................................................................................... 238
Set the dimension extension line length.......................................................................... 239
Drag dimension marks........................................................................................................241
Move the end of the dimension line................................................................................. 243
4.5 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in drawings................ 243
Drawing content manager..................................................................................................244
How to use the model object list..................................................................................247
Add marks to model objects......................................................................................... 248
Check mark count.......................................................................................................... 249
Hide model objects........................................................................................................ 250
Delete marks...................................................................................................................250
Modify model object or mark drawing properties..................................................... 250
Add part marks manually in drawings.............................................................................. 251
Add reinforcement marks manually in drawings............................................................ 252
Add level marks in drawings.............................................................................................. 253
Add section marks in drawings..........................................................................................254
Add detail marks..................................................................................................................255
Add associative notes in drawings.................................................................................... 255
Modify mark or note properties........................................................................................ 257
Adjust mark visibility in an existing drawing.................................................................... 258

5
 Update part and weld marks in drawings........................................................................ 261
Delete marks for selected parts.........................................................................................261
Change symbols in drawings............................................................................................. 264
Remove change symbols...............................................................................................265
Hide all change symbols in a drawing......................................................................... 265
Merge marks........................................................................................................................ 267
Merge reinforcement marks manually........................................................................ 270
Drag the mark and associative note leader line base point...........................................271
Add text in drawings............................................................................................................271
Add text in superscript.................................................................................................. 273
Add links to rich text files in drawings.............................................................................. 274
Add hyperlinks in drawings................................................................................................ 277
Add links to other drawings............................................................................................... 278
Add revision marks in drawings.........................................................................................279
Add links to DWG and DXF files in drawings.................................................................... 280
Add links to image files in drawings.................................................................................. 281
Modify the properties of independent annotation objects............................................282
4.6 Show or hide drawing objects......................................................................282
Hide objects in drawings and drawing views................................................................... 283
List hidden parts in drawings............................................................................................. 286
Hide or show dimensions of graphical objects................................................................ 286
4.7 Arrange drawing objects.............................................................................. 287
4.8 Align drawing objects................................................................................... 288
4.9 Snapping in drawings....................................................................................291
Drawing snap switches and snap settings........................................................................291
Snap to orthogonal points in a drawing........................................................................... 291
Free snapping.......................................................................................................................293
Place a sketch object at a specified distance................................................................... 293
4.10 Drag, reshape and resize drawing objects................................................. 296
4.11 Change the shape of leader lines................................................................ 298
4.12 Indicate cut lines in Tekla Structures drawings........................................ 298
Create cut lines.................................................................................................................... 299
Update cut lines................................................................................................................... 299
Delete cut lines.................................................................................................................... 300
4.13 Explode drawing plug-ins and use them as normal objects.....................300
4.14 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects............................................. 301
Draw sketch objects in drawings....................................................................................... 301
Combine and explode sketch objects in drawings.......................................................... 305
Re-order sketch objects in drawings................................................................................. 306
Create and add pattern lines in drawings........................................................................ 307
Create a pattern line...................................................................................................... 308
Add a pattern line in a drawing.................................................................................... 312
Pattern line elements.....................................................................................................313
Trim drawing lines............................................................................................................... 314
Split sketch objects.............................................................................................................. 316
Divide sketch objects...........................................................................................................316
Copy sketch objects with offset......................................................................................... 317
Create fillets in drawings.................................................................................................... 318
Create chamfers in drawings............................................................................................. 319
Hide part face areas and outlines with cover-up tools................................................... 321
4.15 Building objects in drawings........................................................................ 324
Modify building object properties..................................................................................... 324

6
 Shorten parts view by view.................................................................................................325
Edge chamfers in drawings................................................................................................ 327
Show edge chamfers in a drawing............................................................................... 327
Define default line color and type for edge chamfers...............................................328
Change edge chamfer line color and type manually................................................. 329
Add associative notes to edge chamfers.....................................................................329
Example: Edge chamfers............................................................................................... 330
Fillet edges in drawings.......................................................................................................332
Show fillet edges in drawings....................................................................................... 332
Examples......................................................................................................................... 333
4.16 2D Library in drawings..................................................................................335
Open and view 2D Library.................................................................................................. 336
Insert a detail to a drawing from 2D Library.................................................................... 338
Create a new detail in 2D Library.......................................................................................340
Create a new folder in 2D Library and copy/move to the folder................................... 342
Modify detail properties in 2D Library.............................................................................. 342
Explode a detail................................................................................................................... 344
Update objects in a detail................................................................................................... 344
Explode symbols included in details................................................................................. 345
Insert a .dwg file to a drawing from 2D Library............................................................... 345
Insert an image to a drawing from 2D Library................................................................. 345
4.17 Welds in drawings......................................................................................... 346
Examples: Model welds in drawings................................................................................. 349
Modify model weld mark visibility and appearance in a drawing................................. 355
Modify model weld object representation and appearance in a drawing....................357
Drag weld marks..................................................................................................................359
Add manual weld marks in drawings................................................................................361
Add manual drawing weld marks.................................................................................361
Add manual model weld marks................................................................................... 362
Customize weld type symbols ..........................................................................................362
Example: Weld marks added in drawings........................................................................ 364
Merge weld marks............................................................................................................... 366
4.18 Custom presentations in drawings............................................................. 367
4.19 Reinforcement in drawings..........................................................................369
Show a single reinforcing bar in a group ........................................................................ 369
Adjust the location of a single reinforcing bar............................................................370
Show layer information on reinforcing bars in drawings............................................... 370
Add reinforcement marks manually................................................................................. 372
Add reinforcement marks with Rebar group marking application................................372
Mark rebar groups......................................................................................................... 372
Rebar group marking settings...................................................................................... 374
Draw rebar pull-out pictures with Draw rebar pull-outs application............................ 392
Draw pull-out pictures................................................................................................... 392
Draw rebar pull-out pictures with Rebar pull-out picture and marking application .. 395
Create rebar pull-out pictures and marks...................................................................395
Rebar pull-out picture and marking settings.............................................................. 397
Add dimensions to rebars.................................................................................................. 413
Add dimension marks or dimension tags to rebar groups....................................... 413
Add dimension lines to rebar groups.......................................................................... 414
Predefined reinforcement dimension settings in the Options dialog box..............416
Examples of rebar dimensions..................................................................................... 418
Dimension rebars with Rebar group dimensioning application....................................422
Add dimensions to rebar groups................................................................................. 422
Rebar group dimensioning settings.............................................................................426

7
 More examples............................................................................................................... 454
Create a drawing view for a reinforcement mesh........................................................... 456
4.20 Spiral beams in drawings............................................................................. 459
Dimension spiral beams..................................................................................................... 460
Spiral beam part marks...................................................................................................... 461
Examples of spiral beam dimensions and marks............................................................463
4.21 Pours in drawings..........................................................................................464
Modify pour objects, pour marks and pour breaks in a drawing.................................. 466
Change the pour break symbol......................................................................................... 467
Examples of pour drawings and pour reports ............................................................... 468
4.22 Grids in drawings...........................................................................................469
Modify grid and grid line properties in drawings............................................................ 469
Customize drawing grid labels...........................................................................................470
Modify grid model properties.......................................................................................470
Customize drawing grid labels..................................................................................... 472
Customize a grid label on a single grid line................................................................ 474
Modify custom grid labels............................................................................................. 474
Customize grid labels only at one end of a grid line..................................................474
Add different customized grid labels on horizontal and vertical grid lines............ 476
Use model grid coordinates and prefix as text on grid axis in a drawing .............. 478
Limitations.......................................................................................................................481
Drag grid labels.................................................................................................................... 482
Hide grids or grid lines........................................................................................................482
4.23 Symbols in drawings..................................................................................... 482
Change a symbol in a symbol file...................................................................................... 485
Create a new symbol file.....................................................................................................486
Change the symbol file in use............................................................................................ 486
Add symbols in drawings....................................................................................................487
Customize leader line arrows.............................................................................................487
Modify symbol properties.................................................................................................. 489
Moment connection symbols in Tekla Structures drawings (Drawing tools)............... 490
Create moment connection symbols (Drawing tools)............................................... 490
Update moment connection symbols (Drawing tools).............................................. 492
Delete moment connection symbols (Drawing tools)............................................... 493
Add surfacing symbols in drawings...................................................................................493
Define a firm folder for images and symbols.................................................................. 494
4.24 Colors in drawings.........................................................................................495
Change drawing color......................................................................................................... 498
Specify a special color in drawings.................................................................................... 500
4.25 Reference models in drawings.....................................................................501
Show reference models in drawings................................................................................. 501
4.26 User coordinate system (UCS)..................................................................... 504
Set a new UCS...................................................................................................................... 505
Toggle between two user coordinate systems.................................................................506
Reset UCS............................................................................................................................. 506
4.27 Save a drawing...............................................................................................507
4.28 Delete unnecessary drawing files in single-user mode............................ 507

5 Manage drawings.......................................................................509
5.1 Update drawings when the model changes...............................................509
5.2 Lock drawings................................................................................................ 511

8
5.3 Freeze drawings.............................................................................................511
Freeze general arrangement drawings............................................................................. 512
Freeze single-part, cast unit and assembly drawings......................................................512
How freezing affects drawings........................................................................................... 513
5.4 Mark drawings ready for issuing................................................................. 513
5.5 Issue drawings............................................................................................... 514
5.6 Revise drawings............................................................................................. 515
Create drawing revisions.................................................................................................... 515
Change drawing revisions...................................................................................................516
Delete drawing revisions.................................................................................................... 516
Attributes used in drawing revisioning............................................................................. 517
5.7 Delete drawings.............................................................................................518

6 Print drawings............................................................................519
6.1 Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer................................................ 520
Line thickness in drawings .................................................................................................527
6.2 Printing settings and search order .............................................................530
6.3 Configuration files used in printing............................................................ 531
6.4 Add frames and fold marks in printouts.................................................... 532
6.5 Customize print output file names............................................................. 534

7 Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer instances

(old printing).............................................................................. 537
7.1 Print single drawings.................................................................................... 539
Example: Print on A4 in landscape.................................................................................... 540
Example: Print on A3 in portrait........................................................................................ 541
Example: Print A3 drawing on A4 paper........................................................................... 542
7.2 Print multiple drawings with different sizes in one go............................ 543
7.3 Create .pdf files............................................................................................. 543
7.4 Print to file..................................................................................................... 544
7.5 Customize print file names.......................................................................... 545
Switches for customizing print file names........................................................................546
7.6 Print to multiple sheets................................................................................548
7.7 Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box.......................................... 549
7.8 Frames and fold marks in drawings............................................................551
Add frames and fold marks in printouts.......................................................................... 552
7.9 Set up printer instances in Printer Catalog............................................... 554
Add a printer instance.........................................................................................................554
Add a print-to-file instance................................................................................................. 555
Add an Adobe postscript printer instance........................................................................557
Define printing paper size and print area h*b.................................................................557
Line thickness (pen number) in Color Table..................................................................... 559
Change the pen numbers (line thickness) for colors................................................. 559
7.10 Printing tips................................................................................................... 560

8 Define automatic drawing settings......................................... 563

8.1 Define drawing layout.................................................................................. 568

9
 Tables in drawing layout..................................................................................................... 570
Table layouts........................................................................................................................ 571
Create a new drawing layout, add table layouts and tables..................................... 573
Modify drawing table layouts through Layout dialog box.........................................579
Edit the table layout directly on a drawing....................................................................... 584
Direct table layout editing vs layout editing through the old Layout dialog box... 585
Start direct table layout editing.................................................................................... 585
Edit table layout..............................................................................................................588
Add new tables, DWG/DXFs and key plans in the table layout................................. 590
Anchor tables..................................................................................................................592
Save table layout............................................................................................................ 594
Add a drawing layout to a drawing.............................................................................. 595
Disable template and table layout editing.................................................................. 595
Select a new layout for your drawing................................................................................596
Edit tables in Template Editor............................................................................................ 596
8.2 Define drawing size and drawing view scale............................................. 598
Set exact drawing view scale and automatic drawing size............................................. 599
Set exact drawing size and automatic drawing view scale............................................. 600
Autoscale and autosize drawings...................................................................................... 602
8.3 Define object protection and placement settings in drawings............... 603
Protected areas in drawings...............................................................................................605
Protect areas in a drawing..................................................................................................607
Define automatic placement settings for marks............................................................. 608
Define placement settings for dimensions...................................................................... 610
Define automatic free or fixed placement for drawing views........................................611
8.4 Define drawing views....................................................................................612
Define the views to create in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings................613
Define automatic view settings for general arrangement drawings............................. 615
Define view labels and view label marks.......................................................................... 616
Set drawing view projection type.......................................................................................618
Include single-part drawings in assembly drawings....................................................... 620
Part orientation in drawing views ....................................................................................621
Change the coordinate system.....................................................................................622
Rotate parts in drawing views.......................................................................................624
Select the steel or timber part face that is shown in front drawing view................626
Set viewing direction for parts in assembly drawings............................................... 627
Change plate orientation in drawings ....................................................................... 628
Show neighbor parts in views............................................................................................ 630
Shorten or lengthen parts.................................................................................................. 632
Shorten a part in the model..........................................................................................633
Lengthen a part in the model....................................................................................... 633
Shorten parts in drawing views.................................................................................... 634
Lengthen shortened parts in drawing views...............................................................637
Unfold polybeams in drawings.......................................................................................... 637
Undeform deformed parts in drawings............................................................................638
Show part openings and recesses in drawings................................................................639
Define automatic section view properties........................................................................642
Examples of section view and mark settings.............................................................. 644
Show section and end view direction marks in drawings......................................... 645
Define the location for end views and section views.................................................647
8.5 Define dimensioning.....................................................................................649
Automatic view-level dimensions...................................................................................... 651
Add automatic view-level dimensions.............................................................................. 655
Define the drawing properties file............................................................................... 655

10
 Define the drawing views to be created...................................................................... 656
Define view dimensions................................................................................................ 657
Connect view properties to views and save drawing properties..............................660
Example workflow: Create automatic overall and hole dimensions on view level......661
Dimensioning rule properties............................................................................................ 670
Create a drawing view filter for view-level dimensioning............................................... 678
Create a filter for holes and recesses.......................................................................... 680
Create a filter for the main part of an assembly........................................................ 681
Create an exclude filter for dimension tag..................................................................682
Create an exclude filter for stirrups in section views.................................................682
Dimensioning method of shapes, holes and recesses ................................................. 683
Various scenarios of using different dimensioning types.............................................. 687
Example: Use both view-level dimensioning and integrated dimensioning........... 688
Example: Use only view-level dimensioning............................................................... 688
Example: Use only integrated dimensioning.............................................................. 689
Examples: Dimensions created with view-level dimensioning...................................... 691
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated...........697
Group identical objects to the same dimension line ............................................... 699
Add elevation dimensions.............................................................................................700
Check dimensions.......................................................................................................... 702
Example: Part dimensioning......................................................................................... 705
Example: Bolt dimensioning......................................................................................... 707
Example: Position dimensioning.................................................................................. 708
Example: Closing dimension.........................................................................................713
Example: Combine dimensions.................................................................................... 715
Example: Combine bolt group dimensions.................................................................717
Example: Forward offset............................................................................................... 718
Example: Grid dimensions............................................................................................ 719
Example: Recognizable distance ................................................................................. 719
Example: Preferred dimension side ............................................................................720
Example: Reinforcement dimension............................................................................721
Add automatic dual dimensions........................................................................................722
Add dimensions to unfolded parts....................................................................................723
Add minimum and maximum position dimensions to bolts ....................................... 725
Create dimension line extensions..................................................................................... 725
Change the appearance of absolute dimensions............................................................726
Create exaggerated dimensions........................................................................................ 726
Change the prefix in radial dimensions............................................................................ 728
Add dimensions to plates................................................................................................... 729
Add dimensions to profiles................................................................................................ 733
Sloped dimension texts...................................................................................................... 735
Add automatic dimensions to general arrangement drawings..................................... 736
Object groups in dimensioning general arrangement drawings..............................736
Dimension object groups on different dimension lines............................................ 737
Example: Grid and overall dimensions........................................................................ 739
Example: Maximum leader line length options..........................................................740
Example: Dimension parts partly outside the view................................................... 742
Example: Limit the number of outside dimensions...................................................742
Example: Position part dimensions............................................................................. 743
Example: Dimension anchor bolt plans.......................................................................748
8.6 Define marks................................................................................................. 752
Add automatic marks..........................................................................................................754
Adjust the visibility of automatic marks............................................................................756
Adjust text, frames and leader lines of automatic marks ..............................................760
Adjust part mark leader lines with advanced options............................................... 761

11
 Place reinforcement mark leader line base point automatically............................. 762
Mark location....................................................................................................................... 763
Set a predefined location for beam, bracing and column marks.............................764
How leader line type affects part mark and surface treatment mark location...... 765
How merging affects reinforcing bar group mark location.......................................766
How leader line type affects reinforcement mark location...................................... 767
Merge marks automatically................................................................................................767
Merged part marks........................................................................................................ 768
Merge part marks automatically.................................................................................. 770
Merged reinforcement marks.......................................................................................770
Merge reinforcement marks automatically................................................................ 771
Show mark frames and leader lines for hidden parts.................................................... 773
Change unit settings for marks..........................................................................................774
Add attributes in automatic marks ..................................................................................776
Add level attributes in automatic part marks.................................................................. 777
Add templates in marks......................................................................................................780
Example 1: Create a mark template containing separate value fields and text
elements..........................................................................................................................................782
Example 2: Create a mark template containing a formula in the value field......... 784
Add symbols in automatic marks...................................................................................... 786
Define size in bolt marks using advanced options..........................................................786
Add pull-out pictures in automatic reinforcement marks.............................................. 789
8.7 Define drawing grids.....................................................................................791
Define automatic grid properties...................................................................................... 793
8.8 Define drawing parts and neighbor parts.................................................. 793
Define automatic drawing part properties.......................................................................794
Example: Part representations.......................................................................................... 795
Define automatic neighbor part properties..................................................................... 797
Indicate part orientation.....................................................................................................797
Use part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement drawings............. 798
Show compass direction in part marks....................................................................... 800
Show orientation marks (north marks)....................................................................... 801
Show connecting side marks........................................................................................ 803
8.9 Define drawing bolts.....................................................................................804
Define automatic bolt properties in drawings................................................................. 805
Create customized bolt symbols....................................................................................... 805
Example: Bolt representations...........................................................................................806
8.10 Define hatches in drawings..........................................................................807
Add hatches (fills) to parts and sketch objects in drawings........................................... 809
Hatch pattern settings (.htc) for automatic drawing hatches........................................ 812
Example: Insulation hatch patterns.................................................................................. 814
8.11 Define drawing surface treatment............................................................. 815
Define automatic surface treatment in drawings............................................................816
8.12 Define drawing welds................................................................................... 817
Define automatic model weld properties in drawings....................................................818
8.13 Define drawing pours .................................................................................. 819
Show pour objects, pour marks and pour breaks in drawings......................................819
8.14 Define drawing reinforcement and meshes.............................................. 820
Define automatic reinforcement and reinforcement mesh properties........................821
Example: Hide reinforcing bar lines in drawings............................................................. 822
Example: Reinforcement representations........................................................................823
Automatic grouping of rebar sets for drawings...............................................................824

12
8.15 Units and decimals in drawings, reports and templates .........................826
8.16 User-defined attributes in drawings...........................................................827
Modify automatic user-defined drawing attributes........................................................ 828
Create a new user-defined drawing attribute.................................................................. 829
8.17 Define customized line types in TeklaStructures.lin................................ 832

9 Drawing settings reference...................................................... 835

9.1 General arrangement drawing properties................................................. 836
9.2 Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawing properties..........................839
9.3 Layout properties..........................................................................................841
9.4 View properties in drawings ....................................................................... 844
9.5 Section view properties................................................................................ 849
9.6 Dimension and dimensioning properties...................................................850
Dimension properties - General tab..................................................................................851
Dimension properties - Units, precision and format...................................................... 855
Dimension properties - Appearance tab.......................................................................... 856
Dimension properties - Marks and Tags tabs.................................................................. 858
Dimensioning properties - General tab (Integrated dimensioning).............................. 861
Dimensioning properties - Position dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning).........865
Dimensioning properties - Part dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)............... 868
Dimensioning properties - Bolt dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)................870
Dimensioning properties - Dimension grouping tab (Integrated dimensioning) ...... 871
Dimensioning properties - Sub-assemblies tab (Integrated dimensioning).................872
Dimensioning properties - Reinforcement dimensions tab (Integrated
dimensioning)...................................................................................................................... 874
Dimensioning properties - Grid tab (GA drawings)......................................................... 874
Dimensioning properties - Parts tab (GA drawings)........................................................875
9.7 Mark properties.............................................................................................877
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs............................ 878
Leader line types................................................................................................................. 883
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks..................................... 885
Drawing weld mark properties.......................................................................................... 885
Model weld mark visibility and appearance properties in drawings............................ 888
Level mark properties......................................................................................................... 891
9.8 Mark elements...............................................................................................893
Common elements in marks..............................................................................................893
Part mark elements.............................................................................................................894
Bolt mark elements............................................................................................................. 896
Reinforcement and neighbor reinforcement mark elements........................................898
Reinforcement and neighbor reinforcement mesh mark elements............................. 899
Elements in merged reinforcement marks...................................................................... 900
Connection mark elements................................................................................................ 901
Pour object mark elements .............................................................................................. 902
Surface treatment mark elements.................................................................................... 902
Section and detail mark elements.....................................................................................903
View, section view and detail view label mark elements................................................ 904
9.9 Part and neighbor part properties in drawings.........................................904
9.10 Bolt content and appearance properties in drawings.............................. 909
9.11 Surface treatment visibility and content properties in drawings...........910
9.12 Surface treatment hatch pattern properties (surfacing.htc).................. 911

13
9.13 Reinforcement/Neighbor reinforcement and mesh properties in
drawings......................................................................................................... 913
9.14 Reinforcement settings for drawings (rebar_config.inp) .........................916
9.15 Pour object and pour break properties in drawings................................. 923
9.16 Placement properties for marks, dimensions, notes, texts and
symbols...........................................................................................................925
9.17 Model weld properties in drawings.............................................................927
9.18 Drawing sketch object properties............................................................... 929
9.19 Drawing grid properties............................................................................... 930

10 Disclaimer...................................................................................933

14
1 Drawings in Tekla Structures

Tekla Structures drawings contain a large variety of features and tools that
help you to create and manage your drawings efficiently.

• The model is the single source of information for drawings. The drawing is
just another view to the model, usually a 2D view. This ensures that the
information in drawings and reports is always up-to-date.
• Creating drawings is fast, efficient and controlled thanks to one centralized
location, Master drawing catalog.
• Automatic workshop single-part and assembly drawings, and cast unit
drawings of selected parts with predefined settings for layout, views,
dimensions, marks, and building objects. View properties are defined
separately for each view before a drawing is created.
• Automatic general arrangement drawings and anchor bolt plans of selected
views.
• Drawing objects are associated with model objects, and updated when the
model changes.
• Changing some of the properties requires the recreation of the drawings.
• If there are several identical parts, cast units or assemblies in the model,
Tekla Structures creates only one drawing.
• You can modify drawing properties on three levels; drawing, view and
object level, depending on the drawing type and the desired results.
• The drawings consist of three main types of elements: drawing layout,
drawing views, and drawing objects. You can select what to include in the
drawing before you create it, and also add necessary objects in an existing
drawing.
• You can check previews of the drawings and print your drawings to pdf,
printer or plot file.
• You can control drawing revisions, and issue, lock, and freeze drawings.
• You can use interactive editing tools for adding dimensions, various sketch
objects, marks, notes, texts, symbols, images and links in the drawings.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 15

 To Click the links below to find out
more
Check the controls available in Drawing mode in Tekla Structures
drawing mode (page 19)
Find out how the drawings are Drawings integrated with models
integrated to the model and what the (page 17)
integration means
Find out what drawing associativity Drawing associativity (page 17)
means
Find out what happens when a How to keep your drawings up to
drawing needs to be updated date? (page 23)
Learn where you can change the Different levels of setting up and
drawing properties and in which modifying drawing properties
order (page 23)
Find out the cases when a drawing Settings affecting the recreation of
needs to be updated drawings (page 41)
Find out what the drawing consists of Drawing layout and views (page 20)
Find out what kind of objects there Drawing objects (page 21)
are in drawings
Check the different drawing types Create drawings in Tekla Structures
available and learn how to create (page 43)
them using different methods
Create drawings by cloning, and find Clone drawings (page 115)
out the situations when cloning is the
best choice
Find the drawings that you need using Search for and open drawings
searching and filtering in Drawing List, (page 127)
select drawings, and open drawings
Edit your drawings manually: add Edit drawings (page 143)
objects, modify properties, etc.
Update drawings when the model Manage drawings (page 509)
changes, lock drawings, freeze
drawings, issue drawings, revise
drawings, and delete drawings
Print drawings as PDF files, save them Print drawings (page 519)
as plot files (.plt) for printing with
printer/plotter, or print them on a
selected printer
Set up and modify automatic drawing Define automatic drawing settings
settings (page 563)
Define drawing views (page 612)
Check the available drawing Drawing settings reference (page 835)
properties and setting

Drawings in Tekla Structures 16

1.1 Drawings integrated with models
Tekla Structures integrates the drawings with the model. A drawing is a
window to the model presenting 3D structures in 2D. The building objects
shown in the drawing are model objects you create in the model. You can
change their representation in the drawing but you cannot change the
geometry or the location of the building object, or delete building objects; all
changes to building objects are made in the model. That is why the drawings
are always up-to-date. For example, dimensions and marks in drawings are
always correct. You can filter out parts and bolts in drawings using the filtering
tools, or make them invisible by hiding them.
You can create drawings at any stage of the project. Creating single-part,
assembly and cast unit drawings requires that the model is numbered, so you
need to plan and perform the numbering before creating drawings.
If the model changes, Tekla Structures notifies in the Drawing list that you
need to update the related drawings. You cannot open a drawing that is not
up-to-date.

See also
Numbering the model
Update drawings when the model changes (page 509)

1.2 Drawing associativity

Tekla Structures drawings are associative. The objects in the drawing are linked
to model objects, which means that most objects in the drawing are
automatically updated when the corresponding model objects change. For
example, if a model object is resized, the dimension points move with the
corresponding object in the drawing, and the dimensions are recalculated. Still
you do not lose any manual changes that you have made in the drawing. This
applies to all drawing types.
Tekla Structures updates the following drawing objects to reflect the changes
in the model:
• Parts
• Marks
• Dimensions
• Welds
• Views

Drawings in Tekla Structures 17 Drawings integrated with models

• Section marks
• Detail marks
• Associative notes
• Lines and other shapes
• Tables
Tekla Structures retains the following manual changes made to drawings:
• Base points of objects; for example, if you drag an object to a new location
• Object properties; for example, color, font, and line type
Advanced options related to associativity
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL
XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES

See also
Associativity symbol (page 18)

Associativity symbol
In drawings, the associativity symbol indicates which drawing objects are
associative and automatically updated. Associativity symbols are shown only
when you select a drawing object, for example, a dimension.

Objects that do not have valid association get a ghost associativity symbol and
a question mark. These symbols are shown constantly, even though the
drawing object is not selected. This makes it easier to find objects that need
attention.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 18 Drawing associativity

 The associativity symbols are not shown in printed drawings.

TIP To hide associativity symbols in drawing views, on the File menu, select
Settings --> Associativity symbol (Shift+A).

1.3 Drawing mode in Tekla Structures

When you open a drawing, Tekla Structures activates the drawing mode. The
ribbon and tabs for the modeling mode are replaced by those of the drawing
mode. The model views remain on the screen in the background. When you
close the drawing (page 141), you automatically return to the modeling mode.
The following image identifies the locations of the controls in the a drawings
window:

Drawings in Tekla Structures 19 Drawing mode in Tekla Structures

 (1) The File menu contains commands that can be used in the drawing mode.
(2) The ribbon and the tabs mostly contain commands available only for
drawings, some commands are common with the modeling mode.
(3) Quick Launch for searching drawing-related commands.
(4) The side pane gives access to macros and other applications that are
available in drawings in the Applications & components catalog. The 2D
Library for drawings is also located in the side pane.
(5) Snap switches control which points you can snap to and pick.
(6) With selection switches you can scale down the amount of selectable
objects.

1.4 Drawing layout and views

A Tekla Structures drawing consists of two types of basic elements:
• A drawing layout (page 568) defines the drawing size and the included
tables, such as revision tables, title blocks, material lists, bills of material,
general notes, key plans and DWG files. Tekla Structures has a range of
predefined layouts, and you can also create layouts of your own. The tables

Drawings in Tekla Structures 20 Drawing layout and views

 included in your drawing are those included in the layout you have chosen
to use.
• Drawing views (page 145) are views to the whole model, to a part of the
model or to individual parts in the model. Views can show building objects
from different directions (top, front, back, bottom) and cross sections.
Drawing views act as containers for the building objects or areas in the
model that you have selected to be included in the drawing.
Below is an example of the drawing layout and views in a workshop drawing.

1. Top view to a part. Here you have selected to include the top view
(page 613) in the View creation pane.
2. Front view to a part. Here you have selected to include the front view
(page 613) in the View creation pane.
3. Material list. This is defined in your drawing layout.
4. Drawing title block. This is defined in your drawing layout.

See also
Drawings in Tekla Structures (page 15)

Drawings in Tekla Structures 21 Drawing objects

1.5 Drawing objects
Drawing views may contain several types of objects. Some of them come from
the model and represent something that will exist in the real building or will be
closely related to it. Others are objects that represent information that is only
relevant in the drawing, or add extra information to the information in the
model. Drawings may include the following object types:
• Building objects (page 324): parts, bolts, welds, chamfers, reinforcing bars,
surface treatment, etc.
• Associative annotation objects (page 243): dimensions, marks, associative
notes.
• Independent annotation objects (page 243): objects that are not linked to
the model: text, .rtf files, symbols, links, hyperlinks, DWG/DXF files, and
reference models. These objects become associative if they have
associativity points, i.e. they are associated to building objects.
• Sketch objects (page 300): graphical objects you create using the various
sketching tools. These objects can be used for highlighting parts of the
drawing (clouds, lines, rectangles, etc.), for example. These object are
associative if they have associativity points, i.e. they are associated to
building objects.

1. Sketch objects: clouds and rectangles

Drawings in Tekla Structures 22 Drawing objects

 2. Dimensions
3. Marks, associative notes
4. Building objects

1.6 How to keep your drawings up to date?

When a model changes, the related drawings need to be updated. Tekla
Structures takes care of updating and notifies you if updating is needed.

WARNING When you start using a newer version of Tekla Structures, updating
drawings created with the older version may cause problems. We
recommend that you complete any drawings you have started using the
older version, or recreate the drawings using your new version of Tekla
Structures.

You need to update drawings when:

• The geometry of a model object changes.
• Some other model object properties, for example, material and class
change.
• Model objects are added or deleted.
• The number of identical model objects changes.
Tekla Structures automatically updates drawings each time you number the
model. If you have not numbered the model, you are prompted to do so when
you create a drawing. Furthermore, if you have changed the model and go to
the Drawing list to open drawings, Tekla Structures has marked the outdated
drawings, and you need to update them before you can open them.
General arrangement drawings are always updated when you open them if the
model has changed. You do not need to number the model to update general
arrangement drawings.

Click the following links to find out more about drawing update, when
recreation is needed, and how the drawings are numbered:
Update drawings when the model changes (page 509)
Settings affecting the recreation of drawings (page 41)
Numbering the model

Drawings in Tekla Structures 23 How to keep your drawings up to date?

1.7 Different levels of setting up and modifying drawing
properties
In Tekla Structures, you can set up and change drawings and drawing
properties on different levels, depending on how permanent and extensive
changes are needed. You can change drawings on drawing, view and object
level.

Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings

• On the highest level, you can define drawing properties on drawing level:
• Some of the drawing-specific properties that you define in the Drawing
properties dialog box apply to the whole drawing: protection settings,
user-defined attributes for the drawing, detail view start number/letter,
drawing-specific section view settings, some drawing-specific view
attributes, drawing titles and drawing layout settings.
• On the drawing level, you can also select the views that you want to
create, and set view, dimensioning, building object and mark settings
separately for each view by going further to the View properties
dialog box for the selected view. For example, you can define that all
marks have blue frame in one view, or that model weld marks are
shown in another view. It is very important to save the view-level
properties files in the View properties dialog box to be able to connect
the desired view properties to the views that you select to create.
• You can modify the drawing level properties before you create the
drawing and also change them in the created drawing.
• You can also change drawing properties in single-part, assembly and cast
unit drawings on view level:
• Double-click a view frame in an open drawing, which opens the View
properties dialog box.
• Change an object property. The change takes place only in the views
that you have selected in an open drawing.
• The object properties change in all objects of the particular type in the
selected views. For example, if you change the mark line color, the mark
line changes in all marks in the selected views.
• Finally, you can change drawing properties on object level:
• Double-click an object in an open drawing, which opens an object-
specific property dialog box.
• Properties change for the selected object only.
• The properties changed on the object level are no longer affected by
any property changes on higher levels.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 24 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
General arrangement drawings
• On the highest level, you can change general arrangement drawing
properties on drawing level Drawing properties dialog box and its
subdialog boxes:
• This way you can change the properties of all building objects, marks,
dimensions, and views in the drawing at the same time. For example,
you can define that all marks have blue frame.
• You can modify the drawing properties before you create the drawing
and also change them in the created drawing.
• The object properties change in all views and objects in that drawing,
except for new views that you create after the drawing is created.
• You can also change general arrangement drawing properties on view level:
• Double-click a view frame in an open drawing, which opens the View
properties dialog box.
• The changes take place only in the views that you have selected in an
open drawing.
• The object properties change in all objects of the particular type in the
selected views. For example, if you change the mark line colort, the
mark line changes in all marks in the selected views.
• Finally, you can change drawing properties on object level:
• Double-click an object in an open drawing, which opens an object-
specific property dialog box.
• Properties change for the selected object only.
• The properties changed on the object level are no longer affected by
any property changes on higher levels.

Detailed object level properties

By saving the object property settings and combining them with drawing or
view filters and drawing object types into detailed object level settings, you can
also apply the object level properties on the drawing and view level. Note that
detailed object levels properties on drawing level are available only in general
arrangement drawings. Object level settings are a powerful tool: you can use
the same property file for creating drawings and quickly change a particular
property before you create drawings, for example, reinforcement color or
mark frame shape. The object level settings override the property settings in
the view and drawing property dialog boxes. Changes in the object level
settings applied on the drawing level are inherited to the view level if there are
no object level settings defined on the view level. If you apply object level
settings on the view level, they override the drawing level settings.

Recommended workflow
The recommended way of working is to work from top to bottom, from
drawing level to object level:

Drawings in Tekla Structures 25 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
1. Set your drawing and automatic drawing view properties as close as
possible to what you want by first attempting this on the drawing level.
2. Then modify anything else that needs to be changed on the view level.
3. Finally, if any further cleanup is necessary, you can make changes on the
individual object level.
The modifications made on the drawing level remain when the drawing is
recreated due to a model change.
Once you change properties on the view level you should not go to the
drawing level properties and modify drawing properties there. This is because
once you have changed a setting at one level, changing the same setting on
the level above may for some settings negate the changes you have just made.

Example workflow
The following image illustrates the idea of the three property levels. The frame
color and the shape of the mark are used as an example.

1. You change the mark frame color and shape for the whole drawing on the
drawing level. The changes propagate to the view level and to the object
level.
2. You change the mark frame color and shape in the selected views. The
changes take place in the selected views only. The properties do not
change in the whole drawing.
Note that if you change the frame color and shape on the drawing level
after changing them on the view level for some of the views, the drawing
level changes override the view level changes in all views. View settings
behave differently: they are not overridden, for example, the view scale
stays as you have set it for individual views.
3. You change the mark frame color and shape in the selected marks. The
properties do not change anywhere else. If you try to change the mark
frame color and shape on the view or drawing level, the properties do not
change in the marks that you changed separately.

Click the following links to find out more:

Set automatic drawing properties before creating drawings (page 27)

Drawings in Tekla Structures 26 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
Modify drawing properties of an existing drawing (page 29)
Modify view-level drawing properties (page 28)
Modify drawing object properties (page 30)
Modify drawing object properties (page 30)
Detailed object level settings (page 31)
How Tekla Structures applies drawing properties in drawing creation
(page 40)
Settings affecting the recreation of drawings (page 41)
Prevent automatic drawing updates and recreation (page 42)

Set automatic drawing properties before creating drawings

Tekla Structures creates drawings using the automatic drawing properties
defined separately for each type of drawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. If possible, load drawing properties closest to the ones you need by
selecting a properties file from the list at the top.
In general arrangement drawing properties, you need to click Load.
3. Do one the following, depending on the type of the drawing:
Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings:
a. Go through the various properties in the options tree and adjust the
values as requires.
The check boxes next to the options are automatically selected when
you change something for that particular option.
b. To save properties, for example, protection properties for future use,
give a unique name for the properties in the Save box and click Save.
Note that you should not include spaces or special characters in the
name.
c. To adjust view-level settings (views, dimensions, marks and objects),
click View creation, select the desired view and view properties file,
and then click View properties.
d. Adjust the properties for the selected view as required.
e. To save properties, for example, part properties for future use, give a
unique name for the properties in the Save box and click Save. Note
that you should not include spaces or special characters in the name.
f. Click Save in View Properties to save the properties in the view
properties file, when you are done.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 27 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
 g. Click OK in View Properties to return to the drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings:
a. Switch off the all the check boxes by clicking the on/off switch at the

bottom and only select the check boxes for the options that
you wish to change.
b. Go through the various properties in the drawing properties dialog
box, and make the necessary changes.
c. Click OK in each subdialog box where you changed the properties to
save the changes and to return to drawing properties.
d. To save properties, for example, part properties, for future use, give a
unique name for the properties in the Save as box and click Save as.
Note that you should not include spaces or special characters in the
name.
4. Click OK to save the properties.
If you want to save the changes in another drawing properties file, enter
the new name.
Note that you should not use spaces in the properties file name, this may
cause problems. For example, when you use the drawing properties file in
a rule set in the Master Drawing Catalog, the drawings are not created if
the properties file name contains spaces.
In general arrangement drawing properties, click Save as.

Now you can create a drawing using the drawing properties file that you just
set up.

Modify view-level drawing properties

You can modify the view-level drawing properties after you have created the
drawing. Most of the properties that a single-part, assembly and cast unit
drawing have are specified for each of the drawing views separately already
before creating a drawing in the automatic drawing properties. General
arrangement drawings do not have automatic view properties, and the view
properties can only be modified in an open drawing.

The changes you make in view properties apply only to the view that you have
selected to modify.
1. Open the drawing.
2. Double-click a drawing view frame to open the drawing view properties
dialog box.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 28 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
3. The check boxes in the options tree are off by default. When you touch a
property, for example, select an option in the panel, Tekla Structures adds
a check mark to the check box next to the option in the option tree.
4. Make the necessary changes.
5. Click Modify when you are ready with the changes.

The view changes according to the changes that you made in the drawing view
properties.

NOTE Some of the changes in you make require a drawing recreation. For more
information, see Settings affecting the recreation of drawings (page 41).

See also
Modify drawing properties of an existing drawing (page 29)

Modify drawing properties of an existing drawing

If you are not satisfied with the drawing properties after creating the drawing
and checking it, you can modify the automatic drawing properties in the
created drawing.
1. Open the drawing.
2. Double-click the drawing background.
3. Do one the following, depending on the type of the drawing:
Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings:
a. Go through the various options in the options tree and adjust the
values as required.
The check boxes next to the options are automatically selected when
you change something for that particular option.
b. To adjust view-level settings (views, dimensions, marks and objects),
click View creation, select the desired view and view properties file
and click View properties.
c. Adjust the view properties as required.
d. Click Save in View Properties to save the properties in the view
properties file, when you are done.
e. Click OK in View Properties to return to the drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings:

a. Switch all the check boxes off by clicking the on/off switch
at the bottom of the dialog box and only select the check boxes for
the options that you wish to change.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 29 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
 b. Go through the various options in the drawing properties dialog box,
and make the necessary changes.
c. Click OK in each subdialog box where you changed the properties to
save the changes and to return to drawing properties.
4. Click Modify.
The drawing is changed according to the changes that you made in the
drawing properties.

NOTE Some of the changes in you make require a drawing recreation. For more
information, see Settings affecting the recreation of drawings (page 41).

TIP You can also modify the properties of several drawings by selecting them from
the Drawing list, right-clicking and selecting Properties...

See also
Modify view-level drawing properties (page 28)

Modify drawing object properties

You can change the properties of the objects in the drawings such as parts,
marks, bolts, and welds, and save the object properties files for later use.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Double-click the object that you want to modify.
For example, double-click a part or a bolt, or a reinforcing bar.
3. Change the desired settings in the property dialog box.
For example, go to the Appearance tab and change the color.
4. In the box next to the Save as button, enter the name for the properties
file and click Save as.
Note that you should not use spaces or special characters in the
properties file names.
5. If you want to apply the change in the object, click Modify. Otherwise,
click Cancel to close the object properties dialog box.

Now you have a new object properties file. You can load the properties in this
file in other drawing objects, in this case, parts. You can also use the object
properties files with filters to apply detailed object level settings.

See also
Load saved drawing object properties (page 31)

Drawings in Tekla Structures 30 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
Load saved drawing object properties
You can change the object properties in an existing drawing, for example the
part color, by loading saved object properties.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Double-click the drawing object you want to change. For example, double-
click a part.
3. Select the desired object properties file from the list next to the Load
button and click Load.

4. Click Modify.

Tekla Structures changes the drawing object according to the settings in the
loaded object properties file.

See also
Modify drawing object properties (page 30)

Detailed object level settings

In addition to defining automatic drawing mark and object properties, you can
also set up a special representation for marks and building objects in drawings
and use these detailed object level settings for specific purposes. For example,
you may want to define that all columns in a specific general arrangement
drawing are shown in a specific color, and in all other general arrangement
drawings in the default part color.
In general arrangement drawings, you can use detailed object level settings on
both drawing and view level. In other drawing types, this setting is view
specific.
To create detailed objects settings, you need to have:
• A filter that selects the objects that you want to be affected
• Object properties that you want to apply on the objects

See also
Create detailed object level settings in a general arrangement drawing
(page 31)
Create detailed object level settings in cast unit drawings (page 36)

Drawings in Tekla Structures 31 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
Create detailed object level settings in a general arrangement drawing
Detailed object level settings combine the desired object properties with
certain object types. You can use detailed object level settings on drawing or
drawing view level.

Before creating the detailed object level settings, create the object properties
that you want to use, and save the properties in a properties file. You can do
this by opening a drawing, double-clicking an object to open the properties,
and then modifying and saving the properties with a new name. For example,
in part properties, set the part color to blue and save the properties.
To create detailed object level settings on drawing level in general
arrangement drawings:
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> GA
drawing .
2. Click Filter and create a drawing filter that selects the objects that you
want to have special representation.
For example, create a filter that selects columns.

3. Save the filter by entering a name for it and click Save as.
4. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
5. In the drawing properties dialog box, click Edit settings.
6. In the Object level settings for drawing/for view dialog box, click Add
row and select the filters to be used, the drawing object types and the
drawing object properties to be used.
By doing this, you are combining the filter, object type, and object
property settings into detailed object level settings.

You can add several rows in detailed object level settings.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 32 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
7. Give the object level settings a name and save using Save as.
Note that you should not include spaces or special characters in the
name.

Now you have new detailed object level settings to be applied on a drawing.

See also
Modify drawing object properties (page 30)
Example: Apply detailed object level settings on drawing level in a GA drawing
(page 33)

Example: Apply detailed object level settings on drawing level in a GA

drawing
In this example, different detailed object level settings will be set up for
various types of building objects, such as beams, columns and braces, in a
general arrangement drawing.

Before doing this, drawing object properties for beams, columns and braces
have been created so that these parts have different colors. For more
information about creating drawing object properties, see Modify drawing
object properties (page 30).
First you will make a general arrangement drawing filter, then save detailed
object level settings in a settings file and finally, apply the new detailed object
level settings on drawing level.
In this example, the filter uses part names defined in the model, similarly as in
modeling filters.
1. On the Drawings & reports, click Drawing properties --> GA drawing .
2. Click Filter in the drawing properties dialog box.
3. Create filters by Part - Name for column, beam, and brace and save the
settings using Save as with different names, such as ts_column,
ts_beam and ts_brace.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 33 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
4. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
Now you have created the required filters needed for selecting the desired
parts.
5. In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click Edit
settings.

6. In the Object level settings for drawing dialog box, select the filters to
be used, the drawing object types and the drawing object properties to be
used:
a. Click Add row and select ts_column as Model object (Drawing
filter), Part as Drawing object type and column as Settings used.
b. Click Add row and select ts_beam as Model object (Drawing filter),
Part as Drawing object type and beam as Settings used.
c. Click Add row and select ts_brace as Model object (Drawing
filter), Part as Drawing object type and brace as Settings used.
7. Save the detailed object level settings as gatype1 using Save as.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 34 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
 The same detailed object level settings can be used in other general
arrangement properties, you do not need to create new ones.
8. Click Cancel to exit the dialog box.
9. Create a general arrangement drawing.
10. Open the created general arrangement drawing and double-click the
drawing background to open the drawing properties.
11. Click Edit settings.
12. Load object level settings you created, in this example gatype1, and click
Load.
13. Click OK.
14. Click Modify to apply the changes in the drawing.
15. Confirm the detailed object level changes by clicking Yes in the on Object
level settings changed! confirmation message box.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 35 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
NOTE If a row in the Object level settings dialog box is shown in red, either the
object properties file defined in the Settings used box, or the filter file
defined in the Model object (Drawing filter) box is missing from the
\attributes folder in the current model folder. See an example below:

See also
Modify drawing object properties (page 30)
Create detailed object level settings in a general arrangement drawing
(page 31)

Create detailed object level settings in cast unit drawings

Detailed object level settings combine the desired object properties with
certain object types. You can use detailed object level settings on drawing or
drawing view level.

Before creating the detailed object level settings, create the object properties
that you want to use, and save the properties in a properties file. For example,
in reinforcement properties, set color to red and save the properties. You
create detailed object level settings in the same way in single-part drawings
and assembly drawings.
To create detailed object level settings on view level:

Drawings in Tekla Structures 36 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
For example, select Cast unit drawing.
2. Click View creation, and click View properties.
3. Click Filter and create a view filter that selects the objects that you want
to have special representation.
For example, create a filter that selects reinforcing bars in class 100 and
101.

4. Save the filter by entering a name for in the box at the top and clicking
Save.
5. Click View properties in the options tree and click Edit settings.
6. In the Object level settings for view dialog box, click Add row and select
the filters to be used, the drawing object types and the drawing object
properties to be used.
By doing this, you are combining the filter, object type, and object
property settings into detailed object level settings.

You can add several rows.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 37 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
7. Give the detailed object level settings a name (here class_100) and save
using Save as.
Note that you should not include spaces or special characters in the
name.

Now you have new detailed object level settings to be applied on a drawing.

See also
Example: Apply detailed object level settings on view level in a cast unit
drawing (page 38)

Example: Apply detailed object level settings on view level in a cast

unit drawing
In this example, detailed object level settings will be set up for lifting anchors
in a cast unit drawing.

Before doing this, drawing object properties for lifting anchors have been
created so that they use different color. For more information about creating
drawing object properties, see Modify drawing object properties (page 30).
First you will make a cast unit drawing view filter, then save detailed object
level settings in a settings file and finally, apply the new detailed object level
settings in a view.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Cast unit
drawing .
2. Click View creation --> View properties .
3. Click Filter in the drawing properties dialog box.

4. Create a filter by Reinforcing bar - Class and enter value 100 101.

5. Save the filter as class100filter and click Save.

Now you have the filter needed for selecting the reinforcing bar.
6. Click View properties in the options tree and click Edit settings.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 38 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
7. In the Object level settings for view dialog box, select the filter to be
used, the drawing object type and the drawing object properties to be
used:
a. Click Add row and select class100filter as Model object
(Drawing filter), Reinforcing bar as Drawing object type and
class100 as Settings used.
8. Save the detailed object level settings as class_100 using Save as.

The same detailed object level settings can be used in other cast unit
drawing properties, you do not need to create new ones.
9. Click Cancel to exit the dialog box.
10. Create a cast unit drawing containing lifting anchors and open the
drawing.
11. Double-click the view frame to open the View properties dialog box.
12. Click Edit settings.
13. Load object level settings you created, in this example class_100, and
click Load.
14. Click OK.
15. Ensure that Use detailed object level settings is set to Yes.
16. Click Modify to apply the changes in the view.
17. Confirm the detailed object level changes by clicking Yes in the on Object
level settings changed! confirmation message box.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 39 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
 The lifting anchors now have a different color, they are red.

NOTE If a row in the Object level settings dialog box is shown in red, either the
object properties file defined in the Settings used box, or the filter file
defined in the Model object (Drawing filter) box is missing from the
\attributes folder in the current model folder. See an example below:

See also
Modify drawing object properties (page 30)
Create detailed object level settings in a general arrangement drawing
(page 31)

How Tekla Structures applies drawing properties in drawing

creation
Tekla Structures generates drawings according to the properties defined for
each drawing type. You define the desired properties before you create the
drawings. The way Tekla Structures connects the properties to the drawing you
create depends on the method you select for creating the drawing.

• If you create the drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using saved
settings, Tekla Structures uses the properties defined in the saved settings
file you select. Saved settings file in the Master Drawing Catalog is the
same thing as the drawing properties file you save in various drawing
properties dialog boxes.
• If you create the drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using a rule set,
Tekla Structures creates the drawing according to the properties defined in
the saved settings file or cloning template file used in the rule set.
• If you create the drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using cloning
templates, Tekla Structures creates the drawing using the properties that
you have defined for the drawing used as a cloning template together with
the manual modifications that you have made in the drawing.
• If you create drawings through Drawings & reports tab using the Create
drawings menu button commands,Tekla Structures uses the current
drawing properties to create the drawings.

Drawings in Tekla Structures 40 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
See also
Define automatic drawing settings (page 563)
Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 75)
Create drawings in Tekla Structures (page 43)
Create general arrangement drawings (page 66)
Create single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings (page 67)

Settings affecting the recreation of drawings

Changing some of the drawing settings requires the drawing to be recreated.
The changes will be applied, and the drawing will be recreated only if and
when you click Modify.

In the View creation panel:

• Coordinate System
• Around X
• Around Y
• Around Z
• Undeformed
• Unfolded
• New views added into the Views list.
If at least one of the above mentioned settings is changed, the Recreate the
drawing option is automatically set to Yes and the drawing will be recreated
when you click Modify. If you manually set Recreate the drawing to Yes, the
drawing will also be recreated. When View creation settings have changed
and drawings will be recreated, you will get a warning message.
In the Section view panel:
• Section depth
• Distance for combining cuts
• Left section
• Middle section
• Right section
If at least one of the above mentioned settings is changed, Tekla Structures
automatically recreates the drawing without giving a warning message when
you click Modify.
If you only want to modify the view properties for one of the created views:

Drawings in Tekla Structures 41 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
• If the changed properties are saved in the same file for all created views,
the only way to modify the properties for one view is to set Recreate the
drawing to Yes.
• If the changed properties are saved in a separate file not used for other
created views, and that file is selected for the changed view in the Views
list, then drawing will only be updated on Modify, not recreated.

See also
Prevent automatic drawing updates and recreation (page 42)
Update drawings when the model changes (page 509)

Prevent automatic drawing updates and recreation

There are some ways you can prevent drawings from being updated and/or
recreated.

• Freeze the drawings where you do not want to update all associative
objects on top of the drawing views. The building objects (parts, bolts,
welds, etc) are always updated in frozen drawings.
• Lock the drawings that you do not want to update.
• If you update a drawing that has not been modified, the drawing is
recreated. Drawings are automatically recreated unless the drawing has
been edited and then saved, or the drawing has been issued using the
Issue functionality in the Drawing list. Use the advanced
XS_RECREATE_UNMODIFIED_DRAWINGS to control the recreation of
unmodified drawings.
• To prevent Tekla Structures from automatically updating drawings if the
model changes, set the advanced option
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED to FALSE.

See also
Settings affecting the recreation of drawings (page 41)
Freeze drawings (page 511)

Drawings in Tekla Structures 42 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
2 Create drawings in Tekla
Structures

Drawing creation is always based on drawing properties, no matter which way

you use to create them. Planning and implementing the most suitable drawing
settings carefully is very important. You can create drawings one by one, in
groups, or you can create all drawings automatically.
Choose the way that meets your needs the best:
• Create drawings using ribbon and pop-up menu commands.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 43 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
 • Create drawings using the various master drawing types in the Master
Drawing Catalog. Using rule sets is a highly automated process of creating
several drawings of different type in one go.

• Clone drawings on the basis of cloning templates in the current model or in

the cloning template models. You can clone drawings in the Master
drawing catalog and in the Drawing list.
• You can increase the level of automation even more by applying detailed
object level settings to all of the above mentioned methods. When the level
of automation increases, the need for manual modifications decreases. We
recommend that you put extra effort in making the automated settings as
effective as possible.
Click the links below to find out more:
• Drawing types (page 45)
• What to do before creating drawings (page 65)
• Create general arrangement drawings (page 66)
• Create single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings (page 67)
• Create multidrawings (page 72)
• Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 75)
• Clone drawings (page 115)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 44 Different levels of setting up and modifying

drawing properties
 • Detailed object level settings (page 31)

2.1 Drawing types

You can create many types of drawings in Tekla Structures according to your
needs.
Click the links below to find out more:
• General arrangement drawings (page 45)
• Single-part drawings (page 52)
• Assembly drawings (page 57)
• Cast unit drawings (page 61)
• Multidrawings (page 64)

General arrangement drawings

A general arrangement drawing (GA drawing) is a contract document, which
records information needed to understand the general arrangement structural
elements on a project. A GA drawing is created in BIM workflows from one or
more model views, with associated schedules and on a project title sheet. This
is the most common form of drawing used by consulting structural engineers
to communicate a structure sufficiently to other legal teams, public
authorities, along with the design, costing and construction teams.
General arrangement drawings show the model from the most suitable
direction. For example, in plan drawings, you are looking from the top of a
building or floor down towards the ground. In elevation drawings you are
looking from one of the sides of the building, like along a grid line. General
arrangement drawings often contain enlarged views of complex areas or
details, and other additional information that helps in the approval process
and during the installation phase.
Create general arrangement drawings when you need
• Several views in one drawing, including the entire model or a part of it
• Plan drawings (foundation, floor, deck layout, and anchor bolt plans)
• Erection elevation drawings
• Information from model views, including 3D views
You can create general arrangement drawings using ribbon or pop-up menu
commands in the following ways:
Create general arrangement drawings (page 66)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 45 Drawing types

 Create general arrangement drawings using saved settings in Master Drawing
Catalog (page 82)
To see examples of general arrangement drawings, click the links below:
Example: Foundation plan (page 46)
Example: Slab plan (page 47)
Example: Framing plan (page 47)
Example: Deck plan (page 48)
Example: Erection elevation drawing (page 49)
Example: 3D isometric drawing (page 50)
Example: Anchor bolt plan (page 51)

See also
Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 75)

Example: Foundation plan

See below for an example of a foundation plan.

See also
General arrangement drawings (page 45)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 46 Drawing types

 Example: Slab plan
See below for an example of a slab plan.

See also
General arrangement drawings (page 45)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 47 Drawing types

 Example: Framing plan
See below for an example of a basement level framing plan.

See also
General arrangement drawings (page 45)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 48 Drawing types

 Example: Deck plan
See below for an example of a deck plan.

See also
General arrangement drawings (page 45)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 49 Drawing types

 Example: Erection elevation drawing
See below for an example of an elevation erection elevation drawing.

See also
General arrangement drawings (page 45)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 50 Drawing types

 Example: 3D isometric drawing
See below for an example of an isometric drawing.

See also
General arrangement drawings (page 45)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 51 Drawing types

 Example: Anchor bolt plan
See below for an example of an anchor bolt plan.

See also
General arrangement drawings (page 45)

Single-part drawings
Single-part drawings are workshop drawings that show the fabrication
information for one part (usually without welds). Single-part drawings usually
use small sheet sizes, for example, A4 or imperial standard size 8.5" x 11.5".
You can create single-part drawings using ribbon or pop-up menu commands.
Click the links below to find out more:
Create single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings (page 67)
Create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using saved settings in
Master Drawing Catalog (page 86)
Example - Create a new rule set and drawings for all parts (page 93)
To see examples of single-part drawings, click the links below:
Example: Anchor bolt (page 53)
Example: Embed (page 53)
Example: Plate (page 54)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 52 Drawing types

 See also
Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 75)

Example: Anchor bolt

See below for an example of a single-part drawing presenting an anchor bolt.

See also
Single-part drawings (page 52)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 53 Drawing types

 Example: Embed
See below for an example of a single-part drawing presenting an embed.

See also
Single-part drawings (page 52)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 54 Drawing types

 Example: Plate
See below for examples of single-part drawings presenting plates.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 55 Drawing types

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 56 Drawing types
 See also
Single-part drawings (page 52)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 57 Drawing types

 Assembly drawings
Assembly drawings are typically workshop drawings showing fabrication
information for one assembly. In most cases, an assembly consists of a main
part and secondary parts. The secondary parts are either welded or bolted to
a main part. Assembly drawings usually use larger sheet sizes than single-part
drawings, for example, A3 or imperial standard size 11" x 17".
You can create assembly drawings using ribbon or pop-up menu commands.
Click the links below to find out more:
Create single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings (page 67)
Create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using saved settings in
Master Drawing Catalog (page 86)
Create drawings using rule sets or wizards in Master Drawing Catalog
(page 92)
Example: Create assembly drawings from groups of similar parts (page 90)
Example - Create a new rule set and drawings for all parts (page 93)
To see examples of assembly drawings, click the links below:
Drawing types (page 45)
Example: Beam (page 58)
Example: Stairs (page 59)
Example: Rail (page 60)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 58 Drawing types

 Example: Beam
See below for an example of an assembly drawing presenting a beam
assembly.

See also
Assembly drawings (page 57)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 59 Drawing types

 Example: Stairs
See below for an assembly drawing presenting stairs.

See also
Assembly drawings (page 57)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 60 Drawing types

 Example: Rail
See below for an example of a rail assembly drawing.

See also
Assembly drawings (page 57)

Cast unit drawings

Cast unit drawings are dimensional, form work, or reinforcement drawings
used in concrete design and construction. They show cast-in embeds, edge
chamfers, and hard and soft insulation. Cast unit drawings that show cast-in-
place concrete structures usually use large sheet sizes, for example, A1 or
imperial standard size 24" x 36". Drawings that show precast structures usually
use smaller sheet sizes, for example, A3 or imperial standard size 11" x 17".
You can only create cast unit drawings of concrete parts and cast-in embeds
(steel parts or assemblies added to a cast unit). Cast unit drawings also show
the bolts and welds in steel parts. The volume and weight information of the
cast unit remains accurate even if there are cuts inside the cast unit.
Cast units have the cast unit type part property - they are set either Cast in
place or Precast. It is important to use the correct cast unit type, because
some features, for example, numbering and continuous concrete are based
partly on the cast unit type. In the Rebar Detailing configuration, you can
create cast unit drawings of cast-in-place cast units only.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 61 Drawing types

 You can create cast unit drawings using ribbon or pop-up menu commands.
Click the links to find out more:
Create single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings (page 67)
Create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using saved settings in
Master Drawing Catalog (page 86)
Create drawings using rule sets or wizards in Master Drawing Catalog
(page 92)
Example: Create cast unit drawings one by one (page 87)
To see examples of cast unit drawings, click the links below:
Example: Beam (page 62)
Example: Column (page 62)
Example: Stairs (page 63)

Example: Beam
See below for an example of a combined form and reinforcing bar drawing of
an inverted tee beam.

See also
Cast unit drawings (page 61)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 62 Drawing types

 Example: Column
See below for an example of a combined form and reinforcing bar drawing of
an exterior column with no corbels or plats for beams.

See also
Cast unit drawings (page 61)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 63 Drawing types

 Example: Stairs
See below for an example of a combined form and reinforcing bar drawing of
stairs with landings.

See also
Cast unit drawings (page 61)

Multidrawings
Multidrawings are workshop drawings that gather several single-part or
assembly drawings on one sheet. Multidrawings usually demand large sheet
sizes such as A1 or imperial standard size 24" x 36".

Create multidrawings when you want to:

• Have more than one assembly on a sheet
• Collect multiple single-part drawings on a large sheet
Below is an example of a multidrawing with several assemblies included.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 64 Drawing types

 See also
Create multidrawings (page 72)

2.2 What to do before creating drawings

The list below contains some things that you may need to do before you
create or clone drawings in Tekla Structures:

• For assembly, single-part, cast unit and multidrawings, the model needs to
be numbered. If the model changes, the numbering needs to be updated.
Numbering ensures that Tekla Structures connects the right objects to the
right drawings. If you try to create drawings without numbering the model,
Tekla Structures prompts you to do so. Once the model is numbered, part
positions can also be shown in general arrangement drawings. Prior to
numbering, if the part position is included in a mark on a general
arrangment drawing, it will be shown as a question mark (?).
• Check that the detailing is correct.
• You may want to create test drawings of different types of parts to see how
well the predefined drawing properties, layouts, rule sets or cloning
templates suit your needs.
• You may want to modify drawing properties, layouts, or rule sets and save
the modified settings for future usage.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 65 What to do before creating drawings

 • If you are going to use a drawing as a cloning template, check that it
contains all the necessary elements for this purpose.

See also
Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 75)
Create general arrangement drawings (page 66)
Create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using saved settings in
Master Drawing Catalog (page 86)
Define automatic drawing settings (page 563)

2.3 Create general arrangement drawings

When you create general arrangement drawings, remember to load the closest
possible predefined properties in the drawing properties first, then modify the
properties if needed, and then create the drawing.

Before you create general arrangement drawings, create the model views that
you need and ensure that the views are as you want them to be in drawings.
The drawing views will have the same orientation and content as the model
view you select. A good idea is to fit the work area in the model view using two
points to select the area that you want to show in the general arrangement
drawing.

NOTE General arrangement drawings get overwritten if you recreate them. If

you want to create another general arrangement drawing of the same
model view, give another name to the drawing in drawing properties.

1. Create the model views you need.

If you want to switch between 3D view and plane view in the created view,
press Ctrl+P.
2. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> GA
drawing .
3. Select the appropriate predefined drawing properties (saved settings)
from the list at the top and click Load.
Always load predefined properties when you are creating a drawing.
When you need to modify drawing properties, save the new changes to
the properties file when necessary.
4. If needed, modify drawing properties and, if necessary, apply object-level
settings.
5. Click Apply or OK.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 66 Create general arrangement drawings

 6. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Create drawings --> GA drawing .
Alternatively, you can select the model views from the model (selected
views get a yellow frame), right-click and click Create General
Arrangement Drawing...
7. If you have not selected the views yet, select them from the displayed list.
You can use the Shift and Ctrl buttons for selecting several views.
8. In the Options list, select if you want to create one drawing for each
selected view or add all selected views in one drawing.
By selecting Empty drawing, you can create an empty drawing and add
drawing views in it afterwards.
9. If you want to open the created drawings, select Open drawing.
10. Click Create.

Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing list. You
can now open the drawing and also change the drawing properties.

See also
Define automatic drawing settings (page 563)
General arrangement drawings (page 45)
Create general arrangement drawings using saved settings in Master Drawing
Catalog (page 82)
General arrangement drawing properties (page 836)
Pours in drawings (page 464)

2.4 Create single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings

When you create single-part, assembly or cast-unit drawings, remember to
load the closest possible predefined properties in the drawing properties first,
then modify the properties if needed, and then create the drawing.

Ensure that you are using the correct cast unit type, because some
functionalities, for example numbering, are based on the cast unit type. Cast
units have the cast unit type part property setting in the model - they are set
either Cast in place or Precast. In the Cast in Place configuration, you can
create cast unit drawings of cast-in-place cast units only.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 67 Create single-part, assembly, or cast unit

drawings
 2. In the drawing properties dialog box, load the appropriate predefined
drawing properties (saved settings).
Always load predefined properties when you are creating a drawing.
When you need to modify drawing properties, save the changes to a new
properties file when necessary.
Ensure that for cast unit drawings, you use a property file that contains
the desired Cast unit definition method:
• By cast unit position: A drawing will be created from each cast unit. If
there are identical cast units, one of them will serve as the base cast
unit for the drawing. This is the most common method for creating
cast unit drawings.
• By cast unit ID: Each part in the model includes a unique GUID. You
can create drawings by using cast unit GUIDs. The GUID determines
the marking of the drawing. You can create several drawings from
identical cast units.
3. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
If you do not have any views defined yet, first add the views and then
select the view properties for the views.
4. If needed, modify the view properties including view, building object,
dimensioning and mark settings and apply detailed object-level settings.
5. Click Save to save the view properties.
6. Click Close to return to drawing properties.
7. Save the drawing properties you loaded earlier.
8. Click Apply or OK.
9. Select the objects, or use an appropriate selection filter to select the
objects you want to create drawings from and select the entire model.

Activate only the Select parts switch on the Selecting toolbar when
selecting parts. Otherwise selection could take a long time in large
models.
10. Do one of the following:
• On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select
the drawing type.
• If you selected individual objects, right-click and select the appropriate
drawing creation command.
11. Number the model if you are prompted to do so.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 68 Create single-part, assembly, or cast unit

drawings
 Tekla Structures creates the drawings. The created drawings are listed in the
Drawing list. If you already have a drawing with the same type and mark,
Tekla Structures will not create a new one.

TIP To automatically open any drawing after the drawing has been created, hold
down Ctrl+Shift while you create the drawing.

See also
Define automatic drawing settings (page 563)
Pours in drawings (page 464)
Show pour objects, pour marks and pour breaks in drawings (page 819)
Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawing properties (page 839)
View properties in drawings (page 844)

2.5 Create AutoDrawings

The AutoDrawings wizard combines a series of actions so that you can create
drawings using a single command. You can use AutoDrawings to create single-
part drawings, assembly drawings, cast-unit drawings and multi-drawings.
AutoDrawings wizards contain instructions telling Tekla Structures which
drawing type, selection filter, and drawing properties to use. You can edit
AutoDrawings wizard files or create your own ones. The AutoDrawings dialog
box lists the available wizard files.

Create AutoDrawings
Before you can create AutoDrawings, the appropriate wizard files must exist
and numbering must be up to date.
1. In the model, select the parts from which to create drawings. You can also
select the entire model and use filters to fine-tune your selection. You can
also use selection filters in the wizard file. If you do, your selection can
include parts that will not be included in the drawings.
2. Type AutoDrawing in the Quick Launch box.
3. In the AutoDrawings dialog box, select a wizard file.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 69 Create AutoDrawings

 • To view the file, click Show.
• To edit the file, click Edit.
4. On the Advanced tab, select whether to create a log file, what information
it should include and name the log file.
5. Click Create from selected.

AutoDrawings wizard files

You can create your own AutoDrawings wizard files using any standard text
editor. Use the existing wizard files as examples to construct your own.
A typical AutoDrawings wizard file contains several sets of drawing requests
containing drawing, attribute and part settings to apply to selected objects, as
well as a selection filter. The order of sets is important, as Tekla Structures only
creates one drawing for each object.
Place the newly created drawing wizard files in the attributes sub-folder in the
model folder.

Example
The AutoDrawings wizard file set in this example creates an assembly drawing
for an object that fulfills the selection filter criteria in the set. Tekla Structures
will not create another assembly drawing for that object, even if it matches the
criteria of the selection filter in later sets in the same wizard file.
The wizard file consist of the lines below. Note the use of parentheses.
set_drawing_type(assembly)
set_drawing_attributes(column)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 70 Create AutoDrawings

 set_filter(column_filter)
create_drawings()

Line Description
set_drawing_type(assembly) This line defines the type of drawing
the wizard creates. The drawing type
appears in parentheses. The options
are:
single: workshop drawings
assembly: assembly drawings
multi_single: workshop multi-
drawings
multi_single_with_layout:
workshop multi-drawings with layout
multi_assembly: assembly multi-
drawings
multi_assembly_with_layout:
assembly multi-drawings with layout
cast_unit: cast-unit drawings
set_drawing_attributes(column This line tells Tekla Structures which
) drawing properties to use when
creating the drawings. The name of
the saved drawing properties file
appears in parentheses.
set_filter(column_filter) This line tells Tekla Structures which
selection filter to use to select the
parts from which to create drawings.
The filter name appears in
parentheses.
create_drawings() This line starts the drawing creation.
This line should always appear
immediately after the lines
set_drawing_type,
set_drawing_attributes and
set_filter.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 71 Create AutoDrawings

 Wizard log
Tekla Structures writes a log file when you run an AutoDrawings wizard. The
log file contains information about errors, number of drawings created,
commands used etc.
You can configure whether or not Tekla Structures creates a log file and how it
is displayed using the Advanced tab in the AutoDrawings dialog box.
Create log options:
• No: Tekla Structures does not create a log file.
• Create: Tekla Structures creates a new log file and deletes the old one.
• Append: Tekla Structures adds a new entry to the existing log file.
Display log options:
• No: Tekla Structures does not display the log,
• With associated viewer: Tekla Structures displays the log file in an
associated viewer (e.g. Notepad) when you run the wizard. You can edit the
log file.
• On dialog: Tekla Structures displays the log file in a dialog box when you
run the wizard. You can not edit the log file.

2.6 Create multidrawings

You can create multidrawings of selected parts and of selected drawings. You
can also create empty multidrawings and copy or link views in them from
other drawings.

If you create multidrawings from existing drawings, you can choose to include
their individual drawing layouts. If you want to have separate lists, tables, and
call-offs for each part or assembly, you should include the individual drawing
layouts. You can also include lists and tables for all parts or assemblies in the
multidrawing.
Before creating a multidrawing, check the original assembly or single-part
drawing, and clean it up, if necessary. Do not modify the multidrawing object
that links to the original drawing.
Before you start, you can set XS_MULTIDRAWING_REMOVE_VIEW_LABEL_GAP
to TRUE in the Drawing Properties category of the Advanced Options dialog
box to remove extra space between drawing view labels and drawing views.

See also
Multidrawings (page 64)
Define automatic drawing settings (page 563)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 72 Create multidrawings

 Link or copy drawing views to empty multidrawings (page 73)
Create multidrawings of selected drawings (page 73)
Create multidrawings of selected parts (page 74)

Link or copy drawing views to empty multidrawings

You can create empty multidrawings in which you can link or copy views from
other drawings as such or with the original drawing layout.
1. On the Drawings & reportsDrawings & reports tab, click Multidrawing
--> Empty drawing .
2. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing list.
3. Open the empty multidrawing from the Drawing list.
4. Still on the Drawing list, select the drawings that you want to copy or link
to the multidrawing.
5. On the Views tab, click From other drawing and select one of the
copying or linking commands:
• Copy
• Copy with layout
• Link
• Link with layout
The drawing views are placed in the multidrawing from top to bottom
starting from the top-left corner. The views are placed in the same order
as they appear on the Drawing list. If you have sorted the list by the
name, the drawings are created in the same order.
6. Arrange the views if they are on top of each other.

NOTE When you update multidrawings, the linked drawings are also updated.

Useful links
What does XS_CREATE_CONNECTION_WHEN_COPYING DRAWING_VIEWS do?

See also
Create multidrawings (page 72)

Create multidrawings of selected drawings

You can create multidrawings of the drawings you select. You can also keep
the layout of the selected drawing in the new multidrawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing list.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 73 Create multidrawings

 2. Select the drawings you want to add in the multidrawing from the
Drawing list.
3. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Multidrawing and select one of the
following commands:
• Selected drawings: Create multidrawings of the selected drawings
without the drawing layout.
• Selected drawings with layout: Create multidrawings of the selected
drawings, keeping the layout of each selected drawing.
The drawing views are placed in the multidrawing from top to bottom
starting from the top-left corner. The views are placed in the same order
as they appear on the Drawing list. If you have sorted the list by the
name, the drawings are created in the same order.

See also
Create multidrawings (page 72)

Create multidrawings of selected parts

Create single-part and assembly drawings of the parts that you select and
place the drawings in a multidrawing. You can also keep the layout of the
selected single-part or assembly drawings.
1. Select the parts from the model using appropriate selection switches or
filters.
2. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Multidrawing and select one of the
following commands depending on the desired result:
• New single-part drawings of selected parts: Create single-part
drawings of the selected parts and place the drawings in a
multidrawing
• New single-part drawings of selected parts with layout: Create
single-part drawings of the selected part, keeping the layout of each
drawing, and place the drawings in a multidrawing.
• New assembly drawings of selected parts: Create assembly
drawings of the selected parts and place the drawings in a
multidrawing.
• New assembly drawings of selected parts with layout: Create
assembly drawings of the selected parts, keeping the layout of each
drawing, and place the drawings in a multidrawing.

See also
Create multidrawings (page 72)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 74 Create multidrawings

2.7 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
The Master Drawing Catalog is a fast, efficient and controlled way of creating
drawings using master drawings. In the Master Drawing Catalog, all drawing
creation commands are available in one centralized location.
A master drawing is a Tekla Structures drawing or a set of drawing properties
that is used for creating new drawings that look the same as the master
drawing. There are several types of master drawings: cloning templates, saved
settings and rule sets. You can also use the existing AutoDrawings wizard files
as master drawings.
• To open the Master Drawing Catalog, on the Drawings & reports tab,
click Create drawings --> Master Drawing Catalog .
The image below shows the search view of the Master Drawing Catalog as a
thumbnail list.

The Master Drawing Catalog has a toolbar containing commands for creating
drawings, selecting the view type and the master drawing list type, displaying
master drawing descriptions, selecting the models from which you want to use

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 75 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 cloning templates, creating rule sets, displaying the Drawing list, and for
keeping the Master Drawing Catalog window always on top.
Tekla Structures populates the catalog by looking for items in the Tekla
Structures default folder search order: first from the firm folder, then from the
project folder, and then from the system folder and so on. Cloning templates
in the folder defined for the advanced option XS_CLONING_TEMPLATE_
DIRECTORY are shown in the catalog. You can define several folders for this
advanced option.

See also
Create general arrangement drawings using saved settings in Master Drawing
Catalog (page 82)
Create anchor bolt plans using saved settings (page 83)
Create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using saved settings in
Master Drawing Catalog (page 86)
Master drawing types (page 76)
Search for master drawings and save the results in Master Drawing Catalog
(page 100)
Customize Master Drawing Catalog (page 101)

Master drawing types

The master drawing type you should use depends on the type of the drawing
that you want to create:
• You can create single-part drawings, assembly drawings or cast unit
drawings using saved settings, rule sets, or cloning templates.

• You can create general arrangement drawings using saved settings.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 76 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 • You can create multidrawings using wizards (old file-based rule sets)

See also
Saved settings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 77)
Rule sets in Master Drawing Catalog (page 79)
Wizards in Master Drawing Catalog (page 80)
Cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog (page 77)

Cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog

Cloning templates are Tekla Structures drawings that are used as templates for
creating new drawings. You can select a drawing from the Drawing List and
add it to the Master Drawing Catalog to be used as a template.

You can also use cloning templates that are located in other models. When you
have similar parts in several projects, you can maintain a set of cloning
template models and then take the cloning templates in the cloning template
models in use when necessary.

See also
Master drawing types (page 76)
Clone drawings (page 115)
Create drawings using cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog (page 116)
Clone by using cloning templates located in other models (page 117)
Add a cloning template master drawing in Master Drawing Catalog (page 104)

Saved settings in Master Drawing Catalog

The saved settings in Master Drawing Catalog are drawing properties files that
have been created and saved in the drawing properties dialog boxes for
different drawing types. There are also many predefined drawing property
files.
Each drawing type has its own properties file. Default saved settings are
located in the environment (..\Tekla Structures\<version>

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 77 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 \environments\<environment>\system). When you save your own
settings, they are saved under the current model directory.
Below are some examples how the saved settings are shown in the Master
Drawing Catalog dialog box.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 78 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 See also
Master drawing types (page 76)
Create general arrangement drawings using saved settings in Master Drawing
Catalog (page 82)
Create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using saved settings in
Master Drawing Catalog (page 86)

Rule sets in Master Drawing Catalog

Rule sets are sets of rules on how to create drawings for different object types.
A rule set is a combination of object groups (model selection filters) and
master drawing settings (cloning templates, saved settings) that define which
objects to include in the drawing, and which drawing settings to use. You can
use the existing AutoDrawings wizard files or create your own rule sets.

The order of sets is important, as Tekla Structures by default creates only one
drawing for each object. For example, a rule set creates an assembly drawing
for an object that fulfills the selection filter criteria in one set. Tekla Structures

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 79 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 will not create another assembly drawing for that object, even if it matches the
criteria of the selection filter in later sets in the same rule set file.

See also
Master drawing types (page 76)
Create drawings using rule sets or wizards in Master Drawing Catalog
(page 92)
Add a rule set master drawing in Master Drawing Catalog (page 102)

Wizards in Master Drawing Catalog

A wizard file is a file-based wizard consisting of several sets of drawing requests
containing drawing, attribute and part settings to apply to selected objects, as
well as a selection filter. The order of sets is important, as Tekla Structures by
default creates only one drawing for each object. You can edit the files in the
Master Drawing Catalog. However, creating new wizard files is not possible in
the Master Drawing Catalog. Instead, you can create a rule set, which is

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 80 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 basically the same thing as a wizard: It applies drawing properties to objects
selected by filters, but in a dialog box, not in a text file like a wizard.

NOTE In the Master Drawing Catalog, the only way to create multidrawings
is to use the wizard files.

See also
Master drawing types (page 76)
Create drawings using rule sets or wizards in Master Drawing Catalog
(page 92)
Wizard file contents (page 109)

Apply detailed object level settings in saved settings

You can apply drawing object level settings in the drawings that you create in
Master Drawing Catalog for the saved settings type of master drawings. This
way you can use the same saved settings for many drawings and only apply
some specific object level settings at the point when you create the drawing,
for example, use different kind of marks or change the reinforcement color.

To apply detailed object level settings in saved settings for a general

arrangement drawing:
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click the saved setting you want
to use for creating drawings.
2. In the Master Drawing Properties dialog box, click Edit drawing
properties...

3. Click the toggle button at the bottom to empty the check boxes.
4. In the Drawing Properties dialog box, select only the Use detailed
object level settings check box and ensure that the Yes button next to it
is selected.
5. Click Edit settings....
6. Select the filter to be used, the drawing object type and the drawing object
property file to be used.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Save on the top of the dialog box to save the changes in the saved
settings file (property file).
9. Click OK in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box.
10. Create the drawings.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 81 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 NOTE In single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings, you need to go from the
Drawing Properties dialog box further to the view properties of the view
where you want apply detailed object level settings.

See also
Modify saved settings' properties (page 107)
Create detailed object level settings in a general arrangement drawing
(page 31)
Example: Apply detailed object level settings on drawing level in a GA drawing
(page 33)
Create detailed object level settings in cast unit drawings (page 36)
Example: Apply detailed object level settings on view level in a cast unit
drawing (page 38)

Create general arrangement drawings using saved settings

in Master Drawing Catalog
You can create GA drawings in Master Drawing Catalog on the basis of saved
settings.

Before you create general arrangement drawings, create the model views that
you need and ensure that the views are as you want them to be. The drawing
views will have the same orientation and content as the model view you select.
Fit work area using two points to select the area that you want to show in the
general arrangement drawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Create drawings --> Master
Drawing Catalog .
2. Select the set of saved settings from the list at the top.
3. If needed, modify the drawing properties by double-clicking the saved
setting and clicking Edit drawing properties....
Remember to save the changes in the properties file.
4. Click Create drawings (Alt+C).
5. In the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box, select the views
that you want to create and the desired option from the Options list.
If you select Empty drawing, you can create an empty drawing and add
drawing views in it afterwards.
6. Click Create to create the drawings.

Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing list. Click
in the Master Drawing Catalog toolbar to open the Drawing list.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 82 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 NOTE General arrangement drawings get overwritten if you recreate them. If you
want to create another general arrangement drawing of the same model view,
give another name to the new drawing in drawing properties.

For more information about creating cast in place general arrangement

drawings, see Pours in drawings (page 464)

See also
Saved settings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 77)
Create general arrangement drawings (page 66)

Create anchor bolt plans using saved settings

Anchor bolt plans are general arrangement drawings showing the anchor bolt
layout. You can create anchor bolt plans in Master Drawing Catalog or using
ribbon or pop-up menu commands.

Below you will create an anchor bolt plan using the Master Drawing Catalog.
Before creating the anchor bolt plan, create a model view that is in the xy-
plane.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Create drawings --> Master
drawing catalog.
2. Double-click a saved settings master drawing that has been created for
anchor bolt plans, for example, anchor_bolt_plan.
3. Open the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box by
clicking Edit drawing properties...Edit drawing properties
4. Click View
5. On the Anchor bolt plan tab, ensure that the option Show as anchor
bolt plan is set to Yes.
Define the drawing as an anchor bolt plan when you are creating the
drawing. You cannot convert a general arrangement drawing to an anchor
bolt plan afterwards.
6. Modify the enlarged part view scale, if necessary.
7. If needed, set the Create detail views option to Yes to create separate
detail views.
If you select No, Tekla Structures dimensions the anchor bolts in the
enlarged view. Tekla Structures groups similar detail views so that similar
details are drawn only once.
8. Set the Detail view scale.
9. Click Save to save the changes in the saved settings file.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 83 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 10. Click OK to close the Master Drawing Properties dialog box.
11. Click Create drawings.
12. Select one view in the xy-plane.
If you select some other type of view or several views, Tekla Structures
displays a warning message and the anchor bolt plan is not created.
13. Click Create.
Tekla Structures creates the anchor bolt plan.
Tekla Structures creates bolt dimensions in the anchor bolt plan in the
directions of the bolt group coordinate system. If the angle between the
bolt group and the view coordinate systems is not orthogonal, Tekla
Structures adds angle dimensions to the detail view. Use the advanced
option
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS
to create the dimensions in the x and y directions of the main view.
When details are compared, the following aspects are taken into account:
• bolt dimensions
• column profile
• column orientation (coordinate system)
• plate profile

TIP In the created drawing, go to the File menu, click Settings and check that
Ghost outline is selected and Drawing Color Mode is set to Color. In
color drawings with white background, hidden objects are shown as
ghost outlines, if this setting is selected. In gray scale and black and white
drawings, hidden objects are not shown even if Ghost outline is
selected.

See also
Saved settings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 77)
Objects included in the anchor bolt plan (page 84)
Define the anchor bolt plan parts using drawing filters (page 85)
Include assemblies in anchor bolt plans (page 86)
Example: Dimension anchor bolt plans (page 748)
General arrangement drawing properties (page 836)
View properties in drawings (page 844)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 84 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 Objects included in the anchor bolt plan
Tekla Structures selects the objects that are included in the anchor bolt plan
based on the following default rules:
• The part is a column or an almost vertical beam.
• The part is the main part of an assembly.
• A base plate is included in the assembly, and it is located lower than the
main part. If there is more than one part in the column assembly that
fulfills the rules, the lowest part of them is considered to be the base plate.
• Bolts are attached to the base plate.
• The assembly is cut by the view plane.
• The boundary box of the base plate in the xy-direction intersects the
boundary box of the column.

See also
Create anchor bolt plans using saved settings (page 83)

Define the anchor bolt plan parts using drawing filters

You can use general arrangement drawing filters and certain advanced options
to include parts in the anchor bolt plan.

1. Create the necessary general arrangement drawing filters in the Filter

Properties subdialog box of the General Arrangement Drawing
Properties dialog box.
2. On the File menu, click Settings --> Advanced options and go to the
Drawing Properties category.
3. Enter the following values for the following advanced options:
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER : <the name of the
drawing filter for columns>
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER : <the name of the
drawing filter for bolts>
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER : <the name of the
drawing filter for base plates>
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER : <the name of
the drawing filter for additional parts>
If you do not use these advanced options, the default rules are used for
determining the columns, base plates, and anchor bolts to be included in the
anchor bolt plan.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 85 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 NOTE Using these advanced options only affects the creation of new anchor
bolt plan drawings, and has no affect on the existing anchor bolt plan
drawings.

Include assemblies in anchor bolt plans

If you have anchor bolts at varying elevations, you can create a general
arrangement drawing at the level of the top-most base plate/anchor bolt.

The anchor bolt plan view extrema looks downwards. If the lowest level anchor
bolt is not shown, adjust the advanced option
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE.
To specify the tolerance:
1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Advanced options --> Drawing
Properties .
2. Set a value for the advanced option
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE .
Define the distance in millimeters. The default value is 200 mm.

See also
Create anchor bolt plans using saved settings (page 83)

Create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using

saved settings in Master Drawing Catalog
You can create single-part, cast unit and assembly drawings in Master
Drawing Catalog using saved settings.

NOTE • Cast units have the cast unit type part property setting in the
model - they are set either Cast in place or Precast. It is important
to use the correct cast unit type, because some features, for
example numbering, are based on the cast unit type. In the Cast in
Place configuration, you can create cast unit drawings of cast-in-
place cast units only.

1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Create drawings --> Master
drawing catalog.
2. Select the desired set of saved settings (drawing properties file) from the
list.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 86 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 For cast unit drawings, select a file that contains the desired Cast unit
definition method:
• By cast unit position: A drawing will be created from each cast unit. If
there are identical cast units, one of them will serve as the base cast
unit for the drawing. This is the most common method for creating
cast unit drawings.
• By cast unit ID: Each part in the model has a unique GUID. You can
create drawings by using cast unit GUIDs. The GUID determines the
marking of the drawing. You can create several drawings from identical
cast units.
3. If needed, modify the drawing properties and apply object-level settings.
To do this, double-click the saved setting and click Edit drawing
properties.... Remember to save your changes in the property file.
4. If you are creating a drawing only for selected objects, select the objects.
You can also use an appropriate selection filter and select the whole
model. Activate only the Select parts selection switch when you select
objects, otherwise the selection may take a long time.
5. Click Create drawings (Alt+C) or Create drawings for all parts (Alt+A).
6. Number the model if you are asked to do so.

Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing list. Click
the Drawing list button on the Master Drawing Catalog toolbar to open
the Drawing list.

NOTE If you already have a drawing with the same type and mark, Tekla Structures
will not create a new one.

See also
Example: Create cast unit drawings one by one (page 87)
Example: Create assembly drawings from groups of similar parts (page 90)
Saved settings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 77)

Example: Create cast unit drawings one by one

In this example, you will create a drawing of a cast unit using saved settings
called Column_with_BOM.
1. In the model, right-click the concrete column and select Cast Unit --> Set
Top in Form Face , and select the cast unit face that will face upwards in
the form.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 87 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 When you right-click the column and select Cast Unit --> Set Top in Form
Face , the selected face is shown red, see the image below.

The top-in-form face will be displayed in the front view of a drawing.

2. Still in the model, double-click the column and select Precast as the Cast
unit type.
It is important to use the correct cast unit type, because some features,
for example, numbering, are based on the cast unit type.
3. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Cast unit
drawing .
4. In the properties dialog box, load the appropriate predefined drawing
properties (saved settings). In this example, Column_with_BOM is loaded.
5. Ensure that the Column_with_BOM settings contain the desired Cast
unit definition method:
• By cast unit position: A drawing will be created from each cast unit. If
there are identical cast units, one of them will serve as the base cast
unit for the drawing. This is the most common method for creating
cast unit drawings.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 88 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 • By cast unit ID: Each part in the model has a unique GUID. You can
create drawings by using cast unit GUIDs. The GUID determines the
marking of the drawing. You can create several drawings from identical
cast units.
6. If you made any changes in Column_with_BOM, save the changes and
close the dialog box.
7. Select the column in the model.
8. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Create drawings --> Master
drawing catalog.
9. Set the type to Cast-unit drawings and select the saved settings
Column_with_BOM (C).

10. Click Create drawings.

Tekla Structures creates the drawing.

You can open the Drawing list by clicking the Drawing list button on
the toolbar and open the drawing to view it.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 89 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 See also
Create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using saved settings in
Master Drawing Catalog (page 86)

Example: Create assembly drawings from groups of similar

parts
Creating drawings one by one may take a lot of time. You can automate the
creation process a bit more by selecting groups of items and then create the
drawings. For example, you can define the needed properties for the beams
and then run all the beam drawings at once by using the Tekla Structures
model selection filters.

In this example, you are going to use saved settings named Beam_with_BOM
and create assembly drawings from all beams.
1. Define a selection filter that selects only one type of items, in this case
beams.

a. Click the selection filter button on the Selecting toolbar or press

Ctrl+G to open the Object Group - Selection Filter dialog box.
b. Create a selection filter that selects all parts named BEAM and save it
using the name BEAM.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 90 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 2. Activate the BEAM filter from the list of selection filters and use area
selection to select all beams in the model.

3. Open the Master Drawing Catalog: On the Drawings & reports tab, click
Create drawings --> Master drawing catalog .
4. Under Assembly drawings, select the saved settings master drawing. In
this example, Beam_with_BOM (A) is selected.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 91 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 5. Click Create drawings.

Tekla Structures creates the beam assembly drawings.

See also
Create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using saved settings in
Master Drawing Catalog (page 86)

Create drawings using rule sets or wizards in Master

Drawing Catalog
In the Master Drawing Catalog, you can create single-part, assembly and cast
unit drawings using rule sets, and multidrawings using wizards. You can also
create your own rule sets.

Limitation: In the Master Drawing Catalog, you can create multidrawings

only by using file-based wizards and general arrangement drawings using
saved settings. You cannot create rule sets for multidrawings or general
arrangement drawings.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Create drawings --> Master
drawing catalog .
2. Select a rule set or a wizard file from the list.
3. If needed, modify rule set properties or wizard file contents by double-
clicking the rule set or wizard.
4. If needed, edit the drawing properties of the master drawing connected to
the rule set. To do this, double-click the rule set, select the master drawing
from the list and click Properties... --> Edit drawing properties... .
Remember to save your changes.
5. Select the whole model or desired parts.
6. Do one of the following:
• If you selected parts, click Create drawings (Alt+C).

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 92 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 • If you selected the whole model, click Create drawings for all parts
(Alt+A).
7. Number the model if you are asked to do so.

Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing list. Click
the drawing list button on the Master Drawing Catalog toolbar to open
the Drawing list.

NOTE If you already have a drawing with the same type and mark, Tekla Structures
will not create a new one.

See also
Rule sets in Master Drawing Catalog (page 79)
Wizards in Master Drawing Catalog (page 80)
Add a rule set master drawing in Master Drawing Catalog (page 102)
Example - Create a new rule set and drawings for all parts (page 93)

Example - Create a new rule set and drawings for all parts
The following example will go through creating a basic rule set that will create
assembly and single part drawings based on the names of the parts in the
model.
The model used here is a very simple model consisting of two columns with a
beam in between, base plates and end plates. The parts are named BEAM,
COLUMN and PLATE.
Before setting up a rule set in the Master Drawing Catalog, you need to have
some saved settings (drawing properties) and some selection filters that link
the drawing properties to the parts in the model.

Create selection filters

You need to have filters that select the beams, columns and plates.

1. Click the selection filter button on the Selecting toolbar or press Ctrl
+G to open the Object Group - Selection Filter dialog box.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 93 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 2. Click Add row and add a selection filter for the beams as shown below,
saving it as DRAWING_BEAM.

3. In the same way, create selection filters for columns and plates, saving
them as DRAWING_COLUMN and DRAWING_PLATE.
The new filters are displayed in the selection filter list.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 94 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 4. Close the Object Group - Selection Filter dialog box by clicking Cancel.
The new filters will be saved in the model folder. If necessary, copy them to the
necessary folders, for example, to the firm or project folders.

Create saved settings (drawing properties)

Next you need to modify the drawing properties and save them so that they
are displayed as saved settings in the Master Drawing Catalog. The saved
settings are created separately for single-part drawings and assembly
drawings.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Assembly
drawing and create properties for a beam and a column drawing.
2. Give a descriptive name for the drawing in the Name box, for example,
BEAM for the beam properties and COLUMN for the column properties.
3. Save the properties as DRAWING_BEAM and DRAWING_COLUMN.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 95 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 4. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Single-part
drawing and create some single-part drawing settings for a beam shaft,
column shaft and plates.
5. Give a descriptive name for the drawing in the Name box, for example,
BEAM SHAFT for the beam shaft properties, COLUMN SHAFT for the
column shaft properties and PLATE for the plate properties.
6. Save the settings as DRAWING_BEAM_SHAFT, DRAWING_PLATES and
DRAWING_COLUMN_SHAFT.

Create a rule set

Now that you have created the necessary selection filters and saved settings,
you can create a rule set that automatically creates single-part and assembly
drawings for beams, columns and plates.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Create drawings --> Master
drawing catalog .

2. Click the Define rule set button on the toolbar.

3. In the Define Rules for Creating Drawings dialog box, select the drawing
types you want to create with the rule set and click Next.
In this example, select Single-part drawings and Assembly drawings.

4. In the Define Rules - Single-Part Drawings dialog box, click Add group
and select the filters and the corresponding single-part drawing saved
settings.
5. Under Object group select the three new filters, and under Master
drawing, select the three new saved settings.
The (S) after the master drawing name indicates that its type is saved
setting.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 96 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 6. Click Next.
7. In the Define Rules - Assembly Drawings dialog box, Add group and
select the filters and the corresponding assembly drawing saved settings.
8. Under Object group select the two new filters, and under Master
drawing, select the two new saved settings.

9. Click Next.
10. Give the rule set a name (Rule Set: Column+Beam+Plate), description
and keywords.
11. Use Browse next to Preview Image and add a sample image for the
master drawing.
12. Click Finish when you are done.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 97 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 Create all drawings using the rule set
Now you can create drawings using the new rule set.
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog Search view, enter your search criteria in
the box next to the Search button and click the button.
In this example, column beam plate is entered. Tekla Structures finds the
newly created rule set.
2. Right-click the rule set and select Create drawings for all parts.
Tekla Structures starts creating the drawings. When the drawings have
been created, the following message is displayed pointing to the Open
drawing list icon on the toolbar: "6 drawings created. Open the Drawing
list to see the results". This is a correct amount of drawings.
3. To check which drawings have been created, click the Open drawing list
toolbar icon.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 98 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 See also
Create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using saved settings in
Master Drawing Catalog (page 86)

Create multiple drawing sheets of the same part

You can create several drawings from the same part as multiple drawing
sheets. The number of sheets is not limited, and each drawing can have its
own properties.

This is useful when you need extra sheets for details and section views, and
especially when you want to have several drawings of an assembly with
different presentation options: one with a large 3D image of the assembly, one
with additional section views, and one where only certain parts or sub-
assemblies of the assembly are marked and dimensioned.
You can create multiple drawing sheets of the same part in the Master
Drawing Catalog using rule sets or wizards (page 99), or using the drawing
properties dialog box (page 100).

See also
Copy a drawing to a new sheet (page 125)

Create multiple drawing sheets with wizards

Before you start, ensure that you have created drawing property files (saved
settings) for creating multiple sheets for the same part, each file containing the
desired settings for a specific purpose and individual sheet numbers.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Create drawings --> Master
drawing catalog to open the Create Drawings - Master Drawing
Catalog dialog box.
2. Double-click the desired wizard (page 80) file in the list to open the
Master Drawing Properties dialog box.
3. Click Edit drawing properties... to open the wizard file (page 109).
4. In the file, give the names of the drawing properties files that you want to
use to create the multiple drawing sheets.
Give the file names in parenthesis on the set_drawing_attributes row
as shown below:
set_drawing_type(cast_unit)
set_drawing_attributes(sheet1, sheet2, sheet3)
set_filter(column_filter)
create_drawings()

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 99 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

 5. Save the wizard file with a new name.
6. In the model, select the parts you want to create the drawings from.
7. Click the newly created wizard file in the Master Drawing Catalog and
click Create drawings. Tekla Structures creates the drawings.

Create multiple drawing sheets using drawing properties

1. Open the drawing properties dialog box by double-clicking the
background of an open drawing.
2. Adjust the drawing properties as needed, and change the drawing name
so that it refers to the type of drawing you want to create, for example,
FRAME 3D.
Do not touch the Sheet number box.
3. Click Apply to keep the changes and leave the dialog box open.
4. Create a drawing of the object by selecting the appropriate command: On
the Drawings & reports tab, hold down Shift and click Create drawings
and click the drawing type.
5. In the open drawing properties dialog box, adjust the drawing properties
again and change the name to match the type of the new drawing, for
example, FRAME FRONT.
6. Change the sheet number in the Sheet number box to get another
drawing of the same assembly with a different sheet number.
7. Click Apply and create a new drawing of the same object with different
properties.
8. Continue making all the sheets you need in the same way as in steps 5 - 7.

Example
An example how the Drawing list shows the multiple drawings:

Search for master drawings and save the results in Master

Drawing Catalog
In the Master Drawing Catalog search view, you can search for master
drawings on the basis of the text that has been entered in the name,
description and keyword boxes in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box
and save your search results. In the folder view, you can copy master drawings

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 100 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 from a search results folder to another folder to make it easier for you to
locate the master drawings you need.

TIP Make sure to always add all important information for each master
drawing in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. This makes it a
lot easier to find the master drawings you are looking for.

To search for master drawings and save the search results:

1. Enter the search criteria in the box next to the Search button.
Tekla Structures remembers search strings. When you start typing a string,
it suggests previous strings starting with the same characters.
2. Click Search. The results are listed.
3. To save the search results, click Store, type a name for the search, and
click OK.
The search results are added in the category list in the search view.
The search results are also displayed as a folder in the folder view. There
you can rename the saved search results, and copy the found drawings to
the folders of your choice.

See also
Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 75)
Modify master drawing properties (page 106)

Customize Master Drawing Catalog

You can customize the Master Drawing Catalog according to your needs.
Keeping the Master Drawing Catalog up to date and well organized is
essential if you want to create drawings fast and efficiently. Having good
master drawings saves time and effort.

Add only the necessary master drawings, remove obsolete ones, organize the
master drawings in folders, add proper preview images, and keep the
properties, descriptions and keywords up to date.

To Click the links below to find out

more
Add new master drawings (saved Add master drawings in Master
settings, rule sets and cloning Drawing Catalog (page 102)
templates)
Remove an obsolete master drawing Remove master drawings from the
from Master Drawing Catalog Master Drawing Catalog (page 105)
Change the name, description, Modify master drawing properties
keyword and sample image of a (page 106)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 101 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 To Click the links below to find out
more
master drawing and edit the saved
setting properties file, rule set
contents, or cloning options
Create folders in Master Drawing Manage Master Drawing Catalog
Catalog, copy master drawings folders (page 111)
between folders, and change the
folder location
Take drawing screenshots to be used Sample images of drawings
as sample images and thumbnail (page 114)
images for master drawings in
Add sample and thumbnail images to
Master Drawing Catalog
master drawings (page 115)
Create new drawings based on Create drawings in Master Drawing
master drawings Catalog (page 75)

Add master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

Depending on your environment, the Master Drawing Catalog usually
contains some master drawings when you start using it, at least the
predefined saved settings (drawing properties files) are there, and maybe
some wizards.

You can also add new:

• Saved settings: Add a saved settings master drawing in Master Drawing
Catalog (page 104)
• Rule sets: Add a rule set master drawing in Master Drawing Catalog
(page 102)
• Cloning templates: Add a cloning template master drawing in Master
Drawing Catalog (page 104)

Add a rule set master drawing in Master Drawing Catalog

1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Create drawings --> Master
drawing catalog.

2. Click the Add rule set toolbar button .

3. In the Define Rules for Creating Drawings dialog box, select the drawing
types you want to create with the rule set.
You can select several drawing types with the same rule set. For example,
you can use the same rule set to create single-part drawings and
assembly drawings.
4. Click Next.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 102 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 5. In the next dialog box, click Add group and select the object groups for
which you want to create drawings, and a master drawing for each group.
Only those master drawing types are listed that can be used for the
drawing types that you selected in the previous dialog box. Saved settings
are marked with an S and cloning templates with T.

You can use the buttons in the dialog box to do the following:
• Use Move up and Move down to move a rule upwards and
downwards in the list.
If a rule that is higher in the list creates a drawing of an object, another
rule lower in the list that would create a drawing of the same object
will not do it again.
• Use Properties to view or modify the properties of a master drawing
that you have selected in the list.
• Use Preview to display a sample image of the selected master
drawing.
6. Click Next.
7. If you have selected several drawing types, repeat steps 4 and 5 for all
drawing types that you have selected.
8. Modify master drawing properties of the rule set: give a name to the rule
set, add a sample image, and enter a description and keywords.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 103 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 9. Click Finish.
The rule set is added in the Master Drawing Catalog.

See also
Add master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 102)
Rule sets in Master Drawing Catalog (page 79)
Create drawings using rule sets or wizards in Master Drawing Catalog (page 92)
Add sample and thumbnail images to master drawings (page 115)
Example - Create a new rule set and drawings for all parts (page 93)

Add a saved settings master drawing in Master Drawing Catalog

All predefined drawing properties files are shown as saved settings in the
Master Drawing Catalog. When you save a new drawing properties file, Tekla
Structures shows it in the Master Drawing Catalog automatically.

1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Modify the drawing properties in the Single-part Drawing Properties,
Cast Unit Drawing Properties, Assembly Drawing Properties or
General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box.
3. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
4. Modify the properties.
5. Give a name to the properties file and save the file.
The new property file is automatically added to the Master Drawing
Catalog. If it is not displayed in the list, press F5 to refresh the view.
6. Modify master drawing properties: give the master drawing a name, add a
sample image, and enter a description and keywords.

See also
Add master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 102)
Saved settings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 77)
Add sample and thumbnail images to master drawings (page 115)
Create general arrangement drawings using saved settings in Master Drawing
Catalog (page 82)
Create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using saved settings in
Master Drawing Catalog (page 86)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 104 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 Add a cloning template master drawing in Master Drawing Catalog
You can add drawings as cloning templates in the Master Drawing Catalog
from the Drawing List.

Before you add a cloning template in the Master Drawing Catalog, create a
drawing with the desired properties and contents and save it.
Limitations: You cannot add general arrangement drawings or multidrawings
to the Master Drawing Catalog from the Drawing List. You can clone general
arrangement drawings using the Clone command in the Drawing List dialog
box.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing list.
2. Select the drawing, right-click and select Add to Master Drawing Catalog
(Ctrl + M).
3. Modify the master drawing properties of the cloning template. On the
General tab, enter a name for the cloning template, and a short
description and keywords.
4. Tekla Structures adds a preliminary thumbnail image for the cloning
template. If necessary, click Change Image and browse for a new image.
The same image will then be displayed when you right-click the thumbnail
and select Preview.
5. Go to the Drawing creation tab and specify how dimensions and marks
are created, and select the objects to be cloned from the master drawing.
6. Click OK.
The new cloning template is added in the Master Drawing Catalog. The
icon is displayed in the Master column of the Drawing List next to
the drawing you added.

See also
Add master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 102)
Add sample and thumbnail images to master drawings (page 115)
Cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog (page 77)
Create drawings using cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog (page 116)

Remove master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog

You can remove obsolete master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog.

Limitations: In the folder view, you cannot remove master drawings from the
Master Drawing Catalog through the folders that you have created yourself.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 105 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 Use the Saved searches folders to display the desired master drawings and
then remove the extra ones.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Create drawings --> Master
drawing catalog.
2. In the Master Drawing Catalog, select the master drawings you want to
remove.
3. Right-click and select Remove from Catalog.
4. Confirm the removal.
Tekla Structures removes the master drawings from the catalog. Any
created drawings that are based on removed master drawings remain in
the Drawing list. The catalog properties that you have entered for the
master drawing are not deleted. They are still available for the master
drawing if you decide to add the master drawing back to the catalog.

Modify master drawing properties

Each master drawing in the Master Drawing Catalog has its own properties:
• You can search for master drawings based on the master drawing name,
description and keywords that you add.
• You can add a sample image (page 115) for each master drawing (Change
image... button).
• The sample image is also shown as a thumbnail in the thumbnail view of
the Master Drawing Catalog.
• You can access drawing properties (Edit drawing properties... button) and
you can, for example, apply object level settings.

TIP Make sure to always add all important information for each master
drawing in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. This makes it a
lot easier to find the master drawings you are looking for.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 106 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 See also
Modify rule set properties (page 108)
Modify saved settings' properties (page 107)
Modify properties and contents of wizard files (page 109)
Modifying cloning template properties (page 110)
Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 75)

Modify saved settings' properties

You can modify the name, description and keywords of saved settings in
Master Drawing Catalog, and change its sample image.
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click a master drawing of the
desired type.
2. Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.
3. Enter or modify the description of the master drawing. You can search
master drawings on the basis of data that you enter here.
4. Enter or modify keywords for the master drawing. Use spaces between
words. You can search master drawings on the basis of data that you
enter here.
5. To add or change the sample image, click Change image and select the
image. You can use.bmp,.jpg,.jpeg, or.png images. We recommend
that you use.png images.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 107 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 6. If needed, modify the drawing properties of the master drawing by clicking
Edit drawing properties... to display the drawing properties dialog box.
This also allows you to apply object level settings.
Save the modified properties. Ensure that you have the correct drawing
property file name at the top.
7. Click OK.

See also
Apply detailed object level settings in saved settings (page 81)
Saved settings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 77)

Modify rule set properties

You can modify the name, description and keywords of rule sets in Master
Drawing Catalog, and change its sample image.
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click a master drawing of the
desired type.
2. In the Edit Rules dialog box, modify the drawing type selections if
necessary.
3. Click Next.
4. Add or remove object groups and select the appropriate master drawing
type.
5. Click Next and do the same for all the selected drawing types.
6. Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.
7. Enter or modify the description of the master drawing.
You can search for master drawings based on the data you enter here.
8. Enter of modify keywords of the master drawing.
Use spaces between words. You can search master drawings on the basis
of data you enter here.
9. To add or change the sample image, click Change image... and select the
image.
You can use .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, or .png images. We recommend that you
use .png images.
The same image is used in the thumbnail view of the Master Drawing
Catalog.
10. Click Save to save your changes.

See also
Rule sets in Master Drawing Catalog (page 79)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 108 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 Modify properties and contents of wizard files
You can modify wizard files in the Master Drawing Catalog using a text
editor. You can change the name, description, and keywords, and add a
sample image.

1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click a wizard file.

2. Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.
3. Enter or modify the description of the master drawing.
You can search for master drawings based on the data you enter here.
4. Enter of modify keywords of the master drawing.
Use spaces between words. You can search for master drawings based on
the data you enter here.
5. To add or change the sample image, click Change image... and select the
image.
You can use .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, or .png images. We recommend that you
use .png images.
The sample image will also be used as the thumbnail image of the master
drawing in the thumbnail view of the Master Drawing Catalog.
6. To edit the contents of the wizard file, click Edit drawing properties...
The wizard file is opened in a text editor. Modify the contents of the file,
and save and close it.
7. Click OK.

See also
Wizards in Master Drawing Catalog (page 80)

Wizard file contents

Wizard files consist of the following entries. Notice the use of parentheses.
set_drawing_type(assembly)
This line defines the type of drawing the wizard creates. The drawing type
appears in parentheses. The options are:

Option Creates
single single-part drawings
assembly assembly drawings
multi_single single-part multidrawings
multi_single_with_layout single-part multidrawings with
layout

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 109 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 Option Creates
multi_assembly assembly multidrawings
multi_assembly_with_layo assembly multidrawings with
ut layout
cast_unit cast unit drawings

set_drawing_attributes(column)
This line tells Tekla Structures which drawing properties to use when creating
the drawings. The name of the saved drawing properties appears in
parentheses.
set_template_drawing
This line tells Tekla Structures to use the defined drawing as a template when
creating a new drawing. This line is used instead of the line
set_drawing_attributes. The path and the name of the drawing template
are given in parenthesis like in the following example:
set_template_drawing("C:\TSModels\AngleModel":"[A.2]")
set_filter(column_filter)
This line tells Tekla Structures which selection filter to use to select the parts
from which to create drawings. The filter name appears in parentheses.
create_drawings()
Tekla Structures starts creating the drawings. This line should always appear
immediately after the lines set_drawing_type, set_drawing_attributes
and set_filter.

See also
Wizards in Master Drawing Catalog (page 80)
Create drawings using rule sets or wizards in Master Drawing Catalog (page 92)
Modify properties and contents of wizard files (page 109)

Modifying cloning template properties

You can modify the name, description and keywords of cloning templates in
Master Drawing Catalog, and change its sample image.
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click a master drawing of the
desired type.
2. Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.
3. Enter or modify the description of the master drawing.
You can search for master drawings based on the data you enter here.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 110 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 4. Enter of modify keywords of the master drawing.
Use spaces between words. You can search for master drawings based on
the data you enter here.
5. To add or change the sample image, click Change image... and select the
image.
You can use .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, or .png images. We recommend that you
use .png images.
The sample image will also be used as the thumbnail image of the master
drawing in the thumbnail view of the Master Drawing Catalog.
6. Go to the Drawing creation tab.
a. For the Dimensions, Marks, and Marks for welds in model, define
whether you want to Clone them, recreate them automatically when
you clone a drawing (Create) or Ignore them in cloning.
b. Select the objects to be cloned from the master drawing: Drawing
welds, Level marks, DWG/DXF, Text files, Texts, Symbols, Graphics,
and Hyperlinks).
7. Click OK.

See also
Cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog (page 77)
Create drawings using cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog (page 116)

Manage Master Drawing Catalog folders

In the folder view of the Master Drawing Catalog you can add new folders,
rename folders, and move folders. You can also copy master drawings to
another folder, and delete master drawings.

• Add new, rename, and move folders: Example: Add, rename, and move
folders (page 112)
• Copy master drawings to another folder: Copy master drawings to another
folder (page 113)
• Delete master drawings from folders: Remove master drawings from a
folder (page 113)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 111 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 NOTE Deleting master drawings from a folder or copying them to another
folder in the folder view does not affect the catalog contents in any
way. The folder view is just another way to help you to keep you
master drawings well organized.

See also
Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 75)

Example: Add, rename, and move folders

This is an example of how you can add, rename and move folders in Master
Drawing Catalog:

1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, click the folder view button to go to

the folder view.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 112 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 2. To add a folder: Right-click the tree area in the upper part of the folder
view, select Create New Folder and enter a name for the new folder.
For example, enter PROJECT_XYZ.
3. To add a subfolder: Right-click folder, in this case PROJECT_XYZ, and
select Create New Sub-folder.
4. Enter a name for the folder.
For example, enter Site12.
5. Create another subfolder Site10 following the steps 3 - 4.
6. To rename a folder: Right-click the folder, select Rename (F2) and enter a
new name.
For example, rename Site10 to Site11.
7. To move a folder upwards: Right-click the folder and select Move up. In
this case, move Site11 one step up.

Copy master drawings to another folder

1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, click the folder view button to go to

the folder view.
2. Open the folder containing the master drawings that you want to copy to
another folder, and select the drawings.
3. Right-click and select Add to and then select the desired folder.

The master drawings are copied. They are not removed from the original
folder.

TIP Use the following keys and key combinations for selecting drawings:
• Select all displayed drawings: Ctrl + A
• Select consecutive drawings: Click the first drawing, hold down Shift and
select the last drawing.
• Select several drawings: Click the first drawing, hold down Ctrl and select the
rest of the drawings.

Remove master drawings from a folder

You may want to remove master drawings from a folder in the folder view, for
example, when you have copied master drawings to another folder and no
longer need them in the original folder.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 113 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, click the folder view button to go to
the folder view.
2. In the upper part of the folder view, click the folder from which you want
to remove drawings.
The master drawings in the folder are shown in the lower part of the view.
3. Select the master drawings to be deleted, right-click and select Remove
from folder.

The master drawings are removed from the folder. The master drawings are
not removed from the catalog, just from the folder.

Sample images of drawings

You can create sample or preview images of the drawings. These screenshots
are saved by default in the \drawings folder under the model folder as .png
files. The sample images are used in Master Drawing Catalog.

You can
• Create sample images (page 114).
• View the sample image of a master drawing by right-clicking the master
drawing and selecting Preview.
• Use sample images as thumbnail images for master drawings (page 115) in
the Master Drawing Catalog views.
• Add sample images to master drawings (page 115) in the Master Drawing
Catalog.

Create sample images for Master Drawing Catalog

You may want to add a sample image for a master drawing in the Master
Drawing Catalog to quickly have a look at the drawing template before you
create drawings. They are also used as thumbnail images in the Master
Drawing Catalog thumbnail list.

Before you can create a sample image of a drawing, you must first create the
drawing.
1. Open the drawing you want to use.
2. Clean up the drawing from unnecessary objects, for example, associativity
symbols.
3. On the Views tab, click Screenshot --> Sample image for Master
drawing catalog.
The image is saved in the \drawings folder under the model folder
in .png format with the same name as the drawing. You can see the name
of the image on the status bar.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 114 Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog
 Add sample and thumbnail images to master drawings
You can add sample images for master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog.
The same image is used as a thumbnail in the Master Drawing Catalog
thumbnail list.

Before you can add a sample image or a preview image to a master drawing,
you must have it somewhere ready.
Sample images are just samples, they are not real-time drawings, and they do
not update when the drawing changes.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Create drawings --> Master
drawing catalog.
2. In the Master Drawing Catalog, locate the desired master drawing and
double-click it to open the Master Drawing Properties dialog box.
3. Add the image you created:
• For the master drawings of the type saved settings, cloning templates,
and wizard files, click Change image... and browse for the sample
image. Click OK to save the image as a sample image.
• For rule sets, click Next until you get to the page where you can add
the sample image. Click Browse and browse for the sample image.
Click Save to save the image as a sample image.
Now you can display the sample image by selecting the master drawing
on the catalog list, right-clicking and selecting Preview. The thumbnail
image in the Master Drawing Catalog thumbnail list is a smaller version
of the same sample image.

See also
Create sample images for Master Drawing Catalog (page 114)

2.8 Clone drawings

You should consider cloning drawings when:
• There are several similar parts, assemblies, or cast units in the model.
• You want to ease editing work when there are several similar parts that
have different position numbers. You may have separate drawings of these
similar parts.
• The drawings need a lot of manual editing
If cloning does not produce a satisfactory result, you need to modify the
cloned drawing manually. For example, you can create a drawing for one truss,

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 115 Clone drawings

 modify the drawing, and then clone it for similar trusses. Sometimes you need
to modify the cloned drawings where the trusses differ.
The cloned drawing may contain more or less parts than the original drawing.
Part properties, marks, associative notes and related text objects are cloned
from a similar part in the original drawing.
You can clone drawings using the cloning templates added in the Master
Drawing Catalog in the existing model and in other models, using a drawing
in the Drawing list of the current model, and using the cloning templates in
the template library.

Click the following links to find out more about cloning:

Create drawings using cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog (page 116)
Clone by using cloning templates located in other models (page 117)
Clone from the Drawing List (page 118)
Clone dimensions in selected views only (page 122)
Clone using drawing templates in template library (page 126)
Cloned objects (page 123)
What to check in cloned drawings (page 123)
Refresh drawing associativity after cloning (page 124)

Create drawings using cloning templates in Master Drawing

Catalog
In the Master Drawing Catalog, you can create single-part, assembly and cast
unit drawings using cloning templates that you have added there from the
Drawing List.

Note that only the cloning templates located in the folder that is set for the
advanced option XS_CLONING_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY are displayed in the
Master Drawing Catalog.
Limitations:
• You cannot clone general arrangement drawings through the Master
Drawing Catalog. You can clone general arrangement drawings only by
using the Clone command in the Drawing List dialog box.
• You cannot clone multidrawings.
• The drawing properties of cloning templates cannot be modified through
the Master Drawing Catalog.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Create drawings --> Master
drawing catalog.
2. Double-click the cloning template that you want to use.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 116 Clone drawings

 3. Go to the Drawing creation tab and specify how dimensions and marks
are cloned.
You can select to ignore the dimensions and marks, clone them, or
recreate them.
The Marks option controls revision marks and all marks for model
objects.
Selecting Create in the Dimensions and Other marks box is useful if
cloning the dimensions or other marks does not produce satisfactory
results. Using this option does not create any new views.
4. On the same tab, select which object types you want to clone.
5. If you want to create a drawing only for certain parts, select the parts from
the model.
You can also use an appropriate selection filter and select the whole
model. Activate only the Select parts selection switch when you select
objects, otherwise the selection may take a long time.
6. Click Create drawings or Create drawings for all parts.
7. Number the model if prompted to do so.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List.
In the Drawing List, cloned drawings are marked with the text Cloned in
the Changes column.
8. Check the cloned drawing and modify it (page 123), if necessary.

TIP If you have cloning templates that you have created using an older Tekla
Structures version and want to utilize the better associativity of a newer Tekla
Structures version, refresh the drawing associativity (page 124) by using the
Refresh Associativity command, which you can type in the Quick Launch box.

See also
Cloned objects (page 123)
Cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog (page 77)
Add a cloning template master drawing in Master Drawing Catalog (page 104)

Clone by using cloning templates located in other models

You can take into use in the Master Drawing Catalog cloning templates
located in other models, and create drawings using them.

Limitations: You can only use cloning templates from other models, not other
types of master drawings, such as saved settings or rule sets.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 117 Clone drawings

 1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Create drawings --> Master
drawing catalog.

2. In the Master Drawing Catalog, click to open the Models Containing

Master Drawings dialog box.
3. Click Add model... and browse to the desired model.
4. Click OK.
Now the cloning templates in the defined folder are displayed in the
Master Drawing Catalog.
5. Select the cloning template from the Master Drawing Catalog and create
a drawing using the selected template.

TIP When you have similar parts in several projects, you can maintain a set of cloning
models and then take the cloning templates in the cloning models in use when
necessary.

See also
Create drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (page 75)
Create drawings using cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog (page 116)
Clone from the Drawing List (page 118)
Clone using drawing templates in template library (page 126)

Clone from the Drawing List

In addition to cloning drawings using cloning templates in Master Drawing
Catalog, you can clone single-part, cast unit, assembly and general
arrangement drawings from the Drawing list.

NOTE • When you clone drawings of assemblies or cast units, they must
have the same type of main part as the assembly or cast unit from
which the original drawing was created. For example, the upper
chords of the original and the cloned truss could be main parts.
• In general arrangement drawings, one main view, and section and
detail views are cloned.

Before cloning, finalize, save, and close the drawing you want to use as a
cloning template.
To clone a drawing from the Drawing list:

1. In the model, select what to include in the drawing:

• If you are cloning a single-part drawings, cast unit drawing or assembly
drawing, select parts, assemblies or cast units.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 118 Clone drawings

 • If you are cloning a general arrangement drawing, select a model view.
To do this, click the desired model view so that the view gets a yellow
frame around it.

2. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing list.

3. In the Drawing list, select the drawing that you want to use as a cloning
template.
4. Click Clone...
5. In the Clone Drawing dialog box, select the drawing object types you
want to clone into the new drawing, and the actions for each object type.
• For Dimensions and Other marks (all marks for model objects), select
whether you want to Clone them, recreate them automatically when
you clone a drawing (Create) or Ignore them in cloning.
Selecting Create in the Dimensions and Dimensions box is useful if
cloning the dimensions or other marks does not produce satisfactory
results. Using this option does not create any new views.
• For other objects, select to Clone or Ignore them.
6. Click Clone selected.
Tekla Structures clones the drawing. In the Drawing list, cloned drawings are
marked with the text Cloned in the Changes column.
For an example of cloning a general arrangement drawing, see Example: Clone
a general arrangement drawing (page 120)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 119 Clone drawings

 See also
Clone drawings (page 115)
Create drawings using cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog (page 116)

Example: Clone a general arrangement drawing

In this example, we first created a general arrangement drawing of the +3200
plan in a building, then edited the drawing and then cloned the general
arrangement drawing of the +6300 plan.
The first floor and second floor are quite similar:

We edited the general arrangement drawing of the +3200 plan view slightly, for
example, deleted some marks.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 120 Clone drawings

 We selected the model view that represents the +6300 plan and then cloned
the drawing using the general arrangement drawing of the +3200 plan as a
template.

In the cloned drawing:

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 121 Clone drawings

 • The drawing view plane has been moved to match the model view +6300
plan.
• If there are parts in matching places, the marks have been cloned to the
new location and the content has been updated.
• Dimensions are cloned.
• All model object marks cloned.

See also
Clone from the Drawing List (page 118)

Clone dimensions in selected views only

The dimension cloning options in the Clone Drawing dialog box affect all
views, whereas the option Dimension creation method in this view sets the
dimension creation method for the selected view only. You can create
automatic dimensions in the front view and clone the dimensions in section
and end view, for example.
1. Double-click the drawing view frame to open the View Properties dialog
box.
2. On the Attributes 2 tab, set Dimension creation method in this view to
Clone.
Using this option affects the creation of the dimensions during cloning
and re-dimensioning of existing drawings.
3. Click Modify.
4. Save and close the drawing.
5. Open the Drawing List, select the drawing and click Clone.
6. In the Clone Drawing dialog box, select the objects to be cloned and the
dimension cloning option (Ignore, Clone, Create).
• If you select Dimension > Ignore, the dimensions will be cloned only
for those views that have Dimension creation method in this view
set to Clone.
• If you select Dimension > Clone, the dimensions will be cloned for all
views.
• If you select Dimension > Create, the dimensions will be created for
all views except for those that have Dimension creation method in
this view set to Do not create.
7. Click Clone selected.

See also
Clone drawings (page 115)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 122 Clone drawings

 Cloned objects
The following objects can be cloned:
• Dimensions
• Marks for welds added in the drawing
• Marks for welds added in the model
• Level marks
• Revision marks
• Annotation objects
• All user-defined attributes of a drawing
• Texts
• Symbols
• Graphical drawing objects (shapes)
• Text files
• DWG/DXF files
• Hyperlinks
• Manually created section and detail views
• When you clone an assembly drawing that includes single-part drawings,
Tekla Structures includes the single-part drawings in the cloned assembly
drawing by default.

See also
Clone drawings (page 115)

What to check in cloned drawings

Always check the cloned drawings to make sure that the drawing contents
meet your needs, and marks, views and dimensions are correct.
You should go through the cloned drawings and check that everything is
correct. Below is a checklist for this purpose.

Object Check and change if necessary

Marks • In general, mark contents are
correct in cloned drawings, but
sometimes you may need to
modify the location of the marks.
• Tekla Structures clones only marks
that can be mapped to the original

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 123 Clone drawings

 Object Check and change if necessary
drawing. To create marks to a
cloned drawing also for parts that
could not be mapped to the
template drawing, set the
advanced option
XS_CREATE_MISSING_MARKS_IN_
INTELLIGENT_CLONING to TRUE
through File
menuSettingsAdvanced
optionsMarking: General.
Views • Ensure that the view sizes and
view orientation are correct, and
that the views are placed correctly
in the cloned drawing. The size of
the views is updated according to
the parts included in the views.
Dimensions • If the cloned drawing contains less
parts than the original drawing,
the dimensions to the missing
parts are automatically removed.
• If the cloned drawing contains
more parts than the original
drawing, Tekla Structures
dimensions the additional parts
using automatic dimensioning, if
you have set the advanced option
XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ADD_
DIMENSIONS to TRUE. Because
Tekla Structures uses automatic
dimensioning for creating
dimensions for new parts, you
may have to check and correct the
created dimensions.
• Add missing dimensions and
remove the incorrect ones.

See also
Clone drawings (page 115)
Cloned objects (page 123)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 124 Clone drawings

 Refresh drawing associativity after cloning
Often improvements in cloning and associativity require that the associative
rules have to be recreated. This can be done by using the Refresh
associativity command. When you use this command, you do not need to
recreate the drawing.

For example, this command is very useful if you have a cloning template you
have created using an older Tekla Structures version and want to utilize the
better associativity of a newer Tekla Structures version.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing list.
2. Open a cloning template the associativity of which you want to refresh.
3. Go to Quick Launch, enter Refresh associativity, and click the
Refresh associativity command on the displayed list.
4. Save the cloning template.

See also
Drawing associativity (page 17)
Clone drawings (page 115)

Copy a drawing to a new sheet

You can copy a drawing to a new sheet. This is useful, for example, if you want
to have the same layout and views as in the original drawing, but highlight
something else on the new drawing sheet.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing list.
2. Select the drawing that you want to use as the original for copying.
3. Right-click and select Create Drawings --> Copy to new sheet .
Tekla Structures copies the original drawing to a new sheet and gives the
copied drawing a new sheet number.

4. Open the new drawing sheet, make the necessary changes and save it.

NOTE If you use the Recreate (Shift+R) command for the copied drawing in the
Drawing list, Tekla Structures asks if you want to copy the drawing again from
the original drawing. If you answer yes, the previously copied drawing sheet
will be replaced by a new copy of the previously selected original drawing.

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 125 Clone drawings

 See also
Create multiple drawing sheets of the same part (page 99)

Clone using drawing templates in template library

This is a more manual way of cloning drawings: you can create drawings using
drawing templates located in the template library. The template library is a
model folder that contains the drawings you want to use as drawing
templates.

1. In a model that you use as a template model, create a drawing you want
to use as a drawing template and save the drawing.
2. In another model, select the objects to be included in the new drawing.
3. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing list.
4. In the drawing list, click Clone....
5. Click Other model.
Use Browse for model... to browse for another model folder containing
the drawing templates that you want.
6. Click Select template...
7. In the Drawing Templates dialog box, select a drawing template and
leave the list open.
8. In the Clone Drawing dialog box, use the Objects and actions in cloning
options to define the drawing objects to be cloned and the actions for
each cloned object.
9. Clone the drawing by clicking Clone selected.
Tekla Structures clones the drawing. In the Drawing list, cloned drawings are
marked with text Cloned in the Changes column.

TIP You can specify that a certain model folder is always used as a template
library using the advanced option XS_?DRAWING_?TEMPLATES_?
LIBRARY .

See also
Clone drawings (page 115)
Clone by using cloning templates located in other models (page 117)

Create drawings in Tekla Structures 126 Clone drawings

3 Search for and open drawings

All drawings in a Tekla Structures model are displayed in the Drawing list
dialog box. You can search, sort, select, and display drawings according to
different criteria, and open the drawings displayed in the list. You can take
snapshots of the drawings, and locate the drawing parts in the model, and to
find out if a part is included in any of the drawings.

Click the following links to find out more.

Open Drawing list (page 128)
What is displayed in the Drawing list (page 128)
Drawing status flags (page 131)
Select the drawings to show in Drawing List (page 133)
Search for drawings and save search results (page 134)

Search for and open drawings 127 Clone drawings

 Select drawings in the Drawing List (page 135)
Check whether parts have drawings (page 136)
Open drawings (page 136)
Manage drawings (page 509)
Create and view drawing snapshots (page 137)

3.1 Open Drawing list

You can open the Drawing list in the model and when a drawing is open.

To open the Drawing list dialog box, do one of the following:

• In the model, on the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing list (Ctrl + L).
• In an open drawing, on the Drawing tab, click Drawing list (Ctrl + O).

See also
Manage drawings (page 509)
Print drawings (page 519)
Search for and open drawings (page 127)
Open drawings (page 136)

3.2 What is displayed in the Drawing list

Drawing list contains a lot of information about the drawings.

Option Description For more information

Issue, Ready for These columns contain Manage drawings
issuing, Lock, Freeze, flags indicating the (page 509)
Master, and Up to date drawing status.
Changes Textual information
about the changes in the
drawing. For example, if
the drawing has been
cloned, it says Cloned in
this column.
Created The creation date of the
drawing.
Modified The latest modification
date of the drawing.

Search for and open drawings 128 Open Drawing list

 Option Description For more information
Revision The revision number or Revising drawings
revision mark of the (page 515)
drawing.
By default, Tekla
Structures shows
revision numbers. To
show revision marks
instead, set the
advanced option
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MA
RK_ON_DRAWING_LIST
to TRUE.
Type The drawing types are Drawing types (page 45)
identified by the
following letters:
• W for single-part
drawings.
• A for assembly
drawings.
• C for cast unit
drawings.
• G for general
arrangement
drawings.
• M for multidrawings.
U (unknown) means that
an error has occurred,
and you need to delete
the drawing.
Size The paper size the
drawing uses.
Mark In a single-part drawing XS_SHOW_REVISION_MA
mark is the part position, RK_ON_DRAWING_LIST
and in an assembly
drawing the assembly
position from which the
drawing was created.

Search for and open drawings 129 What is displayed in the Drawing list
 Option Description For more information
You cannot change
drawing marks.
Mark contains the sheet
number as well, if it is
not zero (0).
You can choose to have
Tekla Structures base
the mark of cast unit
drawings on the position
number or the ID (GUID)
of the cast unit.
Name The name given for the Rename drawings
drawing in the drawing (page 144)
properties dialog box.
Title 1, Title 2, and Title Extra drawing titles Giving titles to drawings
3 added in the drawing (page 144)
properties dialog box.
Ready for issuing by Indicates who has Mark drawings ready for
marked the drawing issuing (page 513)
ready for issuing.
Locked by The Drawing list Lock drawings
column shows who (page 511)
locked the drawing. If
you have logged in to
your Trimble Identity,
your account name is
shown. Otherwise your
user name is shown.
User-defined You can show up to 20 User-defined attributes
attributes user-defined attributes in drawings (page 827)
in the Drawing list.
These user-defined
attributes must be
added in the User-
defined attributes
dialog box or panel in
drawing properties. To
include a user-defined
attribute in drawing lists,
the user-defined
attribute must have the
option special_flag
set to yes in the
objects.inp file.

Search for and open drawings 130 What is displayed in the Drawing list
 See also
Search for and open drawings (page 127)

3.3 Drawing status flags

Tekla Structures uses certain symbols called flags, to indicate the status of the
drawings. The columns Issue, Ready for issuing, Lock, Freeze, Master and
Up to date contain the flags, and the potential additional information is
displayed in the Changes column. If a drawing does not have any flag symbol,
it is up to date.

See also
Manage drawings (page 509)
How to read the drawing status information (page 131)
Search for and open drawings (page 127)

3.4 How to read the drawing status information

The table below explains the meaning of the status flags and information
about the status of a drawing in the Drawing list.

Flag Column where Information in Description

shown the Changes
column
Up to date Parts modified The parts in the
drawing have
changed, for
example, parts

Search for and open drawings 131 Drawing status flags

 Flag Column where Information in Description
shown the Changes
column
have been added
or deleted, or part
properties have
changed.
Quantity The actual
increased or drawing is up to
date, but the
Quantity
number of
decreased
identical parts has
changed.
Up to date All parts deleted All the parts
related to the
drawing have
been deleted.
Lock The drawing is
locked and you
cannot open it for
editing.
Freeze The drawing is
frozen. Changes
made to the
model objects,
which have
drawing objects
associated with
them, are no
longer available in
the drawing.
Master The drawing has
been added as a
master drawing in
the Master
Drawing Catalog.
Ready for issuing Drawing updated The drawing is
marked ready for
issuing. You can
check who
marked the
drawing from the
new Ready for
issuing by
column.

Search for and open drawings 132 How to read the drawing status information
 Flag Column where Information in Description
shown the Changes
column
Up to date Linked drawing You have a linked
changed drawing in this
drawing and the
linked drawing
has been
modified.
Up to date Copied view A copied drawing
changed has been
modified.
Up to date Drawing updated A frozen drawing
has been
updated.
Up to date Drawing updated Drawing that has
been marked
ready for issuing
has changed.
Up to date Cloned The drawing is a
cloned drawing.
The flag
disappears when
you save and
close the drawing.
Issue The drawing has
been issued. For
example, you
might re-issue
drawings that
have been sent to
site.
Issue Issued drawing The issued
changed drawing has been
edited or
otherwise
changed.

See also
Search for and open drawings (page 127)

Search for and open drawings 133 Select the drawings to show in Drawing List
3.5 Select the drawings to show in Drawing List
In addition to using search, you can select which drawings you want to see in
the list and in which order.

To filter the Drawing list contents, do any of the following:

To Do this
Display a predefined set of Select a set of drawings from the or select
drawings drawing set list.
Saved search results are also displayed in this
list.
List all drawings Click Show all.
Invert the contents of the current Click Invert.
list
This feature allows you to list the opposite of
the current content.
For example, if you had selected to display
Locked drawings, clicking Invert shows all
drawings except the locked ones.
List selected drawings only Select the drawings and click Selected.
List up-to-date drawings only Click Up to date.
List drawings that need to be 1. Click Up to date.
updated
2. Click Invert.
Lists only drawings associated 1. Select objects in the model.
with the objects you have selected
2. Click By parts.
in the model.
This is an easy way to identify the drawings
associated with a specific part, assembly or
cast unit.
Sort the list according to column Click the column name.
name

3.6 Search for drawings and save search results

You can search for drawings in the Drawing list.
To search for drawings and save the results:
1. In the Drawing list, enter the search criteria in Enter search criteria.
2. If needed, you can limit the search so that it addresses only information in
a certain column by selecting a column from the Search in list.

Search for and open drawings 134 Search for drawings and save search results
 3. If needed, you can also limit the search to the currently visible drawings by
selecting Search within the currently visible drawings.
4. Click Search.
5. Click Store to save the search results.
6. Enter a name for the search results in the Store Search Result dialog box
and click OK.
The search results are saved in the DrawingListSearches folder, which
is created in the model folder.
You can move the saved search results to your environment, company or
project folder. After you have saved the search results, they will be visible
in the predefined drawing sets list in the Drawing list dialog box.

Example
In the following example, you want to find all cast unit drawings that are
assigned to Dean Detailer:
1. From the drawing sets, select Cast unit drawings. Only cast unit drawings
are displayed in the list.
2. In Enter search criteria, type Dean Detailer.
3. In the Search in list, select Assigned To.
4. Click Search.

3.7 Select drawings in the Drawing List

The Drawing list allows you to select one or several drawings at a time.
Selecting several drawings is useful, for example, if you want to lock or freeze
several drawings at a time, or print several drawings.

To select drawings in the Drawing list:

To Do this
Select one drawing Click the drawing in the list.

Search for and open drawings 135 Select drawings in the Drawing List
 To Do this
Select several consecutive Click the first drawing, then hold down the
drawings Shift key and click the last drawing.
Select several non-consecutive Click the first drawing, then hold down the Ctrl
drawings key and click the other drawings you want to
select.
Select all drawings in the list Press Ctrl+A.

See also
Search for and open drawings (page 127)

3.8 Check whether parts have drawings

You can use the Drawing list to identify parts in the model that have
associated drawings.

Before you start, ensure that you have only the Select parts selection switch

active on the Selecting toolbar. Otherwise selecting objects can take a

long time in large models.
1. Open a model view where all parts are clearly visible.
2. In the Drawing list, press Ctrl + A to select all drawings.
3. To highlight the parts that have drawings, click the Select objects
button.
To see the found parts easier, right-click the model and select Show Only
Selected to show only the parts that the Select objects command has
found and hide all others.
4. After completing the previous step you can highlight the parts that do not
have drawings by holding down the Ctrl key and selecting the entire
model (hold down the left mouse button and drag all the way from left to
right).

3.9 Open drawings

You can open drawings both in the model and in the drawing mode. Only one
drawing can be open at a time.

TIP To always open the drawings maximized, set the advanced option
XS_OPEN_DRAWINGS_MAXIMIZED to TRUE.

Search for and open drawings 136 Check whether parts have drawings
 Open a drawing in the model
• On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing list (Ctrl + L), and then
double-click a drawing to open it.
When you open a drawing, a message box is displayed showing the progress
and what is happening, and a snapshot of the drawing is displayed. You can
click Cancel to cancel the opening.

Open a new drawing when a drawing is already open

You can open another drawing while you already have a drawing open.
Do any of the following:
• On the Drawing tab, click Drawing list (Ctrl + O), and then double-click a
drawing to open it.
• To open the next drawing in the Drawing list, press Ctrl + Page Down.
• To open the previous drawing in the Drawing list, press Ctrl + Page Up.
If you have made some changes in the currently open drawing, Tekla
Structures asks you if you want to save the changes before opening another
drawing. You also have a chance to take a snapshot (page 137) of the current
drawing or mark it ready for issuing (page 513).
When you open a drawing, a message box is displayed showing the progress
and what is happening, and a snapshot of the drawing is displayed. You can
click Drawing list to cancel the opening.

Cannot load the selected drawing

Sometimes, you cannot open the drawing because the drawing file cannot be
found, or the drawing file is somehow incompatible. Tekla Structures then
displays one of the following messages:
• "Cannot load the selected drawing. Could not find the drawing file. Check
Tekla User Assistance for more information."
• "Cannot load the selected drawing. Incompatible drawing file. Check Tekla
User Assistance for more information."
For more information, see Cannot load selected drawing.

3.10 Create and view drawing snapshots

With snapshots you can take a quick look at any drawings without opening the
drawing. Use this tool when you just want to check but not edit a drawing, or

Search for and open drawings 137 Create and view drawing snapshots
 take a look at several drawings while trying to find the one you are looking for,
for example, a certain drawing revision. You can take snapshots of all types of
drawings.

A snapshot is by default created when you open and save a drawing. The
snapshot represents the situation when the drawing was last saved, so any
newer changes to the model are not reflected in the snapshot.
If you have made changes in the drawing and close it by selecting the Close
button in the upper-right corner, a message box is displayed where you can
select if you want to save the drawing, and also if you want to create a
snapshot of the drawing when the drawing is saved.
1. Select a drawing and open it from the Drawing list.
2. Save the drawing by going to the File menu and clicking Save drawing.
The snapshot is saved in the ..\<model>\drawings\Snapshots folder.
3. Select the same drawing from the Drawing list.
4. Click the Snapshots button at the bottom of the Drawing list to display
the snapshot.

Below is an example of a snapshot.

Search for and open drawings 138 Create and view drawing snapshots
 If you have selected a drawing that does not have a snapshot and click
Snapshots, an instructional view is displayed asking you to open the drawing
and save it to create the snapshot.
To create a snapshot of a drawing automatically when the drawing is created,
set XS_DRAWING_CREATE_SNAPSHOT_ON_DRAWING_CREATION to TRUE in the
Drawing Properties category in the Advanced Options dialog box.

Snapshot overlay
Drawing snapshots allow you to view the contents of drawings directly in
model view without opening the actual drawing. You can also show drawing
snapshots against the latest version of a drawing or against another drawing
in the drawing mode. All drawing types can be overlaid with drawing
snapshots.
You can view a snapshot of a drawing while you are editing a drawing. In the
snapshot overlay, you can see the latest changes, and can align the drawing
content, for example. You can see the changes in a drawing since the latest
update, and switch between the snapshot and the actual drawing.
Finding the correct drawing by going through the snapshots is much faster
than opening the actual drawings one by one.
Limitations
• Texts are one sided when viewed from the model, and DX graphics do not
support text in snapshots.
• Overlay in the model was not designed to work for the 3D drawing views .
• Views that are outside the printing area are displayed in the model overlay.
• Reading large GA drawing snapshots may take a long time.
• Loading the snapshot takes longer for the first snapshot than for the rest.
Before you can see a snapshot overlay of a drawing, you need to create a
snapshot (page 137) by opening a drawing, selecting the Create snapshot
check box and saving the drawing.
Below you can see the settings in the snapshot view:

Search for and open drawings 139 Create and view drawing snapshots
 Snapshot overlay in model
1. Open the Drawing list and select a drawing.
2. Click Snapshots.
3. At the top of the displayed snapshot dialog box, under Overlay in model,
select the Overlay check box. You can also select a color for the snapshot.
A cast unit is overlaid with the corresponding cast unit drawing.

Snapshot overlay in drawings

1. Click Drawing --> Drawing list, and open a drawing that has changed
after the latest snapshot.
2. Still in the Drawing list, select the same drawing and click Snapshots.
3. Select one of the options under Overlay in drawing:
Overlay: Show the snapshot on the actual drawing so that both are
visible.
Show snapshot only: Show the snapshot only without the actual drawing.
None: Quickly switch to the actual drawing.
4. Select a color for the snapshot.

Search for and open drawings 140 Create and view drawing snapshots
 In the example below, the size of the cast unit has changed since the snapshot
was taken.

TIP If a plan view GA drawing is open, and you want to align content using
another GA drawing, you can open a snapshot of the second drawing on
the first one, and snap to the snapshot, when placing or moving objects
in an open drawing. You can snap to drawing snapshot overlays with the

Snap to geometry lines / points snap switch .

3.11 Close drawings

You can only have one drawing open at a time. You always have to close an
open drawing before you can open another one.
1. Do one of the following:
• Go to the File menu and click Close drawing mode.
• On the Drawing tab, click Close.

• Click the Close button in the upper-right corner of the drawing

window. If the window is maximized, the button looks a bit different
.
2. If you have made changes in the drawing, Tekla Structures asks you to
confirm if you want to save your changes.
You can also select to mark the drawing ready for issuing, and create a
snapshot.

See also
Search for and open drawings (page 127)

Search for and open drawings 141 Close drawings

 Mark drawings ready for issuing (page 513)
Create and view drawing snapshots (page 137)

Search for and open drawings 142 Close drawings

4 Edit drawings

After you have created a drawing, you can modify properties of the drawing
and views, building objects, and dimensions and marks already included in the
drawing. You can add views, marks, notes, text, shapes and other objects. You
can also change drawing colors, and use special custom presentations for
some object types.

You can edit the drawing name and titles:

Rename drawings (page 144)
Give titles to drawings (page 144)

You can add and edit drawing views, dimensions, marks and other
drawing objects:
Create and modify drawing views (page 145)
Manual dimensioning (page 167)
Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in drawings (page 243)
Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects (page 300)
Building objects in drawings (page 324)
Symbols in drawings (page 482)
Custom presentations in drawings (page 367)
Welds in drawings (page 346)
Edge chamfers in drawings (page 326)
Reinforcement in drawings (page 369)
Pours in drawings (page 464)
Reference models in drawings (page 501)
Grids in drawings (page 469)
Colors in drawings (page 495)
User coordinate system (UCS) (page 504)

Edit drawings 143 Close drawings

 You can move, copy, reposition, and otherwise modify drawing objects:
Show or hide drawing objects (page 282)
Align drawing objects (page 288)
Drag, reshape and resize drawing objects (page 295)
Arrange drawing objects (page 287)
Snapping in drawings (page 290)
Change the shape of leader lines (page 298)

When you save and close the drawings, there are some things you need
to keep in mind:
Save a drawing (page 506)
Close drawings (page 141)
Delete unnecessary drawing files in single-user mode (page 507)

4.1 Rename drawings

Tekla Structures names the drawings according to the name given in the
drawing properties. The drawing name is displayed in the Drawing list and in
drawing templates. You can change the drawing name when you create the
drawing and afterwards.
1. In the Drawing list, right-click the drawing and select Properties....
2. Enter the new name in the Name box.
The maximum number of characters in 32.
3. Click Modify.
Close the Drawing list and open it again to see the change.

See also
Define automatic drawing settings (page 563)

4.2 Give titles to drawings

In addition to the drawing name, you can give titles for your drawings. Tekla
Structures shows the title in the Drawing list and in drawing and report
templates, and also in print output file names. You can define up to three titles
to use in drawing templates.
1. In the Drawing list, right-click the drawing and select Properties...

Edit drawings 144 Rename drawings

 2. Enter the titles.
3. Click Modify.
Close the Drawing list and open it again to see the change.

TIP If you want to customize your print file names and use title values instead of
drawing names in them , you can define that the title entered in this dialog box
is used in the print file name. To do this, enter the value %TPL:TITLE1% (or
%TPL:TITLE2% or %TPL:TITLE3%) for an advanced option
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G (or _W, _A, _M or _C depending on the
drawing type) through File menu --> Settings --> Advanced options -->
Printing .

See also
Define automatic drawing settings (page 563)
Customize print output file names (page 534)

4.3 Create and modify drawing views

Drawing views contain Tekla Structures model objects, and the marks,
dimensions and other objects that you have added. A drawing view is another
way of looking at the model. Drawings may include several views. In addition
to the views Tekla Structures creates automatically based on the drawing
properties, you can also add new ones in the open drawing, and modify the
existing ones.
You can have different types of views in Tekla Structures drawings:
• Main views: front, top, back and bottom views
• Section views
• End views
• Single-part views
• 3D views
• Detail views
• Key plan views
• Views along grid lines
• Elevation views
• Plan views

Adding views manually

You can manually add more views in drawings:
Create a section view (page 146)

Edit drawings 145 Create and modify drawing views

Create a curved section view (page 149)
Create a detail view (page 150)
Create additional drawing views of parts (page 152)
Create a drawing view of an entire model view (page 153)
Create a drawing view of a selected area in a model view (page 154)
Create a drawing view of a selected area in a drawing view (page 155)
Create a drawing view for a reinforcement mesh (page 456)

Copying, linking and moving views

You can move, copy and link views from one drawing to another:
Copy drawing views from other drawings (page 156)
Link drawing views from other drawings (page 159)
Move drawing views to another drawing (page 156)

Modifying views and view location

You can modify views and view location manually:
Resize the drawing view boundary (page 159)
Move drawing views by dragging (page 161)
Align drawing views (page 162)
Rotate drawing views (page 163)
Arrange drawing views (page 163)
Modify drawing view properties (page 164)
Modify detail properties in drawings (page 166)
Modify section properties in drawings (page 164)

See also
Define drawing views (page 612)
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Section view properties (page 849)

Create a section view

You can create section views of the parts in a drawing view in an open drawing
that contains at least one view.
1. Set the section mark properties first: On the Drawing tab, click Properties
--> Section mark .

Edit drawings 146 Create and modify drawing views

2. Modify the cutting line, section mark, and section view label properties in
the Section Mark Properties dialog box, and click OK or Apply.
3. Next, set the section view properties: Hold down Shift and on the Views
tab, click Section view.
4. Modify the view properties as required, and click OK or Apply.
5. Pick two points to define the position of the section plane.
It is easier to pick the points if you activate orthogonal snapping: On the
File menu, click Settings and select Ortho or press O.
For beams, you can also try picking the top line of the beam and then the
bottom line of the beam using the snap switch Snap to perpendicular
points.
6. Pick two points to define the direction of the cut box and the section view
depth.
When you pick the cut box, exaggerate a little. You ca adjust the view
depth and the view boundary also later on.
The direction of the section is the direction where the section mark arrows
are pointing.
7. Pick the position for the section view.
A view symbol follows the mouse pointer allowing you to see where you
are about to place the section view.
The depth to the opposite direction is zero (0).
Tekla Structures creates the section view using the current properties in
the View Properties and Section Mark Properties dialog boxes and adds
a section mark in the original view. You can change the properties after
creating the view.

TIP • The view boundary of the created section view remains selected,
and you can adjust the depth and the height of the view
boundary by dragging it.
• If necessary, change the view scale of the section view: Double-
click the view frame, clear all other selections using the toggle
switch at the bottom, select only the Scale option, and adjust the
scale.
• If you want to create another view, start the Section view
command again.

Edit drawings 147 Create and modify drawing views

1. The first two picked points indicate the position of the section plane.
2. The third picked point indicates the direction of the cut box and the depth
of the section view. Here you can exaggerate a little.

Edit drawings 148 Create and modify drawing views

3. The fourth pick finalizes the cut box.
4. A view symbol follows the mouse pointer while you are placing the section
view. The section view is placed in the selected location. The section view
remains selected and the view boundary highlighted right after the view
creation.
The section mark is drawn in the original view. The view boundary of the
section view is also highlighted in the original view right after the view
creation.

See also
Modify section properties in drawings (page 164)
Define view labels and view label marks (page 616)
Section view properties (page 849)
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Modify drawing view properties (page 164)

Create a curved section view

You can create a curved section view of an existing drawing view. This tool is
useful when you want to visualize an unfolded face of a building or to manage
cladding.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Set the section mark properties first: On the Drawing tab, click Properties
--> Section mark .
3. Modify the cutting line, section mark, and section view label properties,
and OK or Apply.
4. Set the section view properties: Hold down Shift and on the Views tab,
click Curved section view.
5. Modify the view properties as required, and click OK or Apply.
6. Pick three points on the cut plane.
7. Pick two points to indicate the cut box.
8. Pick a point to indicate the location of the curved section view.
A symbol follows the cursor allowing you to see where you are about to
place the curved section view.

Tekla Structures creates the curved section view using the current properties
in the View Properties and Section Mark Properties dialog boxes and adds a
section mark in the original view. You can change the properties after creating
the view.

Edit drawings 149 Create and modify drawing views

See also
Modify section properties in drawings (page 164)
Define view labels and view label marks (page 616)
Section view properties (page 849)
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Modify drawing view properties (page 164)

Create a detail view

You can create a detail view from a selected area in an existing drawing view in
another view. The scale of the detail view is by default the same as that of the
main view, but in some environments the detail view is scaled up. The
direction of the detail view is the same as that of the original view.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Set the detail mark properties first: On the Drawing tab, click Properties
--> Detail mark .
3. Enter a name for the detail, and modify the detail view label, detail
boundary and detail mark properties in the Detail Properties dialog box.
The shape of the detail boundary you select affects the way you select the
area for your detail.
4. Click OK or Apply.
5. Next, set the view properties: Hold down Shift and, on the Views tab, click
Detail view.
6. Modify the view properties as required.
7. Click OK or Apply.
8. Depending on the selected detail boundary shape, do one of the
following:
• If the shape is Circle, pick the center point of the circle and then pick a
point on the circle.
• If the shape is Rectangle, pick corner points for the rectangle.
9. Pick a position for the detail mark.
10. Pick a position for the detail view.

Tekla Structures creates the detail view using the current properties in the
View Properties dialog box and Detail Properties dialog box. The detail view

Edit drawings 150 Create and modify drawing views

takes the view depth from the original view even if you try to change it. You
can change the properties after creating the view.

Detail boundary is set to Circle

Detail mark

Detail view
Detail view label

TIP You can increase or decrease the detail symbol by dragging the handle on the
detail boundary.

Edit drawings 151 Create and modify drawing views

See also
Modify detail properties in drawings (page 166)
Modify drawing view properties (page 164)
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Define a start number or letter for detail view label and mark (page 152)

Define a start number or letter for detail view label and

mark
Before creating the detail view label and detail mark define a start number or
letter in the drawing properties.
1. Double-click an open drawing.
2. Click the check box toggle selection button at the bottom of the dialog
box, and select only the check box next to the Detail view button.
3. Click Detail view.
4. Enter the start number or letter.
5. Click Modify.

See also
Create a detail view (page 150)

Create additional drawing views of parts

You can create additional views of a part within a single-part, cast unit or
assembly drawing. You can select the part plane (front, top, back, bottom) to
use or create a 3 D view of the part.
1. Open a drawing.
2. On the Views tab, click View of part and select one of the following:
• Front
• Top
• Back
• Bottom
• 3D view
Tekla Structures creates the view using the current properties in the View
Properties dialog box. If a plane already has a view in the drawing, a new
one is not created.

Edit drawings 152 Create and modify drawing views

3. Double-click the frame of the new view to open the View Properties
dialog box and modify the properties as required.
For example, for 3D views, you may want to modify the view angle.
4. Click Modify.

Example
In the example below, the drawing originally contained only the front view. A
3D view and a top view were added. The angle of the 3D view was modified in
the View Properties dialog box.

See also
Modify drawing view properties (page 164)
View properties in drawings (page 844)

Create a drawing view of an entire model view

You can create a drawing view of an entire model view and add it in a drawing.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open the model view list: On the Views tab, click Model views --> Model
view list , and leave the list open.
3. Set the drawing view properties: Hold down Shift, and on the Views tab,
click Entire model view.

Edit drawings 153 Create and modify drawing views

4. Modify the view properties, for example the view scale, and click OK or
Apply.
5. Open a model view from the model view list.
6. Click the open model view.

Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the current properties in the
View Properties dialog box. It calculates the boundaries of the view to fit the
entire model view into the drawing view, and places the view in the drawing.

See also
Modify drawing view properties (page 164)
View properties in drawings (page 844)

Create a drawing view of a selected area in a model view

You can create a drawing view of a selected area in the model, and add it in a
drawing.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open a model view list: On the Views tab, click Model views --> Model
view list , and leave the list open.
3. Set the drawing view properties: Hold down Shift and on the Views tab,
click Area in model view.
4. Modify the drawing view properties as required, and click OK or Apply.

Edit drawings 154 Create and modify drawing views

5. Open a model view from the model view list.
6. Pick two corners in the model to define the X and Y dimensions of the
drawing view.
The X and Y directions use the coordinate system of the model view. The
view depth of the drawing view is the same as the depth of the model
view.

Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the current properties in the
View Properties dialog box and places the view in the current drawing.

See also
Modify drawing view properties (page 164)
View properties in drawings (page 844)

Create a drawing view of a selected area in a drawing view

You can create a new drawing view of an area in an existing drawing view.

To create a new drawing view of an area in the existing drawing view:

1. Open a drawing.
2. Hold down Shift and on the Views tab, click Area in drawing view.
3. You can modify the view label color.
Other view properties are inherited from the original drawing view.
4. Click OK or Apply.
5. Select an area in the drawing view to be added in the new view.
6. Select a location for the new view.
A symbol representing the view that you are about to place follows the
mouse pointer, so it is easier for you to see where to place the view.

Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the view properties of the
original view.

See also
Create and modify drawing views (page 145)
Modify drawing view properties (page 164)
View properties in drawings (page 844)

Edit drawings 155 Create and modify drawing views

Add single-part views in assembly drawings
In addition to automatically including single-part views in assembly drawings
through drawing properties, you can also add single-part drawing views in an
open assembly drawing.
1. Open the assembly drawing.
2. In the drawing view, select the parts of which you want to create a single-
part view.
3. Right-click and select Create single-part views.

Tekla Structures adds the single-part views to the assembly drawing using the
current properties in the Assembly Drawing Properties dialog box ( Drawing
properties --> Assembly drawing --> Layout --> Other --> Single-part
attributes ).

See also
XS_NO_END_VIEWS_TO_INCLUDED_SINGLE_DRAWINGS
Include single-part drawings in assembly drawings (page 620)

Copy drawing views from other drawings

You can copy drawing views from other drawings in the current drawing as
such or using the original layout.
1. Open a drawing where you want to add drawing views.
2. Open the Drawing list by pressing Ctrl + O.
3. Select the drawing containing the view you want to copy.
You can select several drawings.
4. On the Views tab, click From other drawing and then click one of the
following commands:
• Copy: Copy the views from the selected drawings as such in the open
drawing. Tekla Structures does not copy the drawing layout.
• Copy with layout: Copy the views and layout from the selected
drawings in the open drawing.

NOTE Copied drawing views do not update when the original views change.

See also
View properties in drawings (page 844)

Edit drawings 156 Create and modify drawing views

Move drawing views to another drawing
You can move section and detail views to another drawing through the
drawing list. When you move views to another drawing, the source drawing
and the target drawing will contain references to each other.

TIP General arrangement drawings are often full of information. You may
want to create empty general arrangement drawings and move detail or
section views from the original general arrangement drawings to the
empty drawing.

1. In an open drawing, select the frame of the drawing view you want to
move.
2. Right-click and select Move to drawing from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the target drawing from the Drawing list.
You can select additional drawing views after you have started the Move
to drawing command and move multiple drawing views in one go. If you
have multiple drawing views selected before starting the Move to
drawing command, the command will not be available.
4. Click Move in the Move view to drawing dialog box.
5. Close and save the source drawing.
Tekla Structures moves the selected view to the target drawing and
creates references between the source and target drawings.
6. Open the target drawing from the Drawing list.
The Drawing list indicates that the drawing has been updated.
7. Arrange the drawing views, if necessary.
8. Save the target drawing.

Example
In this example, we have two drawings on the Drawing list: BEAM1 and BEAM2.

We move section view C-C from drawing BEAM1 to BEAM2. Below is the original
section view in the source drawing BEAM1.

Edit drawings 157 Create and modify drawing views

We move this view to drawing BEAM2 according to the instructions above.
Below is the moved section view in the target drawing BEAM2. The view label
name contains the name of the source drawing BEAM1.

In the source drawing BEAM1, the section mark of the moved section view
contains a reference to the target drawing BEAM2.

Edit drawings 158 Create and modify drawing views

TIP You can use the following advanced options to set the reference text for section
view labels:
XS_SECTION_VIEW_REFERENCE
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_REFERENCE
XS_DETAIL_VIEW_REFERENCE
XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE

See also
Define automatic free or fixed placement for drawing views (page 611)
Arrange drawing views (page 163)
Create and modify drawing views (page 145)

Link drawing views from other drawings

You can link drawing views from other drawings as such or using the original
layout. Linked drawing views update when the original views change.
1. Open a drawing where you want to link drawing views.
2. Open the Drawing list by pressing Ctrl + O.
3. Select the drawing containing the drawing view you want to link.
You can select several drawings.
4. On the Views tab, click From other drawing and click one of the following
commands:
• LinkLink: Display the views of the selected drawings in the open
drawing. Tekla Structures does not copy the drawing layout.
• Link with layout: Display the views and the layout of the selected
drawings in the open drawing.

See also
View properties in drawings (page 844)

Resize the drawing view boundary

The view boundary or view restriction box is the dashed frame around the
contents of a drawing view, which becomes visible when you click the view
frame. You can resize the view boundary, for example, to show just a specific
part of the view contents.

When you select a view, the view boundary is highlighted also in other views.
When you change the selected view's boundary in the other views using view

Edit drawings 159 Create and modify drawing views

boundary handles, the change can be seen in the view boundary of the
selected view. This way you can easily adjust the section view plane and view
depth, and you do not need to go to the view properties dialog box to do this.
1. Click the view frame.
2. Click one of the handles on the view boundary.
3. Drag the handles along the x or y axis of the view.
When the view boundary changes size, the view frame adjusts with the
new boundary size.

View boundary handle

View boundary

View frame

Edit drawings 160 Create and modify drawing views

 Resized view boundary and view

Example
In the example below, the section view in the bottom-left corner has been
selected, and the view boundary is highlighted in two other views. You can
change the view boundary of the selected view in the other views by dragging
the view boundary handles, to change the section view depth, for example.

See also
XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_IN_ANOTHER_VIEWS
XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_IN_FATHER_VIEW_ONLY

Move drawing views by dragging

You can move drawing views by dragging.
1. Click the view frame.

Edit drawings 161 Create and modify drawing views

2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the view to a new location.
The view follows the cursor while you drag the view, which makes it easier
to follow the view movement.

NOTE When you drag a view, its placing setting may change to Fixed depending on
what is set for the advanced option XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED.
This advanced option is by default set to TRUE, which means that the placing
setting changes to Fixed when the view is dragged.

See also
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED

Align drawing views

You can align views vertically or horizontally.
1. Select a drawing view in an open drawing, then right-click to display the
pop-up menu.
2. Select Align vertically from the pop-up menu.
3. Pick a point in the selected view.
4. Pick a point in the view with which you want to align the selected view.

Edit drawings 162 Create and modify drawing views

 Tekla Structures moves the views so that the picked points line up
vertically.

Rotate drawing views

You can rotate the views in drawings.
1. Click the frame of the view you want to rotate.
2. On the Views tab on the ribbon, click Rotate view.
3. Enter the angle in degrees, for example, 90 or -90, in the displayed dialog
box and click Rotate.

Arrange drawing views

You can fit the drawing views so that they include all connected objects, and
rearrange the drawing views using the current properties in the Layout
Properties dialog box.

• On the Views tab, click Arrange.

NOTE • Arrange views only affects views where the Place is set to Free in
the view properties. Fixed views are not moved.

Edit drawings 163 Create and modify drawing views

 • If you have set XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED to TRUE
(default) and drag a view in a drawing, the view becomes fixed, and
the Arrange views command does not work
• Arrange views may change the drawing size if you have used
automatic scaling of drawing views.

Modify drawing view properties

You can modify view properties in the final drawing view by view or in selected
views.
1. Do one of the following:
• If you want to modify the properties in several views, hold down Ctrl,
click the view frames of the views you want to modify, and on the
Drawing tab, click Properties --> View.
• To modify the properties of one view, double-click the view frame.
2. Modify the view properties as required.
For example, change the view Scale.
3. Click Modify.
4. If there are some object level settings that you want to apply, click the Edit
settings... button and load the object settings that you want to use. Click
Modify.

See also
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Move drawing views by dragging (page 161)
Modify view-level drawing properties (page 28)

Modify section properties in drawings

You can modify section mark, section view label and section view cutting line
properties in an open drawing.
1. Double-click the section mark.

Edit drawings 164 Create and modify drawing views

2. On the Cutting line tab, set the section mark line length and offset
(distance between the mark and the section).
3. On the Section mark tab, click the ... button next to A1–A5 to open the
Mark Contents dialog box and select the elements to be included in the
section mark.
4. If needed, select an element from the list, click Add > and select the frame
Type and Color. You can set these individually for each element.
5. If needed, select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font
and Height. You can set these individually for each element.
6. On the Position tab of the Mark Contents dialog box, set the side to
show the text, the text position, the horizontal and vertical offset, and the
text rotation. Text positioning depends on whether you use a symbol or
not.
7. Click Modify.
8. In the Symbol area, define the section mark symbols. You can select from
a list of predefined arrow symbols or use your own custom symbol. The
symbol properties can be given separately for both the left and the right
section mark symbols. Also set the color, size and position of section mark
symbols.
9. On the View label tab, click the ... button next to A1–A5 to open the Mark
Contents dialog box, and select the elements to be included in the
section view label.
10. Modify the element appearance and mark position as described above.
11. Click Modify.
12. Select the view label Symbol to be used in the label. You can also set the
color, size, and the line length of the section view label line and symbol.
13. Set the label position and whether you wan to center it according to the
view frame or view boundary (view restriction box)
14. Click Modify.

Edit drawings 165 Create and modify drawing views

See also
View, section view and detail view label mark elements (page 903)
Section and detail mark elements (page 903)
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks (page 884)
Section view properties (page 849)

Modify detail properties in drawings

You can modify the properties of detail marks, detail view labels and detail
mark boundaries in an open drawing.
1. Double-click a detail mark to display the Detail Properties dialog box.
2. Modify the detail name in the Detail name box.
3. On the View label tab, click the ... button next to A1–A5 to open the Mark
Contents dialog box, and select the elements to be included in the detail
view label.
4. If needed, select an element from the list, click Add > and select the frame
Type and Color. You can set these individually for each element.
5. If needed, select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font
and Height. You can set these individually for each element.
6. On the Position tab of the Mark Contents dialog box, set the text
position, horizontal and vertical offset, and the text alignment. Text
positioning depends on whether you use a symbol or not.
7. Click Modify.
8. Select the view label Symbol to be used in the label. You can also set the
color, size, and the line length of the view label line and symbol.
9. Select the Vertical (Above or Below) and Horizontal (Center by view
frame or Center by view restriction box) position of the view label.
10. Go to the Detail boundary tab and define the shape of the boundary and
the color and type of the bounding line.
Use the advanced option XS_DETAIL_BOUNDARY_RADIUS for setting a
fixed size for the detail boundary.
11. On to the Detail mark tab, click the ... button next to A1–A5 to open the
Mark Contents dialog box and select the elements to be included in the
detail mark.
12. Modify the element appearance and mark position as described above.
13. Click Modify.
14. Select the detail mark Symbol to be used in the mark. You can also
change the color and size of the symbol.

Edit drawings 166 Create and modify drawing views

 15. Click Modify in the Detail Properties dialog box.

See also
View, section view and detail view label mark elements (page 903)

4.4 Manual dimensioning

In addition to the automatically created dimensions defined in the drawing
properties of the created drawings, Tekla Structures contains several tools for
modifying dimensions and for adding new dimensions in an open drawing.

Add manual dimensions

You can add manual dimensions to drawings:
Add manual dimensions (page 168)
Example: Manual dimensions (page 170)
Add manual dimensions using User Coordinate System (page 174)
Add dual dimensions manually (page 180)
Recreate dimensions for all parts (page 181)
Add manual dimensions to general arrangement drawings (page 174)
Add dimensions to reinforcement (page 182)
Dimension rebars with Rebar group dimensioning application (page 191)
Dimension center of gravity (COG) (page 225)
Add closing dimensions (page 236)
Add or remove dimension points (page 237)

Modify dimensions
You can modify dimensions manually:
Modify dimension properties (page 230)
Add tags to dimensions (page 176)
Example: How to filter out dimension tag content (page 178)
Drag dimension marks (page 241)
Move the end of the dimension line (page 242)
Exaggerate selected dimensions in drawings (page 229)
Add dimension points in anchor bolt plans (page 233)
Show plate side marks on dimension leader lines (page 233)
Change the location of short outside dimension texts (page 234)

Edit drawings 167 Manual dimensioning

Set a new dimension start point (page 235)
Link perpendicular dimension lines (page 237)
Combine dimension lines (page 238)
Drag dimension marks (page 241)
Move the end of the dimension line (page 242)

See also
Dimension and dimensioning properties (page 850)
Dimension properties - Marks and Tags tabs (page 858)
Define dimensioning (page 649)

Add manual dimensions

In addition to automatic dimensions, you can add dimensions manually in an
open drawing. Manual dimensions are not recommended to be used in 3D
views.
1. Hold down Shift and, on the Dimensioning tab, click one of the
dimensioning buttons depending on the type of dimension you want to
create:

Horizontal: Create a dimension in the x direction by picking the

points to be dimensioned. X depends on the current UCS.

Vertical: Create a dimension in the y direction by picking the points

to be dimensioned. Y depends on the current UCS.

Perpendicular: Create a dimension perpendicular to a line you

define by picking two points to set the direction of the dimension line, and
then picking the points to be dimensioned.

Orthogonal: Create a dimension in either the x or y direction by

picking the points to be dimensioned. Tekla Structures uses the direction
of the larger overall distance. X and y depend on the current UCS.

Curved dimension, orthogonal reference lines: Create curved

dimension with orthogonal reference lines by picking three points to
define the arc and then picking the points to be dimensioned. The
dimension text on the line can be either a distance or an angle value.

Edit drawings 168 Manual dimensioning

 Curved dimension, radial reference lines: Create curved
dimension with radial reference lines by picking three points to define the
arc and then picking the points to be dimensioned. The dimension text on
the line can be either a distance or an angle value.

Free: Create a dimension parallel to a line between any two points

you pick.

COG: Indicate the location of the center of gravity (COG) in single-

part, assembly, and cast unit drawings by creating COG dimensions and
adding a COG symbol at the center of gravity. You can also create COG
dimensions in section views.

Parallel: Create a dimension parallel to a line you define by first

picking two points to define the direction of the dimension line and then
picking the points to be dimensioned.

Radial: Create radial dimension by picking three points to define the

arc and pick a position for the dimension.

Angular: Create angular dimension by picking the vertex point and

two points to define the angle. Pick the side to place the dimension.
2. Modify the dimension properties in the properties dialog box.
3. Add the desired elements in dimension marks and modify their
properties.
4. Add dimension tags with the desired elements as required, and set the
dimension tag rotation.
You can also include part count to dimension tags and select a filter that
removes the desired default content from the tag.
The available dimension mark and dimension tag mark elements are the
same as those for the part, bolt, reinforcement and surface treatment
marks.
5. Click OK or Apply.
6. Add the dimensions by following the instructions on the status bar.
It is very important to use correct snap switches to get the dimensions
correct. You can change the switch temporarily by right-clicking and
selecting the switch that suits the best for your purpose.
In dimension types where you click the middle mouse button to place the
dimension line, the placement setting affects the result. If you have set
Placing to fixed, the position you click will be the location of the

Edit drawings 169 Manual dimensioning

 dimension line. If you have set Placing to free, the middle mouse button
click defines which side of the object the dimension line is located on, and
Tekla Structures places the dimension line.
7. Drag the dimensions to the desired locations.
When you drag the dimensions, the Placing setting changes to fixed by
default.
You can also drag the dimension mark, and when you drag it, a leader line
is automatically created.

See also
Define object protection and placement settings in drawings (page 603)
Modify dimension properties (page 230)
Dimension and dimensioning properties (page 850)
Change the prefix in radial dimensions (page 728)
Add tags to dimensions (page 176)
Mark elements (page 892)

Example: Manual dimensions

Here are some examples of added manual dimensions (page 168).

Command Example
Add parallel dimension

Shows the edge points picked for

defining the direction for the parallel
dimension line.

Shows the dimension points

picked.

Edit drawings 170 Manual dimensioning

 Command Example
Same part as before, now
dimensioned with Add

perpendicular dimension

Shows the edge points picked for

defining the direction for the
perpendicular dimension line.

Shows the dimension points

picked.

Add curved dimension with

orthogonal reference lines

The dimension text on the line is a

distance value.

Edit drawings 171 Manual dimensioning

 Command Example
If the ends of a curved beam or
polybeam have been cut or fitted, the
points at the ends of the beam do not
necessarily lie on the true curve of the
beam. This is because curved beams
are created with straight segments.

The points are indicated with

To avoid creating incorrect curved
dimensions, pick the three points
defining the arc using three of the

points indicated with

Use end point snap.

Add curved dimension with radial

reference lines

Curved set to Distance.

The dimension text on the line is a
distance value.

Edit drawings 172 Manual dimensioning

 Command Example
Add curved dimension with radial
reference lines

Curved set to Angle.

The dimension text on the line is an
angle value.

Add angular dimension

Angle set to Degrees at angle

vertex.

Add angular dimension

Angle set to Degrees on side

Add angular dimension

Angle set to Triangle.

Triangle base length set to 100

Edit drawings 173 Manual dimensioning

 Command Example
Add radial dimension

Add manual dimensions to general arrangement drawings

You can dimension parts to grids along their X, Y, or X and Y axis and along grid
lines in general arrangement drawing plan views.

Limitation: Parts like beams that are not located along the grids are not
dimensioned.
1. Open a general arrangement drawing.
2. To check and change the dimension properties, on the Drawing tab, click
Properties --> Dimension , make the necessary changes and click Apply
or OK.
3. On the Dimensioning tab, click GA dimensions and the click one of the
following commands:
• To dimension along grid lines, click Add dimensions along grid lines
and pick the view in the location where you want to create the
dimensions.
• To dimension along part X or Y axis or both, select the part, and click
Along part X axis, Along part Y axis or Along part X and Y axis. The
parts are dimensioned to the two nearest grids.
Tekla Structures creates the dimensions according to the dimension
properties you defined in the Dimension Properties dialog box.

For instructions on how to dimension reinforcement in GA drawings, see Add

dimensions to reinforcement (page 182).

See also
Modify dimension properties (page 230)

Edit drawings 174 Manual dimensioning

Add manual dimensions using User Coordinate System
You can pick UCS (user coordinate system) points to define the current
coordinate system in the drawing view. If you do this, the dimensioning

commands Horizontal , Vertical and Orthogonal follow the

defined coordinate system.
1. Open a drawing.
2. On the Views tab, click User coordsys --> Set origin by two points.
3. Pick the UCS origin and the UCS X direction.

4. Click Dimensioning --> Horizontal .

5. Pick the start and end point for the dimension.

6. Point to the location where you want to add the dimension line and click
the middle mouse button.

Edit drawings 175 Manual dimensioning

NOTE When you use the Orthogonal command , it automatically finds out
whether the dimension line is in the X or Y direction depending on which one
is the closest.

See also
User coordinate system (UCS) (page 504)
Add manual dimensions (page 168)

Add tags to dimensions

You can add dimension tags with the desired elements to single and combined
dimensions in an open drawing. In addition to elements, you can include part
count, or select a filter that removes the desired default content from the tag.

Limitations:
• Rotation is not available for the middle dimension tags.
• The dimension tags are automatically updated according to model
changes, when you update the drawing. If you want to disable the
automatic update, you can freeze the drawing or set the advanced option
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED to FALSE. This advanced option
affects all drawings.

To add tags to dimensions:

1. Double-click the dimension.
2. Go to the Tags tab and select the locations where you want to add
dimension tags.

Edit drawings 176 Manual dimensioning

 You can add dimension tags above and below the dimension line to the
left and right end of the line, to the dimension line ends, and in the middle
of the dimension line below the line.

3. Click the ... buttons to go to tag mark properties.

You can also enter text directly in the A - G boxes.
4. Select the tag rotation. Each tag has an independent rotation setting, so
you can rotate some tags and leave others unrotated.
• Parallel to dimension line does not rotate the tag. This is the default
value.
• Perpendicular to dimension line rotates the tag.
5. Select the tag content type.
6. Include the desired elements in the dimension tag.
The available elements are the same as those of the part, pour object,
bolt, reinforcement and surface treatment marks.
7. Select the element frame type and color and the text color, font, and
height.
8. Click OK.
9. If you want to show the part count in the tag, set Include part count in
the tag to Yes.
10. Use Exclude parts according to filter and select a predefined filter to
remove some of the automatically created tag content.
In addition to the user-selectable elements, some of the dimension tag
content is automatically created based on the dimension end point
locations. If you want to exclude unnecessary tag content for parts that
are located in the same location as the dimensioning point, create suitable
drawing view filter.
11. If you are adding tags to curved dimensions, you can select the tag type in
Curved Dimension Tag Type.
12. Click Modify.

Example
Below is an example of dimension tags:

Edit drawings 177 Manual dimensioning

Below is an example of an unrotated and a rotated dimension tag:

See also
Example: How to filter out dimension tag content (page 178)
Dimension properties - Marks and Tags tabs (page 858)

Example: How to filter out dimension tag content

In this example, you will remove from a dimension tag some content that is
added in the tag automatically based on the dimension end point locations.
First you will create a drawing view filter that you will use for removing the
content.
The example below shows a tag that automatically contains the text "CORBEL".
You will remove this text.

Edit drawings 178 Manual dimensioning

To create the filter and remove the desired content:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Double-click the view frame to open the View Properties dialog box.
3. Click Filter.
4. Click Add row and create a filter according to the example below so that
you select Template as the category, and MATERIAL_TYPE as the
property, and enter CONCRETE as the value.

5. Enter concrete as the name of the filter in the box next to the Save
button and click the button to save the filter.
6. In the drawing, double-click the dimension that contains the content that
you want to remove.
7. In the Dimension Properties dialog box, go to the Tags page.

Edit drawings 179 Manual dimensioning

8. In Exclude parts according to filter, select the concrete filter.
9. Click Modify.
Tekla Structures removes the text "CORBEL" from the dimension tag. The
material type of corbel is concrete, and the concrete filter removes all
concrete parts from the tag.

See also
Add tags to dimensions (page 176)

Add dual dimensions manually

In dual dimensions, you can show dimensions in different units and format
above and below the dimension line.

You can add dual dimension automatically (page 722), or manually in an

existing drawing.
To add dual dimensions manually:
1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Options , go to the Drawing
dimensions settings.
2. Set the unit, formats and precision, and activate the dual dimensions for
the drawing types you want in Dimensions in tags.
3. Click OK.
4. Double-click a dimension in your drawing.
5. Go to the Tags tab, and enter the text DIMENSION in the middle
dimension tag.

Edit drawings 180 Manual dimensioning

6. Click Modify.
7. If you do not want to show dual dimensions in all dimensions, you can
manually delete the text DIMENSION from the tag.

Example
Below is an example of dual dimensions that use the unit mm and format ###.

See also
Modify dimension properties (page 230)
Dimension properties - Marks and Tags tabs (page 858)

Recreate dimensions for all parts

You can recreate the dimensions that were originally created for the parts in
the drawing.
1. In an open drawing, check that you have set Dimension creation
method in this view to Automatically in the drawing view properties.
Tekla Structures dimensions parts only in views where this setting is set to
Automatically.

Edit drawings 181 Manual dimensioning

2. On the Dimensioning tab, click Recreate all dimensions.
Tekla Structures re-dimensions all views except linked, 3D and key plan
views, and removes all manually created dimensions.

Add manual dimensions (page 168)

View properties in drawings (page 844)

See also
Add manual dimensions (page 168)
View properties in drawings (page 844)

Add dimensions to reinforcement

You can manually add dimension lines and dimension marks to reinforcing bar
groups. When adding dimensions, start by using predefined dimension
settings defined for your environment, and modify these settings for individual
dimensions, if necessary. There are reinforcement dimension settings affecting
the whole model in the Options dialog box.
In addition to the rebar dimensioning methods described below, you can also
dimension rebars by using the application Dimension rebars with Rebar group
dimensioning application (page 191).

Add dimension marks or dimension tags to rebar groups

Each reinforcing bar group may have a dimension mark or a tagged dimension
mark. These dimensions are created based on predefined dimension
properties that you have selected in File --> Settings --> Options --> Drawing
dimensions. The commands are available in GA drawings and cast unit
drawings. You may want to add reinforcement dimension marks or tagged
dimension marks especially in concrete cast unit drawings, where there is only
one reinforced cast unit visible.
To add dimension marks or tagged dimension marks to rebar groups:
1. To select the desired predefined settings, go to File --> Settings -->
Options --> Drawing dimensions, and load the desired predefined
dimension properties files in Dimension Mark settings and Tagged
Dimension Mark settings.
You can also select the representation for tapered skewed and curved
reinforcement group dimensions, and add a dimension line extension to
dimension lines that have arrows. For more information, see section
"Predefined reinforcement dimension settings in the Options dialog box"
below.

Edit drawings 182 Manual dimensioning

2. In an open drawing, right-click the reinforcing bar group and select one of
the following dimension mark commands and pick a location for the
dimension:
Add Mark --> Dimension Mark .

Add Mark --> Tagged Dimension mark .

You can change the representation of the current rebar dimension after
creating it by double-clicking the rebar dimension in an open drawing, and
modifying the dimension content (page 851), appearance (page 856), and
marks and tags (page 858) as required. For example, you may want to add
more tags, change dimension mark content, or select how to align tags in
curved dimensions.

Add dimension lines to rebar groups

The Create dimension line command shows the distribution of the rebars in
the group, and draws dashed lines from the dimension lines to the rebars
when you drag the dimension outside the rebar group. This command is
available in GA drawings and cast unit drawings, but you may want to use it
especially in GA reinforcement drawings, because they may contain a lot of
parts with rebar groups, and you often need to show only one rebar from the

Edit drawings 183 Manual dimensioning

group and drag the dimension line to a proper place to see everything clearly.
This command creates dimensions based on the predefined dimension
properties that you have selected in File --> Settings --> Options --> Drawing
dimensions.
To add dimension lines showing the distribution of the reinforcing bars to
rebar groups:
1. To select the desired predefined settings, go to File --> Settings -->
Options --> Drawing dimensions, and load the desired predefined
dimension properties file in Dimension line settings.
You can also select the representation for tapered skewed and curved
reinforcement group dimensions, and add a dimension line extension to
dimension lines that have arrows. For more information, see section
"Predefined reinforcement dimension settings in the Options dialog box"
below.
2. Right-click a reinforcing bar group and click Create dimension line.
Tekla Structures creates the dimension line.
3. You can drag the reinforcement dimension line out of the reinforcement
bar group.
When you do this, Tekla Structures draws a dashed line from the
reinforcing bar to the dimension line. If the new location is in the
reinforcement area, the dimension mark follows the intersection of the
reinforcement bar and reinforcement dimension line.
To change the representation of the current rebar dimension, double-click
the rebar dimension in an open drawing, and modify the dimension
content (page 851), appearance (page 856), and marks and tags (page 858)
as required.
Below is an example of a dimension line created with Create dimension
line:

Edit drawings 184 Manual dimensioning

 Below is an example of the dimension line when it has been dragged
outside the reinforcing bar group:

Below is an example, where only one rebar of the group is visible, and the
dimension line has been dragged outside the group.

Predefined reinforcement dimension settings in the Options dialog box

There are predefined settings in the Options dialog box in the Drawing
dimensions settings affecting rebar dimensions and dimension marks.

Edit drawings 185 Manual dimensioning

Settings are model specific and only affect the current model. Changing the
settings does not require Tekla Structures restart.

Option Description
Dimension mark settings Select which predefined dimension
settings you always want to apply to
dimension marks. These settings are
used when you create dimension
marks with the Add Mark -->
Dimension Mark command.
Tagged dimension mark settings Select which predefined dimension
settings you always want to apply to
tagged dimension marks. These
settings are used when you create
dimension marks with the Add Mark
--> Tagged Dimension mark
command.
Dimension line settings Select which predefined dimension
settings you always want to apply to
dimension lines that you create with
the Create dimension line
command.
Dimension line extension length for You can create line extensions
line arrow (page 725) in dimensions that have
line arrows. Enter the length of the
dimension line extension in the
Dimension line extension length
for line arrow box. This setting will
be applied to all dimension that have
line arrows.
No extension

Edit drawings 186 Manual dimensioning

 Option Description
Extension added

Tapered skewed reinforcement group Select whether skewed dimensions

have skewed or horizontal
representation in Tapered skewed

reinforcement group .
Tapered curved reinforcement group Select whether curved dimensions
have curved or horizontal
representation in Tapered curved

reinforcement group .

Examples of rebar dimensions

• Below is a tapered skewed part, and skewed dimension representation is
selected from Tapered skewed reinforcement group. The dimension line
follows the shape of the edge that is closest to where you pick.

• Below is a tapered curved part, and curved dimension representation is

selected from Tapered curved reinforcement group:

Edit drawings 187 Manual dimensioning

• Below is an example of curved orthogonal dimensions of a tapered curved
rebar group with a dimension tag:

• You can also add middle tags in rebar dimensions. Here dual dimensions
(page 180) have been applied:

Edit drawings 188 Manual dimensioning

• Curved dimension tags can be aligned by selecting one of the options in
the Curved Dimension Tag Type list in the Dimension Properties dialog
box:

In the example below, only one rebar is visible, and rebar tags are aligned

vertically :

Edit drawings 189 Manual dimensioning

In the example below, the dimension tag follows the dimension curve :

Edit drawings 190 Manual dimensioning

• Below is an example of curved orthogonal dimensions of a radial
reinforcing bar group.

Dimension rebars with Rebar group dimensioning

application
The Rebar group dimensioning application offers different styles for
presenting rebar group dimension lines and dimension marks flexibly. For
example, you can mark and dimension multiple stirrups at one go. The Rebar
group dimensioning helps you to efficiently create quality reinforcement
drawings according to the market requirements.

Add dimensions to rebar groups

1. In a drawing, select the rebar groups to be dimensioned.

2. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to

open the Applications & components catalog.
3. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.
4. In the Applications list, select Rebar group dimensioning.
5. Pick a location for the dimension line in the model.
6. Double-click the dimension to adjust the settings:

Edit drawings 191 Manual dimensioning

• On the Parameters tab, define what the dimensions look like and
what it contains. You can also define the content of the stirrup
dimension marks.

Edit drawings 192 Manual dimensioning

• On the Extra marks tab, create an extra mark in front of or behind the
dimension line.

• On the Advanced settings tab, define the offsets, spaces and cc

distances for the stirrup dimension marks.

Edit drawings 193 Manual dimensioning

 • On the Rebar lines tab, define the generation and the appearance of
the leader lines belonging to the stirrup dimensions.

For more information about the settings, see Rebar group dimensioning
settings below.
7. Click Modify.

Edit drawings 194 Manual dimensioning

Rebar group dimensioning settings
Parameters tab

Setting Options and descriptions

Annotation type Select the annotation type. The options are:

Edit drawings 195 Manual dimensioning

Setting Options and descriptions

Define the positioning of the mark. The available

options depend on the selected Annotation type

Edit drawings 196 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions
Angle option. You can also define the mark angle in the
Angle box. The options are:

Edit drawings 197 Manual dimensioning

Setting Options and descriptions

Mark position examples:

Edit drawings 198 Manual dimensioning

Setting Options and descriptions

In the example below, the mark angle has been

defined.

Edit drawings 199 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions

Define the number and the location of the mark

leader lines. You can also indicate which group you
are working with by entering the group number in
the Group number box.
Group number
This option is available for certain annotation types
only. The options are:

Edit drawings 200 Manual dimensioning

Setting Options and descriptions

In the following example, group number 2 is

defined.

In the following example, group number 2 is

defined.

Edit drawings 201 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions

Consider irregular Yes

spaces as separate
groups

No

Dimension each CC Yes

distance

No

Combine dim. between Allows you to combine the dimensions of the

rebar - dim. distance between two rebar groups with the

Edit drawings 202 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions
dimensions of the rebar group where the spacing
is the same as the distance between the groups. It
also combines the first/last group dimension line
with the distance to the part end if the distance to
the border is the same as the rebar group spacing.
For an example, see the section "More examples"
below.
Distribution line Select the desired dimension properties for the
properties displayed dimension line by selecting a dimension
properties file. The available properties are the
ones that have been defined and saved in the
Dimension Properties (page 850) dialog box.
Available elements Select the information to be displayed in the mark
such as grade, diameter and cc distances for mark
1 and mark 2.
Elements in mark List of the information that you have selected to
display in mark 1 and mark 2.
Text properties Define the text properties. The available properties
files are the ones that have been defined and
saved in the Text properties (page 271) dialog box.
Position Select where you want to place the mark. The
options are:
• Automatic: Mark 1 is positioned above the
dimension text, when the dimension is above
the part, and under the dimension text when
the dimension is under the part.
• Above dim. text: Mark 1 is always positioned
above the dimension text.
• Below dim. line: Mark 1 is always positioned
below the dimension text.
When placing the mark, the dimension text font
size for the above text position and the spacing
values defined on the Advanced settings tab for
both positions are considered. This setting is only
available for the non-radial annotation types.
Units Define the units:
• Automatic
• mm
• cm
• m
• foot - inch

Edit drawings 203 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions
• inch
Only available for the following mark content:
• Length
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
• Length itemized
Format Define the format:
• ###
• ###[.#]
• ###[.##]
• ###[.###]
• ###.#
• ### #/#
• ###.##
• ###.###
Only available for the following mark content:
• Length
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
• Length itemized
Precision Define the precision:
• 0.00
• 0.50
• 0.33
• 0.25
• 1/8
• 1/16

Edit drawings 204 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions
• 1/32
• 1/10
• 1/100
• 1/1000
For example, for precision 0.33, the actual value
50.40 is displayed as 50.33.
1/8, 1/16, and 1/32 are for imperial units.
1/10, 1/100, and 1/1000 are used for defining
precision without rounding.
Sum values A B C These options are only available for the following
mark content:
Sum segm rebar axis
• Length
Length TplEd
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
Mark 2 position Define whether and how the rebar position is
displayed in mark 2. The options are:
Not
Before main mark
Behind main mark
Above main mark
Below main mark
Mark 2 frame Select the frame type and color for the mark 2.
This option is available for certain annotation types
only. The options are:

Edit drawings 205 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions

Extra marks tab

Setting Options and descriptions

Marks in front of the To create marks in front of the dimension line,
dimension line select Yes. No is the default value.

Marks behind the To create marks behind the dimension line, select
dimension line Yes. No is the default value.

Available elements Select the information to be displayed in the mark

in front of or behind the dimensions line.
Elements in mark List of the information that you have selected to
display in the mark in front of or behind the
dimensions line.
Text properties Define the text properties for the marks. The
available properties files are the ones that have
been defined and saved in the Text properties
(page 271) dialog box.
Rebar position Define whether and how the rebar position is
displayed in marks. The options are:
No
Before main mark
Behind main mark
Text properties Define the text properties for the rebar position.
The available properties files are the ones that
have been defined and saved in the Text properties
(page 271) dialog box.
Units Define the units:
• Automatic
• mm
• cm
• m

Edit drawings 206 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions
• foot - inch
• inch
Only available for the following
content:
• Length
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
• Length itemized
Format Define the format:
• ###
• ###[.#]
• ###[.##]
• ###[.###]
• ###.#
• ### #/#
• ###.##
• ###.###
Only available for the following mark content:
• Length
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
• Length itemized
Precision Define the precision:
• 0.00
• 0.50
• 0.33
• 0.25

Edit drawings 207 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions
• 1/8
• 1/16
• 1/32
• 1/10
• 1/100
• 1/1000
For example, for precision 0.33, the actual value
50.40 is displayed as 50.33.
1/8, 1/16, and 1/32 are for imperial units.
1/10, 1/100, and 1/1000 are used for defining
precision without rounding.
Sum values A B C These options are only available for the following
mark content:
Sum segm rebar axis
• Length
Length TplEd
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
Mark placement settings

The options 3 is the default option.

Edit drawings 208 Manual dimensioning

Setting Options and descriptions

(1) All the marks are placed above the dimension

line.
(2) The middle of the last mark is on the the
dimension line.
(3) The middle (calculated in the dir. - to the
dimension line) of the mark group is on the
dimension line. This is the default option.
(4) The dimension line is extended between the
marks.
• If there is only one mark, it is placed above the
line.
• If there are two marks, one mark is placed
above and the other under the line.
• If there are three marks, two marks are placed
above and one mark is placed under the line.
(5) The middle of the first mark is on the dimension
line.
(6) All marks are placed under the dimension line.

Edit drawings 209 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions
The parameters a, b, c1 and c2 are needed to get
the desired distances between the marks and the
dimension line.

The default values are:

a=1
b=1
c1 = 5
c2 = 5

Advanced settings tab

Setting Options and descriptions

First mark spacing Enter a millimeter value to indicate the space
between the dimension line and the first line of
dimension mark text.

You can also define the first mark distance when

the label is below the dimension line.

Edit drawings 210 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions
Next mark spacing Enter a millimeter value to indicate the space
between several lines of dimension mark text.

Free space below text / If you select Free space below text, enter a
Dimension line spacing millimeter value to indicate the space between the
last line of dimension mark text and the next
dimension line.

If you select Dimension line spacing and enter a

millimeter value to indicate the space between two
or more dimension lines.

Edit drawings 211 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions

Text offset dimension

line

Rebar group tolerance Define whether double stirrup groups are

combined into one dimension line.
If the distance between the stirrups (in the image
below 12 mm) is greater than the entered value
(=10 mm), two dimension lines are created:

Edit drawings 212 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions
Part extrema Define how to close dimension lines on the
contour of the concrete part. The following options
are available:

Examples:

The dimension line is always positioned on the

outermost lines of the concrete part.

The dimension line is positioned to the nearest

side/geometry point of the concrete part relative to
the picked insertion point of the dimension line
(plugin). See the examples below.

Edit drawings 213 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions

Rebar lines tab

On the Rebar lines tab, you can define the generation and the appearance of
the leader lines and symbols of the dimension line. You adjust the settings of
Not visualized rebars, Visualized rebars, Group end rebars and Part edges.

Setting Options and descriptions

Not visualized rebars

Visualized rebars

Edit drawings 214 Manual dimensioning

 Setting Options and descriptions

Group end rebars Applied to the first and last bar in the group.

Part edges

Define the generation of the leader lines and

symbols for the Not visualized rebars or
Visualized rebars. The options are:

No leader lines or symbols.

Edit drawings 215 Manual dimensioning

Setting Options and descriptions

Leader lines. Define the length of the leader lines

relative to the dimension line.

Leader lines and symbols. Define the length of the

leader lines relative to the dimension line.

Edit drawings 216 Manual dimensioning

Setting Options and descriptions

Leader lines. Define the length of the leader lines

relative to the contour of the concrete part.

Leader lines and symbols. Define the length of the

leader lines relative to the contour of the concrete
part.

Edit drawings 217 Manual dimensioning

Setting Options and descriptions

Leader lines. Define the length of the leader lines

relative to the rebar.

Leader lines and symbols. Define the length of the

leader lines relative to the rebar.

Edit drawings 218 Manual dimensioning

Setting Options and descriptions

Symbols only

Define the generation of the leader lines and

symbols for the Part edges.
See the examples for the option Not visualized
rebars above.
The following options are available:

Edit drawings 219 Manual dimensioning

Setting Options and descriptions
Define the generation of the leader lines and
symbols for the contour of the concrete part
See the examples for the option Not visualized
rebars above.
The following options are available:

Define the color and the line type for the various
leader line types.

Define whether all leader lines and symbols are

shown for Visualized rebars and if this should be
done for one single rebar only. The following
options are available:

Edit drawings 220 Manual dimensioning

Setting Options and descriptions

Define the symbol file and symbol number to be

used. You can use existing symbols in Tekla
Structures by selecting a symbol file and a symbol
number. You can also define the color and the size
of the symbol.
Symbols are defined separately for Not visualized
rebars, Visualized rebars, Group end rebars and
Part edges
Examples:

Edit drawings 221 Manual dimensioning

Setting Options and descriptions

Edit drawings 222 Manual dimensioning

More examples

Edit drawings 223 Manual dimensioning

Example of the setting Combine dim. between rebar - dim. on the
Parameters tab
• In the example below, the first dimension from the top shows the rebar
groups (blue color) with the distances between the groups (green color)
plus the distances to the part ends (grey color). Dimensions are not
combined.
• The second dimension shows the same situation with marked equalities
between the drawing rebar group spacing (cc) and the distances between
the groups.
• In the third dimension, the new combining type Consider same spacings
has been applied. The green distances between the two blue rebar groups
have been combined with the group that has the same spacing (cc) as the
distance between the groups.
• The combining has also been applied to the gray distance to the part end
because the distance to the part end is the same as the spacing (cc) of the
adjacent rebar group.

Edit drawings 224 Manual dimensioning

Dimension center of gravity (COG)
You can indicate the location of the center of gravity (COG) in single-part,
assembly, and cast unit drawings by creating COG dimensions and a COG
symbol at the center of gravity. You can also create COG dimensions in section
views. COG dimensions will be automatically updated if the single part,
assembly, or cast unit changes. The COG dimensions can also be cloned.

Limitations:
• If you copy or link a drawing containing COG dimensions to another
drawing, such as a multidrawing, the COG dimensions will not be copied.
• You cannot create COG dimensions in general arrangement drawings or
multidrawings.

1. On the Dimensioning tab in an open drawing, click COG .

2. Modify the options as required:

Edit drawings 225 Manual dimensioning

• In Create, select Symbol to see only the COG symbol, or Dimensions
to see only COG dimensions. To see both, select Both.

• In Dimensioning, select to create Horizontal or Vertical dimensions,

or Both.
• In Dimension attributes, you can load predefined dimension
properties.
The appearance settings (size, color, etc.) of the COG dimensions are
read from the dimension properties file you load in Dimension
attributes. To create and save dimension property files, on the
Drawing tab, click Properties --> Dimension. For example, you may

Edit drawings 226 Manual dimensioning

 create a special COG dimension properties file to change the color or
arrow type, and load the saved properties in Dimension attributes.
• In Symbol Options, you can change the Symbol file in use and the
symbol you want to use for COG, and load predefined symbol
properties.
You can access the symbol options only if you have selected Both or
Symbol for Create. The appearance settings (height, color, etc.) of the
symbol are read from the symbol properties file you load in Symbol
attributes.
To create and save symbol property files, on the Drawing tab, click
Properties --> Symbol . For example, you may create a special COG
symbol properties file to change the color and height of the symbol,
and load the saved properties in Symbol attributes.

3. Click OK.
4. Pick the first point to specify the origin of the dimensions.

Edit drawings 227 Manual dimensioning

 The origin is the point from which you want to measure the location of the
center of gravity. This point must be located within the view frame.

5. Pick the second point to place the dimensions.

This point may fall outside the view frame.

The example below shows the created dimensions.

Edit drawings 228 Manual dimensioning

6. When the dimension is selected, handles are shown at the dimension
origin and the dimension location. You can drag these handles to adjust
the origin or the location, or move them using the standard editing
commands.

Exaggerate selected dimensions in drawings

You can exaggerate narrow dimensions to make them easier to read by using
the macro Exaggerate selected dimensions. When exaggerated, a dimension
that is narrower than the limit defined in the Options dialog box is enlarged
using the defined scale. If there are many exaggerated dimensions, Tekla
Structures arranges them automatically.
1. Go to On the File menu, click Settings --> Options and go to the Drawing
dimensions page.
2. Set the Exaggeration limit and Exaggeration scaling.
Exaggeration scaling defines whether you are using Paper or Model as
the exaggeration scaling method. If you select Paper, the exaggeration
limit is multiplied by the view scale. If you select Model, and the scale is
1:10, all the dimensions smaller than 10 mm are exaggerated regardless
of the drawing scale.
3. Click OK to save the settings and close the Options dialog box.
4. In an open drawing, click the dimension that you want to exaggerate.

5. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to

open the Applications & components catalog.
6. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.
7. Double-click Exaggerate selected dimensions.

Edit drawings 229 Manual dimensioning

TIP You can also define dimension exaggeration in dimension properties, see Create
exaggerated dimensions (page 726).

Modify dimension properties

You can modify the properties of the dimensions in an open drawing.
1. Double-click a dimension.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off
switch at the bottom of the dialog box, and select only the
check boxes next to the properties that you want to modify.
3. On the General tab, modify the dimension type, format, and placing
settings.
For example, here you can set the dimension to be free or fixed. free lets
Tekla Structures to decide the location and direction of the dimension.
fixed allows you to place the dimension at any point.
4. On the Appearance tab, modify the text, line and arrow settings.
5. On the Marks tab, modify the dimension mark contents and exaggeration
settings.
Here you can also select whether you want to show plate side marks.
6. On the Marks tab, click the ... button next to Prefix or Postfix to add
elements in the dimension mark and modify element appearance.
7. On the Tags tab, add dimension tags as required, and set the dimension
tag rotation.
Here you can also select to include part count to dimension tags and
select a filter that removes the desired default content from the tag. You
can also select the curved dimension tag type to control how the tags are
aligned to the dimension.
8. Click Modify.

Edit drawings 230 Manual dimensioning

See also
Dimension properties - General tab (page 851)
Dimension properties - Appearance tab (page 856)
Dimension properties - Marks and Tags tabs (page 858)
Add tags to dimensions (page 176)
Add manual dimensions (page 168)
Add manual dimensions to general arrangement drawings (page 174)

Customize dimension line arrows

If you do not find a suitable dimension line arrow in the Arrow list in the
Dimension Properties dialog box, you can create and use an arrow of your
own.

First you need to create the arrow symbol in the Symbol Editor, and save the
created symbol in the dimension_arrows.sym file. Then you need to add the
position of the new symbol in the dimension_arrows.sym file to the
configuration file dimension_arrows.txt file. This file tells which arrows are
available for use in your environment. Finally, you need to create a bitmap for
the new arrow to be used in the Dimension Properties dialog box.
1. On the File menu, click Editors --> Symbol editor to open the Symbol
Editor.
2. Open the dimension_arrows.sym file located in the Common
environment (...ProgramData:\TeklaStructures\<version>
\Environments\common\symbols) or in your environment under the
\symbols folder.
3. Click an empty symbol slot and sketch your symbol with drawing tools.
You can also import AutoCAD or MicroStation files through File -->
Import .
4. When the symbol is completed, point the symbol slot to check the number
of the new symbol at the bottom of the window.

Edit drawings 231 Manual dimensioning

5. Save the dimension_arrows.sym file by clicking File --> Save .
6. Click File --> Exit to close the Symbol Editor.
7. Open the dimension_arrows.txt file located in the same symbols
folder as the dimension_arrows.sym file.
The file contains a list of symbol numbers.
8. Add the number of your symbol preceded by two zeros (00) in the correct
position and separate it with a comma:
000,001,002,003,004
9. Click File --> Save to save your change.
10. Create a bitmap of the new arrow and save it in the ..\ProgramData
\Tekla Structures\<version>\Bitmaps folder on your computer.
Use the following naming convention in the file name:
dr_dialog_dim_arrow_type_004.bmp.
11. Finally, restart Tekla Structures.
12. Check that the the new arrow is displayed in the Arrow list:
• Double-click a dimension in a drawing to open the Dimension
Properties dialog box, and then open the Arrow list. You should see
that the new arrow symbol is available for use.

Edit drawings 232 Manual dimensioning

NOTE We recommend you define a firm folder (page 494) for symbols, because the
default folders are overwritten when you upgrade to a newer version of Tekla
Structures. Add the firm folder to the advanced option DXK_SYMBOLPATH.

See also
Dimension properties - Appearance tab (page 856)

Add dimension points in anchor bolt plans

You can add dimension points to dimensions inside the enlarged views in an
open anchor bolt plan.

Limitations: You cannot create new dimension lines that have dimension
points inside both the enlarged views and the plan view.
To add dimension points to the dimensions inside the enlarged views:
1. Select the enlarged view frame.
2. Select the dimension to modify.
3. Right-click and select Add Dimension Point.

See also
Create anchor bolt plans using saved settings (page 83)
Example: Dimension anchor bolt plans (page 748)

Show plate side marks on dimension leader lines

You can show plate side marks on dimension leader lines. The plate side
marks indicate whether the dimension point is to the face or center of the
part, for example, a plate, web, or flange.
1. Open a drawing.
2. On the Drawing tab, click Properties --> Dimension.
3. In the Dimension Properties dialog box, go to the Marks tab, set Type
under Plate side marks to SpecifiedSpecified to manually control the
symbol and insert plate side mark symbols in the drawing.
The option Automatic is available only in intelligent drawings, that is
when the advanced option XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED is set to
TRUE.
4. Modify the other properties of the plate side marks as required:
• Select the left and right plate side mark.
• Set the mark size.

Edit drawings 233 Manual dimensioning

 • Adjust the mark color.
• Set an offset for the mark from the dimension line.
5. Click Modify.

See also
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT
Modify dimension properties (page 230)
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED
Dimension properties - Marks and Tags tabs (page 858)

Change the location of short outside dimension texts

If you have selected to place texts of short dimensions outside the dimensions
by setting Short dimensions to Outside on the General tab of the
Dimension Properties, you can select on which side of the extension line the
dimension text is placed.

Limitations:
• You can flip only start or end dimensions in a dimension set.
• You can place the dimension text outside the dimensions if there is enough
space for the dimension text.
1. On the Dimensioning tab, click Flip outside dimension.
2. Click the dimension whose location you want to change.

Edit drawings 234 Manual dimensioning

Modify dimension properties (page 230)

See also
Modify dimension properties (page 230)

Set a new dimension start point

You can select a new start point for running dimensions (dimensions that start
from a common start point).
1. Select an existing dimension in a drawing.
2. On the Dimensioning tab, click Set start point.
3. Select the new start point.
Tekla Structures automatically updates the dimensions.

Example
You can use this command to swap the running dimensions start point to the
opposite end of the member.

Edit drawings 235 Manual dimensioning

When you use the US absolute dimension type, Tekla Structures draws a new
RD symbol (Running Dimension) at the new zero point and updates the
dimensions according to the new start point.

See also
Modify dimension properties (page 230)

Add closing dimensions

In a drawing containing a reinforcing bar group, you can manually add closing
dimensions to the edge of the part.
1. Open a cast unit drawing.
2. Select the reinforcing bar group dimension line.
3. On the Dimensioning tab, click Add point.
4. Select the points where you want to add the closing dimensions.

Tekla Structures creates the closing dimensions.

Edit drawings 236 Manual dimensioning

Add or remove dimension points
You can add new dimension points to, or remove existing dimension points
from the selected dimension set. You can only add points to one dimension
line at a time.

1. Select the dimension line.

2. On the Dimensioning tab, click Add point.
3. Click a position on the part where you want to add the dimension point.
You can add several points.
4. To remove a point, on the Dimensioning tab, click Remove point and
click the point you want to remove.
You can remove several points in a row.

TIP A quick way to add and remove dimension points is to first click a positions on
the parts where you want to add the dimension points and, if some of them
seem unnecessary, remove those by holding down Shift and then clicking the
points you want to remove.

See also
Modify dimension properties (page 230)
Add closing dimensions (page 236)

Link perpendicular dimension lines

You can connect two perpendicular dimension lines. Connecting dimension
lines makes your drawings clearer and easier to read. For example, you might

Edit drawings 237 Manual dimensioning

want to link dimension lines of embedded objects in a cast unit, floor beams in
a floor plan, or anchor bolts in an anchor bolt plan.
1. In an open drawing, hold down Ctrl and select two perpendicular
dimension lines to connect.
2. On the Dimensioning tab, click Link dimensions.
3. If you want to unlink the dimension lines you linked, select the linked
dimension line and click Unlink dimensions.

Example
Below is an example of linked dimension lines.

See also
Modify dimension properties (page 230)

Combine dimension lines

You can manually combine a group of two or more parallel dimension lines
into one line.
1. Hold down Ctrl and click the dimension lines you want to combine.
2. On the Dimensioning tab, click Combine lines.
You can also right-click and select Combine Dimension Lines.

Edit drawings 238 Manual dimensioning

See also
Modify dimension properties (page 230)

Set the dimension extension line length

You can adjust the length of the dimension extension lines in dimension
properties in an open drawing. You can also adjust the extension line length
using advanced options.

You can load the dimension properties file where you have the correct setting
when you add automatic dimensions on view level.
1. Open a drawing and double-click a dimension.
2. Go to the General tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
3. Select an option from the Short extension line list:

Edit drawings 239 Manual dimensioning

 Options Description

No
Yes Use this option to create extension
lines all of the same length:

On grid lines only Use this option to use the short

extension line automatically if a
dimension line falls on a grid line.
Elsewhere the extension line will be
as usual.

4. Save your setting in a properties file for later use.

5. Click Modify.
6. To adjust the extension line lengths, go to File menu --> Settings -->
Advanced options --> Dimensioning: General and set the following

Edit drawings 240 Manual dimensioning

 advanced options. These advanced options adjust the extension line
length in relation to the text size:

1. Text height * 1.0 (default). Use

XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR to adjust the length of
the dimension extension lines that are facing away from the dimension
points.
2. Text height * 1.5 (default). Use
XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR to adjust the length
of the dimension extension lines that are facing towards the dimension
points.

See also
Dimension properties - General tab (page 851)

Drag dimension marks

Dimension marks can be freely dragged to avoid overlapping dimensions and
marks.

Note that you can only drag relative dimensions, not absolute dimensions.
Go to File --> Settings and ensure that Smart select is selected .
1. Select the dimension line.
If you do not select the dimension line first, dragging will move the whole
dimension, not just the dimension mark.
When you select the line, the dimension mark handle becomes visible.

Edit drawings 241 Manual dimensioning

2. Point the handle, press down the left mouse button, and drag the
dimension mark to the desired location.
Tekla Structures automatically adds a leader line to the dimension mark
that is dragged from its original position.

Note that if you do not want to draw a leader line when a dimension text
is dragged away from the dimension line, set the advanced option
XS_LEADER_LINE_TO_DRAGGED_DIMENSION_TEXT to FALSE in the
category Dimensioning: General in the Advanced Options dialog box.
The default value is TRUE.

See also
Drag, reshape and resize drawing objects (page 295)
Modify dimension properties (page 230)

Edit drawings 242 Manual dimensioning

 Move the end of the dimension line
You can move the end of the dimension line orthogonal to itself outside the
part. The dimension tags are moved together with the end of the line. This is
useful when the tags would otherwise cover part geometry or other objects,
such as dimensions or marks.

Limitations: You can move the end of the dimension line in all straight
dimensions, except elevation dimensions.
1. In an open drawing, click the dimension.
The dimension line handle becomes visible.
2. Select the handle and drag the end of the line to the desired position.
It is easier to select the handle when your hold down Alt and then click
the handle.
If the dimension contains dimension tags, the tags are visible while you
drag.

4.5 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in

drawings
You can add many kinds of annotation objects in your drawings, such as
marks, associative notes, texts, and links. Some of these are associative and
some independent.
Associative objects update according to the changes made in a model object in
the model. Dimensions, marks, and notes are associative.
In addition to the automatic marks and dimensions that you already may have
in a drawing, you can add the ones listed below and modify their properties:
Add part marks manually in drawings (page 251)
Add reinforcement marks manually in drawings (page 252)
Add manual weld marks in drawings (page 361)
Add level marks in drawings (page 253)
Add associative notes in drawings (page 255)
Add manual dimensions (page 168)
Add manual dimensions to general arrangement drawings (page 174)

Edit drawings 243 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
Modify mark or note properties (page 257)
Update part and weld marks in drawings (page 261)
Change symbols in drawings (page 264)
Merge marks (page 267)
Drag the mark and associative note leader line base point (page 270)
Customize leader line arrows (page 487)
You can also delete marks for parts and reinforcement (page 261).
Independent annotation objects are not linked or connected to the Tekla
Structures model in any way. Texts, DWG/DXF files, symbols, revision marks,
links and hyperlinks are all independent annotation objects.
Independent objects will also become associative if you snap to a building
object when you create them, because then they will get associativity points.
For example, in texts, the content does not change when the model changes
but the associativity point may change. Another example is a line: if you snap
to a part edge when you create a line, the line will get an associativity point
and move with the part if the part changes.
You can only add texts, DWG/DXF files, links, hyperlinks, revision marks and
symbols in an open drawing, and modify the properties of the added ones:
Add text in drawings (page 271)
Add links to rich text files in drawings (page 274)
Add links to other drawings (page 278)
Add hyperlinks in drawings (page 277)
Add links to DWG and DXF files in drawings (page 280)
Add revision marks in drawings (page 279)
Modify the properties of independent annotation objects (page 282)

See also
Drawing objects (page 21)
Manual dimensioning (page 167)
Add symbols in drawings (page 487)
Customize leader line arrows (page 487)

Drawing content manager

Drawing content manager is an interactive tool for checking and editing
model objects and drawing content, especially marks and associative notes, in
the current drawing.

Edit drawings 244 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
Use Drawing content manager to quickly and easily:
• Select relevant content for checking and editing purposes, and target
actions on single or multiple model objects or marks simultaneously.
• Add, modify or remove model object marks, including associative notes.
• Add weld marks to model welds in drawings.
• Highlight either objects or marks.
• Check how many marks model objects have in one view or in the entire
drawing.
• Add other content to model objects depending on the object type, such as
rebar dimension lines.
• Modify model object or mark properties.
• Hide/show model objects.
With this tool you can avoid duplicate, missing, or false information, and
efficiently check if all necessary content exists, without having to manually go
through all drawing objects separately.
• To open Drawing content manager, first open a drawing and click the

Drawing content manager button in the side pane. Then click Show
to populate the Drawing content manager list. If you do not want to list
all model objects, narrow your selection by selecting certain drawing views,
model areas or multiple objects, and then click Show.

Edit drawings 245 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
• Drawing content manager lists model objects and the related mark
content, and gives the total number of marks. The displayed columns
depend on the object type. Associative notes are also considered and
counted as marks.

Edit drawings 246 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
• You can only see the contents of one category at the time. If you have a lot
of objects in a category, and you need to scroll, the objects are loaded as
you scroll.
• The following model object categories are available in Drawing content
manager if they exist in the drawing, and have been set visible in the
drawing View properties:
• Assemblies
• Parts
• Welds
• Bolts
• Reinforcement
• Pour objects
• Neighbor parts

How to use the model object list

• To also show in the Drawing content manager list the model objects that

are hidden in the drawing, click Show hidden items.

• To select and highlight the selected model objects or marks in all drawing

views where they are visible, click Show in all views.

•
• To refresh the Drawing content manager list with correct mark quantity

information, click Update. Do this every time you hide some model
objects, or if the number of marks changes.
• To select and highlight either model objects or marks in the drawing, select
the objects in Drawing content manager and change the selection from
object to mark using the switch . When model object selection is active,
the switch is black , and when mark selection is active, the switch is

yellow .
Marks selected:

Edit drawings 247 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 Parts selected:

• To search for and list specific model objects, use the search box.
• To collapse or expand model object categories, use the arrow buttons .
• To sort mark properties in alphabetical order, click a column header.
• If you suspect that some objects are missing from the list, go to the
drawing view properties by double-clicking the drawing view frame and set
the needed model objects visible.

Add marks to model objects

You can add marks and notes to all visible model objects in a drawing.
1. Click Show to populate the Drawing content manager list. If you do not
want to list all model objects, narrow your selection by selecting certain
drawing views, model areas or multiple objects, and then click Show.
2. Select the model objects that need marks from the Drawing content
manager list.

Edit drawings 248 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 You can only select multiple objects inside one category. Activate the

switch to select only objects in the model. The selected objects are
highlighted in the drawing.
To select the whole object category, click the category name, for example,
Parts or Welds.
3. Right-click in the model and select one of the following options:
Add associative note: Marks are created using the current assosiative
note properties.
Add part mark: Marks are created using the view level mark properties.
Add weld mark: Marks are created using the view level mark properties.
Add Mark --> Reinforcement Mark: Marks are created using the view
level mark properties.
Add Mark --> Dimension Mark: Marks are created using predefined
dimension properties defined in File --> Settings --> Options --> Drawing
dimensions.
Add Mark --> Tagged Dimension mark: Marks are created using
predefined dimension properties defined in File --> Settings --> Options
--> Drawing dimensions.
Tekla Structures creates the marks or notes. The added marks are shown in

Drawing content manager. To update the mark quantity, click Update.

Note that if you select several model objects at the same time, and if some of
the selected objects already have marks, the content of the existing marks
does not change.

TIP If you do not see some of the model objects in drawing views, go to the
drawing view properties by double-clicking the drawing view frame and
set the needed model objects visible.

Check mark count

1. Click Show to populate the Drawing content manager list. If you do not
want to list all model objects, narrow your selection by selecting certain
drawing views, model areas or multiple objects, and then click Show.

2. If you want to know the mark count in the whole drawing, click Show
in all views.
3. To include hidden objects in the list and show their mark count as well,

click Show hidden items.

Edit drawings 249 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
4. To make sure that the mark information is up to date, click Update.
Note that Drawing content manager does not support counting of
dimension and tagged dimension marks.

Hide model objects

1. Click Show to populate the Drawing content manager list. If you do not
want to list all model objects, narrow your selection by selecting certain
drawing views, model areas or multiple objects, and then click Show.
2. Select the model objects from the list, right-click in the model and select
Hide/Show --> Hide from drawing view or Hide from drawing.

Delete marks
If you are not happy with the existing marks, you can delete them.
1. Click Show to populate the Drawing content manager list. If you do not
want to list all model objects, narrow your selection by selecting certain
drawing views, model areas or multiple objects, and then click Show.

2. Click Show in all views and Show hidden items to show in the
list model objects in the whole drawing, including the hidden model
objects.
3. If you are looking for certain model objects, use the Search... box.

4. Activate the mark selection .

5. In Drawing content manager, select the model objects whose marks you
want to delete.
6. Press Delete on the keyboard, or right-click in the drawing and select
Delete.
If you have activated Show in all views and Show hidden items, marks
are deleted from all views, including marks for hidden model objects.

7. Click Update to update the mark information in the list.

Modify model object or mark drawing properties

• To modify the properties of model objects in the drawing, select the objects
from the Drawing content manager list, right-click in the model and select
Properties.... If you are looking for certain model objects, use the Search...
box.
• To modify the properties of the marks, select the objects from the list,

activate mark selection , hold down Shift and double-click a mark.

Edit drawings 250 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
• If you wish to list some of the marks, such as weld marks, but not show the
marks in the drawing, use the first color option in the weld mark properties
dialog box, it will show the marks invisible. First select the objects from the

list, activate mark selection , hold down Shift and double-click a weld
mark. Then change the weld mark text and line color and click Modify.

Add part marks manually in drawings

In an open drawing, you can add part marks for all model objects, surface
treatment and connections, or for the selected ones only. For each view, Tekla
Structures creates the marks according to the mark properties defined in view
properties.

TIP Use orthogonal snapping in marks and associative notes with leader
lines. For example, you can use it for placing your marks and notes in a
more consistent way in exact locations. When you start dragging a mark
or note from a leader line end handle, and you have orthogonal
snapping on, the leader line end handle locks to the closes orthogonal
point in the drawing (0, 45, 90, 135, 180 degrees). To activate orthogonal
snapping, press O.

To add part marks, do one of the following:

To Do this
Add part marks for all On the Drawing tab, click Part mark --> For all
model objects parts .
If you have deleted marks manually from the
drawing, this command will not create the marks,
and you will have to create them manually part by
part.
Add part marks for 1. Select the model objects:
selected model objects
• Activate the Select parts in drawings
selection switch and select the parts using
area selection, for example.
• Open the Drawing content manager from
the side pane, select the model objects in
the drawing and click Show to populate the
Drawing content manager list. You can
select areas, single or multiple views, or
single or multiple model objects. Then
ensure that model object selection is active
in Drawing content manager, and
select the desired model objects from the
list.

Edit drawings 251 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 To Do this
2. On the Drawing tab, click Part mark --> For
selected parts .
You can also right-click and select Add part
mark.
3. If the part mark does not contain any
elements in view properties, the Part Mark
Properties dialog box is displayed, and you
can select the elements to be included in the
part mark.
Add elements and click Modify.
Note that if you select several model objects at
the same time, and some of the selected
objects already have marks, the content of the
existing marks does not change.

See also
Modify mark or note properties (page 257)
Mark elements (page 892)
Common elements in marks (page 893)
Mark properties (page 877)
Modify mark or note properties (page 257)

Add reinforcement marks manually in drawings

You can add marks manually to reinforcing bars and meshes in drawings.

The reinforcement marks may already exist in a drawing if you have selected
to create the marks in create the marks at drawing creation (page 754). If there
are no marks, you can add them manually.
1. Open a drawing that contains reinforcement.
2. To adjust the reinforcement mark properties, such as color and mark
elements included, on the Drawing tab, click Properties -->
Reinforcement mark.
3. Click Apply or OK in the properties dialog box.
4. Select the reinforcement by doing one of the following:
• Hold down Shift and select the desired reinforcement.
• Open the Drawing content manager, select the model objects in the
drawing and click Show to populate the Drawing content manager
list. You can select areas, single or multiple views, or reinforcement.

Edit drawings 252 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 Then ensure that model object selection is active , and select the
desired reinforcement from the list.
5. Right-click and select Add Mark --> Reinforcement Mark.
The reinforcement mark is created.
Note that if you have not added any elements in the reinforcement mark
properties before adding the reinforcement marks, the properties dialog
will be displayed.

See also
Reinforcement and neighbor reinforcement mark elements (page 898)
Reinforcement and neighbor reinforcement mesh mark elements (page 899)

Add level marks in drawings

A level mark represents the elevation of a point. In addition to the automatic
elevation dimensions that you can define in the drawing properties before
creating the drawing, and the elevation information in the grid labels added in
the model, you can also add manual level marks in your drawing to ensure
that the dimensions are correct.
1. Open the drawing.
2. Hold down Shift and, on the Drawing tab, click Level mark.
3. In the Level Mark Properties dialog box, modify the content and the
appearance of the level mark.
4. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
5. Pick a start point for the leader line and a position for the mark.

NOTE Shortening value added in the user-defined properties of a part also affects
level marks.

1. Elevation dimension in the grid label

2. Elevation dimension created with Add level mark in the drawing
You can also add level marks in GA drawing plane views. In this case, you
might want to leave the leader line out.

Edit drawings 253 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
See also
Level mark properties (page 891)
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)

Add section marks in drawings

You can add section marks in an open drawing.
1. Open a drawing.
2. On the Drawing tab, hold down Shift and click Section mark.
3. In the Section Mark Properties dialog box, set the cutting line properties
and select a color for the line.
4. On the Section mark tab, set the contents and the appearance of the
section mark.
5. Click OK or Apply.
6. Pick the first and the second point on the cut plane.
Create as many section marks as you need.
7. Press Esc to interrupt.

See also
Modify section properties in drawings (page 164)

Edit drawings 254 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
Add detail marks
You can mark details in the drawing with detail marks.
1. In an open drawing, on the Drawing tab, hold down Shift and click Detail
mark.
2. In the Detail Properties dialog box, enter the name for the detail, and
modify the detail boundary and detail mark properties, as desired.
The shape of the detail boundary you select affects the way you select the
area for your detail.
3. Click OK or Apply.
4. Depending on the selected detail boundary shape, do one of the
following:
• If the shape is Circle, pick the center point of the circle and then pick a
point on the circle.
• If the shape is Rectangle, pick corner points for the rectangle.
5. Pick a position for the label.
6. Press Esc to interrupt.

See also
Modify detail properties in drawings (page 166)

Add associative notes in drawings

Associative notes are extra marks that contain additional information about
the object they are attached to. Associative notes are updated according to the
changes made in the related object in the model. You can add associative
notes to model objects in drawings, such as parts and reinforcement, surface
treatments, edge chamfers, reference objects, pour breaks and pour objects.
Associative notes are handy: You can add multiple notes to one object,
whereas you only can add one mark to one object.
1. Open the drawing.
2. To adjust the note properties, on the Drawing tab, click Properties -->
Associative note:
• Select what kind of an object you want to attach the note to in the
Content list.
• Select the elements you want to show in the note, and modify the note
appearance.
The elements for associative notes are same as those of marks. The
elements vary according to the model object type.
Associative note appearance properties are the same those of parts.
Additionally, you can adjust the leader line arrow height and length.

Edit drawings 255 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 • To change the rotation of the note, enter a value in the Rotation box.
• To set the note text alignment, select an Alignment option.
• To place the note exactly in the position you pick and keep it there,
click the Place... button and select fixed in the Placing list.
3. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
4. If you want to add the note to multiple objects at one go, select the
objects by doing one of the following:
• Hold down Shift and click the model objects.
• Activate the Select parts in drawings selection switch and select the
model objects using area selection.
• Open the Drawing content manager from the side pane, select the
model objects in the drawing and click Show to populate the Drawing
content manager list. You can select areas, single or multiple views, or
single or multiple model objects. Then ensure that model object

selection is active in Drawing content manager, and select the

desired model objects from the list.
5. Add associative note:
• If you selected several objects, right-click and select Add associative
note. This adds notes to the model objects you have selected at one
go.
• If you did not select any objects yet, click Note and click one of the
following commands, and pick a position for the note. If you are using
a leader line, first pick the position on the object, and then pick the
position for the note.
• With leader line: Add an associative note with a leader line at the
position you specify.
• Without leader line: Create an associative note without a leader
line at the position you specify.
• Along line: Add an associative note along a line at the position you
specify.
Continue picking to add the same note in another location. You can
stop adding notes by pressing Esc.

Edit drawings 256 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
See below for some examples of leader lines. The one on the left is With
leader line, the one in the middle With leader line and the one on the right
Along line.

TIP For edge chamfers and other hard-to-see items, it is easier to use the pop-up
menu command Add associative note because then you do not have to select
the object again after selecting the command from the pop-up.

See also
Mark elements (page 892)
Common elements in marks (page 893)
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)
Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in drawings (page 243)

Modify mark or note properties

You can modify the properties of the marks and notes in an open drawing.
If you only want to modify the properties of a single mark or note, just double-
click it. If you want to modify multiple marks or notes, follow the instructions
below to select the desired marks or notes. Instructions for modifying the
marks or notes apply to both cases.
1. To select several model objects whose marks or associative notes you
want to modify, do one of the following:
• Hold down Shift and click the marks or notes you want to modify.
• Activate the Select parts in drawings and use area selection to select
the model objects. Then right-click and select Select part marks and
From current drawing view or From all drawing views.
• Activate the Select marks and notes selection switch and use area
selection to select the needed marks or notes.
• Open the Drawing content manager from the side pane, select the
model objects in the drawing and click Show to populate the Drawing
content manager list. You can select areas, single or multiple views, or
single or multiple model objects. Then ensure that mark selection is

active in Drawing content manager, and select the desired

model objects from the list.

Edit drawings 257 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
2. If you have selected multiple marks or notes, go to the Drawing tab, click
Properties and Part mark (or another mark type), or Associative note.
3. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off
switch at the bottom of the dialog box.
4. Select only the check boxes next to the properties that you want to
modify, and then modify the properties:
• Add missing elements in the mark on the Content tab and change the
element properties.
• Adjust the mark frame and leader line settings, for example the
Leader line Type.
• If you want to change the note or mark rotation, enter a new value in
the Rotation box.
• To change the text alignment, select the desired option in Alignment.
• To exactly place the mark in the position you pick and keep it there,
click the Place... button and select fixed in the Placing list.
5. Click Modify to apply the changes in all the selected marks or notes.

TIP To modify the properties of the weld marks of welds that you added in the
model, you need to modify the weld in the model. When you number the model,
the weld marks are updated in the drawings. In drawings, you can only modify
the visibility settings and appearance of the model welds.

Adjust mark visibility in an existing drawing

In addition to defining the mark visibility settings in drawing properties before
creating a drawing, you can also modify the mark visibility settings in an open
drawing separately for the views that you have in the drawing.
To modify mark visibility in an existing drawing:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Double-click the drawing background to open the drawing properties
dialog box.
3. Do one of the following depending on the drawing type. Note that all
settings are not available for all mark types.

Drawing type Adjust mark visibility settings

Single-part, assembly 1. Click View creation, select the view and the
and cast unit drawings: properties that you want to change, and click
View properties.
2. Click a mark type in the options tree. For
example, click Part mark.

Edit drawings 258 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
Drawing type Adjust mark visibility settings
3. Go to the General tab and select whether you
want to display marks by selecting one of the
Visibility in view options. The available
options depend on the mark type:
• distributed: Distributes the marks in the
view. Tekla Structures only creates marks
that are not visible in the other views.
• always: Always creates marks in the view,
irrespective the settings in other views.
• preferred: Acts as distributed, but the
preferred view has a higher priority.
Select preferred to one view only in a
drawing. If you set other views to
distributed, the marks are located only in
the view that has the setting Visibility in
view set to preferred.
• none: Does not create marks.
Note that if you want to create your own
marks manually, always use the none option.
Selecting another option, for example always,
might slow down the drawing update during
opening, even if you had deleted the marks
manually.
4. In Parts out of view plane, select whether
you want to display marks for parts that are
out of view plane:
• Visible: Displays marks for parts outside
the view in the drawing.
• Not visible: Displays no marks for parts
outside the view in the drawing.
5. For bolt marks, select if you want to show bolt
marks in main parts, secondary parts, sub-
assembly main parts, or in sub-assembly
secondary parts.
For bolt marks, you can also define the Bolt
size limit, which filters standard-sized bolt
marks out of drawings. Tekla Structures will
not display bolt marks of the size you enter
here.
6. Click to save the changes in view properties,
and then click Close to return to drawing
properties.

Edit drawings 259 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 Drawing type Adjust mark visibility settings
7. Click Modify.
General arrangement 1. Click a mark type button in the drawing
drawings: properties dialog box. For example, click Part
mark....
2. Go to the General tab and select whether you
want to display marks by selecting one of the
Visibility in view options. The available
options depend on the mark type:
• distributed: Distributes the marks in the
view. Tekla Structures only creates marks
that are not visible in the other views.
• always: Always creates marks in the view,
irrespective the settings in other views.
• preferred: Acts as distributed, but the
preferred view has a higher priority.
Select preferred to one view only in a
drawing. If you set other views to
distributed, the marks are located only in
the view that has the setting Visibility in
view set to preferred.
• none: Does not create marks.
Note that if you want to create your own
marks, always use the none option.
Selecting another option, for example
always, might slow down the drawing
update during opening, even if you had
deleted the marks manually.
3. In Parts out of view plane, select whether
you want to display marks for parts that are
out of view plane:
• Visible: Displays marks for parts outside
the view in the drawing.
• Not visible: Displays no marks for parts
outside the view in the drawing.
4. For bolt marks, select if you want to show bolt
marks in main parts, secondary parts, sub-
assembly main parts, or in sub-assembly
secondary parts.
For bolt marks, you can also de ine the Bolt
size limit, which filters standard-sized bolt
marks out of drawings. Tekla Structures will
not display bolt marks of the size you enter
here.

Edit drawings 260 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 Drawing type Adjust mark visibility settings
5. Click OK.
6. Click Modify.

See also
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)

Update part and weld marks in drawings

You can update part marks and weld marks in an open drawing. Normally part
marks and weld marks are up to date when you open the drawing. Updating is
needed in frozen drawings.

To update marks in an open drawing, do any of the following:

To Do this
Update all part marks On the Drawing tab, click Update -->
All part marks .
Update selected part marks 1. Select the part marks you want to
update.
2. On the Drawing tab, click
Update --> Selected part
marks .
Update all weld marks On the Drawing tab, click Update -->
All weld marks .

Tekla Structures updates the marks according to your selection.

See also
Freeze general arrangement drawings (page 512)
Freeze single-part, cast unit and assembly drawings (page 512)

Delete marks for selected parts

You can easily select and delete marks for the parts that you have selected,
even in big models.
With the Select part marks command you can select the part marks that you
want to delete in the current window or in all drawing windows. A handy way
to use this command is to create a selection filter first, then use area selection
to select the parts.
Another way to select the marks to delete is to use the Drawing content
manager.

Edit drawings 261 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 To Do this:
Delete marks for selected parts using 1. In an open drawing, click
selection filter
Selection filter and create a
selection filter that filters out
parts that you do not want to
select.
For an example of the selection
filter, see Example filter below.
2. When you are ready, click Apply.
3. Only activate the Select parts in

drawings selection switch.

4. Select the parts using area select.
5. Right-click and select Select part
marks and From current
drawing view or From all
drawing views .
6. To delete the marks, press
Delete on the keyboard, or right-
click in the drawing and select
Delete.
Delete marks for selected parts using 1. Select the objects in the drawing
Drawing content manager and click Show to populate the
Drawing content manager.
You can select areas, single or
multiple views, or single or
multiple model objects.
2. Click the eye buttons next to
Show in all views and Show
hidden items to include in the
list model objects in the whole
drawing, including the hidden
model objects.
3.
Click the toggle button to
activate mark selection. When
you do this, the button changes

to yellow .
4. From Drawing content
manager, select the model
objects whose marks you want to
delete.

Edit drawings 262 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 To Do this:
5. Press Delete on the keyboard, or
right-click in the drawing and
select Delete.

Example filter
In the following example, you do not want to delete marks from cast units with
a position number B/1. This means that when you use this filter, activate the
Select parts in drawings selection switch, and use area selection to select the
parts, all other parts get selected.

The image below shows the selected parts and the part marks that you want
to delete.

The marks have been deleted.

Edit drawings 263 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
Change symbols in drawings
Tekla Structures highlights the marks and dimension marks that have changed
due to changes in the model, and dimension points that have been moved.
Tekla Structures also highlights the changed angle dimensions, level marks,
and associative notes.

Tekla Structures highlights the changes in the following way:

• A change symbol (by default, a cloud) is drawn around the old point, the
new point and the dimension values, or around the changed mark or note.
• An arrow is drawn from the old dimension point to the new one.

There are some advanced options related to change symbols that you may
want to use:
• XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES
• XS_HIGHLIGHT_MARK_CONTENT_CHANGES
• XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL
• XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE

See also
Remove change symbols (page 265)

Edit drawings 264 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
Hide all change symbols in a drawing (page 265)

Remove change symbols

After you have checked all the change symbols that Tekla Structures has
created in your drawing, you can remove all of them or just the selected ones.

To hide the change symbols, do one of the following in the open drawing:

To Do this
Remove all dimension change On the Drawing tab, click Remove -->
symbols All dimension change symbols .
Remove the selected dimension 1. Select the dimension change
change symbols symbols you want to remove.
2. On the Drawing tab, click
Remove --> Selected dimension
change symbol .
Remove all mark change symbols On the Drawing tab, click Remove -->
All mark change symbols .
Remove the selected mark change 1. Select the mark change symbols
symbols you want to remove.
2. On the Drawing tab, click
Remove --> Selected mark
change symbol .
Remove all associative note change On the Drawing tab, click Remove -->
symbols All associative note change
symbols .
Remove the selected associative note 1. Select the associative note
change symbols change symbols you want to
remove.
2. On the Drawing tab, click
Remove --> Selected
associative note change
symbol .

See also
Change symbols in drawings (page 264)

Hide all change symbols in a drawing

You can hide all change symbols for marks, dimensions, and associative notes
at one go in an open drawing by using the Remove change clouds macro.
1. Open a drawing.

Edit drawings 265 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
2. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to
open the Applications & components catalog.
3. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.
4. Double-click Remove change clouds.
Tekla Structures removes all change symbols.

Example
The first image shows an example of a mark change symbol after a material
change, and of a dimension change symbol after a change in the size of the
part.

The second image shows the dimension text and the mark after running the
macro.

Edit drawings 266 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
See also
Change symbols in drawings (page 264)

Merge marks
You can merge marks to reduce the number of marks in the drawing and to
make the drawing clearer. A merged mark has a single leader line. You can
merge marks automatically before creating a drawing, in drawing properties of
and open drawing, and for some mark types also manually in the final
drawing.
In a final drawing, you can merge weld marks (page 366) and reinforcement
marks manually (page 270), and part marks, reinforcement marks and surface
treatment marks by adjusting their drawing properties.
For more information about merging prerequisites and principles, see Merged
part marks (page 768).
To activate merging through drawing properties:
1. Open a drawing.

Edit drawings 267 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
2. Double-click the drawing background to open the drawing properties
dialog box.
3. Do one of the following depending on the drawing type.

Drawing type Adjust mark visibility settings

Single-part, assembly 1. Click View creation, select the view and the
and cast unit drawings: properties that you want to change, and click
View properties.
The merging needs to be set view by view
separately.
2. Click a mark type in the options tree. For
example, click Part mark.
3. Go to the General tab.
4. In Merge marks, select On to merge part
marks, or surface treatment marks.
5. To merge reinforcement marks, click
Reinforcement mark in the options tree and
go to the Merging tab.
Identical marks in same cast unit
• One leader line to group creates one
leader line for a group of reinforcing bars.
• One leader line per row: Merges the
marks and creates one leader line for a row
of reinforcing bars.
• Parallel leader lines: Merges the marks
and creates parallel leader lines.
• Leader lines to one point: Merges the
marks and draws all leader lines to one
point.
• No merge: Marks are not merged, an
individual leader line is created for each
mark.
• If you select No merge, you still need to
define the mark content for the marks that
Tekla Structures automatically merges on
the Merging tab.
Preferred direction of merge
• If there are several possible merge
directions, select Merge horizontal or
Merge vertical.
Available elements/Elements in mark:

Edit drawings 268 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 Drawing type Adjust mark visibility settings
• Select the contents to be included in the
merged reinforcement marks (page 900).
To ensure that merged reinforcement
marks appear in the drawing, always
include Symbol separating blocks in
mark as the last element in the
reinforcement mark. To omit the
separating symbol, leave this box blank,
but still include the element in the mark.
6. Click Save to save the changes in view
properties, and then click Close to return to
drawing properties.
7. Click Modify.
General arrangement 1. Click a mark type button in the drawing
drawings: properties dialog box. For example, click Part
mark....
2. Go to the General tab.
3. In Merge marks, select On to merge part
marks, or surface treatment marks.
4. To merge reinforcement marks, click
Reinforcement marks... in the drawing
properties dialog box and go to the Merging
tab.
Identical marks in same cast unit:
• One leader line to group creates one
leader line for a group of reinforcing bars.
• One leader line per row: Merges the
marks and creates one leader line for a row
of reinforcing bars.
• Parallel leader lines: Merges the marks
and creates parallel leader lines.
• Leader lines to one point: Merges the
marks and draws all leader lines to one
point.
• No merge: Marks are not merged, an
individual leader line is created for each
mark.
• If you select No merge, you still need to
define the mark content for the marks that
Tekla Structures automatically merges on
the Merging tab.

Edit drawings 269 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 Drawing type Adjust mark visibility settings
Preferred direction of merge:
• If there are several possible merge
directions, select Merge horizontal or
Merge vertical.
Available elements/Elements in mark:
Available elements/Elements in mark:
• Select the contents to be included in the
merged reinforcement marks (page 900).
To ensure that merged reinforcement
marks appear in the drawing, always
include Symbol separating blocks in
mark as the last element in the
reinforcement mark. To omit the
separating symbol, leave this box blank,
but still include the element in the mark.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Modify.

See also
Merge marks automatically (page 767)

Merge reinforcement marks manually

1. Open a drawing in which you want to merge reinforcement marks, and

ensure that the marks are visible.
2. On the Drawing tab, click Properties --> Merged reinforcement mark .
3. Modify mark properties as required.
4. Select the reinforcement marks to merge in the drawing.
5. Right-click and select Merge marks from the pop-up menu.
6. If needed, you can split the merged marks by selecting the marks to split,
right-clicking and selecting Split.

See also
Merge reinforcement marks automatically (page 771)

Edit drawings 270 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
Drag the mark and associative note leader line base point
You can move the leader line base point by dragging it.

Ensure that you have selected Smart select in File menu --> Settings to drag
and drop by handles without selecting them first.
1. Click the leader line.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the base point to a new
location.
If the base point is originally on a line, you can drag it along that line. If the
base point is originally inside a part, you can drag the base point inside
that part.

Add text in drawings

You can add several lines of text in a drawing, and use word wrapping if you
like. You can select the desired color, height, font, angle, frame type, and
leader line arrow type, and align the text as required.
1. Open a drawing
2. On the Drawing tab, hold down Shift, click Text and select one of the
following commands to create a single line or multiple lines of text:
• Text: Add text without a leader line at the position you pick.
• With leader line: Add text with a leader line at the position you pick.
• Along line: Add text along a line at the position you pick.
• Along line, arrow at end: Add text along a line at the position you
pick. An arrow is inserted at the second position you pick.
• Along line, arrow at start: Add text along a line at the position you
pick. An arrow is inserted at the first position you pick.
3. Enter the text in the Text box.
You can add a line break by pressing Enter.
4. Modify the text color, height, font, angle and alignment as required.
5. In Background mask, select one of the following:

Edit drawings 271 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 Opaque hides the area in the drawing that is covered by the text:

Transparent shows the area in the drawing that is covered by the text so
that the linework is shown:

6. To wrap the word, set Word wrapping to On. You can define the line
length using the Ruler width option.
When the word wrapping is activated, the text object gets a handle, which
you can drag to make the text wider or narrower.
7. Select a frame type, leader line and color.
8. Select the leader line arrow type and size.
9. To exactly place the text in the position you pick, and keep it there, click
the Place... button and select fixed in the Placing list.
10. Click OK or Apply.
11. Pick the point where you want to place the text. Depending on the
command, you have to pick one to three times.
By default, text is aligned to the left. The line spacing is automatically
adjusted by the font size you select.
You can continue picking to add the same line of text in another location.
You can also drag the base point of the text leader line freely after adding
the text.

Edit drawings 272 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
See below for examples of the different text options. From left: Text; With
leader line; Along line; Along line, arrow at end; and Along line, arrow at
start.

The text object gets a handle when word wrapping is activated:

The text is aligned to the leader line start:

Add text in superscript

You can use superscript in texts in all your text objects, dimension marks,
other marks and associative notes.

Edit drawings 273 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Advanced options and go to the
Dimensioning: General category.
2. Ensure that the advanced option XS_SUPERSCRIPT_USED_IN_DRAWING_
TEXTS is set to TRUE.
3. Open the properties dialog box of a text object, mark or associative note
by holding down Shift and clicking the command.
For example, on the Drawing tab, click Text --> With leader line.
4. Do one of the following:
• For text objects, enter the desired text in the Text box.
• For marks and associative notes, open the Mark content - text dialog
box by double-clicking Text in the Available elements list and enter
the desired text in the Text box.
5. Enter circumflexes (^) around the characters that you want to have in
superscript.
6. Click OK.
7. Add the text, mark or note.

Example
The following example shows how the superscript is entered in the Text box
and what it looks like in the text.

See also
Add text in drawings (page 271)
Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in drawings (page 243)
Manual dimensioning (page 167)

Add links to rich text files in drawings

You can insert text inside a frame in a drawing. First you create a .txt or .rtf
file in WordPad, and then add a link to it in a Tekla Structures drawing. Tekla
Structures adds the text using some basic formatting settings you can set in
the file itself, and some of the properties in the Text File Properties dialog
box.

Edit drawings 274 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
NOTE If you change the text in the text file, it will change in all drawings
containing a link to the text file.

Limitation: The .rtf texts need to be created with WordPad.

1. Create the text file.
You can add basic formatting to the file, such as bold, italics, underline,
strikethrough, subscript, and superscript, use indent and tabs, and set a
specific font. You can also add bulleted lists with hyphens and circular
bullets, and numbered lists, and nest the lists.
When you add the text link, Tekla Structures preserves the formatting
settings.
Note that the text links do not support hyperlinks or images.
Tekla Structures colors will always be shown correctly. If you use in
the .rtf file a color that is not supported in Tekla Structures, then the
closest Tekla Structures color will be used.
2. Open the drawing where you want to add the text file.

3. On the Drawing tab, click Rich text.

4. Browse for the file.
5. For .txt files, you can set the text color, height and font.
6. For .rtf files, set the desired scale.
The Scale tells how much the .rtf content should be scaled. If you define
1 as the scale, the letters will keep the same size as the letters in the
original .rtf file.
Color, height and font settings are not adjustable.
7. Set the frame line type and color.
8. Select if you want to adjust how the text is placed:
• Scale to fit : You only need to pick the upper left corner of the frame
when placing the text. Tekla Structures inserts the object in its original
size. In this case, when you change the text frame size by dragging
from the handles, the text does not wrap, and the font scales
automatically.
• No scaling: You only need to pick the upper left corner of the frame
when placing the text. Tekla Structures adjusts the object size to fit the
frame. The text wraps when you change the size of the frame by
dragging the handles. The minimum width of the box is defined by the
longest word.
9. Click OK or Apply.

Edit drawings 275 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
10. Pick a location for the upper left corner of the text frame in the drawing.
Tekla Structures adds the link to the text file.
11. You can edit the text and modify the text file properties:
• To edit the text file, double-click the text inside the frame. Tekla
Structures opens the original text file.
• To modify the text file properties, double-click the frame around the
text. For .rtf files, you cannot modify the text color or font here, you
need to changes these in the .rft file itself. For plain text files, you
can also change the font color.

Examples
In the following example you can see that the text file may contain bulleted
lists, numbered lists, colors, italics, and bold, and you can change the font of
the desired text parts.

In the following example, the scaling type is No scaling. The text wraps when
you change the size of the frame by dragging the handles, so that the text
always fits the frame. The font size does not change.

In the following example, the scaling type is Scale to fit. If you change the text
frame size by dragging from the handles, the text does not wrap, and the font
size changes automatically so that the text fits the frame.

Edit drawings 276 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
Add hyperlinks in drawings
You can add hyperlinks to Internet addresses (URLs) within a frame in a
drawing.
1. Open a drawing where you want to add a hyperlink.
2. On the Drawing tab, click Link --> Hyperlink .
3. Modify the text color, height, font and effect.
4. Modify the frame line type and color.
5. Select if you want to scale the link.
If you select No scaling, you only need pick the upper left corner of the
frame when you insert the link. Tekla Structures inserts the link in its
original size. If you select Scale to fit, you need to pick two points to
define the frame. Tekla Structures adjusts the link size to fit the frame.
6. In the File or URL text box, enter an Internet address or filename and
path.
If you need to locate the file, click Browse... Tekla Structures inserts an
active hyperlink to the location you specify.
7. If you want to display text for the hyperlink instead of the hyperlink, enter
the text in the Text box.
8. Click OK or Apply.
9. Pick one or two points in the drawing to indicate the corners of the
hyperlink frame.
Double-click the hyperlink text in the drawing to jump to the Internet address.

Example
In the example below, Scale to fit has been selected. The Internet address for
the hyperlink is shown.

Edit drawings 277 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
Add links to other drawings
You can insert a link to another drawing in a frame in a drawing. Tekla
Structures adds the link to the drawing using the properties in the Drawing
Link Properties dialog box.
1. Open the drawing.
2. On the Drawing tab, click Link --> To another drawing .
3. Modify the text color, height, font and effect.
4. Modify the frame line type and color.
5. Select if you want to scale the link. If you select No scaling, Tekla
Structures inserts the link in its original size.
If you select Scale to fit, Tekla Structures adjusts the object size to fit the
frame.
6. On the Drawing tab, click Drawing list, and select the drawing to link to.
The drawings on the list are the drawings in the current model.
7. If you want to display text for the link instead of the drawing name, enter
the text in the Text box.
8. Pick two points to define the frame and add the link.
9. Click OK or Apply.
You can open the linked drawing by double-clicking the link.

Example
In the example below, Scale to fit has been selected, and the link contains the
name of the drawing.

Edit drawings 278 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
Add revision marks in drawings
Revision marks are symbols that you can add in the drawing when you want to
indicate a change in the Tekla Structures model or drawing, and the objects
that have changed. Tekla Structures creates the revision mark using the
properties in the Revision Mark Properties dialog box. If you create revisions
through the Drawing list using the Revision... command, Tekla Structures will
not create any marks inside the drawing.
1. Open a drawing.
2. On the Drawing tab, click Revision mark and select one of the following
commands:
• Add revision mark
• Pointing to left
• Pointing to right
• Along line, pointing to left
• Along line, pointing to right
3. Enter the mark, date, and information on the changes.
Tekla Structures shows this information in the revision table of the
drawing.
4. To place the revision mark exactly in the position you pick and keep it
there, click the Place... button and select fixed in the Placing list.
5. Go to the Appearance tab and set the text color, height, font and angle,
the frame color, leader line and type, and the leader line arrow type and
size.
6. Click OK or Apply.
7. Pick a point or points to place the mark.

Edit drawings 279 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 Tekla Structures creates the revisions and revision marks. You can also see
the new revisions on the Drawing list.
To delete any unnecessary revision marks, select the marks and press
Delete.

See below for examples of revision marks.

See also
Leader line types (page 883)
Revise drawings (page 515)

Add links to DWG and DXF files in drawings

You can insert a DWG or DXF file inside a frame in a drawing as a link. Tekla
Structures adds the DWG or DXF file link using the properties in the DWG/DXF
Properties dialog box. When you modify the original file, Tekla Structures also
modifies all the linked instances in drawings.

Tekla Structures supports AutoCAD version 2010 and earlier in DWG/DXF links.
The added dwg/dxf files also support AutoCAD control codes, such as %%u for
underscore, or %%c for a circle diameter dimensioning symbol ø.
1. Open the drawing where you want to insert a link to a DWG/DXF file.
2. On the Drawing tab, click DWG/DXF.
3. Select the scaling options:
• Scaling:
• X: When you use this setting, you need to pick the left upper corner
of the frame to insert the file. You can only set the drawing scale in
the X direction.
• XY: When you use this setting, you need to pick the left upper
corner of the frame to insert the file. You can set the drawing scale
in both the X and Y direction.

Edit drawings 280 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 • Scale to fit: When you use this setting, you need to pick the left
upper and bottom right corners of the frame to size and create the
frame. Tekla Structures scales the file to fit the frame.
• Best fit: When you use this setting, you need to pick the left upper
and bottom right corners of the frame to size and create the frame.
Tekla Structures scales the file to fit, maintaining its original aspect
ratio.
• Scale in X
• Scales the file in the X direction. Enter a coefficient to indicate the
scale, for example, 1.0 for 100%, 1.5 for 150%, etc. The scaling type
must be set to X or XY.
• Scale in Y
• Scales the file in the Y direction. Enter a coefficient to indicate the
scale, for example, 1.0 for 100%, 1.5 for 150%, etc. The scaling type
must be set to XY.
4. Select the link frame line type and color.
5. In Name, browse for the DWG or DXF file you want to use.
6. Pick one or two points in the drawing to place the frame.
7. Click OK or Apply.
Tekla Structures adds a link to the DWG or DXF file inside a frame in the
drawing.

Add links to image files in drawings

You can insert a images inside a frame in a drawing. Tekla Structures adds the
image link using the properties in the Image properties dialog box. When you
modify the original file, Tekla Structures also modifies all the linked instances
in drawings.
1. Open the drawing where you want to insert a link to an image.

2. On the Drawing tab, click Image .

3. Select the scaling options:
• Type
• X: When you use this setting, you need to pick the left upper corner
of the frame to insert the image. You can only set the drawing scale
in the X direction.
• XY: When you use this setting, you need to pick the left upper
corner of the frame to insert the image. You can set the scale in
both the X and Y directions.

Edit drawings 281 Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in
drawings
 • Scale to fit: When you use this setting, you need to pick the left
upper and bottom right corners of the frame to size and create the
frame. Tekla Structures scales the image to fit the frame.
• Best fit: When you use this setting, you need to pick the left upper
and bottom right corners of the frame to size and create the frame.
Tekla Structures scales the image to fit, maintaining its original
aspect ratio.
• Scale in X
• Scales the file in the X direction. Enter a coefficient to indicate the
scale, for example, 1.0 for 100%, 1.5 for 150%, etc. The scaling type
must be set to X or XY.
•
• Scales the file in the Y direction. Enter a coefficient to indicate the
scale, for example, 1.0 for 100%, 1.5 for 150%, etc. The scaling type
must be set to XY.
4. Select the link frame line type and color.
5. In Name, browse for the image file you want to use.
6. Pick the points in the drawing to place the frame.
7. Click OK or Apply.
Tekla Structures adds a link to the image file inside a frame in the drawing.

Modify the properties of independent annotation objects

You can modify the properties of texts, symbols, links, hyperlinks, links to DWG
and DXF files, and revision marks in an open drawing.
1. Double-click the object in an open drawing.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off
switch at the bottom of the dialog box, and select only the
check boxes next to the properties that you want to modify.
3. Modify the properties.
4. Click Modify.

4.6 Show or hide drawing objects

You can hide selected drawing objects in either drawings or drawing views. You
can also list which objects you have hidden. You can also hide dimensions of
graphical drawing objects.

Edit drawings 282 Show or hide drawing objects

Hide objects in drawings and drawing views
You can hide selected drawing objects in drawings and drawing views. When
you hide a part, Tekla Structures will hide all its related objects. Note that if an
object is hidden in drawing views it will not be printed.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Check that the ghost outline option is selected in File --> Settings -->
Ghost outline .
3. Select the Color mode by pressing B.
Hidden objects are shown as ghost outlines in color drawings. In grayscale
and black and white drawings, hidden objects are not shown even if
Ghost outline is selected.
4. Select the objects you want to hide in one of the following ways:
• Activate the appropriate selection switch and select the objects using
area selection, for example. For example, to select parts, use Select
parts in drawings.
• Open the Drawing content manager from the side pane, select the
model objects in the drawing and click Show to populate the Drawing
content manager list. You can select areas, single or multiple views, or
single or multiple model objects. To select parts, ensure that model

object selection is active , and to select marks, ensure that mark

selection is active . Then select the desired model objects from the
list.
5. On the Drawing tab, click Hide/show and one of the following
commands:
• Hide from view: Tekla Structures hides the selected object in the view
where the selected objects are located.
• Hide from drawing: Tekla Structures hides the selected object in all
drawing views.
You can also right-click and select the commands from the pop-up menu.
6. When you want to show the hidden objects again, go to the Drawing tab
and click Hide/show and selectShow in view or Show in drawing.

Example
Below there are some examples of the results with different combinations of
selections.

Edit drawings 283 Show or hide drawing objects

 Setting Example
Color mode is set to Color in File -->
Settings . No objects are hidden.
Marks are shown.

Color mode is set to Color and Ghost

outline is not selected in File -->
Settings . Some reinforcing bars are
hidden and related marks are not
shown.

Edit drawings 284 Show or hide drawing objects

 Setting Example
Color mode is set to Color and Ghost
outline is selected in File --> Settings
Hidden rebars are shown as ghost
outlines and related part marks are
not shown.

Color mode is set to Black and

white and Ghost outline is selected
in File --> Settings . The ghost outline
has no effect on black and white
drawings. Rebars are hidden and
related marks are not shown.

Edit drawings 285 Show or hide drawing objects

List hidden parts in drawings
You can select whether to list the hidden parts in drawings, for example, in the
material list.
Note that listing hidden objects does not work in all templates. It works in
templates containing PART rows, but not in hierarchical templates. For
example, if the template is of type ASSEMBLY - PART, and the Assembly is
included in the drawing, all of its parts will also be included.
1. Open a drawing containing hidden parts.
2. Double-click the drawing to open the drawing properties dialog box.
3. Click Layout...
4. Select whether you want to list the hidden parts in List hidden objects in
templates. No removes all information about the hidden parts, also from
the total weight.
5. Click Modify.
In the example below, the hidden reinforcing bars are listed.

In the example below, the hidden reinforcing bars are not listed.

Hide or show dimensions of graphical objects

You can hide and show the dimensions of the graphical objects in drawings,
such as lines, or arcs, from Quick Launch or by using a keyboard shortcut. By
default, the dimensions are visible.

Edit drawings 286 Show or hide drawing objects

 In an open drawing where you want to hide or show graphical object
dimensions:
• Press Ctrl+d to hide the dimensions. To show the dimensions, press Ctrl+d
again. For more information about shortcuts, see Customize the keyboard
shortcuts.
• Or go to Quick Launch, start typing toggle graphical object
dimensions, and select the Toggle graphical object dimensions
command from the list that appears. To show the dimensions again, do the
same.

When the dimensions are visible, a small d is displayed on the status bar:

4.7 Arrange drawing objects

You can reposition drawing objects such as marks, dimensions or texts on the
basis of the protection properties of the drawing and the placing properties of
each drawing object type.
1. Open a drawing.
2. On the Drawing tab, click Properties --> Drawing and go to Protection....
3. Check the protection properties, modify them as required and click
Modify.
4. Double-click objects in your drawing, such as marks and dimensions, and
click Place... to check and change the placing settings as required.
If the object is set to fixed, theArrange objects commands will reposition
the objects and keep the fixed state.
5. Click OK and Modify.
6. In the open drawing, select the drawing objects you want to arrange:
• Select the individual objects such as marks, dimensions and texts by
pressing down Shift and clicking the objects.

Edit drawings 287 Arrange drawing objects

 • Use selection switches to select only texts, marks, and associative
notes, for example, and use area selection to select the objects that
you want.
• To select marks or associative notes only, first activate the Select parts
in drawings selection switch and select the parts using area selection,
for example, and then right-click and select Select part marks.
• Another way to select marks or associative notes only is to open the
Drawing content manager from the side pane, select the model
objects in the drawing and click Show to populate the Drawing

content manager list, ensure that marks selection is active , and

select the desired model objects from the list.
7. To arrange marks and texts near current location or ignoring the current
location, on the Drawing tab, click one of the following commands:
• Arrange objects --> Near current location .
Tekla Structures positions the selected drawing objects so that they do
not overlap other objects. Objects located in a free location are not
moved, and overlapping objects are moved as close to the current
location as possible.
• Arrange objects --> Ignore current locations .
Tekla Structures positions the selected drawing objects so that they do
not overlap with other objects without checking the current location of
the objects.
8. To arrange the selected marks and notes so that you avoid crossing leader

lines, click Arrange marks. Remember that you first have to select
the marks or notes.

See also
Define object protection and placement settings in drawings (page 603)

4.8 Align drawing objects

You can align objects (texts, marks, views and graphical objects) to the bottom,
to the middle, to the left, to the center, to the right, and to the top. You can
also position objects horizontally or vertically at equal distances from each
other.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Select the objects that you want to align.
You can select one or several objects using appropriate selection switches
or filters and area selection, for example. If you want to align marks and

Edit drawings 288 Align drawing objects

 notes only, you can use Drawing content manager for first selecting the
model objects and then the related marks or notes.
3. Do any of the following:

To Do this
Align selected texts, marks, views and a. Select the aligning command
graphical objects from the toolbar:

Click to align objects to the

bottom

Click to align objects to the

top

Click to align objects to the

left

Click to align objects to the

right

Click to align objects to the

center

Click to align objects to the

middle

Click to position objects to

the vertical center at equal
distances

Click to position objects to

the horizontal center at equal
distances
b. Pick a location for the alignment.
If you have mixed objects
selected, you will be asked to
select which objects you want to
align.
c. If you selected one of the two
commands that position objects

Edit drawings 289 Align drawing objects

 To Do this
to center at equal distances, type
the distance in the displayed
dialog box.

TIP To create a row of objects, align

them first to the top and then
position them horizontally at
equal distances from each
other. You do not need to
reselect the objects between the
two commands.

Align selected marks or notes Click Align marks on the

Drawing tab.
This aligns the selected marks and
notes that are in the close proximity
by stacking the marks or notes and
placing them evenly.
This command applies to all marks
and associative notes, except weld
marks.

Example
Below is an example where marks have been aligned to left.

Edit drawings 290 Snapping in drawings

4.9 Snapping in drawings
In drawings, you can snap in positions in the same way as in the model. You
can also snap to orthogonal angles while placing drawing objects or sketching.
Zoom level affects free snapping in the way that the closer you zoom, the
more exact you can snap. You can also place a drawing sketch object at a
specified distance in the indicated direction.

Drawing snap switches and snap settings

For a list of and for more information about drawing snap switches, see Snap
switches and symbols.
For more information on snap settings, see Snap settings.

Snap to orthogonal points in a drawing

Use the Ortho tool to snap to the closest orthogonal point in a drawing. You
can specify the orthogonal angle in the Drawing snap settings dialog box.
Using ortho snapping is useful if you need to place associative notes in a
consistent manner, or sketch a polygon using a certain angle, for example. You
can use predefined ortho angles and specify custom angles.
1. To activate orthogonal snapping, on the File menu, click Settings and
select the Ortho check box. By default, the keyboard shortcut is O.
2. Open a drawing and on the File menu, click Settings --> Snap settings.
Note that you have the same snap settings available in the model, but
these settings have no effect on drawings.
3. Set the snapping angles using one or both of the following ways:
• Angle interval: Select the check box next to Angle interval and then
select a predefined angle: 10, 15, 30, 45, 90.
• Custom angles: Select the check box next to Custom angles and
define the custom angles you want to snap to, for example, 12.5 or
17.5.

Edit drawings 291 Snapping in drawings

4. You can save different snap settings by entering a unique name in the
Save as box and clicking Save as. The settings are saved in the
\attributes folder under the model folder.
5. Click to save and apply the new settings.

In the example below, you first add a text with a leader line using a 60 degree
angle to the part:

Then you will add a new text using the same angle:

Edit drawings 292 Snapping in drawings

Free snapping

Free snapping in drawings is based on the zooming level in drawings: The

closer you zoom, the more exact you can sketch. For example, you can more
easily create rectangles that are of exact length when you zoom closer. The
snapping step changes from 1 to 1000 ( 1/16" - 5') depending on the zoom
level. You can follow the dimensions while you sketch.

Place a sketch object at a specified distance

You can snap to a specified distance in the indicated direction and place a
sketch object in that position. You can specify the distance coordinate in the
Enter a Numeric Location dialog box. In the following, you will ad a line.
1. On the Drawing tab, click Line to activate the line tool.

2. Hold down Ctrl and pick an origin.

3. Point to the direction where you want to place the start point of the line.

Edit drawings 293 Snapping in drawings

 Here, the bolt group needs to be moved 30 mm to the right and the line
will indicate the new position for the group.

4. Start entering the distance, for example 30.

The Enter a Numeric Location dialog box is displayed.
5. When you have entered the distance, click OK. Tekla Structures indicates
the start point of the line.

6. Pick an end point for the line.

Edit drawings 294 Snapping in drawings

7. To check that the distance is correct, create a dimension.

Edit drawings 295 Drag, reshape and resize drawing objects

4.10 Drag, reshape and resize drawing objects
Many drawing objects, dimension lines and leader lines of many drawing
objects have handles. You can use these handles to reshape, and resize
objects. You can also drag the objects.

Before you start:

• Click a drawing object or an object frame to activate the object and show
the handles.
• On the File menu, click Settings and select Smart select to drag by the
object handles without selecting the handle first.
Do any of the following:

To Do this
Drag the object • Point the handle, object or object
frame, hold down the left mouse
button and drag the object to a
new location.
The object follows the cursor while
you drag the object, and you can
all the time see what the end
result will be.
With circles, you can also use the
middle handle for dragging.
Resize the object 1. Click one of the objects or object
frame handles.
2. Drag the handle to resize the
object or object frame.
To enlarge the rectangle in all
directions, drag from a corner
handle.

Edit drawings 296 Drag, reshape and resize drawing objects

 To Do this

Reshape the object 1. Click the middle handle of a line

or a handle on the cloud, polyline
or polygon.
2. Drag the handle to reshape the
object.

NOTE If you drag a mark, note, text or dimension, its placing setting may be
set to fixed depending what its set for the advanced options listed
below. The mark, note, text or dimension stays where it is even though
you update the drawing.
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_DIMENSIONS_TO_FIXED
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_MARKS_TO_FIXED

Edit drawings 297 Drag, reshape and resize drawing objects

 XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_NOTES_TO_FIXED
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_TEXTS_TO_FIXED .

See also
Define object protection and placement settings in drawings (page 603)

4.11 Change the shape of leader lines

You can modify the shape of the leader line for objects that have leader lines.
1. Open a drawing and select the leader line you want to modify.
2. Drag from the middle point of the line.
3. Drag further from the created handle points and new middle points.

See also
Adjust part mark leader lines with advanced options (page 761)
Place reinforcement mark leader line base point automatically (page 762)
Drag the mark and associative note leader line base point (page 270)

4.12 Indicate cut lines in Tekla Structures drawings

Cut lines are lines that are indicated with a zigzag or a dash-and-dot lines in
different colors to show that the line is partially outside the view border.

To find out more, click the links below:

Create cut lines (page 299)
Update cut lines (page 299)
Delete cut lines (page 300)

Edit drawings 298 Change the shape of leader lines

Create cut lines
You can create cut lines to visualize the lines that are partially outside the view
frame. You can create cut lines automatically for all parts in the view, or for
selected parts.

Limitations:
• Cut lines cannot be created for polybeams.
• View extension for neighbor parts setting is not taken into account.

1. On the Drawing tab, click Create cut lines.

2. Do any of the following:
• Select the type (zigzag or dash-and-dot) for the line from the list of
types.
• Select the color for the line from the color list.
• Enter a scale for the line in the box next to the list of types.
3. Do one of the following:
• To create cut lines for all parts in the view, select the view.
• To create cut lines for selected parts, select the parts.
4. Click Create.

Example

See also
Indicate cut lines in Tekla Structures drawings (page 298)

Update cut lines

1. Open a drawing that contains cut lines.

2. On the Drawing tab, click Create cut lines.

3. Do one of the following:

Edit drawings 299 Indicate cut lines in Tekla Structures drawings

 • To update the cut lines of all parts in the view, select the view.
• To update the cut lines of selected parts, select the parts.
4. Click Create.

Tekla Structures removes all previously created cut lines, and creates new ones
that are up-to-date.

See also
Indicate cut lines in Tekla Structures drawings (page 298)

Delete cut lines

1. On the Drawing tab, click Create cut lines.

2. Do one of the following:
• To delete the cut lines of all parts in the view, select the view.
• To delete the cut lines of selected parts, select the parts.
3. Click Delete.

See also
Indicate cut lines in Tekla Structures drawings (page 298)

4.13 Explode drawing plug-ins and use them as normal

objects
You can explode drawing plug-ins into base objects, and then edit and use
them as any other drawing objects. For example, if you want to modify COG
dimension in a way that is not available for the plug-in, you can explode the
COG dimension and then modify its properties in the Dimension Properties
dialog box.
1. Click a drawing object that is made using a plug-in.
2. Right-click and select Explode.

Tekla Structures explodes the plug-in into base objects that are added to the
view. Now you can edit and use the exploded objects as any other drawing
objects through the properties dialog box.

Edit drawings 300 Explode drawing plug-ins and use them as normal
objects
4.14 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects
Sketch objects are objects that you may add in a drawing to highlight
information existing in the Tekla Structures model, or to indicate positions of
openings, windows, doors, and such. In open Tekla Structures drawings, you
can use the sketching tools to sketch clouds, lines, circles, rectangles, arcs,
polylines, and polygons, for example. Use can use these tools to explode and
combine sketch objects, cover-up outlines and part faces, and create fillets and
chamfers. You can re-order sketch objects, and sketch objects and model
objects. Using the sketching tools, you can also trim, extend, split and divide
sketch objects, and copy objects using offset.

Sketch objects are associative if they have associativity points, i.e. they are
associated to a building object.
Click the following links to find out more about sketching tools and sketch
objects:
Draw sketch objects in drawings (page 301)
Combine and explode sketch objects in drawings (page 305)
Create and add pattern lines in drawings (page 307)
Re-order sketch objects in drawings (page 306)
Trim drawing lines (page 314)
Split sketch objects (page 316)
Divide sketch objects (page 316)
Create fillets in drawings (page 318)
Create chamfers in drawings (page 319)
Copy sketch objects with offset (page 317)
Hide part face areas and outlines with cover-up tools (page 321)

See also
Drawing objects (page 21)
Drawing sketch object properties (page 929)

Draw sketch objects in drawings

You can create lines, single continuous lines, pattern lines, polygons, polylines,
rectangles, circles, arcs, clouds and cover-up rectangles, lines, polygons and
polylines in an open drawing using sketching tools.
1. Hold down Shift, and on the Drawing tab, click one of the following
commands to modify the object properties first:

Edit drawings 301 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

• Line --> Draw line: Sketch a single line between two points you
pick.

• Line --> Draw single lines continuously: Create multiple single

lines at one go using the current line properties. Press Esc to interrupt.
Tekla Structures creates a continuous line as separate line sections.
You can combine (page 305) the sections into one by using the
Combine command.
Note that for the continuous single line tool, you cannot open the
properties dialog box before creating the line by holding down
Shift and clicking the command on the ribbon. You can change the
properties of a continuous line through the properties of a normal
single line.

• Line --> Pattern line: Sketch a line containing a pattern that you
select using the current pattern line properties.
Tip: If you need a new pattern, use the Pattern line editor to create it
(File --> Editors --> Pattern line editor).

• Draw rectangle: Sketch a rectangle between points you pick. You

can create rectangles with horizontal and vertical sides.
• You can change the size of the rectangle by dragging the handles.
• You can explode (page 305) rectangles into single lines.
• To rotate the rectangle, click Move --> Rotate on the Drawing tab.

• Draw circle by center and radius: Sketch a circle by picking the

center point first and then a point on the circle that specifies the
radius.

• Draw circle by three points: Sketch a circle that traverses the

three points you pick, either clockwise or counter-clockwise.

• Draw arc by end points and center: Sketch an arc by specifying

two end points first and then a center point. The center point specifies
the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.

• Draw arc by three points: Sketch an arc that traverses the three
points you pick, either clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Edit drawings 302 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

• Draw polyline: Sketch a line with straight segments using the
current polyline properties. Remember to set the Bulge for all lines
factor if you are creating curved polylines.
• While sketching a polyline, you can:
• snap to temporary graphical points and set them as reference
points by holding down Ctrl and clicking a point on the
temporary line.
• set multiple reference points using DWG objects and Tekla
Structures building objects.
• delete a reference point by holding down Ctrl and clicking the
point.
• create a polygon by clicking the start point of the polyline.
• You can delete the selected corner point by right-clicking and
selecting Delete.
• You can add handles by dragging a handle point on the polyline.
You can change the shape of the polyline by dragging the handles.
• You can explode (page 305) a polyline into separate straight lines,
and combine (page 305) polylines into closed polygons.

• Draw polygon: Sketch a polygon by picking the corner points

using the current polygon properties. To close the polygon, pick the
start point again or click the middle mouse button.
• While sketching a polygon, you can:
• snap to temporary graphical points and set them as reference
points by holding down Ctrl and clicking a point on the
temporary line.
• set multiple reference points using DWG objects and Tekla
Structures building objects.
• delete a reference point by holding down Ctrl and clicking the
point.
• You can delete the selected corner point by right-clicking and
selecting Delete.
• You can add handles by dragging a handle point on the polygon.
You can change the shape of the polygon by dragging the handles.
• You can explode (page 305) polygons into single lines.

• Draw cloud: Sketch a cloud that traverses the points you pick.
Close the cloud by clicking the middle mouse button. Remember to set
the Bulge for all lines factor for the clouds.

Edit drawings 303 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

 • Draw cover-up rectangle: Quickly hide model object outlines in
drawings. To use, select the command and sketch a non-transparent
rectangular area (page 321) over the model object outline that you
want to hide. You can change the size of the rectangle by dragging the
handles.

• Draw cover-up line: Quickly hide model object outlines in

drawings. To use, select the command and sketch a non-transparent
line (page 321)over the model object outline that you want to hide.

• Draw cover-up polygon: Quickly hide model object outlines in

drawings. To use, select the command and sketch a non-transparent
polygon (page 321) over the model object outline that you want to
hide. You can change the shape of the polygon by dragging the
handles.

• Draw cover-up polyline: Quickly hide model object outlines in

drawings. To use, select the command and sketch a non-transparent
polyline (page 321) over the model object outline that you want to
hide. You can change the shape of the polyline by dragging the
handles. You can also explode (page 305) a cover-up polyline into
separate straight lines, and combine (page 305) cover-up polylines into
closed cover-up polygons.
2. Click OK or Apply.
3. Sketch the object by following the instructions on the status bar.

While using sketching tools

• Object dimensions are shown while you draw the sketch objects, and also
when you select the objects.
• You may want to activate orthogonal snapping by pressing O while
sketching to show ortho angles. You can define snapping steps (page 290)
and custom angles in Drawing snap settings (File --> Settings --> Snap
settings).
• The view scale is taken into account when you copy sketch objects from
one view to another, which means that the scale of the object and the
related numerical information adjusts to the scale of the target view.
• Sketch object dimensions take into account dimension settings in drawings
in general. This means, for example, that units can be controlled in the
same way as for the other dimensions.
• You can also change the mutual order of sketch objects (graphical objects),
and the mutual order of sketch objects and model objects. You can bring
sketch objects forward or in front of other sketch objects, or send them
backward or behind other sketch objects,. You can also send sketch objects

Edit drawings 304 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

 behind model objects or bring them in front of model objects. You can also
re-order DWGs and images in the same way. For more information, see Re-
order sketch objects in drawings (page 306).

See also
Drawing sketch object properties (page 929)
Define customized line types in TeklaStructures.lin (page 832)

Combine and explode sketch objects in drawings

You can explode a polyline, rectangle, or polygon into separate straight lines.
You can also combine separate lines, continuous lines and polylines into a
single polyline or a closed polygon.
Do one of the following:

To Do this
Combine separate lines, 1. Select the separate lines or polylines.
continuous lines or
polylines into a single
polyline or a closed
polygon

2. Go to the Drawing tab and click Combine

.
Separate lines and polyline are combined into a
single polyline or a closed polygon. When you
select the combined shape, you can see that Tekla
Structures has combined the lines and created
more handles in the shape:

Edit drawings 305 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

 To Do this

Explode a polyline, 1. Select polylines, rectangles or polygons.

rectangle, or polygon
2.
into separate straight
lines Go to the Drawing tab and click Explode .
The polylines, rectangles and polygons are
exploded into single lines:

See also
Draw sketch objects in drawings (page 301)

Re-order sketch objects in drawings

In drawings, you may want to indicate positions of openings, windows, doors
and such by sketch objects. You can change the mutual order of sketch objects
(graphical objects), and the mutual order of sketch objects and model objects.
You can bring sketch objects forward or in front of other sketch objects, or
send them backward or behind other sketch objects. You can also send sketch
objects behind model objects or bring them in front of model objects. You can
also re-order DWGs and images in the same way.

If you have several sketch objects (objects on several layers), the drawing order
affects on which layer the forward and backward commands place the objects.
Newly created sketch objects are placed on their own layer in the drawing
order: newer ones on top of the older ones.

Edit drawings 306 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

1. Right-click a sketch object, DWG or an image and click Re-order.
2. Select one of the following commands:
• Send backward: Moves the selected object one step closer to the back
of all other sketch objects.
• Send to back: Places the selected object behind all other sketch
objects.
• Bring forward: Moves the selected object one step closer to the front
of all other sketch objects.
• Bring to front: Places the selected object in front all other sketch
objects.
• Send behind model objects: Places the object behind all model
objects. You can also set this option in the sketch object properties
dialog box (Behind model objects --> Yes).
• Bring in front of model objects: Places the object in front of all model
objects. You can also set this option in the sketch object properties
dialog box (Behind model objects --> No).

NOTE • Sketch objects that are placed behind model objects, cannot
be rearranged together with sketch objects that are placed in
front of the model objects.
• You cannot change the mutual order of model objects.

Create and add pattern lines in drawings

You can easily apply special and complex lines to drawings by using the
pattern lines. You can create new pattern lines and modify existing pattern
lines in Pattern line editor, and add the created pattern lines in drawings
using the Pattern line command. Pattern lines may include symbols, lines and

Edit drawings 307 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

spacings. You can create pattern lines to indicate cut lines, foundations, weld
paths, or electrical wiring, for example.

Create a pattern line

1. In the model or when a drawing is open, on the File menu, click Editors --
> Pattern line editor.
If you have not defined a pattern line earlier, all Pattern line editor fields
and containers are empty.
2. Click Browse... to browse for an image to be used as a sample for the
pattern line.

If you do not select an image, the default image will be used.

The selected image is also shown later on when you select a pattern line
in the Pattern line properties dialog box.

3. Enter a name for the pattern line in Create new. If you want to modify a
pattern line, select the desired pattern line from the list first.
4. In the Start element area, click New on the right to create a new start
element. The start element starts the pattern line (marked with red in the
dialog box example below).

If you select Symbol as the Element type:

Edit drawings 308 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

• Select the symbol file from the File list.
• In the Index list, enter the number of the symbol. To select a symbol in
a separate window, click Select... and double-click the desired symbol.
• In Space, enter the space allocated for the element in millimeters.
• In Size, enter the size of the element in millimeters.
• In Spacing type, select the spacing type for the elements on the
pattern line:
Fixed: The unoccupied space will not be distributed.
Variable: The unoccupied space will be equally distributed to the
elements with this spacing type.
Infinite: The blocks will occupy all the space between the two points.
The space will be distributed to fixed elements, and the rest will be
equally distributed to the infinite elements.
• In Color, select the element color.
• In Vertical offset and Horizontal offset, enter offsets for the
elements in millimeters.
• In Rotate, define a rotation angle for the element.
If you select Line as the Element type:

• Select a line type from the Line type list.

• In Space, enter the space allocated for the element in millimeters.
• In Size, enter the size of the element in millimeters.
• In Spacing type, select the spacing type for the elements:
Fixed: The unoccupied space will not be distributed.
Variable: The unoccupied space will be equally distributed to the
elements with this spacing type.
Infinite: The blocks will occupy all the space between the two points.
The space will be distributed to fixed elements, and the rest will be
equally distributed to the infinite elements.
• In Color, select the element color.

Edit drawings 309 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

 • In Vertical offset and Horizontal offset, enter offsets for the
elements in millimeters.
If you select Spacing as the Element type:

• In Space, enter the space allocated for the element in millimeters.

• In Spacing type, select the spacing type for the elements:
Fixed: The unoccupied space will not be distributed.
Variable: The unoccupied space will be equally distributed to the
elements with this spacing type.
Infinite: The blocks will occupy all the space between the two points.
The space will be distributed to fixed elements, and the rest will be
equally distributed to the infinite elements.
5. In the End element area, click New to create a new end element in the
same way as you did for the start element.
The end element is marked with red in the editor dialog box:

6. On the Repeating and continuous elements tab, define the elements

that are repeating on the pattern line (marked with red in the editor dialog
box):

7. On the Repeating and continuous elements tab, define the elements

that are drawn continuously on the pattern line (marked with red in the
editor dialog box):

8. You can check your pattern line definitions and how the line looks by

clicking the Preview button :

• If you have the Automatic preview option active, Tekla Structures
automatically opens a drawing preview that shows the created pattern
line with different spacing options taken from the Pattern line
properties dialog box. If you already have a drawing open, Tekla

Edit drawings 310 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

 Structures will ask if you want to save and close the drawing before the
preview is opened.

• To update the preview by clicking the button , select the preview

option.
• You can also see previews of other saved pattern lines by selecting a
pattern line from the list at the top.

• To close the preview, click the Preview button again.

9. Save your pattern line by clicking the Save button . The pattern line is
saved in a .clp file in the \attributes folder under the model folder.
Now you can open a drawing and create a pattern line using the pattern line
that you defined.
The symbols in the following example are taken from the
PatternLineSymbols symbol file.
• The symbol at the left end is the start element, symbol #49.
• The symbol at the right end is the end element, symbol #48.
• Blue color is defined for the start and end elements.
• Symbol #51 in red is used as a repeating element.
• Two SolidLines are used as continuous elements with vertical offsets 2.0
and -2.0.

Tip: If your pattern lines are jumping like in the example below, try using
continuous elements instead of repeating elements.

Edit drawings 311 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

Add a pattern line in a drawing
You may select among predefined pattern lines, or create your own in Pattern
line editor.
Limitations
• Pattern lines are not included in a 2D Library detail unless the pattern line
has been exploded.
• You cannot rotate or mirror created pattern lines.
• You cannot clone pattern lines.
1. In an open drawing, hold down Shift and click Drawing --> Line -->
Pattern line.
2. In the Pattern line properties dialog box, select the pattern line that you
want to use from the Pattern line list. You can also load other pattern line
properties by selecting a properties file from the list at the top and clicking
Load.
3. Select whether to show the Start element and/or the End element in the
pattern line. The start and end elements are defined in the Pattern line
editor.
4. Select how the elements are aligned and spaced in Spacing options:
Left aligns the elements to the left.

Right aligns the elements to the right.

Centered centers the elements.

Distributed uses the same space in between the elements.

Edit drawings 312 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

 Best fit tries to fit as many elements as possible with minimal distortion.
This setting affects both element size and space.

5. Set the Size of the pattern line.

6. Select the desired Scaling option:
View draws the line and elements scaled down to the view.
Paper draws the line and elements scaled down to the scale of the paper.
7. Enter the Vertical offset in millimeters if necessary. A positive value
moves the whole pattern line upwards and a negative value downwards.
8. Select the Color of the pattern line.
The color depends on how you set the colors in Pattern line editor and
Pattern line properties:
• If you select Default as the color both in Pattern line editor and in
Pattern line properties, all elements will be black.
• If you select the Default color in Pattern line editor, and you select
another color in Pattern line properties, the color selected in Pattern
line properties will be used.
• If you select some other color than Default in Pattern line editor, and
you select another color in Pattern line properties, the color selected
in Pattern line editor properties will be used.
9. If you want to save the pattern line properties in a properties file, enter a
name for the file and click Save as.
10. Click OK, pick the points for a polyline, and end the line by clicking the
middle-mouse button. Note that you can select the handles in the added
pattern line and move the sections of the polyline by dragging.

Pattern line elements

A pattern line consists of one or several blocks of elements. These element
blocks are arranged between two given points.
The illustration below shows a pattern line consisting of two repeating symbol
elements in three blocks.
The symbol elements have the following settings:
Space = 1.5
Spacing type = Fixed
Size = 1
Color = 1st element is blue, and the 2nd element is red

Edit drawings 313 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

1. Block size
2. Unoccupied space, which is the space that is left when the blocks are
arranged between two points. This space is redistributed to the elements
which have the spacing type Variable.
The following illustration describes the different element settings. The letter E
inside a circle is an element:

1. Size of the element

2. Origin
3. Horizontal offset from the origin
4. Vertical offset from the origin
5. Space

Trim drawing lines

You can shorten or extend a line relative to the boundary you select in an open
drawing. The boundary can be a line, part, arc, or rectangle, for example.

1. On the Drawing tab, click Trim .

2. Select the object you want to use as a boundary.

Edit drawings 314 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

3. Click the middle mouse button.
4. Do one of the following:

To Do this
Extend the line Click the end of the line to extend it to the boundary line.
Original lines:

The extended line:

Shorten the line Click the line at the end from which you want to shorten it.
from the left or right
Original line:
end

Line clicked at the left end:

Line clicked at the right end:

Edit drawings 315 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

 To Do this

See also
Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects (page 300)

Split sketch objects

You can cut a sketch object into two pieces at a point you select in an open
drawing. You can split lines, polylines, circles, and arcs.
1. Select the line.

2. On the Drawing tab, click Split.

3. Pick a point on the line to indicate the location for splitting.

4. Tekla Structures splits the line into two.

See also
Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects (page 300)

Divide sketch objects

You can divide a sketch object into a number of segments that you specify in
an open drawing. You can divide lines and arcs.
1. Select the line.

Edit drawings 316 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

2. On the Drawing tab, click Divide.
3. In the displayed Segments dialog box, enter the number of segments, for
example 4, and click OK.

Tekla Structures divides the line into four lines.

See also
Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects (page 300)

Copy sketch objects with offset

You can copy lines, circles, polylines, polygons and rectangles in the direction
you point using the offset that you specify. You can also create new circles
centered in the same location as the original circle and adjust the radius by the
offset that you specify.
1. Select the object that you want to copy in a drawing, for example a line or
a circle.

2. On the Drawing tab, click Copy with offset.

3. Click the drawing view in the direction where you want to copy the object.

4. Type the offset in the displayed box , and press Enter.

Tekla Structures copies the selected shape to the specified direction. For
example, if you are copying a line, Tekla Structures makes a new copy of
the line in the specified location. If you are copying a circle, Tekla
Structures creates a new circle that is centered in the same location as the
original circle, and adjusts the radius by the offset that you specified.
When you copy a line that has a bulge, the created line has the same
bulge as the original one.
If the rectangle has no bulges, the copied object will still be a rectangle
after you use Segments. Note that if the original rectangle has a bulge, it is
not possible to draw a new rectangle using Copy with offset. When you
use segments, the new copied object will become a polygon.

Example
Example of a copied line:

Edit drawings 317 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

Example of a copied circle:

Create fillets in drawings

You can connect two intersecting lines by extending the two selected lines to
their intersection point by creating a fillet. If no intersection point is found or if
it is outside the drawing, nothing will be done.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Select two intersecting lines.

3. On the Drawing tab, click Create fillet.

Edit drawings 318 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

Create chamfers in drawings
You can create chamfers between two lines using a distance that you specify.
You can create both straight and round chamfers.
1. Select two intersecting lines.
2. Do one of the following:

• To create a straight chamfer, on the Drawing tab, click Create

straight chamfer.
Enter the distance that you want to have between the two lines (the
length of the chamfer line) in the displayed dialog box.

Edit drawings 319 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

 • To create a round chamfer, on the Drawing tab, click Create
round chamfer.
Enter the desired radius in the displayed dialog box.

Example
Example of a straight chamfer:

Example of a round chamfer:

Edit drawings 320 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

Hide part face areas and outlines with cover-up tools
Use cover-up line, rectangle, polyline or polygon tool for quickly hiding areas of
building object faces or outlines in drawings. Cover-up objects are also shown
in printouts.
1. Open a drawing.
2. On the Drawing tab, click one of the cover-up tools:
Draw cover-up rectangle

Edit drawings 321 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

 Draw cover-up line

Draw cover-up polyline

Draw cover-up polygon

3. Pick points and draw a non-transparent area or line over the area that you
want to hide.
The cover-up object dimensions are shown while you draw it, and also
when the object is selected. You can do the following with cover-up
objects:
• Drag cover-up objects to another location.
• Resize cover-up objects by dragging the handles.
• Reshape polyline and polygon objects by dragging the handles.
• Explode (page 305) a cover-up polyline into separate straight cover-up
lines.
• Combine (page 305) a cover-up line or polyline into a closed cover-up
polygon.

Edit drawings 322 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

Limitation:The Re-order command in the pop-up menu has no effect on the
cover-up object. To have a cover-up area hiding sketch objects, such as
polygons and polylines, use Re-order for the sketch object and send it behind
model object.

See also
Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects (page 300)

Edit drawings 323 Drawing sketching tools and sketch objects

4.15 Building objects in drawings
Building objects are 2D representations of the 3D objects in the model, for
example, parts, bolts, surface treatment, and reinforcement. Building objects
in drawings get their appearance from the automatic drawing settings when
you create a drawing. After creating the drawing, you can change their
appearance in an open drawing.

NOTE If you want to change the model weld properties, go back to the
model, and make the changes there. In the drawing, you can only
change the visibility settings and appearance of the model welds. For
manually added drawing weld marks the properties can be changed in
the drawings.

You can modify building objects in many ways:

Modify building object properties (page 324)
Shorten parts view by view (page 325)
Hide part face areas and outlines with cover-up tools (page 321)
Show a single reinforcing bar in a group (page 369)
Show layer information on reinforcing bars in drawings (page 370)
Edge chamfers in drawings (page 326)
Fillet edges in drawings (page 332)

See also
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)
Bolt content and appearance properties in drawings (page 909)
Surface treatment visibility and content properties in drawings (page 910)
Reinforcement/Neighbor reinforcement and mesh properties in drawings
(page 913)
Welds in drawings (page 346)

Modify building object properties

You can modify the drawing properties of the building objects (parts, bolts,
reinforcement, surface treatment, welds, pour breaks, pour objects,
reinforcement) in an open drawing. For example, you can change the color and
how different kinds of lines are shown, or use fills in parts and cross sections.

Limitations: The color of the center lines can be changed only on the drawing
and view level, not on the object level. For center lines, you can only adjust the

Edit drawings 324 Building objects in drawings

color in the properties dialog box, not the type. You can adjust the line type of
part center lines with the advanced option XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE.
To modify the properties of a building object in a drawing:
1. Double-click a building object, for example a part, reinforcement, surface
treatment, or bolt.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off
switch at the bottom of the dialog box.
3. Select the check boxes of only those properties that you want to modify.
4. On the Content tab, select the part representation, whether to show
hidden lines, center lines and reference lines, and which additional
markings to show.
5. On the Appearance tab, select the color and type of the lines.
It is easier to adjust the center line color, if you hide the hidden lines on
the Content tab first.
6. On the Fill tab, set the part and section fill options and add hatches.
7. Click Modify.

See also
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)
Bolt content and appearance properties in drawings (page 909)
Surface treatment visibility and content properties in drawings (page 910)
Reinforcement/Neighbor reinforcement and mesh properties in drawings
(page 913)
Pour object and pour break properties in drawings (page 922)
Model weld properties in drawings (page 927)
Example: Part representations (page 795)
Add hatches (fills) to parts and sketch objects in drawings (page 809)

Shorten parts view by view

You can shorten parts in the selected view in an open drawing. By default,
there is only an empty area shown between the parts, but you can use a
shortening symbol instead, and adjust the shortening symbol color and line
type.
1. Double-click a drawing view frame in an open drawing.
2. In View properties, go to the Attributes 2 tab.
3. In Cut parts, select Yes, Only in x direction or Only in y direction.

Edit drawings 325 Building objects in drawings

4. In Cut skew parts, select Yes to cut skewed parts.
5. In Minimum cut part length, set the minimum length of the shortened
part.
This option defines how long the part must at least be to get shortened.
The length of the part must be at least twice the entered value.
6. In Space between cut parts, enter the distance between the cut parts on
paper.
7. Click Modify.

TIP To use a view shortening symbol instead of the empty area, set the advanced
options XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS and
XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS to TRUE.
You can control the appearance of the view shortening symbol with the
advanced options XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR,
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE, and
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_WITH_ZIGZAG.

Example
Below is an example where the zig zag shortening symbol is used.

See also
Shorten parts in drawing views (page 634)
Shorten or lengthen parts (page 632)
View properties in drawings (page 844)

Edit drawings 326 Building objects in drawings

Edge chamfers in drawings
You can show edge chamfers in drawings, and control the way they are shown
by modifying the part properties and the edge chamfer properties. You can
also add chamfer marks as associative notes.

See also
Building objects in drawings (page 324)
Show edge chamfers in a drawing (page 327)
Define default line color and type for edge chamfers (page 328)
Change edge chamfer line color and type manually (page 328)
Add associative notes to edge chamfers (page 329)
Example: Edge chamfers (page 330)

Show edge chamfers in a drawing

You can select whether you show edge chamfers in your drawing and the way
they are shown.
1. Open a drawing of a part that has edge chamfers, and double-click the
drawing background to open the drawing properties.
2. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
3. In the area of the part properties dialog box, select the Edge chamfers
on/off check box.
4. Select Outline or Exact in Representation list depending on the desired
result.

Edit drawings 327 Building objects in drawings

Exact Outline

5. Save the view properties and click Close.

6. Click Modify.
7. If needed, double-click an edge chamfer and modify the line color and
type in the drawing.

See also
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)
Edge chamfers in drawings (page 326)

Define default line color and type for edge chamfers

You can define a default color and line type for edge chamfers in drawings.
1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Options and go to the Drawing
objects settings.
2. Define the default line color.
3. Define the default line type.
4. Click OK to save and close the dialog box.

TIP You can override the default settings manually in a drawing by changing the
edge chamfer line color and type in the Edge Chamfer Properties dialog box
(page 328).

Edit drawings 328 Building objects in drawings

Change edge chamfer line color and type manually
You can change the line type and color of the edge chamfers in an open
drawing. This overrides the default color and type defined in the Options
dialog box.
1. In the drawing, double-click an edge chamfer to display the Edge Chamfer
Properties dialog box.
2. Select the desired color and line type.
Background color is often used for edge chamfer lines for the
reason that you may not want to print edge chamfers, or see them in
small scale drawings, but you want to be able select them, for example, to
add chamfer marks.

Example
The following examples show how the edge chamfers are displayed with
different part representation settings:

Part representation Exact.

Part representation Outline,

edge chamfer not selected.

Part representation Outline,

edge chamfer selected.

TIP You can also set a default line color and type for edge chamfers (page 328).

Add associative notes to edge chamfers

You can add associative notes to edge chamfers.

1. Open a drawing of a part that has edge chamfers.

2. Modify the part properties and edge chamfer properties so that edge
chamfers are visible and you can easily select them.
3. On the Drawing tab, hold down Shift and click one of the commands in
the Note menu.

Edit drawings 329 Building objects in drawings

4. In the Associative Note Properties dialog box, modify the note
properties as required.
5. Select Edge chamfer from the Content list.
6. Add the elements that you want to have in the edge chamfer mark.
7. Click the edge chamfer.
If you use a leader line, you need to pick a position for the note.

See also
Add associative notes in drawings (page 255)

Example: Edge chamfers

See below for typical examples of the ways showing edge chamfers.
In this example, Representation is Exact and Edge chamfers are On.
Background color is used in edge chamfer lines, because you usually do not
want to show edge chamfers in printouts, but may want to see and select
them in the drawing, for example, to add associative notes.

Edit drawings 330 Building objects in drawings

In this second example, Representation is Outline and Edge chamfers are
On. Background color is used in edge chamfer lines, because you may want to
see and select chamfers in the drawing, for example, to add associative
notes.This representation is often used when the scale is small and you do not
need to see the small chamfers clearly. The edge chamfer presented in the
bottom right corner of the image shows what the edge chamfer looks like
when it is selected.

Edit drawings 331 Building objects in drawings

See also
Edge chamfers in drawings (page 326)
Show edge chamfers in a drawing (page 327)

Fillet edges in drawings

Fillet edges are lines that define the boundary between straight faces and
curved faces in the model. Examples of model objects containing fillet edges
are profiles with curved fillets, slabs or contour plates with curved chamfers,
and curved polybeams. The fillet edges can be shown in all drawing types for
parts and pours. Fillet edges are visible by default for new drawings, and
invisible for drawings that are created in a Tekla Structures version earlier than
2016.

Show fillet edges in drawings

To show the fillet edges, you need to set the option Fillet edges to on. For
profiles, Exact representation might be required to show the fillet edges,

Edit drawings 332 Building objects in drawings

depending on the profile. You can control the fillet edge visibility in Part
properties and in Pour object properties on drawing, view and object level.
To set the fillet edges visible on drawing level in a general arrangement
drawing:
1. Open a general arrangement drawing that contains steel or concrete parts
with curved faces, for example, profiles with curved fillets, slabs or
contour plates with curved chamfers, or curved polybeams.
2. Double-click the drawing background to display the General
arrangement drawing properties dialog box.
3. Click Part or Pour object.
4. If you need to change part representation (page 904) for profiles, select
Exact from the Part representation list.
5. Under Additional marks, select the Fillet edges on/off check box.
6. If needed, set the hidden lines options:
• Select the Hidden lines on/off check box to show the hidden lines of
other parts.
• Select the Own hidden lines on/off check box to show the part's own
hidden lines.
7. Click Modify.

Examples
Below is an example of fillet edges in the model:

Edit drawings 333 Building objects in drawings

Below is an example of parts in a drawing showing the fillet edges (Fillet
edges > on):

Edit drawings 334 Building objects in drawings

 Below is an example of parts in a drawing not showing the fillet edges (Fillet
edges > off):

4.16 2D Library in drawings

2D Library allows you to quickly select objects in any drawings and save them
as 2D drawing details. You can insert details in drawing views and drawings in
any model. You can create details out of many kinds of drawing objects, such
as parts, texts, notes, drawing sketch objects, or DWG files. In addition to
details, you can browse and insert DWG files and images directly to your
drawings from the 2D Library. It allows you to browse for details in other
folders and use them in your drawing. Your company can create a collection of
standard details that can be distributed in the system, project or firm folders
and reused in different drawings and projects.
Limitations
• Multi-colored part section hatches cannot be recognized in detail creation,
and the part face hatch will be used instead.
• Templates or images cannot be captured in detail creation.

Edit drawings 335 2D Library in drawings

• Manually added weld marks cannot be captured in detail creation. This also
applies to certain other manually added marks, such as revision marks and
level marks.
• Details inserted in container views (views around linked/copied views) may
be placed incorrectly.
• Inserted details do not rotate if the view is rotated.
• Inserted details cannot be cloned with the drawing.

Open and view 2D Library

The 2D Library is located in the Tekla Structures side pane. It is available when
a drawing is open.
1. Open a drawing.

2. Open the 2D Library by clicking the Drawing 2D Library button in

the side pane.

Edit drawings 336 2D Library in drawings

3. Click the Folder button to check the contents of the various folders:

• Current model shows the details in the \Drawing Details folder

under the current model folder. Your details are saved here, and here
you can also create new subfolders. This folder may be empty if you
have not created any details or used details in other folders.
• Project and Firm show the details in the subfolder \Drawing
Details under the project and firm folders if you have defined paths
to these folders as values for the advanced options XS_PROJECT and
XS_FIRM, respectively.
• System shows the details in the subfolder \Drawing Details in any
of the folders defined as a value for the advanced option XS_SYSTEM.
• Browse... allows you to browse to any folder for details.

Edit drawings 337 2D Library in drawings

 • When you use details in project, firm, system or any other folder than
\Drawing Details in the current model folder, the details are copied
to the current model folder.
• When you update a detail with new or changed objects, all instances of
the detail in any drawings in the current model will be updated as well.
If you are fetching the detail that you update from the firm folder, the
detail will not change in the firm folder. Global changes can only be
done by the administrators of the firm, project and system folders.
• If the administrator updates a detail in the firm, project or system
folder, any already inserted detail instances will not get automatically
updated in any project. To do this, you would need to manually copy
the updated detail file and replace what's in the model folder.
• New folder allows you to create a new folder in the current model
folder in the subfolder \Drawing Details.
• Any subfolders in any of the folders are shown next to the details in
the selected folder in 2D Library view. Double-click the subfolder to
see the included details.

4. Search for details by entering a search term in the search box at the top of
2D Library. Tekla Structures shows the matching details in the view.
Details are only searched in the currently displayed folder and its
subfolders.

Insert a detail to a drawing from 2D Library

In 2D Library, you can add details located in system, project, firm or the
current model folder to any of your drawings.
1. Open a drawing.

2. Click the Drawing 2D Library button in the side pane to open 2D

Library. To browse to another folder for details, click the Folder button

, and select Current model, System, Project or Firm. You can also
browse further to other folders by selecting Browse...

Edit drawings 338 2D Library in drawings

3. If you always want to insert a detail inside a view when necessary, click the

Options button and select Create view if needed.

You may want to create a view if you place details outside drawing views.
The new view will use the currently applied view properties and get the
same scale as the inserted detail. If the Create view if needed option is
not selected, the inserted detail does not get a view of its own, and
dimensioning will not work properly in the detail.
By default the standard view properties file is used. You can also create a
new view properties file to be used for detail views. This will let you have a
specific view label in detail views, for example. You can select the new
properties file, or any of the existing view properties files, in the Options

menu . The selected view properties file settings will be applied to

every 2D detail container view.

4. Click a detail and then click the drawing view or drawing to place the
detail. Tekla Structures inserts the detail. The detail is inserted as a plug-
in, which means that the detail objects are grouped and stay together
when you select or move the detail in a drawing.

Edit drawings 339 2D Library in drawings

Create a new detail in 2D Library
You can create new details in the current model folder or its subfolders.
1. In an open drawing, add the objects that will shape your detail.
In the example below, the detail represents a beam-to-beam connection.
The detail contains texts, circles, lines, polylines, and symbols that have
been added on top of a drawing and surrounded by a frame.

2. Click the Drawing 2D Library button in the side pane to open 2D

Library.
3. Select the objects that you want to include in the detail.

4. Add the detail in 2D Library:

a. If you have subfolders in the current model folder, double-click the
subfolder in 2D Library view where you want to save the new detail.

Edit drawings 340 2D Library in drawings

 b. Click the New detail from selected objects button at the top of
2D Library.
A message at the bottom of 2D Library asks you to pick a reference
point.
c. Pick a reference point in the drawing.

A message at the bottom of 2D Library asks you to capture a sample

image by picking two points.
d. Pick two points to capture an image of the detail.

Tekla Structures creates the detail and adds it to 2D Library in the \Drawing
Details folder under the current model folder. This folder is automatically

Edit drawings 341 2D Library in drawings

created when a detail is created in the current model for the first time. Tekla
Structures saves the detail and its metadata (name, description) as a .ddf file.
The metadata is used when you search for details in 2D Library. The captured
image is saved as a .png file.

Create a new folder in 2D Library and copy/move to the

folder
You can create details in a new folder or copy or move details to the new
folder in the current model folder.

1. In 2D Library, click the Folder button , and select New folder. You
can rename the new folder by clicking the folder and entering a name at
the bottom of the side pane.
2. Right-click a detail you want to copy or move and click Cut or Copy.
3. Right-click the new folder and select Paste. Tekla Structures copies or
moves the selected detail.
4. If you want to add some details in a system folder, create a subfolder in a
system folder (defined by XS_SYSTEM) and rename it Drawing Details,
then copy details from the model folder to the new \Drawing Details
system folder using Windows Explorer. You can copy or move details in
the same way to the project and firm folders.

Modify detail properties in 2D Library

You can modify detail properties of the details in the current model folder. You
cannot modify the detail objects, for example, the texts, marks, or lines inside
a detail, because the details are grouped. You first need to explode the detail,
and then update it.
1. In an open drawing, browse for a folder, and click a detail in 2D Library. A
new detail looks like the one below in 2D Library when you have not
touched its properties yet:

2. Modify the detail properties at the bottom of the side pane:

Edit drawings 342 2D Library in drawings

a. Edit the detail name and the description of the detail.
b. Select the original scale, enter a scale, or ignore the scale.
The Scale value refers to the scale of the view where the detail was
originally created. The Scale value should not normally need to be
touched. This value is used when inserting the detail, for adapting the
detail to the scale of the target view, so that dimensioning, for
example, will work correctly.
Example:
You create a detail A from objects in a 1/10 scale view. So the scale of
the new detail gets recorded as 1/10 in 2D Library. You then insert
detail A (which has scale 1/10) into a scale 1/50 view W. The detail will
look 5 times smaller than in the original view, but dimensioning will
give the same results in both views.
You create another detail B from objects in a 1/5 scale view. So the
scale of the new detail gets recorded as 1/5 in 2D Library. You then
insert this detail (which has scale 1/5) into the scale 1/50 view W. The
detail will look 10 times smaller than in the original view, but again
dimensioning will give the same results in both views.
You then change the scale of the detail A in the view W from 1/10 to
1/5. This makes Tekla Structures calculate the size of the detail as if
the original view had had the scale 1/5. So just as detail B, the detail A
will now look 10 times smaller than in the original view. However in
this case, dimensioning will now give only 1/2 of the expected results
(which is the ratio between the scale you have entered and the actual
original scale).
When you click Ignore scale, the detail will have the same visual size
regardless of the view scale, corresponding to the visual size it had
when it was created. This is indicated by the scale value 1/0.
Therefore dimensioning will not be correct if you use the Ignore scale
option.
c. To change the sample image, move the mouse pointer over the image
on the left, click the Capture new button, and then pick two points in
the drawing.

Edit drawings 343 2D Library in drawings

3. To view and modify the detail properties in the drawing, double-click the
inserted detail.

Explode a detail
You can explode an inserted detail into lines and texts, for example, to update
the detail with new objects.
For example, you may have created a detail and something does not look
quite right. You can explode the detail, make modifications and update the
detail with the changes.
Another example could be that you have a set of company-specific details that
you are inserting details from. You can explode a detail and edit it, and make a
new detail out of it.
• In a drawing, right-click an inserted detail, and select Explode.
The detail is exploded to lines and texts. Now you can edit the detail, and then
update the detail.

Update objects in a detail

You can modify all instances of a detail by updating the detail with new or
modified objects.
1. Insert the detail in a drawing and explode it by right-clicking the detail and
selecting Explode.
2. Modify the exploded detail objects or add new ones.
3. Select all detail objects, including any new ones.
4. Right-click the detail in 2D Library view and select Update detail with
selected objects. You are asked to pick a new reference point. If you are
updating the detail in the same view as originally, you do not need to pick
a new reference point, otherwise you need to pick a new reference point.
The detail gets updated. When you update a detail with new objects, the
detail will get updated in all drawings where it is used.

Edit drawings 344 2D Library in drawings

Explode symbols included in details
You can explode symbols included in details, and make them independent of
the local symbol files.
2D Library saves the drawing symbols as symbols, which means that later,
when you insert the detail, you need to have the correct symbols files present.
You can avoid this by exploding the symbols.

1. In 2D Library, click the Options button and select Explode native

symbols.
2. Insert a detail containing drawing symbols in a drawing.
3. Right-click the inserted detail, and select Explode. The detail and the
included symbols are exploded to lines and texts.

Insert a .dwg file to a drawing from 2D Library

You can insert .dwg files from the 2D Library to drawings as reference files.
1. Open a drawing.

2. Click the Drawing 2D Library button in the side pane to open the 2D
Library.
3. Browse for the folder containing the .dwg files in the 2D Library. You can
also move your reference files to a \Drawing Details folder under the
current model folder.
4. If you always want to insert a detail inside a view when necessary, click the

Options button and select Create view if needed.

5. Click a .dwg file and then click the drawing view or drawing to place
the .dwg file. Tekla Structures inserts the .dwg file as a reference object in
the drawing, not as a drawing detail. If the file is inserted from outside the
model folder, the file will be copied to the model folder first and the
insertion path will be relative to that.
You cannot update the .dwg file with new objects, but you can select an
inserted .dwg along with any other objects and create a new detail.

Insert an image to a drawing from 2D Library

You can insert image files from the 2D Library to drawings.
1. Open a drawing.

Edit drawings 345 2D Library in drawings

 2. Click the Drawing 2D Library button in the side pane to open the 2D
Library.
3. Browse for the folder containing image files in the 2D Library. You can
also move your image files to a \Drawing Details folder under the
current model folder.
4. If you always want to insert a detail inside a view when necessary, click the

Options button and select Create view if needed.

5. Click an image file and then click the drawing view or drawing to place the
image.
The image is inserted. If the file is inserted from outside the model folder,
the file will be copied to the model folder first and the insertion path will
be relative to that.
Note that the image detail thumbnail is created automatically.

4.17 Welds in drawings

Tekla Structures shows the welds that you have added in a model as weld
seams and weld marks in drawings. You can also add weld marks manually in
an open drawing.

Weld concepts
Model welds are displayed as weld marks and welds or weld seams in drawings.
Welds and weld marks can be controlled separately. For example, you may
want to show the welds in one drawing view and the weld marks in another.
3D model welds are representations of welds in the real world. Weld solids in
drawings are representations of the welds in models. Weld seam is the part of
the weld path where the weld solid is drawn. Weld path may consist of several
weld seams.
Weld solids are shown in drawings for the following welds:
• Weld solids are shown in drawings for those weld types that have real solid
support. Welds that have no real solid support are shown in the model with
a hexagonal placeholder, and in drawings weld solids are not shown.
• Custom cross-section welds are also supported.
Weld solids can be shown as outlines or paths, with or without hidden lines.
In the first example, the welds on the right and in the middle are drawn with
outlines and own hidden lines. The weld on the left shows the weld path and
hidden lines:

Edit drawings 346 Welds in drawings

The second example is a cross-section of the structure. The welds on the left
and in the middle are drawn with outlines, and the weld on the right shows the
path. The weld dimensions have been added manually.

The weld symbols inside the weld marks indicate the weld properties defined
for the model weld in the model or for the drawing weld mark in the drawing.
Below is an example of a model weld seam (in red) and a model weld mark (in
green) in a drawing.

Edit drawings 347 Welds in drawings

In addition to the weld symbols, the weld mark contains a reference line and
an arrow. The arrow connects the reference line to the arrow side of a
connection. The welds on the arrow and other sides of a part can have different
weld properties.

Weld placement
When parts are welded together, you can place welds on:
• The arrow sides only
• The other sides only
• Both the arrow and other sides
The following images describe the basic placement principles of welds.

Edit drawings 348 Welds in drawings

(1) Above line
(2) Below line
(3) Arrow side for weld
(4) Other side for weld
By default Tekla Structures places the welds above line according to the ISO
standard. You can change this to below line to comply with the AISC standard
with the advanced option XS_AISC_WELD_MARK.

Model weld properties

To change model weld properties, you need to modify the weld in the model.
When you update the model, the weld objects and weld marks are updated in
the drawing according to the model changes. In drawings, you can modify the
contents and the appearance of the model weld marks (page 355), and the
visibility, representation and appearance of model weld objects (page 357).
Weld solids can be shown in single-part, assembly and general arrangement
drawings. In general arrangement drawings, you can only change the
representation of welds on view and object level, not on drawing level.

Manual weld marks

To add weld marks (page 361) in an open drawing:
• Select the welds and add a model weld mark through the pop-up menu
command Add Weld MarkAdd weld mark.
• Add a drawing weld mark by using the Weld mark command on the
Drawing tab.

Click the links below to find out more:

Examples: Model welds in drawings (page 349)

Drag weld marks (page 359)
Customize weld type symbols (page 362)
Example: Weld marks added in drawings (page 364)
Merge weld marks (page 366)
Model weld mark visibility and appearance properties in drawings (page 888)
Model weld properties in drawings (page 927)
Drawing weld mark properties (page 885)

Examples: Model welds in drawings

Model welds are welds that you have added in the model. In drawings, they
are represented by weld seams and weld marks.

Edit drawings 349 Welds in drawings

Example 1
In this example, the first image below shows an example of weld properties in
the model. You can add welds in the model by selecting one of the welding
commands on the ribbon Steel tab. Some of the weld properties are
numbered in image, and the second image shows how these properties are
shown in a weld mark in a drawing. The same numbers are used in the weld
mark to indicate the position and appearance of the property information in
the weld.

(1) Edge/Around, weld around symbol is used

(2) Workshop/Site, site weld symbol is used

Edit drawings 350 Welds in drawings

(3) Weld prefix
(4) Weld type
(5) Weld size
(6) Weld angle
(7) Weld contour symbol
(8) Weld finishing symbol
(9) Effective throat
(10) Root opening

Example 2
The example below shows a staggered, intermittent weld. The length is set to
50 and the pitch to 100.

Edit drawings 351 Welds in drawings

(1) Staggered, intermittent weld
(2) Length of weld segment
(3) Pitch (center-to-center spacing) of weld segments

Example 3
The example below shows a non-staggered, intermittent weld. The length is
set to 50 and the pitch to 100. The pitch is shown in the weld mark when the
pitch value is greater than 0.0.

Edit drawings 352 Welds in drawings

Example 4
Below is an example of a continuous weld.

Edit drawings 353 Welds in drawings

Example 5
In this example, the staggered, intermittent weld option is selected, and the
advanced option XS_AISC_WELD_MARK is set to FALSE to produce an ISO-
compliant weld mark.

Example 6
In this example, the staggered, intermittent weld option is selected like in the
previous example, but the advanced option XS_AISC_WELD_MARK is set to
TRUE to produce an AISC-compliant weld mark.

Edit drawings 354 Welds in drawings

TIP For instructions on how to customize weld symbols, see Customize weld type
symbols (page 362).

See also
Add manual weld marks in drawings (page 361)
Welds in drawings (page 346)
Model weld mark visibility and appearance properties in drawings (page 888)
Model weld properties in drawings (page 927)

Modify model weld mark visibility and appearance in a

drawing
Welding properties are set in the model. You can select the welding properties
that you want to show in model weld marks in drawings and adjust the
appearance of the model weld marks in Weld mark properties.

To select which model weld properties to show, and to modify weld mark
properties on drawing view level:
1. In an open drawing, double-click a view frame to open the View
Properties dialog box.
2. Click Weld mark to go to weld mark properties.
3. Select whether to show the weld number in Weld number (No/Yes).
4. Under Visibility:
• In Welds and Welds in sub-assemblies, select what kind of weld
marks to show, or whether to hide all welds (None, Site, Workshop,
Both ).
• In Welds in hidden parts, select what kind of weld marks to show for
hidden parts (None, Site, Workshop, Both).
• In Weld size limit, enter a weld size limit to filter weld marks of that
size out of the drawing.
Even though you set the weld size limit, weld marks are always shown
if they have reference texts.

Edit drawings 355 Welds in drawings

5. Under Above line, Below line and Other, clear a check box in the Visible
column next to a weld mark property that you want to hide. Note that if
you hide Size, Prefix is also hidden, and when you hide Length, Pitch is
also hidden.
6. To adjust the placing properties, click Place....
7. Click Modify.
8. Go to the Appearance tab and modify the weld mark text and line
appearance.
9. Click Modify.

TIP You can modify the properties of individual model weld marks in an
open drawing by double-clicking a model weld mark to open
Welding Mark Properties dialog box. To select several marks, for
example for deleting, right-click the weld mark and select Select
weld marks and From current drawing view or From all drawing
views.

Example
The first example shows a weld mark where a lot of properties are visible:

In the second example, all other welding mark properties have been hidden,
except Type from Above line and Below line, and Reference text from
Other:

Edit drawings 356 Welds in drawings

TIP • You can omit welds from drawings by weld type using the advanced option
XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE. Then you first need to set a value for the Weld
size limit.
• You can customize some weld type symbols (page 362).

See also
Model weld mark visibility and appearance properties in drawings (page 888)

Modify model weld object representation and appearance

in a drawing
You can modify the model weld object representation and appearance
manually on object level.
1. In an open drawing, double-click a model weld seam.

Edit drawings 357 Welds in drawings

 It is easier to select the model weld if only activate the Select drawing

welds selection switch .

2. On the Content tab, select the desired Representation. The options are
Path and Outline.
3. Select whether you want to show Hidden lines and Own hidden lines.
4. On the Appearance tab, modify the color and line type of the Visible
lines and Hidden lines.
5. Click Modify.

Examples
In the first example below, the welds on the right and in the middle are drawn
with outlines and hidden lines. The weld on the left shows the path and
hidden lines.

The second example is a cross-section of the structure. The welds on the left
and in the middle are drawn with outlines, and the weld on the right shows the
path. The welds on the right and left go around the part corner. The welds
have manual dimensions.

Edit drawings 358 Welds in drawings

TIP You can define automatic weld properties (page 817) for model welds before
creating a drawing. You can also modify the weld properties on view level in an
open drawing by double-clicking frame of the drawing view containing the weld
objects and selecting Weld from the options tree. On drawing and view level, you
can also modify the visibility settings (page 927).

Drag weld marks

You can drag model welds by the base point of the weld mark leader line along
the weld seam. This way you can position the weld marks more optimally for
increased clarity in the drawings. Manual drawing weld marks not associated
to model welds can be dragged freely.

TIP Having Smart select ( File menu --> Settings --> Smart select ) selected
makes selecting the leader line base point much easier.

Limitation: You cannot drag the weld leader base point to the back-side of a
double-sided weld.
1. Click the weld mark near the leader line base point.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the base point to a new
location by the leader line base point handle located in the tip of the
arrow.

Edit drawings 359 Welds in drawings

Example
The first image below shows the welds in the model.

The second image shows the model weld marks in a drawing. The area within
which the weld mark leader line base point can be dragged is indicated with
dark green.

Edit drawings 360 Welds in drawings

Add manual weld marks in drawings
You can add both model weld marks and drawing weld marks manually in
drawings. Model weld marks refer to welds that have been created in the
model. Drawing weld marks do not have an associated physical weld in the
model.

Add manual drawing weld marks

You can add manual weld marks in an open drawing. Tekla Structures creates
manual weld marks using the properties in the Weld Mark Properties dialog
box.
1. Hold down Shift and, on the Drawing tab, click Weld mark to open the
Weld Mark Properties dialog box.
2. Enter or modify the content and the appearance of the weld mark.

Edit drawings 361 Welds in drawings

3. To exactly place the weld mark in the position you pick and keep it there,
click the Place... button and select fixed in the Placing list.
4. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
5. Pick a position for the weld mark.
You can drag the created drawing weld mark freely to a more suitable
location by the leader base point handle.

Add manual model weld marks

You can add marks to model weld marks in an open drawing. Tekla Structures
creates model weld marks using the properties defined for the model weld in
the model. You can adjust the visibility and appearance settings of the weld
mark in the drawing.
1. Open a drawing that contains welds created in the model.
2. Do one of the following:
• Select a model weld.
• Select several model welds using the Select welds switch and area
selection, or Drawing content manager.
If you cannot see any welds in the drawing, check the weld visibility
settings in the view properties.
3. Right-click and select Add Weld Mark.
4. To modify the visibility and appearance settings of the model weld mark
(page 355):
• Double-click a weld mark in the drawing, and adjust the properties.
• Select several model welds using the Select welds switch and area
selection, or Drawing content manager. When the welds are
selected, right-click and select Select weld marks and From current
drawing view or From all drawing views. Activate all selection
switches again. Then press down Shift and double-click a weld mark,
and adjust the properties.
Note that you cannot drag the mark away from the associated weld, but
you can only drag it along the weld seam.
Also note that when a weld mark is added through context menu, it is now
visible even if its size is below the minimum weld size limit defined in
drawing view settings.

Customize weld type symbols

Most of the weld type symbols are hard coded, but you can edit some of them
in Symbol Editor.

Edit drawings 362 Welds in drawings

The bottom seven symbols in the Type list in model Weld Properties and
drawing Weld Mark Properties (see image below) are taken from the
TS_Welds.sym file. You can edit any of these seven symbols in Symbol Editor
to create a custom weld symbol. The rest of the weld symbols are hard coded.
Note that the symbol in the Type list in the dialog box does not change when
you update the symbol.

1. Open Symbol Editor as administrator.

2. Click File --> Open and browse to the folder were you have the
TS_Welds.sym file.
3. Select the file and click OK.
4. Modify the desired symbol.

Edit drawings 363 Welds in drawings

 When doing this, you need to keep the symbol in the same scale as the
other symbols. If your symbol is too large to fit in the box, you can let it
extend beyond the borders:

5. Save the symbol by selecting File --> Save.

For more information about Symbol Editor, click Symbol Editor User's Guide.

Example: Weld marks added in drawings

In this example, the first image below is the Weld Mark Properties dialog box
in a drawing. The weld mark properties are numbered in the dialog box. The
second image shows how the weld mark properties are displayed in a weld
mark in a drawing. The same numbers are used in the weld mark as in the

Edit drawings 364 Welds in drawings

dialog box to indicate the weld mark property in the weld. Under the images
the meaning of different numbers is explained.

(1) Weld prefix

(2) Weld size

Edit drawings 365 Welds in drawings

(3) Weld type
(4) Weld angle
(5) Weld contour symbol
(6) Weld finishing symbol
(7) Effective throat
(8) Root opening
(9) Edge/Around, here a weld around symbol
(10) Workshop/Site, here a site weld symbol

See also
Drawing weld mark properties (page 885)
Add manual weld marks in drawings (page 361)

Merge weld marks

You can force Tekla Structures to use the same mark and symbol for identical
welds in a drawing by merging the weld marks.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Hold down Ctrl and select the weld marks to merge.
3. Right-click and select Merge from the pop-up menu.
Tekla Structures combines the marks.
4. If needed, you can split merged weld marks by right-clicking the mark and
selecting Split from the pop-up menu.

Edit drawings 366 Welds in drawings

 Description Example
Original drawing

Merged weld marks.

4.18 Custom presentations in drawings

You can modify the appearance of many of the objects in drawings using
custom presentations. Custom presentations are delivered in Tekla Warehouse

Edit drawings 367 Custom presentations in drawings

as extensions. The presentations can be controlled on the view level and
object level.
When you have downloaded a custom presentation for an object type, the
Custom presentation tab will become available in the drawing property
dialog for that object. The list will only show custom presentations that are
available for that specific object type – part, weld, mark, etc.

The following object types support custom presentations:

• welds and weld marks
• parts and part marks
• neighbor parts and part marks
• grid lines
• texts
• associative notes

Examples
In the example below, the Weld solid custom presentation is used for drawing
the weld solids.

In the following example, Corners Only custom presentation is used for laser
layout projection. Drawing all the lines of a part slows down the laser and
makes it too dim to see on the layout table.

Edit drawings 368 Custom presentations in drawings

 Custom presentations in Tekla Warehouse
Center of gravity
GA schedules

See also
Edit drawings (page 143)

4.19 Reinforcement in drawings

There are several ways in Tekla Structures you can use to affect how the
reinforcement is shown in drawings.
Click the links below to find out more:
Show a single reinforcing bar in a group (page 369)
Show layer information on reinforcing bars in drawings (page 370)
Add reinforcement marks manually (page 372)
Add reinforcement marks with Rebar group marking application (page 372)
Draw rebar pull-out pictures with Draw rebar pull-outs application (page 392)
Draw rebar pull-out pictures with Rebar pull-out picture and marking
application (page 395)
Add dimensions to rebars (page 413)
Dimension rebars with Rebar group dimensioning application (page 422)
Create a drawing view for a reinforcement mesh (page 456)

Show a single reinforcing bar in a group

You can show one reinforcing bar in a group or in a mesh and hide the rest.
1. In an open drawing, select the reinforcing bar group or mesh.
2. Go to Quick Launch, enter Adjust Reinforcing Bars, and click the
Adjust reinforcing bars command on the displayed list.
3. Click the bar you want to remain visible.
4. If needed, change the number of visible bars again by double-clicking the
bar and changing the setting.

Edit drawings 369 Reinforcement in drawings

NOTE When you use the Adjust reinforcing bars command to select the visible
reinforcing bar, also the customized setting becomes available for the
Visibility of reinforcing bars in group option in the Drawing reinforcement
properties dialog box. You can use this setting only after you have used the
Adjust reinforcing bars command and not, for example, when you create the
drawing.

Example

See also
Adjust the location of a single reinforcing bar (page 370)

Adjust the location of a single reinforcing bar

You can show only one bar in a reinforcing bar group and set it to the desired
location.

To adjust a location of a single visible bar in a reinforcing bar group:

1. Right-click the reinforcing bar group.
2. Click Adjust location.
Only one bar is displayed, and the others are hidden.
3. Click the location where you want to place the bar.

Show layer information on reinforcing bars in drawings

You can mark reinforcing bar layers with different marking styles and line
types in a drawing by using the Rebar layering marker macro.

Before you can show layer information in a drawing, you first need to run the
Rebar classification macro in the model. The Rebar classification classifies
the meshes and reinforcing bars in the selected walls or slabs by their

Edit drawings 370 Reinforcement in drawings

position. All reinforcing bars and meshes get an attribute indicating the layer
where they are placed inside the concrete element.
To show reinforcing bar layer information in a drawing:
1. Open the drawing.

2. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to

open the Applications & components catalog.
3. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.
4. Double-click Rebar layering marker to display the Rebar layering
marker dialog box.
5. Select symbol style or level prefix style from the list on the left showing
the preview.
6. Select the marker line type.
7. Do one of the following depending on the selected marking style:
• For symbol style markers, select the symbol you want to use, and the
symbol height.
• For level prefix style markers, select the level prefix.
8. Click All objects to show layering markers on all reinforcing bars, or select
the individual reinforcing bars and click Selected objects to show the
markers on the selected bars only.

1. Level prefix style layering marker. The number, for example number 1 in
T1, indicates the layer number. The letter, for example T in T1, indicates
whether the reinforcing bar is on the top, bottom, near side or far side
layer.
2. Symbol style layering marker. The number of triangles indicates the layer
number from the face. Triangle orientation indicates whether the
reinforcing bar is on the top, bottom, near side or far side layer. For

Edit drawings 371 Reinforcement in drawings

 example for top bars, the triangle head points downwards, and for
bottom bars upwards.

Add reinforcement marks manually

You can add marks manually to reinforcing bars and meshes in drawings.

The reinforcement marks may already exist in a drawing if you have selected
to create the marks in create the marks at drawing creation (page 754). If there
are no marks, you can add them manually.
1. Open a drawing that contains reinforcement.
2. To adjust the reinforcement mark properties, such as color and mark
elements included, on the Drawing tab, click Properties -->
Reinforcement mark.
3. Click Apply or OK in the properties dialog box.
4. Select the reinforcement by doing one of the following:
• Hold down Shift and select the desired reinforcement.
• Open the Drawing content manager, select the model objects in the
drawing and click Show to populate the Drawing content manager
list. You can select areas, single or multiple views, or reinforcement.

Then ensure that model object selection is active , and select the
desired reinforcement from the list.
5. Right-click and select Add Mark --> Reinforcement Mark.
The reinforcement mark is created.
Note that if you have not added any elements in the reinforcement mark
properties before adding the reinforcement marks, the properties dialog
will be displayed.

Add reinforcement marks with Rebar group marking

application
The Rebar group marking application offers different styles to create marks
to rebar groups and distribution areas flexibly. With the Rebar group marking
application you can efficiently create quality reinforcement drawings according
to the market requirements.

Mark rebar groups

1. In a drawing, select the rebar groups to be marked.

Edit drawings 372 Reinforcement in drawings

2. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to
open the Applications & components catalog.
3. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.
4. In the Applications list, click Rebar group marking.
5. Pick the position for the leader line.
6. Pick the position for the mark.
7. To adjust the mark settings, double-click the mark, and make the
necessary changes:

• On the Geometry tab, define the shape and position of the rebar
mark, and mark line and leader line settings.
On the Mark 1–Mark 3 tabs, define the content for the rebar mark,
such as the diameter, cc distances and the number.
On the Lines and symbols tab, define the generation settings and the
layout of the lines and symbols of the rebar mark.
For more information about the settings, see Rebar group marking
settings below.
8. Click Modify.
Tekla Structures creates the rebar marks according to the defined settings.

Edit drawings 373 Reinforcement in drawings

Rebar group marking settings
Geometrytab
On the Geometry tab, define the shape and position of the rebar mark, and
the mark line and leader line settings.

Setting Options and descriptions

Define the shape of the rebar mark. In the
descriptive option images, P1 is the first point that
you pick and P2 the second one. Mark x indicates
the locations of the marks defined on the Mark 1–
Mark 3 tabs. The options are:
Option 1:

• The leader line is perpendicular to the rebars.

• The mark line is parallel to the rebars.
Example:

Option 2:

Edit drawings 374 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

• The leader line is perpendicular to the rebars.

• The mark line is also perpendicular to the
rebars.
Example:

Option 3:

• The leader line is perpendicular to the rebars.

• The mark line is horizontal.

Edit drawings 375 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions
Example:

Option 4:

• The leader line is perpendicular to the rebars.

• The mark line is vertical.
Option 5:

Edit drawings 376 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions
• The leader line direction is defined by an angle
relative to the rebars. The angle can be entered
for the option A2.
• The mark line direction is defined by an angle
relative to the horizontal line. The angle can be
entered for the option A1.
Option 6:

• See the image above to see how to pick the

points P1 and P2. Use the option B to define
the distance of the marks.

Edit drawings 377 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions
Define the shape of the leader line. The available
options depend on the selected mark line option.

Edit drawings 378 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Edit drawings 379 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Edit drawings 380 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

You can also affect the shape of the leader line for
many of the options with the settings d1, d2, h, v,
and e.
Define the shape of the mark line. The options are

Edit drawings 381 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions

You can also affect the shape of the mark line for
some of the options with settings b1, b2, a, andc,
and e
Define an offset for Mark 3 from the mark line.

Mark 1–Mark 3 tabs

On the Mark 1–Mark 3 tabs, you can define the content of the rebar marks.
You can have three separate marks with the desired content within one rebar
mark: Mark 1, Mark 2 and Mark 3. Each of the marks may have extra marks.
The following image shows the position of each mark within the entire rebar
mark:

Edit drawings 382 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions
Available elements Select the rebar information to be displayed in the
mark such as grade, diameter and cc distances.
Elements in mark List of the selected information that will be
displayed in the mark.
Text properties Define the text properties. The available properties
files are the ones that have been defined and
saved in the Text properties (page 271) dialog box.
Create Define whether the mark should be created or not.
The options are Yes and No.
Extra mark: Create Define whether and how the extra marks are
placed in the mark. The options are:
No
Before main mark
Behind main mark
Units Define the units:
• Automatic
• mm
• cm
• m
• foot - inch
• inch
Only available for the following mark content:
• Length
• Cc
• cc min

Edit drawings 383 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
• Length itemized
Format Define the format:
• ###
• ###[.#]
• ###[.##]
• ###[.###]
• ###.#
• ### #/#
• ###.##
• ###.###
Only available for the following mark content:
• Length
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
• Length itemized
Precision Define the precision:
• 0.00
• 0.50
• 0.33
• 0.25
• 1/8
• 1/16
• 1/32
• 1/10
• 1/100
• 1/1000

Edit drawings 384 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions
For example, for precision 0.33, the actual value
50.40 is displayed as 50.33.
1/8, 1/16, and 1/32 are for imperial units.
1/10, 1/100, and 1/1000 are used for defining
precision without rounding.
Values A B C Values A B C:
Along rebar axis

If you select Along rebar axis, the length is

calculated along the center line of the rebar:

These options are only available for the following

mark content:
• Length
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target

Edit drawings 385 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions
Total number in rebar These options are only available for mark content
group Number.
Number displayed in Total number in rebar group: Displays the total
view number of rebars in the rebar group, regardless of
the number of the physically visible rebars in the
Total number in cast
drawing.
unit
Number displayed in view: Only displays the
number of the visible rebars in the drawing view.
Total number in cast unit: Displays the total
number of rebars in the cast unit.
Row distance Define the distance between the mark rows.
Example: Row distance = 0

Example: Row distance = 5

Edit drawings 386 Reinforcement in drawings

Lines and symbols tab
On the Lines and symbols tab, you can define the generation and layout of
the lines and the symbols for the rebar mark.

Setting Options and descriptions

Distribution line: Color Define the Color and Line type for the
Distribution line and the Leader line.
Distribution line: Line
type
Leader line: Color
Leader line: Line type
Visualized rebar s: Define the generation of the symbols and lines on
Small lines the dimension lines of the visible rebars. The
options are:
Visualized rebar s:
Symbols

Examples:

Edit drawings 387 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions

: Define the color and the line type

for the lines.

: Define the symbol file

and symbol number to be used. You can use
existing symbols in Tekla Structures by selecting a
symbol file and a symbol number.

: Define the color and the size of the

symbol.
Not visualized rebars The settings listed below only apply for Not
visualized rebars and Not visualized rebars. The
First and last rebar
settings are only applicable if the option bar in the
middle of group is defined (page 913) for
Visibility of reinforcing bars in group in the
Drawing reinforcement properties dialog box.
Define if symbols/lines should be applied for Not
visualized rebars or Not visualized rebars.
Example of Not visualized rebars:

Edit drawings 388 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Example of Not visualized rebars:

Define the generation of the symbols and lines for

the dimension line. The options are:

Edit drawings 389 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

: Define the color and the line type

for the lines.

: Define the symbol file

and symbol number to be used. You can use
existing symbols in Tekla Structures by selecting a
symbol file and a symbol number.

: Define the color and the size of the

symbol.
Define how to place the symbols. The options and
their examples are listed below:

Edit drawings 390 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Edit drawings 391 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions

You can define the distance between the lines by

using the setting a if that is available for the option.

Draw rebar pull-out pictures with Draw rebar pull-outs

application
The Draw rebar pull-outs application creates exploded drawings of
reinforcement using the settings defined in Rebar pull-out picture and
marking or in associative notes. The application can be used for creating pull-
out pictures automatically for multiple rebars at one go. To optimize flexible
working with different types of drawings, use Draw rebar pull-outs together
with Rebar pull-out picture and marking.
The application creates rebar pull-out pictures based on the objects that you
select. You can select:
• Reinforcement: Bending shapes are only created for the selected rebars.
• Parts: Bending shapes are created for rebars in the selected concrete part.
• Views: Bending shapes are created for rebars in the selected drawing view.
• A drawing from the Drawing list: Bending shapes are created for rebars in
the selected drawings.

Draw pull-out pictures

1. In the drawing, select the object for which you want to create pull-out
pictures: reinforcement, parts, views, or a drawing from the Drawing list.

2. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to

open the Applications & components catalog.
3. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.

Edit drawings 392 Reinforcement in drawings

4. In the Applications list, double-click Draw rebar pull-outs.

5. Define the type of method, the positions of the bending shapes, and other
necessary settings:

Create pull-outs by Rebar pull-out picture and marking:

• Create the bending shapes on the basis of a
saved Rebar pull-out picture and marking
properties file.
Define and save the properties in the Rebar
pull-out picture and marking application,
which can be started from the Applications &
components catalog.
• In the Configuration file list, select the desired
settings file.
Associative note:
• Create the bending shapes on the basis of a
saved associative notes properties file.
• Define and save the properties in the
Associative Note Properties dialog box. It is
important to define at least one pull-out
properties file for associative notes.
Create pull-out for Each rebar position number: A bending shape is
created for each rebar position number.
Each rebar group: A bending shape is created for
each rebar group.

Edit drawings 393 Reinforcement in drawings

Position Defines the position of the bending shapes relative
to the concrete part. The options are:
Above and bottom: Positions the bending shapes
above and at the bottom of the concrete part.
Bottom: Positions the bending shapes at the
bottom of the concrete part.
Above: Positions the bending shapes above the
concrete part.
Left: Positions the bending shapes on the left side
of the concrete part.
Right: Positions the bending shapes on the right
side of the concrete part.
Classes Include or exclude the defined rebar classes.
Define the class of the rebars. Use the Exclude or
Include to define whether to create a bending
shape for those rebars.
Rebar types Include or exclude the defined bending shapes.
Here you can define the shape codes of the rebars.
Use Exclude or Include to define whether to
create a bending shape for those rebars.
You can inquire the shape code of a rebar by

clicking Inquire object on the ribbon.

6. Click Draw.

Edit drawings 394 Reinforcement in drawings

Examples:

Draw rebar pull-out pictures with Rebar pull-out picture

and marking application
With the Rebar pull-out picture and marking application you can visualize
rebars by using bending shapes. Bending shapes can be positioned both
inside and outside the concrete shape. Bending shapes are provided with
marks containing information about the rebar.

Create rebar pull-out pictures and marks

1. In a drawing, select the rebar group for which you want to create a
bending shape mark.

Edit drawings 395 Reinforcement in drawings

2. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to
open the Applications & components catalog.
3. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.
4. In the Applications list, select Rebar pull-out picture and marking.
5. Pick a point for the position of the bending shape mark.
Note that you change the alignment setting for placement in the settings.
6. Double-click the mark to adjust the settings:
• On the Rebar tab, define the representation and the location of the
bending shape. Here you can also define the hook directions.

Edit drawings 396 Reinforcement in drawings

 • On the Marks tab, define the content, appearance and the position of
the marks associated with the bending shape.

For more information about the settings, see Rebar pull-out picture and
marking settings below.
7. Click Modify.

Rebar pull-out picture and marking settings

Rebar tab
On the Rebar tab, define the representation and the location of the bending
shape. Here you can also define the hook directions.

Setting Options and descriptions

Rebar geometry Select one of the following options:

This is a schematic representation of the bending

shape, without bending radius in the corners of the
bending shape.

Edit drawings 397 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions

In this option, the bending shape is represented

with bending radius.
Use same line as • Yes: The color and line type are defined based
pattern on what is set in the drawing properties.
• No: The color and line type are defined based
on the Color and Line type settings in this
dialog box.
Color

Line type

Reinforcing bar Select the rebar representation:

representation
• Single line: The bending shape is represented
with a single line.
• Double lines nominal diameter: The bending
shape is represented with double lines. The
nominal diameter of the bar is considered.
• Double lines actual diameter: The bending
shape is represented with double lines. The
actual diameter of the bar is considered,
including the ribs on the bar.
Rebar location Define the position of the bending shape using any
of the options described below:
Option 1:

Edit drawings 398 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

In this option, the area around the rebar is divided

in four quadrants. The insertion point can be
picked in any random quadrant.
The position of the bending shape is based on the
picked quadrant:
• Insertion point in quadrant 1: the bending
shape is centered on top of the rebar.
• Insertion point in quadrant 2: the bending
shape is centered to the left of the rebar.
• Insertion point in quadrant 3: the bending
shape is centered under the rebar.
• Insertion point in quadrant 4: the bending
shape is centered to the right of the rebar.
Example:

Option 2:

In this option, the insertion point P1 is the start

point of the bending shape.
Example:

Edit drawings 399 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Option 3:

In this option, the bending shape is located on the

line of the insertion point P1. The bending shape
will be positioned centered relative to the position
of the rebar in the concrete shape.
Example:

Edit drawings 400 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions

Hook directions Define the direction of the hooks of the bars. Seen
from a top view from a beam, for example, the
direction of the hooks may be defined as Top,
Middle and Bottom of the the beam. For all of the
directions, you can select between two options:

Use the Thickness box to define an area for the

bars on the top and bottom side of the beam.
Example 1: In the front view of a concrete beam
below, both the Top and the Bottom thicknesses
are set to 300:

Example 2: Top view of a concrete beam

Edit drawings 401 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Example 3: Top view of a concrete beam with other

hook directions

Edit drawings 402 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions

Marks tab
On this tab, you can define the generation of Mark 1 and Mark 2. For
example:

Settings Options and descriptions

Available elements Select the rebar information to be displayed in the
mark, such as grade, diameter, and cc distances.
Elements in mark A list of the selected information or elements that
will be displayed in the mark.
Text properties Define the text properties. The available properties
files are the ones that have been defined and
saved in the Text properties (page 271) dialog box.
Rebar position Define whether and how the rebar position is
displayed in the mark. The options are:
Before main mark:

Behind main mark:

Edit drawings 403 Reinforcement in drawings

 Settings Options and descriptions

No:

Rebar text properties Define the text properties for the rebar position.
The available properties files are the ones that
have been defined and saved in the Text properties
(page 271) dialog box.
Number of rebars Total number in rebar group: Displays the total
number of rebars in the rebar group, regardless of
the number of the physically visible rebars in the
drawing.
Number displayed in view: Only displays the
number of the visible rebars in the drawing view.
Total number in cast unit: Displays the total
number of rebars in the cast unit.
These options are only available when you select
Number as the mark content.
Units Define the units:
• Automatic
• mm
• cm
• m
• foot - inch
• inch
Only available for the following mark content:
• Length
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max

Edit drawings 404 Reinforcement in drawings

 Settings Options and descriptions
• cc exact
• cc target
• Length itemized
Format Define the format:
• ###
• ###[.##]
• ###[.###]
• ###.#
• ### #/#
• ###.##
• ###.###
Only available for the following mark content:
• Length
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
• Length itemized
Precision Define the precision:
• 0.00
• 0.50
• 0.33
• 0.25
• 1/8
• 1/16
• 1/32
• 1/10
• 1/100
• 1/1000
For example, for the precision 0.33, the actual
value 50.40 is displayed as 50.33.

Edit drawings 405 Reinforcement in drawings

 Settings Options and descriptions
1/8, 1/16, and 1/32 are for imperial units.
1/10, 1/100, and 1/1000 are used for defining
precision without rounding.
Mark positioning Define the positioning of the mark. There are three
options available:
Option 1:

Mark text parallel is to the bending shape.

Option 2:

Mark text is placed horizontally.

Option 3:

Mark text is placed vertically.

Horizontal text position Define the position of the text in the horizontal
direction. The options are:

Edit drawings 406 Reinforcement in drawings

 Settings Options and descriptions

Use the setting a to define a distance:

Vertical text position Define the position of the text in the vertical
direction. The options are:

Edit drawings 407 Reinforcement in drawings

 Settings Options and descriptions

Use box b to define a distance:

Create Define whether all bending dimensions are

displayed with the bending shape or not. The
options are:
• Yes

• No

Generation of leg Define the generation of the length of the legs,

lengths marked in the image below:

Option 1:

Edit drawings 408 Reinforcement in drawings

Settings Options and descriptions

Option 2:

Option 3:

Edit drawings 409 Reinforcement in drawings

 Settings Options and descriptions
Location Define the location of the length of the leg, marked
in the image below:

The options are:

• None

• (1)

• (2)

• (3)

Edit drawings 410 Reinforcement in drawings

 Settings Options and descriptions
• (4)

• (5)

• (6)

Units Define the units. The options are:

• Automatic
• mm
• cm
• m
• foot - inch
• inch
Format Define the format. The options are:
• ###
• ###[.##]
• ###[.###]
• ###.#
• ### #/#
• ###.##

Edit drawings 411 Reinforcement in drawings

 Settings Options and descriptions
• ###.###
Precision Define the precision. The options are:
• 0.00
• 0.50
• 0.33
• 0.25
• 1/8
• 1/16
• 1/32
• 1/10
• 1/100
• 1/1000
For example, for the precision 0.33, the actual
value 50.40 is displayed as 50.33.
1/8, 1/16, and 1/32 are for imperial units.
1/10, 1/100, and 1/1000 are used for defining
precision without rounding.
Text properties Define the properties for the text that will be
displayed for the bending shape (length of the
legs). The available properties files are the ones
that have been defined and saved in the Text
properties (page 271) dialog box.
Length calculation Values A B C:

If you select Along rebar axis, the length is

calculated along the center line of the rebar:

Edit drawings 412 Reinforcement in drawings

 Settings Options and descriptions

Add dimensions to rebars

You can manually add dimension lines and dimension marks to reinforcing bar
groups. When adding dimensions, start by using predefined dimension
settings defined for your environment, and modify these settings for individual
dimensions, if necessary. There are reinforcement dimension settings affecting
the whole model in the Options dialog box.
In addition to the rebar dimensioning methods described below, you can also
dimension rebars by using the Rebar group dimensioning application, for
more information, see Dimension rebars with Rebar group dimensioning
application (page 422).

Add dimension marks or dimension tags to rebar groups

Each reinforcing bar group may have a dimension mark or a tagged dimension
mark. These dimensions are created based on predefined dimension
properties that you have selected in File --> Settings --> Options --> Drawing
dimensions. The commands are available in GA drawings and cast unit
drawings. You may want to add reinforcement dimension marks or tagged
dimension marks especially in concrete cast unit drawings, where there is only
one reinforced cast unit visible.
To add dimension marks or tagged dimension marks to rebar groups:
1. To select the desired predefined settings, go to File --> Settings -->
Options --> Drawing dimensions, and load the desired predefined
dimension properties files in Dimension Mark settings and Tagged
Dimension Mark settings.
You can also select the representation for tapered skewed and curved
reinforcement group dimensions, and add a dimension line extension to
dimension lines that have arrows. For more information, see section
"Predefined reinforcement dimension settings in the Options dialog box"
below.

Edit drawings 413 Reinforcement in drawings

2. In an open drawing, right-click the reinforcing bar group and select one of
the following dimension mark commands and pick a location for the
dimension:
Add Mark --> Dimension Mark .

Add Mark --> Tagged Dimension mark .

You can change the representation of the current rebar dimension after
creating it by double-clicking the rebar dimension in an open drawing, and
modifying the dimension content (page 851), appearance (page 856), and
marks and tags (page 858) as required. For example, you may want to add
more tags, change dimension mark content, or select how to align tags in
curved dimensions.

Add dimension lines to rebar groups

The Create dimension line command shows the distribution of the rebars in
the group, and draws dashed lines from the dimension lines to the rebars
when you drag the dimension outside the rebar group. This command is
available in GA drawings and cast unit drawings, but you may want to use it
especially in GA reinforcement drawings, because they may contain a lot of
parts with rebar groups, and you often need to show only one rebar from the

Edit drawings 414 Reinforcement in drawings

group and drag the dimension line to a proper place to see everything clearly.
This command creates dimensions based on the predefined dimension
properties that you have selected in File --> Settings --> Options --> Drawing
dimensions.
To add dimension lines showing the distribution of the reinforcing bars to
rebar groups:
1. To select the desired predefined settings, go to File --> Settings -->
Options --> Drawing dimensions, and load the desired predefined
dimension properties file in Dimension line settings.
You can also select the representation for tapered skewed and curved
reinforcement group dimensions, and add a dimension line extension to
dimension lines that have arrows. For more information, see section
"Predefined reinforcement dimension settings in the Options dialog box"
below.
2. Right-click a reinforcing bar group and click Create dimension line.
Tekla Structures creates the dimension line.
3. You can drag the reinforcement dimension line out of the reinforcement
bar group.
When you do this, Tekla Structures draws a dashed line from the
reinforcing bar to the dimension line. If the new location is in the
reinforcement area, the dimension mark follows the intersection of the
reinforcement bar and reinforcement dimension line.
To change the representation of the current rebar dimension, double-click
the rebar dimension in an open drawing, and modify the dimension
content (page 851), appearance (page 856), and marks and tags (page 858)
as required.
Below is an example of a dimension line created with Create dimension
line:

Edit drawings 415 Reinforcement in drawings

 Below is an example of the dimension line when it has been dragged
outside the reinforcing bar group:

Below is an example, where only one rebar of the group is visible, and the
dimension line has been dragged outside the group.

Predefined reinforcement dimension settings in the Options dialog box

There are predefined settings in the Options dialog box in the Drawing
dimensions settings affecting rebar dimensions and dimension marks.

Edit drawings 416 Reinforcement in drawings

Settings are model specific and only affect the current model. Changing the
settings does not require Tekla Structures restart.

Option Description
Dimension mark settings Select which predefined dimension
settings you always want to apply to
dimension marks. These settings are
used when you create dimension
marks with the Add Mark -->
Dimension Mark command.
Tagged dimension mark settings Select which predefined dimension
settings you always want to apply to
tagged dimension marks. These
settings are used when you create
dimension marks with the Add Mark
--> Tagged Dimension mark
command.
Dimension line settings Select which predefined dimension
settings you always want to apply to
dimension lines that you create with
the Create dimension line
command.
Dimension line extension length for You can create line extensions
line arrow (page 725) in dimensions that have
line arrows. Enter the length of the
dimension line extension in the
Dimension line extension length
for line arrow box. This setting will
be applied to all dimension that have
line arrows.
No extension

Edit drawings 417 Reinforcement in drawings

 Option Description
Extension added

Tapered skewed reinforcement group Select whether skewed dimensions

have skewed or horizontal
representation in Tapered skewed

reinforcement group .
Tapered curved reinforcement group Select whether curved dimensions
have curved or horizontal
representation in Tapered curved

reinforcement group .

Examples of rebar dimensions

• Below is a tapered skewed part, and skewed dimension representation is
selected from Tapered skewed reinforcement group. The dimension line
follows the shape of the edge that is closest to where you pick.

• Below is a tapered curved part, and curved dimension representation is

selected from Tapered curved reinforcement group:

Edit drawings 418 Reinforcement in drawings

• Below is an example of curved orthogonal dimensions of a tapered curved
rebar group with a dimension tag:

• You can also add middle tags in rebar dimensions. Here dual dimensions
(page 180) have been applied:

Edit drawings 419 Reinforcement in drawings

• Curved dimension tags can be aligned by selecting one of the options in
the Curved Dimension Tag Type list in the Dimension Properties dialog
box:

In the example below, only one rebar is visible, and rebar tags are aligned

vertically :

Edit drawings 420 Reinforcement in drawings

In the example below, the dimension tag follows the dimension curve :

Edit drawings 421 Reinforcement in drawings

• Below is an example of curved orthogonal dimensions of a radial
reinforcing bar group.

Dimension rebars with Rebar group dimensioning

application
The Rebar group dimensioning application offers different styles for
presenting rebar group dimension lines and dimension marks flexibly. For
example, you can mark and dimension multiple stirrups at one go. The Rebar
group dimensioning helps you to efficiently create quality reinforcement
drawings according to the market requirements.

Add dimensions to rebar groups

1. In a drawing, select the rebar groups to be dimensioned.

2. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to

open the Applications & components catalog.
3. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.
4. In the Applications list, select Rebar group dimensioning.
5. Pick a location for the dimension line in the model.
6. Double-click the dimension to adjust the settings:

Edit drawings 422 Reinforcement in drawings

• On the Parameters tab, define what the dimensions look like and
what it contains. You can also define the content of the stirrup
dimension marks.

Edit drawings 423 Reinforcement in drawings

• On the Extra marks tab, create an extra mark in front of or behind the
dimension line.

• On the Advanced settings tab, define the offsets, spaces and cc

distances for the stirrup dimension marks.

Edit drawings 424 Reinforcement in drawings

 • On the Rebar lines tab, define the generation and the appearance of
the leader lines belonging to the stirrup dimensions.

For more information about the settings, see Rebar group dimensioning
settings below.
7. Click Modify.

Edit drawings 425 Reinforcement in drawings

Rebar group dimensioning settings
Parameters tab

Setting Options and descriptions

Annotation type Select the annotation type. The options are:

Edit drawings 426 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Define the positioning of the mark. The available

options depend on the selected Annotation type

Edit drawings 427 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions
Angle option. You can also define the mark angle in the
Angle box. The options are:

Edit drawings 428 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Mark position examples:

Edit drawings 429 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

In the example below, the mark angle has been

defined.

Edit drawings 430 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions

Define the number and the location of the mark

leader lines. You can also indicate which group you
are working with by entering the group number in
the Group number box.
Group number
This option is available for certain annotation types
only. The options are:

Edit drawings 431 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

In the following example, group number 2 is

defined.

In the following example, group number 2 is

defined.

Edit drawings 432 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions

Consider irregular Yes

spaces as separate
groups

No

Dimension each CC Yes

distance

No

Combine dim. between Allows you to combine the dimensions of the

rebar - dim. distance between two rebar groups with the

Edit drawings 433 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions
dimensions of the rebar group where the spacing
is the same as the distance between the groups. It
also combines the first/last group dimension line
with the distance to the part end if the distance to
the border is the same as the rebar group spacing.
For an example, see the section "More examples"
below.
Distribution line Select the desired dimension properties for the
properties displayed dimension line by selecting a dimension
properties file. The available properties are the
ones that have been defined and saved in the
Dimension Properties (page 850) dialog box.
Available elements Select the information to be displayed in the mark
such as grade, diameter and cc distances for mark
1 and mark 2.
Elements in mark List of the information that you have selected to
display in mark 1 and mark 2.
Text properties Define the text properties. The available properties
files are the ones that have been defined and
saved in the Text properties (page 271) dialog box.
Position Select where you want to place the mark. The
options are:
• Automatic: Mark 1 is positioned above the
dimension text, when the dimension is above
the part, and under the dimension text when
the dimension is under the part.
• Above dim. text: Mark 1 is always positioned
above the dimension text.
• Below dim. line: Mark 1 is always positioned
below the dimension text.
When placing the mark, the dimension text font
size for the above text position and the spacing
values defined on the Advanced settings tab for
both positions are considered. This setting is only
available for the non-radial annotation types.
Units Define the units:
• Automatic
• mm
• cm
• m
• foot - inch

Edit drawings 434 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions
• inch
Only available for the following mark content:
• Length
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
• Length itemized
Format Define the format:
• ###
• ###[.#]
• ###[.##]
• ###[.###]
• ###.#
• ### #/#
• ###.##
• ###.###
Only available for the following mark content:
• Length
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
• Length itemized
Precision Define the precision:
• 0.00
• 0.50
• 0.33
• 0.25
• 1/8
• 1/16

Edit drawings 435 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions
• 1/32
• 1/10
• 1/100
• 1/1000
For example, for precision 0.33, the actual value
50.40 is displayed as 50.33.
1/8, 1/16, and 1/32 are for imperial units.
1/10, 1/100, and 1/1000 are used for defining
precision without rounding.
Sum values A B C These options are only available for the following
mark content:
Sum segm rebar axis
• Length
Length TplEd
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
Mark 2 position Define whether and how the rebar position is
displayed in mark 2. The options are:
Not
Before main mark
Behind main mark
Above main mark
Below main mark
Mark 2 frame Select the frame type and color for the mark 2.
This option is available for certain annotation types
only. The options are:

Edit drawings 436 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions

Extra marks tab

Setting Options and descriptions

Marks in front of the To create marks in front of the dimension line,
dimension line select Yes. No is the default value.

Marks behind the To create marks behind the dimension line, select
dimension line Yes. No is the default value.

Available elements Select the information to be displayed in the mark

in front of or behind the dimensions line.
Elements in mark List of the information that you have selected to
display in the mark in front of or behind the
dimensions line.
Text properties Define the text properties for the marks. The
available properties files are the ones that have
been defined and saved in the Text properties
(page 271) dialog box.
Rebar position Define whether and how the rebar position is
displayed in marks. The options are:
No
Before main mark
Behind main mark
Text properties Define the text properties for the rebar position.
The available properties files are the ones that
have been defined and saved in the Text properties
(page 271) dialog box.
Units Define the units:
• Automatic
• mm
• cm
• m

Edit drawings 437 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions
• foot - inch
• inch
Only available for the following
content:
• Length
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
• Length itemized
Format Define the format:
• ###
• ###[.#]
• ###[.##]
• ###[.###]
• ###.#
• ### #/#
• ###.##
• ###.###
Only available for the following mark content:
• Length
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
• Length itemized
Precision Define the precision:
• 0.00
• 0.50
• 0.33
• 0.25

Edit drawings 438 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions
• 1/8
• 1/16
• 1/32
• 1/10
• 1/100
• 1/1000
For example, for precision 0.33, the actual value
50.40 is displayed as 50.33.
1/8, 1/16, and 1/32 are for imperial units.
1/10, 1/100, and 1/1000 are used for defining
precision without rounding.
Sum values A B C These options are only available for the following
mark content:
Sum segm rebar axis
• Length
Length TplEd
• Cc
• cc min
• cc max
• cc exact
• cc target
Mark placement settings

The options 3 is the default option.

Edit drawings 439 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

(1) All the marks are placed above the dimension

line.
(2) The middle of the last mark is on the the
dimension line.
(3) The middle (calculated in the dir. - to the
dimension line) of the mark group is on the
dimension line. This is the default option.
(4) The dimension line is extended between the
marks.
• If there is only one mark, it is placed above the
line.
• If there are two marks, one mark is placed
above and the other under the line.
• If there are three marks, two marks are placed
above and one mark is placed under the line.
(5) The middle of the first mark is on the dimension
line.
(6) All marks are placed under the dimension line.

Edit drawings 440 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions
The parameters a, b, c1 and c2 are needed to get
the desired distances between the marks and the
dimension line.

The default values are:

a=1
b=1
c1 = 5
c2 = 5

Advanced settings tab

Setting Options and descriptions

First mark spacing Enter a millimeter value to indicate the space
between the dimension line and the first line of
dimension mark text.

You can also define the first mark distance when

the label is below the dimension line.

Edit drawings 441 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions
Next mark spacing Enter a millimeter value to indicate the space
between several lines of dimension mark text.

Free space below text / If you select Free space below text, enter a
Dimension line spacing millimeter value to indicate the space between the
last line of dimension mark text and the next
dimension line.

If you select Dimension line spacing and enter a

millimeter value to indicate the space between two
or more dimension lines.

Edit drawings 442 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions

Text offset dimension

line

Rebar group tolerance Define whether double stirrup groups are

combined into one dimension line.
If the distance between the stirrups (in the image
below 12 mm) is greater than the entered value
(=10 mm), two dimension lines are created:

Edit drawings 443 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions
Part extrema Define how to close dimension lines on the
contour of the concrete part. The following options
are available:

Examples:

The dimension line is always positioned on the

outermost lines of the concrete part.

The dimension line is positioned to the nearest

side/geometry point of the concrete part relative to
the picked insertion point of the dimension line
(plugin). See the examples below.

Edit drawings 444 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions

Rebar lines tab

On the Rebar lines tab, you can define the generation and the appearance of
the leader lines and symbols of the dimension line. You adjust the settings of
Not visualized rebars, Visualized rebars, Group end rebars and Part edges.

Setting Options and descriptions

Not visualized rebars

Visualized rebars

Edit drawings 445 Reinforcement in drawings

 Setting Options and descriptions

Group end rebars Applied to the first and last bar in the group.

Part edges

Define the generation of the leader lines and

symbols for the Not visualized rebars or
Visualized rebars. The options are:

No leader lines or symbols.

Edit drawings 446 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Leader lines. Define the length of the leader lines

relative to the dimension line.

Leader lines and symbols. Define the length of the

leader lines relative to the dimension line.

Edit drawings 447 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Leader lines. Define the length of the leader lines

relative to the contour of the concrete part.

Leader lines and symbols. Define the length of the

leader lines relative to the contour of the concrete
part.

Edit drawings 448 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Leader lines. Define the length of the leader lines

relative to the rebar.

Leader lines and symbols. Define the length of the

leader lines relative to the rebar.

Edit drawings 449 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Symbols only

Define the generation of the leader lines and

symbols for the Part edges.
See the examples for the option Not visualized
rebars above.
The following options are available:

Edit drawings 450 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions
Define the generation of the leader lines and
symbols for the contour of the concrete part
See the examples for the option Not visualized
rebars above.
The following options are available:

Define the color and the line type for the various
leader line types.

Define whether all leader lines and symbols are

shown for Visualized rebars and if this should be
done for one single rebar only. The following
options are available:

Edit drawings 451 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Define the symbol file and symbol number to be

used. You can use existing symbols in Tekla
Structures by selecting a symbol file and a symbol
number. You can also define the color and the size
of the symbol.
Symbols are defined separately for Not visualized
rebars, Visualized rebars, Group end rebars and
Part edges
Examples:

Edit drawings 452 Reinforcement in drawings

Setting Options and descriptions

Edit drawings 453 Reinforcement in drawings

More examples

Edit drawings 454 Reinforcement in drawings

Example of the setting Combine dim. between rebar - dim. on the
Parameters tab
• In the example below, the first dimension from the top shows the rebar
groups (blue color) with the distances between the groups (green color)
plus the distances to the part ends (grey color). Dimensions are not
combined.
• The second dimension shows the same situation with marked equalities
between the drawing rebar group spacing (cc) and the distances between
the groups.
• In the third dimension, the new combining type Consider same spacings
has been applied. The green distances between the two blue rebar groups
have been combined with the group that has the same spacing (cc) as the
distance between the groups.
• The combining has also been applied to the gray distance to the part end
because the distance to the part end is the same as the spacing (cc) of the
adjacent rebar group.

Edit drawings 455 Reinforcement in drawings

Create a drawing view for a reinforcement mesh
You can create drawing views each containing one reinforcement mesh by
using the Rebar mesh view creator macro. The mesh view contains the
overall mesh length and width dimensions, and dimension lines for wire
spacing in horizontal and vertical directions. Also the wire sizes are displayed.
You can create mesh views in general arrangement and cast unit drawings.
1. Open a drawing containing meshes.
2. Select the meshes.
If you want to create views for all meshes in the drawing, you do not need
to select separately.

3. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to

open the Applications & components catalog.
4. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.
5. Double-click Rebar mesh view creator.

Edit drawings 456 Reinforcement in drawings

6. You have the following options for creating mesh views:
• If you want to create a mesh view for each separate mesh in the
current drawing, select Create mesh view for all meshes in the
drawing.
• If you want to create a view for the selected meshes only, select Create
view for selected meshes. Here you must select the meshes before
running the macro.
• If you have already created the mesh views and just want to add
dimension lines and diameters in the views, select Create
annotations for selected meshes. Here you must select the meshes
before running the macro.
7. Select the view, dimension, text, line, and unbent wire line property files
that you want to use in the new the mesh view.
8. Select the wire annotation type in Text content type .

The choices are and .

9. Select the wire length unit in Unit of length in text.
When you select Auto, with imperial units the text will be using the
current units, and otherwise the text will use m.

Edit drawings 457 Reinforcement in drawings

10. Click Create.
Tekla Structures creates or updates the views based on your selections
and the property files.

Example
Below is an example of a mesh view.

The drawing below contains a 3D view of a wall with two bent meshes, and a
separate unbent mesh view of both of the meshes.

Edit drawings 458 Reinforcement in drawings

4.20 Spiral beams in drawings
Spiral beams can be show in drawings either folded or unfolded. In unfolded
views, spiral beam is unfolded straight.
For details about creating concrete and steel spiral beams, see Create a
concrete spiral beam and Create a steel spiral beam.
In the example below, the Unfolded option is set to Yes and in view properties
on the Attributes 2 tab. Note that the part is cut (page 634) in the view.

Edit drawings 459 Spiral beams in drawings

In the following example, the Unfolded option is set to No.

Dimension spiral beams

You can add straight dimensions, angle dimensions and radius dimensions to
spiral beams.
In the following, the automatic creation of dimensions is explained. You can
also create dimensions in spiral beams in an existing drawing in view level
properties.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
3. Click Dimensioning on the options tree.
4. Add a row and select Spiral beam dimensions as the Dimensioning
type, select the desired dimensioning rule properties and click Edit rule.

Edit drawings 460 Spiral beams in drawings

5. In the Dimensioning rule properties dialog box, select the dimension
properties that you want to use from Straight dimensions, Angle
dimensions and Angle and radius dimensions.
If none of the available properties suit your needs, open a drawing, click
Drawing --> Properties --> Dimension, and edit and save the needed
dimension properties so that they are available for selecting in the spiral
beam Dimensioning rule properties dialog box for the three dimension
types.
6. Save the dimension rule properties by entering a unique name and
clicking Save as.

7. Save the view properties by clicking Save and return to the drawing
properties dialog box by clicking Close.
8. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Spiral beam part marks

You can show the rotation of the spiral beam in part marks. The rotation angle
is defined in the spiral beam properties in the model.
• You can add part marks (page 251) to spiral beams in the same way as for
other parts: click a spiral beam, right-click and select Add part mark or on
the Drawing tab, click Part mark and select For selected parts. Or then
you can define automatic marks (page 754) in drawing properties before
creating the drawing.

Edit drawings 461 Spiral beams in drawings

Edit drawings 462 Spiral beams in drawings
Examples of spiral beam dimensions and marks
The example below shows a straight dimension and a part mark that contains
the rotation angle information:

The following example shows a radius dimension of a spiral beam:

Edit drawings 463 Spiral beams in drawings

4.21 Pours in drawings
Tekla Structures general arrangement drawings are able to present pour
object geometry, and pour breaks. Pour drawings can be used for
communicating the sequencing of the pours, and the properties of the pours
and pour breaks.

How to enable pours

Pours can be enabled in a model by setting the
XS_ENABLE_POUR_MANAGEMENT advanced option to TRUE. In the default
environment, pours are only enabled in the (Concrete) Contractor role.

WARNING If the pours are enabled in the model, do not disable the pours
using XS_ENABLE_POUR_MANAGEMENT, especially in the middle of
the project. This may cause problems if you have drawings
containing pours, and if you are sharing your model. The pours
and pour breaks in the model and in the drawings may get
invalid, and you may lose all pour-related modeling work.

Pour objects
The geometry of the pour objects is presented as monolithic concrete. The
pour objects can be presented in plan, section and 3D drawings. Tekla

Edit drawings 464 Pours in drawings

Structures shows the pour object geometry in general arrangement drawings
exactly like it has been modeled: overlaps and extra outlines vanish if the parts
collide, have the same concrete material grade, have Cast in place as the Cast
unit type, and have the same pour phase.
You can select whether you want to show pour objects or not. You can use
different colors, line types and fills in different pour objects. You can also
modify the pour object properties in an open drawing on object, view and
drawing level. For more information about showing the pour objects, see Show
pour objects, pour marks and pour breaks in drawings (page 819).

Pour object marks

Using pour object marks, you can show information related to pour objects,
for example, pour number, pour type, material grade, planned pour start date
and the name of the pour team. You can add automatic pour marks before
creating the pour drawing, and add and modify pour object marks also in an
open drawing.

Pour breaks
Pour breaks are shown in general arrangement drawings as they have been
modeled. The pour breaks are represented by a symbol. You can change the
symbol using the advanced option XS_POUR_BREAK_SYMBOL. The symbol
scale and the spacing between the symbols follows the drawing view scale
automatically.
You can show pour breaks automatically, and modify the pour break
properties and add associative notes to the pour breaks in an open drawing.

Predefined pour drawing properties and templates

In the default environment, the Concrete Contractor role contains some
predefined drawing properties, a couple of traditional report templates, and
an organizer report template for pours. Your own environment may also
contain some predefined drawing properties, and templates for pours. For
examples of pour drawings and pour reports, see Examples of pour drawings
and pour reports (page 468).

Examples
In the image below, you can see two pour objects colored differently, each
having a pour object mark. The pour break can be seen between the pour
objects, it is represented by a symbol. The pour break is marked with an
associative note.

Edit drawings 465 Pours in drawings

See also
Show pour objects, pour marks and pour breaks in drawings (page 819)
Change the pour break symbol (page 467)
Add associative notes in drawings (page 255)
Pour object and pour break properties in drawings (page 922)

Modify pour objects, pour marks and pour breaks in a

drawing
After you have created a pour drawing, you can open it and modify the pour
objects, pour marks and pour breaks.
1. Open a pour drawing and double-click the drawing background to go to
the drawing properties.
2. If you want so show the pours in the drawing, click the View button, check
that Show pours in drawing is set to Yes, and click OK.
3. Click the Pour object... button to modify the properties:
• Content tab: Select whether you want to see the hidden lines and own
hidden lines, and the edge chamfers by selecting On or Off.
• Appearance tab: Set the color and type for visible lines and hidden
lines.

Edit drawings 466 Pours in drawings

 • Fill tab: Select the fill for the pour object face and/or pour object
section face.
4. Click OK.
5. Click the Pour object mark... button, select the contents and appearance
of the mark, and click .
6. Click the Pour breaks... button and check that Visibility is set to Visible
and click OK.
You can also select whether you want to show pour break hidden lines on
the Content tab. On the Appearance tab you can change the color and
type of the visible and hidden lines in pour breaks.
7. Modify the other properties as required. For example, click
Reinforcement... and set the Visibility of all reinforcing bars to Visible
to show the reinforcement in the pour drawing.
8. Click Modify to apply the changes in your pour drawing.

See also
Pours in drawings (page 464)
Pour object and pour break properties in drawings (page 922)
Add hatches (fills) to parts and sketch objects in drawings (page 809)
Examples of pour drawings and pour reports (page 468)
Change the pour break symbol (page 467)

Change the pour break symbol

If you want to change the pour break symbol, you can do that using the
advanced option XS_POUR_BREAK_SYMBOL.

1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Advanced options and go to the
Drawing Properties category.
2. Set a new value for the advanced option XS_POUR_BREAK_SYMBOL.
The default value is PourBreaks@0. The value refers to the
PourBreaks.sym file where the symbol is defined. The symbol value
starts with the symbol library file name (PourBreaks) and ends with the
number of the symbol (0). The default symbol file is located in ..
\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments
\common\symbols.
You can also create a new symbol file containing a new symbol, and save
it. Then define the new .sym file for XS_POUR_BREAK_SYMBOL. If you wish
to use a symbol file that is not located under your environment folders,

Edit drawings 467 Pours in drawings

 enter the complete path to the symbol file location, the symbol file name
and symbol number as the value for this advanced option.
3. Click Apply and OK.

Example

See also
Pours in drawings (page 464)

Examples of pour drawings and pour reports

The Concrete Contractor role in the default environment contains some
predefined templates and settings for pour drawings and reports.

Examples of drawing properties predefined for pours

The Concrete Contractor role in the default environment contains predefined
general arrangement drawing properties CIP_Pour_3D, CIP_Pour_Plan, and
CIP_Pour_Plan_with_Pour_List. These drawing properties use detailed
object level settings to color pour objects with different colors based on pour
number. In addition, the drawing properties file CIP_Pour_3D does not
render hidden lines, and CIP_Pour_Plan_with_Pour_List adds a pour list
to the drawing.

The following example drawing is created by using the

CIP_Pour_Plan_with_Pour_List drawing properties, and applying
CIP_Pour_3D view level properties to 3D views. Click the following link to
open the drawing:
Pour Drawing

Edit drawings 468 Pours in drawings

 Examples of reports predefined for pours
The Concrete Contractor role in the default environment contains predefined
report templates for pour information:
• There are two traditional types or report templates that can be created
using the Create reports command: Pour_List and Pour_Schedule.csv.
• The Pour Organizer report can be exported to excel format.
Click the links below to see example reports created using these report
templates:
Pour list
Pour schedule
Pour Organizer report exported to Excel

4.22 Grids in drawings

You can show grids and grid line labels in single-part, cast unit, assembly, and
general arrangement drawings. You can set automatic grid properties and also
manually modify properties in an open drawing.

To Click below
Modify grid properties and the Modify grid and grid line properties in
properties of individual grid lines drawings (page 469)
manually
Drawing grid properties (page 930)
Hide grids and individual grid lines Hide grids or grid lines (page 482)
manually
Drag grid labels if the label is covering Drag grid labels (page 481)
an important area in a drawing
Set automatic grid properties before Define automatic grid properties
you create the drawing (page 792)

Modify grid and grid line properties in drawings

You can modify grid properties on the drawing and view levels, and properties
of individual grids or grid lines in an open drawing.

To modify the grid or grid line properties on object level in an open drawing:
1. Ensure that you have the correct selection switch selected.

Edit drawings 469 Grids in drawings

 To modify grids, use the selection switch , and to modify grid lines,

use .
2. Double-click the grid or the grid line. Tekla Structures opens the Grid
properties or Grid line properties dialog box.
3. Visible shows the grid lines in the drawing. If you want to see the labels
only, select Only grid labels visible.
4. Modify the label text placing, grid line and text settings as required.
5. Click Modify.

NOTE You can also set a fixed width to the grid label frames and set a width factor
for the grid label frames:
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR

See also
Drawing grid properties (page 930)

Customize drawing grid labels

In GA drawings, you can customize drawing grid labels by including extra text
and symbols in the labels. You can define the label text, offsets and offset
prefixes in the grid user-defined attributes in the model and show the grid
label text in drawings. You can also defined the prefixes in an open drawing.
You can use a combination of traditional grid labels and custom labels, or only
use custom labels.
Before you can customize grid labels, you need to modify the user-defined grid
properties in the model, and also other grid properties, depending on your
needs. You can also choose to modify the prefix text in the drawing.

Modify grid model properties

1. In the model, double-click the grid to open the Grid dialog box.
2. Modify the grid properties as required.

Edit drawings 470 Grids in drawings

 In this example, you will create grid labels for elevations, so you need to
modify the Labels for Z direction.

3. Click User-defined attributes...

4. Fill in the necessary information in the grid user-defined attributes dialog
box.
Note that you cannot leave the Offset in Z box empty even if the offset
was 0. If the offset is 0, you still need to enter 0.
In this example, you need to have the Grid label text, Offset in Z and
Prefix offset in Z defined. You can also define the prefixes and the label
texts in the Advanced grid label properties dialog box in the drawing.

Note that the Datum level in the drawing View Properties does not work
in the same way as the Offset in Z. Setting Offset in Z in grid UDAs to
1000.00 gives the same result as setting the Datum level to -1000.00. The
view Datum level setting moves coordinates, and level marks are relative
to the coordinates. The Datum level setting does not move the content of
the view, the content just becomes relatively moved in the opposite
direction.
5. Click OK, select the grid and select Modify.
Now you have created the necessary grid label texts and adjusted the needed
values. Next, you can customize the drawing grid labels.

Edit drawings 471 Grids in drawings

Customize drawing grid labels
1. Open a general arrangement drawing.

2. On the Drawing tab, hold down Shift and click Grid labels .
3. Define the properties for the custom grid labels:

Grid label placing Select which grid labels are displayed by selecting
the desired check boxes.
Use settings from Define where the grid label properties are taken
from:
• Grid inherits the properties from the grid.
Note that if you have defined settings for text
color, height and font in the standard drawing
Grid properties dialog box, the corresponding
settings in the Advanced grid label properties
dialog box will changed accordingly, when you
click Modify.
• dialog box uses the settings defined in the
Advanced grid label properties dialog box.
Frame type Select the type of the frame:
Any symbol, grid label text inside, at the bottom

Any symbol, grid label text inside at the top .

Any symbol with a leader line, grid label text under

the leader line outside the symbol .

Any symbol with a leader line, grid label text above

the leader line outside the symbol

Note that you can define a fixed size for the grid
label frame by setting the advanced option
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH
to a defined value. If you want to calculate the grid
label frame size automatically, leave the value out.
File Select a symbol file from the list.
Number Click the ... button and double-click the symbol. For
example, the elevation symbol is by default symbol
number 35 in the xsteel.sym file.

Edit drawings 472 Grids in drawings

Color Select the color and the line type of the grid label
frame symbol.
Height Set the height of the grid label frame symbol:
Enter height: Enter the height in the Height box.
Autosize: Adjust the symbol height automatically.
Enter Autosize minimum height: Set the
minimum height for the symbol.
Align to line Select Yes to rotate the labels of vertical and
inclined grid lines and align the labels with the grid
lines.
Grid: Number Define the Prefix, Color, Height and Font of the
grid numbers. If you define the prefix in the user-
defined attributes of the grid, you no longer need
to do it here.
Grid: Text Define the Prefix, Color, Height and Font of the
grid label texts. If you define the prefix in the user-
defined attributes of the grid, you no longer need
to do it here.
Create axis text Select Yes or No. Yes enables the options below.
No is the default value. If you have defined
prefixes and grid axis texts in the user-defined
attributes of the grid, you not need to define them
here.
Prefix for axis X Define the prefix for the X axis.
Prefix for axis Y Define the prefix for the Y axis.
Prefix for axis Z Define the prefix for the Z axis.
Color Define the color of the grid axis text.
Height Define the height of the grid axis text.
Font Define the font used in the grid axis text.
4. Save the properties for future use by entering a unique name in the Save
as box and clicking Save as.
5. Click OK and pick a grid.
Tekla Structures customizes the grid labels and label texts according to the
modifications that you made in the grid UDAs in the model, and in the
Advanced grid label properties dialog box in the drawing.
Note that if you get duplicate grid labels (traditional and custom), double-click
the drawing grid and clear the check boxes of double grid labels in grid
properties.
In the example below, the following properties were defined in the grid
properties and grid user-defined attributes in the model:
Labels: Z = Floor1 Floor2 Floor3

Edit drawings 473 Grids in drawings

Grid label text = Text
Prefix offset in Z = Prefix Z
Offset in Z = 1000.00

In the Advanced grid label properties dialog box, was selected as

the Frame type.

Customize a grid label on a single grid line

1. Ensure that you have the Select grid line selection switch active .
2. In an open drawing, on the Drawing tab, hold down Shift and click Grid

labels .
3. Define the properties for the grid labels (see instructions above).
4. Click OK, and pick a grid line. You can also select several grid lines using
area selection.
Tekla Structures customizes the grid labels and label texts on the selected grid
line according to the modifications you made.

Modify custom grid labels

You can modify the custom grid labels by selecting the grid labels.

1. Ensure that you have the Select grid selection switch active .
2. In an open drawing, on the Drawing tab, hold down Shift and Grid labels

.
3. Only select the check box of the grid label that you want to customize.
4. Define the properties for the custom grid label.
5. Click Modify and select the grid label.

Customize grid labels only at one end of a grid line

You can have regular and customized labels at different ends of a grid line.

1. Ensure that you have the Select grid selection switch active .

Edit drawings 474 Grids in drawings

2. In an open general arrangement drawing, on the Drawing tab, hold down

Shift and click Grid labels .

3. Only select the check box of the grid label you want to customize.

4. Define the properties for the custom grid label.

5. Click OK and select the grid.

6. Select the selection switch.

7. Select the desired grid lines, right-click and select Properties..., and only
select the check box at the opposite end of the grid line. Area select is
handy in grid line selection.
8. Click Modify. The custom grid label is displayed at the one end of the grid
line, and the traditional grid label at the other end.

Edit drawings 475 Grids in drawings

Add different customized grid labels on horizontal and vertical grid
lines
You can use different customized labels in horizontal and vertical grid line
labels.

1. Ensure that you have the Select grid selection switch active .
2. In an open drawing, on the Drawing tab, hold down Shift and click Grid

labels .

Edit drawings 476 Grids in drawings

3. In the Advanced grid label properties dialog box, only select the check
box for the right horizontal grid labels.

4. Define the properties for the horizontal grid labels. For example, for
elevation grid label, set up an elevation symbol.
5. Click OK and select the grid.
Custom grid labels are added on the horizontal grid lines. There are no
grid labels on the vertical grid lines.

6. Hold down Shift and click Grid labels .

7. In the Advanced grid label properties dialog box, only select the check
box for the upper vertical grid labels.

8. Define the properties for the vertical grid labels. For example, select the
desired frame label type.
9. Click OK and select the grid line.
Custom grid labels are added on the vertical grid lines of the selected grid. The
horizontal grid lines have the labels that you added earlier.

Edit drawings 477 Grids in drawings

Use model grid coordinates and prefix as text on grid axis in a drawing

1. On the OK tab, hold down Shift and click Grid labels .

2. Do any of the following:
• Define the following settings to show grid coordinates automatically
along grid lines:

• You can also do this in another way and use different prefixes:
a. First in the model grid user-defined attributes, add in Prefix
offset in X and in Prefix offset in Y values W: and N: in the
following way:

Edit drawings 478 Grids in drawings

b. Then in the drawing in the Advanced grid label properties dialog
box, set Create axis text to Yes:

Edit drawings 479 Grids in drawings

 If you want to write prefixes to these values, in Advanced grid
label properties dialog box, add the Prefix for axis X and Prefix
for axis Y information.
c. To get model grid coordinates shown in the drawing grid labels
automatically, in the model, go to user-defined grid attributes, and
change the offset values to 0.

Edit drawings 480 Grids in drawings

 When you do this, go to drawing Advanced grid label properties,
and set Create axis text to No.

Limitations
• The grid lines are not refreshed automatically.
• If you have hidden grid lines or otherwise modified them, you need to
click Modify in the Advanced grid label properties dialog box to
refresh the grid labels.
• If you drag grid line handles, the custom grid labels are not moved
together with the handle, until you click Modify in the Advanced grid
label properties dialog box.
• Advanced grid labels are not supported in multidrawings, key plans or in
cloning, or when moving views to another drawing.
• Not all frame types are allowed for all axises.

Edit drawings 481 Grids in drawings

 Drag grid labels
You can move single grid labels in drawings by dragging them. This is useful, if
the grid label is covering an important area in a drawing.

Ensure, that you have selected Smart select in File menu --> Settings to drag
and drop by handles without selecting them first.

1. Ensure that you have the grid line selection switch selected .
2. Click a grid.
3. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the label by the handle to a
new location.

Hide grids or grid lines

You can hide grids and grid lines if you do not want to have them visible in a
drawing.
1. Ensure that you have the correct selection switch selected:

To hide grids, use the selection switch , and to hide grid lines, use

.
2. Click a grid or a grid line.
3. Right-click the grid or the grid line and click Hide/Show --> Hide from
Drawing View .

TIP If you want to show the grids or grid lines, press B until the color mode is Color,
right-click the grid or the grid line, and select Hide/Show --> Show in Drawing
View . You can see and select the hidden grids and grid lines only in Color mode.

4.23 Symbols in drawings

You can use symbols in drawings, for example, as separate objects, and in
marks, object representations, and line arrows. Symbols can be created and
edited in Symbol Editor.

Symbol Editor
You can open Symbol Editor by clicking File menu --> Editors --> Symbol
editor. In Symbol Editor, you can create new symbol files, and create and
modify symbols.
The Symbol files dialog box in drawing mode allows you to change the symbol
file in use. It also provides access to Symbol Editor.

Edit drawings 482 Symbols in drawings

We recommend that you have a look at the Symbol Editor User's Guide, so
that you get familiar with creating new symbols and modifying the existing
ones.
We strongly recommend that you do not modify the original symbol files
delivered with your Tekla Structures application. If you need to modify any
symbols, copy the original symbol file and work on the copy, keeping the
original symbol file intact.
If your symbols are located in a protected folder, the symbols are read-only,
because you cannot save a modified symbol in a protected folder if you are
not an administrator. In this case, run Tekla Structures as administrator.

Symbol file search order

The symbol files (.sym) are searched from the following folders in the
following order:
1. All DXK_SYMBOLPATH folders
The advanced option DXK_SYMBOLPATH is defined in the environment
initialization file <your_environment>.ini and in the Tekla Structures
initialization file teklastructures.ini.
Alternatively, you can add your own DXK_SYMBOLPATH in options.ini
under the model folder and define your own symbol folder paths there.
Note that also the path settings in the <your_environment>.ini file
need to be added there.
The reading order of the .ini files containing the DXK_SYMBOLPATH
definition:
1. teklastructures.ini
2. <your_environment> .ini
3. options.ini
2. Current model folder
Add here any additional symbol files that you might need.
All symbol files that are found are available to be used in Tekla Structures. If
there are duplicate file names, the first one found is used and the rest are
discarded. If the model folder contains a symbol file that has the same name
as another symbol file in DXK_SYMBOLPATH, the one in the model folder is
discarded.
Example of overriding a weld symbol temporarily
If there is no permanent need to add your own symbol paths in the
options.ini file in the model folder, you can temporarily override symbols.
In this example, you will temporarily override the weld symbol with a
customized symbol located in your model folder:
1. Customize the symbol (page 362) in ts_welds.sym first.

Edit drawings 483 Symbols in drawings

2. Copy the edited ts_welds.sym in your model folder C:
\TeklaStructuresModels\ <mymodel>
3. Open the options.ini file located in your model folder, and add the line
DXK_SYMBOLPATH=C:\ TeklaStructuresModels\<mymodel>; C:
\TeklaStructures\2017\Environments\common\symbols; +
possible other symbol folders in your local environment.

To Click below for more information

Change a symbol in a symbol file Change a symbol in a symbol file
using Symbol Editor (page 484)
Create new symbol files to be used in Create a new symbol file (page 486)
drawings
Change the currently used symbol file Change the symbol file in use
(page 486)
Add symbols in your drawings manual Add symbols in drawings (page 487)
Customize the symbols that are used Customize leader line arrows
as leader line arrows (page 487)
Modify the appearance of a symbol in Modify symbol properties (page 489)
an open drawing
Add symbols in marks, for example, Add symbols in automatic marks
part marks (page 785)
Define a firm folder where Tekla Define a firm folder for images and
Structures always searches for the symbols (page 494)
images and symbols. When you store
the images and symbols in this folder,
you do not have to move them from
folder to folder when you install a
new version of Tekla Structures.
Installing a new version does not
replace the files in the firm folder.
Add surface treatment symbols in Add surfacing symbols in drawings
cast unit drawings using the (page 493)
AddSurfaceSymbols macro
Create, update and delete moment Moment connection symbols in Tekla
connection symbols, which indicate Structures drawings (Drawing tools)
the beams that are connected to (page 490)
columns with rigid connections

See also
Customize weld type symbols (page 362)
Define a firm folder for images and symbols (page 494)

Edit drawings 484 Symbols in drawings

Change a symbol in a symbol file
You can make changes in a symbol in a symbol file. If you do this, we
recommend that you save the file with another name and save it in another
folder, for example, in model, firm or project folder.

1. Depending on where you are in Tekla Structures, you can open a symbol
file in Symbol Editor in several ways:
• On the File menu, click Editors --> Symbol editor. Open a symbol file
using File --> Open.
• Open the Mark content - symbol dialog box by double-clicking a mark
in an open drawing, and selecting Symbol from the available mark
elements list in the mark properties dialog box. Then click Select...,
select a file from the Symbol files browser and click Edit....
• Open the Symbol Properties dialog box by double-clicking a symbol
that you have added in a drawing. Then click Select..., select a file from
the Symbol files browser and click Edit....
2. Modify the file in the Symbol Editor:
a. Click symbol in slot and sketch your new symbol with drawing tools.
You can also import AutoCAD or MicroStation files on the Import tab.
b. When you are happy with the symbol, point the symbol slot to check
the number of the new symbol at the bottom of the window.
In many places, when adding a symbol, you need to know the
number of the symbol to be able to use it.

3. Click File --> Save as... and give a new name.

You can also save the file with a new name in a new location, for example,
in model, firm or project folder. We strongly recommend that you do not
the original symbol files delivered with your Tekla Structures software. If

Edit drawings 485 Symbols in drawings

 you need to modify any symbols, copy the original symbol file and work
on the copy, keeping the original symbol file intact.
Tekla Structures reads the symbol files in certain search order (page 482).
4. Click OK.

TIP In Symbol Editor, you can copy symbols between symbol files (*.sym). Press Ctrl
+ C and select the symbol you would like to copy, then open the symbol file you
want to copy to (or a new symbol file), select the location for the symbol and
press Ctrl + V.

See also
Define a firm folder for images and symbols (page 494)

Create a new symbol file

In addition to the default symbol files that are delivered with Tekla Structures,
you can create symbol files of your own, and save them in model, firm, or
project folder, for example.

If you decide to use your own files, you can add DXK_SYMBOLPATH in the
options.ini file under the model folder and define your own symbol file
folder paths there. The symbol files are read in a certain search order
(page 482).
1. On the File menu, click Editors --> Symbol editor.
2. Click File --> New.
You can also open an existing symbol file, edit it and save with a new
name.
3. Create the symbol in the Symbol Editor.
4. Click File --> Save and save the symbol file in the folder that you use for
keeping your symbol files.
If you opened an existing symbol file, use File --> Save as and give the
symbol file another name.

Change the symbol file in use

You can change the currently used symbol file if the current symbol file does
not contain the symbols that you need.
1. Do one of the following, depending on what you are doing:
• Open the Mark content - symbol dialog box by double-clicking a mark
in an open drawing, and selecting Symbol from the available mark
elements list in the mark properties dialog box.

Edit drawings 486 Symbols in drawings

 • Open the Symbol Properties dialog box by double-clicking a symbol
that you have added in a drawing.
2. Click Select... next to the File box.
3. Select a new file from the Symbol files list and click OK or double-click the
file.

Add symbols in drawings

You can add symbols in your drawings. They can be represented in three
different ways: without leader line, with leader line, and along line. Tekla
Structures adds symbols using the properties defined in the Symbol
Properties dialog box.
1. In the drawing, hold down Shift and, on the Drawing tab, click Symbol
and one of the following symbol commands:
• Symbol: Add a symbol in the current drawing without a leader line.
• Along line: Create a symbol along the line you define by picking two
points. Then pick an insertion point for the symbol.
• With leader line: Add a symbol with a leader line pointing to the point
you pick first.
2. Modify the symbol properties:
• File: Change the symbol file in use.
• Number: Change the symbol.
• Symbol: Change the color, height and angle of the symbol.
• Frame: Change the frame type, leader line and color.
3. Click OK.
4. Pick one to three points in the drawing to place the symbol. The symbol
command you selected affects the number of points to pick.

See also
Symbols in drawings (page 482)
Leader line types (page 883)

Customize leader line arrows

If you do not find a suitable leader line arrow in the Arrow list in the Mark
Properties dialog box, you can add an arrow of your own.

First you will create the arrow symbol in the Symbol Editor, and save the
created symbol in the arrow.sym file. Then you need to add the position of

Edit drawings 487 Symbols in drawings

the new symbol in the arrow.sym to the configuration file arrow.txt file,
which tells which arrows are available for use in your environment.
1. On the File menu, click Editors --> Symbol editor to open the Symbol
Editor.
2. Open the arrow.sym file located in common environment or in your
environment under symbols folder.
3. Click an empty symbol slot and sketch your symbol with drawing tools.
You can also import AutoCAD or MicroStation files through File -->
Import .
4. When the symbol is completed, point the symbol slot to check the number
of the new symbol at the bottom of the window.

5. Save the arrow.sym file by clicking File --> Save .

6. Click File --> Exit to close the Symbol Editor.
7. Open the arrow.txt file located in the same symbols folder as the
arrow.sym file.
The file contains a list of symbol numbers.
8. Add the number of your symbol preceded by zero (0) in the correct
position and separate it with a comma:
016,017,018,019,020,021,022,023,024,032,048,049,101,102,110,200
9. Click File --> Save to save your change.
10. Add a bitmap of the created arrow in the ..\ProgramData\Tekla
Structures\<version>\Bitmaps folder on your computer.
Use the following format in the file name:
dr_dialog_arrow_type_022.bmp.

Edit drawings 488 Symbols in drawings

11. Double-click a mark in a drawing to open the Mark Properties dialog box.
12. Open the Arrow list, and you should see that the new arrow symbol is
now available for use.

NOTE We recommend you define a firm folder (page 494) for symbols, because the
default folders are overwritten when you upgrade to a newer version of Tekla
Structures. Add the firm folder to the advanced option DXK_SYMBOLPATH.

Modify symbol properties

You can modify the properties of symbols in an open drawing.
To modify the symbol properties:
1. Double-click a symbol.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off
switch at the bottom of the dialog box, and select only the
check boxes next to the properties that you want to modify..
3. If necessary, change the symbol file in use and select the symbol to use.
4. To modify symbol placement settings, click Place...
Here you can set the placing to free or fixed, specify the search margin,
minimal distance and select the desired quarter to place the symbol.

Edit drawings 489 Symbols in drawings

5. Go to the Appearance tab and set the symbol color, height and angle,
and the frame type, leader line and color.
6. Click Modify.

See also
Placement properties for marks, dimensions, notes, texts and symbols
(page 925)
Leader line types (page 883)

Moment connection symbols in Tekla Structures drawings

(Drawing tools)
Moment connections show the beams that are connected to columns with
rigid connections.
To display the moment connection symbols for a part in drawings, you need to
set the Moment connection to Yes on the End conditions tab in the user-
defined attributes of the part in the model.
You can create, update and delete moment connection symbols using drawing
tools:
Create moment connection symbols (Drawing tools) (page 490)
Update moment connection symbols (Drawing tools) (page 492)
Delete moment connection symbols (Drawing tools) (page 493)

Create moment connection symbols (Drawing tools)

In general arrangement drawings, you can create moment connection symbols
to show the beams that are connected to columns with rigid connections. The
symbols are created according to part end releases. You can create moment
connection symbols automatically for all parts in a drawing view, or for
selected parts.

Limitations: Moment connection symbols are created to reference lines. This

means that offsets are not taken into use.
1. Open the drawing.

2. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to

open the Applications & components catalog.
3. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.
4. Double-click Drawing tools to display the Drawing tools toolbar.

Edit drawings 490 Symbols in drawings

5. Click Create moment connection symbols .
6. In the Create moment connection symbols dialog box, select the color
for the symbols from the color list.
7. Enter a scale for the symbols in the box next to the color list.
8. Do one of the following:
• To create moment connection symbols for all parts in a drawing view,
select the view.
• To create moment connection symbols for selected parts, select the
parts.
9. Click Create.

The moment connection symbols are created according to analysis part and
connection release properties:
• If a connection exists, start and end release information is read from the
Start releases and End releases tabs in the analysis part properties dialog
box.
• If a connection does not exist, release information is read from the End
conditions tab in the user-defined attributes dialog box of the part.

Example

TIP The moment connection symbol that is used depends on if it points to right, left,
down, or up. The symbols are retrieved by default from the xsteel.sym symbol

Edit drawings 491 Symbols in drawings

 file. If you want to use another symbol, you can modify the symbols in Symbol
Editor by opening the xsteel.sym symbol file and modifying the symbols 87
(right symbol), 86 (left symbol), 85 (down symbol), or 84 (symbol up) and saving
the changes.

See also
Moment connection symbols in Tekla Structures drawings (Drawing tools)
(page 490)

Update moment connection symbols (Drawing tools)

If you want to remove all previously created moment connection symbols and
create new ones that are up to date, you can update the moment connection
symbols.

1. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to

open the Applications & components catalog.
2. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.
3. Double-click Drawing tools to display the Drawing tools toolbar.

4. Click Create moment connection symbols in the Drawing tools

toolbar.
5. Do one of the following:
• To update the moment connection symbols of all parts in the view,
select the view.
• To update the moment connection symbols of selected parts, select
the parts.
6. Click Create.

When you do this, Tekla Structures removes all previously created symbols,
and creates new ones that are up-to-date.

Edit drawings 492 Symbols in drawings

See also
Moment connection symbols in Tekla Structures drawings (Drawing tools)
(page 490)

Delete moment connection symbols (Drawing tools)

You can delete moment connection symbols of all parts in a view or of selected
parts.

1. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to

open the Applications & components catalog.
2. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.
3. Double-click Drawing tools to display the Drawing tools toolbar.

4. Click Create moment connection symbols .

5. Do one of the following:
• To delete the moment connection symbols of all parts in the view,
select the view.
• To delete the moment connection symbols of selected parts, select the
parts.
6. Click Delete.

See also
Moment connection symbols in Tekla Structures drawings (Drawing tools)
(page 490)

Add surfacing symbols in drawings

You can add surfacing symbols in cast unit drawings using the Add surfacing
symbols macro.
Before you start, ensure that you have an object that has surface treatment in
the model, and that you have created a cast unit drawing of that object. Also
check in the cast unit drawing properties that the surface treatment is set to
Visible.
1. Open a drawing that has a part containing surface treatment.

2. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to

open the Applications & components catalog.
3. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.

Edit drawings 493 Symbols in drawings

4. Double-click Add surfacing symbols.

5. In the Create surface symbols dialog box, select the texts that you want
to include in the surface treatment symbol from the Available elements
list and add the texts to the Elements in mark by clicking Add >.
6. Select All Views to include the symbols in all drawing views, or Selected
Views to include the symbols only in the views you select.
7. Change the font settings, if necessary.
8. If you selected Selected Views, select the views where you wish to have
surface treatment symbols.
9. Click Create.
Tekla Structures creates the surface treatment symbols according to the
defined settings. You can change the symbol properties and the text
afterwards in the Text Properties dialog box, which is opened when you
double-click the symbol.

Define a firm folder for images and symbols

You can define a firm folder where Tekla Structures always searches for the
images and symbols. When you store the images and symbols in this folder,
you do not have to move them from folder to folder when you install a new

Edit drawings 494 Symbols in drawings

 version of Tekla Structures. Installing a new version does not replace the files
in the firm folder.
Define the firm folder in the options.ini file under the model folder or
user.ini using the advanced option XS_FIRM.
To define the firm folder for images and symbols in the options.ini file:
1. Modify the options.ini file to include the advanced option
DXK_SYMBOLPATH that points to the firm folder.
The advanced option DXK_SYMBOLPATH may contain multiple paths
separated by semicolons.
Since Tekla Structures version 19.0, the folder path definitions like
%DATADIR% or %XS_FIRM% in DXK_SYMBOLPATH have not converted the
paths correctly when used in options.ini located in the firm folder.
However, these definitions work correctly if used in user.ini. Currently
in options.ini in the firm folder you need to write the absolute paths
for DXK_SYMBOLPATH, like in the example below:
DXK_SYMBOLPATH=C:\ProgramData\Tekla Structures
\2017\Environments\common\symbols\;C:\firm\Symbols\;
2. In Template Editor, click Options --> Preferences --> File Locations and
enter the path to the firm folder also for Symbols, pictures.

See also
Symbols in drawings (page 482)

4.24 Colors in drawings

You have three basic color modes for line colors in drawings: Black and white,
Grayscale, and Color. By default, drawings are black and white.

In addition to the three basic color modes, you can have a black background
and colored lines in drawings (advanced option
XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND).
In addition to the actual colors, you can specify a special color (page 500) that
is not converted to black in printouts.
When you are printing, you can also change the line thicknesses of different
colors. This setting affects printouts but also the line thicknesses in color
drawings on the screen, if you have selected Printer line widths in File menu
--> Settings.

Colors and gray shades

The table below shows the basic colors available in Tekla Structures drawings,
and how the different colors are shown in black and white drawings and in

Edit drawings 495 Colors in drawings

grayscale drawings. The corresponding pen numbers referring to the line
thicknesses used in the printed drawings are listed in the Pen column.
Some of the different gray shades are true colors in the way that they will keep
their color regardless of the drawing color mode, all the way to printing.
You can select the color for a line in part properties and shape properties.

Name Pen Tekla Black and Gray scale Lightness

Structures white
color
Invisible 9 Invisible
Black 7 0%
Red 1 0%
Green 3 0%
Blue 5 0%
Cyan 4 0%
Yellow 2 0%
Magenta 6 0%
Brown 15 30%
Dark green 110 50%
Dark blue 141 70%
Blue-green 111 90%
Orange 31 100% white
Gray 8 60%
Gray 30 251 30%
Gray 50 252 50%
Gray 70 253 70%
Gray 90 254 90%
Special - -

Colors in drawing hatches

You can select the color for a hatch in part and shape properties on the Fill tab
after you have selected a fill type from the Type list.

Edit drawings 496 Colors in drawings

The true gray shades are marked with red in the image below.

Edit drawings 497 Colors in drawings

The gray scale colors (130 - 133) are also available for automatic hatches.

See also
Change drawing color (page 498)
Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer (page 520)

Change drawing color

You can change the color of the drawings.
1. Open a drawing.
2. On the File menu, click Settings and select Black and white, Grayscale
or Color.
You can toggle between the color modes by pressing B on the keyboard.

Example
Below is an example of a color drawing.

Edit drawings 498 Colors in drawings

In grayscale mode, the colors from 1 to 7 (black, red, green, blue, cyan, yellow,
magenta) are shown in black, and the colors from 8 to 14 (brown, dark green,
dark blue, blue-green, orange, gray) are shown in different shades of gray.
Below is an example of a gray scale drawing.

Below is an example of a black-and-white drawing.

Edit drawings 499 Colors in drawings

See also
XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND
Colors in drawings (page 495)

Specify a special color in drawings

You can define a special color that is not converted to black when printed. This
color will be printed as color or grayscale, depending on the selected printer
settings. The special color is defined using RGB (Red Green Blue) values in a
scale of 0 to 255. The special color is applied on parts as a hatch.

You can specify a special color for a building object (part, bolt) before creating
a drawing, and use it in the final drawing for a drawing shape or a building
object.
1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Advanced options and go to the
Hatching category.
2. Define the color using the following advanced options:
• XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
• XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G
• XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B
The default value for all of the above advanced options is 230.
The smaller the values are, the darker the shade.
3. Click OK or Apply.

Edit drawings 500 Colors in drawings

 4. Open a drawing.
5. Double-click a drawing object to open the properties dialog box. For
example, click a building object or a rectangle.
6. Select a fill type.
7. Select the Special fill color.
8. Click Modify.
The object that you selected now uses the color that you specified.

4.25 Reference models in drawings

Reference models can be shown in general arrangement, assembly and cast
unit drawings. For example, you may want to use 3D plant models or
architectural drawings as reference models.

Click the links below to find out more:

Show reference models in drawings (page 501)
Reference models

Show reference models in drawings

You can select whether to show a reference model, and change the reference
model appearance in the drawing view properties in an open drawing. You can
select whether to show the reference model as outlines or as wireframe, set
the hidden lines and own hidden lines options, and define the line color and
type. Reinforcement in reference models is also shown.

The appearance options can also be modified in drawing properties before

you create the drawing, but the visibility options only when a drawing is open.
1. In an open drawing, double-click the drawing view frame to open the
drawing view properties.
In GA drawings, you can also adjust the visibility settings on drawing level
by double-clicking the drawing background.
2. Click Reference object in the options tree.
The Content tab lists all the reference models included in the model.
3. To show a reference model in the drawing, click the row of the reference
model, and in the Visibility column, select Visible.
4. Go to the Appearance tab and select the representation for the reference
model:

Edit drawings 501 Reference models in drawings

 Wireframe: Shows the reference model as a wireframe. To open drawings
quickly, use the wireframe.
Outline: The reference model is drawn in the same way as Tekla
Structures native parts. It shows the reference model outline. With this
option, you have the Hidden lines and Own hidden lines options
available.
Hidden lines: Shows hidden lines in of the reference model that are
hidden by other reference models or parts.
Own hidden lines: Shows the hidden lines in the reference model that
are hidden by the reference model itself.
5. Modify the color and the type of Visible lines and Hidden lines.
6. Click Modify to modify the reference model in the selected view with the
new settings.

You can also change the visibility and appearance settings in an open drawing
by double-clicking the reference model and changing the settings in the
Reference Object Properties dialog.
Note that if you modify the reference model appearance on the object level,
you can no longer modify the appearance on the view level.

Reference model representation examples

Below is an example of the Wireframe representation:

Below is an example of the Outline representation. Hidden lines and Own

hidden lines are set Off:

Edit drawings 502 Reference models in drawings

Below is an example of the Outline representation. Hidden lines is set On,
and shown in red.

Below is an example of the Outline representation. Hidden lines and Own

hidden lines are both set On, and shown in red.

Below is an example of how the parts are shown with reference models.
Reference model visible lines are shown in green, and hidden lines in red. The
part visible lines are shown in blue, and the hidden lines in cyan.

Edit drawings 503 Reference models in drawings

 See also
Reference models in drawings (page 501)

4.26 User coordinate system (UCS)

UCS is a local user coordinate system you can use in a drawing view. It is easier
to position drawing objects in view, when you can place objects relative to a
user-defined point of origin, or a base point, in the drawing view.
Tekla Structures shows the UCS symbol in the current drawing view, when you
create, copy, move, or modify objects.

You can define a different point of origin for the UCS for each drawing view,
and change the UCS point of origin as often as you like.
The following example shows several views, each with their own UCS.

Edit drawings 504 User coordinate system (UCS)

NOTE To position an object using the global coordinate system, you need to
calculate the coordinates of the object from the point of origin of the drawing,
not a drawing view.

Click the following links to find out more:

Add manual dimensions using User Coordinate System (page 174)
Set a new UCS (page 505)
Toggle between two user coordinate systems (page 506)
Reset UCS (page 506)
Keyboard shortcuts

Set a new UCS

You can set a new UCS (user coordinate system) using one point or two points.
1. Open a drawing.
2. On the Views tab, click User coordsys and click one of the following
commands:
• Select Set origin to set the new UCS using one point.
• Select Set origin by two points to set the new UCS using two points.
Tekla Structures displays the UCS symbol with a crosshair marking the
center point.

Edit drawings 505 User coordinate system (UCS)

3. Click the view where you want to place the origin.
4. If you are using two points, pick a point to define the direction of the x
axis.

See also
User coordinate system (UCS) (page 504)
Add manual dimensions using User Coordinate System (page 174)

Toggle between two user coordinate systems

You can toggle between two user coordinate systems that have the same point
of origin: the UCS following the axes of the drawing view and the oriented UCS
you have created.

• To toggle between the coordinate systems, open a drawing, go to the

Views tab and click User coordsys --> Toggle orientation (Ctrl + T).

See also
User coordinate system (UCS) (page 504)

Reset UCS
You can reset the UCS to its original position in the current drawing view or in
all drawing views.

Do one of the following:

To Do this
Reset the UCS in the current drawing In an open drawing, go to the Views
view tab, and click User coordsys --> Reset
current (Ctrl + 1).
Reset the UCS in all drawing views In an open drawing, go to the Views
tab, and click User coordsys --> Reset
all (Ctrl + 0).

See also
User coordinate system (UCS) (page 504)

Edit drawings 506 Save a drawing

4.27 Save a drawing
Tekla Structures automatically saves drawings at set intervals. You can also
save your drawing when ever you want to.

• In the open drawing, go to the File menu and click Save drawing.
Both the drawing *.dg and the model *.db1 and *.db2 are saved. The
drawings are saved in the \drawings folder under the model folder.
For more information about autosave, see Autosave drawings.

See also
Close drawings (page 141)

4.28 Delete unnecessary drawing files in single-user mode

By default all unnecessary drawing files are deleted automatically after seven
days. You can delete all your unnecessary drawing files in the single-user
mode using the Remove unnecessary drawing files command without
waiting for Tekla Structures to automatically remove them.

To delete the files, you need to have full privileges. You can find the Remove
unnecessary drawing files command through Quick Launch.

NOTE If you have worked with the drawings (edited, deleted) after you saved
the last time, remember to save before you use the Remove
unnecessary drawing files command.

1. Search for the command Remove unnecessary drawing files in Quick

Launch.
2. When Tekla Structures finds the command, select it and press Enter.
Tekla Structures deletes all drawings that do not have a corresponding
drawing in the database.

TIP By default, the privileges are full. If you want to restrict the command usage, add
the following line in the privileges.inp file:
action:RemoveUnnecessaryDrawingFiles [who] [access]
[who] is everyone or <Windows_logon_name>, or <domain_name>
[access] can be none/view/full.
In the following example, only the administrator can use the Remove
unnecessary drawing files command:

Edit drawings 507 Delete unnecessary drawing files in single-user

mode
action:RemoveUnnecessaryDrawingFiles everyone none
action:RemoveUnnecessaryDrawingFiles ORGANIZATION\admin full

Edit drawings 508 Delete unnecessary drawing files in single-user

mode
5 Manage drawings

Depending on the workflow phase, you have several tools available for
managing your drawings. You can update drawings when the model changes,
lock drawings, freeze drawings, issue drawings, revise drawings, and delete
drawings.

To Click the link below:

Update saved drawings because of Update drawings when the model
model changes changes (page 509)
Indicate that a drawing is not Lock drawings (page 511)
available for editing by locking it
Select whether to allow Tekla Freeze drawings (page 511)
Structures to update all associative
objects on top of the drawing views
Mark drawings ready for issuing Mark drawings ready for issuing
(page 513)
Mark a drawing issued when it has Issue drawings (page 514)
been released for fabrication
Delete a drawing that you do not Delete drawings (page 518)
need anymore
Revise drawings, and attach Revise drawings (page 515)
information about the changes you
have made

See also
Print drawings (page 519)

5.1 Update drawings when the model changes

Saved drawings need updating because of model changes. Cast-unit,
assembly, single part and multidrawings use position numbers as identifiers.

Manage drawings 509 Update drawings when the model changes

Many changes affect numbering, so many times renumbering is needed.
Before updating drawings you need to ensure that the numbering is correct.

The drawings needing updates are indicated by flags in the Drawing list.
Renumbering model objects after creating drawings may also generate flags.

NOTE • General arrangement drawings do not require model numbering to

be updated. If you use part position numbers in part marks, you
must number the model to get updated marks, because old and
not up-to-date part marks have question marks in them. If you do
not use numbering, you can modify general arrangement drawings
without numbering. Then, for example, profile changes are
highlighted with change symbols.
• When you update multidrawings, also the linked drawings are
updated.

Do the following after changing the model:

1. Check the numbering settings by going to the Drawings & reports tab
and clicking Numbering settings --> Numbering settings .
2. Select Compare to old for both the new and modified parts.
3. Number all model objects that have same numbering series settings on
the Drawings & reports tab by clicking Perform numbering --> Number
series of selected objects, or number only new or modified model
objects by clicking Perform numbering --> Number modified objects .
4. Check the Drawing list for status flags.
5. To find the parts that have been affected, select each drawing marked
with the flag in the Drawing list and click the Select objects button.
Tekla Structures highlights the affected parts in the model.
Do the following:
a. Check the numbering history log for renumbered parts by going to
the File menu and clicking Logs --> Numbering history log .
Part or Assembly at the beginning of a line in the numbering history
log indicates that Tekla Structures has renumbered parts or
assemblies, as in the following example:

Manage drawings 510 Update drawings when the model changes

 b. To find the renumbered parts in the model, select the relevant entries
from the numbering history log. Tekla Structures highlights the
corresponding parts in the model.
6. Select the affected drawings from the Drawing list and click Update.
7. If you have new parts in the model, create drawings for them.

See also
Manage drawings (page 509)
Settings affecting the recreation of drawings (page 41)

5.2 Lock drawings

You can indicate that a drawing is not available for editing by locking it. When a
drawing is locked, it cannot be accidentally modified. The geometry of the
locked drawing still changes when the model changes.

Tekla Structures flags locked drawings for update if the model changes.
1. In the Drawing list, select the drawings you want to lock.
2. Click Lock --> On .
The Locked by column in the Drawing list shows who has locked the
drawing. If you have logged in to your Trimble Identity, your account name
is shown. Otherwise your user name is shown.
3. To unlock the drawings, select the drawings and click Lock --> Off .

See also
Select drawings in the Drawing List (page 135)

5.3 Freeze drawings

You can select whether to allow Tekla Structures to update all associative
objects on top of the drawing views. The geometry of the model is always
updated, but freezing is used to stop the drawing intelligence (associativity) of
drawing objects on top of the model views, and prevent them from being
updated. For example, parts are updated, but dimensions, marks, views, and
drawing shapes are not. Use freezing only to avoid changes in drawings while
updates are made in the model, not just for noting that the drawing has been
edited.

Manage drawings 511 Lock drawings

 To Click the link below
Freeze and unfreeze general Freeze general arrangement drawings
arrangement drawings (page 512)
Freeze and unfreeze single-part, cast Freeze single-part, cast unit and
unit and assembly drawings assembly drawings (page 512)
Find out what happens to the How freezing affects drawings
drawings when they are frozen (page 513)

See also
Select drawings in the Drawing List (page 135)
Update part and weld marks in drawings (page 261)

Freeze general arrangement drawings

1. If you have the GA drawing open, close it without saving it.
2. In the Drawing list, select the drawing you want to freeze.
3. Click Freeze --> On .
4. When freezing is no longer necessary, select the frozen drawings and click
Freeze --> Off .

See also
Freeze drawings (page 511)

Freeze single-part, cast unit and assembly drawings

1. Save the model.
2. Open a drawing.
3. If the drawing does not look the way you want, close it without saving it.
4. Reopen the model. Do not save it.
5. In the Drawing list, select the drawing you want to freeze.
6. Click Freeze --> On .
7. Open the drawing.
8. When freezing is no longer necessary, select the frozen drawings and click
Freeze --> Off .

See also
Freeze drawings (page 511)

Manage drawings 512 Freeze drawings

 How freezing affects drawings (page 513)

How freezing affects drawings

Freezing affects drawings in the following way:
• The associativity does not disappear from a frozen drawing. When you
unfreeze the drawing, the associativity works again.
• Freezing does not have any effect on the cloning result. If you edit the
drawing, it does not matter whether you freeze the drawing before or after
editing it.
• If a drawing is frozen, the associative drawing objects are not updated
when the drawing is updated. This means that the dimensions and views
are not updated, and the marks do not follow the parts if the parts have
been moved.
• If a drawing is frozen, and the part changes in the model, the geometry of
the part is updated in the frozen drawing when the drawing is updated.
• Unfreezing the drawing before cloning does not have any effect on the
cloning result. This means, for example, that it does not matter whether
you keep the drawing frozen all the time or temporarily unfreeze it before
cloning.
• If you unfreeze a drawing before update, the drawing is updated normally.

See also
Freeze drawings (page 511)

5.4 Mark drawings ready for issuing

When a drawing is ready to be released for fabrication, you can mark it ready
for issuing by using the option Ready for issuing in the Drawing list. When
there are changes in the model, the geometry of the drawings marked ready
for issuing is updated. You can also edit the marked drawings just like any
other drawings.
1. In the Drawing list, select the drawings to be marked ready for issuing.
2. Select Ready for issuing > On.
You can also select this command from the pop-up menu.
The drawings are marked ready for issuing, and flagged with a green check
mark

Manage drawings 513 Mark drawings ready for issuing

 in the Ready for issuing column in the Drawing list. You can check who
marked the drawing from the Ready for issuing by column.

TIP You can also mark a drawing ready for issuing by selecting the Mark
drawing ready for issuing check box in the save confirmation message
box, which appears when you close an unsaved drawing.

You can add in your reports the information whether the drawing is marked
ready for issuing, and who has marked it using the template attributes
IS_READY_FOR_ISSUE and READY_FOR_ISSUE_BY

5.5 Issue drawings

When a drawing has been released for fabrication, it should be marked as
issued in the Drawing list. The geometry of the issued drawings is updated
when the model changes. Issuing only prevents the recreation of the drawing
during update.

The issuing information can be used to filter what is shown in the Drawing list
and in templates.
1. In Drawing list, select the drawings to be issued.
2. Select Issue --> On .

Tekla Structures marks the issued drawings with a flag

When an issued drawing has been edited or otherwise changed, the color
of the flag changes and the text Issued drawing changed is
displayed.

TIP To show the issue date in a report, add the template field DATE_ISSUE in the
appropriate report template.

See also
Manage drawings (page 509)
Select drawings in the Drawing List (page 135)

Manage drawings 514 Issue drawings

5.6 Revise drawings
When revising drawings, you can attach information about the revision
changes. Tekla Structures displays this information alongside the revision
number or mark. The revision date appears in the revision table. The revision
number or mark is shown in the Drawing list, and the revision information
can be included in reports. You can also add manual revision marks in an open
drawing.

TIP One example of the report using revision information is

drawing_issue_rev.xsr, which shows the most recent revision dates of
drawings.

To Click the link below

Create revisions to follow the Create drawing revisions (page 515)
changes in the drawing, and show
the revision information in the
Drawing list and reports
Change revision information Change drawing revisions (page 516)
afterwards
Delete unnecessary revisions Delete drawing revisions (page 516)
Add revision marks manually in an Add revision marks in drawings
open drawing (page 279)

Create drawing revisions

You can create revisions to follow the changes in the drawing using the
Revision command in the Drawing list.
1. In the Drawing list, select the drawings to revise.
2. Click Revision....
The Revision Handling dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter a mark in the Mark box.
Marks can be numerical or alphabetical such as 1, 2, 3… or A, B, C…
4. Fill in the Created by information and select the creation date from the
calendar that is displayed when you click the down-arrow next to the Date
option.
5. If you need to give information about who checked and approved the
drawing, enter the information in the corresponding boxes and select the
appropriate dates.
6. Enter a revision description in the Description box.

Manage drawings 515 Revise drawings

7. Enter delivery information in the Delivery box.
8. Enter any additional information in the Info 1 and Info 2 boxes.
9. Click Create.

The revision number or mark is now displayed in the Drawing list. When you
open the drawing, you can see the revision information in the revision table if
there is one in the drawing.

TIP Each drawing has its own unique revision number, but several drawings can
share the same revision mark, date, and other information. To attach the same
revision information to several drawings simultaneously, select multiple
drawings from the drawing list and then click the Revision... button.
To show the revision mark instead of the revision number in the Drawing list,
set the advanced option XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST to
TRUE.

See also
Revise drawings (page 515)
Attributes used in drawing revisioning (page 517)

Change drawing revisions

You can change revision information in an existing revision.
1. Open the Drawing list and select a revised drawing.
2. Click Revision....
3. In the Revision Handling dialog box, select the number of the revision
that you want to change from the Rev.No. list.
4. Change the revision information as required.
5. Click Modify.
6. Close the Revision Handling dialog box.

See also
Manage drawings (page 509)
Attributes used in drawing revisioning (page 517)

Delete drawing revisions

You can delete unnecessary drawing revisions.
1. Open the Drawing list, and select a revised drawing.
2. Click Revision....

Manage drawings 516 Revise drawings

3. In the Revision Handling dialog box, select the revision number from the
list next to the Mark box.
4. Click Delete.
When you delete a revision, Tekla Structures automatically adjusts the
remaining revision numbers for that drawing. The revision marks remain
the change.

See also
Manage drawings (page 509)

Attributes used in drawing revisioning

Drawing revisioning attributes can be included in drawing templates and
report templates.

All revisioning attributes and the corresponding options in the Revision

Handling dialog box are listed below.

Revision handling attribute Option in the Revision Handling

dialog box
MARK The revision mark in the Mark box.
NUMBER The revision number in Rev.No.
CREATED_BY The Created by information of the
revision.
DATE_CREATE Date next to Created by.
CHECKED_BY The Checked by information of the
revision.
DATE_CHECKED Date next to Checked by.
APPROVED_BY The Approved by information of the
revision.
DELIVERY The Delivery information of the
revision.
DESCRIPTION The revision Description.
DATE_APPROVED Date next to Approved by.
INFO1 The Info 1 text of the revision.
INFO2 The Info 2 text of the revision.
LAST The revision number of the latest
revision in Rev.No..
LAST_CREATED_BY The Created by information of the
latest revision.
LAST_CHECKED_BY The Checked by information of the
latest revision.

Manage drawings 517 Revise drawings

 Revision handling attribute Option in the Revision Handling
dialog box
LAST_DATE_CHECKED The Checked by Date of the latest
revision.
LAST_DATE_APPROVED The approval Date of the latest
revision.
LAST_DELIVERY The Delivery information of the latest
revision
LAST_MARK The revision mark of the latest
revision in the Mark box.
LAST_DESCRIPTION The Description of the latest revision.
LAST_DATE_CREATE The Created by date of the latest
revision.
LAST_APPROVED_BY The Approved by information of the
latest delivery.
LAST_INFO1 The Info 1 text of the latest revision.
LAST_INFO2 The Info 2 text of the latest revision.

See also
Create drawing revisions (page 515)

5.7 Delete drawings

If some drawings become unnecessary, you can delete them from the
Drawing list. This also deletes the .dg files from the \drawings folder.

NOTE In some configurations, deleting drawings from the Drawing list is not
allowed.

1. In the Drawing list, select the drawings you want to delete.

2. Click Delete.
3. When Tekla Structures asks you to confirm the deletion, select Yes.

TIP If you press down Shift while you click Delete, Tekla Structures will not ask you
to confirm the deletion.

See also
Manage drawings (page 509)
Select drawings in the Drawing List (page 135)

Manage drawings 518 Delete drawings

6 Print drawings

You can print drawings as PDF files, save them as plot files (.plt) for printing
with printer/plotter, or print them on a selected printer. You can also change
the line thickness of different colors. Tekla Structures provides a real-time
preview of drawings in the Print Drawings dialog box.

Limitations in printing
• You cannot print to several paper sizes at the same time using the Print
Drawings dialog box. To print to several paper sizes, you need to modify
the drawingsizes.dat (page 531) file.
• Drawings in previews are in color even if you select Grayscale or Black and
white through File menu --> Settings).

Print drawings 519 Delete drawings

 • In an open drawing, you can only preview and print that drawing. Having a
drawing open, and you open another drawing (for example, by double-
clicking another drawing in the Drawing list), the preview may not be
updated. Select the drawing again (single-click) in the Drawing list and the
preview is then updated to match the selection.

NOTE You can also use the so called "old" printing functionality where you
use the Printer Catalog dialog box and Tekla Structures printer
instances. To do this, see Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer
instances (old printing) (page 537).

See also
Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer (page 520)
Add frames and fold marks in printouts (page 532)
Configuration files used in printing (page 531)
Customize print output file names (page 534)
Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer instances (old printing)
(page 537)

6.1 Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer

You can print drawings and selected drawing areas to .pdf files, plot files (.plt)
to be sent to a plotter/printer, or to a printer. You can also change the colors
and the related line thicknesses (pen numbers) in the printed drawings.
1. On the File menu, click Printing --> Print drawings .
2. Load the desired printing settings from the settings list in the upper-left
corner.
You can also give the settings a new name. In this case, you need to give
the new name before you modify any settings, otherwise your changes
will be lost. For more information about the printing settings, see Printing
settings and search order (page 530).
3. On the displayed Drawing list, select the drawings that you want to print.
Any out-of-date drawings are detected and you are asked whether to
include them in the output or not.
You can also print locked drawings that are up to date. If a locked drawing
is not up to date, you cannot open or print it, and a failed printout will be
reported. You can print any unlocked drawing unless the status of the
drawing is Original part deleted.
4. To show a preview of a drawing, select it from the list of drawings at the
top of the Print Drawings dialog box, and click Click here to load a
preview.

Print drawings 520 Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer
 The drawings are shown one by one in a preview. The preview shows the
drawings always up to date. Use Next and Previous to scroll through the
set of selected drawings.

5. Select the printing option:

• PDF file: Converts drawings to PDF format.
• Printer: Sends the drawings to the selected printer.
• Plot file: Converts drawings to print files in a format suitable for the
selected printer and saves them in a specified location.
6. Define the printing settings on the Options tab. The available settings
depend on the printing option that you have selected:

Option Description
File location Enter the location for the .pdf or plot file, or use
Browse... to browse for the folder.
The \Plotfiles folder under the model folder is
the default value.
Open folder when Open the .pdf or plot file folder in Windows
finished Explorer after the printout has been created.
Open folder when Open the .pdf file after it has been created.
finished

Print drawings 521 Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer
 Option Description
Output to single file Print the selected drawings to a single .pdf file.
If you do not select this option, each drawing will
be printed in a .pdf file of its own.
File name Give a file name to a pdf file. The file name is
compulsory if you are printing to a single file.
File extension Specify a file name extension for the plot file. The
default is plt.
File prefix Enter a specific prefix and/or suffix in the file
name.
File suffix
When you enter a prefix or suffix, the print file
name preview under the File prefix and File suffix
boxes will reflect the change immediately.

The print file name can also be controlled by a

couple of advanced option switches for
customizing print file names (page 534). These
switches do not work for single combined multiple
drawings .pdf file.
Fit to paper Fit the drawing to a specific paper size.
Scale Force the printout to a specific scale.
The Scale value will turn red if the drawing cannot
fit on the specified sheet.
Center drawing on Center the drawing on the sheet (or sheets).
paper
Print on multiple Print on multiple sheets and specify the direction
sheets of printing the sheets. Select either Left to right,
top to bottom or Bottom to top, right to left.
When you use Print on multiple sheets, select a
particular paper size.
Paper size Define the paper size or use automatic size.
With the Auto setting Tekla Structures selects the
paper size that has the least wasted area when the
scaled print is fitted to the printable area on the
sheet.
Printers are often unable to print on the full area of
a sheet, and leave borders. The printable area is
determined for the selected printer when the
option Printer or Plot file is selected. For .pdf

Print drawings 522 Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer
 Option Description
files, the printer is not known so the output is sized
to the full sheet. However, when printing a .pdf,
the same problem exists and the drawing content
is fitted to the printable area of whatever printer is
being used. The printable area is shown with white
background and the non-printable border is
shaded gray in the image below.

Orientation Define the orientation or use automatic

orientation.
The Auto setting means that the orientation that
wastes least space is selected automatically.
Color Select if the output is to be Color, Black and white
or Grayscale.
Number of copies Define the number of plot file or paper copies to
be printed.
Collate Collate the printout when you are printing multiple
copies.
Embed fonts Embed the fonts in a .pdf file.
This ensures that fonts may be reproduced in a
system that does not have the same fonts
installed, but this also increases the file size. In
certain cases, fonts may be embedded
automatically. When using non-Latin fonts, it is
recommended that embedding is selected,
otherwise the .pdf may not be displayed correctly.
Select area Select a rectangular area from an open drawing to
only show and print that area. This option only
works when you have a drawing open.
All settings in the dialog box also work when this
option is selected, and you can change the
orientation, line thicknesses, and paper size, for
example.

Print drawings 523 Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer
 Option Description
Show entire drawing When you have selected an area with Select area,
the Show entire drawing button is displayed, and
you can use it to show the entire drawing in the
preview again.
7. Go to the Line properties tab to map colors to line thicknesses (pen
numbers) and set the printout colors:

Option Description
Object color Shows the basic set of object colors.
Color on output • Set the printout color by clicking a color box
under Color on output and selecting a new
color from the displayed colors. You can also
define custom colors.

Different output color is often used when you just

need one or two lines in color and the rest in black.
Output colors are used in all printing options
(printer, plot file and PDF file). The output colors
are saved to and loaded from the printing settings
files.

Print drawings 524 Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer
 Option Description
The Color on output only applies when the Color
option is set to Color on the Options tab in the
Print Drawings dialog box.
For instructions on how to show correct line
thicknesses in the Black and white mode, see Line
thickness in drawings (page 527).
Line thickness • Enter the line thickness for each color in the
boxes.
Line thicknesses are expressed as a multiple of the
advanced option XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH value. The
default value for this advanced option is 0.01 mm.
For example, pen number 25 will give a line weight
of 0.25 mm.
In color drawings, the lines are shown with
different thicknesses if the Printer line widths
setting is selected in File menu --> Settings.
You can define Invisible color for parts and shapes
in drawings in the part or shape properties. The
Invisible color is not shown in printouts, neither
on paper nor on .pdf.
For instructions on how to show correct line
thicknesses in the drawing in the Black and white
mode, see Line thickness in drawings (page 527).
Reset colors You can reset the printout colors:
• To reset an individual output color, click the
corresponding Object color color box. The
Color on output color box will change to have
the same color.

• To reset all output colors to be the same as the

object colors, click the Reset colors button.
8. If you need to change Windows printing settings for a printer or for a plot
file, click the Properties... button and change the necessary settings.
9. Save your printing settings by using the Save button in the upper-left
corner.
For more information about the printing settings and the search order,
see Printing settings and search order (page 530).

Print drawings 525 Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer
10. Click Print to print the drawings in .pdf format or as plot files, or to send
them to a printer according to the settings you defined in the dialog box.
Each drawing is sent to the printer as a separate print job.
All printing errors are written to a log file in the model folder: logs
\DPMPrinter_<username>.log .

Example: Printing to multiple sheets

In the example below the setting Bottom to top, right to left is selected. The
numbers indicate the printing order of the sheets.

In the next example, the option Left to right, top to bottom is selected.

Print drawings 526 Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer
See also
Print drawings (page 519)
Customize print output file names (page 534)
Configuration files used in printing (page 531)
Printing settings and search order (page 530)
Line thickness in drawings (page 527)

Line thickness in drawings

You can set the printer line thickness (pen number) in the Print drawings
dialog box, but you may have some challenges in showing the lines correctly in
the drawing on screen. You can solve this issue by adjusting the printer line
widths or by using some predefined printer settings in printer definition file
plotdev.bin.

Change line thickness (pen width/pen number/line width) for printed

drawings
You can change the line width for printing. To do this, open the Print
drawings dialog box and go to the Line properties tab:

Print drawings 527 Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer
The base line width is 0.01, and this can be changed using the advanced
option XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH. For example, to get the line thickness of 0.25
mm, enter the number 25.

Set the line thickness shown on the screen

The line thickness that you see in the drawing is not the real line thickness that
you get in the printed drawing. There is a way to affect how the lines are
shown in the drawing.
To be able to set the pen width for the drawings in a Tekla Structures model:
1. Take old printing into use by setting the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE.
2. Define the line settings for the first printer in the list.

Print drawings 528 Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer
3. Take new printing into use by setting the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to FALSE.
4. Go to the File menu and check if the switch Printer line widths is active
or not. This switch takes the settings from the old printer dialog settings. If
the switch is not active, the line widths are only shown in black and white
mode, if active, the line widths are shown for all color modes.
You can toggle between color modes by pressing B.
The file plotdev.bin in ..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>
\environments\default\system contains some predefined line
thicknesses for the first printer instance. These are not the same that you use
for printing, unless you use defaults in the Print drawings dialog box.
You can save printer definitions file plotdev.bin in the current model folder
or in the project and firm folders, and in a folder indicated by the advanced
option XS_DRIVE. Tekla Structures searches first for plotdev.bin in the
model, project and firm folders, then in the folder indicated by the advanced
option.

Without line thickness (pen With settings for line

number) set up in weight for the first printer
plotdev.bin in plotdev.bin
Color

Print drawings 529 Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer
 Grayscale

Black and
white

See also
Change the pen numbers (line thickness) for colors (page 559)

6.2 Printing settings and search order

Tekla Structures printing settings in the Print Drawings dialog box are stored
in two files: <user>_ PdfPrintOptions.xml and PdfPrintOptions.xml.
When you open a new model, the PdfPrintOptions.xml file is loaded. The
changes that you make in printing settings are automatically saved in <user>_
PdfPrintOptions.xml, and settings in this file are loaded when you re-open
the model. The PDF report options are read from settings files with the name
report.PdfPrintOptions.xml (in the printing dialog box, this settings file is
shown as report).

You can create printing settings files for different printing purposes and load
them later on. You can also create and share common settings throughout an
organization.
You can load existing printing settings or save the current printing settings to
either an existing printing settings file or a new file. The first settings file name
in the control list will be standard and any other settings file names will be
listed alphabetically after this. The latest settings used are automatically saved
to <model>\attributes\<user>_PdfPrintOptions.xml (where <user> is
the current Windows user when the dialog box is closed. The printing settings
that you save using the Save button are saved to the <model>\attributes\
folder with the following names:
• The standard file is saved as PdfPrintOptions.xml .
• The report file is saved as report.PdfPrintOptions.xml.
• All other printing settings names have the filename
<SettingsName>.PdfPrintOptions.xml. For example, if you use the

Print drawings 530 Printing settings and search order

 name MyPrintingSettings, the settings will be saved as
MyPrintingSettings.PdfPrintOptions.xml.
• If a file already exists it will be overwritten.
• You can move the saved printing settings files to the following locations so
that other models and/or other users can access the settings:
• XS_PROJECT
• XS_FIRM
• XS_DRIVER
• XS_SYSTEM
• XS_USER_SETTINGS_DIRECTORY
• When you open the dialog box, Tekla Structures searches the above
locations in the listed order for any available settings files and adds them
to the setting list.
• It will load the settings from the first of the following settings files it finds:
• <model>\attributes\<user>_PdfPrintOptions.xml
• <model>\attributes\PdfPrintOptions.xml
• PdfPrintOptions.xml from the standard search locations listed
above.

See also
Print drawings (page 519)

6.3 Configuration files used in printing

In printing, two configuration files are needed. They affect paper sizes and
drawing sizes: PaperSizesForDrawings.dat and DrawingSizes.dat.

• PaperSizesForDrawings.dat defines a list of paper size names allowed

to be used, and their dimensions. The PaperSizesForDrawings.dat file
is by default located in the ..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures
\<version>\environments\common\system folder.
• DrawingSizes.dat provides a list of properties that should be set up to
match the drawing sizes configured in the Tekla Structures drawing layout
definitions. It is used to link those drawings to the paper size name that
each drawing was set up for, and provides information about the drawing
sizes and the margins around them. The DrawingSizes.dat file is located
in the \system folder in the common, UK, Germany, US imperial and US
metric environments.

Print drawings 531 Configuration files used in printing

 Default values are provided in the files installed with the printing functionality.
These values are appropriate in most cases. The optimum values depend on
the details of the existing drawing layout definitions. If the printed area of the
drawing needs to be moved, or if inappropriate paper sizes are selected, see
instructions for adjusting values in these two files.
Make copies of the original configuration files if you want to modify the
settings, and place the copies in appropriate folders. You may have several
copies of the configuration files on your computer. When needed, these files
are searched for and the first one found is used in the following search order:
• model folder
• project folder as defined by the XS_PROJECT advanced option
• firm folder as defined by the XS_FIRM advanced option
• system folder as defined by the XS_SYSTEM advanced option
If no files are found default values will be used.

TIP When making copies of the configuration files, keep them first in a test
model folder. Validate the results before using them through the project,
firm or environment folders. Also, keep backup copies of the
configuration files in a safe location as re-installing later versions of Tekla
Structures may overwrite your own settings.

See also
Print drawings (page 519)
Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer (page 520)

6.4 Add frames and fold marks in printouts

You can add frames and fold marks in printed drawings. Fold marks indicate
the locations where the printouts should be folded. You can select a color for
the frames and fold marks.

Drawing frames and fold marks are controlled in the standard.fms file under
the \system folder. There is no saving option in the Drawing Frame
Properties dialog box, which is why the default values are located in a
standard file. You can save the standard file in the model folder, and then copy
it to the project or firm folders, if needed. If you want to save a set of standard
files in the model folder, see Standard files.
1. Start typing Drawing frames and foldmarks in the Quick Launch box
in the upper-right corner of the Tekla Structures main window, and select
it from the displayed list.
2. In the Drawing Frame Properties dialog box, select the check boxes of
the frames you want to print.

Print drawings 532 Add frames and fold marks in printouts

3. In Margins, enter in millimeters the distance between each frame and the
left, right, bottom, and top edge of the paper.
4. Select a color for each frame.
5. To print the fold marks, select the Foldmarks check box.
6. Enter in millimeters the horizontal and vertical distances of the first fold
marks from the lower right corner of the outer frame, and between the
other fold mark.
7. Select a color for the fold marks.
8. Click OK.

Below is an example of the properties dialog box contents and the standard
file.

Print drawings 533 Add frames and fold marks in printouts

 NOTE There is a fixed distance value of 5 mm in drawing frame margins. Thus, if you
want to use a drawing frame margin with a drawing title that sticks to the
frame corner, you need to change not only the drawing frame margin in the
Drawing Frame Properties dialog box, but also the Vector between corners
in the Tables dialog box ( Drawings & reports --> Drawing properties -->
Drawing layout --> Table layout... --> Tables... ).

See also
Print to a .pdf file, plot file (.plt) or printer (page 520)

6.5 Customize print output file names

You can affect the way Tekla Structures automatically names the .pdf files and
plot files by using certain drawing-type-specific advanced options.
1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Advanced options and go to the
Printing category.
2. Enter values for any or all of the advanced options
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A, XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W,
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G, XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M, or
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C.
The letter at the end indicates the drawing type. You can also combine
several values. The values are not case sensitive.
3. Click OK.
Example:
Use single % around the values. The example below results in the following
assembly drawing .pdf name: E_P1_PLATE_Revision=2.pdf:
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A=E_%NAME.%_%TITLE%%REV?
_Revision=%%REV%.pdf

Possible values

Value Example of Description

the result
%NAME% P_1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position,
%DRAWING_NAME% using the file name format
prefix_number.
%NAME.-% P-1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position,
%DRAWING_NAME.-% using the file name format
prefix-number.

Print drawings 534 Customize print output file names

 Value Example of Description
the result
%NAME.% P1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position,
%DRAWING_NAME.% using the file name format
prefixnumber.
%REV% 2 Drawing revision number.
%REVISION%
%DRAWING_REVISION%
%REV_MARK% B Drawing revision mark.
%REVISION_MARK%
%DRAWING_REVISION_M
ARK%
%TITLE% PLATE Drawing name from the drawing
%DRAWING_TITLE% properties dialog box.

%UDA:<drawing user- Painted Value of a user-defined drawing

defined attribute>% attribute. The user-defined drawing
attributes are defined in
objects.inp. The actual values for
the user-defined attributes are
entered in the drawing-specific
user-defined attributes dialog box.
%REV? - <text>% 2 - Rev Adds conditional prefixes. In this
example, if REV exists, Tekla
Structures adds the text between ?
and % to the filename.
%TPL:<template Base plate You can use template attributes
attribute>% that can be found in Template
Editor. The actual values for these
attributes are entered in the
drawing properties dialog box.
Examples:
• %TPL:TITLE1%
• %TPL:TITLE2%
• %TPL:TITLE3%
• %TPL:DR_DEFAULT_HOLE_SIZE
%
• %TPL:DATE%
• %TPL:TIME%
• %TPL:DR_DEFAULT_WELD_SIZE
%

Print drawings 535 Customize print output file names

NOTE The print output file name switches %DRAWING_NAME% and %NAME% that
should produce an underscore in the print file name (P_1) do not work if
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING does not use a
separator between the values (for example, %ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%
%ASSEMBLY_POS%), or if XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR is set.
To make the switches work, do the following:
• If you want to useXS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING ,
use a dot (.) slash (/) or hyphen (-) between the values, for example,
%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%.%ASSEMBLY_POS%, or similar.
• Leave XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR empty.

Print drawings 536 Customize print output file names

7 Print drawings using Printer
Catalog printer instances (old
printing)

You can also use Tekla Structures own Printer Catalog printer instances for
printing drawings. To do this, you need to set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 537 Customize print output file names
instances (old printing)
 Setting XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE takes the Printer Catalog dialog
box in use, and printer instances need to be set.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 538 Customize print output file names
instances (old printing)
 Setting up printers in the Microsoft Windows environment is not covered in
this documentation. It is assumed that printers are set up and tested in your
environment. For further information about on setting up printers, contact
your system administrator.
If you prefer to print using the "new" printing functionality, see Print to a .pdf
file, plot file (.plt) or printer (page 520).
Click the links below to find out more:
• Print single drawings (page 539)
• Print multiple drawings with different sizes in one go (page 542)
• Create .pdf files (page 543)
• Print to file (page 544)
• Print to multiple sheets (page 548)
• Frames and fold marks in drawings (page 551)
• Set up printer instances in Printer Catalog (page 554)
• Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box (page 549)
• Printing tips (page 560)

7.1 Print single drawings

The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing.
Before you print the drawing, check that the printer instance settings are
correct and the layout contains the correct drawing size settings.
1. Open a drawing.
2. On the File menu, click Print drawing.
3. In the Print Drawings dialog box, select the printer instance you want to
use.
4. If needed, modify the printing settings and add frames and fold marks in
the printout.
5. Click Print.

TIP Shortcut for opening the Print Drawings dialog box: Shift+P.

Examples
To see some examples of printing single drawings, click the links below:

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 539 Print single drawings
instances (old printing)
 Example: Print on A4 in landscape (page 540)
Example: Print on A3 in portrait (page 541)
Example: Print A3 drawing on A4 paper (page 542)

See also
Frames and fold marks in drawings (page 551)
Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer instances (old printing) (page 537)
Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box (page 549)
Set up printer instances in Printer Catalog (page 554)

Example: Print on A4 in landscape

The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing.
This example describes how you can print on A4 paper in landscape style in
black and white.

NOTE In this example, it is assumed that the print area h*b is defined h
being along the longer side of the paper and b being along the shorter
side of the paper. When using some other printer driver you might
have to change h*b values if you find out that the printer driver uses h
along the short side of the paper.

1. Open a drawing and double-click the drawing background.

2. In drawing properties dialog box, click layout.
3. Define the following settings:
• Set Size definition mode to Specified size.
• Set Drawing size to 287 * 200.
• You can also use Autosize. Then you need to make sure that you have
defined appropriate Fixed sizes or Calculated sizes.
4. Click Modify and OK.
5. On the File menu, click Print drawing.
6. In the Print Drawings dialog box, click the printer instance you want to
use.
7. Click Add / Edit... and check that the printer settings are correct:
• Paper size: A4 210 x 297 mm

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 540 Print single drawings
instances (old printing)
 • Print area h*b: 287 x 200
• Color: Black/white
8. Click Update.
9. Click OK.
10. Set Scaling to Scale and enter 1.
In this case, also Scaling setting Auto would produce a similar printout
because drawing size and h*b are the same.
11. Set Orientation to Landscape (or Auto).
12. Set Print area to Entire drawing.
13. Click Print.

Example: Print on A3 in portrait

The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing.
This example describes how you can print on A3 paper in portrait style in black
and white.
1. Open a drawing and double-click the background.
2. In drawing properties dialog box, click layout.
3. Define the following settings:
• Set Size definition mode to Specified size .
• Set Drawing size to 287 * 410.
• You can also use Autosize. Then you need to make sure that you have
defined appropriate Fixed sizes or Calculated sizes.
4. Click Modify and OK.
5. On the File menu, click Print drawing.
6. In thePrint Drawings dialog box, click the printer instance you want to
use.
7. Click Add / Edit... and check that the printer settings are correct:
• Paper size: A3 297 x 420 mm.
• Print area h*b: 410 x 287
• Color: Black/white
8. Click Update.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 541 Print single drawings
instances (old printing)
 9. Click OK.
10. Set Scaling to Scale and enter 1.
11. Set Orientation to Portrait (or Auto).
12. Set Print area to Entire drawing.
13. Click Print.

Example: Print A3 drawing on A4 paper

The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing.
This example describes how you can print an A3 drawing on A4 paper. This is
useful, for example, when you need draft drawings that do not have to show
the correct scale.
1. Open the A3 drawing.
2. On the File menu, click Print drawing.
3. In the Print Drawings dialog box, click the printer instance that you want
to use.
4. Click Add / Edit..., click the printer instance that you are going to use and
ensure that:
• It prints to A4 paper.
• The Print area h*b value takes into account the printer hard margins.
In this case, the Print area h*b could be 287*200.
5. If you changed any settings, click Update and OK.
If you did not change any settings in the Printer Catalog, click OK to
return to the Print Drawings dialog box.
6. Set Scaling to Auto.
When you use Auto, and the drawing is bigger than the paper, the
drawing is scaled down to fit the paper.
7. Click PrintPrint.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 542 Print multiple drawings with different sizes in one
instances (old printing) go
 7.2 Print multiple drawings with different sizes in one go
You can print multiple drawings from the Drawing list, and print drawings of
different sizes at the same time.

The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing.
1. In the Drawing list, select the drawings you want to print.
2. Right-click the selected drawings and select Print Drawings...
3. In the Print Drawings dialog box, indicate the printer instances you want
to use.
To select several printer instances, hold down Ctrl and select the printers.
When you select drawings of several sizes and several printer instances,
Tekla Structures sends each drawing to the printer instance that is using
the smallest paper size on which the drawing will fit. For example, if you
have two printer instances selected, one A4 and one A3, Tekla Structures
will send A4 drawings to the A4 printer instance and A3 to the A3 printer
instance.
4. Set Scale to 1.
This makes it possible for Tekla Structures to select and use the printer
instance that is using the correct paper size.
5. If necessary, modify other printing settings and add frames and fold
marks in the printout.
6. Click Print.

See also
Set up printer instances in Printer Catalog (page 554)
Frames and fold marks in drawings (page 551)
Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer instances (old printing) (page 537)
Print single drawings (page 539)

7.3 Create .pdf files

You can use any standard pdf printer to create .pdf files, such as pdfFactory,
Win2PDF, or Adobe Acrobat. You can print several drawings at a time, and use
several printer instances.

The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 543 Create .pdf files
instances (old printing)
 XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing.
Before you start creating .pdf files using Adobe Acrobat, ensure that you have
Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Distiller installed and configured with the Adobe
Postscript Printer Driver set up to print to file. Consult your Adobe
documentation for more information.
Also ensure that you have an Adobe postscript printer instance in the Tekla
Structures printer catalog.
1. In the Drawing list, select the drawings of which you want to create .pdf
files.
2. Right-click the selected drawings and select Print Drawings....
3. In Print Drawings dialog box, select the pdf printer instances you want to
use.
If you select several printer instances, Tekla Structures sends each
drawing to the printer instance that is using the smallest paper size on
which the drawing will fit. For example, if you have two printer instances
selected, one A4 and one A3, Tekla Structures will send A4 drawings to the
A4 printer instance and A3 to the A3 printer instance.
4. If needed, modify the printing settings and add frames and fold marks in
the PDF.
5. Click Print.
Tekla Structures creates the .pdf files and saves them in the folder that
you specified when you defined the printer instance. The file will have the
name shown in the Drawing list with the extension ps.

Limitations
Do not use the Print to file option when you create .pdf files.

See also
Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box (page 549)
Add an Adobe postscript printer instance (page 556)
Frames and fold marks in drawings (page 551)
Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer instances (old printing) (page 537)

7.4 Print to file

You can print to a file using a print-to-file printer instance. The file is by default
printed to the \Plotfiles folder under model folder, but you can change the
folder.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 544 Print to file

instances (old printing)
 The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing.
Before you start, make sure you have a printer instance set up to print to file.
1. In the Drawing list, select all the drawings that you want to print.
2. Right-click the selected drawings and select Print Drawings...
3. Click a printer instance that is set up to print to file.
4. Select the Print to file check box.
Specify the folder. You can use the folder specified during printer instance
setup or click Browse... to locate the destination folder in the Browse For
Folder dialog box.
If you do not enter a folder, Tekla Structures creates the files in the
current model folder or in the folder defined by the advanced option
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY.
5. If needed, modify other printing settings and add frames and fold marks
in the printout.
6. Click Print.

Tekla Structures prints the selected drawings to files in the specified folder
using the drawing names.

See also
Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box (page 549)
Add a print-to-file instance (page 555)
Frames and fold marks in drawings (page 551)
Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer instances (old printing) (page 537)

7.5 Customize print file names

By default, Tekla Structures uses the drawing names as print file names. You
can customize these file names using an advanced option indicating the
drawing type, and entering switches defining the format of the print file name
as a value.
To customize the filenames:
1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Advanced options and go to the
Printing category.
2. Enter switches for the advanced options
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A, XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W,

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 545 Customize print file names
instances (old printing)
 XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G, XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M,
and XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C
You can also combine several switches. The switches are not case
sensitive.
3. Click OK.

Example
The example below results in the filename E_P1_PLATE_Revision=2.dxf:
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A=E_%NAME.%_%TITLE%%REV?_Revision=%
%REV%.dxf

See also
Switches for customizing print file names (page 546)

Switches for customizing print file names

Use the following switches when you want to customize the print file name
format. If you are defining these in an .ini file, use double %%. Use single %
in the Advanced Options dialog box.

Switch Example of the Description

result
%NAME% P_1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position,
%DRAWING_NAME% using the filename format
prefix_number.
%NAME.-% P-1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position,
%DRAWING_NAME.-% using the filename format prefix-
number.
%NAME.% P1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position,
%DRAWING_NAME.% using the filename format
prefixnumber.
%REV% 2 Drawing revision number, if Include
%REVISION% revision mark to file name is
checked in the Print Drawings dialog
%DRAWING_REVISION% box.
%REV_MARK% B Drawing revision mark, if Include
%REVISION_MARK% revision mark to file name is
checked in the Print Drawings dialog
%DRAWING_REVISION_ box.
MARK%
%TITLE% PLATE Drawing name from the drawing
%DRAWING_TITLE% properties dialog box.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 546 Customize print file names
instances (old printing)
 Switch Example of the Description
result
%UDA:<drawing Painted Value of a drawing user-defined
user-defined attribute. The drawing user-defined
attribute>% attributes are defined in
objects.inp. The actual values for
the user-defined attributes are
entered in the drawing-specific user-
defined attributes dialog box.
%REV? - <text>% 2 - Rev Adds conditional prefixes. In this
example, if REV exists, Tekla
Structures adds the text between ?
and % to the filename.
%TPL:<template Base plate You can use here template attributes
attribute>% that can be found in Template Editor.
The actual values for these attributes
are entered in the drawing properties
dialog box. Examples:
• %TPL:TITLE1%
• %TPL:TITLE2%
• %TPL:TITLE3%
• %TPL:DR_DEFAULT_HOLE_SIZE%
• %TPL:DATE%
• %TPL:TIME%
• %TPL:DR_DEFAULT_WELD_SIZE%

NOTE The print output file name switches %DRAWING_NAME% and %NAME%
that should produce an underscore in the print file name (P_1) do not
work if XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING does not
use a separator between the values (for example, %ASSEMBLY_PREFIX
%%ASSEMBLY_POS%), or if XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR is set.
To make the switches work, do the following:
• If you want to use
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING, use a dot (.)
slash (/) or hyphen (-) between the values, for example,
%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%.%ASSEMBLY_POS%, or similar.
• Leave XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR empty.

See also
Customize print file names (page 545)
Objects.inp properties

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 547 Customize print file names
instances (old printing)
 Template Attributes Reference Guide
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G

7.6 Print to multiple sheets

If your drawing is very large, you can print it on multiple sheets. With correct
scaling settings, Tekla Structures automatically calculates the required amount
of sheets.

The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing.
Before printing to multiple sheets, make sure that the layout of the drawing
supports printing on several smaller sheets. Remember that Tekla Structures
automatically adds a 5 mm margin to the printouts.
Also ensure that you have set up the printer instance correctly for printing to
multiple sheets.
1. Open a drawing.
2. On the File menu, click Print drawing .
3. In the Print Drawings dialog box, select the printer instance you want to
use.
4. Select the Print on multiple sheets option.
5. In Scaling, set Scale = 1. This preserves the scale. The number of sheets is
rounded up.
Do not use Auto when you print to multiple sheets.
Tekla Structures calculates the required amount of sheets needed to print
the drawing.
6. If needed, modify other printing settings and add frames and fold marks
in the printout.
If you set Orientation to Auto, Tekla Structures selects an orientation that
results in the smallest number of printed sheets.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 548 Print to multiple sheets
instances (old printing)
 Tekla Structures prints the drawing to multiple sheets so that it prints the
lower right corner the first, and the upper left corner the last (see the
numbered sheets in the example below).
If you want to have drawing frames and/or the title blocks for each smaller size
sheet, you need to use proper table layout as shown in the example below.

TIP Use the advanced option XS_PRINT_MULTISHEET_BORDER to set borders that

are left out from the smaller sheets.

See also
Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box (page 549)
Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer instances (old printing) (page 537)

7.7 Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box

The Print Drawings dialog box contains options for setting up printing. This
dialog box is only displayed if you have set XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to
TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced options --> Printing.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 549 Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box
instances (old printing)
 Setting Description
Print to file Prints the drawing to a file.
Include revision mark to file Adds the latest revision of the printed drawing to
name the filename.
Revision number is used by default. However, if
you set the advanced option
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST
to TRUE, the revision mark is used.
Scaling Auto fits the drawing to the Print area h*b size,
i.e. fits it to the paper. This is useful, for example,
when you are printing draft drawings on A4.
With this option you can include everything in
the printout, but the scale of the drawing may be
affected as drawing size is fitted to the Print
area h*b.
With Auto, if the drawing size is smaller than the
paper, the drawing is scaled up to fill the defined
Print area h*b, keeping the aspect ratio.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 550 Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box
instances (old printing)
 Setting Description
Entering an exact scale in the Scale box scales
the drawing manually to the defined scale.
Examples on Scale: 1.0 = 100%, 0.9 = 90%
Print on multiple sheets Prints the drawing on multiple small sheets.
Number of copies Defines the number of copies.
Orientation Auto orientates the drawing to suit the paper.
Landscape prints the drawing horizontally - as it
is displayed on the screen.
Portrait prints the drawing vertically.
Print area Entire drawing prints the entire drawing.
Visible area prints the area visible in the current
drawing window.
Add / Edit... Add (page 554) or delete printer instances, or
modify their settings.
Frames... Opens a dialog box where you can select to print
frames and fold marks (page 551).
Printer setup... Opens the Windows print setup dialog box
where you can change the printing settings for
the current Tekla Structures session only. The
changes that you make are not saved for the
printer permanently.

7.8 Frames and fold marks in drawings

You can have a frame around drawing contents, or two drawing frames inside
each other. You can add default Tekla Structures frames around the drawing
contents, or use DWG/DXF files in the table layouts as drawing frames.

You can add frames and fold marks only when the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG is set to TRUE (old printing).
You can create fold marks as guides for folding printed drawings. They are
small lines between and perpendicular to the drawing frames.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 551 Frames and fold marks in drawings
instances (old printing)
 1. Frame
2. Fold mark

See also
Add frames and fold marks in printouts (page 552)
Modify drawing table layouts through Layout dialog box (page 579)

Add frames and fold marks in printouts

You can add frames around printed drawings, and fold marks to indicate folds.
You can select a color for the frames and fold marks

The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing. If this advanced option is set to FALSE, you are using the
newer printing functionality, where you cannot set the frames and fold marks
through the Print Drawings dialog box.
Drawing frames to be printed are controlled in the standard.fms file under
the system folder. There is no saving option in the Drawing Frame Properties
dialog box, which is why the default values are located in a standard file. You
can save the standard file in the model folder, and then copy it to the project
or firm folders, if needed. If you want to save a set of standard files in the
model folder, see Standard files.
1. On the File menu, click Printing --> Print drawings.
2. In the Print Drawings dialog box, click Frames....
3. In the Drawing Frame Properties dialog box, select the check boxes of
the frames you want to print.
4. In Margins, enter in millimeters the distance between each frame and the
left, right, bottom, and top edge of the paper.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 552 Frames and fold marks in drawings
instances (old printing)
 5. Select a color for each frame.
6. To print the foldmarks, select the Foldmarks check box.
7. Enter in millimeters the horizontal and vertical distances of the first
foldmarks from the lower right corner of the outer frame, and between
the other fold mark.
8. Select a color for the fold marks.
9. Click OK.

Below is an example of the properties dialog box contents and the standard
file.

NOTE There is a fixed distance value of 5 mm in drawing frame margins. Thus, if you
want to use a drawing frame margin with a drawing title that sticks to the

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 553 Frames and fold marks in drawings
instances (old printing)
 frame corner, you need to change not only the drawing frame margin in the
Drawing Frame Properties dialog box, but also the Vector between corners
in the Tables dialog box ( Drawings & reports --> Drawing properties -->
Drawing layout --> Table layout... --> Tables...).

See also
Table layouts (page 571)

7.9 Set up printer instances in Printer Catalog

You need to set up printer instances in Printer Catalog for different purposes:
for printing to .pdf, to print file, or to different printers, and to print in different
sizes.
You can only set up Tekla Structures printer instances in Printer Catalog if you
have set the advanced option XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File
menu --> Settings --> Advanced options --> Printing. If this advanced option
is set to FALSE, you are using the newer printing functionality, and the Printer
Catalog is not available.
Tekla Structures uses Microsoft Windows printer drivers to write the printed
data directly to a printer, print file or .pdf.
There are two steps in setting up printer instances in Tekla Structures:
• First, you need to add a printer instance (page 554) in the Printer
Catalog. By default, several printer instances are already defined.
• Next, you need connect the printer instances to printer drivers and adjust
the printer instance settings such as paper size and print area (page 557).
You can also connect one printer driver to several printer instances, for
example, to print in different sizes on the same printer.

See also
Add a print-to-file instance (page 555)
Add an Adobe postscript printer instance (page 556)
Line thickness (pen number) in Color Table (page 559)

Add a printer instance

You need to add printer instances in Printer Catalog to be able to print. This
applies to printing when the advanced option XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG is
set to TRUE.

The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 554 Set up printer instances in Printer Catalog
instances (old printing)
 XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing.
1. On the File menu, click Printing --> Choose printer.
2. In Printer Catalog, click an existing printer instance that has similar
settings to the one you want to add.
3. Enter a new name for the new printer instance in the box under the
Printer instances list.
4. Click Add.
5. Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box, which shows a list
of Microsoft Windows printer drivers currently configured in your system.
6. Click a printer driver and then OK.
7. Select the paper size (page 557).
8. Enter the print area (page 557) in Print area h*b (height and width).
9. If necessary, use Offset for print origin to move the drawing print origin.
10. Select Black/white, Gray Scale or Color.
If you select Color, Tekla Structures prints lines with the colors defined in
the drawing properties.
11. Click Color table... to map pen size to the on-screen line color. The
background color is not printed.
12. Click Update.
13. Click OK.
14. Confirm that you want to save changes to the model folder.

See also
Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer instances (old printing) (page 537)
Define printing paper size and print area h*b (page 557)
Line thickness (pen number) in Color Table (page 559)

Add a print-to-file instance

To print to a file, you need to add a print-to-file printer instance in Printer
Catalog. This applies to printing when the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG is set to TRUE.

1. On the File menu, click Printing --> Choose printer.

2. In Printer Catalog, click Add.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 555 Set up printer instances in Printer Catalog
instances (old printing)
 3. Enter a printer instance name for the printer driver, followed immediately
(no spaces) by @path\folder\. The folder must already exist. For
example, 11X17@d:\small\
You can also leave the folder out. If you do this, Tekla Structures prints the
file in the current model folder or in the folder specified for the advanced
option XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY.

WARNING XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY overrides the folder

defined in the Printer Catalog.

4. Click Add.
5. Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box and click a printer
driver that is configured to print to file and then click OK.
6. In Paper size, select By print area.
7. Enter the print area (page 557) in Print area h*b (height and width).
8. Enter a file name extension, for example, plt for a print file.
9. Select Color, Gray Scale or Black/white as the color.
10. Click Color table... to change the pen sizes of different colors, if needed.
11. Click Update.
12. Click OK.
13. Confirm that you want to save changes to the model folder.

TIP One way to send different drawing sizes to different folders is to set up a
Microsoft Windows printer to print to file for each paper size you will use. Enter
a different destination folder for each paper size in the Printer instances list in
Tekla Structures.

See also
Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer instances (old printing) (page 537)
Define printing paper size and print area h*b (page 557)
Line thickness (pen number) in Color Table (page 559)
Print to file (page 544)

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 556 Set up printer instances in Printer Catalog
instances (old printing)
 Add an Adobe postscript printer instance
To print to a .pdf file, you need to add a Adobe postscript printer instance in
Printer Catalog. This applies to printing when the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG is set to TRUE.

The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing.
1. On the File menu, click Printing --> Choose printer.
2. In Printer Catalog, click Add.
3. Enter a new printer instance name followed immediately (no spaces) by @
and the folder where Adobe Distiller should look for files. For example,
A4_PDF@c:\plots\pdf\in\ .
4. Click Add.
5. Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box. Click the Adobe
postscript printer driver and then OK.
6. Set Paper size to By print area.
7. Enter the print area (page 557) in Print area h*b (height and width).
8. Enter the file name extension ps.
9. Select Black/white, Gray Scale or Color as the color.
10. Click Color table... to change the pen sizes of different colors, if needed.
11. Click Update.
12. Click OK.
13. Confirm that you want to save the changes to the model folder.

See also
Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer instances (old printing) (page 537)
Define printing paper size and print area h*b (page 557)
Line thickness (pen number) in Color Table (page 559)
Create .pdf files (page 543)

Define printing paper size and print area h*b

You need to define paper size and print area h*b for each printer instance you
add in Printer Catalog. This applies to printing when the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG is set to TRUE.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 557 Set up printer instances in Printer Catalog
instances (old printing)
 The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing.
1. On the File menu, click Printing --> Choose printer.
2. In the Printer Catalog, select the printer instance.
3. Use the Paper size setting to select the paper size used in printing:
• Named paper size: Tekla Structures lists a named paper sizes for most
sizes A3 and smaller. Selecting one of the listed sizes is recommended
for A3 printers and smaller.
• By print area: The printer selects the paper size based on the print
area. This option is recommended for A2 printers and larger. If you use
a named paper size with a larger printer than A3, drawings larger than
the print area are cropped to the size of the print area.
• None: Sends no size information to the printer. This option provides
legacy support for Xsteel 5.0 and is not recommended for use in other
circumstances.
4. Enter the Print area h*b:
• Tekla Structures uses the print area values to position the printout on
the paper. Ensure that the values for h and b relate to the paper size
required.
Usually the value is the paper size less the hard clip margins of the
printer. For example, if the paper size is 297*420, the print area could
be 407 * 284. See your printer documentation for the hard clip
margins of your printer.
• Usually for roll feed printers, h defines the roll width direction and b
defines the roll feed direction. Usually for tray feed printers, h defines
the tray feed direction, and b defines the tray width direction. Enter
the values, and test how the printing works. If you can see, that the
direction is wrong, switch the h and b values.
• When you are printing from Tekla Structures, it uses the values set for
the printer in the Tekla Structures printer instance settings in the
Printer Catalog, and overrides for these settings the Windows printer
settings.
5. Click OK and confirm the change.

TIP To print to different paper sizes, you can define several printer instances,
each using a different paper size, but all connected to the same physical
printer. For more information about setting up print devices in Microsoft
Windows, see your operating system documentation.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 558 Set up printer instances in Printer Catalog
instances (old printing)
 See also
Add a printer instance (page 554)
Printing tips (page 560)

Line thickness (pen number) in Color Table

You can only set Tekla Structures pen numbers in the Color Table of Printer
Catalog if you have set the advanced option XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to
TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced options --> Printing. If this
advanced option is set to FALSE, then you are using the newer printing
functionality, and the Printer Catalog is not available.
Pen numbers in the Color Table dialog box refer to the line weights used in
the printed drawing. By default, pen number 0 corresponds to a line weight of
0.01 mm. The final line weight in a printed drawing is the default pen thickness
multiplied by the pen number. For example, pen number 25 will give a line
weight of 0.25 mm.
• The line thicknesses displayed on the screen are taken from the first printer
instance on the Printer instances list in the Printer Catalog. When you
print a drawing, the line thickness is taken from the printer instance you
use for printing.
• In color drawings, the lines are shown with different thicknesses if the
Printer line widths check box is selected in File menu --> Settings .
• In black and white drawings, Tekla Structures shows the black lines on the
screen using pen number thickness defined for the color in the Color
Table.
• You can change the default line thickness using the advanced option
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH .

See also
Change the pen numbers (line thickness) for colors (page 559)

Change the pen numbers (line thickness) for colors

You can change the pen numbers for colors in Printer Catalog to show and
print lines with different thicknesses. This applies to printing when the
advanced option XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG is set to TRUE.

The instructions below apply when you are printing using Printer Catalog
printer instances, which means that you have set the advanced option
XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG to TRUE in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced
options --> Printing.
1. Open a drawing.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 559 Set up printer instances in Printer Catalog
instances (old printing)
 2. On the File menu, click Printing --> Printer catalog, and select a printer
instance.
3. Click Color table
4. Enter or change a pen number.
For example, to get line weight of 0.25 mm, enter 25.
You can change the default line thickness 0.01 using the advanced option
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH .
5. Click OK.
6. In a color drawing, on the File menu, click Settings and select Printer line
widths, otherwise you cannot see the changes on the screen.

See also
Change drawing color (page 498)
Colors in drawings (page 495)
Line thickness (pen number) in Color Table (page 559)

7.10 Printing tips

Here are some tips that help you print drawings the way you want.
• If you are printing a drawing to a smaller paper, the line weights are scaled
accordingly. This means that no lines are drawn too thickly and the
drawings are more readable.
• You can force a drawing to use a different size paper: Open the drawing
and go to Drawing Properties --> Layout . In Size definition mode, select
Specified size. Insert the required sheet size into Drawing size.
• If a drawing does not fit to the paper or is printed to a wrong location, use
the Offset for print origin option in the Printer Catalog to move the
drawing print origin for the selected printer instance.
The advanced options XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X and
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y move the print origin in the x or y direction for
all printer instances. If you set values for the advanced options, they are
used instead of the Offset for print origin value.
• You can disable the print date information to prevent the loss of
information when working with multi-user models. This is useful in cases
where a user modifies drawings while another user prints the same
drawings. Use the XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE to disable the print
date.
• You can add several Windows printer drivers for the same physical printer,
and define an exact paper size for each printer driver in Windows printer

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 560 Printing tips

instances (old printing)
 driver printing preferences or printing defaults. Then in Tekla Structures,
you can set printer instances so that you select the printer driver that
matches the desired paper size. See the table at the end.
• If you only have one Windows printer driver for one physical printer, define
the largest paper size you are going to use for that printer driver in
Windows printer driver printing preferences or printing defaults, for
example, A0. Then in Tekla Structures, you can use that one printer driver,
and set several printer instances for it, each using the necessary paper size.
See the table below.

Physical printer Windows printer drivers Tekla Structures printer

instances
One printer. Separate Windows printer Separate Tekla Structures printer
drivers for each needed instances are defined for each
size. needed size, each printer
instance is using the printer
driver with a matching paper
size.

One printer. One Windows printer Separate Tekla Structures printer

driver. The printer driver instances are defined for each
is set to the biggest needed size, the same printer
needed paper size.

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 561 Printing tips

instances (old printing)
 Physical printer Windows printer drivers Tekla Structures printer
instances
driver is used for each printer
instance.

See also
Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer instances (old printing) (page 537)
Set up printer instances in Printer Catalog (page 554)

Print drawings using Printer Catalog printer 562 Printing tips

instances (old printing)
8 Define automatic drawing
settings

Drawing settings tell Tekla Structures what the drawing should look like and
what it should include. Automatic drawing settings are defined before
drawings are created.

Automatic drawing settings

Automatic drawing settings are settings that are defined through:
• Drawing, view and object properties in various drawing types. The
properties are stored in properties files. Properties can be defined
separately for each drawing that you create, but it is advisable to save the
most commonly used settings in properties files for future use, for
example, in Master Drawing Catalog. When creating a new drawing,
always start by loading automatic drawing properties that you think contain
the best settings for the drawing you are creating, and then adjust the
settings as required before creating the drawing. Properties can be
adjusted also after you have created the drawing.
You can open the drawing properties dialog boxes for setting the automatic
drawing properties by going to the Drawings & reports tab, Drawing
properties and then selecting the drawing type.
• Drawing settings that are defined through various options and advanced
options in Options and Advanced Options dialog boxes.
• Additional settings files, such as rebar_config.inp (page 916) for setting
reinforcement, and hatch_types1.pat (page 807) for setting hatch
patterns.

Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawing properties

These drawings contain two types of automatic properties: drawing-specific
and view-specific. Drawing-specific properties apply to the whole drawing:
coordinate system, coordinate system rotation, drawing titles, drawing layout,
user-defined properties, protection settings, and some detail and section view
properties.

Define automatic drawing settings 563 Printing tips

 View-specific properties are defined separately for each view that you select to
create. For example, you might want to show marks in one view, dimensions in
another, and surface treatment in the third one. You can create as many views
as you need.
To specify the drawing views to create and the properties to use, follow the
path shown in the image below. First select the views to create and select view
properties to be used for the views. If you need to adjust view properties or
create new ones, click View properties and adjust the view properties,
including dimensions, filters, marks and objects. Always use Save to save the
view properties, otherwise your changes are not saved.

Define automatic drawing settings 564 Printing tips

 Drawing-level and view-level properties in single-part, assembly and cast unit
drawings can be modified in an open drawing by double-clicking the drawing
background or the view frame, respectively. The available properties are the
same as in the dialog boxes shown above.

General arrangement drawing properties

Automatic drawing properties for general arrangement drawings can be
defined on drawing level before creating the drawing. You can modify the
drawing level properties in an open drawing by double-clicking the drawing
background.

Define automatic drawing settings 565 Printing tips

 You select the views that you want to create after activating the creation of a
general arrangement drawing. You can adjust the view-level properties in an
open drawing by double-clicking a view frame.

Define automatic drawing settings 566 Printing tips

 Individual dimension, mark and object properties
You can modify the dimension, mark and object properties manually in an
open drawing and save the changed properties in properties files to be use
later on for different purposes.

Define automatic drawing settings 567 Printing tips

 See also
Set automatic drawing properties before creating drawings (page 27)
Modify drawing properties of an existing drawing (page 29)
Modify view-level drawing properties (page 28)
Modify drawing object properties (page 30)
Detailed object level settings (page 31)
How Tekla Structures applies drawing properties in drawing creation (page 40)

8.1 Define drawing layout

A drawing layout defines which drawing tables to include in the drawing. You
can create new layouts through the Layout dialog box, where you can also
define the included tables, the margins and spaces, and the set of rules for
increasing the drawing size when necessary. With another application, Layout
editor, you can customize the existing drawing layouts. Tekla Structures has
several predefined drawing layouts. Each drawing type; assembly, single-part,
cast unit, general arrangement, and multidrawing, has its own layouts. You can
also create customized layouts.

Defining layouts through the Layout dialog box

The layout connects a set of drawing table layouts to drawing sizes. Tekla
Structures selects the smallest defined drawing size that will fit the drawing
views and the connected table layout. This tells Tekla Structures which
elements to include in the drawing automatically.
Each drawing layout has its own:
• Table layouts
• Fixed drawing sizes

Define automatic drawing settings 568 Define drawing layout

 • Calculated drawing sizes
Using different layouts you can, for example, set assembly drawings to use A1
and A2 size drawing sheets, and single-part drawings to use A3 and A4 sheets.
Another example is that you may want to include a material list in assembly
drawings, but not in general arrangement drawings.
Tekla Structures saves the new layouts you create in separate files with the file
name extension .lay. The layout files are located in the \attributes folder
in the model folder. You can copy them to project or firm folders defined by
advanced options XS_FIRM and XS_PROJECT.

Direct layout editing in Layout editor

The layout of a drawing can be edited directly on a drawing in the Layout
editor. In the layout editor mode, you can select which tables you want to
include in the layout and where to place the tables. You can also adjust the
table scale, and rotation and overlapping with views.

Direct layout editing vs layout creation and editing through the old
Layout dialog box
The Layout editor is mainly meant for customizing existing table layouts
directly, quickly and easily. The old drawing Layout dialog box and layout
editing functionality is still available, and more advanced layout editing still
needs to be done through the Layout dialog box. Note that:
• Fixed sizes and calculated sizes mapping is available through the old
Layout dialog box only.
• View placement set-up: Margins and spaces can be set through the old
Layout dialog box only.
• In Layout editor, you can only create new table layouts by modifying
existing table layouts and saving them with a new name. You cannot create
a drawing layout from scratch, you always need to have an existing layout
to start with. However, you can edit a drawing layout that only has a name
and no table layouts defined. You can create new layouts from scratch
through the old Layout dialog box only.

To Click the link to find out more

Find out what a table layout is and Table layouts (page 571)
what it may contain. You can access
the table layouts through the Layout
dialog box.
Find out what the tables in the table Tables in drawing layout (page 570)
layout are and what kind of things
you can include in the tables
Define a new drawing layout Create a new drawing layout, add
consisting of the table layout, table layouts and tables (page 573)
including tables through the Layout
dialog box

Define automatic drawing settings 569 Define drawing layout

 To Click the link to find out more
Find out the things to consider when Modify drawing table layouts through
you replace a table with another one Layout dialog box (page 579)
in a table layout using the Layout
dialog box
Define where the tables are located in Modify drawing table layouts through
the table layout using the Layout Layout dialog box (page 579)
dialog box
Add key plans in a table layout Modify drawing table layouts through
through the Layout dialog box Layout dialog box (page 579)
Add DWG/DXF files in a table layout Modify drawing table layouts through
through the Layout dialog box Layout dialog box (page 579)
Modify tables in Template Editor Edit tables in Template Editor
(page 596)
Change the drawing layout Select a new layout for your drawing
(page 596)
Check the drawing layout properties Layout properties (page 841)
Add frames and fold marks in a Add frames and fold marks in
drawing printouts (page 552)
Add a Tekla Structures label in the XS_PRODUCT_IDENTIFIER
drawing layout

Tables in drawing layout

Tables are Template Editor templates included in Tekla Structures drawings
containing information on model objects. Key plans and DWG/DXF files are
also considered as tables in drawing layouts.

The term table refers to various elements of the drawing layout, such as:
• Tables (such as revision tables)
• Title blocks
• Lists (such as part and bolt lists)
• General notes
• Key plans
• DWG/DXF files
If you change the model, Tekla Structures updates the contents of the affected
drawings and tables created in Template Editor. The contents of the tables are
filled in by Tekla Structures at run time. In Template Editor, the tables are
referred to as graphical templates.

Define automatic drawing settings 570 Define drawing layout

 The available graphical templates are read from the following folders in the
following order, and shown in the Available tables list in the Tables dialog
box:
• Template directory (XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY)
• Current model folder
• Project folder (XS_PROJECT)
• Firm folder (XS_FIRM)
• Environment-specific system templates folder
(XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM)
• System folder (XS_SYSTEM)

See also
Edit tables in Template Editor (page 596)
Modify drawing table layouts through Layout dialog box (page 579)
Create a new drawing layout, add table layouts and tables (page 573)

Table layouts
A table layout is a group of tables or templates included in a drawing of a
certain type and size.

The layout defines:

• Which tables are included in the drawing
• Where the tables are located in the drawing
• How much space Tekla Structures leaves between the drawing frame and
views and between the drawing views

Table layouts define the background of the drawing, not the number or
location of the drawing views to include.
You can use the same table layout with different drawing sizes, or give each
drawing size its own table layout. For example, if the number of views changes
in a drawing and Tekla Structures chooses a new drawing size, Tekla Structures
may also choose another table layout automatically.
The examples below illustrate the relationship between the table layout and
drawing views. The drawing views are blue, and the elements of the table
layout are green.
Below is an example of a GA drawing layout.

Define automatic drawing settings 571 Define drawing layout

 1. General arrangement drawing view
2. Part list on assembly or cast unit level
3. Revision table and title block
Below is an example of an assembly drawing layout.

1. Margins between the drawing frame and the outermost views

2. Spaces between the views
3. Top view
4. Front view
5. Section views A-A and B-B
6. Drawing frame
7. Key plan

Define automatic drawing settings 572 Define drawing layout

 8. Revision table
9. Material list
10. Drawing title block
11. Table layout consists of several elements
12. Fold marks

See also
Create a new drawing layout, add table layouts and tables (page 573)
Modify drawing table layouts through Layout dialog box (page 579)
Edit the table layout directly on a drawing (page 584)

Create a new drawing layout, add table layouts and tables

If none of the predefined drawing layouts meets your needs, you can create a
new one from scratch or on the basis of an existing drawing layout. After
creating the drawing layout, you can add table layouts in it, and then add the
necessary tables in the table layouts.

The following workflow will take you through the steps of:
• Creating a new drawing layout.
• Adding table layouts in the new drawing layout. Here you also specify the
margins between the outermost views and the drawing frame, and the
spaces between two drawing views. In addition, you need to define fixed
drawing sizes and calculated drawings sizes for the table layouts.
• Adding tables in table layouts.

Create a new drawing layout

1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Drawing
layout .
2. Do one of the following in the Layout dialog box:
• Create a new layout from scratch:
a. Enter the name of the new layout in the box under the list of layouts.
b. Click Add.
The new layout is empty.
• Create a new layout on the basis of an existing layout:
a. Select a layout from the list.
b. Enter a new name for the new layout in the box under the list of
layouts.

Define automatic drawing settings 573 Define drawing layout

 c. Click Add.
The content of the new layout is the same as that of the layout
you selected from the list.
Below, a new drawing layout is created on the basis of an existing layout.

3. Click Apply when done.

Add new table layouts

Now that you have created a new drawing layout, you can add table layouts in
the drawing layout.
1. In the Layout dialog box, select the desired drawing layout from the list.
2. Click Table layout... to open the Table Layouts dialog box.
3. Create a new layout by entering the name of the table layout and clicking
Add.
One drawing layout may have several table layouts. You can, for example,
create one table layout for each paper size.
4. Enter the margins between the drawing frame and the outermost views in
the Width (distance to the side of the drawing frame) and Height
(distance to the top of the drawing frame) boxes.
5. Adjust the space between two drawing views in the Horizontal and
Vertical boxes.

Define automatic drawing settings 574 Define drawing layout

 6. Repeat steps 3 - 5 for each table layout.
7. Click Update and OK.
8. In the Layout dialog box, select the drawing layout, click Fixed sizes...,
define fixed drawing sizes, and connect the fixed drawing sizes to table
layouts.
Fixed sizes use specific drawing sizes.

9. Click Update and OK when done.

Define automatic drawing settings 575 Define drawing layout

 10. In the Layout dialog box, select the drawing layout, click Calculated
sizes... and define the necessary drawing size calculations, and connect
the drawing sizes to table layouts.
Calculated sizes are rules that Tekla Structures follows when it
automatically adjusts the drawing size.

11. Click OK when done.

Add tables to table layouts

When you have created the necessary table layouts, you can add tables in the
created table layouts.
1. In the Layout dialog box, select the desired drawing layout from the
Layouts list and click Table layout....
2. Select a table layout from the list.
3. Click Tables... to open the Tables dialog box.
4. Select the tables that you want to include in the table layout from the
Available tables list and add them to the Chosen tables list using the
right arrow.
5. Select a table from the Chosen tables list and define its location in the
table layout by selecting one of the table corners as its reference point in
the Table area, and by selecting the reference point of the reference
object in the Reference area.
6. Set the scale of the selected table.
You can scale tables created with the Template Editor and DWG/DXF files
to different sizes. Each table and DWG/DXF file in a table layout can have
its own scale. The values you enter determine the size of the scaled object
relative to the original.
7. Set the transparency of the selected table.
A transparent table can overlap with another table, view, or drawing
object. For example, if you use DWG/DXF drawing frames, you should

Define automatic drawing settings 576 Define drawing layout

 make them transparent. Otherwise you will not be able to locate any
other objects inside the frames.
8. Define the horizontal and vertical distance of the selected table from the
reference object.
9. Click Update.
10. Repeat the steps 5 - 9 for each table you add in the table layout.
11. Click OK.

12. Click Update and OK in the Table Layouts dialog box.

13. Click OK in the Layout dialog box.
You have now created a new drawing layout to be used for creating drawings.

Now you can use the new layout in your drawings.

See also
Define drawing layout (page 568)
Define fixed drawing sizes and connect layouts (page 578)
Define calculated sizes and connect layouts (page 578)

Define automatic drawing settings 577 Define drawing layout

 Define fixed drawing sizes and connect layouts
When a drawing layout uses fixed drawing sizes, it has a specific size (width
and height), and a specific table layout. You can use fixed drawing sizes in
autosizing the drawings.

Use fixed sizes when you print drawings to small (A4 and A3) printing devices.
Single-part and assembly drawings typically use fixed drawing sizes.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Drawing
layout .
2. Select a layout and click Fixed sizes.
3. Select a fixed size from the list.
To create a new size, enter its name and click Add.
4. Enter the width and height of the fixed drawing size.
5. Connect the fixed drawing size to a table layout by selecting the table
layout the list.
6. Click Update.
7. Repeat steps 3–6 for each fixed size.
8. Click Apply or OK.

See also
Create a new drawing layout, add table layouts and tables (page 573)
Define drawing size and drawing view scale (page 598)

Define calculated sizes and connect layouts

You can use calculated drawing sizes to define the rules Tekla Structures
follows when it automatically adjusts drawing size. You can also connect
layouts to drawing sizes that meet certain criteria.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Drawing
layout .
2. Select a drawing layout and click Calculated sizes.
3. Use boxes under Increasing step to define the interval by which Tekla
Structures increases the drawing size when it needs to.
You can set this individually for drawing width and height.
4. Use the boxes under Maximum size to define the maximum size of the
drawing.
If the drawing size exceeds the width or height limit you set here, Tekla
Structures uses an oversize sheet with no table layout.

Define automatic drawing settings 578 Define drawing layout

 5. You can connect a layout to drawings that meet one of the following size
criteria:
• Size A4 for drawings exactly this size
• Size A3 for drawings exactly this size
• Height = A3 for drawings having the same height as an A3 sheet (=297
mm)
• Height > A3 for drawings with a larger height than A3.
For each size, Tekla Structures makes the table layouts available
depending on the layout you selected.
6. Click OK or Apply.

See also
Create a new drawing layout, add table layouts and tables (page 573)
Define drawing size and drawing view scale (page 598)

Modify drawing table layouts through Layout dialog box

In addition to adding tables or templates created in Template Editor in drawing
table layouts, you can add key plans and DWG/DXF files, replace tables with
new ones, and a change table locations.

Add key plans in a drawing table layout

A key plan or a key plan view is a small map in a drawing that indicates the
location of an assembly, a cast unit, or a part in the model. The key plan
contains the model grid and the assembly, cast unit, or part shown in the
included drawing view.
Tekla Structures automatically includes the correct object in the key plan. You
can use drawings that contain only one view of the correct scale as a key plan.
Tekla Structures only uses the view from the original drawing. The view
position, drawing size, and templates of the original drawing are not relevant
to the key plan.
Below is an example of a key plan.

Define automatic drawing settings 579 Define drawing layout

 Before you can add a key plan in the drawing, you need to create a key plan
drawing, adjust the drawing view scale, and ensure that all parts are visible.
1. In the model, create a new XY view on the 0.0 plane, or on the level of the
grid.
2. Select the view, right-click and select Fit Work AreaFit work area.
3. Double-click the model view and set the Up and Down depth of the view
to include the desired part of the model in the View Properties dialog
box, and click Modify.
4. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> GA
drawing.
5. Define desired properties for the general arrangement drawing, and set
the size to perhaps 100*75 in the General - Layout Properties dialog
box.
6. Give a name to the key plan GA drawing, for example, KEY_PLAN_1, and
click OK.
7. Create a GA drawing of the view.

Define automatic drawing settings 580 Define drawing layout

 8. Double-click the view boundary to open the View Properties dialog box,
and set the desired view scale in the Scale box to 1:200, for example.
Tekla Structures uses the scale of the key plan view in every drawing that
uses the key plan view. You cannot change the key plan view scale in the
drawing layout properties.
9. Ensure that all parts are visible by doing one of the following:
• Modify the X min, X max, Y min, and Y max values in the View
Properties dialog box.
• Select the view and drag the view boundary from the handles on the X
and Y axes of the view.
10. Modify other view properties in the View Properties dialog box, click
Modify, and then save the drawing.
All the changes you make in the properties affect the key plan. For
example, if you set part and bolt marks to be visible, they will also be
visible in the key plan, so you may want to hide them.
11. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Drawing
layout .
12. Select the drawing layout you want to modify and click Table layout....
13. Select the table layout you want to modify and click Tables....
14. From the Available tables list, double-click Keyplan.
15. From the Drawing list, select the drawing that you want to use as a key
plan drawing and click OK.
16. From the Chosen tables list, select Keyplan and set the key plan
properties.
17. Click Update and OK.

Add a DWG/DXF file in a drawing table layout

You can add DWG and DXF files in table layouts. For example, you might have
some details in a DWG or DXF file that you want to show in certain types of
drawings and therefore add the file in the layout. You can also use a DWG/DXF
file as a print boundary in your drawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Drawing
layout .
2. Select the layout you want to modify and click Table layout....
3. Select the table layout you want to modify and click Tables....
4. From the Available tables list, double-click DWG/DXF.
5. Select the DWG/DXF file that you want to add.
6. Click OK.

Define automatic drawing settings 581 Define drawing layout

 7. From the Chosen tables list, click the selected DWG/DXF file and set the
properties as required.
For example, set the required scale and define the location for the
DWG/DXF file in the drawing. Test the layout before using it to ensure, that
the settings are as you wish.
8. Click Update.
9. Click OK.

Now you can create a drawing using the layout containing the DWG/DXF file.
Check the drawing properties before creating a drawing to ensure that you are
using the correct layout.

Set the location of tables in a drawing table layout

You can define the location of each individual table in a table layout by binding
it to a reference object such as the drawing frame, or to another table. You can
also define the horizontal and vertical distances of the table from the
reference object.

1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Drawing
layout .
2. In the Layout dialog box, select a drawing layout and click Table layout....
3. Select a table layout and click Tables....
4. Select a table from the Chosen tables list.
The name of the table is displayed in the Table box.
5. In the Table area, select one of the table corners as its reference point by
selecting the check box in that corner.
6. In the Reference area, select the reference object from the list.
The reference object can be another table included in the table layout, or
the drawing frame.
7. Select the reference point of the reference object by selecting the check
box in the appropriate corner.
You can also position a table to the midpoint of the drawing frame or
table boundary by selecting two reference points, for example, the lower-
left and lower-right corners. If you do not use the right combination of
reference points for tables and binding objects, Tekla Structures may
position drawing tables outside the drawing.
8. In the Vector between corners boxes, define the horizontal (x) and
vertical (y) distance of the table from the reference object if you need
some space between them.
By default, Tekla Structures places tables side by side.
There is a fixed distance value 5 mm used as a drawing frame margin.
Thus, if you want to use a drawing frame margin with a drawing title that

Define automatic drawing settings 582 Define drawing layout

 sticks to the frame corner, you need to change the Vector between
corners values.
9. In Scale, set the size of the table relative to its original size.
Each table can have its own scale.
10. If you want the table to be transparent, select the Transparent check box.
A transparent table can overlap with another table, view or drawing
object.
11. Click Update.
12. Repeat steps 2–11 for all the tables on the Chosen tables list.
13. Click OK or Apply to save the table layout.

Examples
In the images below, the lower-right corner of the drawing title block (Table) is
bound to the lower right corner of the drawing frame (Reference), and the
Vector between corners is set to 0.0

In the example below, the value for x is -5.00 and the value for y is 5.00 . The
lower-right corner of the title block is still bound to the lower right corner of
the drawing frame.

Define automatic drawing settings 583 Define drawing layout

 Replace a table with another one in a drawing table layout
Be careful when you delete tables from table layouts because other tables
may use the table as a reference object. Also, when you replace tables with
new ones, the new ones do not automatically inherit the location and the
properties of the deleted tables.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Drawing
layout .
2. In the Layout dialog box, select a drawing layout and click Table layout....
3. Select a table layout and click Tables....
4. Check if the table you are going to delete is used as a reference the table
for another table in the layout. If it does, and you delete the table, you
cannot see any tables at all in the layout.
5. In the Available tables list, select the new table, and in the Chosen
tables list, select the table you want to replace, and click the right arrow.
This moves the new table to the Chosen tables list, and the new table
inherits the location and other properties of the selected, old table.
6. Select the new table, and check that the binding point of the new table
and its location relative to the reference object are correct, and check also
the transparency, scale and the distance from the reference object
settings.
7. Delete the old table by selecting it from the Chosen tables list and click
the left arrow.
8. Click Update and OK.
9. Click Update and OK in the Table Layouts dialog box.
10. Click OK in the Layout dialog box.

Edit the table layout directly on a drawing

The table layout of a drawing layout can be edited directly on a drawing in the
Layout editor. In the layout editor mode, you can select which tables you

Define automatic drawing settings 584 Define drawing layout

 want to include in the table layout and where to place the tables. You can also
adjust the table scale, and rotation and overlapping with views.
When the layout editor mode is active, you can see the drawing, but only edit
the table layout. You cannot edit the drawing content, views or properties, and
most of the commands on the ribbon are not available. Drawing content
needs to be visible so that you can see how the layout items relate to other
drawing content, at least in the current drawing.
When you save a table layout with a new name, no new files for the table
layout are created. The table layout is a part of the drawing layout file.
If you need to edit the individual tables in your table layout, you can open and
edit the tables in Template Editor (page 596).
You can apply the modified table layout to one particular drawing or to
multiple drawings at once.

Direct table layout editing vs layout editing through the old Layout
dialog box
The Layout editor is mainly meant for customizing existing table layouts
directly, quickly and easily. The old drawing Layout dialog box and layout
editing functionality is still available, and more advanced layout editing still
needs to be done through the Layout dialog box. Note that:
• Fixed sizes and calculated sizes mapping is available through the old
Layout dialog box only.
• View placement set-up: Margins and spaces can be set through the old
Layout dialog box only.
• In Layout editor, you can only create new table layouts by modifying
existing table layouts and saving them with a new name. You cannot create
a drawing layout from scratch, you always need to have an existing layout
to start with. However, you can edit a drawing layout that only has a name
and no table layouts defined. You can create new layouts from scratch
through the old Layout dialog box only.

Start direct table layout editing

• To open the Layout editor, on the drawing mode File menu, click Editors
--> Layout editor.
You can also open the Layout editor in any of the following ways:
• Select and right-click an existing table in a drawing and select Open Layout
editor.
• Double-click an existing table and select Edit drawing layout. To edit a
table, select Edit template in Template Editor. Note that this functionality
might be disabled by your company settings.

Define automatic drawing settings 585 Define drawing layout

 • The Layout editor button on the right indicates that the Layout
editor is active.
• The available tables and the current tables are listed in the Layout editor
pane.
• When you click a table in the Current tables list, adjustable table
properties (Scale, Rotation and Overlap with views ) are shown at the
bottom. Clicking a table in the Available tables list does not show the
properties.
• When you select a table in the Current tables list, the table gets selected in
the table layout. Also, when you select a table in the table layout, the table
gets selected in the Current tables list.

Define automatic drawing settings 586 Define drawing layout

 • The names of the tables are shown in the table layout by default. To hide
the names, clear the Show table names check box in the Layout editor
pane.

• Hidden tables are shown by default. You can hide hidden tables that are
irrelevant to a particular drawing using the Show hidden tables check box
in the Layout editor pane. You may have disabled the tables from a
particular drawing, but still want to use them in other drawings that use the
same layout. Or, when the content of the current drawing changes, tables
may appear again, for example, with an added revision, so you cannot
delete the tables just like that. By default, the hidden tables are shown as
simple rectangular boxes that have a known width and a default height.

• You can search for available tables using the Search... box. To do this, start
typing a table name or a part of it. To clear the search, click the close
button.

Your drawing table layout may include the following items:

• Templates (tables or schedules)

Define automatic drawing settings 587 Define drawing layout

 • Key plans. A key plan or a key plan view is a small map in a drawing that
indicates the location of an assembly, a cast unit, or a part in the model.
You may only have one key plan in a table layout.
• DWGs

Edit table layout

Move tables
You can move tables with keyboard shortcuts, or by using the move
commands on the ribbon or on the pop-up menu.
To move a table:
1. Right-click the table, select Move and move the table to the wanted
position:
• by picking the origin for moving and then the destination point.
• by picking the origin, moving the cursor towards the required direction,
and typing the numeric value for the needed distance (in mm).
2. Re-anchor the moved table, as described in Anchor tables below.
Note that moving a table changes its offset and the offset of tables anchored
to it.

Rotate tables
You can rotate tables clockwise in a table layout:
1. Select the table.
2. Select the desired rotation angle for the selected table in the Rotation list.

When you rotate, the anchor stays at the same position.

In the example below, the table has been rotated -90 degrees:

Define automatic drawing settings 588 Define drawing layout

 You can also rotate a table by using a pop-up menu command:
1. Select the table.
2. Right-click and select Rotate clockwise.
3. Repeat the Rotate clockwise command until the table has the desired
rotation.

Delete tables
Do one of the following:
• Right-click one table or several tables (hold down Ctrl or Shift), and select
Delete.
• Select a table and press Delete on the keyboard.

Define automatic drawing settings 589 Define drawing layout

 Adjust table scale and overlapping with views
You can adjust the scale of the tables and DWGs, while key plans need to be
scaled in the original drawing view. You can also adjust the overlapping
settings of tables, key plans and DWGs.
To adjust the table properties:
1. Select a table from the Current tables list or in the table layout.
2. Adjust the scale in the Scale box .
3. Change the Overlap with views setting if necessary.
The setting Overlap with views will be taken into use only when the
drawing is recreated.
If you select this setting, the tables can overlap with a view. If this setting is
not selected, Tekla Structures keeps the drawing views outside the tables
area during drawing creation or recreation. Overlap changes are applied
only during drawing recreation and creation, but a scale change is applied
right away.
Note that this is the same setting as Transparent in the old Tables dialog
box, the name is just different in Layout editor.

Refresh a table
• You can refresh templates (tables) in Layout editor, and in the drawing
itself. To do this, right-click a template in a drawing or in Layout editor, and
click Refresh template.

Add new tables, DWG/DXFs and key plans in the table layout
Add a new table or schedule
1. Select a table from the list of Available tables.
2. Pick a reference point in the drawing using the appropriate snap switches.
As a result, the table is added from the top left corner to the picked
location. You may need to adjust the table position.

Add a new key plan

1. Create a suitable view in the model, then create a general arrangement
drawing of the view, and finally modify the created drawing view so that it
can be used as a key plan.
For example, you need to adjust the view scale so that the key plan fits in
the drawing table layout. The key plan drawing may only contain one view.
2. Save the created key plan drawing.
3. Open a drawing where you want to add a key plan, and go to Layout
editor.
4. Select Keyplan from the Available tables list.

Define automatic drawing settings 590 Define drawing layout

 5. Select the drawing to be used as a key plan from the displayed list of
drawings.
6. Pick a reference point using the appropriate snap switches. As a result, the
key plan is added from the top left corner to the picked location. You may
need to adjust the key plan position.

Limitations in key plans in table layouts

• Key plans need to be scaled in the original drawing.
• You cannot insert multiple key plans in one layout.
• Key plans cannot be rotated.

Add a new DWG/DXF file

1. Select DWG/DXF from the Available tables list in the Layout editor
pane, and browse for the DWG/DXF file.
2. Pick a reference point using the appropriate snap switches. As a result, the
DWG/DXF is added from the top left corner to the picked location. You
may need to adjust the DWG/DXF position.

Define automatic drawing settings 591 Define drawing layout

 Limitation: DWG/DXF files cannot be rotated.

Anchor tables
1. To anchor a table, first select the table.
The table anchor becomes visible when you select the table. You can
select several tables at a time.

2. Re-anchor the tables to one of the 9 points:

• to another table
• to the drawing frame box
When you snap to a position to place a table in the Layout editor, the table is
always anchored to the bottom-left corner. The tables grow to the opposite
direction from the anchor.
To get an overall picture of anchoring dependencies, select all tables at once
using area select. If tables are anchored to hidden tables, select the Show
hidden tables check box to get a realistic anchoring picture.
Anchors are also shown when the system automatically changes anchoring
points. This happens when you delete a table to which another table is
anchored, and when you add a new table to the table layout.

Define automatic drawing settings 592 Define drawing layout

 • You can anchor tables:
• to the corners, to the middle points of the edges, and to the center of
another table
• to the drawing frame corners, to the middle points of frames, and to the
center of the drawing.
In the following example, the table is anchored to the lower-left corner of
another table:

• You can drag end points of the anchoring line.

• If the distance between the tables is less than 5 mm in the X and Y
directions, the anchoring line will be rounded.

• An anchoring point that is touching the selected table can be moved

between the 9 points of the selected table only.
• An anchoring point that is touching the origin of the anchoring location can
be moved to any of the 9 anchoring points of any other table, or to the
drawing frame, or to the center of the drawing.
• To offset tables from the anchoring points, use the Move command with
numeric input.
• To see the offset value, select a table. The X and Y offset values will be
shown in magenta:

Limitations in anchoring

Define automatic drawing settings 593 Define drawing layout

 • You cannot anchor a table to itself.
• You cannot anchor tables to each other. For example, if template 1 is
anchored to template 2, template 2 cannot be anchored directly to
template 1.

Save table layout

1. Click Save as... in the Layout editor pane. This opens the Save layout
dialog box:

2. Select one of the following two options:

• Overwrite current layout: Save the modified table layout with the old
name. This saves the drawing layout file in the current model folder. If
the table layout has been used by other drawings, those drawings will
get updated.
• Create a new layout with a name: Save the new or modified table
layout with another name. If the name is already in use, you will be
notified.
No new files for the table layout are created. The table layout is a part
of the drawing layout file, and the drawing layout file is saved in the
model folder.
The new table layout will appear in the table layout list in the Layout
dialog box and in the layout properties, for example, in the General -
Layout Properties dialog box. It will not be used automatically in any
other drawings than the current drawing, until you select to use it.
If you have activated Autosize in the drawing layout properties dialog
box or pane, and you save the table layout with a new name, the Size
definition mode changes to Specified size, and the current size is

Define automatic drawing settings 594 Define drawing layout

 used. To use Autosize, go to the layout properties (page 841) and
map this table layout to a size in a table layout set.
3. Click Save.
If you try to exit the layout editing mode without saving, you will be asked
if you want to discard the current changes. To save the changes, click
Cancel and save the layout. Click Discard to discard the current changes.

Add a drawing layout to a drawing

When you open Layout editor in an open drawing and your drawing does not
have a drawing layout defined, you will get a list of layouts you can select from.
The tables and other layout definitions in the selected drawing layout will be
applied to the open drawing. This is useful if you have deleted the drawing
layout by accident in the drawing properties, for example.

Disable template and table layout editing

By default, you are allowed to edit drawing templates and table layouts. It is
possible to prevent the template and table layout editing by setting the
advanced option XS_DISABLE_TEMPLATE_DOUBLE_CLICK to TRUE in the

Define automatic drawing settings 595 Define drawing layout

 Drawing Properties category in the Advanced Options dialog box. When you
do this:
• You cannot start editing templates or table layouts by double-clicking a
template in a drawing. Instead, the Drawing properties dialog box will be
displayed.
• You cannot start editing templates or table layout by right-clicking a
template in a drawing and selecting the corresponding commands.

Select a new layout for your drawing

You can select which layout to use in a drawing in drawing properties. The
layout information is stored in the drawing property files. We recommend that
you create as many property files as you need different layouts for the
different drawing types.

To select a new layout and save the layout information in a drawing properties
file:
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click Layout.
4. Select a new layout from the Layout list.
5. Click Save to save the changed drawing properties and OK to close the
drawing properties dialog box.

Now you can create a drawing using the drawing property file that contains the
changed layout information.

See also
Define drawing layout (page 568)
Layout properties (page 841)

Edit tables in Template Editor

If you need to edit a table in a drawing layout, you can open it in Template
Editor (TplEd). In Template Editor, drawing layout tables are called templates.

Define automatic drawing settings 596 Define drawing layout

 You can only open tables with templates created or saved in Template Editor
version 3.2. or later.
If your templates are located in a protected folder, the templates are read-
only, and you cannot save modified templates in a protected folder. In this
case, you need to start Tekla Structures as an administrator.
Would you like to edit this template in Template Editor or edit the drawing
layout? Changes will be applied in all drawings that use this template or use
the same layout. Reopen the drawing to apply the template changes.
1. In a drawing, double-click the table you want to modify.
2. Tekla Structures shows the following message:
Would you like to edit this template in Template Editor
or edit the drawing layout?
Changes will be applied in all drawings that use this
template or use the same layout.
Reopen the drawing to apply the template changes.
3. Click Edit template in Template Editor. Tekla Structures starts the
Template Editor, and the selected template is displayed.
4. Modify the template and save the changes by selecting File --> Save , or
Save as to use another folder, for example model folder.

For more information about the Template Editor, see Template Editor User's
Guide.
The example below illustrates how a table looks in a drawing and in Template
Editor. In this example, there is a revision table and a title block. The revision
table is located above the title block and bound to the title block in the layout.

Define automatic drawing settings 597 Define drawing layout

 See also
Tables in drawing layout (page 570)

8.2 Define drawing size and drawing view scale

Tekla Structures offers you several combinations of settings that you can use
for defining the drawing size and the drawing view scale. You can use exact
drawing view scale and automatic drawing size, automatic view scale and exact
size, or both automatic scale and size.

Settings Click the link below to find out

more
Autosizing: If you always want to use Set exact drawing size and automatic
a certain scale, then you would set drawing view scale (page 600)
the exact scale to be used and let
Tekla Structures automatically select
the drawing size that suits the
selected scale.
You can define different scales for
main views and section views. All
main views in a drawing automatically

Define automatic drawing settings 598 Define drawing size and drawing view scale
 Settings Click the link below to find out
more
use the same scale unless you fine-
tune individual views manually.
Autoscaling: If you always need to use Set exact drawing view scale and
a certain drawing size, for example, automatic drawing size (page 599)
A3, A4 or A1, then you would set the
size and let Tekla Structures
automatically select the drawing view
scale that suits the selected size.
Tekla Structures first tries to use the
preferred scale for the drawing views,
then the alternative scales, and
selects the largest possible scale.
If you are not bound to any specific Autoscale and autosize drawings
drawing sizes or drawing view scales, (page 601)
you might want to let Tekla Structures
take care of both.

See also
Define calculated sizes and connect layouts (page 578)
Define fixed drawing sizes and connect layouts (page 578)
Layout properties (page 841)

Set exact drawing view scale and automatic drawing size

You can let Tekla Structures find appropriate sizes and table layouts for
drawings.Tekla Structures automatically updates drawings to adapt to these
changes by using different drawing sizes and table layouts.

Using exact drawing view scale and automatic drawing size is very useful, for
example, when the number, size, or location of drawing views may change.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click Layout.
4. Set Size definition mode to Autosize.
5. Select the set of drawing sizes for Tekla Structures to use. You have the
following options:
• Calculated sizes: Use this when you want to define the rules that
Tekla Structures follows when it tries to adjust the drawing size.

Define automatic drawing settings 599 Define drawing size and drawing view scale
 • Fixed sizes: Use this when you want to use fixed drawing sizes A2, A3,
A4, etc.
• Calculated/fixed sizes: Use this when you want Tekla Structures to
select the smallest of the suitable sizes.
6. Go to the Scale tab and set Autoscale to No.
This way Tekla Structures uses the exact scale that you have set for the
main views and section views.
7. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
8. On the Attributes 1 tab, set the desired Scale.
9. Save the view properties and click Close.
10. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.
When you create the drawing, Tekla Structures creates the views using the
selected scale and selects the smallest drawing size where the views fit in the
drawing. Tekla Structures may also need to change the table layout to adapt to
the new drawing size. It will then use another appropriate table layout within
the same layout specified in drawing properties.

See also
Define drawing size and drawing view scale (page 598)
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Section view properties (page 849)
Define calculated sizes and connect layouts (page 578)
Define fixed drawing sizes and connect layouts (page 578)
Layout properties (page 841)

Set exact drawing size and automatic drawing view scale

If you need to use a specific size in your drawings, for example, A3, A2, or A1,
you can specify the exact size, and let Tekla Structures automatically select the
suitable drawing view scale. The drawing size should always be smaller than
the actual paper size to accommodate printer margins.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click Layout.

Define automatic drawing settings 600 Define drawing size and drawing view scale
 4. On the Drawing size tab, set Size definition mode to Specified size and
enter the drawing size.
The size should be smaller than the actual paper size to accommodate
printer margins.
5. Select the table layout from the Table layout list.
6. On the Scale tab, set Autoscale to Yes.
7. Set the Main view scales and Section view scales.
Enter the denominators of scales and separate them with spaces. For
example, enter "5 10 15 20" for the scales 1/5, 1/10, 1/15, and 1/20.
8. Select the Scale change mode, which defines the relationship between
the scales of main and section views within a drawing.
The options are:
• main = section: The scales of the main and section view are equal.
• main < section: Main view scales are smaller than section view scales.
• main <= section: Main view scales are smaller than or equal to section
view scales.
9. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
10. Enter the preferred scale.
Do the same for each view that you create.
11. Save the view properties and click Close.
12. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Tekla Structures creates the drawing using the specified size. Tekla Structures
first tries to use the preferred scale for the drawing views, then the alternative
scales, and selects the largest possible scale.

See also
Define drawing size and drawing view scale (page 598)
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Section view properties (page 849)
Define calculated sizes and connect layouts (page 578)
Define fixed drawing sizes and connect layouts (page 578)
Layout properties (page 841)

Define automatic drawing settings 601 Define drawing size and drawing view scale
 Autoscale and autosize drawings
If you are not bound to any specific drawing sizes or drawing view scales, you
can let Tekla Structures take care of both.
You can first set autoscale and after that autosize. Both of the settings are set
in Layout properties.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
4. On the Attributes 1 tab, set the preferred drawing view scale in the Scale
box.
Do the same for all of the views you plan to create.
5. Click Save to save the view properties. Do this for all of the views you have
modified.
6. Click OK to return to drawing properties.
7. Click Layout, go to the Scale tab and set Autoscale to Yes.
8. Set the alternative Main view scales and Section view scales.
9. Select the Scale change mode, which defines the relationship between
the scales of main and section views within a drawing.
The options are:
• main = section: The scales of the main and section view are equal.
• main < section: Main view scales are smaller than section view scales.
• main <= section: Main view scales are smaller than or equal to section
view scales.
10. Enter the Preferred size.
11. On the Drawing size tab, set Size definition mode to Autosize.
12. Select the set of drawing sizes (Calculated sizes, Fixed sizes or
Calculated/fixed sizes).
13. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

When you use both autoscaling and autosizing at the same time, Tekla
Structures follows the steps below:
• First Tekla Structures tries to find a drawing size where the drawing
contents fit by first trying to use the exact scale defined in View Properties
--> Attributes 1 and the smallest drawing size defined in the current

Define automatic drawing settings 602 Define drawing size and drawing view scale
 layout. The sizes are defined in through Drawings & reports --> Drawing
properties --> Drawing layout > Fixed sizes.../ Calculated sizes....
• Then Tekla Structures increases the drawing size until it reaches the
Preferred size defined in Layout --> Scale .
• If the drawing fits with the original scale, Tekla Structures tries to increase
the scale using the alternative main and section view scales you defined in
Layout --> Scale.
• If the drawing does not fit to any of the defined scales, Tekla Structures
starts to increase the drawing size until the contents fit, using the fixed or
calculated sizes or both. When necessary, Tekla Structures changes to
another appropriate table layout within the current layout.
• When the views fit, Tekla Structures begin to increase the scale again so
that the final drawing uses the largest possible scale.

See also
Define drawing size and drawing view scale (page 598)
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Section view properties (page 849)
Define calculated sizes and connect layouts (page 578)
Define fixed drawing sizes and connect layouts (page 578)
Layout properties (page 841)

8.3 Define object protection and placement settings in

drawings
When you create a drawing, Tekla Structures uses predefined rules for
positioning marks and dimensions. Marks and dimensions are automatically
placed in the first suitable position.
The following settings are considered when placing the objects:
• The protected areas defined in drawing properties. How the protection
settings are applied depends on the drawing order of the objects in the
drawing: the parts are drawn first, then the marks and then the
dimensions.
• The placing and leader line type settings (page 766) of the annotation
objects defined in the annotation object properties. Marks are usually
drawn before dimensions, but if the marks have leader lines, they are
drawn after the dimensions.
• The predefined mark location and part orientation settings for some
marks. For more information, see Set a predefined location for beam,
bracing and column marks (page 764).

Define automatic drawing settings 603 Define object protection and placement settings
in drawings
 • The modeling direction of parts.
• XS_MARK_INTELLIGENT_PLACING: Marks are automatically placed
according to the mark placing algorithm if this advanced option is set to
TRUE (default). The placement algorithm tries to avoid crossing leader lines,
and also places marks otherwise more clearly. XS_NEW_MARK_PLACING is
available in the category Marking: General in the Advanced Options
dialog box. The algorithm applies to all marks and associative notes, except
weld marks.
• XS_MARK_PLACING_ANGLE_CLOSE_TO_45_DEGREES: If you set this
advanced option to TRUE (default), marks with leader lines are placed in a
45-degree angle if allowed by the protection settings.
• XS_MARK_INTELLIGENT_ POST_FREEPLACE_NEARBY: If you set this
advanced option to TRUE (default), Tekla Structures first places the marks
avoiding crossing leader lines and after that runs the place nearby
command, which ensures that the mark locations follow the protection
settings. If you set this advanced option to FALSE, the crossing mark check
is performed, but the place nearby command is not run, so some of the
protection settings may not be followed.
When you create a drawing, Tekla Structures places the annotation objects
according the automatic placement settings and protection settings. You can
modify the placement settings in drawing view properties and on object level
for individual objects. The protection settings for the whole drawing are also
considered when you add annotation objects manually.
When you create a drawing, Tekla Structures places the views in the drawing
according the settings in the drawing layout and view properties. In final
drawings, you can select whether to use fixed or free view placement of views,
drag drawing views to new locations, or align them.

To Click a link below to find out more

Specify protected areas in your Protected areas in drawings
drawings (page 605)
Protect areas in a drawing (page 607)
Arrange drawing objects Arrange drawing objects (page 287)
Align drawing objects Align drawing objects (page 288)
Specify how the marks or dimensions Define automatic placement settings
are placed for marks (page 608)
Define placement settings for
dimensions (page 610)
Specify whether the view placement is Define automatic free or fixed
fixed of free placement for drawing views
(page 611)

Define automatic drawing settings 604 Define object protection and placement settings
in drawings
 See also
Placement properties for marks, dimensions, notes, texts and symbols
(page 925)

Protected areas in drawings

You can define protected areas in drawings to prevent text, marks or
dimensions from being placed in that area. When Tekla Structures places text,
marks, dimensions or other annotation objects in a drawing, it first checks the
protection settings.
The drawing properties files contain predefined protection properties, which
you may change. When you load the drawing properties, the protection
settings in the loaded file are applied in your drawing.
For details about adjusting the protection settings, see Protect areas in a
drawing (page 607)
Below is an example of the protection properties dialog with explanations of
the selections.

1. With a selection like this, text and marks may overlap with part corners
and edges, but not with part content.
2. With a selection like this, dimension values may not overlap with other
dimension arrowheads, lines or values.

Define automatic drawing settings 605 Define object protection and placement settings
in drawings
 The objects on the top define the areas to be protected, see descriptions
below:

Column Description

Part corners

Part edges

Part content

Text, mark or weld mark

Dimension arrowhead

Dimension line

Dimension value

Cutting line

Section mark

Weld arrow

Weld mark content

The objects on the left define which objects, or object elements, Tekla
Structures cannot place in the protected areas. See the descriptions below:

Row Description
Text, mark or weld mark

Dimension arrowhead

Dimension line

Dimension value

Define automatic drawing settings 606 Define object protection and placement settings
in drawings
 You can check which areas are protected by using the Show protection
command. You can start this command in the Quick Launch box. This
command shows the protected areas with colors.

See also
Define object protection and placement settings in drawings (page 603)

Protect areas in a drawing

You can define protected areas in drawings to prevent text, marks or
dimensions from being placed in that area.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click Protection.
The settings are same for all drawing types.
4. Select check boxes to indicate the areas that you want to protect from
text, marks, weld marks, associative notes, dimension arrowheads,
dimension lines or dimension values.
• For example, to prevent text, marks, dimensions or other annotation
objects from being placed over the inside area of parts, select the third
check box on the first row. The first row defines the placement of
annotation objects, and the icon above the third check box indicates
the inside area of parts. With this setting, Tekla Structures may place
annotation objects on the corners and edges of parts.

• If you clear the first two columns of check boxes, Tekla Structures does
not protect part corners and edges. This increases drawing speed and

Define automatic drawing settings 607 Define object protection and placement settings
in drawings
 decreases the memory requirements. You can still protect these areas
by using the third column of check boxes for part protection.

5. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

See also
Define object protection and placement settings in drawings (page 603)
Protected areas in drawings (page 605)

Define automatic placement settings for marks

You can define automatic placement settings for the marks before creating a
drawing. You can modify the settings in an open drawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click View creation, select
the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click an object that you want to adjust, for example Part mark.
5. On the appropriate tab, click the Place... button to open the Placing
dialog box.
6. Adjust the placement settings. The options available in the dialog box vary
depending on the annotation object type.
• In Minimum distance, enter the closest distance Tekla Structures uses
to place the marks. See number 2 in the image below.
• In Maximum distance, enter the farthest distance Tekla Structures
uses to place the marks. If no place for mark is found within the
specified distance, Tekla Structures will force the mark to that distance.

Define automatic drawing settings 608 Define object protection and placement settings
in drawings
 If you set this option to 0, the maximum distance behaves like infinity.
See number 3 in the image below.
• In Search margin, enter the empty margin that you want to have
around the marks. See number 1 in the image below.
• Note that if you use a high Search margin and Minimum distance
values, the mark placement does not work properly.
• To move marks away from each other, use Search margin, not
Minimum distance. Keep the minimum distance setting as small as
possible to reduce the possibility of marks overlapping.
• Select the Quarter to define the areas Tekla Structures searches for a
space to place the object.

(1) Search margin

(2) Minimum distance
(3) Maximum distance
7. Click OK.
8. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the
changes in view properties and Close to return to drawing properties.
9. General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
10. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

TIP If you are not happy with the mark placement settings in a drawing, you
can change the settings in the mark placing dialog box on object level,
which has more options available. In an open drawing, you can also
change the placement settings for manually added marks, notes, texts,
and symbols.
To open an object level dialog box, double-click the mark, text, note, or
symbol in the drawing and click Place.... If you set Placing to free, you
are letting Tekla Structures to decide the location of the mark. If you set
Placing to fixed, you can place the mark in any location. When you use
the setting fixed, the mark stays where you place it even though you
update the drawing, whereas with free, Tekla Structures tries to find the
optimal place for the mark. You can select several or all marks in a view
and change the placing settings this way.

Define automatic drawing settings 609 Define object protection and placement settings
in drawings
 See also
Define object protection and placement settings in drawings (page 603)
Protected areas in drawings (page 605)

Define placement settings for dimensions

You can set dimension placement to free or fixed, and control the space
between parallel dimension lines and the location of the dimension in relation
to the object it is dimensioning. You can also select whether to place short
dimension text inside or outside the dimension.

In single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings, the dimension placement

settings can be defined in an open drawing, saved into a dimension properties
file and loaded in another drawing, or taken into use in dialog box. In general
arrangement drawings, most of the settings can be defined on drawing and
view level, but placement settings only on object level.
Remember that in addition to dimension placement settings, the placement is
also affected by Protection properties.Tekla Structures uses the protection
properties to prevent marks and dimensions from being placed in protected
areas.
To adjust dimension placement settings in an open drawing and save the
settings for later use:
1. On the Drawing tab, click Properties --> Dimension.
2. Go to the General tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
3. In Dimension lines spacing, enter the desired space between two
parallel dimension lines.
4. Select whether to place short dimension text inside or outside of the
dimensions from the Short dimensions list.
5. Click Place..., and define the desired placing settings:
• Set Placing to free to let Tekla Structures decide the location and
direction of the dimension based on the Direction settings.
• If you set Placing to fixed, you can place the dimension in any
location. When you use the setting fixed, the dimension stays where
you place it even though you update the drawing, whereas with free,
Tekla Structures tries to find the optimal place for the dimension.
• The option Direction defines where Tekla Structures places
dimensions relative to the dimensioned object. You can select either
positive or negative, or both. Positive places the dimension further
away and negative closer to the dimensioned object. This setting
affects the Placing: free setting.
6. In Minimum distance, enter the closest distance Tekla Structures uses to
place the dimension.

Define automatic drawing settings 610 Define object protection and placement settings
in drawings
 7. In Search margin, enter the empty margin that you want to have around
the dimension. If Tekla Structures cannot place the dimension at the
minimum distance, it moves the dimension by the value you enter in the
Search margin box. Tekla Structures tries to place the dimension using
the Search margin value until it finds a place for the dimension.
8. Click OK to close the dimension placing dialog box.
9. Save the dimension properties using Save, or save them in another file
using Save as.
10. Click Modify to modify the dimension properties in the open drawing.
The dimensions are placed according the changes you made. Now you have a
dimension properties file that you can load whenever you need to adjust the
dimension placement settings in the same way. For example, you can load
these properties in the Dimension Properties box in the Dimensioning rule
properties dialog box, or in an open general arrangement drawing in the
Dimension Properties dialog box.

See also
Define object protection and placement settings in drawings (page 603)
Dimension properties - General tab (page 851)
Dimension properties - Appearance tab (page 856)
Dimension properties - Units, precision and format (page 854)
Placement properties for marks, dimensions, notes, texts and symbols
(page 925)

Define automatic free or fixed placement for drawing views

You can keep the views in the same location (fixed) or let Tekla Structures find
a suitable place for the view (free) during drawing updates.

In general arrangement drawings, this setting can only be defined on view level
in an open drawing. In single-part, assebly and cast unit drawings, you can set
the view placement before creating drawings.
To define automatic free or fixed placement of in single-part, assembly and
cast unit drawings:
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
4. On the Attributes 1 tab, select one of the following options:

Define automatic drawing settings 611 Define object protection and placement settings
in drawings
 • Set Place to fixed to always keep the view in the same location when
you update the drawing.
• Set Place to free to let Tekla Structures find a suitable place for the
view when you update the drawing.
5. Click Save to save the view properties.
6. Click Close to return to drawing properties.
7. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

NOTE The Arrange views (page 163) command only affects views where the Place is
set to free. fixed views are not moved.

See also
Define object protection and placement settings in drawings (page 603)

8.4 Define drawing views

Automatic drawing views are views that you select to create before creating a
single-part, assembly or cast unit drawing. You can define the desired drawing
view properties separately for each view before you create the drawings.

When you create general arrangement drawings, you cannot select the views
to be created in the general arrangement properties dialog box, but you select
them at GA drawing creation. However, you can define automatic settings that
apply to all the views you create in a general arrangement drawing.

To Click the links below to find out

more:
Select the views that you want to Define the views to create in single-
create in single-part, assembly or cast part, assembly and cast unit drawings
unit drawings (page 613)
Define automatic view properties for Define automatic view settings for
general arrangement drawings general arrangement drawings
(page 615)
Define automatic view properties for Define automatic section view
section views properties (page 642)
Define the contents of the main view Define view labels and view label
and section view labels before you marks (page 616)
create the drawing
Define how Tekla Structures places Set drawing view projection type
the projections of a part in cast unit, (page 618)
single-part, and assembly drawings

Define automatic drawing settings 612 Define drawing views

 To Click the links below to find out
more:
Include single-part drawings of the Include single-part drawings in
individual parts that make the assembly drawings (page 620)
assembly in assembly drawings
Adjust the orientation of parts by Part orientation in drawing views
changing the coordinate system, (page 621)
rotating parts in drawing views,
setting viewing direction of columns,
beams or bracings, or changing the
project north
Show neighbor parts in drawing views Show neighbor parts in views
(page 630)
Shorten or lengthen parts in model or Shorten or lengthen parts (page 632)
drawing views
Unfold polybeams and bent plates in Unfold polybeams in drawings
single-part drawings according to (page 637)
unfolding parameters
Undeform warped or cambered parts Undeform deformed parts in
and show the developed shape of drawings (page 638)
deformed parts in drawings
Show symbols for part openings and Show part openings and recesses in
recesses (blind holes) in drawing drawings (page 639)
views

See also
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Section view properties (page 849)

Define the views to create in single-part, assembly and cast

unit drawings
Before you create single-part, assembly or cast unit drawings, you need to
select the views that you want to include automatically. At the same time, you
can set the necessary view properties.

To select the drawing views to be created and set the view properties:
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load the drawing properties file that you want to modify from the list at
the top.
3. Click View creation.

Define automatic drawing settings 613 Define drawing views

 4. Go to the Attributes tab and change the settings as required.
These settings apply to all views in the drawing. Here you can select the
coordinate system, set the coordinate system rotation, and undeform
warped or cambered parts.
5. Select the views you want to create. You can create as many views as you
like.
• If you select Off, Tekla Structures does not create the view, but
dimensions the parts in the available views. If you set all four main
views off, Tekla Structures will still create one front view.
• If you select On, Tekla Structures always creates the view, even if it was
not necessary in order to show the dimensions. For section views,
Tekla Structures creates one additional section view showing the
middle of the main part. For end views, Tekla Structures creates an end
view from one end of the main part.
• If you select Auto, Tekla Structures creates the view if it is necessary in
order to show the dimensions. For section views, Tekla Structures
creates the necessary number of views to show all the dimensions. For
end views, Tekla Structures also creates another end view from the
other end of the main part, if there are dimensions at that end.
6. For each of the views that you create, select the view properties that you
want to use in the View properties column.
The lists contain predefined view properties for different types of
drawings, also the view properties that you save in the View Properties
dialog box.
7. Check the view properties for each view by selecting the view from the list
and clicking View properties button, and modify the properties as
required.
8. Check the settings on the Attributes 1 tab.
Here you can set the view scale and size, view extension distance, view
place, and rotation of 3D views, show a reflected view and apply detailed
object level settings for the selected view.
9. Check the settings on the Attributes 2 tab.
Here you can undeform warped or cambered parts, shorten parts, show
openings and recesses, set the datum point for elevations and select the
dimension creation method in the selected view.
10. Check the settings on the Label tab.
Here you can define the label text and position, add a symbol in the label
and show the view direction marks in the selected view.
11. Select options from the options tree, and modify dimensioning, mark and
object settings as required.
12. Save the view properties by clicking Save.

Define automatic drawing settings 614 Define drawing views

 13. Click Close.
14. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

See also
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Section view properties (page 849)
Define drawing views (page 612)
Set automatic drawing properties before creating drawings (page 27)

Define automatic view settings for general arrangement

drawings
Before you create general arrangement drawings, define the automatic view
properties.
1. Click Drawings & reports --> Drawing properties --> GA drawing .
2. Load the drawing properties file that you want to modify from the list at
the top.
3. Click View and load the view properties you want to modify.
4. On the Attributes tab, change the settings as required.
Here you can set the view scale, view extension distance, show a reflected
view, show openings and recesses, set the datum point for elevations and
show pours.
5. Go to the Shortening tab and define the part shortening settings.
Here you can select whether you want to cut parts, set the minimum part
length, and set the space between cut parts.
6. Go to the Label tab and define the view label text, symbol and position.
7. If you want to create an anchor bolt plan drawing, go to the Anchor bolt
plan tab and set Show as anchor bolt plan to Yes.
You can also select, whether you want to create detail views in anchor bolt
plans and set the enlarged part view scale.
8. Save the view properties.
9. Click OK to return to drawing properties.
10. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

See also
View properties in drawings (page 844)

Define automatic drawing settings 615 Define drawing views

 Define drawing views (page 612)
Create anchor bolt plans using saved settings (page 83)
Set automatic drawing properties before creating drawings (page 27)

Define view labels and view label marks

All drawing views can have view labels, which may contain text and symbols.
You can set the contents of the main view labels and section view labels before
you create the drawing. You cal also adjust them after you have created the
drawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Do one of the following depending on the drawing type:
Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings:
a. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want
to change, and click View properties.
b. Click Attributes and go to the Label tab.
General arrangement drawings:
a. Click View.
b. Go to the Label tab.
4. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box.
The illustration in the view properties dialog box is only one way to
position the label text. When you modify the positioning, the illustration in
the dialog box does not change.

5. On the Content tab, select the elements that you want to include in the
view label mark.
6. If needed, select an element from the list and click Add frame and select
the frame Type and Color.
7. If needed, select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font
and Height.
8. Go to the Position tab and set the text position, horizontal and vertical
offset, and the text alignment.
Text positioning depends on whether you use a symbol or not.

Define automatic drawing settings 616 Define drawing views

 9. Click OK.
10. Select the view label Symbol you want to use in the label.
You can simply use only a label or add a symbol in it. You can also set the
color, size, line length and the position of the view label.
11. Select the position for the view label: Vertical (Above or Below) and
Horizontal (Center by view frame or Center by view restriction box).
12. To save the changes, click Save.
13. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Close.
General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
14. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing. .

See below for examples of view labels:

Drag the view label to the desired page in an open drawing.

The view frame is resized automatically, if necessary.

For more information on the elements available in view label marks, see View,
section view and detail view label mark elements (page 903).
For more information about the positioning of the view label marks, see
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks (page 884)

Define automatic drawing settings 617 Define drawing views

 Define section view properties for all views in a drawing
If you want to use the same section view properties, such as start number or
letter, cutting line, contents, and text position, in all your section views, you
can do this in on the drawing level. For more information, see Define
automatic section view properties (page 642).

See also
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Section view properties (page 849)
Define drawing views (page 612)

Set drawing view projection type

Projection type defines how Tekla Structures places the projections of a part in
cast unit, single-part, and assembly drawings. Projection type affects the order
of the views in the drawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load the properties you want to change.
3. Click Layout and go to the Other tab.
4. Select one of the following:
• First angle (also referred to as European projection).
• Third angle (also referred to as American projection).
5. To save the properties in the properties file, click Save.
6. Click OK and create the drawing.

Define automatic drawing settings 618 Define drawing views

 First-angle projection:

Third-angle projection:

Define automatic drawing settings 619 Define drawing views

 See also
Define drawing views (page 612)
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Layout properties (page 841)

Include single-part drawings in assembly drawings

You can include in assembly drawings single-part drawing views of the
individual parts that make the assembly. You can use existing single-part
drawings on the Drawing List or create new single-part drawing views.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Assembly
drawing .
2. Load the desired assembly drawing properties.
3. Click Layout and go to the Other tab.
4. Set Include single parts to Yes.
This activates the Single-part attributes list.
5. In the Single-part attributes list, select the desired drawing properties to
be used in the single-part view. The properties file standard is the
default.
6. Click Save to save the drawing properties in the properties file.
7. Click OK and create the drawing.

The value of the advanced option

XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS
affects how Tekla Structures creates the single-part views. If the option is set to
TRUE, Tekla Structures will use single-part drawings in the Drawing List. If it is
set to FALSE, or if there is no existing single-part drawing for a given part, a
new view will be created according to the Include single parts setting. The
default value is FALSE.
Tekla Structures also maintains the original scale in a single part drawing in an
assembly drawing when you set the layout to include single part drawings, and
set the option
XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS is
set to TRUE. If you do not want to maintain the scale of the existing single part
drawing, set the advanced option
XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_SCALE can be set to FALSE. If
you do this, thee scale of the included single part drawing will follow the scale
of the assembly drawing, or advanced option XS_SINGLE_SCALE if it is set.

The following advanced options all affect how the single-part drawing views
behave:
XS_SINGLE_CENTERED_SCREW

Define automatic drawing settings 620 Define drawing views

 XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS
XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_SHORT_DIMENSIONS
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_DISTANCE
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_MIN_DISTANCE
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_WAY
XS_SINGLE_DIMENSION_TYPE
XS_SINGLE_DRAW_PART_AS
XS_SINGLE_EXCLUDE
XS_SINGLE_FORWARD_OFFSET
XS_SINGLE_NO_SHORTEN
XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK
XS_SINGLE_PART_EXTREMA
XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE
XS_SINGLE_SCALE
XS_SINGLE_SCREW_INTERNAL
XS_SINGLE_SCREW_POSITIONS
XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS
XS_SINGLE_X_DIMENSION_TYPE
XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_SCALE
XS_NO_END_VIEWS_TO_INCLUDED_SINGLE_DRAWINGS

See also
Add single-part views in assembly drawings (page 155)
Define drawing views (page 612)

Part orientation in drawing views

In single-part, assembly, and cast unit drawings, you can adjust the orientation
of the parts in the drawing views by selecting an appropriate coordinate
system and by rotating the parts. You can also separately set the viewing
direction of columns, beams and bracings in assembly drawings. The project
north setting also affects part orientation.

To Click the links below to find out

more
To change the angle from which the Change the coordinate system
part, assembly, or cast unit is viewed, (page 622)

Define automatic drawing settings 621 Define drawing views

 To Click the links below to find out
more
how the part, assembly, or cast unit is
rotated, and how the dimensions in
the drawing view are oriented
Rotate a part, assembly, or cast unit in Rotate parts in drawing views
a drawing view around its local axes (page 624)
Select which side of a steel or timber Select the steel or timber part face
part is always shown in the drawing that is shown in front drawing view
main view (page 626)
Change the plate orientation in Change plate orientation in drawings
drawing views (page 628)
XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREF
ERENCE_FACTOR
XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE
_PREFERENCE_FACTOR
Define the front view direction Set viewing direction for parts in
separately for columns assembly drawings (page 627)
Define the front view direction Set viewing direction for parts in
separately for beams and bracings assembly drawings (page 627)

Change the coordinate system

You change the angle from which the part, assembly, or cast unit is viewed,
how the part, assembly, or cast unit is rotated, and how the dimensions in the
drawing view are oriented

The coordinate system defines:

• The angle from which the part, assembly, or cast unit is viewed.
• How the part, assembly, or cast unit is rotated.
• The orientation of the dimensions in the drawing view.
To change the coordinate system:
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load the drawing properties that you want to change.
3. Click View creation and go to the Attributes tab.
The settings affect all views in a drawing.
4. In Coordinate system, select one of the available coordinate systems:

Define automatic drawing settings 622 Define drawing views

 • local
Tekla Structures uses the local coordinate system of the main part. The
x axis of the part is parallel to the x axis of the drawing, and the start
point (the end point created first) of the part is on the left. The start
point is marked with yellow, and the end point created second is
marked with pink.

• model
Tekla Structures uses the global coordinate system. The part has the
same position in the drawing as it has in the model. This is one option
when you want to show columns vertically. You can also use this
option to display sloping parts in position. Tekla Structures cannot
display horizontally skewed parts.

• oriented
Tekla Structures uses the local coordinate system of the main part, but
the coordinate system is oriented so that the x axis of the part points
to the right even if the part was created from right to left.

• horizontal brace
Tekla Structures automatically rotates the drawing views so that the
front view is from the top of the model. This is used for skewed braces.
It automatically rotates the front view around the x axis.

Define automatic drawing settings 623 Define drawing views

 • vertical brace
Tekla Structures automatically rotates the drawing views so that the
front view is in the same plane as the brace in the model. This is used
for skewed braces. It automatically rotates the front view around the x
axis.

• For concrete parts, the option Fixed rotates the front view so that it
shows the casting direction (the face that is top in form) of the
concrete part, if it is defined in the model. For more information about
the casting direction, see Casting direction
5. To save the changes, click Save.
6. Click OK and create the drawing.

Rotate parts in drawing views

You can rotate a part, assembly, or cast unit in a drawing view around its local
axes.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load the drawing properties that you want to change.
3. Click View creation and go to the Attributes tab.
The settings affect all views in a drawing.
4. In Rotate coordinate system, specify the angle:
• With the X axis, you can rotate in steps of 90 degrees (0, 90, 180, 270).

Define automatic drawing settings 624 Define drawing views

 • With the Y axis, you can rotate in steps of 180 degrees (0, 180).
• With the Z axis, you can specify any angle.
5. To save the changes, click Save.
6. Click OK and create the drawing.

Examples
Below there are some examples of rotating an object around the x axis:

1. 0 degrees
2. 90 degrees
3. 180 degrees
4. 270 degrees
Below is an example of rotating the same part 180 degrees around the y axis:

Define automatic drawing settings 625 Define drawing views

 Below is an example of rotating the same part 30 degrees around the z axis:

See also
View properties in drawings (page 844)

Select the steel or timber part face that is shown in front drawing view
You can select which face of a steel or timber part is shown in the drawing
main (front) view by using the user-defined attribute Fixed drawing main
view.

The user-defined attribute Fixed drawing main view controls the drawing
coordinate system for steel and timber parts. This UDA is only taken into
account when you use the coordinate system Fixed in drawing properties.
When the fixed coordinate system is used, the part is rotated so that the front
view shows the part face that has been selected with the Fixed drawing main
view UDA.
1. In the model, double-click a steel or timber part to open part properties,
and click the UDAs button.
2. On the Parameters tab, click Fixed drawing main view, and select one of
the options:
• Top
• Back
• Bottom
• Start
• End

Define automatic drawing settings 626 Define drawing views

 • Front
3. Click OK.
4. Click Drawings & reports --> Drawing properties, and select assembly or
single part drawing properties.
5. Click View creation in the options tree, go to the Attributes tab, and set
Coordinate system to Fixed.
6. Click OK to activate the settings, and create the drawing using the current
settings.

NOTE If you set the advanced option

XS_SET_FIXEDMAINVIEW_UDA_TO_AFFECT_NUMBERING to STEEL, TIMBER or
MISC, and if identical steel, timber or miscellaneous material parts have
different options selected for Fixed drawing main view, they get different
assembly position numbers.
If you have set this advanced option, the Show top-in-form face command is
now available also for non-concrete material in the model.

Set viewing direction for parts in assembly drawings

In assembly drawings, you can define the front view viewing direction
separately for columns, beams and bracings.

NOTE Do not change the viewing direction settings in the middle of the project. If
you change the settings, some drawings may disappear.

Set viewing direction for columns in assembly drawings

1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Options and go to the Orientation
marks settings.
2. Under Viewing direction, use the Columns in assembly drawing option
to set the front view direction of columns:
• The values are As beam and bracing, North, East, South and West.
Select As beam and bracing to use the same viewing direction as you
use for beams and bracings. This is the default value.
• If you have set the coordinate system to local in View creation
properties, Tekla Structures uses the coordinate system of the column
when setting the viewing direction of the front view.
• If you have set the coordinate system to oriented, the column is in a
horizontal position, and the viewing direction of the front view is the
option you select (North, East, South or West).

Define automatic drawing settings 627 Define drawing views

 • If you have set the coordinate system to model, the column is in a
vertical position, and the viewing direction of the front view is the
option you select (North, East, South or West).
3. Click OK.

Set viewing direction for beams and bracings in assembly drawings

1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Options and go to the Orientation
marks settings.
2. Under Viewing direction, use the Beams and bracings in assembly
drawing option to set the front view direction:
• The values are North or east, North or west, South or east, and
South or west. The default value is North or east.
• If the beam or bracing is parallel to the X axis of the model, it is also
parallel to the X axis in the drawing.
• If you have set the coordinate system to model, and the beam or
bracing is sloped, it is also sloped in the drawing.
3. Click OK.

Change plate orientation in drawings

Plates created with the Contour plate command are automatically oriented in
drawings. The longest side of the plate always faces downwards in the
drawing. You can affect this orientation.

Example Description
Contour plate in the model view.
1. First creation point
2. Second creation point

Define automatic drawing settings 628 Define drawing views

 Example Description
Single-part drawing of the contour
plate.

Instead of using automatic plate orientation, you can set the plate main axis to
follow the line created by the first and second points you pick, regardless of
the plate dimensions. This enables you to define the plate orientation in
drawings or reports.
To define the contour plate orientation with first and second picked points:
1. Create the contour plate.
The first and second points you pick also define the plate’s main axis.
2. Double-click the plate to open the contour plate properties.
3. Click UDAs, and click the Orientation tab.

4. Select From 1st to 2nd creation point in the Main axis direction list.
5. Click Modify, and close the dialog box.
6. Click Drawings & reports --> Numbering --> Number modified objects
to update numbering.
7. To view the orientation of the plate, create a single-part drawing of the
plate.

Define automatic drawing settings 629 Define drawing views

 Example Description
Contour plate in the model view.
1. First creation point
2. Second creation point

Single-part drawing of the plate.

The user-defined attribute Main
axis direction is set to From 1st to
2nd creation point.

NOTE You can also affect the orientation of the plates using the advanced options
XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR and
XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR.

Show neighbor parts in views

You can select which neighbor parts to show in views and also automatically
extend the view boundary if necessary.

Neighbor parts refer to (optionally shown) parts that are close to the part that
is depicted in a drawing. Depending on settings, the neighbor parts may be
parts somehow connected to the part in question, or just parts that happen to
be close by.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click View creation, select
the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Neighbor part.

Define automatic drawing settings 630 Define drawing views

 5. On the Visibility tab, select the parts and that you want to show using the
following options:
• None does not show neighbor parts.
• Connected parts shows all parts connected to the model object.
• Connecting parts shows only the parts the model object is connected
to.
• All components combines the Connected parts and the Connecting
parts options.
• By extreme show all parts within the boundaries of the main and
secondary part. This setting is affected by the value entered for View
extension for neighbor parts on the Attributes (1) tab.
• Main/Secondary parts: Main parts shows only neighbor parts that
make the main part of an assembly or a cast unit.
• Main/Secondary parts: Secondary parts shows only neighbor parts
that are secondary parts of an assembly or a cast unit.
• Main/Secondary parts: Both shows both main and secondary parts.
• Skew parts: Yes shows skew parts as neighbor parts in the drawing,
No does not show skew parts as neighbor parts.
• Bolts: Yes shows the bolts in the neighbor parts, whereas No does not
show the neighbor part bolts.
6. On the Contents tab, set the representation of the neighbor part and
neighbor part bolts, and which lines and marks are shown
7. On the Appearance tab, set the colors and line types you want to use in
neighbor parts.
8. Depending on the drawing type, do one of the following:
Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings
a. Click Attributes in the options tree and enter a value by which to
extend the view in the View extension for neighbor parts box.
Try different values and check which one suits your needs. Often too
big values do not work very well. If you set the value to 0, neighbor
part extension is not shown.
b. To save the changes, click Save.
c. Click Close to return to drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings
a. Click OK to return to drawing properties.
b. Click View, and on the Attributes tab, enter a value by which to
extend the view in the View extension for neighbor parts box.
c. Click OK to return to drawing properties.

Define automatic drawing settings 631 Define drawing views

 9. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

TIP If you do not want to see neighbor part extensions in drawing views, set the
advanced option XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_NEIGHBOR_PART_EXTENSION to FALSE.

Example
In the following example, View extension for neighbor parts is set to 100. No
neighbor parts are located in this area.

See also
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Define drawing views (page 612)

Shorten or lengthen parts

You can use the shortening functionality in the model to make the part longer
or shorter in the drawing than in the model. You can shorten and lengthen
parts also in drawing views.
Lengthening can be useful for adding length to concrete precast parts in the
cast condition while the model stays in the erected state. The most common
use for this is to account for pre-stressing elastic shortening, where the part
actually shrinks a fraction of an inch after casting and after the strands are cut.

To Click the links below to find out

more
Shorten parts in the model, and in Shorten a part in the model
drawings, decrease the true length of (page 633)
the part

Define automatic drawing settings 632 Define drawing views

 To Click the links below to find out
more
Lengthen parts in the model, and in Lengthen a part in the model
drawings, increase the true length of (page 633)
the part
Shorten parts in drawing views at Shorten parts in drawing views
locations where there is nothing (page 634)
important in the part
Stretch shortened drawing views to fill Lengthen shortened parts in drawing
up empty areas of the drawing views (page 637)
Shorten parts in the selected view in Shorten parts view by view (page 325)
an open drawing

Shorten a part in the model

You can shorten parts in the model. When you do that the true length of the
part is decreased in the drawing.
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties in the property pane.
2. Go to the Deforming tab.
3. In the Shortening box, define the degree of shortening.
4. Click Modify.

When drawings are created, Tekla Structures decreases the true length of the
part by the value defined in the Shortening box. Shortening is applied linearly
along the length in drawings.

TIP To show the dimensions of the shortened part correctly in the drawings, set
Undeformed to Yes on the Attributes tab in the View creation panel in
drawing properties

See also
Shorten or lengthen parts (page 632)
Undeform deformed parts in drawings (page 638)

Lengthen a part in the model

You can lengthen parts in the model. When you do this, the true length of the
part is increased in the drawing.

To have a concrete part lengthened in cast unit drawings, you must enter a
negative value for shortening in part properties.
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties in the property pane.

Define automatic drawing settings 633 Define drawing views

 2. Go to the Deforming section.
3. In the Shortening box, enter a negative value.
For example, -20 would result in a part that is cast 20 units longer in the
drawing than the part in the model.
4. Click Modify.

See also
Shorten or lengthen parts (page 632)

Shorten parts in drawing views

If parts are large and do not include any important details, you can shorten
them in drawing views by cutting them.

Parts are only cut in empty areas. If there is something important, for example,
a stiffener in the part, the part is not cut in that area, because that area is not
considered empty.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
4. Go to the Attributes 2 tab.
5. In Cut parts, select one of the following:
• Yes to cut in both X and Y direction.
• Only in X direction
• Only in Y direction
6. In Minimum cut part length and Space between cut parts, select how
to cut the middle regions of the parts in drawing views.
The Minimum cut part length defines how long the part must at least be
to get shortened. The length of the part must be at least twice the entered
value.
The Space between cut parts defines the distance between cut parts on
paper. For example, try 3.0 mm.
7. Set Cut skew parts to Yes to also cut skew parts in views.
8. To save the changes, click Save.
9. Click Close.
10. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Define automatic drawing settings 634 Define drawing views

 Related advanced options
• You can show view shortening symbols in drawings by setting the advanced
options XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS
and XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS to
TRUE through File menu --> Settings --> Advanced options --> Drawing
Properties .
• You can also control the appearance of the view shortening symbol with
the advanced options XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR,
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE, and
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_WITH_ZIGZAG.

Examples
Below is an example of a part before and after cutting. Note that the width is
the same in the non-cut and cut part. Minimum cut part length is 1' 4" and
cut length is 3/8".

The following example describes the meaning of Minimum cut part length,
Space between cut parts, and an area that is not considered to be empty in
the part, and therefore the part is not cut. Minimum cut part length is set to
650, which means that the part is shortened in the view at 650.

Define automatic drawing settings 635 Define drawing views

 1. Space between cut parts is set to 1. This means the distance between
cut parts on paper (not in model).
2. There is not enough empty area between the stiffeners, and that is why
the part is not shortened at Minimum cut part length.
Below is an example of using the advanced options
XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS and
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_WITH_ZIGZAG.

See also
Shorten or lengthen parts (page 632)
Shorten parts view by view (page 325)
Define drawing views (page 612)

Define automatic drawing settings 636 Define drawing views

 View properties in drawings (page 844)

Lengthen shortened parts in drawing views

You can stretch shortened drawing views to fill up empty areas of the drawing .

After Tekla Structures has scaled drawing views and selected the drawing size,
it may stretch shortened views to fill up empty areas of the drawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click Layout and go to the Other tab.
4. Set Expand shortened parts to fit to Yes.
5. To save the changes, click Save.
6. Click OK and create the drawing.

See also
Shorten or lengthen parts (page 632)

Unfold polybeams in drawings

When you create a drawing, you can automatically unfold polybeams and bent
plates in single-part drawings. Tekla Structures unfolds the polybeams
according to unfolding parameters, which define the location of the neutral
axis when a profile is unfolded.

Limitations:
• You can unfold only beams that have been created with the Polybeam
command. You cannot unfold beams created with the Curved beam
command.
• You can unfold a polybeam only on one plane.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Single-part
drawing .
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click View creation in the options tree and go to the Attributes tab.
4. Set Unfolded to Yes.
5. To save the changes, click Save.
6. Click OK and create the drawing.

Define automatic drawing settings 637 Define drawing views

 Tekla Structures unfolds the polybeam in the single-part drawing.

NOTE The Unfolded setting in the View Properties properties dialog

box on the Attributes 2 tab is ignored in drawing creation when
you set this option on the Attributes tab of the Single-part
drawing properties dialog box.

See also
View properties in drawings (page 844)

Undeform deformed parts in drawings

You can undeform warped or cambered parts and show the developed
(undeformed) shape of deformed parts in drawings.

Deformed parts are parts that have been warped or cambered in the model.
You may want to undeform these parts if you want a concrete part to have two
states: as erected (in the model view) and as cast (in the drawing view), for
example.

NOTE Part shortenings are hidden if you set Undeformed to No.

1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click View creation and go to the Attributes tab.
4. To hide deforming angles and cambering, set Undeformed to Yes.
5. To save the changes, click Save.
6. Click Close.
7. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Define automatic drawing settings 638 Define drawing views

 The created drawing shows the developed shape and dimensions of the part.
See below for an example of a undeformed part in a drawing.

See below for an example of a warped part in a drawing.

NOTE The Undeformed option value in the View Properties properties dialog box
on the Attributes 2 tab is ignored in drawing creation when the Undeformed
option is set to a value on the View creation --> Attributes tab.

See also
View properties in drawings (page 844)

Show part openings and recesses in drawings

You can select whether you want to show symbols for part openings and
recesses (blind holes) in drawing views.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Depending on the drawing type, do one of the following:
Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings:
a. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want
to change, and click View properties.

Define automatic drawing settings 639 Define drawing views

 b. Go to the Attributes 2 tab.
c. Set Show openings/recess symbol to Yes.
d. Save the view properties and click Close.
General arrangement drawings:
a. Click View.
b. On the Attributes tab, set Show openings/recess symbol to Yes.
c. Click OK.
4. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

By default, Tekla Structures displays openings and recesses in the following

way:

Type of opening Shown as Examples

Hole through a part Hole symbol

Recess in the front face Recess symbol and

of a part bounding lines shown as
unbroken lines

Recess in the back face Recess symbol and

of a part bounding lines shown as
dashed lines
Remember to switch
hidden lines on for parts.

Add symbols in openings and recesses

Tekla Structures has some advanced options that you can use for adding
symbols in openings and recesses in your drawings.
1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Advanced options and go to
Drawing Properties.
2. Set the advanced option XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL to
FALSE to show the openings and recesses as follows:

Define automatic drawing settings 640 Define drawing views

 3. Set XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_BORDER_HOLES to TRUE to show
opening/recess symbols in openings located at part borders. This
advanced option is by default set to FALSE. The symbol used depends on
the setting of the advanced option
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL.

4. Set XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_CORNER_HOLES to TRUE to show

opening/recess symbols in openings located in part corners. This
advanced option is by default set to FALSE. The symbol used depends on
the setting of the advanced option
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL.

Define automatic drawing settings 641 Define drawing views

 See also
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Define drawing views (page 612)

Define automatic section view properties

You can set some automatic properties for section views before you create a
drawing. Properties for automatic section views need to be set in two places in
drawing properties: in the Section view pane, and in View creation --> View
properties . The settings on the Section view pane apply to all section views
in the drawing.

1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click Section view.
4. On the Attributes tab, set values for options Section depth and
Distance for combining cuts:
• Section depth defines the positive and negative depth of the section
view when sections are not combined. In an open drawing, you can
adjust the section view depth also by dragging the view boundary.
• Distance for combining cuts defines the distance range for
combining cut views.
• You can additionally control which section views get combined using
the advanced option
XS_DRAWING_CUT_VIEW_COMPARISON_CRITERIA.
5. Still on the Attributes tab, set the direction of the Left section, Middle
section and Right section to left or right.
6. Go to the Cutting line tab and set the section mark line length and offset
(distance between the section mark and the section).
7. Go to the Section mark tab and modify the section mark settings:

Define automatic drawing settings 642 Define drawing views

 a. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog
box.
b. Select the elements that you want to include in the mark.
c. If needed, select an element from the list and click Add frame and
select the frame Type and Color.
d. If needed, select an element from the list and select the text Color,
Font and Height.
e. Go to the Position tab and select the side to show the text, the text
position, the horizontal and vertical offset, and the text rotation
options.
f. In Start number or letter of section view and symbol label, select
whether you want to start the section view and section symbol labels
with a number or a letter:
• You can enter any number starting from 1, or any letter A - Z or a -
z (also shown in uppercase in the label).
• If you use a letter, and the entered string is longer than one letter,
only the first letter is shown. If you use numbers, all entered
numbers are shown.
• The start number in the label changes only when you change it in
the drawing properties before creating a drawing, and when you
change it in an existing drawing and recreate the drawing, in which
case the labels for all automatically included section views and all
new section views will change.
g. Click OK to return to drawing properties.
8. Click View creation and add the section and end views you want to
create.
9. Still in the View creation panel, select the view and the properties that
you want to change and click View Properties.
10. Adjust the view properties as required.
11. Click Save to save the view properties.
12. Click Close.
13. Repeat steps 9 - 12 for all the section and end views you create.
14. To save the changes, click Save.
Now you can create drawings with automatic section or end view properties
that you just modified and saved.

See also
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Section view properties (page 849)

Define automatic drawing settings 643 Define drawing views

 Examples of section view and mark settings (page 644)

Examples of section view and mark settings

Combining section views

1. Distance for combining cuts = 1’- 4"

2. Section depth = 4"
3. Combined sections

Section view direction

The arrow in the section view symbol indicates the direction of the section
view, as shown below:

1. Left section, right direction

2. Middle section, right direction
3. Right section, left direction

Section marks
See below for examples of section marks:

Define automatic drawing settings 644 Define drawing views

 See also
Define automatic section view properties (page 642)
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Section view properties (page 849)

Show section and end view direction marks in drawings

You can display view direction marks in section views and end views in
drawings.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
In this case, select a section view or an end view.
4. Go to the Label tab in View Properties.
5. Select one of the options in View direction marks: Show marks:
• Symbol only
• Label only
• Symbol and label
• None does not show any marks.
6. Define the height of the symbol and text label in Height.
If you try to use 0, you will get an error message.

Define automatic drawing settings 645 Define drawing views

 7. To save the changes, click Save.
8. Click Close.
9. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

The view direction mark is shown with a small symbol (optionally with a text
label) around the end or section view.

The view orientation mark position follows the label position setting. In the
image below, Center by view restriction box has been selected for the label.

Tips
• You can drag view direction marks to a better place in a drawing view: click
the view frame to activate the handles, point the handle, press and hold

Define automatic drawing settings 646 Define drawing views

 down the left mouse button and drag. The view frame is resized
automatically, if necessary.

• You can define the view direction mark symbol in File menu --> Settings --
> Advanced options --> Drawing Properties by using the following
advanced options:
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP
The default symbol is xsteel@66.

See also
Section view properties (page 849)

Define the location for end views and section views

You can always place section views and end views next to the main view or in
any empty location in a single-part, assembly, and cast unit drawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click Layout and go to the Other tab.
4. Set Align end views with main view to Yes to place the views next to the
main view.
5. Set Align section views with main view to Yes to place the views next to
the main view.
6. To save the changes in a drawing properties file, click Save at the top.

Define automatic drawing settings 647 Define drawing views

 7. Click OK and create the drawing.
If you select No, Tekla Structures places the section and end views in any
available location.

Example
End and section views in any location (No selected).

End and section views beside the main view (Yes selected).

Define automatic drawing settings 648 Define drawing views

 See also
Define drawing views (page 612)
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Section view properties (page 849)
Layout properties (page 841)
Define automatic section view properties (page 642)

8.5 Define dimensioning

Dimensions are associative annotation objects that represent building object
measurements. Dimensions are more than lines or vectors; they are
interactive callouts of geometry. In automatic dimensioning Tekla Structures
creates dimensions in the whole drawing or in drawing views based on
dimensioning settings you define before creating the drawing.
In single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings automatic dimensions are set
view by view.
In general arrangement drawings, automatic dimensions are set for the whole
drawing.
You can define automatic dimensions settings before you create a drawing
and you can also modify the settings after you have created the drawing.

Define automatic drawing settings 649 Define dimensioning

 To Click the links below to find out
more
Create automatic dimensions in Automatic view-level dimensions
single-part, assembly or cast unit (page 651)
views
Add automatic view-level dimensions
(page 655)
Example workflow: Create automatic
overall and hole dimensions on view
level (page 661)
Check the settings affecting Dimensioning rule properties
dimension creation (page 669)
Create a filter that is needed in view- Create a drawing view filter for view-
level dimensioning for selecting the level dimensioning (page 678)
objects that you want to dimension
See examples of different Various scenarios of using different
combinations of dimensioning types dimensioning types (page 687)
and settings
Example: Use both view-level
dimensioning and integrated
dimensioning (page 687)
Example: Use only integrated
dimensioning (page 689)
Example: Use only view-level
dimensioning (page 688)
Examples: Dimensions created with
view-level dimensioning (page 691)
Use the traditional way of Add automatic view-specific
dimensioning in the Dimensioning dimensions using dimensioning type
dialog box by using the dimensioning Integrated (page 697)
type Integrated
Create dual dimension tags Add automatic dual dimensions
automatically in all types of drawings (page 722)
Control the dimensions that Tekla Add dimensions to unfolded parts
Structures adds for unfolded parts (page 723)
Create minimum and maximum Add minimum and maximum position
position dimensions for bolts dimensions to bolts (page 724)
Add extensions to dimension lines Create dimension line extensions
(page 725)
Adjust extension line settings Set the dimension extension line
length (page 239)
Adjust absolute dimensions Change the appearance of absolute
dimensions (page 726)

Define automatic drawing settings 650 Define dimensioning

 To Click the links below to find out
more
Exaggerate narrow dimensions to Create exaggerated dimensions
make them easier to read (page 726)
Use another prefix in radial Change the prefix in radial
dimensions dimensions (page 728)
Dimension plates using advanced Add dimensions to plates (page 729)
options
Adjust profile dimensioning using Add dimensions to profiles
dimension planes table (page 732)
See examples of sloped dimension Sloped dimension texts (page 735)
texts
Add automatic dimensions in general Add automatic dimensions to general
arrangement drawings arrangement drawings (page 736)

Automatic view-level dimensions

Automatic view-level dimensioning gives you full control on the dimensions in
each drawing view you create, with a lot of dimensioning options. Automatic
view-level dimensioning can be used in single-part, assembly and cast unit
drawings.
In view-level dimensioning, the dimensions are created based on the rules you
define. You can define what you want to dimension, where the dimensions are
placed, in which order they are created, and which settings you want to use for
each dimension. You can dimension shapes and holes, for example.
Below you can find short description on how to proceed in dimensioning.
1. When you click the View creation option in the options tree in drawing
properties, you are able to select the views to be created and the view
properties to be used.

Define automatic drawing settings 651 Define dimensioning

 2. Click View properties.
3. Click Dimensioning in the options tree.
In the Dimensioning panel, you can add rules by clicking Add rule. Then
select which dimensioning rules you want to use in the Dimensioning
type column and the desired dimensioning rule properties file.

4. You can modify the selected rule by clicking Edit Rule.

In the Dimensioning Rule Properties dialog box, you can select what to
dimension, how to dimension, which objects to measure from, where to
place the dimensions, and select the dimension properties. The
Dimension properties list contains properties files that you have saved in
the object level Dimension Properties dialog box in an open drawing. For
example, you may want to use some special font or color in the
dimensions. To do this, double-click a dimension in a drawing, make the
necessary changes and save the properties file. Then you can load the
properties here.
To select different dimension line properties for each side, deselect the
Same on all sides and select the dimension properties from the lists.

Define automatic drawing settings 652 Define dimensioning

 If you select Intergrated dimensions, the Dimensioning Properties
dialog box is displayed. Make your changes to the settings on the tabs and
save the properties file with a unique name using Save as. You can also
load dimension properties here as well.

Define automatic drawing settings 653 Define dimensioning

 5. When you have set the rule properties, give a name to the rules file and
click Save as.
6. Click Close to return to the Dimensioning panel.
7. Ensure that you have selected correct dimensioning properties files for
the dimensioning rules.

Define automatic drawing settings 654 Define dimensioning

 8. Enter a unique name for the view properties in the box at the top of the
View Properties dialog box and click Save.
Now you can select the saved view properties for a view in the View creation
panel. These view properties contain the saved dimensioning properties.

See also
Dimensioning rule properties (page 669)
Add automatic view-level dimensions (page 655)
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Add automatic view-level dimensions

The next examples will go through the basic workflow of creating automatic
dimensions on view level. The goal is to create drawing properties that you can
use later on to create similar drawings, including all necessary views, having
the dimensions that you want, just by loading the appropriate drawing
properties file and then creating the drawing.
If you want to use Integrated dimensions, see Add automatic view-specific
dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated (page 697), or dimension
spiral beams, see Dimension spiral beams (page 460).
The workflow consists of four tasks:
1. Define the drawing properties file (page 655)
2. Define the drawing views to be created (page 656)
3. Define view dimensions (page 657)
4. Connect view properties to views and save drawing properties (page 660)

Define the drawing properties file

Create a drawing properties file that will pull together all the settings that you
define in the Drawing Properties dialog box, including view-level dimension
settings. This is phase 1 in the workflow Add automatic view-level dimensions
(page 655).
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.

Define automatic drawing settings 655 Define dimensioning

 2. In the drawing properties dialog box, load the drawing properties that you
want to use as a basis for the new properties by selecting from the list at
the top.
If you do not have any suitable drawing properties available, give the
drawing properties file a unique name and save the properties by clicking
Save.
Now you have created a drawing properties file where you can save the new
dimensioning settings.

Define the drawing views to be created

Select the views you want to create. This is phase 2 in the workflow Add
automatic view-level dimensions (page 655).

To create the desired views and define the view properties to use:
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load the drawing properties that you created and saved in the phase 1 of
this workflow.
3. Click View creation in the options tree.
4. In the next panel, click Add row to add new views in your drawing.

5. For those views that you want to create, set the on/off control to On.
If you select Auto, the view is created if relevant dimensions are created
with the used dimensioning settings. If relevant dimensions are not

Define automatic drawing settings 656 Define dimensioning

 created, neither is the view. Tekla Structures can automatically decide
whether dimensions are relevant or not.
Now you have defined the views that you want to have in the drawing you will
create. You can save the list of views using Save, and then load it if you need
the same set of views in another drawing.

Define view dimensions

Define the dimensioning rule properties to be used in the drawing views that
you just created. This is phase 3 in the workflow Add automatic view-level
dimensions (page 655).

If you are planning to use filters to select the parts that you want to dimension,
you need to create the drawing view filters first, for example, for selecting
embeds, inner panels or outer panels.
You need to create separate dimensioning rules for each dimensioning type.
For example, the rules made with Overall dimensions are valid for Overall
dimensions only, not for Shape dimensions, for example.
To define dimensions for a view:
1. Select a view in the View creation panel and click View properties.
2. In the View Properties dialog box, click Dimensioning in the options tree
to define the dimensions to be created for the selected view.
3. Click Add row to add a rule.
Here we add two rows.
The order of the rules in the list defines the order of the dimension lines
in the drawing: the dimension created by the first rule is placed closest to
the dimensioned object
At the moment, the filter can only be set for the Integrated dimensions in
this panel. You are able to select the filter in the Dimensioning Rule
Properties dialog box, and you can leave the selection Current assembly
in the Filter column for all rules.
Leave Current assembly in the Filter column.
4. Select the Dimensioning type for the selected rules.

Define automatic drawing settings 657 Define dimensioning

 Here we select overall dimensions and hole dimensions:

5. Click one of the rules and click Edit rule.

6. Depending on the selected dimensioning type, a specific Dimensioning
rule properties dialog box is displayed. Do one of the following:
• For most of the dimensioning types, you need to define what to
dimension, and where and how to place the dimensions. From the
Dimension properties list, select a suitable set of saved dimension
properties to change the dimension appearance, dimension text font
size or color, for example. If you want, you can define different

Define automatic drawing settings 658 Define dimensioning

 dimension line properties for each side by deselecting Same on all
sides and selecting different dimension properties.

• If you have selected dimensioning type Spiral beam dimensions,

select predefined dimension properties. If none of the available
properties suit your needs, open a drawing, click Drawing -->
Properties --> Dimension when a drawing is open, and edit and save
the needed dimension properties so that they are available for
selecting in the spiral beam Dimensioning rule properties dialog box
for the three dimension types.

7. Give the dimensioning rule a unique name and click Save as.

Define automatic drawing settings 659 Define dimensioning

 8. Click Close.
9. Define other dimensioning rules needed for the view following the steps 5
- 8.
10. Select correct properties for the rules.

Even though the dimension lines are created and placed by default in the
order that you define them in the View creation panel, Tekla Structures
searches for the first suitable location for the dimension lines according to
the placement and protection settings. So the dimension placement may
not always follow the creation order. Check the result and adjust the
location of the dimension lines if necessary.
11. In the top-left corner, give a unique name to the view properties and click
Save to save your changes to the view properties file.
Now you have created new view properties containing two types of
dimensions. You can connect this properties file with a drawing view and use
the defined dimensions in that view.

Connect view properties to views and save drawing properties

Connect then new view properties to drawing views and save drawing
properties. This is phase 4 in the workflow Add automatic view-level
dimensions (page 655).

1. In the View creation panel, select correct view properties for the views
that you are creating.

Define automatic drawing settings 660 Define dimensioning

 In the example below, one front view and one section view are created,
and the views have been connected to view properties cu_FRONT and
cu_SECTION .

2. Remember that you created or loaded the drawing properties file in phase
1 of this workflow. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK
and create the drawing.
Tekla Structures creates the drawing according to the definitions in various
properties files.

Example workflow: Create automatic overall and hole

dimensions on view level
In this example workflow, you will create a cast unit wall panel drawing that
contains
• one front view with automatic overall and hole dimensions
• one section view with overall dimensions
In overall and hole dimension rules you will apply the dimension properties
that you have earlier created and saved manually in a cast unit drawing. You
will save the created dimensioning rule properties in view properties. Finally,
you will save the created view properties in drawing properties and create a
cast unit drawing.
Before starting, create manually in the object-level Dimension Properties
dialog box in an open cast unit drawing a dimension properties file
dim_font_5, where the dimension text font size is 5.00, and a dimension
properties file dim_red, where the dimension color is red.
In this example, you are going to dimension the following cast unit wall panel
in the model:

Define automatic drawing settings 661 Define dimensioning

 Define the views to be created
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Cast unit
drawing .
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click View creation in the options tree.
4. In the View creation panel, click Add row to add new views in your
drawing.
In this example, you want to add two views, one front view and one
section view.

Define automatic drawing settings 662 Define dimensioning

 5. Set the on/off setting to On for the views that you want to create.
If the list contains extra views, set them to Off or use the Delete row button to
delete them.
Now you have defined the views that you want to create. Next, you need to
define the dimensions that you want to have in the front view and section
view.

Define front view dimensions

1. Select a view in the View creation list.
In this example, select one Front view.
2. Click View properties and then click Dimensioning in the option tree to
define the dimensions to be created in the front view.
3. In the Dimensioning panel, use Add row to add two new dimension rules
in the dimensioning rules list.
4. Select Overall dimensions as the first rule and Hole dimensions as the
second.
The order of the rules in the list defines the order of the dimension lines
in the drawing: the dimensions created by the first rule is placed closest to
the dimensioned part.
Leave Current assembly in the Filter column for both rules.

5. To the define overall dimension rules, click the Overall dimensions row,
and click Edit Rule.

Define automatic drawing settings 663 Define dimensioning

 6. In the Dimensioning Rule Properties dialog box, define what to
dimension, where and how to place the dimensions, and which dimension
properties to use.
• Select the check boxes above and on left side of the object, and also
the check box in the upper-left corner to link the dimensions together.
• Use default values in the Start point lists. The default values are left
for the Horizontal and bottom for the Vertical dimension.
• From the Dimension properties list, select a suitable set of saved
dimension properties. In this example, select the dimension properties
file dim_font_5, which contains a definition for a larger font.
• Give the dimensioning rule a unique name and click Save as.
In this example, the name overall is used.

7. Click Close.
8. Next, define the hole dimensions. In the Dimensioning panel, select Hole
dimensions from the dimensioning rules list and click Edit Rule.
9. Create dimensioning rules for hole dimensions:
• Select the check boxes above and on left side of the object, and also
the check box in the upper-left corner to link the dimensions together.
• Use the default values in the Start point lists.

Define automatic drawing settings 664 Define dimensioning

 • In Close lines, select the setting that extends the dimension lines to
the other end of the cast unit.
• In Dimension to, select the setting that dimensions to both ends.
• From the Dimension properties list, select a suitable set of saved
dimension properties. In this example, select the dimension properties
file dim_red containing a definition for red dimensions.
• Give the hole dimensioning rule a unique name and click Save as.
In this example, the name hole is used.

10. Click Close.

Define automatic drawing settings 665 Define dimensioning

 11. For the Overall dimensions rule, select overall properties, and for the
Hole dimensions rule, select hole properties from the Properties
column.

12. In the View Properties dialog box, give the front view properties a unique
name and click Save as.
In this example, the front view properties are saved with the name
CU_Front.

Now you have saved the view properties for the front view containing overall
and hole dimensions. Leave the View Properties dialog box open for further
modifications.

Define section view dimensions

A section view is also needed in the cast unit drawing, because you want to
show the wall thickness. Next, you will create overall dimensions for the
section view.
1. In the View creation panel, select the Section views row and click View
properties.
2. Load the view properties file CU_Front.
You can start creating new view properties on the basis of already existing
view properties.
3. Click Dimensioning in the options tree.
4. In the Dimensioning panel, delete the unnecessary hole dimension rule
by clicking the Hole dimensions row and Delete row.
You will only need the overall dimensions in the section view.
5. Click the Overall dimensions row and click Edit Rule.
6. Create a dimensioning rule for the overall dimensions in the section view:
• Select the check box below the object only, because you only want to
show the thickness.
• Select the same dimension properties as for the overall dimensions in
the front view, because you want to show the dimension text with a
little bit larger font: dim_font_5.

Define automatic drawing settings 666 Define dimensioning

 • Give the rule a unique name and click Save as.
In this example, the name thickness is used.

7. Click Close.
8. In the Dimensioning panel, select thickness in the Properties column
as the property file for the overall dimensioning rule.
9. Give a unique name for the section view properties and click Save as.
In this example, the name CU_Section is used.
10. Click OK.
Now you have saved the view properties for the section view containing
overall dimensions.

Connect view properties to views and save drawing properties

1. In the View creation panel, select CU_Front for the front view and
CU_Section for the section view.

Define automatic drawing settings 667 Define dimensioning

 2. In the Drawing Properties dialog box, give the drawing properties a
unique name and click Save.
In this example, the name cu_wall_panel is used.

3. Click OK and create the cast unit drawing.

Tekla Structures creates the cast unit drawing according your definitions in
different properties files. The cast unit drawing contains a front view and a
section view. The overall dimensions in both views have a little bit larger font,
and the front view has red hole dimensions. Only the wall thickness is
dimensioned in the section view.
You can use the drawing properties file cu_wall_panel later on when you
need drawings with similar settings.

Define automatic drawing settings 668 Define dimensioning

 TIP You can still change the dimensioning settings in the views after creating
the cast unit drawing:
1. Double click the drawing view frame to open the view properties
dialog box.
2. Click Dimensioning in the options tree to open the Dimensioning
panel where you can select and then edit the dimensioning rules.

Define automatic drawing settings 669 Define dimensioning

 Dimensioning rule properties
The following table describes the options and their settings in the
Dimensioning Rule Properties dialog box. This dialog box can be opened by
selecting View creation in a Drawing Properties dialog box, selecting a view
row and then clicking View Properties --> Dimensioning --> Edit Rule .
If you have selected Integrated (page 697) as the dimension type, the
Dimensioning properties (page 861) dialog box will be displayed instead.

Setting Description
What is dimensioned Sets the dimensioning type:
• Overall dimensions creates dimensions for the
bounding box of the objects you select in the
Measure from list.
• Edge shape creates dimensions for the edge of
the object selected in the Measure from list.
For sandwich walls, the default setting Cast
unit / Assembly may not give the desired
result with Edge shape. Then you can
dimension the internal and external layers
separately according to the part name.
• Secondary parts creates dimensions for the
secondary parts of a cast unit or an assembly.
• Holes creates dimensions for the holes of the
objects selected in the Measure from list. The
hole dimensions are combined according to the
Combine on one line setting.
NOTE: The Holes dimensioning type does not
dimension bolts, you need to use the
Integrated dimensions to get the bolt
dimensions.
• Recesses creates dimensions for the recesses
of the objects selected in the Measure from
list. The hole dimensions are combined
according to the Combine on one line setting.
• Distance to grid creates dimensions from the
grid line to the bounding box of the object
selected in the Measure from list. This setting
works only when the grid lines are visible.
• Filter can be used to dimension anything that
can be filtered. It is often used when
dimensioning embeds. For example, you can

Define automatic drawing settings 670 Define dimensioning

 Setting Description
dimension bolt locations after you have created
a filter for bolts.
When you select Filter from the What is
dimensioned list, a list is displayed where you
can select the filter. The filter is a drawing view
filter and you need to create it beforehand to
be able to use it here.
Dimension line Controls on which sides of the cast unit the
location and linking dimensions will be created.

• Dimension line locations are rotated together

with the drawing view if the view is manually
rotated.
• When selecting both sides, top and bottom or
left and right, the objects will be dimensioned
on the side that is closest to the object.
• When only a part of the cast unit is selected for
the rule, one of the check boxes will be dimmed
and you cannot select it.

• When you have selected one vertical and one

horizontal dimension line, the linking check
boxes in the corners are activated, and you can
link the perpendicular dimension lines. The
check boxes are dimmed by default.

Define automatic drawing settings 671 Define dimensioning

 Setting Description

• You can select objects for dimensioning from

the whole cast unit or only from one half of the
cast unit. If you do this, objects in the other half
will be ignored in dimension creation. The
default value is the whole cast unit.

Orientation Orients the dimensions along the sloped edge of a

part. Another possibility is to create horizontal or
vertical dimensions.
• This option is visible only when the
dimensioning type Filter or Edge shape is
selected.
• When Filter is selected, there are two settings
available for orientation.
The first setting places the dimensions along
the sloped edge:

The second setting places the dimensions

horizontally and vertically:

Define automatic drawing settings 672 Define dimensioning

 Setting Description

• When Edge shape is selected, there are three

settings available for orientation. First two
settings work in the same way as the first two
Filter settings. The first setting is the default
value. The third one creates both dimensions:

Minimum length for Defines the minimum length of skewed sections

skew section when dimensions are still created for skew
sections. The default value is 300 mm. For
example, when you use the value 500 mm and the
skew section is shorter than 500 mm, the

Define automatic drawing settings 673 Define dimensioning

 Setting Description
dimensions are not created along the skew section,
but horizontally and vertically instead.

Start point Defines where the origin points for the dimensions
are:
• The default values are left for the Horizontal
and bottom for the Vertical dimension.
•
The setting marked with symbol chooses
the nearest edge as the dimension origin, for
every dimension separately. In the example
below, the object is closer to the right edge, and
so the horizontal dimension starts from there.

Vertical = Horizontal Often the settings are similar for both directions,
and when this option is used, only vertical settings
need to be set.
Close lines Defines whether the dimension lines extend to the
other end of the cast unit or assembly or not

Define automatic drawing settings 674 Define dimensioning

 Setting Description

. The dimension lines extend to the other end

by default.
Dimension to Defines which points of the selected objects are
dimensioned:
• Both ends is the default.

• If you select the center point setting and the

object is a custom part (=embed), Tekla
Structures will use the component insertion
point, which is not always in the center. For
other objects, the actual center point will be
used.
Round holes Defines whether the round holes will be

dimensioned by center point or diameter

:
• This option is visible only when Holes or
Recesses is selected.
• The diameter is the default value.
• Currently, round holes are identified only by cut
part profile (prefix D). If you create the round
hole using round chamfers, for example, the
hole will not be dimensioned.
Dimension properties Select and apply dimensions line settings defined
in the dimension properties file that has been
saved earlier in theDimension Properties dialog
box in a drawing. The default value is standard.
If you select Same on all sides, the settings in the
same dimension properties file are used on all
sides. If you deselect Same on all sides, you can
select and apply different dimension line
properties for Top, Bottom, Left and Right side.

Define automatic drawing settings 675 Define dimensioning

 Setting Description
Measure from Defines the objects that will be used as the origin
point for the dimensions. The available settings
are:
• Cast unit/Assembly: This is the default value. If
you select this setting, you have three more
settings available:
• Only concrete/steel parts: For a cast unit,
only concrete parts are used, and for steel
only steel parts.
• All parts
• All parts and rebars
• Main part: This setting uses cast unit or
assembly main part.
• Part name: If you select Part name, you can
define the part name.
• Filter: If you select Filter, you can use a
predefined filter for selecting the objects that
you want to use as dimension origin points.
• Current part: Select Current part when you
are dimensioning a single part.
• Bounding box: Uses the bounding box of an
object as the origin point for the dimensions.
This option is only available in filter, hole, recess
and secondary part dimensioning.
• Nearest edge: Uses the nearest edge an object
as the origin point for the dimensions. This
option is only available in filter, hole, recess and
secondary part dimensioning.
Combine on one line Creates a rule based on a filter, for example, for
embeds (EB_*), and then groups the embeds
according to the main part name, so that embeds
with different names will get their own dimension
lines. The filtered object can be a part, a reinforcing
bar or an assembly. The available settings are:
• All objects (default)
• By name
• By position number
• No
When Holes or Recesses is selected, the Combine
on one line option changes to display suitable

Define automatic drawing settings 676 Define dimensioning

 Setting Description
settings for holes or recesses. The available
settings are:
• All holes (default)
• Any holes of the same size
• By cut part name
• No
Combine only objects Combines only the dimensions of objects that are
that have the same on the same horizontal or vertical line, or
dimensions of objects that have the same Z
X or Y coordinate
coordinate. By default, these options are not
Z coordinate selected.
Tolerance The tolerance is the maximum distance between
objects when Tekla Structures still considers the
objects to be on the same line. 50 mm is the
default value.
Preferred combining Sets the preferred direction for combining
direction dimensions if an object can be combined both in
horizontal and in vertical direction. X is the default
value.
Do not create Defines the minimum length of the dimensions for
dimensions shorter Tekla Structures to create them. 0 is the default
than value, which means that all dimensions are
created.
Do not dimension Defines the minimum diameter for the holes for
holes smaller than Tekla Structures to create the dimensions.
With this option you can prevent the creation of
dimensions for small holes. The distance is the
shortest dimension of a hole. If any dimension of
the hole is larger than the given value, the hole will
be dimensioned in all directions. For example, with
value 40, a rectangular hole of 80*30 will get both
dimensions 80 and 30. Default value is 0, which
means that all dimensions are created.
Component objects Defines how component objects are dimensioned:
• By reference points (default) places the
dimensioning point to the first insertion point
of the component. Only one dimension will be
created for each component regardless of the
number of parts inside the components.
• As secondary objects creates separate
dimensions for each part inside the
component.

Define automatic drawing settings 677 Define dimensioning

 Dimension rule properties for spiral beam dimensioning
When you select dimensioning type Spiral beam dimensions, and click Edit
rule, a different Dimensioning rule properties dialog box is displayed.

Setting Description
Straight dimensions Select predefined dimension properties. If none of
the available properties suit your needs, open a
Angle dimensions
drawing, click Drawing --> Properties -->
Angle and radius Dimension, and edit and save the needed
dimensions dimension properties so that they are available for
selecting in the spiral beam Dimensioning rule
properties dialog box for the three dimension
types.

See also
Add automatic view-level dimensions (page 655)
Create a drawing view filter for view-level dimensioning (page 678)
Dimension and dimensioning properties (page 850)
Spiral beams in drawings (page 459)

Create a drawing view filter for view-level dimensioning

You need to create a drawing view filter to use the Filter option in view-level
dimension creation in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings. The filter
needs to be created on view level, because you create the dimensions view by
view.
1. In an open drawing, double-click the drawing view frame to open the View
Properties dialog box.
2. Click Filter.
3. Click Add row and define the filter properties.
• Add a row first to define the Object type object category. This needs
to be defined for all drawing view filters that are going to be used in
dimensioning definitions. Set the Value to Part or Reinforcing bar
• Then add a filter row that selects all parts in a specific class, for
example.

Define automatic drawing settings 678 Define dimensioning

 4. Use Save to save the filter with a unique name.
5. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
Now you can select the drawing view filter from the filter list in the
Dimensioning Rule Properties dialog box and use it for dimensioning. If the
filter is not displayed immediately after creation, refresh the list by closing and
opening the dialog box.

Examples
Have a look at some filtering examples:
Create a filter for holes and recesses (page 680)
Create a filter for the main part of an assembly (page 681)
Create an exclude filter for dimension tag (page 682)
Create an exclude filter for stirrups in section views (page 682)

Define automatic drawing settings 679 Define dimensioning

 See also
Dimensioning rule properties (page 669)

Create a filter for holes and recesses

You can create a filter for cut parts. The filter can be a drawing view filter or a
model selection filter.

To create a model selection filter for holes and recesses:

1. Click the Selection filter button on the Selecting toolbar.

2. In the Object Group - Selection Filter dialog box, add the first row:
• Select Object as category, Object type as property and Equals as
condition.
• To fill 11 in the value, use Select from model, and select a cut part.
3. Add the second row:
• Select Template as category, enter NAME in uppercase as property and
select Equals as condition.
• Enter the name of the template as the value.
4. Select check boxes Selection filter and All drawing types.

Too see all available filter types, click

5. Save the filter with a unique name using Save as.

Define automatic drawing settings 680 Define dimensioning

 See also
Create a drawing view filter for view-level dimensioning (page 678)

Create a filter for the main part of an assembly

When your subassembly consists of many objects, but you only want to select
the main part for dimensioning, you can create a filter for that.

Define automatic drawing settings 681 Define dimensioning

 Create an exclude filter for dimension tag
Often several objects need to be excluded from dimension tag content. You
can exclude everything else from the tag content, except the parts that you
want to include.

With the example filter shown below it is possible to exclude everything else
from the tag content, except cut parts that have the name ‘HVAC’.

Create an exclude filter for stirrups in section views

The view-level dimensioning currently dimensions reinforcing bar polygon
points along the center line of the reinforcing bar. You can filter, where
stirrups (shape 14) are excluded but all other reinforcing bars are
dimensioned.

Below is an example of a stirrup in section view. In some cases, the resulting

dimensions are created similarly regardless of the hook type.

Define automatic drawing settings 682 Define dimensioning

 To avoid this kind of results, you can use suitable filtering criteria. See below
for an example of a filter, where stirrups (shape 14) are excluded but all other
reinforcing bars are dimensioned.

Dimensioning method of shapes, holes and recesses

The logic and functionality of shape dimensions, hole dimensions and recess
dimensions in view-level dimensioning is clear and predictable. The definition,
which geometry is shape, hole or recess is done only once for the object to be
dimensioned, and that definition is used in all drawing views.
The definition of shape and hole is done by looking at the shadow of an object
in three directions X, Y and Z in the following way:
• Points along the outer edge of the shadow are dimensioned as a shape.
• Inner loops in the shadow will be dimensioned as holes.
• All other geometry points that are not visible in the shadow, will be
dimensioned as recesses.
In the image below there are some examples of each geometry type:

Define automatic drawing settings 683 Define dimensioning

 1. Holes
2. Recesses
3. Shapes

Examples
Below is an example of a shape in a model object and the dimensions in a
drawing:

Define automatic drawing settings 684 Define dimensioning

 Below is an example of a hole in a model object and the dimensions in a
drawing:

Define automatic drawing settings 685 Define dimensioning

 Below is an example of a recess in a model object and the dimensions in a
drawing:

Define automatic drawing settings 686 Define dimensioning

 See also
Automatic view-level dimensions (page 651)
Dimensioning rule properties (page 669)

Various scenarios of using different dimensioning types

Depending on what you want to dimension and how, you can create different
sets of dimensioning rules to get what you need. Have a look at the examples
scenarios below:
1. Example: Use only view-level dimensioning (page 688)
2. Example: Use both view-level dimensioning and integrated dimensioning
(page 687)
3. Example: Use only integrated dimensioning (page 689)

Define automatic drawing settings 687 Define dimensioning

 Example: Use both view-level dimensioning and integrated
dimensioning
Both view-level and integrated dimensioning methods are used. This is
example 2 in the list of scenarios Various scenarios of using different
dimensioning types (page 687).
In this example, integrated, overall and shape dimensions are created for both
top and front view.

Example: Use only view-level dimensioning

Only dimension types suitable for precast objects are used. This is example 1
in the list of scenarios Various scenarios of using different dimensioning types
(page 687).
Each rule creates one dimension line on selected sides of the cast unit or
assembly. In the image below, four rules have been defined and four
dimension lines are created. Only the first rule (shape dimensions) is

Define automatic drawing settings 688 Define dimensioning

 configured to create dimensions on all sides. Other rules are configured to
create dimensions only on two sides. Rules are executed in the order they
appear in the list; the topmost rule first, then the second, and so on. The first
rule is closest to the part being dimensioned.

Example: Use only integrated dimensioning

Only integrated dimensioning is used for creating the reinforcing bar
dimensions. This is example 3 in the list of example scenarios Various
scenarios of using different dimensioning types (page 687).
When you select Integrated dimensions as the Dimensioning type and click
Edit Rule in the View Dimensioning Rules dialog box, the Dimensioning
Properties dialog box is displayed. Go to the Reinforcement dimensions tab
and define the desired properties. On the General tab there are some options

Define automatic drawing settings 689 Define dimensioning

 for controlling dimension properties, and you can load object level dimension
properties for various dimension types. Save the changes with Save or Save
as to save the properties file for later use.

When you return to the View Dimensioning Rules dialog box by clicking
Close, you can attached the new integrated dimensioning properties to the
Integrated dimensioning rule.

Define automatic drawing settings 690 Define dimensioning

 Examples: Dimensions created with view-level
dimensioning
See below for examples of dimensions created with different settings in the
Dimensioning Rule Properties dialog box.
Overall dimensions

Edge shape

Define automatic drawing settings 691 Define dimensioning

 Secondary parts

Holes

Recesses

Define automatic drawing settings 692 Define dimensioning

 Distance to grid

Filter: Embeds

Define automatic drawing settings 693 Define dimensioning

 Filter: Surface treatment

Filter: Bolts
To get the location of every bolt in the bolt group dimensioned, set Dimension

to to midpoint :

Define automatic drawing settings 694 Define dimensioning

 Filter: Reinforcing bars and strands

Use the midpoint option to dimension each bar in a group:

Start point and end point option will dimension the first and the last
reinforcing bar in a group:

Define automatic drawing settings 695 Define dimensioning

 If you want to have separate dimension lines for reinforcing bars that are not
of the same size, set the Combine on one line to By position number:

To make the rule creation easier, the midpoint setting of the Dimension to
option works so that it will create dimensions to start point and end point of
the reinforcing bars that are parallel to the view plane:

If you want to get different size of reinforcing bars on separate dimension

lines, set Combine on one line to By position number:

Define automatic drawing settings 696 Define dimensioning

 See also
Dimensioning rule properties (page 669)

Add automatic view-specific dimensions using

dimensioning type Integrated
In the Dimensioning dialog box, you can control what gets dimensioned and
how in a drawing. You can experiment with different combinations of options
to achieve different kinds of dimensioning effects.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
4. Click Dimensioning.
5. Select Integrated dimensions as the dimensioning type, select
dimensioning rule properties and click Edit Rule.
6. Select the dimensions to create and adjust the related settings.
The available tabs and settings depend on the drawing type:
• On the Part dimensions tab, select the part dimensions to create and
adjust the related settings (Dimensioning properties - Part dimensions
tab (Integrated dimensioning) (page 868)).

Define automatic drawing settings 697 Define dimensioning

 • On the General tab, adjust settings related to minimizing the number
of views, dimension type, combining dimensions, closing dimensions,
limit for dimensioning asymmetry in secondary parts, forward offset,
grid dimensions, dimension position, and part marks on dimension
line ( Dimensioning properties - General tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 861)).
• On the Position dimensions tab select the position dimensions to
create. They indicate the position of parts in relation to the main part
or to work points (Dimensioning properties - Position dimensions tab
(Integrated dimensioning) (page 865)).
• On the Bolt dimensions tab, select the bolt dimensions to create,
combine bolt dimensions and select the side for the dimension
(Dimensioning properties - Bolt dimensions tab (Integrated
dimensioning) (page 870)).
• On the Dimension grouping tab, group dimensions and adjust the
related settings (Dimensioning properties - Dimension grouping tab
(Integrated dimensioning) (page 871)).
• On the Sub-assembly tab, create dimensions for parts in sub-
assemblies and adjust the related settings (Dimensioning properties -
Sub-assemblies tab (Integrated dimensioning) (page 872)).
• On the Reinforcement dimensions tab, create dimensions for
reinforcing bar groups in cast unit drawings, add dimension marks and
adjust the related settings (Dimensioning properties - Reinforcement
dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning) (page 873)).
7. Save the dimensioning settings by clicking Save and close the dialog box
by clicking Close.
8. Save the view properties by clicking Save and return to the drawing
properties dialog box by clicking Close.
9. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

See also
Add minimum and maximum position dimensions to bolts (page 724)
Group identical objects to the same dimension line (page 699)
Add dimensions to unfolded parts (page 723)
Add elevation dimensions (page 700)
Add dimensions to plates (page 729)
Add dimensions to profiles (page 732)
Create check dimensions (page 702)
Example: Part dimensioning (page 704)
Example: Position dimensioning (page 708)

Define automatic drawing settings 698 Define dimensioning

 Example: Combine dimensions (page 714)
Example: Closing dimension (page 713)
Example: Forward offset (page 718)
Example: Recognizable distance (page 719)
Example: Grid dimensions (page 719)
Example: Combine bolt group dimensions (page 717)
Example: Preferred dimension side (page 720)
Example: Reinforcement dimension (page 721)
Example: Bolt dimensioning (page 707)

Group identical objects to the same dimension line

You can group identical parts, bolts, components and cuts or shapes to the
same dimension line in integrated dimensioning. You also have the option to
include automatic dimension tags to grouped dimensions.
1. In the Dimensioning Properties dialog box, go to the Dimension
Grouping tab.
2. In Activate dimension grouping, select the objects that you want to
group.
3. Highlight a row (Parts, Bolts, Components or Cuts/Shapes in the
Activate dimension grouping list and select the elements by which you
define the identical conditions in grouping properties.
4. In Automatic tagging, select the appropriate options to include
automatic dimension tags.
5. If you want Tekla Structures to update dimension grouping automatically,
set the option Update grouping when model changes to Yes.
6. Click OK.

Define automatic drawing settings 699 Define dimensioning

 TIP You can change the dimension tag contents in the final drawing and include
some other elements in the tag.

See also
Dimensioning properties - Dimension grouping tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 871)
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Add elevation dimensions

You can add elevation dimensions (level marks) in your drawings for the start
and end points of parts in integrated dimensioning. Tekla Structures
dimensions elevations relative to a reference point, which you can change.

For example, if the elevation is 5000 mm, and you set the reference point to
200, the elevation changes to 4800 mm. You can also change the elevation
dimension prefix, which in the English version is EL by default.
To change the reference point and create elevation dimensions using another
prefix:
1. Go to the Position dimensions tab, and set Elevation dimensions to On.
2. Click OK.
3. In the drawing properties dialog box, click View --> Attributes 2 .
4. Do one of the following:
• To use a specific value, select Specified from the Datum point for
elevations list and enter a value in the Datum level box.

Define automatic drawing settings 700 Define dimensioning

 • To measure reference points relative to the view plane, select View
plane from the Datum point for elevations list.
5. Save the drawing properties and create the drawing.
6. To change the prefix, open the dim_operation.ail file in a text editor
that supports UTF-8 coding. Recommended editors are Visual Studio and
Notepad++.
This file is located in the Tekla Structures/<version>/messages/
folder. Replace EL with a new prefix on the following line in the file:
string dim_operation_dim_elevation_prefix{entry = ("enu",
"EL");};

NOTE Shortening value added in the user-defined properties of a part affects also
elevation dimensions.

Example

Limitations
Tekla Structures creates elevation dimensions for skew parts only if the parts
are in the same position in the drawing as they are in the model. This means
that the coordinate system must be set to model.
If you are using local, oriented, or brace coordinate systems, Tekla Structures
does not draw the elevation dimensions for skewed parts by default. If you
want to create elevation dimensions, set the advanced option
XS_DRAW_SKEWED_ELEVATIONS to TRUE in File menu --> Settings -->
Advanced sptions --> Dimensioning: Parts . See below for an example of an
elevation dimension for a skew part.

Define automatic drawing settings 701 Define dimensioning

 See also
Part orientation in drawing views (page 621)
Dimensioning properties - Position dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 865)
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)
Add level marks in drawings (page 253)

Check dimensions
Check dimensions are additional dimensions in integrated dimensioning that
you can use for checking, usually in thinner text than other dimensions. They
are not required for fabrication or erection, and they are mainly used for
checking detailing, not for assembling parts.
Tekla Structures uses work points to create check dimensions. Work points can
be either the points between which the part was originally created, or the
intersection point of the reference lines of the parts. The reference line
location depends on the part position depth set in part properties. If it is
middle, the reference line is the center line, if it is front, the line is located in
the part front edge, etc.
Knock-off dimension is a special type of check dimension that dimensions the
distance from work points to the end of the part.

See also
Create check dimensions (page 702)

Create check dimensions

In integrated dimensioning, you can create additional dimensions to check the
accuracy of dimensions.

To create check dimensions, do any of the following:

To Do this Number in
the image
Create check dimensions In the Dimensioning dialog box,
between outermost work points. click Part dimensions and set
Main part work points to Yes.

Define automatic drawing settings 702 Define dimensioning

 To Do this Number in
the image
Create check dimensions In the Dimensioning dialog box,
between outermost bolts. click Bolt dimensions and set
Extreme bolts to Assembly or
Main part.
Create check dimensions from In the Dimensioning dialog box,
outermost work point to first click Bolt dimensions and set
bolt. Extreme bolts to Assembly or
Main part and Extreme bolts
to work points to Yes.
Create horizontal and vertical In the Dimensioning dialog box,
check dimensions between the click Position dimensions and
work points in a skewed brace. set Main part skew position to
Yes.
Create check dimensions In the Dimensioning dialog box,
between the work points, such click Position dimensions and
as the intersections of main and set Position bolts to or Position
neighbor part reference lines. parts to Working points or
Both.
Create check dimensions to the In the Dimensioning dialog box,
bolt hole locations in the main click Position dimensions and
part. set Main part bolt position to
On.
Create knock-off dimensions. In the Dimensioning dialog box,
click Part dimensions and set
Knock-off dimensions to On.

Define automatic drawing settings 703 Define dimensioning

 See also
Check dimensions (page 702)
Dimensioning properties - Part dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 868)
Dimensioning properties - Position dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 865)
Dimensioning properties - Bolt dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 870)

Define automatic drawing settings 704 Define dimensioning

 Example: Part dimensioning
Here are some examples of what the part dimensions look like in integrated
dimensioning with different settings selected on the Part dimensions tab.

Dimensioning setting Example

Internal dimensions set to
None

Internal dimensions set to

All.

Overall dimensions

Define automatic drawing settings 705 Define dimensioning

 Dimensioning setting Example
Main part shape (Shape
dimensions) set to On.

Bevel dimensions set to

On.

Bevel angle set to Angle of

cut.

Define automatic drawing settings 706 Define dimensioning

 Dimensioning setting Example
Bevel angle set to Angle of
beam.

See also
Dimensioning properties - Part dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 868)
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Example: Bolt dimensioning

Here are a couple of examples of what the bolt dimensions look like in
integrated dimensioning with different settings.

Dimensioning setting Example

Main part bolt internal
dimensions is set to All on the
Bolt dimensions tab of the
Dimensioning Properties
dialog box.

Define automatic drawing settings 707 Define dimensioning

 Dimensioning setting Example
All bolt and hole dimensions
are shown in the front view of
the main assembly. The
elements Gage of outstanding
leg (GOL) and Center-to-
center distance (C/C or Gage)
have been added in a bolt and
hole mark in Bolt mark... >
Content.

Dimensioning properties - Bolt dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)

(page 870)
Bolt mark elements (page 896)
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Example: Position dimensioning

Here are some examples of what the position dimensions look like in
integrated dimensoning with different settings selected on the Position
dimensions tab.

Dimensioning setting Example

Position parts to is set to
None.

Define automatic drawing settings 708 Define dimensioning

 Dimensioning setting Example
Position parts to is set to
Main part.

Position bolts to is set to

Working points.

Define automatic drawing settings 709 Define dimensioning

 Dimensioning setting Example
Secondary part is
dimensioned By bolts.

Secondary part is
dimensioned By parts.

Secondary part is
dimensioned By both.

Secondary part is
dimensioned By bolts.
Secondary part
dimension direction is
Neighbor part.
Position from is set to
Work points.

Running dimensions start from the intersection

of the main and secondary part (=work point)

Dimensions are aligned with the neighboring part

Define automatic drawing settings 710 Define dimensioning

 Dimensioning setting Example
Main part bolt position is
set to Off.
(Main part bolt internal
dimensions is set to
Internal on the Bolt
dimensions tab.)

Main part bolt position is

set to On.
(Main part bolt internal
dimensions is set to
Internal on the Bolt
dimensions tab.)

By default, create minimum and maximum position

dimensions are not created for bolts. For information
on how to create these dimensions, see Add
minimum and maximum position dimensions to bolts
(page 724).
Main part skew position
is set to Yes.

Skew position is set to

Angle.

Define automatic drawing settings 711 Define dimensioning

 Dimensioning setting Example
Centered part is set to
Internal.

Centered part is set to

Position.

Center bolt is set to

Internal.

Center bolt is set to

Position.

See also
Dimensioning properties - Position dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 865)

Define automatic drawing settings 712 Define dimensioning

 Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Example: Closing dimension

Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures creates dimensions in
integrated dimensioning with different options selected in the Close
dimensions area on the General tab.

Closing option Example

Close dimensions is set to No.

Define automatic drawing settings 713 Define dimensioning

 Closing option Example
Close dimensions is set to All.

Short dimensions is set to No.

See also
Dimensioning properties - General tab (Integrated dimensioning) (page 861)
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Define automatic drawing settings 714 Define dimensioning

 Example: Combine dimensions
Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures combines dimensions in
integrated dimensioning with different options selected on the General tab.

Combining option Example

Option No prevents dimensions from
being combined.

Option 1 combines part position

dimensions with part internal
dimensions, and bolt group internal
dimensions with bolt edge distances.
Bolt position dimensions are not
combined with bolt internal
dimensions.

Option 2 combines the part position

dimension with part internal
dimensions and bolt group internal
dimensions. Bolt internal dimensions
are combined with bolt position
dimensions. Edge distances are
shown separately.

Define automatic drawing settings 715 Define dimensioning

 Combining option Example
Option 3 combines bolt internal
dimensions and position dimensions
in the same dimension line.

Option 4 combines bolt group

position dimensions with part
position dimensions. Part and bolt
internal dimensions are not
combined with this option, but bolt
internal dimensions are combined
with bolt edge distances.

Option 5 combines internal

dimensions and the position
dimension of bolt groups where there
are several bolt groups.

Option 4.5 uses a combination of option 5 for the main part and a
combination of option 4 for the secondary parts.
Distance 5’-0

Define automatic drawing settings 716 Define dimensioning

 Combining option Example
Distance 1’-0

Min distance 5’-0

Min distance 5"

See also
Dimensioning properties - General tab (Integrated dimensioning) (page 861)
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Example: Combine bolt group dimensions

For dimensioning and marking purposes, Tekla Structures treats bolt groups
located close together in integrated dimensioning as one group on the basis of

Define automatic drawing settings 717 Define dimensioning

 the minimum number of dimensions to combine and format selected on the
Bolt dimensions tab. See an example below:

1. Bolt group 1
2. Bolt group 2

See also
Dimensioning properties - Bolt dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 870)
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Example: Forward offset

Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures places dimensions in
integrated dimensioning with different forward offset values set on the
General tab.

Forward offset setting Example

Forward offset greater than the 1’-8
dimension to the hole group.

Define automatic drawing settings 718 Define dimensioning

 Forward offset setting Example
Forward offset set to a smaller value.

See also
Dimensioning properties - General tab (Integrated dimensioning) (page 861)
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Example: Grid dimensions

Here is an example of how Tekla Structures creates dimensions in integrated
dimensioning with different options selected in the Grid dimensions area on
the General tab.

(1) Option Overall selected

(2) Option Individual spans selected

Example: Recognizable distance

Here is an example of how Tekla Structures uses the Recognizable distance
setting in integrated dimensioning. If you set value for Recognizable distance

Define automatic drawing settings 719 Define dimensioning

 on the General tab, and the asymmetry of the parts is smaller than the
distance you entered, Tekla Structures represents it using a dimension.
This setting is used, when the Internal dimension is set to Necessary.
Recognizable distance dimension is not necessarily needed, if the part can be
assembled correctly without it.
A typical example is a rectangle that is almost as long as it is wide.

See also
Dimensioning properties - General tab (Integrated dimensioning) (page 861)
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Example: Preferred dimension side

You can set the preferred dimension side for parts and bolts on the Part
dimensions tab and Bolt dimensions tab in integrated dimensioning. The
examples below show how the different settings for Preferred dim side look
like for part dimensions.

Define automatic drawing settings 720 Define dimensioning

 See also
Dimensioning properties - Part dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 868)
Dimensioning properties - Bolt dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 870)
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Example: Reinforcement dimension

Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures creates dimensions for
reinforcing bar groups in integrated dimensioning with different options
selected on the Reinforcement dimensions tab.

Settings Example
Dimensions for reinforcing
bar groups is set to On, no
dimension tags selected in
Mark location.

Dimensions for reinforcing

bar groups is set to On,
dimension tags selected in
Mark location.

Define automatic drawing settings 721 Define dimensioning

 Settings Example
Dimensions for reinforcing
bar groups is set to On,
dimension tags selected in
Mark location, Close
dimensions to binding
geometry is set to Yes.

See also
Dimensioning properties - Reinforcement dimensions tab (Integrated
dimensioning) (page 873)
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Add automatic dual dimensions

You can create dual dimension tags automatically in all types of drawings.

Limitations:
Dual dimensions can only be shown in relative and US absolute dimensions,
but not in absolute dimensions.
1. Click On the File menu, click Settings --> Options and go to Drawing
dimensions settings.
2. Set the units, format and precision.
3. Select the drawing types where you want to have the dual dimensions.
4. Click OK.

When Tekla Structures creates the drawing, it adds in the lower dimension tag
in the selected unit and format, and adds the text DIMENSION in the middle
dimension tag in the Dimension Properties dialog box.

Example
Below is an example of dual dimensions using the units mm and format ###.

Define automatic drawing settings 722 Define dimensioning

 See also
Define dimensioning (page 649)
Add dual dimensions manually (page 180)

Add dimensions to unfolded parts

In single-part and assembly drawings, you can control the dimensions Tekla
Structures adds for unfolded parts that have been created using View -->
Attributes 2 --> Unfolded =Yes .
Use the advanced options in File menu --> Settings --> Advanced options -->
Dimensioning: Unfolding .

To Do this
Create bending line dimensions for Set the advanced option
unfolded parts. XS_DRAW_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIO
NS_IN_UNFOLDING=TRUE.
Create angle and radius dimensions Set the advanced option
for unfolded parts. XS_DRAW_ANGLE_AND_RADIUS_INFO
_IN_UNFOLDING=TRUE.
Set a prefix text for an angle Set the advanced option
dimension. XS_ANGLE_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BE
NDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING=A=.
Set a prefix text for a radius Set the advanced option
dimension. XS_RADIUS_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_B
ENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING=R=.

Define automatic drawing settings 723 Define dimensioning

 To Do this
For angle text dimensions, show the Set the advanced option
interior angle instead of the exterior XS_DRAW_INSIDE_ANGLE_IN_UNFOL
angle. DING=TRUE.
Set the format for angle text. Set the advanced option
XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_FORMAT
=1.
###= 0
###[.#]= 1
###.#=2
###[.##]= 3
###.##= 4
###[.###]=5
###.###= 6
### #/#= 7
###/##.###= 8
Set the accuracy of the angle text. Set the advanced option
XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_PRECIS
ION=10.
0.00= 1
0.50= 2
0.33= 3
0.25= 4
1/8= 5
1/16= 6
1/32= 7
1/10= 8
1/100= 9
1/1000= 10

See also
Dimension properties - Units, precision and format (page 854)

Define automatic drawing settings 724 Define dimensioning

 Add minimum and maximum position dimensions to bolts
By default, Tekla Structures does not create minimum and maximum position
dimensions for bolts. You can use an advanced option to create the
dimensions.

To create minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts:

1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Advanced options and go to the
Dimensioning: Bolts category.
2. Set XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT to TRUE .

Setting Example
Before setting the advanced option.

After setting the advanced option to

TRUE.

Create dimension line extensions

You can create line extensions for dimensions that have line arrows.

Limitations
Line extensions cannot be applied to dimensions that have different arrows
from line arrows, or to knock-off dimensions of the following type:

1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Options and go to the Drawing
dimensions settings.
2. Enter the length of the dimension line extension in the Dimension line
extension length for line arrow box.

Define automatic drawing settings 725 Define dimensioning

 Example

Line extensions added No line extensions

Change the appearance of absolute dimensions

You can select whether to show zero at the zero point of the absolute
dimensions, and also change the orientation of the absolute dimensions.
1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Options, and go to the Drawing
dimensions settings.
2. Set Show zero in absolute dimensions to No if you do not want to show
zero at the zero points in absolute dimensions.
Yes is the default value.
3. Set Draw absolute dimension values parallel to dimension line to Yes
to show dimensions parallel to dimension lines in absolute dimensions.
No is the default value.
4. Click OK.

Example
In the following example, dimensions are parallel to the dimension line and
zero is shown at the zero point.

See also
Dimension properties - Appearance tab (page 856)
Automatic view-level dimensions (page 651)

Create exaggerated dimensions

You can exaggerate narrow dimensions to make them easier to read.

Define automatic drawing settings 726 Define dimensioning

 When you enable the exaggeration of the dimensions, a dimension that is
narrower than the defined limit is enlarged. If there are many exaggerated
dimensions, Tekla Structures arranges them automatically. Setting
exaggeration consists of selecting the exaggeration limit and the exaggeration
scale, enabling the exaggeration and setting the direction, origin, width,
position and height for the exaggerated dimensions.
For single-part , assembly and cast unit drawings, save the dimension
exaggeration properties on object level in an open drawing into a dimension
properties file, which you can take into use when you modify dimensioning
rules.
Limitation: Exaggeration works only if the dimension extension lines are long.
Set Short extension line to No on the General tab of the Dimension
Properties dialog box.
1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Options and go to the Drawing
dimensions settings.
2. Enter the exaggeration limit in the Exaggeration limit box.
3. Select Paper or Model as the exaggeration scaling method.
If you select Paper, the exaggeration limit is multiplied by the view scale.
For example, if the scale is 1:10 and the limit is 10 mm, then all the
dimensions smaller than 100 mm are exaggerated.
If you select Model, and the scale is 1:10, all the dimensions smaller than
10 mm are exaggerated regardless of the drawing scale.
4. Click OK.
5. Open a drawing and double-click a dimension.
6. Go to the Marks tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
7. Enable the exaggeration by setting Exaggeration to Specified.
8. Set the values for Direction, Origin, Width, Position and Height.
9. Enter a name for the dimension properties file at the top and click Save.
10. If you want to modify the current dimension, click Modify. Otherwise,
close the dialog box.
Now you have a dimension properties file that contains the exaggeration
settings, which you can load later on or use in dimensioning rules.

Example
See below for an example of exaggerated dimensions:

Define automatic drawing settings 727 Define dimensioning

 See also
Dimension properties - Appearance tab (page 856)
Dimension properties - Marks and Tags tabs (page 858)

Change the prefix in radial dimensions

You can change the dimension prefix in radial dimensions.

By default, the prefix of radial dimensions is R, for example, R 200.

1. Close Tekla Structures

Define automatic drawing settings 728 Define dimensioning

 2. Open the file dim_operation.ail located in ..\Tekla Structures
\<version>\messages\.
3. Change the prefix R to Radius:
string dim_operation_dim_radius_prefix{ ... entry =
("enu", "R ");};
string dim_operation_dim_radius_prefix{ ... entry =
("enu", "Radius ");};
4. Save the changes and reopen Tekla Structures.

See also
Add manual dimensions (page 168)

Add dimensions to plates

You can dimension plates using some advanced options in File menu -->
Settings --> Advanced options --> Dimensioning: Parts .

NOTE If you have added a path to the dim_planes_table.txt file as a

value to the advanced option XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE,
the settings in dim_planes_table.txt are always used, not the
values that you set to the advanced options described below.

To dimension plates using the advanced options:

To Do this
Dimension the plates to Set the advanced option
the edge that is nearest XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEI
to the neighbor part GHBOUR to TRUE.
Dimension the plates to 1. Set the advanced option
the leading edge of the XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING to
beams FALSE.
2. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_
NEIGHBOUR to FALSE.
3. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE to
TRUE.
Dimension the plates to 1. Set the advanced option
the leading edge of the XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING to
columns FALSE.

Define automatic drawing settings 729 Define dimensioning

 To Do this
2. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_
NEIGHBOUR to FALSE.
3. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_
COLUMNS_ALSO to TRUE.
Dimension the plates to 1. Set the advanced option
the trailing edge XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING to
FALSE.
2. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_
NEIGHBOUR to FALSE.
3. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE to
FALSE.
4. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_
COLUMNS_ALSO to FALSE.
Dimension the plates 1. Set the advanced option
using their original XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_
reference points in the NEIGHBOUR to FALSE.
model
2. Set the advance option
XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING to
TRUE.
Note: If you have created one plate from left to
right and another from right to left, Tekla
Structures dimensions them differently.

Below is an example of dimensioning plates to the leading edge.

Below is an example of dimensioning plates to the trailing edge.

Define automatic drawing settings 730 Define dimensioning

 In the following two examples, neighbor parts are blue, and the plate creation
points are shown.
In the example below, the following values are used:
XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE= (no value given)
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOR=TRUE
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE=FALSE
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO=FALSE
XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING=FALSE

Define automatic drawing settings 731 Define dimensioning

 In the example below, the following values are used:
XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE= (no value given)
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOR=FALSE
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE=FALSE
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO=FALSE
XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING=TRUE

See also
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Define automatic drawing settings 732 Define dimensioning

 Add dimensions to profiles
You can affect the way Tekla Structures dimensions different profiles in
drawings. For example, you can have Tekla Structures always dimension round
bars to the middle of the profile and large I profiles to the top.

To define dimension settings for profiles, you need to edit the dimension
planes table dim_planes_table.txt.
1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Advanced options and go to the
Dimensioning: Parts category.
2. Set the advanced option XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE as
follows:
XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE=%XS_PROFDB%
\dim_planes_table.txt
This advanced option defines the path to the part dimension planes table.
3. Open the dim_planes_table.txt file in any text editor, for example,
Microsoft Notepad. The file is located in ..\Tekla Structures
\<version>\environments\<environment>\profile.
4. Edit the file contents and save the file.
5. To use the new settings in drawings, restart Tekla Structures and recreate
the drawings. Changing the file does not automatically update existing
drawings.

Example 1
In this example, the hole dimension is set from the middle of the flange
instead of the flange edge for "I" Profile.
Open the file and edit the middle of the column to TRUE* in the ProfType 1 row line, save and restart Tekla Structures.
However, when you generate the new drawing, it will create the hole dimension from the middle of the flange.

dim_planes_table.txt
/*** DIMENSION PLANES TABLE for different profile types and sizes
***/
//Values: -1.0 in max size means no size limit!
/*** FLANGE WEB
ProfType, MaxSize, middle, left, right, middle, bottom, top
========================================================
***/
//I-profile - horizontal by reference line,vertical from top flange
1, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, TRUE, TRUE*

Define automatic drawing settings 733 Define dimensioning

 (1) Required dimension (middle of flange)
(2) Default dimension (edge of flange)

Example 2
Here is another example of a dimension planes table:

dim_planes_table.txt
FLANGE WEB
ProfType,MaxSize, middle,right, left, middle, right, left
========================================================
1, 300.0, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, TRUE*, TRUE
7, -1.0, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE

The line beginning with 1 means that Tekla Structures always dimensions I
profiles (ProfType = 1) smaller than 300 mm (MaxSize = 300) to the middle of
the flange and to the right edge of the web, no matter how the part was
created.
The line beginning with 7 means that Tekla Structures always dimensions
round tubes (ProfType = 7) to the middle of the profile
The ProfType numbers run in the same order as the profiles in the Profile
catalog:
• 1 = I profile
• 2 = L profile
• 3 = Z profile
• 4 = U profile
• 5 = plate
• 6 = round bar
• 7 = round tube
• 8 = square pipe
• 9 = C profile
• 10 = T profile

Define automatic drawing settings 734 Define dimensioning

 • 15 = ZZ profile
• 16 = CC profile
• 17 = CW profile
• 51 = polygon_plate etc.
The value -1.0 in the MaxSize indicates that there is no size limit for the
profile.
The asterisk after TRUE indicates that it is the default value.

Sloped dimension texts

Tekla Structures aligns slightly sloped dimension text. If the dimension text is
sloped more than a certain degree, Tekla Structures flips the text.
Below is an example of a dimension text that is slightly sloped.

Below is an example of a flipped dimension text.

The default limit for aligning dimension text is 0.1 (5.74 degrees). When this
limit is exceeded, the dimension text gets flipped. To adjust this limit, use the
advanced option XS_TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON.

Define automatic drawing settings 735 Define dimensioning

 See also
XS_TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON

Add automatic dimensions to general arrangement

drawings
In the general arrangement drawing General - Dimensioning Properties
dialog box, you can create part, grid and overall dimensions, and control the
way they are created. You can experiment with different combinations of
options to achieve different kinds of dimensioning effects.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> GA
drawing .
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click Dimensioning.
4. Select the dimensions to create and modify the related settings.
5. On the Grids tab, adjust the grid dimension and overall dimension
creation settings and the positioning of the dimensions.
6. On the Parts tab, adjust part dimension creation settings and the
positioning of the dimensions.
7. Click OK and create the drawing.

See also
Object groups in dimensioning general arrangement drawings (page 736)
Dimension object groups on different dimension lines (page 737)
Example: Grid and overall dimensions (page 738)
Example: Maximum leader line length options (page 740)
Example: Dimension parts partly outside the view (page 741)
Example: Limit the number of outside dimensions (page 742)
Example: Position part dimensions (page 743)
Example: Dimension anchor bolt plans (page 748)
Dimensioning properties - Grid tab (GA drawings) (page 874)
Dimensioning properties - Parts tab (GA drawings) (page 875)

Object groups in dimensioning general arrangement drawings

You can use the object groups (selection filters) that you have created in the
model, or create the necessary groups through the Parts tab in the General -

Define automatic drawing settings 736 Define dimensioning

 Dimensioning Properties dialog box using the Object groups button. For
example, you might want to create an object group for beams of a certain size.

See also
Dimension object groups on different dimension lines (page 737)

Dimension object groups on different dimension lines

You can use object groups to specify different objects to be dimensioned on
different dimension lines.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> GA
drawing.
2. Click Dimensioning, and go to the Parts tab
3. Add the desired object groups to dimensioning rules by clicking Add rule
and selecting the rule from the list in the Object group column.
4. If needed, you can create new object groups by clicking Object group. For
example, add object group rules for beams of different size.
5. For each object group, select the Positioning option, the Horizontal
position option, and the Vertical position option, depending on the type
of the objects in the group.
For example, for beam groups, set Horizontal position to Left side to
position the beam dimensions to the left side of the grid.
6. If needed, in the Tag column, enter the text tags that you want to display
for the different object groups in the drawing. For example, enter the size
of the beam.

Example
In this example, several beam groups were created, one for each beam size to
be dimensioned, then the position for the dimensions in different groups was
selected, and tags were added displayed for each group:

Define automatic drawing settings 737 Define dimensioning

 See also
Object groups in dimensioning general arrangement drawings (page 736)
Example: Position part dimensions (page 743)
Example: Dimension parts partly outside the view (page 741)
Example: Limit the number of outside dimensions (page 742)
Example: Maximum leader line length options (page 740)
Dimensioning properties - Parts tab (GA drawings) (page 875)

Define automatic drawing settings 738 Define dimensioning

 Example: Grid and overall dimensions
Here are some examples of what the grid and overall dimensions look like in
general arrangement drawings with different settings selected on the Grid tab.

Dimensioning setting Example

Grid line dimensions = On
Overall dimension = On
Horizontal = Left
Vertical = above

Grid line dimensions = On

Overall dimension = Off
Horizontal = Left
Vertical = above

Define automatic drawing settings 739 Define dimensioning

 See also
Dimensioning properties - Grid tab (GA drawings) (page 874)

Example: Maximum leader line length options

Here are some examples of how the dimensions are positioned when you
have set values for the Maximum leader line length options Outside
dimensions and Inside dimensions on the Parts tab.

Dimensioning setting Example

A value has been set for
Outside dimensions.

Define automatic drawing settings 740 Define dimensioning

 Dimensioning setting Example
A value has been set for
Inside dimensions.

See also
Dimensioning properties - Parts tab (GA drawings) (page 875)
Add automatic dimensions to general arrangement drawings (page 736)

Define automatic drawing settings 741 Define dimensioning

 Example: Dimension parts partly outside the view
Here is an example of how the parts are dimensioned if you set the option
Include parts not entirely in the view to On on the Parts tab of the General
- Dimensioning properties dialog box.

See also
Dimensioning properties - Parts tab (GA drawings) (page 875)

Example: Limit the number of outside dimensions

Here is an example of what the part dimensions look like when you set 3 as
the value for the option Maximum number of outside dimensions on the
Parts tab in general arrangement drawing dimensioning properties. Tekla

Define automatic drawing settings 742 Define dimensioning

 Structures creates three dimensions outside the grid and the fourth inside the
grid.

See also
Dimensioning properties - Parts tab (GA drawings) (page 875)

Example: Position part dimensions

Here are some examples of how the part dimensions are positioned in general
arrangement drawings with different positioning settings selected on the
Parts tab.
In the example below, Positioning is set to Inside grid, which places all
dimensions next to or near the grid.

Define automatic drawing settings 743 Define dimensioning

 In the example below, Positioning is set to Outside grid, which places all
dimensions outside the grid.

In the example below, Horizontal position is set to Left side, which places all
dimensions to horizontal parts to the left of the grid.

Define automatic drawing settings 744 Define dimensioning

 In the example below, Horizontal position is set to Right side, which places
all dimensions to horizontal parts to the right of the grid.

Define automatic drawing settings 745 Define dimensioning

 In the example below, Horizontal position is set to Distributed to both
sides, which places all dimensions to horizontal parts to the side of the grid
nearest the part they are dimensioning.

In the example below, Vertical position is set to Above, which places all
dimensions to vertical parts above the grid.

Define automatic drawing settings 746 Define dimensioning

 In the example below, Vertical position is set to Below, which places all
dimensions to vertical parts under the grid.

Define automatic drawing settings 747 Define dimensioning

 In the example below, Vertical position is set to Distributed to both sides,
which places all dimensions to vertical parts to the side of the grid nearest the
part they are dimensioning.

See also
Dimensioning properties - Parts tab (GA drawings) (page 875)

Example: Dimension anchor bolt plans

Here are some examples of what the dimensions in anchor bolt plans look like
in different situations.
First an example of a typical situation, where all columns are located in grid
line intersections:

Define automatic drawing settings 748 Define dimensioning

 If the column reference point is not located on the grid line, Tekla Structures
dimensions the reference point automatically relative to the grid lines. See the
example below.

Define automatic drawing settings 749 Define dimensioning

 If the column is rotated relative to the drawing, the rotation is also
automatically dimensioned. See the example below.

Define automatic drawing settings 750 Define dimensioning

 If you set the advanced option
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS to
FALSE and create the drawing, all dimensions are in the drawing coordinate
system.

Define automatic drawing settings 751 Define dimensioning

 See also
Create anchor bolt plans using saved settings (page 83)

8.6 Define marks

Marks are associative annotation objects that are used for identifying
individual building objects in a drawing. A mark displays a set of user-
selectable properties called mark elements. Automatic marks are marks that
Tekla Structures creates in a drawing based on the mark properties defined in
drawing properties.
You can modify the mark properties after creating the drawing, and add marks
manually in an open drawing.
The mark properties define what Tekla Structures shows in marks and how the
marks are shown. In addition, Tekla Structures uses the
contentattributes_global.lst attributes file for setting the default unit
settings for some mark elements. You can use
contentattributes_userdefined.lst when you want to configure
settings of your own.
Tekla Structures is able to create the following automatic marks:

Define automatic drawing settings 752 Define marks

 • Part marks
• Bolt marks
• Neighbor part marks
• Surface treatment marks
• Connection marks
• Model weld marks
• Reinforcement marks
• Pour object marks
• Dimension marks
• View and section view label marks, and section marks

To Click the links below to find out

more
Set up and add automatic marks for Add automatic marks (page 754)
building objects
Indicate whether to show and merge Adjust the visibility of automatic
marks marks (page 756)
Add frames around single mark Adjust text, frames and leader lines of
elements or around the mark itself, automatic marks (page 760)
adjust the appearance of the mark
text and leader line, and change the
unit and format of an element
Check how the location of the mark is Mark location (page 763)
affected by mark placement settings,
the type of the leader line, predefined
mark location and part orientation
settings, modeling direction of parts,
and drawing protection settings
Automatically merge part marks, Merge marks automatically
surface treatment marks or (page 767)
reinforcement marks
Show the mark frame and leader line Show mark frames and leader lines
of the hidden part with a dashed or a for hidden parts (page 773)
solid line
Set or change the unit and the Change unit settings for marks
number of decimals in measurement (page 774)
values for various mark elements
Use advanced options to define the Define size in bolt marks using
contents of the bolt mark Size advanced options (page 786)
element

Define automatic drawing settings 753 Define marks

 To Click the links below to find out
more
Add level attributes in part marks and Add level attributes in automatic part
associative notes as user-defined marks (page 777)
attributes
Add user-defined attributes and Add attributes in automatic marks
template attributes in marks (page 776)
Add custom graphical templates as Add templates in marks (page 780)
elements in marks, for example, add
a template that changes the unit and
the number of decimals in
measurement values in a mark
Add symbols in mark from a specific Add symbols in automatic marks
symbol file (page 785)
Add a pull-out picture of a reinforcing Add pull-out pictures in automatic
bar in a reinforcement mark reinforcement marks (page 789)

See also
Mark properties (page 877)
Mark elements (page 892)
Define object protection and placement settings in drawings (page 603)
Create and modify marks, notes, texts and links in drawings (page 243)
Show pour objects, pour marks and pour breaks in drawings (page 819)
Pours in drawings (page 464)
Units and decimals in drawings, reports and templates (page 825)

Add automatic marks

You can set up automatic marks for building objects (parts, neighbor parts,
bolts, surface treatment, connections, reinforcement, and neighbor
reinforcement) and save the mark properties in a property file for later use.

You can do this the view properties dialog box of single-part, assembly, and
cast unit drawings. For general arrangement drawings, automatic marks can
be defined on drawing level.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.

Define automatic drawing settings 754 Define marks

 3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings:Click View creation, select
the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click the mark type you want to modify, for example, Part mark.
5. For some marks, you need to select from a list the object that you are
defining the marks for.
For example, for part marks, you can define part mark settings
independently for main and secondary parts, and for sub-assembly main
and secondary parts.

6. Add elements in the mark by double-clicking the elements in the

Available elements list.
7. Modify the element appearance (frame and font).
For length, height, spacing and diameter elements, you can adjust also the
unit and format.
8. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to place the elements in the
order you want.
9. Modify the appearance, placement and visibility settings on the Content
and General tabs.
10. Depending on the drawing type, do one of the following:
Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings:
a. Save the view properties by entering a properties file name in the box
at the top and click Save.
b. Click Close to return to the drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings:
• Click OK in the subdialog to save the changes, close the subdialog and
return to the drawing properties.
11. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Example
This is an example of a part mark.

Define automatic drawing settings 755 Define marks

 1. Assembly position
2. Size
3. Mark frame
4. Profile
5. Mark element frame
6. Length

See also
Mark location (page 763)
Define automatic placement settings for marks (page 608)
Mark properties (page 877)
Mark elements (page 892)
Add symbols in automatic marks (page 785)
Add templates in marks (page 780)
Add pull-out pictures in automatic reinforcement marks (page 789)
Add attributes in automatic marks (page 776)
Define size in bolt marks using advanced options (page 786)

Adjust the visibility of automatic marks

Using the visibility options in the mark properties you can indicate whether the
marks are displayed in a drawing. You can modify these settings before
creating a drawing, and also in an open drawing after creating a drawing.
To adjust the visibility of marks before creating a drawing:
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Do one of the following depending on the drawing type. Note that all
settings are not available for all mark types.

Define automatic drawing settings 756 Define marks

 Drawing type Adjust mark visibility settings
Single-part, assembly and cast unit a. Click View creation, select the
drawings: view and the properties that you
want to change, and click View
properties.
You need to adjust the setting for
all the views in the drawing
separately.
b. Click a mark type in the options
tree. For example, click Part
mark.
c. Go to the General tab and select
whether you want to display
marks by selecting one of the
Visibility in view options. The
available options depend on the
mark type:
• distributed: Distributes the
marks evenly in the drawing
view. Tekla Structures only
creates marks that are not
visible in the other views.
• always: Always creates marks
in the view, regardless of the
settings in other views.
Selecting the option always
might slow down the drawing
update during opening, even
if you had deleted the marks
manually.
• Select preferred for one view
only in a drawing. If you set
other views to distributed,
the marks are located only in
the view that has the setting
Visibility in view set to
preferred.
The option preferred acts like
the option distributed, but
the preferred view has a
higher priority.

Define automatic drawing settings 757 Define marks

 Drawing type Adjust mark visibility settings
• none: Does not create marks.
Note that if you want to
create your own marks,
always use the none option.
d. In Parts out of view plane,
select whether you want to
display marks for parts that are
out of view plane:
• Visible: Displays marks for
parts outside the view in the
drawing.
• Not visible: Displays no
marks for parts outside the
view in the drawing.
e. For bolt marks, select if you want
to show bolt marks in main parts,
secondary parts, sub-assembly
main parts, or in sub-assembly
secondary parts.
For bolt marks, you can also
define the Bolt size limit, which
filters standard-sized bolt marks
out of drawings. Tekla Structures
will not display bolt marks of the
size you enter here.
f. Click Save to save the changes in
view properties, and then click
Close to return to drawing
properties.
g. Click Save to save the drawing
properties, then click OK and
create the drawing.
General arrangement drawings: a. Click a mark type button in the
drawing properties dialog box.
For example, click Part mark.
b. Go to the General tab and select
whether you want to display
marks by selecting one of the
Visibility in view options. The
available options depend on the
mark type:
• distributed: Distributes the
marks evenly in the drawing

Define automatic drawing settings 758 Define marks

 Drawing type Adjust mark visibility settings
view. Tekla Structures only
creates marks that are not
visible in the other views.
• always: Always creates marks
in the view, irrespective the
settings in other views.
Selecting the option always
might slow down the drawing
update during opening, even
if you had deleted the marks
manually.
• Select preferred for one view
only in a drawing. If you set
other views to distributed,
the marks are located only in
the view that has the setting
Visibility in view set to
preferred.
The optionpreferred acts like
the option distributed, but
the preferred view has a
higher priority.
• none: Does not create marks.
Note that if you want to
create your own marks,
always use the none option.
c. In Parts out of view plane,
select whether you want to
display marks for parts that are
out of view plane:
• Visible: Displays marks for
parts outside the view in the
drawing.
• Not visible: Displays no
marks for parts outside the
view in the drawing.
d. For bolt marks, select if you want
to show bolt marks in main parts,
secondary parts, sub-assembly
main parts, or in sub-assembly
secondary parts.
For bolt marks, you can also
de ine the Bolt size limit, which

Define automatic drawing settings 759 Define marks

 Drawing type Adjust mark visibility settings
filters standard-sized bolt marks
out of drawings. Tekla Structures
will not display bolt marks of the
size you enter here.
e. Click OK.
f. Click Save to save the drawing
properties, then click OK and
create the drawing.

See also
Adjust mark visibility in an existing drawing (page 258)
Merge marks automatically (page 767)
Merge reinforcement marks automatically (page 771)
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)
Mark properties (page 877)

Adjust text, frames and leader lines of automatic marks

You can add frames around single mark elements and around the mark itself.
You can also adjust the appearance of the mark text and leader line. For some
elements, you can change the unit and format.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Do one of the following depending on the drawing type:
Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings:
a. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want
to change, and click View properties.
b. Click a mark type in the drawing properties dialog box. For example,
click Part mark.
General arrangement drawings:
• Click a mark type in the drawing properties dialog box. For example,
click Part mark.
4. On the Content tab of the in mark properties, select one or several
elements from the Elements in mark list and adjust the element settings:

Define automatic drawing settings 760 Define marks

 • To apply your changes in all of them, hold down Shift and click the last
element in the list to select all elements.
• To add a frame around the selected elements, click Add frame.
• Select a Type and Color for the frame.
You can select a different frame type and color for each element you
add.
• Select the element text Color, Font and Height.
You can select a different color, font and font height for each element
you add.
• If necessary, change the unit and the format of a length, height,
spacing or diameter element.
Before you can do this, you must first select the element from the
Elements in mark list.
5. Go to the General (or the Appearance) tab adjust the mark frame and
leader line settings:
• Select the mark frame Type and Color.
• Select the Type for the leader line and the Arrow to use.
All marks do not have leader lines, in which case the leader line type
selection is not available.
• If you want to hide leader lines of hidden parts, set Use hidden lines
for hidden parts to Yes.
This option is not available for all marks.
6. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the
view properties, and then click Close to return to drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
7. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

See also
Adjust part mark leader lines with advanced options (page 761)
Place reinforcement mark leader line base point automatically (page 762)
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)
Mark properties (page 877)

Adjust part mark leader lines with advanced options

You can modify part mark leader line settings using advanced options. On the
File menu, click Settings --> Advanced options and go to Marking: Parts.

Define automatic drawing settings 761 Define marks

 To modify part mark leader line settings using advanced options:

To Do this
Define whether a leader line is drawn Set
when the leader line is shorter than XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF
defined with the advanced option _PART_MARKS to TRUE (default) to
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF always draw leader lines in part
_PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH marks. When you set this option to
FALSE, the leader line is not drawn if
it would be shorter than the
minimum you set for the advanced
option
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF
_PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH.
Give a minimum length for the leader Set a value in millimeters for the
line. If the length is less than this advanced option
value, the leader line is not drawn. XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF
_PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH .
Define the leader line start position Set a value for the advanced option
for a leader line with a rectangular XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_
frame. TYPE_FOR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME .
Define the leader line start position Set a value for the advanced option
for a leader line of a mark without a XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_
frame and for a leader line of a mark TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME .
with a mark element frame.
Define the length of the leader line Set a value for the advanced option
extension. XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION
_LENGTH .

See also
Adjust text, frames and leader lines of automatic marks (page 760)

Place reinforcement mark leader line base point automatically

Tekla Structures places the base point of reinforcement mark leader lines so
that it points to only one reinforcing bar. You can adjust how Tekla Structures
searches for the place for the base point.

• On the File menu, click Settings --> Advanced options and go to the
Concrete Detailing category.

To Do this
Select an optimal place for the base Set
point. XS_ENABLE_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_L

Define automatic drawing settings 762 Define marks

 To Do this
INE_BASE_POINT_OPTIMIZATION to
TRUE.
Define how far the other reinforcing Set a millimeter value for
bars must be from the base point in XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BAS
order for Tekla Structures to place the E_POINT_SEARCH_TOLERANCE.
base point.
Define the search step length while Set a millimeter value for
searching for an optimal place for the XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BAS
base point along the reinforcing bar. E_POINT_SEARCH_STEP_LENGTH.

Example
An example showing optimized base points.

See also
Adjust text, frames and leader lines of automatic marks (page 760)

Mark location
The location of the marks in drawings is affected by several settings, not only
the properties of the mark itself.

Define automatic drawing settings 763 Define marks

 Setting Click the links below to find out
more
The placement settings in the mark Define automatic placement settings
properties for marks (page 608)
The type of the selected leader line How leader line type affects part mark
and surface treatment mark location
(page 765)
How leader line type affects
reinforcement mark location
(page 767)
How merging affects reinforcing bar
group mark location (page 766)
The predefined mark location and Set a predefined location for beam,
part orientation settings bracing and column marks
(page 764)
Settings in the Options dialog box:
Orientation settings
Use part mark as an orientation mark
in general arrangement drawings
(page 798)
Protection settings Protected areas in drawings
(page 605)
The modeling direction of parts Creating horizontal parts
Alignment of the marks Align drawing objects (page 288)

See also
Mark properties (page 877)
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)

Set a predefined location for beam, bracing and column marks

By default, part marks are placed at the end point of the part. You can change
this by adjusting the predefined location settings for beam, bracing and
column marks.
1. On the File menu, click Settings --> Options and go to the Orientation
marks settings.
2. In Mark location: Preferred location for beams and bracings, select
Left or Right to place the mark to the left or right end of the part.
3. In Mark location: Mark always to center of column in GA drawings,
select Yes to place part marks in the center of columns in plan views, or

Define automatic drawing settings 764 Define marks

 No to place part marks on the same flange in GA drawings and assembly
drawings.
4. Click OK.

See also
Mark location (page 763)
Mark properties (page 877)
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)
Use part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement drawings
(page 798)

How leader line type affects part mark and surface treatment mark
location
Part marks and surface treatment marks have several types of leader lines you
can select. The type of the leader line affects the location of the mark.

Leader line type Description

Always uses a leader line.
Tries to find a space along the part for the mark. If
impossible, Tekla Structures uses a leader line.
The mark is always along the part. Lack of space might
cause the mark to overlap other elements.
The mark is always inside the part.
The mark is always inside the part and parallel to the
part axis.
Tries to find a space for the mark inside the part. If
impossible, Tekla Structures places the mark along the
part with a leader line.
Tries to find a space inside the part for the mark and
align it parallel to the part axis. If impossible, Tekla
Structures places the mark along the part with a leader
line.
Places the part mark along and in the middle of a part
face.

See also
Mark location (page 763)
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)
Mark properties (page 877)

Define automatic drawing settings 765 Define marks

 How merging affects reinforcing bar group mark location
In reinforcing bar groups Tekla Structures first tries to place the mark on the
middle bar if it is visible. If that is not possible, Tekla Structures tries the next
visible bar.

Below is a list of leader line options available for identical reinforcement marks
and reinforcing bar group marks:

Option Image Example

One leader line to group

One leader line per row

Parallel leader lines

Leader lines to one

point

Define automatic drawing settings 766 Define marks

 See also
Mark location (page 763)
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)
Mark properties (page 877)

How leader line type affects reinforcement mark location

Reinforcement marks have several types of leader lines you can select. The
type of the leader line affects the location of the mark. Tekla Structures tries to
place the mark close to the midpoint on straight bars, or to the midpoint of the
longest bar segment.

Reinforcement leader Description

line type
Always creates a leader line.
Tries to find a space along the reinforcing bar for the
mark. If impossible, creates a leader line.
The mark is always along the reinforcing bar. The mark
may overlap other elements if there is not enough
space.
The mark is parallel to the reinforcing bar.

The mark is parallel to the reinforcing bar on line. If

there is not enough space for the mark, a leader line is
created.

See also
Mark location (page 763)
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)
Merge reinforcement marks automatically (page 771)
Mark properties (page 877)

Merge marks automatically

You can let Tekla Structures automatically merge marks.
You can automatically merge:
• Part marks and surface treatment marks: Merge part marks automatically
(page 770)
• Reinforcement marks: Merge reinforcement marks automatically
(page 771)

Define automatic drawing settings 767 Define marks

 See also
Merge marks (page 267)
Merged reinforcement marks (page 770)

Merged part marks

A merged part mark means that you have only one part mark for similar parts
in a drawing, instead of a separate mark for each of the parts. Merged part
marks indicate the number of included parts, and contain the defined part
mark contents, and the near side and far side information. The marks are
merged only in X direction of the main part.

Tekla Structures merges marks for visible parts in drawings if:

• The secondary parts are welded or bolted to the same main part.
• The parts are on the same line.
• Distances between the parts are equal.
• The parts have the same part position.
• Distance between parts is not more than what is set for the advanced
option XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE.
• There are at least as many parts in the array as it has been set for the
advanced option XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT.

Limitations
• Part marks can be merged only on view and drawing level. It is not possible
to merge or split part marks manually.
• You cannot merge part marks (assembly marks) that are not part of the
same assembly.
• Tekla Structures does not merge neighbor part marks.
Advanced options in merging marks
In merging part marks, you may find the following advanced options useful:
XS_MULTIPLIER_SEPARATOR_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_NSFS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_NS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_FS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE
XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT

Example
In the example below, the part marks are merged in X direction of the HEA300
beam (main part).

Define automatic drawing settings 768 Define marks

 In the example below, the leftmost part marks are not merged, because they
are too far from each other.

In the example below, the marks in the Y direction are not merged, because
the marks are merged only in X direction (which in this example is horizontal).

Define automatic drawing settings 769 Define marks

 See also
Merge part marks automatically (page 770)
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)

Merge part marks automatically

You can merge part marks and surfaced treatment marks automatically to
reduce the number of marks in the drawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click View creation,
select the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Part mark.
If you want to merge surface treatment, click Surface treatment mark
instead.
5. On the General tab in the part mark properties, set Merge marks to On.
6. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the
changes in view properties and Close to return to drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
7. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Tekla Structures merges marks for identical secondary parts on both faces of
main parts.

See also
Merged part marks (page 768)
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)

Merged reinforcement marks

Tekla Structures can automatically merge similar reinforcement marks of bars.
Merged reinforcement marks may include several blocks, and additional
information. Blocks combine similar single marks.

NOTE To have Tekla Structures automatically merge reinforcement marks in

drawings, the reinforcement must be attached to a concrete part or cast unit
in the model.

Define automatic drawing settings 770 Define marks

 Tekla Structures automatically merges marks for visible reinforcing bars in
drawings if:
• The bars belong to the same concrete part or cast unit.
• The direction of the bars is the same.
• The bar marks are identical.
• The bars are close to each other.
• A straight line can be drawn through all the bars.
You can also define the distance within which to automatically merge marks
for visible reinforcing bars using the following advanced options:
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_HORIZONTAL
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_VERTICAL

See also
Merge reinforcement marks manually (page 270)
Merge reinforcement marks automatically (page 771)

Merge reinforcement marks automatically

You can merge reinforcement marks automatically to reduce the number of
marks in the drawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type. You can merge reinforcement marks in cast unit drawings
and general arrangement drawings.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Cast unit drawings: Click View creation, select the view and the
properties that you want to change, and click View properties.
4. Click Reinforcement mark.
5. Go to the Merging tab of the reinforcement marks dialog box.
6. Select an option from the Identical marks in same cast unit list to
merge marks and create leader lines:
One leader line per row: Merges the marks and creates one leader line
for a row of reinforcing bars.
Parallel leader lines: Merges the marks and creates parallel leader lines.
Leader lines to one point: Merges the marks and draws all leader lines
to one point.

Define automatic drawing settings 771 Define marks

 No merge: Marks are not merged, an individual leader line is created for
each mark.
If you select No merge , you still need to define the mark content for the
marks that Tekla Structures automatically merges on the Merging tab
7. If there are several possible merge directions, select the horizontal or
vertical from Preferred direction of merge.
8. Select the contents to be included in the merged reinforcement marks
from the Available elements list.
To ensure that merged reinforcement marks appear in the drawing,
always include Symbol separating blocks in mark as the last element in
the reinforcement mark. To omit the separating symbol, leave this box
blank, but still include the element in the mark.
9. If needed, add a frame around the single elements in the mark. You can
define the frame individually for each element.
10. Adjust the font, font height and the color of the mark text. You can adjust
these settings individually for each element.
11. Cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the changes in view properties
and Close to return to drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
12. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Example
In this example, three A φ12 L2000 marks are merged to a block, and six V φ8
L650 marks to another block, and then these blocks are merged in the
following way:

1. Single mark content

2. Symbol separating the blocks
3. Block prefix
4. Distance between groups
5. Block 1

Define automatic drawing settings 772 Define marks

 6. Block 2

See also
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)
Merged reinforcement marks (page 770)

Show mark frames and leader lines for hidden parts

If a part is behind another part in the drawing so that it is hidden, you can
select whether to show the mark frame and leader line of the hidden part with
a dashed or a solid line.

1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click View creation,
select the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Part mark.
5. In part mark properties, go to the General tab.
6. Use one of the following options:
Use hidden lines for hidden parts: Yes
Part mark frame and leader line are shown with a dashed line.

Use hidden lines for hidden parts: No

Part mark frame and leader line are shown with a solid line.

7. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the
changes in view properties and Close to return to drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings: Click OK.

Define automatic drawing settings 773 Define marks

 8. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

TIP With the advanced option

XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_HIDDEN_PARTS_IN_GA_DRAWINGS you can omit the
marks of hidden objects in general arrangement drawings.

See also
Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs (page 878)
Mark properties (page 877)

Change unit settings for marks

Tekla Structures uses the contentattributes_global.lst attributes file
for setting the default unit settings for various mark elements. This file defines,
for example, the unit used, and the number of decimals. You can change the
unit and format for the length, height, diameter, and spacing elements in the
mark, associative note and dimension mark properties dialog box. One
additional way to change the unit is to add individual settings at the end of the
contentattributes.lst file.

The contentattributes_global.lst file also defines default values for

attributes in templates created in Template Editor.
If you change the unit and format, save the changes for future usage in a
property file if necessary.

WARNING Do not edit contentattributes_global.lst.

For user-defined attributes in mark elements, the default unit settings are
taken from the contentattributes_userdefined.lst file. You can use
contentattributes_userdefined.lst also when you want to configure
settings of your own. By default, this file is located in ..\Program Files
\Tekla Structures\<version>\nt\TplEd\settings, but often the
location depends on your environment. The files are read from different
locations in a certain search order.
The container file contentattributes.lst lists all the files that contain the
actual attribute definitions. The order of the files included in
contentattributes.lst defines the reading order of the files.

TIP You can add in the mark a template that changes the unit and number of
decimals. This affects all drawings that have marks containing the
changed template.

Define automatic drawing settings 774 Define marks

 Example 1
This first example shows how you can change the unit and format of a length
element in the part mark, save your changes in a property file and apply the
changes in a part mark.

1. Double-click the background of an open drawing to open the Drawing

Properties dialog box.
2. Click Part mark.
3. Add a Length element in the part mark.
4. Select Length from the Elements in mark list and adjust the unit and
format as required. For example, select mm and ###.##.
The unit and format settings only become available when you select the
Length element in the Elements in mark list.

5. Give a name to the property file next to the Save as button and click Save
as.
Now you can load this file later on when you need to use the same unit
and format again.
6. Click Modify.
All the part marks in your drawing now have the new unit and format
setting for the length element.

Example 2
This second example shows a situation when you want a certain project to
have certain individual settings. In this case, you can add
contentattributes.lst under the model folder, and add this individual
setting at the end of the contentattributes.lst. See the example below
showing the included global attributes and user attributes files, and the added
DIAMETER setting.

Define automatic drawing settings 775 Define marks

 See also
Mark elements (page 892)
Add templates in marks (page 780)

Add attributes in automatic marks

All types of building object marks allow you to add user-defined attributes and
template attributes. For example, you might want to add control numbers or
specify the number of characters in part numbers in assembly or part marks.

You can add user-defined attributes and template attributes in automatic and
manual marks.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click View creation,
select the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Part mark.
5. In the mark properties dialog box, double-click the User-defined
attribute element in the Available elements list to add it in the mark.
6. Enter the user-defined attribute name in the Mark content - user
defined attribute dialog box exactly as it appears in the objects.inp
file.
If you need a template attribute in your mark, enter that instead.
7. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the
changes in view properties and Close to return to drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings: Click OK.

Define automatic drawing settings 776 Define marks

 8. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Example
In the following example, the user-defined attribute OBJECT_LOCKED has been
added in the part mark after a text element Locked:.

See also
Add level attributes in automatic part marks (page 777)
Mark elements (page 892)
Common elements in marks (page 893)

Add level attributes in automatic part marks

You can add level attributes, such as TOP_LEVEL, BOTTOM_LEVEL,
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL, ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL, and
ASSEMBLY.MAIN_PART.TOP_LEVEL, in part marks as user-defined attributes.

The level attributes take the dimension format from the

MarkDimensionFormat.dim file. If you want, you can also change the
dimension format in the Dimension properties dialog box in an open drawing
and load the changed dimension properties in the dimensioning rule that you
use for creating dimensions in a view.
You can add level attributes in automatic and manual marks.
To change the dimension format and add level attributes:
1. In an open drawing, on the Drawing tab, click Properties --> Dimension.
2. Select MarkDimensionFormat from the properties file list at the top, and
click Load.
3. Change the unit, precision and format as desired.

Define automatic drawing settings 777 Define marks

 4. Click Save to save the changes in the MarkDimensionFormat file, and
then click Cancel to close the dialog box.
5. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
6. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
7. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
8. Click Part mark.
9. In part mark properties, double-click the User-defined attribute element
to add it to the mark.
10. Enter a user-defined attribute name in the Mark content - user defined
attribute dialog box.
You can enter the following values:
TOP_LEVEL
TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED
TOP_LEVEL_GLOBAL
TOP_LEVEL_GLOBAL_UNFORMATTED
BOTTOM_LEVEL
BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED
BOTTOM_LEVEL_GLOBAL
BOTTOM_LEVEL_GLOBAL_UNFORMATTED
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL_GLOBAL
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL_GLOBAL_UNFORMATTED
ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL
ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED

Define automatic drawing settings 778 Define marks

 ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL_GLOBAL
ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL_GLOBAL_UNFORMATTED
CAST_UNIT_TOP_LEVEL
CAST_UNIT_BOTTOM_LEVEL
and/or the following:
ASSEMBLY.MAIN_PART.TOP_LEVEL.
11. Click Dimensioning in the options tree.
12. Select a dimension rule from the list and click Edit Rule.
13. Select MarkDimensionFormat from the Dimension properties list.
14. Save the dimensioning rule by clicking Save and click Close.
15. Save the view properties clicking Save.
16. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Example
In the following example, TOP_LEVEL and ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL have been
added in the mark.

In the following example, the top level of the part itself (TOP_LEVEL), the top
level of the assembly (ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL), and the top level of the
assembly main part (ASSEMBLY.MAIN_PART.TOP_LEVEL) have been added in
the mark.

Define automatic drawing settings 779 Define marks

 See also
Add attributes in automatic marks (page 776)
Units and decimals in drawings, reports and templates (page 825)

Add templates in marks

You can create custom graphical templates (.tpl) with Template Editor and
add them as elements in all types of marks, dimension marks and associative
notes in all drawing types.

In mark templates, you can include detailed information of an embed or

assembly, such as the sub-material used. Or you can use a template that
changes the unit and the number of decimals in measurement values in a
mark. You can also add graphical objects using the Template Editor tools.
To add templates in dimension marks or tags, you need to modify the
Dimension Properties in an open drawing. You can save the dimension
properties, and then take the saved properties into use when you create
automatic dimensions (page 655).
The size of the templates in part marks is calculated according to the actual
size of template contents. Only lines and texts in the template are considered
when calculating the exact size. This means, for example, that circles or
bitmaps in the template do not have any effect.

Define automatic drawing settings 780 Define marks

 Limitations: Mark templates do not support image files like the other
graphical drawing templates.
Before you add a template in a mark, ensure that the template you use does
not contain any margins.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click View creation,
select the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click the mark type that you want to change.
For example, click Part mark.
5. In the mark properties dialog box, double-click the Template element in
the Available elements list to add it in the mark.
This will remove all other elements from the mark.
6. Select a template from the list in the Mark content - template dialog
box. If you have not created a template yet, or want to edit the template,
you can do that from here by selecting Create new or Edit.
Remember that if you edit the template here, the change affects all
drawings that have marks containing the changed template.
7. Click OK to return to mark properties.
8. Save the mark properties for later using a unique name.
9. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the
changes in view properties and Close to return to drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
10. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.
11. When necessary, copy the saved mark properties files from the <model>
\attributes folder into your firm or project folder.

TIP The mark templates are by default searched from the following folders in the
following order:
%XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY%\mark
ModelDir\mark
%XS_PROJECT%\mark
%XS_FIRM%\mark
%XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM%\mark

Define automatic drawing settings 781 Define marks

 %XS_SYSTEM%\mark
The mark folder name can be changed using the advanced option
XS_TEMPLATE_MARK_SUB_DIRECTORY

Example

For more information about templates in marks, see the following examples:
Example 1: Create a mark template containing separate value fields and text
elements (page 782)
Example 2: Create a mark template containing a formula in the value field
(page 784)

Example 1: Create a mark template containing separate value fields

and text elements
You can use decimals instead of fractions in your part marks in the US Imperial
environment by using a mark template. The template contains separate value
fields and text elements that change the fractions to decimals, and change the
number of decimals.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click View creation,
select the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Part mark.
5. Double-click Template in the Available elements list.

Define automatic drawing settings 782 Define marks

 6. In the Mark content - template dialog box, click Create new.
This starts the Template Editor.
7. Click File --> New and create a new graphical template.
8. Click Insert --> Component --> Row .
9. Select PART as the content type.
10. Click Insert --> Text , enter L and place it inside the row you just added.
11. Click Insert --> Value field and place the value field on the right side of
the L text.
12. In the displayed Select Attribute [Part] dialog box, scroll down to
PROFILE - Profile, open the profile tree, select the HEIGHT - height
property and click OK.
13. Double-click the value field. In the Value Field Properties dialog box,
change the settings as follows:
• Unit: inch
• Decimals: 1
• Length: 8
14. Click OK.
15. Click Insert --> Text , enter X as text and place it on the right side of the
value field.
16. In the similar way, add another value field for the width information
(WIDTH - Width profile property).
17. Click Insert --> Text and add the second X between the value fields.
18. Add the third value field for the profile flange thickness by selecting
FLANGE_THICKNESS_1 - Flange thickness 1 profile property and modify
the settings as follows:
• Unit: inch
• Decimals: 2
• Length: 4
19. Click Edit --> Properties and minimize the height and the width of the
row.
20. Click File --> Save to save the template.
The template is by default saved as a .tpl file in the \mark folder under
the model folder. You can copy this template to other models as required.
21. In Tekla Structures, click Refresh list in the Mark content - template
dialog box to see the template you created.
22. Select the template and click OK.

Define automatic drawing settings 783 Define marks

 23. Save the mark properties for late use with a unique name.
24. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the
changes in view properties and Close to return to drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
25. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Example
The first example below uses fractions and the second one decimals.

Example 2: Create a mark template containing a formula in the value

field
You use decimals instead of fractions in your part marks in the US Imperial
environment by adding a formula in the mark template value field.

1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click View creation,
select the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Part mark.
5. In the mark properties dialog box, double-click the User-defined
attribute element in the Available elements list to add it in the mark.
6. In the Mark content - template dialog box, click Create new.
This starts the Template Editor.

Define automatic drawing settings 784 Define marks

 7. Click File --> New and create a new graphical template.
8. Click Insert --> Component --> Row .
9. Select PART as the content type.
10. Click Insert --> Value field , and place the field.
11. In the displayed Select Attribute [Part] dialog box, click the Formula
button.
12. Add the following formula in the Formula box and click OK:
"L " + format(GetValue("HEIGHT"),"Length","inch",1) + " x
"+ format(GetValue("WIDTH"),"Length","inch",1) + " x " +
format(GetValue("PROFILE.FLANGE_THICKNESS_1"),"Length","i
nch",2)
13. Double-click the value field to open the Value Field Properties dialog
box.
14. Set the Data type to text, enter a name for the field, for example,
PART_MARK, and ensure that the length value you give in the Length field
is high enough to fit all the characters and numbers included, for
example, 20.
15. Click OK.
16. Click Edit --> Properties and minimize the height and the width of the
row.
17. Click File --> Save to save the template.
The template is by default saved as a .tpl file in the \mark folder under
the model folder. You can copy this template to other models as required.
18. In Tekla Structures, click Refresh list in the Mark content - template
dialog box to see the template you created.
19. Select the template and click OK.
20. Save the mark properties for later use with a unique name.
21. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the
changes in view properties and Close to return to drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
22. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

See also
Example 1: Create a mark template containing separate value fields and text
elements (page 782)

Define automatic drawing settings 785 Define marks

 Add symbols in automatic marks
All types of marks allow you to add symbols in them. You can select the
symbol file to be used and the symbol to be added in the mark.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click View creation,
select the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Part mark.
5. In mark properties, double-click Symbol in the Available elements list.
6. In the Mark content - Symbol dialog box, click Select next to the File box
to select the symbol file you want to use.
7. When you have selected the file, click Select next to the Number box to
select the number of the symbol you want to use.
8. Click OK.
Tekla Structures adds the name of the symbol file and the number of the
symbol in the elements list.
9. Save the mark properties for late use with a unique name.
10. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the
changes in view properties and Close to return to drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
11. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

See also
Symbols in drawings (page 482)

Define size in bolt marks using advanced options

You can use certain advanced options to define the contents of the bolt mark
Size element in different types of drawings.

To change the bolt mark Size element content, go to File menu --> Settings --
> Advanced options --> Marking: Bolts .

NOTE • General arrangement drawings have separate advanced options.

Define automatic drawing settings 786 Define marks

 • Any changes made to the advanced options listed in the table
below will take place only in the new drawings you create, and if
you modify the affected bolt marks.

To Do this
Define the contents of the size Set a value for the advanced option
element in slotted hole marks or XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_S
longhole marks (general arrangement IZE.
drawings).
For GA-drawings, set a value for the
advanced option
XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_S
IZE_IN_GA.
Define the contents of the size Set a value for the advanced option
element in slotted hole marks or XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_
longhole marks (general arrangement FOR_SIZE.
drawings) for site bolts.
For GA-drawings, set a value for the
advanced option
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_
FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.
Define the contents of the size Set a value for the advanced option
element in slotted hole marks or XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_
longhole marks (general arrangement FOR_SIZE.
drawings) for workshop bolts.
For GA-drawings, set a value for the
advanced option
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_
FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.
Define the contents of the size Set a value for the advanced option
element in hole marks. XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE.
For GA-drawings, set a value for the
advanced option
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_
IN_GA.
Define the contents of the size Set a value for the advanced option
element in hole marks for site bolts. XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_
SIZE
For GA-drawings, set a value for the
advanced option
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_
SIZE_IN_GA

Define automatic drawing settings 787 Define marks

 To Do this
Define the contents of the size Set a value for the advanced option
element in hole marks for workshop XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_
bolts. SIZE
For GA-drawings, set a value for the
advanced option
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_
SIZE_IN_GA
Define the contents of the size Set a value for the advanced option
element in bolt marks. XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
For GA-drawings, set a value for the
advanced option
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_
IN_GA
Define the contents of the size Set a value for the advanced option
element in bolt marks for site bolts. XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_
SIZE
For GA-drawings, set a value for the
advanced option
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_
SIZE_IN_GA
Define the contents of the size Set a value for the advanced option
element in bolt marks for workshop XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_
bolts. SIZE
For GA-drawings, set a value for the
advanced option
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_
SIZE_IN_GA

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for
the above advanced options. Enclose each option in % characters. To use
special characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can
use the options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)

Define automatic drawing settings 788 Define marks

 • BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME

Example
Example of using the advanced options:
XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE=D%HOLE.DIAMETER%
(%HOLE.DIAMETER+LONG_HOLE_X%x%HOLE.DIAMETER+LONG_HOLE_Y%)
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE=D%HOLE.DIAMETER%
Please note that for calculations the operator (+, -, *, /) must not be outside the
"%" marks:
Correct: %OPTION1*OPTION2%
Incorrect: %OPTION1%*%OPTION2%
For example, if OPTION1 = 5.0 and OPTION2 = 3.0, the results would be "15"
and "5*3"

Add pull-out pictures in automatic reinforcement marks

You can add a pull-out picture of the a reinforcing bar in the reinforcement
mark to illustrate the shape and dimensions of the bar in the drawing.

Pull-out pictures can be added in automatic and manually created

reinforcement marks.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Cast unit drawings: Click View creation, select the view and the
properties that you want to change, and click View properties.
4. Click Reinforcement mark.
5. Double-click the Pullout picture element in the Available elements list
to add it in the reinforcement mark.
6. In the Pullout picture dialog box, select the scaling option in Scale by:
• Auto auto-scales the pull-out.

Define automatic drawing settings 789 Define marks

 • One factor and Two factors scale the pull-out according to the values
that you enter.
The scale of the pull-out is relative to the scale of the drawing view. For
example, if the drawing view scale is 1/10 and the pull-out scaling is 2,
the actual scale of the pull-out in the drawing view is 1/5.
7. In Rotation, select the rotation of the pull-out: Automatic, Plane or 3D. If
the pull-out is 3D, and you select Automatic, Tekla Structures
automatically shows the pull-out in 3D.
8. In End marks, define the shape of bar ends in the pull-out.
9. Select Dimensions to show bar dimensions in the pull-out.
10. Select Exaggeration to show reinforcing bar hooks more clearly in the
pull-out.
11. Select Bending radius to show the bending radius in form of diameter of
the bending roll.
12. Select Bending angle to show bar bending angles in the pull-out.
13. Click OK.
14. Save the mark properties for late use with a unique name.
15. Cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the changes in view properties
and Close to return to drawing properties.
General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
16. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Example

A 3D pull-out showing the bending radius:

Define automatic drawing settings 790 Define marks

 TIP To change the leader line length, color, line type, or representation of a pull-out,
open the (page 916) file in ..\Tekla Structures\<version>
\environments\<environment>\system and edit the following lines:
PullOutLeaderLineMinLength, PulloutColor, PulloutVisibleLinetype
and PulloutRepresentation.

See also
Reinforcement and neighbor reinforcement mark elements (page 898)

8.7 Define drawing grids

You can show grids in all types of drawings. You can change the appearance
and visibility of the labels, label frames, and grid lines.

Define automatic drawing settings 791 Define drawing grids

 See also
Grids in drawings (page 469)
Define automatic grid properties (page 792)
Drawing grid properties (page 930)

Define automatic drawing settings 792 Define drawing grids

 Define automatic grid properties
You can modify drawing grid properties of single-part, assembly and cast unit
drawings individually for each view. In general arrangement drawings, you can
modify the grid properties on both view and drawing level. You can also
modify individual grid properties of in an open drawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings:Click View creation, select
the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Grid.
5. Modify the grid properties as required.
6. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the view
properties and click Close.
General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
7. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

TIP The advanced options XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH and

XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR allow you to adjust
the grid labels further.

See also
Drawing grid properties (page 930)

8.8 Define drawing parts and neighbor parts

Parts and neighbor parts in drawings are building objects that will exist in the
real structure or which will be closely related to the structure.
Parts and neighbor parts have drawing properties that affect the way that the
part is shown in the drawing.

To Click the links below to find out

more
Define what is shown in a part and Define automatic drawing part
how the part is shown properties (page 794)
Define what is shown of neighbor Define automatic neighbor part
parts and how the neighbor parts are properties (page 797)

Define automatic drawing settings 793 Define drawing parts and neighbor parts
 To Click the links below to find out
more
shown. You can also control the
visibility of the neighbor part bolts.
Check examples of modifying the part Example: Part representations
settings (page 795)
Indicate the part orientation by using Indicate part orientation (page 797)
part marks, by including compass
direction in marks, and showing
orientation marks and connecting
side marks
Check and change part and neighbor Part and neighbor part properties in
part properties drawings (page 904)

Define automatic drawing part properties

You can define what is shown in a part and how the part is shown.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings:Click View creation, select
the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Part.
5. On the Contents tab, select the part representation, whether to show
hidden lines, center lines and reference lines, and which additional
markings to show.
A reference line is a line between the points from which a part is created.
6. On the Appearance tab, select the color and type of the lines.
The color of the center lines can be changed only on the drawing and view
level, not on the object level. For center lines, you can only adjust the color
in the properties dialog box, not the type. You can adjust the line type of
part center lines with the advanced option XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE.
7. On the Fill tab, set the part and section fill options.
8. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the view
properties. Then return to drawing properties by clicking Close.
9. General arrangement drawings: Click OK to return to drawing properties.
10. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Define automatic drawing settings 794 Define drawing parts and neighbor parts
 See also
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)
Example: Part representations (page 795)

Example: Part representations

Here are some examples of what parts look like with different settings defined
in the Part Properties dialog box.

Setting Example
Part representation is
set to Outline.

Part representation is
set to Exact.
The Edge chamfers
check box is selected in
Additional marks.

Part representation is
set to Symbol.

Part representation is
set to Symbol with
partial profile.
You can change the
partial profile settings
Length and Offset from
middle point. In the first

Define automatic drawing settings 795 Define drawing parts and neighbor parts
 Setting Example
example on the right,
the default values are
used. In the second
example, both the length
and the offset have been
adjusted.
Part representation is
set to Bounding box.

Part representation is
set to Base box.

Part representation is
set to Exact and Symbol
offset is set to 0.00.
The Center line check
box is selected.
Part representation is
set to Exact and Symbol
offset is set to 10.00.
The Center line check
box is selected.
The Hidden lines check
box is not selected.

The Hidden lines check

box is selected.
The Own hidden lines
check box is selected.
1. Hidden lines for
other parts are
shown.
2. Own hidden lines
for the main part
are shown.

See also
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)
Define automatic drawing part properties (page 794)

Define automatic drawing settings 796 Define drawing parts and neighbor parts
 Define automatic neighbor part properties
You can define what is shown of neighbor parts and how the neighbor parts
are shown. You can also control the visibility of the neighbor part bolts.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings:Click View creation, select
the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Neighbor part.
5. Select the desired visibility options on the Visibility tab.
• For more information, see Show neighbor parts in views (page 630)
6. On the Contents tab, select the neighbor bolt representation, whether to
show hidden lines, center lines and reference lines, and which additional
markings to show.
A reference line is a line between the points from which a part is created.
7. On the Appearance tab, select the color and type of the lines.
The color of the center lines can be changed only on the drawing and view
level, not on the object level. For center lines, you can only adjust the color
in the properties dialog box, not the type.
You can adjust the line type of part center lines with the advanced option
XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE.
8. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the view
properties. Then return to drawing properties by clicking Close.
9. General arrangement drawings: Click OK to return to drawing properties.
10. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

See also
Define drawing parts and neighbor parts (page 793)
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)
Example: Part representations (page 795)

Indicate part orientation

Part orientation marks indicate the erection direction of assemblies and cast
units. There are many ways available for indicating part orientation: by using

Define automatic drawing settings 797 Define drawing parts and neighbor parts
 part marks, by including compass direction in marks, and showing orientation
marks and connecting side marks.

To Click the following links to find out

more
Check how the location of the mark is Mark location (page 763)
affected by mark placement settings,
the type of the leader line, predefined
mark location and part orientation
settings, modeling direction of parts,
and drawing protection settings
Use part marks to indicate part Use part mark as an orientation mark
orientation in general arrangement drawings
(page 798)
Setting the casting direction affects Define the casting direction of a part
the orientation of part marks
Include face direction information in Show compass direction in part marks
part marks (page 800)
Use a symbol in assembly drawings to Show connecting side marks
indicate the side of a part to which a (page 803)
connecting part is attached
Use orientation marks to indicate Show orientation marks (north marks)
the erection direction of (page 801)
assemblies

See also
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)

Use part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement

drawings
In general arrangement drawings, part marks appear at the same end as in
assembly drawings. Parts with the same assembly position are always marked
at the same end.
1. Select Drawings & reports --> Drawings properties --> Assembly
drawing .
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. In assembly drawing properties, click View creation --> Attributes and
set the Coordinate system to oriented or model.
You must use oriented or model if you want the Viewing direction
settings in File menu --> Settings --> Options --> Orientation marks to
have effect.

Define automatic drawing settings 798 Define drawing parts and neighbor parts
 4. Click Save to save the properties and Close to close the dialog box.
5. In the model, click Drawings & reports --> Numbering settings -->
Numbering settings and clear the Beam orientation and Column
orientation check boxes.
When you do this, similar assemblies get the same number regardless of
the part orientation.
6. Go to File menu --> Settings --> Options --> Orientation marks and set
the following options:
• Set the desired Viewing direction for beams, bracings and columns.
• Set Mark always to center of column in GA drawings to No.
• Set Preferred location for beams and bracings to Left or Right.
The preferred location determines the end where the mark is placed.
7. Click OK.
8. Check the leader line type through Drawings & reports --> Drawings
properties --> GA drawing --> Part marks --> General .
Place the mark near the part end, not in the middle of the part using one
of the following settings:

9. Click Save to save the drawing properties and OK to close the dialog box.
10. Create assembly (and single-part) drawings using the settings you
modified.
If you have not created a drawing earlier, the modeling direction of the
part that has the smallest id is used, except if the top in form face has
been defined.
11. Create general arrangement drawings using the settings you modified.

NOTE • In general arrangement drawings, the cast unit part marks behave in the
same way as the assembly part marks, except when Top in form face is
set to Front or Back on the Parameters tab of the part’s User-defined
attributes dialog box. These settings tell the end where the part mark is
placed.
• When you update an assembly drawing so that the mark is placed at the
other end of the part, remember to update the marks in the
corresponding general arrangement drawing. Tekla Structures does not do
this automatically.
• Also note that if you have set the advanced option
XS_UPSIDE_DOWN_TEXT_ALLOWED to TRUE, the text reading direction
indicates the part installation direction.

Define automatic drawing settings 799 Define drawing parts and neighbor parts
 Example
The part mark is positioned at the stiffener side:

The marks are positioned at the same side irrespective of the orientation of
the beams:

See also
Mark location (page 763)
Indicate part orientation (page 797)
Define marks (page 752)

Show compass direction in part marks

You can include face direction information in part marks. No matter where you
add or move the mark, the face direction stays the same. The face direction

Define automatic drawing settings 800 Define drawing parts and neighbor parts
 indicates the compass direction (North, East, South, West) of the face where
the mark appears.

Limitation: Tekla Structures indicates the face direction only if it is the same for
all assemblies or cast units with the same assembly or cast unit position
number.
1. Check in which direction north is in the model by clicking File --> Settings
--> Options --> Orientation marks and checking Project north (degrees
counterclockwise from global x).
2. In the model, click Drawings & reports --> Numbering settings and
select the Column orientation check box.
This forces Tekla Structures to show the face direction in the part mark for
two similar columns with different orientation.
3. In the desired assembly or cast unit drawing view properties, click Part
mark and insert the Face direction element in the part mark.

Now the assembly or cast unit drawings show the face direction in the part
marks.

TIP To show compass direction in GA drawings, go to File --> Settings --> Options --
> Orientation marks and set Mark always to center of column in GA
drawings to No.

See also
Indicate part orientation (page 797)

Show orientation marks (north marks)

You can use orientation marks or north marks to indicate the erection
direction of assemblies. The default orientation mark is a triangle inside a
circle.

Define automatic drawing settings 801 Define drawing parts and neighbor parts
 1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> Assembly
drawing.
2. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
3. Click Part --> Content and select the Orientation marks check box.
4. Save the view properties and click Close.
5. Save the assembly drawing properties and click OK.
6. If needed, define which parts Tekla Structures considers to be columns,
braces or beams by setting the skew limits through File menu --> Settings
--> Options --> Orientation marks --> Skew limit .
7. Use the following advanced options to adjust orientation marks:
• XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION
• XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS
• XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS
• XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
• XS_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
• XS_NORTH_MARK_SCALE
• XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL (general arrangement drawings)
• XS_GA_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL (general arrangement
drawings)
• XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SCALE (general arrangement drawings)
8. Create the assembly drawing.

For different parts, Tekla Structures draws orientation marks in the following
way:
• To the top flange of beams, at the end which points closest to the north or
to the direction defined in XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION (see part 1
and 2 in the illustration below)
• To the lower end of columns, on the flange which points closest to the
north or to the direction defined in XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION
(see part 4 in the illustration below)

Define automatic drawing settings 802 Define drawing parts and neighbor parts
 • To the flange of bracing, at the end which points closest to the north or to
the direction defined in XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION (see 3 A and
B in the illustration below)

TIP You can display orientation marks for single-part views included in assembly
drawings by setting the advanced option XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK to
TRUE.

See also
Indicate part orientation (page 797)
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)

Show connecting side marks

You can use a symbol in assembly drawings to indicate the side of a part to
which a connecting part is attached.
1. Select Drawings & reports --> Drawings properties --> Assembly
drawing .
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
4. Click Part.
5. On the Content tab, select the Connecting side marks check box.
6. Click Save to save the view properties.
7. Click Close.
8. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Define automatic drawing settings 803 Define drawing parts and neighbor parts
 TIP If needed, you can change the connecting side mark symbol with the advanced
option XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL , and use
XS_MIN_DISTANCE_FOR_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK to control whether the
connecting side mark is drawn or not.

See also
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)

8.9 Define drawing bolts

Bolts are connecting objects that fasten parts or assemblies or attach to them.
You can change how the bolts are shown in drawings.

To Click the links below to find out

more
Change how the bolts are shown in Define automatic bolt properties in
drawings drawings (page 805)
Create you own bolt symbols Create customized bolt symbols
(page 805)
Chech examples of different bolt Example: Bolt representations
settings (page 806)
Check bolt properties Bolt content and appearance
properties in drawings (page 909)

Define automatic drawing settings 804 Define drawing bolts

 Define automatic bolt properties in drawings
You can define what is shown in bolts and how the bolts are shown.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click View creation, select
the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Bolts.
5. On the Content tab, select the bolt representation, bolt symbol content,
and the visibility of bolts in main parts.
For assembly and cast unit drawings, you can also set the visibility of bolts
in secondary parts and sub-assemblies.
6. On the Appearance tab, select the color of the bolts.
7. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the view
properties. Then click Close to return to drawing properties.
8. General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
9. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

See also
Define drawing bolts (page 804)
Bolt content and appearance properties in drawings (page 909)
Example: Bolt representations (page 806)

Create customized bolt symbols

You can create your own bolt symbols in Symbol Editor and use them in
drawings. You only need to create bolt symbols if you need different bolt
symbols than the ones that you can find in Tekla Structures.
1. Save the symbol file ud_bolts.sym in the symbol folder (usually the
folder..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common
\symbols\).
2. Open Microsoft Notepad, or any text editor.
3. Create a text file consisting of lines in three columns:
• The first column contains the bolt assembly standard.

Define automatic drawing settings 805 Define drawing bolts

 • The second contains the bolt diameter.
• The third column contains the name of the symbol file and the symbol
number, separated with the @ character.
Example of file contents:
7990 24 ud_bolts@1
7990 25 ud_bolts@2
Tekla Structures uses the user-defined symbol for bolts in drawings
that have the standard and diameter you define in this text file.
4. Save the file with the name bolt_symbol_table.txt.
5. Set the name of the file as a value for the advanced option
XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE in File menu --> Settings -->
Advanced options --> Marking: Bolts as follows:
XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE=bolt_symbol_table.txt
You can also enter a full path to the bolt definition file. Without the path
Tekla Structures searches for the file in the model, firm, project, and
system directories.
6. To use your own bolt symbol, click Bolt --> Content --> Solid/Symbol -->
User-defined symbol in the drawing view properties dialog box.

See also
Define drawing bolts (page 804)

Example: Bolt representations

There are several representation options available for displaying bolts in
drawings.

You can select the options from the Solid/symbol list. Here are some
examples of different selections.

Setting Example
Solid

Define automatic drawing settings 806 Define drawing bolts

 Setting Example
Exact Solid

Symbol

Symbol 2

Symbol 3

See also
Define drawing bolts (page 804)
Bolt content and appearance properties in drawings (page 909)

8.10 Define hatches in drawings

Use hatching on part faces, part sections or drawing shapes, such as circles
and polygons, to show different materials.

Define automatic drawing settings 807 Define hatches in drawings

 The hatches are located in the hatch_types1.pat file in the …\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\inp folder. You
can also use hatch patters on surface treatment.
You can also add custom hatches in the hatch_types1.pat file, see Adding
custom fill patterns.

See also
Add hatches (fills) to parts and sketch objects in drawings (page 809)
Colors in drawings (page 495)
Define automatic surface treatment in drawings (page 816)
Example: Insulation hatch patterns (page 814)
Hatch pattern settings (.htc) for automatic drawing hatches (page 812)
Surface treatment hatch pattern properties (surfacing.htc) (page 911)

Define automatic drawing settings 808 Define hatches in drawings

 Add hatches (fills) to parts and sketch objects in drawings
You can use hatches as fills in parts, neighbor parts, cross sections and sketch
objects in a drawing. You can use automatic hatches or manual hatches.

Automatic hatches are defined in drawing-specific hatch schema files

(page 812) (*.htc. You can also use custom hatches.
Limitations
There are some limitations in the hatch background color usage:
• Background color does not work in conjunction with hardware hatches.
• The background color does not have any effect if there is an automatic
hatch available. The background color can only be changed if the automatic
hatch is not defined for the material type.
To add a fill to a part:
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click View creation, select
the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Part and go to the Fill tab.
5. Select the hatch from the Type list.
To preview the hatches, click the ... button next to the Type list.
You can also select the hatch by double-clicking it in the Hatch window.
If you select Automatic, Tekla Structures uses the hatches defined in the
hatch schema file (.htc). Each drawing type has its own schema file.
The names of the schema files (page 812) Tekla Structures are defined in
the Hatching category of the Advanced options dialog box:
XS_DRAWING_GA_HATCH_SCHEMA
XS_DRAWING_CAST_UNIT_HATCH_SCHEMA
XS_DRAWING_SINGLE_PART_HATCH_SCHEMA
XS_DRAWING_ASSEMBLY_HATCH_SCHEMA
6. Define a color for the hatch (page 495) in the Color box.
7. Define a background color for the hatch in the Background box.
You can define the background color only after selecting a hatch first.
8. In Scale, select whether to use automatic or custom scaling and rotation
for hatches.

Define automatic drawing settings 809 Define hatches in drawings

 If you select automatic scaling and rotation, Tekla Structures automatically
scales the hatch to suit the profile size, and you do not need to edit each
drawing manually. If you select Custom scaling and rotation:
• Enter the scales in Scaling in direction x and Scaling in direction y,
and select whether to Keep the x and y ratio.
• Enter the angle of rotation in the Angle box. Angle 0.0 is for horizontal
and 90.0 for vertical.
9. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the view
properties. Then return to drawing properties by clicking Close.
10. General arrangement drawings: Click OK to return to drawing properties.
11. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Example
In the example below, the following hatch options have been selected for cross
sections:

Scale: Custom
Scaling in x direction: 0.25
Scaling in y direction: 0.50
Keep ratio of x and y is selected.
Angle: 10.00

Define automatic drawing settings 810 Define hatches in drawings

 Cast-in-place and precast hatches use different automatic hatch depending on
the cast unit type. You need to select the appropriate cast unit type in the
concrete part properties.

Some advanced options related to hatches

XS_HATCH_SCALE_LIMIT
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
XS_HATCH_SEGMENT_BUFFER_SIZE
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_ACI

Define automatic drawing settings 811 Define hatches in drawings

 See also
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)
Hatch pattern settings (.htc) for automatic drawing hatches (page 812)

Hatch pattern settings (.htc) for automatic drawing hatches

The hatch patterns for material types and names in drawings are defined in a
hatch schema file .htc. Different drawing types (general arrangement,
assembly, single-part, and cast unit drawings) have their own schema files.

The hatch patterns defined in schema files are used when you set Type to
Automatic on the Fill page in the part or shape properties.
Hatch schema file name and location
The name of the schema file Tekla Structures uses for each drawing type is
defined in the Hatching category of the Advanced options dialog box:
• XS_DRAWING_GA_HATCH_SCHEMA=general.htc
• XS_DRAWING_ASSEMBLY_HATCH_SCHEMA=assembly.htc
• XS_DRAWING_SINGLE_PART_HATCH_SCHEMA=single.htc
• XS_DRAWING_CAST_UNIT_HATCH_SCHEMA=cast_unit.htc
The default schema files are located in the ..\Tekla Structures
\<version>\environments\common\system folder. The environment-
specific schema files are located under the environments, for example:
..Tekla Structures\<version>\Environments\<environment>
\system\steel\general.htc (also assembly.htc, single.htc)
..Tekla Structures\<version>\Environments\<environment>
\system\concrete\precast\cast_unit.htc
Schema file syntax
Material type, Cast unit type, Material name, Hatch name,
Scale, Color, Automatic scaling and rotation
Examples:
CONCRETE,,hardware_SOLID,,120 (gray shade)
CONCRETE,Precast,C25/30,CONC,0.3,1 ("traditional" concrete Precast)
CONCRETE,CIP,C25/30,CONCRE,0.3,1 ("traditional" concrete CIP)
CONCRETE,,CROSS,2,1 (small crosses)
MISCELLANEOUS,Insulation,HARD_INS1,1,,1 (straight lines)
MISCELLANEOUS,Insulation,SOFT_INS,1,,1 (rounded lines)

Define automatic drawing settings 812 Define hatches in drawings

 MISCELLANEOUS,Insulation,SOFT_INS2,1,,1 (completely round)
To see an example of the cast_unit.htc file, click the following link:
cast_unit.htc

Option Description
Material type STEEL, CONCRETE, TIMBER,
MISCELLANEOUS (case sensitive)
Cast unit type Precast or CIP. You also need to
define the cast unit type for concrete
parts in part properties.
Material name The material name defined for the
part in part properties in the model.
Hatch name To check the hatch pattern names
and related hatch patterns go to the
Fill tab in Part properties, select a
hatch pattern from the Type list and
click the ... button next to the list.
Then click a pattern to see its name in
the Type list. The selected hatch
pattern is marked with a red frame.
Hatch names are case sensitive.
If you do not want to use any hatch
pattern for a material, leave the hatch
name field blank in the schema file.
Color BLACK: 0 (default)
WHITE: 1
RED: 2
GREEN: 3
BLUE: 4
CYAN: 5
YELLOW: 6
MAGENTA: 7
Special: 120 (use this color for gray
shade)
GRAYSCALE 1: 130
GRAYSCALE 2: 131
GRAYSCALE 3: 132
GRAYSCALE 4: 133
The hatch color defines the line width
for the printer. If you do not define a

Define automatic drawing settings 813 Define hatches in drawings

 Option Description
color for a hatch in the schema file,
Tekla Structures uses the default color
black (0). To use the special color that
is printed as color or grayscale,
depending on the selected printer
settings, set the color number in
the .htc file to 120.
To adjust the gray shade for Special
color 120, use the following advanced
options:
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B
Scale Scale is a numeric value that Tekla
Structures uses to scale hatches.
Automatic scaling and Automatic scaling and rotation
rotation defines whether you want to use
automatic scaling and rotation.
TRUE: 1
FALSE: 0 (default)
Automatic scaling and rotation
requires additional processing, so use
it only when necessary.

See also
Add hatches (fills) to parts and sketch objects in drawings (page 809)
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)

Example: Insulation hatch patterns

You can use the following fill types to represent insulation:
These hatch types can be scaled and rotated.

Define automatic drawing settings 814 Define hatches in drawings

 Hatch name Pattern
HARD_INS1

SOFT_INS

SOFT_INS2

Previewing patterns
To preview the scaled and rotated patterns, click the ... button next to the Type
box.

See also
Define hatches in drawings (page 807)

8.11 Define drawing surface treatment

You can add various types of surface treatment to steel and concrete parts in
the Tekla Structures model and show them in drawings.

Define automatic drawing settings 815 Define drawing surface treatment

 The properties of the hatch patterns to use for each surface treatment type
are defined in the surfacing.htc file. Also the product_finishes.dat
code file is needed listing all surface treatment codes that are used in
drawings and reports, for example, TS1 for Tile Surface 1.

See also
Define automatic surface treatment in drawings (page 816)
Surface treatment visibility and content properties in drawings (page 910)
Surface treatment hatch pattern properties (surfacing.htc) (page 911)

Define automatic surface treatment in drawings

You can define what is shown in a surface treatment and how the surface
treatment is shown in drawings.

The hatch pattern Tekla Structures adds on the surface treatment depends on
the type of the surface treatment that you selected in surface treatment
properties in the model, and on the hatch properties defined in the surface
treatment hatch pattern properties file surfacing.htc.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click View creation, select
the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Surface treatment.

Define automatic drawing settings 816 Define drawing surface treatment

 5. On the Contents tab, select the surface treatment representation, and
whether to show the surface treatment pattern, hidden lines, and own
hidden lines.
6. On the Appearance tab, select the color and type of visible and hidden
lines.
7. General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
8. Click Surface treatment mark, add the elements that you want to
include in the mark and adjust the appearance of the mark as required.
9. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the view
properties. Then click Close to return to drawing properties.
10. General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
11. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

See also
Define automatic surface treatment in drawings (page 816)
Surface treatment visibility and content properties in drawings (page 910)
Surface treatment hatch pattern properties (surfacing.htc) (page 911)
Surface treatment hatch pattern properties (surfacing.htc) (page 911)
Define hatches in drawings (page 807)

8.12 Define drawing welds

You can define automatic weld settings to be used in a drawing before you
create a drawing. You can modify the settings in an open drawing after you
have created the drawing.
Before creating a single-part drawing or an assembly drawing, you can define
the representation, visibility and appearance properties (page 927) for the
model welds. For general arrangement drawings, representation settings can
only be defined on view and object level, not on drawing level.

See also
Define automatic model weld properties in drawings (page 817)
Welds in drawings (page 346)
Examples: Model welds in drawings (page 349)

Define automatic drawing settings 817 Define drawing welds

 Define automatic model weld properties in drawings
You can define what the model welds look like in your drawings before you
create the drawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part and assembly drawings: Click View creation, select the view
and the properties that you want to change, and click View properties.
4. Click Weld.
5. On the Content page, define the visibility settings:
• In Welds and Welds in sub-assemblies, select Not visible, Site weld
visible, Workshop weld visible, or Both visible.
• In Weld size limit, enter a weld size to filter out welds of that size and
bigger.
This is useful when you only want to show non-typical welds in a
drawing.
To set whether the weld size is an exact or minimum value, use the
advanced option XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE.
To filter out a standard weld type, use the advanced option
XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE.
• In Representation, select Outline or Path, and enable Hidden lines
and Own hidden lines, if required.
6. On the Appearance tab, modify the color and line as required.
7. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the view
properties. Then click Close to return to drawing properties.
8. General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
9. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

See also
Model weld properties in drawings (page 927)
Model weld mark visibility and appearance properties in drawings (page 888)

Define automatic drawing settings 818 Define drawing pours

8.13 Define drawing pours
You can define automatic pour object settings to be used in a drawing before
you create a drawing. You can modify the pour settings in an open drawing
after you have created the drawing.
You can select whether to show pours and pour breaks in drawings, define the
desired pour object and pour break content and appearance. For pour objects,
you can also define the desired fill. Additionally, you can add automatic pour
object marks in your drawings.
You can change these settings also in an open drawing.
For more information, see Show pour objects, pour marks and pour breaks in
drawings (page 819).

See also
Pours in drawings (page 464)
Pour object and pour break properties in drawings (page 922)
Add hatches (fills) to parts and sketch objects in drawings (page 809)
Examples of pour drawings and pour reports (page 468)

Show pour objects, pour marks and pour breaks in

drawings
You can show pour objects and pour breaks in general arrangement drawings.
You can also add automatic pour object marks.

Ensure that you have enabled pour management (set the advanced option
XS_ENABLE_POUR_MANAGEMENT to TRUE.)
To show pour objects and pour breaks automatically, modify their appearance
and add pour object marks:
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> GA
drawing .
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. In the properties dialog box, click the View button and set Show pours in
drawings to Yes, and click OK.
4. Click the Pour object button to modify the properties:
• Content tab: Select whether you want to see the hidden lines and own
hidden lines, and the edge chamfers by clicking on or off.
• Appearance tab: Set the color and type for visible lines and hidden
lines.

Define automatic drawing settings 819 Define drawing pours

 • Fill tab: Select the fill for the pour object face and/or pour object
section face.
5. Click OK.
6. Click the Pour object mark button, select the contents and appearance of
the mark, and click OK.
7. Click the Pour breaks button and set the Visibility to Visible and click
OK.
You can also select whether you want to show pour break hidden lines on
the Visibility tab. On the Appearance tab you can change the color and
type of the visible and hidden lines in pour breaks.
8. Modify the other properties as required. For example, click
Reinforcement and set the Visibility of all reinforcing bars to Visible to
show the reinforcement in the pour drawing.
9. Save the changed properties and click OK.
Now you can create the general arrangement drawing using the modified
properties. The pour objects, pour object marks and pour breaks are
shown accordingly.
You can also open the pour drawing and modify the properties further on
drawing, view and object level.

See also
Pours in drawings (page 464)
Pour object and pour break properties in drawings (page 922)
Add hatches (fills) to parts and sketch objects in drawings (page 809)
Examples of pour drawings and pour reports (page 468)

8.14 Define drawing reinforcement and meshes

There are numerous ways of showing reinforcing bars and meshes in
drawings. You can define automatic reinforcement and mesh settings before
you create the drawing, and adjust the settings in an open drawing. In addition
to modifying the properties available in the properties dialog box, you can also
modify the bending schedules, rounding of bar dimensions, symbols in use,
and reinforcement appearance in the rebar_config.inp settings file.
Click the links below to find out more:
Define automatic reinforcement and reinforcement mesh properties
(page 821)
Example: Hide reinforcing bar lines in drawings (page 822)
Example: Reinforcement representations (page 823)

Define automatic drawing settings 820 Define drawing reinforcement and meshes
 See also
Reinforcement/Neighbor reinforcement and mesh properties in drawings
(page 913)
Reinforcement settings for drawings (rebar_config.inp) (page 916)
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)

Define automatic reinforcement and reinforcement mesh

properties
You can define what is shown in reinforcing bars and meshes and how they
are shown in cast unit and general arrangement drawings. You can also do this
for neighbor reinforcement.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click View creation, select
the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click Reinforcement (or Neighbor reinforcement).
5. On the Bar content tab, set the bar representation, bar end symbols, and
the visibility of bars and lines.
6. On the Bar appearance tab, select the color and type of the visible lines
and hidden lines.
7. On the Mesh content tab, set the mesh representation, mesh symbols,
and the visibility of meshes, wires, bars and lines.
8. On the Mesh appearance tab, select the color and type of the visible lines
and hidden lines.
9. General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
10. Click Reinforcement mark (or Neighbor reinforcement mark), add the
elements that you want to have in the mark and adjust the mark
appearance.
11. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the view
properties. Then click Close to return to drawing properties.
12. General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
13. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

Define automatic drawing settings 821 Define drawing reinforcement and meshes
 TIP The representation of reinforcing bars that point away from the drawing can be
changed. You can customize reinforcing bar bent symbols (cross, circle, filled
circle) by editing the symbol file bent.sym, which in the default environment is
located in the folder ..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\
\environments\common\symbols. Or, you can create a new symbol file in the
same folder, for example, my_new_symbols.sym, and take it into use in the
rebar_config.inp (page 916) by entering the following string in the file:
BentSymbolFile=my_new_symbols.sym

See also
Reinforcement/Neighbor reinforcement and mesh properties in drawings
(page 913)
Reinforcement settings for drawings (rebar_config.inp) (page 916)
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)
Define drawing reinforcement and meshes (page 820)

Example: Hide reinforcing bar lines in drawings

You can hide reinforcement bar lines behind other reinforcing bars and behind
parts in cast unit drawings.

Here are some examples of what reinforcing bars look like with different
settings selected on the Bar content tab in Reinforcement or Neighbor
Reinforcement properties.

Setting Description
Hide lines behind parts is selected.
The reinforcing bar lines are hidden
behind other parts.

Hide lines behind other rebars is

selected. The reinforcing bar lines are
hidden behind other reinforcing bar
lines.

Define automatic drawing settings 822 Define drawing reinforcement and meshes
 See also
Define automatic reinforcement and reinforcement mesh properties
(page 821)
Define drawing reinforcement and meshes (page 820)

Example: Reinforcement representations

Here are examples of how the reinforcement will look with the different
representation options selected on the Bar content tab in Reinforcement or
Neighbor Reinforcement properties.

Setting Example
single line

single line with filled ends

double line

double lines with filled ends

filled line

stick

outline

Define automatic drawing settings 823 Define drawing reinforcement and meshes
 See also
Define drawing reinforcement and meshes (page 820)
Reinforcement/Neighbor reinforcement and mesh properties in drawings
(page 913)

Automatic grouping of rebar sets for drawings

The rebars created by using the rebar set commands are automatically
grouped for drawing marking and dimensioning purposes. The automatic
grouping works both for simple, non-tapered groups as well as for tapered
groups.

Preconditions for rebar group creation

Simple, non-tapered groups are created when:
• Rebars are created by the same rebar set
• Rebars are side by side
• Rebars have identical properties, including length
• Rebars have the same position number
Tapered rebars are grouped when:
• Rebars are created by the same rebar set
• Rebars are side by side
• Rebars have identical properties, except length
• Length of bars increases linearly
• There are minimum of 3 bars in a group
Spacing of bars is taken into account in grouping if the advanced option XS_
REBARSET_ENABLE_BAR_GROUPING_WHEN_SPACING_DIFFERS is set to FALSE.
Then only bars with same spacing are grouped, and each spacing zone of a
rebar set automatically creates a separate group. If the advanced option is set
to TRUE, spacing is ignored, and groups can contain bars from more than one
adjacent spacing zones.

Work with rebar set groups in drawings

Automatically created groups behave in the drawing similarly as the old rebar
groups:
• There is only one mark for the rebar group, and the reinforcement mark
content (page 898) comes from the content setting Group in
Reinforcement mark properties.
Note that if XS_REBARSET_USE_GROUP_NUMBER_FOR_BARS_IN_TAPERED_
GROUPS is set to FALSE, bars in tapered bar groups within rebar sets do

Define automatic drawing settings 824 Define drawing reinforcement and meshes
 not have a common position number (GROUP_POS), so position
information is not included in reinforcement marks.
• You can adjust the rebar visibility (page 913) in Reinforcement
properties. For example, you can select to show bar in the middle of
group.
• You can use the following rebar-group-specific interactive dimensioning
and marking commands (page 182) found in the pop-up menu for rebar
groups:
• Create dimension line
• Add mark --> Dimension mark
• Add mark --> Tagged dimension mark
• Associative notes (page 255) can be created.
Below is an example of an automatically created rebar group in a drawing. The
drawing uses rebar group visibility option bar in the middle of group, and
reinforcement mark option One leader line to group, and the dimensions
have been created with the command Create dimension line.

For more information about creating rebar sets, see Create a rebar set.
For more information about showing automatic bar groups in rebar sets in the
model, see XS_REBARSET_COLOR_BARGROUPS.

Define automatic drawing settings 825 Units and decimals in drawings, reports and
templates
8.15 Units and decimals in drawings, reports and
templates
Unit settings used in drawing objects, and reports and templates created in
Template Editor are taken from different places. These settings include, for
example, the used unit and the number of decimals.

In drawings, reports and templates, the units and decimals are defined in the
following way:
• Unit settings for marks: Tekla Structures uses the
contentattributes_global.lst attributes file for setting the default
unit and decimal settings for various mark elements. You can use
contentattributes_userdefined.lst when you want to configure
settings of your own.

For more information about unit settings in marks, see Change unit
settings for marks (page 774).
For more information about the contentattributes_global.lst and
contentattributes_userdefined.lst files, see Template attribute
files.
• Unit settings for drawing objects: Default unit settings for drawing
objects (other than marks) either come from the standard drawing
properties files (standard.*) or are hardcoded in Tekla Structures.
• Unit settings for dimensions in dimension tags: Default unit settings for
dimensions and dimension tags are defined in the Options dialog box on
the Drawing dimensions page.
• Level attributes in marks, such as TOP_LEVEL, and BOTTOM_LEVEL take
the dimension format from the MarkDimensionFormat.dim file. For more
information about level attributes in part marks, see Add level attributes in
automatic part marks (page 777).
• Unit settings for reports/templates created with Template Editor: Unit
settings for reports and templates created in Template Editor can be
defined in the Value Field Properties dialog box Format area or in format
functions. The default unit and decimal settings are taken from the
contentattributes_global.lst attributes file.
Format area:

Define automatic drawing settings 826 Units and decimals in drawings, reports and
templates
 Formula containing a format function:

For tips for using format functions, see Tips for using format function in
formulas. For more information about formats and value fields, see
Template Editor User's Guide.

8.16 User-defined attributes in drawings

Many Tekla Structures dialog boxes contain user-defined attributes for various
objects. When you define a new user-defined attribute, make the definition of
the user-defined attribute unique. This is because a user-defined attribute
cannot have different definitions for different object types. In drawings, the
user-defined attributes can be used in templates, Drawing List, and marks,
for example.

The user-defined attributes in the drawing are displayed when you click User-
defined attributes in the drawing properties dialog box. You can show up to
20 user-defined attributes in the Drawing List. To check the ones that you
have, click User-defined attributes in a drawing properties dialog box.
When you define new user-defined attributes
When you define new user-defined (page 829) attributes, create your own file
in the company, project or firm folder. After adding your own user-defined
attributes, you need to use the Diagnose & Change Attribute Definitions

Define automatic drawing settings 827 User-defined attributes in drawings

 tool to update the definitions in the model. The object.inp files are merged
so that if there are user-defined attributes in any of the files, they are
displayed in the user interface. Tekla Structures merges the files in a way that
eliminates duplicate attributes. If Tekla Structures encounters the same
attribute name in different objects.inp files, the attribute from the first read
objects.inp file will be used.
Tekla Structures reads the objects.inp files from the following folders in the
following order:
1. model folder
2. company folder
3. project folder
4. firm folder
5. system folder
6. inp folder
Show user-defined attributes in Template Editor
In order to show the new user-defined attribute in Template Editor, you need
to add the user-defined attribute in a customized
contentattributes_userdefined.lst file and include the name of the
customized file in the contentattributes.lst file.
Make a copy of these modified files as the Tekla Structures installation always
overwrites these files.

See also
Add attributes in automatic marks (page 776)
What is displayed in the Drawing list (page 128)
Switches for customizing print file names (page 546)
Modify automatic user-defined drawing attributes (page 828)

Modify automatic user-defined drawing attributes

You can modify the user-defined attributes before you create a drawing.
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Load drawing properties that are as close to the ones you need as
possible.
3. Single-part, assembly, and cast unit drawings: Click View creation, select
the view and the properties that you want to change, and click View
properties.
4. Click User-defined attributes.

Define automatic drawing settings 828 User-defined attributes in drawings

 5. On the Workflow tab, enter project-specific information to be displayed in
drawings and in the Drawing List.
6. On the Parameters tab, enter a user-defined Comment for drawings,
projects, assemblies, parts, and so on.
7. Use the User field 1 to User field 8 on the Parameters tab to enter
drawing-specific information.
8. On the Title tab, select if you want to use project-specific or drawing-
specific information in the title block of the drawing.
When you click Use project settings, you cannot enter any information in
the title block fields.
9. If you selected Use drawing settings, the title block fields become
available, and you can enter the necessary data in the fields.
10. Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings: Click Save to save the view
properties. Then click Close to return to drawing properties.
11. General arrangement drawings: Click OK.
12. Click Save to save the drawing properties, then click OK and create the
drawing.

TIP • You can control whether the modifications in user-defined attributes affect
all selected drawings in the Drawing List at the same time, even if the
drawings are of different types by using the advanced option
XS_DRAWING_UDAS_MODIFY_ALL_DRAWING_TYPES.

See also
Create a new user-defined drawing attribute (page 829)

Create a new user-defined drawing attribute

If you want to add a new line in the user-defined drawing attributes dialog box
and a new column in the Drawing List, you need to create your own
objects.inp and add a new user-defined attribute there. You also need to do
this if you want the user-defined attribute to be available in the Template
Editor.

Before you start, close Tekla Structures.

1. Open the objects.inp file located by default in ..\ProgramData
\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common\inp.
2. Save the objects.inp file in your model, project or firm folder.
3. Delete all user-defined attribute definitions from the objects.inp file,
except the property definitions in the beginning of the file that describe
the properties, and the sections that define the new tab to different

Define automatic drawing settings 829 User-defined attributes in drawings

 drawing types. Also leave one property definition in section User-defined
attributes for objects that you can use as a template for the new property.
4. Enter the name of the tab page where you want the new user-defined
attributes to be located and the attribute properties.
Do not enter the names of the tab pages that come with the installation,
use a new one instead.
5. To show the user-defined attribute in the Drawing List and in the user-
defined attributes dialog box, set status_flag to yes.

6. Define the drawing types where you want to use the new tab containing
the new user-defined attribute.

7. Save and close the file.

8. Update the definitions of the user-defined attributes:
a. On the File menu, click Diagnose & repair --> Diagnose & change
attribute definitions .

Define automatic drawing settings 830 User-defined attributes in drawings

 The Diagnose & Change Attribute Definitions dialog box is
displayed.

b. If there are conflicts between your objects.inp and the default

objects.inp, select the definition in the area on the right and click
Change current settings to selected objects.inp settings.
The definition of the user-defined attribute is updated in the model.
9. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
In this example, select GA drawing.
10. Click User-defined attributes.
The user-defined drawing attributes dialog box of the general
arrangement drawing shows the tab you created.

11. Use Save as to save the properties for future use.

12. Click OK and create a general arrangement drawing.
13. Right-click the created drawing in the Drawing List and select User-
defined attributes.

Define automatic drawing settings 831 User-defined attributes in drawings

 14. Go to the new tab (My tab) and enter the name needed information (the
designer name in the Designed By box).
15. Click Modify and close the dialog box.
The Drawing List contains a column for the new user-defined attribute,
and the name of the designer is displayed.

See also
User-defined attributes in drawings (page 827)

8.17 Define customized line types in TeklaStructures.lin

You can define your own line types, and use them wherever line type settings
are available. The customized line types are handled the same way as other
line types. The customized line types are defined in the TeklaStuctures.lin
file in ..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments
\common\inp. By default, the most widely used line types are available in the
file.
1. Open the TeklaStuctures.lin file.
2. Start every line with the letter A to indicate the beginning of the line type
pattern.
You can use three different objects: dashes, dots and spaces to form a
line.
3. Define the length of a dash (-) using positive numbers.
4. Define the length of a space ( ) using negative numbers.
5. Define dots (.) using the number zero (0).
The patterns must begin with a dash. They typically end with a space,
although the space in the end is not required.
6. After you have defined the line type pattern, press Enter.

The TeklaStructures.lin.id file contains the names of the line types

visible in the user interface and the unique IDs assigned for each line type. The
value of the ID must be greater than 10, for example:
CENTER, 1000
BORDER, 1002
DASHDOT, 1003

Define automatic drawing settings 832 Define customized line types in

TeklaStructures.lin
 You can use TeklaStructures.lin also in mapping the exported line types.

NOTE If you add new customized line types, you need to add corresponding bitmaps
to the ..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\bitmaps folder,
and name them dr_line_type_*.bmp, for example
dr_line_type_CENTER.bmp.

Example 1
Line type definition for DASHDOT is A, 12.7, -6.35, 0, -6.35
This string means that the pattern starts with a dash with the length of 12.7
units, followed by a space with the length of 6.35 units, then a dot, and then
again a space with the length of 6.35 units. Then the first dash is drawn again.

Example 2
Below is an example containing definitions for dotted lines:
*DOT,Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A, 0, -1.5875
*DOT2,Dot (.5x) ........................................
A, 0, -0.79375
*DOTX2,Dot (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A, 0, -3.175

Printed line types

Printing will look for the line type files in the model folder, and in the locations
specified by the advanced options XS_PROJECT, XS_FIRM, XS_SYSTEM and
XS_INP, in that order.

Define automatic drawing settings 833 Define customized line types in

TeklaStructures.lin
 See also
Drawing sketch object properties (page 929)

Define automatic drawing settings 834 Define customized line types in

TeklaStructures.lin
9 Drawing settings reference

There are a lot of settings in Tekla Structures that you mainly control in the
properties dialog boxes. There are also some additional settings files that you
need to modify in a text editor.
Click the links below to find out more:
• General arrangement drawing properties (page 836)
• Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawing properties (page 839)
• Layout properties (page 841)
• View properties in drawings (page 844)
• Section view properties (page 849)
• Dimension and dimensioning properties (page 850)
• Mark properties (page 877)
• Mark elements (page 892)
• Pour object and pour break properties in drawings (page 922)
• Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)
• Bolt content and appearance properties in drawings (page 909)
• Surface treatment visibility and content properties in drawings (page 910)
• Surface treatment hatch pattern properties (surfacing.htc) (page 911)
• Reinforcement/Neighbor reinforcement and mesh properties in drawings
(page 913)
• Reinforcement settings for drawings (rebar_config.inp) (page 916)
• Placement properties for marks, dimensions, notes, texts and symbols
(page 925)
• Model weld properties in drawings (page 927)
• Drawing sketch object properties (page 929)
• Drawing grid properties (page 930)
• Settings in the Options dialog box: Orientation settings

Drawing settings reference 835 Define customized line types in

TeklaStructures.lin
9.1 General arrangement drawing properties
On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> GA drawing .
You can modify the properties after creating the drawing by double-clicking
the drawing background.

The options in the general arrangement drawing properties dialog box are
described below.

Option Description For more information

Name The name of the drawing. This
name is shown in the
Drawing List, and can be
included in drawing and
report templates.
The maximum length of the
drawing name is 32
characters.
Title 1, Title Titles are shown in the Give titles to drawings
2, Title 3 Drawing List and in drawing (page 144)
and report templates.
Use detailed Set to Yes to use the detailed Detailed object level settings
object level object level settings created in (page 31)
settings the Object level settings for
general arrangement
drawings dialog box.
Layout Select the drawing layout and Define drawing layout
define drawing sizes. You can (page 568)
also select whether you want
Define drawing size and
to list hidden objects in
drawing view scale (page 598)
templates.
View Define view properties: scale, View properties in drawings
neighbor part view extension, (page 844)
reflected view, opening and
recess symbol, datum point
elevation, part shortening,
view label, and anchor bolt
plan settings.
Detail view Define detail view properties: Modify detail properties in
view label, detail boundary drawings (page 166)
and detail mark settings.
Dimension Define dimension properties: Dimension and dimensioning
dimension type, units, properties (page 850)

Drawing settings reference 836 General arrangement drawing properties

 Option Description For more information
precision, format, placing, and
appearance.
Dimensionin Define dimensioning Dimension and dimensioning
g properties: grid dimension properties (page 850)
and part dimension settings.
Dimensioning properties -
Parts tab (GA drawings)
(page 875)
Dimensioning properties -
Grid tab (GA drawings)
(page 874)
Part mark Define mark properties: Mark properties (page 877)
included elements and
Bolt mark Part and neighbor part
element settings, and mark
properties in drawings
Neighbor visibility, mark frame, mark
(page 904)
part mark leader line and placing
settings. Drawing weld mark properties
Surface
(page 885)
treatment
mark Mark properties - Content,
General, Merging and
Weld mark
Appearance tabs (page 878)
Reinforceme
Model weld mark visibility and
nt marks
appearance properties in
Neighbor drawings (page 888)
reinforcemen
Mark elements (page 892)
t marks
Pours in drawings (page 464)
Connection
mark
Pour object
mark
Part Define part properties: part Part and neighbor part
representation, hidden line, properties in drawings
center line and reference line (page 904)
visibility, additional mark
visibility, part appearance,
and fill settings.
Bolt Define bolt properties: bolt Bolt content and appearance
representation, bolt symbol properties in drawings
content, bolt visibility, and (page 909)
bolt appearance settings.
Neighbor Define neighbor part Part and neighbor part
part properties: visibility, part properties in drawings
representation, hidden line, (page 904)
center line and reference line

Drawing settings reference 837 General arrangement drawing properties

 Option Description For more information
visibility, additional mark
visibility, and part appearance
settings. You can also define
bolt representation and bolt
symbol content settings for
neighbor parts.
Surface Define surface treatment Surface treatment visibility
treatment properties: surface treatment and content properties in
visibility, pattern visibility, drawings (page 910)
hidden lines visibility and
surface treatment
representation settings.
Weld Define welding properties: Model weld properties in
weld visibility, weld size limit drawings (page 927)
and weld appearance
settings.
Reinforceme Define reinforcement and Reinforcement/Neighbor
nt mesh properties: bar and reinforcement and mesh
mesh representation and properties in drawings
visibility, bar and mesh (page 913)
symbol, and bar and mesh
appearance settings.
Neighbor Define neighbor Reinforcement/Neighbor
reinforcemen reinforcement and mesh reinforcement and mesh
t properties: bar and mesh properties in drawings
representation and visibility, (page 913)
bar and mesh symbol, and
bar and mesh appearance
settings.
Reference Define reference object Show reference models in
objects visibility and appearance drawings (page 501)
settings.
Grid Define grid visibility and Drawing grid properties
appearance settings. (page 930)
Customize drawing grid labels
(page 470)
Protection Define protected areas to Protect areas in a drawing
prevent text, marks or (page 607)
dimensions from being placed
there.
Filter and Create and modify part filters/ Create new filters
Neighbor neighbor part filters on
part filter drawing level.

Drawing settings reference 838 General arrangement drawing properties

 Option Description For more information
User-defined Add customized information User-defined attributes in
attributes to a drawing, such as drawings (page 827)
information related to
workflow, and comments.
This information can be
displayed in the Drawing list,
and you can use it in report
and drawing templates,
marks, and as switches when
customizing print file names.
The user-defined attributes
and tabs shown in this dialog
box are defined in the
objects.inp file.
The GA drawing user-defined
attributes dialog box in the
default environment contains
three tabs: Workflow,
Parameters, and Title block.
On the Title block tab you
can define the information
that is shown in the title block
of the drawing.

9.2 Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawing

properties
On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type. You can modify the properties after creating the drawing by
double-clicking the drawing background.

The options in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawing properties dialog
box are described below.

Option Description For more information

Name Define the name of the
drawing that is shown in the
Drawing List, and can be

Drawing settings reference 839 Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawing
properties
 Option Description For more information
included in drawing and
report templates.
The maximum length of the
drawing name is 32
characters.
Cast unit By cast unit position: A
definition drawing will be created from
method each cast unit. If there are
identical cast units, one of
them will serve as the base
cast unit for the drawing. This
is the most common method
for creating cast unit
drawings.
By cast unit ID: Each part in
the model has a unique GUID.
You can create drawings by
using the cast unit GUIDs. The
GUID determines the marking
of the drawing. You can create
several drawings from
identical cast units.
Title 1, Title Define titles that are shown in Give titles to drawings
2, Title 3 the Drawing List and can be (page 144)
included in drawing and
report templates.
Sheet Used for creating several Create multiple drawing
number drawings of the same part as sheets using drawing
multiple drawing sheets. The properties (page 100)
number of sheets is not
limited.
Layout Select the drawing layout, and Define drawing layout
define drawing sizes, (page 568)
autoscale, projection type,
Define drawing size and
view alignment and part
drawing view scale (page 598)
expansion settings. You can
also select whether you want
to list hidden objects in
templates.
View Define the drawing views to View properties in drawings
creation be created. From here you (page 844)
can move on to modifying the
view properties for each view.
Section view Define section view Section view properties
properties. (page 849)

Drawing settings reference 840 Single-part, assembly and cast unit drawing
properties
 Option Description For more information
Detail view Define the start number or Modify detail properties in
letter of the detail view and drawings (page 166)
detail symbol label.
Protection Define protected areas to Protect areas in a drawing
prevent text, marks or (page 607)
dimensions from being placed
there.
User-defined Add customized information User-defined attributes in
attributes to a drawing, such as drawings (page 827)
information related to
workflow, and comments.
This information can be
displayed in the Drawing List,
and you can use it in report
and drawing templates,
marks, and as switches when
customizing print file names.
The user-defined attributes
and tabs shown in this dialog
box are defined in the
objects.inp file.
The drawing user-defined
attributes dialog box in the
default environment contains
three tabs: Workflow,
Parameters, and Title.
On the Title tab you can
select if you want to use
project-specific or drawing-
specific information in the
title block of the drawing.
When you select Use project
settings, you cannot enter
any information in the title
block fields.

9.3 Layout properties

On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type. Then click Layout. You can modify the properties after creating
the drawing by double-clicking the drawing background.

Drawing settings reference 841 Layout properties

All options in all layout property panels and dialog boxes are described below.
All the described options are not available for all drawing types.

Option Description
Drawing size tab
Layout Define the layout that you want to use.
List hidden objects in Select Yes to list hidden objects in templates. No
templates removes all information about the hidden parts,
also from the total weight.
Size definition mode Select Autosize if you want to let Tekla Structures
find appropriate sizes and table layouts for
drawings. Select Specified size to specify the exact
size for the drawing. The drawing size should
always be smaller than the actual paper size to
accommodate printer margins.
Autosize: Use The fixed sizes and calculated sizes are both
defined in the Drawing layout properties:
Fixed sizes: Use this when you want Tekla
Structures to use fixed drawing sizes A2, A3, A4,
etc.
Calculated sizes: Use this when you want to
define the rules that Tekla Structures follows when
it tries to adjust the drawing size.
Calculated/fixed sizes: Use this when you want
Tekla Structures to select the smallest of the
suitable sizes.
Drawing size If you selected Specified size, define the drawing
size here.
Table layout If you selected Specified size, define the table
layout to be used.
Scale tab
Autoscale Set Autoscale to Yes to let Tekla Structures
automatically select the suitable scale for the
drawing view.
Main view scales When you use autoscaling, enter the denominators
of main view and section view scales and separate
Section view scales
them with spaces.
For example, enter "5 10 15 20" for the scales 1/5,
1/10, 1/15, and 1/20

Drawing settings reference 842 Layout properties

 Option Description
Scale change mode When you use autoscaling, set the scale change
mode which defines the relationship between the
scales of main and section views within a drawing:
main = section: The scales of the main and section
view are equal.
main < section: Main view scales are smaller than
section view scales.
main <= section: Main view scales are smaller
than or equal to section view scales
Preferred size Enter the preferred size of the drawing, if you use
both autosizing and autoscaling. Tekla Structures
tries to find a drawing size where the drawing
contents fit by first trying to use the exact scale
and the smallest drawing size. If the contents do
not fit, Tekla Structures increases the drawing size
until it reaches the preferred size.
Other tab
Projection type Define how Tekla Structures places the projections
of a part in cast unit, single-part, and assembly
drawings. Projection type affects the order of the
views in the drawing. The options are:
First angle , also referred to as the European
projection.
Third angle, also referred to as the American
projection.
Align section views Set to Yes to place the views next to the main view.
with main view
If you select No, Tekla Structures places the section
Align end views with and end views in any available location.
main view.
Expand shortened Set to Yes to stretch shortened views to fill up
parts to fit empty areas of the drawing.
Include single parts Set to Yes to include in assembly drawings the
single-part drawings of the individual parts that
make the assembly. Setting this to Yes, activates
the Single-part attributes option.
Single-part attributes Define the desired single-part drawing properties
to be used in the single-part view. To do this, set
Include single parts to Yes.

See also
Define drawing size and drawing view scale (page 598)

Drawing settings reference 843 Layout properties

 Define drawing layout (page 568)
Set drawing view projection type (page 618)
Define the location for end views and section views (page 647)
Lengthen shortened parts in drawing views (page 637)
Include single-part drawings in assembly drawings (page 620)

9.4 View properties in drawings

Use the View Properties dialog box to view and modify the drawing view
properties.
The table below describes all view level properties for all drawing types.

Option Description
Drawing Properties --> View creation panel: Views tab
View type on/off Defines the main views, section views
and 3D views that you want to create.
• If you select off, Tekla Structures
does not create the view, but
dimensions the parts in the
available views. If you set all four
main views off, Tekla Structures
will still create a front view.
• If you select on, Tekla Structures
always creates the view, even if it
was not necessary in order to
show the dimensions. For section
views, Tekla Structures creates one
additional section view showing
the middle of the main part. For
end views, Tekla Structures creates
end view from one end of the
main part.
• If you select auto, Tekla Structures
creates the view if it is necessary in
order to show the dimensions. For
section views, Tekla Structures
creates the necessary number of
views to show all the dimensions.
For end views, Tekla Structures
also creates another end view
from the other end of the main
part, if there are dimensions at
that end.

Drawing settings reference 844 View properties in drawings

 Option Description
View label Shows the view label set in view
properties. If the label is defined in
view properties, you can change it
here. You can always change the label
of the main views.
View properties Shows the current view properties for
the view. You can select another view
properties file from the list and
modify the view properties by clicking
View properties.
Drawing Properties --> View creation: Attributes tab
These settings are drawing-specific.
Coordinate system Sets the coordinate system of the
drawing views. The options are: local,
model, oriented, horizontal brace,
vertical brace, and fixed.
For more information, see Change the
coordinate system (page 622).
Rotate coordinate system Around Rotates the view around the x, y, or z
X, Around Y and Around Z axis of the parts using the entered
values.
For more information, see Rotate
parts in drawing views (page 624).
Unfolded Yes shows and dimensions the bend
lines in the drawing.
For more information, see Unfold
polybeams in drawings (page 637).
Undeformed Yes undeforms deformed parts and
shows the developed (undeformed)
shape of the deformed parts in
drawings.
For more information, see Undeform
deformed parts in drawings
(page 638).
Recreate the drawing Yes recreates the drawing.
View properties dialog box: Attributes 1 and Attributes 2 tabs (Attributes
and Shortening tabs in general arrangement drawings)
Scale Sets the view scale.

Drawing settings reference 845 View properties in drawings

 Option Description
Reflected view Displays load bearing structures, such
as columns and beams on a lower
floor.
Yes displays structures with a
continuous line, and No displays
them with a dashed line.
Rotation around (in 3D views) Modify the view angle of 3D views.
Enter the values for the angles in y
and x directions. Rotation in a
drawing view is around the local axis.
Value 0.0 for both equals the front
view.
Size Fit by parts: Tekla Structures fits the
view contents in the drawing view
frame without leaving any
unnecessary space.
Define as distances: The x and y
boxes define the view size along the x
and y axes of the view. The depth
boxes define the depth of the view
relative to, and perpendicular to the
view plane.
View extension for neighbor parts Sets the distance from the drawing
view to display neighboring parts.
For more information, see Show
neighbor parts in views (page 630).
Use detailed object level settings Allows you to create and apply object
level settings.
For more information, see Detailed
object level settings (page 31)
Place Set the placing for the drawing view
to be fixed or free:
• Fixed: Maintain the views in the
same location during updates.
• Free: Let Tekla Structures find a
suitable place for the view during
updates.
For more information, see Define
automatic free or fixed placement for
drawing views (page 611).
Undeformed Yes undeforms deformed parts and
shows the developed (undeformed)

Drawing settings reference 846 View properties in drawings

 Option Description
shape of the deformed parts in
drawing views.
For more information, see Undeform
deformed parts in drawings
(page 638).
Shortening If parts are very long and do not
include any details, you can shorten
them:
• Cut parts Yes activates
shortening. You can also select to
cut Only in x direction or Only in
y direction.
• Minimum cut part length defines
the minimum length of the
shortened part to show.
• Space between cut parts defines
the distance between cut parts.
• Cut skew parts: Yes cuts skew
parts.
For more information, see Shorten
parts in drawing views (page 634).
Show openings/recess symbol Yes shows symbols in openings and
recesses.
For more information, see Show part
openings and recesses in drawings
(page 639).
Datum point for elevations Specified uses the entered value.
View plane measures reference
points relative to the view plane.
For more information, see Add
elevation dimensions (page 700).
Show pours in drawings Yes shows pours in drawings. For
more information, see Show pour
objects, pour marks and pour breaks
in drawings (page 819).
Dimension creation method in this Clones the dimensions separately for
view the selected view only. Using this
option affects the creation of the

Drawing settings reference 847 View properties in drawings

 Option Description
dimensions during cloning and re-
dimensioning of existing drawings.
For more information, see Clone
dimensions in selected views only
(page 122).
Labels tab
Text Defines the view label text. Enter text
in fields A1 - A5, or click the ... buttons
and select the label mark contents
and appearance.
For more information about view
labels, see Define view labels and
view label marks (page 616)
Symbol Defines a symbol to be used in the
view label, and the color, size, and line
length of the symbol.
Label position Defines the vertical and horizontal
position of the view label:
• Vertical: Select Above or Below.
• Horizontal: Select Center by view
frame or Center by restriction
box.
View direction marks Shows or hides the view direction
marks and defines the mark height.
Anchor bolt plan (general arrangement drawings only)
Show as anchor bolt plan Yes shows the general arrangement
drawing as an anchor bolt plan.
For more information, see Create
anchor bolt plans using saved settings
(page 83)
Enlarged part view scale Defines the scale used in the enlarged
part views.
Create detail views Yes creates separate detail views.
If you select No, Tekla Structures
dimensions the anchor bolts in the
enlarged view. Tekla Structures
groups similar detail views so that
similar details are drawn only once.
Detail view scale Defines the scale used in the anchor
bolt plan detail views.

Drawing settings reference 848 View properties in drawings

 See also
Define drawing views (page 612)
Define drawing size and drawing view scale (page 598)
Define the views to create in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings
(page 613)
Define automatic view settings for general arrangement drawings (page 615)

9.5 Section view properties

When you create automatic section views, Tekla Structures creates section
views and section marks using the current view and mark properties. You can
modify the section view properties in an open drawing.

Option Description
Attributes tab
Section depth Defines the positive and negative
distances of the section view when
views are not combined.
Distance for combining cuts Defines the distance range for
combining cut views.
Direction Define the view direction of the
section. The options are:
• Right section
• Middle section
• Left section
The available values are left or right.
Cutting line tab
Line Length and offset of the cutting line.
Properties Color of the cutting line.
Section mark tab
Text Defines the text on the section mark.
Click the ... buttons next to the text
boxes to open the Mark Contents
dialog box.
Symbol: Color Color of the section mark symbol.
Left symbol, Right symbol Left and right section mark symbol.
Size Size of the section mark left and right
symbol.

Drawing settings reference 849 Section view properties

 Option Description
x/y Offset of the section mark left and
right symbol.
Start number or letter of section Defines the letter or number used in
view and symbol label the section view label or in the section
symbol label.
You can enter any number starting
from 1 or any letter A - Z or a - z (also
shown in uppercase in the label). If
you use letter, and the entered string
is longer than one letter, only the first
letter is shown in the view label and
section symbol label. If you use
numbers, all entered numbers are
shown. The start number changes
only if you change it in the drawing
properties before creating a drawing,
and if you change the option in an
existing drawing and recreate the
drawing, in which case section view
and symbol labels for all
automatically included section views
and all new section views will change.

See also
View properties in drawings (page 844)
Define object protection and placement settings in drawings (page 603)
Define drawing views (page 612)
Define the views to create in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings
(page 613)
Create a section view (page 146)

9.6 Dimension and dimensioning properties

Dimension properties define what the dimensions look like and which formats,
units etc. are used. Dimensioning properties define what is being dimensioned
and how.

Click the following links to find out more about dimension properties:
• Dimension properties - General tab (page 851)
• Dimension properties - Units, precision and format (page 854)

Drawing settings reference 850 Dimension and dimensioning properties

• Dimension properties - Appearance tab (page 856)
• Dimension properties - Marks and Tags tabs (page 858)
Click the following links to find out more about dimensioning properties
in view-level dimensioning:
• Dimensioning rule properties (page 669)
• Dimensioning properties - General tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 861)
• Dimensioning properties - Part dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 868)
• Dimensioning properties - Position dimensions tab (Integrated
dimensioning) (page 865)
• Dimensioning properties - Bolt dimensions tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 870)
• Dimensioning properties - Dimension grouping tab (Integrated
dimensioning) (page 871)
• Dimensioning properties - Sub-assemblies tab (Integrated dimensioning)
(page 872)
• Dimensioning properties - Reinforcement dimensions tab (Integrated
dimensioning) (page 873)
Click the following links to find out more about dimensioning properties
in GA drawings:
• Dimensioning properties - Grid tab (GA drawings) (page 874)
• Dimensioning properties - Parts tab (GA drawings) (page 875)

Dimension properties - General tab

Use the General tab in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and
modify the format, type, unit, precision, extension line, grouping and placing
settings of the dimensions.

The drawing level Dimension Properties dialog box and object level
Dimension Properties dialog box contents differ. All options in both dialog
boxes are described below.
• To open the drawing level Dimension properties dialog box, open the
drawing, go to the Drawing tab and click Properties --> Dimension.
• To open the object level Dimension properties, double-click a dimension
in an open drawing.
• To open Dimension properties dialog box for general arrangement
drawings before creating a drawing: On the Drawings & reports tab, click
Drawing properties --> GA drawing, and then click Dimension.

Drawing settings reference 851 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
Dimension type
Straight Sets the dimension type for straight
dimensions.
Relative: Point to point dimensions.

Absolute: Dimensions from a

common start point.
Relative and absolute: Combination
of point to point and common start
point.
US absolute: Dimensions from a
common start point, which include a
running dimension mark (RD).
US absolute 2: Similar to US
absolute, but it changes short
dimensions to relative.
Absolute plus short relatives:
Similar to Absolute, but it changes
short dimensions to relative. Also
called internal absolute. This option
may show both dimensions, but it
does not show relative dimensions
when dimensions are long. This
option shows the absolute
dimensions inside the dimension
lines.
Absolute plus all relatives above
the absolutes: Similar to Relative
and absolute, but it places the
relative dimensions above the
absolute.
Elevation: Creates an elevation
dimension at a picked point. This type
is only available in the dimension
properties of manual dimensions in
drawing mode.
In x direction As above, but overrides the straight
setting for horizontal dimensions. If
you use the blank option, Tekla
Structures uses the Straight option
settings. The x direction usually
means dimensions parallel to the
drawing x axis.

Drawing settings reference 852 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
Angle Defines the appearance of angle
dimensions.
Shows the angle dimensions in
degrees on side.
Shows the angle dimensions in
degrees at angle vertex.
Shows the angle dimensions using a
triangle.
You can also set the Triangle base
length to control the base dimension
shown for bevel dimensions.
Shows the angle dimensions using a
triangle with degrees.
Triangle base length The base length of a triangle.
Curved Defines whether to use angle units or
distance units for curved dimensions.
Short extension line Defines whether Tekla Structures
should create extension lines all of
the same length or use the short
extension line automatically if the
dimension line falls on a grid line.
If you want to exaggerate (page 726)
dimensions, you need to set this
option to No.
Dimension format
Units Defines the units (page 854) used in
dimensioning.
Precision Defines dimension precision
(page 854): rounding, imperial units.
Format Defines the dimension format
(page 854): the number of decimals
and their appearance.
Use grouping Defines whether long dimension
values are grouped.
Combine equal dimensions Combines equal dimensions. The
choices are Off, 3*60 or 3*60=180.
The accuracy of combining equal
dimensions is 0.1.
Minimum number to combine Defines the minimum number of
dimensions to combine.
Dimension grouping

Drawing settings reference 853 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
Update grouping when model Yes updates dimension grouping
changes automatically when the model
changes.
Placing
Dimension line spacing Defines the space between parallel
dimension lines.
In manually created dimensions, this
setting works only if dimension
Placing is set to Free, see below.
Short dimensions Defines the text location of short
dimensions: between or outside the
dimension lines.
Place Opens the Dimension Placing dialog
box.
Placing is the method used for
placing dimensions. The choices are:
• Free lets Tekla Structures to
decide the location and direction
of the dimension based on the
Direction settings.
• Fixed allows you to place the
dimension at any point.
Search margin is the empty margin
that you want to have around the
dimension.
Minimal distance is the closest
distance Tekla Structures uses to
search for an empty space for a
dimension.
Direction defines the side of the
dimensioned object on which Tekla
Structures places the dimensions.

See also
Dimension properties - Units, precision and format (page 854)

Drawing settings reference 854 Dimension and dimensioning properties

Dimension properties - Units, precision and format
Use the General tab of the Dimension properties dialog box to view and
modify options related to dimension format, unit and precision.

The integer values are provided for situations when you need to use the value
as a value for an advanced option.

Option Integer value Notes

Format
### 0
###[.#] 1
###.# 2
###[.##] 3
###.## 4
###[.###] 5
###.### 6
### #/# 7
## # /##.## # 8 This option is available
only for straight
dimensions.
Precision
0.00 1 For defining precision
0.50 2 with rounding. For
example, with precision
0.33 3 0.33 the actual
0.25 4 dimension 50.40 is
shown as 50.33.
1/8 5 For imperial units
1/16 6
1/32 7
1/10 8 For defining precision
1/100 9 without rounding
1/1000 10
Units
automatic Uses the units defined in
the model
mm millimeters
cm centimeters
m meters

Drawing settings reference 855 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Integer value Notes
foot - inch feet and inches
Inches are converted
into integer feet, and the
remaining inches are
shown in inches.
cm / m centimeters and meters
Dimensions under 100
cm are shown in
centimeters, and
dimensions above 100
cm are shown in meters.
Millimeters are shown as
superscript.
inch inches
feet feet

See also
Dimensioning rule properties (page 669)
Dimension properties - General tab (page 851)

Dimension properties - Appearance tab

Use the Appearance tab in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and
modify the settings affecting the dimension appearance.

• To open the drawing level Dimension Properties dialog box, open the
drawing, go to the Drawing tab and click Properties --> Dimension.
• To open the object level Dimension Properties dialog box, double-click a
dimension in an open drawing.
• To open Dimension Properties dialog box for general arrangement
drawings before creating a drawing: On the Drawings & reports tab, click
Drawing properties --> GA drawing, and then click Dimension.

Option Description
Text
Color The color of the dimension mark text.
This controls the line weight in
printed drawings.
Height Controls the height of the text used in
the dimension marks in the drawing.

Drawing settings reference 856 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
Font Controls which font is used in the
dimension mark.
Frame Defines a frame for the dimension
mark.
Place Defines how the dimension mark is
placed relative to the dimension line.
Line, Arrow
Color Controls the color of the dimension
line. The color controls the line weight
in printed drawings.
Background mask Select Opaque to hide the area of the
drawing that is covered by the
dimension mark.

Select Transparent to show the

drawing content in the dimension
mark background so that drawing
linework is visible.

Arrow shape Controls the type of mark used with

the dimension line.
You can also create arrow types of
your own, see Customize dimension
line arrows (page 231).
Sets the height and the length of the
arrowhead.

US Absolute dimensions Controls the type of mark used with

the dimension line in US Absolute
dimensions.

Drawing settings reference 857 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
Level dimensions Controls the type of mark used with
the dimension line in level
dimensions.

See also
Dimension properties - General tab (page 851)

Dimension properties - Marks and Tags tabs

Use the Marks and Tags tabs in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view
and modify the contents of dimension marks and tags in an open drawing.

• To open the drawing level Dimension properties dialog box, open the
drawing, go to the Drawing tab and click Properties --> Dimension.
• To open the object level Dimension properties, double-click a dimension
in an open drawing.
• To open Dimension properties dialog box for general arrangement
drawings before creating a drawing: On the Drawings & reports tab, click
Drawing properties --> GA drawing, and then click Dimension.

Option Description
Marks tab
Prefix Displays the defined value before the
numeric value of the dimension.
The prefix value cannot be plain
numbers, and the prefix value cannot
end with a number.
Visibility of numeric value Defines whether the numeric value of
the dimension is visible or hidden.
If you hide the numeric value of the
dimension, the prefix and postfix text
will still be shown.
Postfix Displays the selected text after the
numeric value of the dimension.
The postfix value cannot be plain
numbers, and the postfix value
cannot start with a number when the
numeric value of the dimension is
visible.

Drawing settings reference 858 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
... buttons Define dimension mark contents by
adding elements. You can also modify
the mark appearance.
Frame around elements: Type and
Color define the element frame type
and color individually for each
element.
Add frame allows you to add frames
around elements. Font: Color, Height
and Font define the font type, color,
and height used in element texts
individually for each element. Clicking
Select gives more font choices.
Units: Unit and Format allow you to
set the unit and format for length
elements. Unit settings can be
modified only when a length element
is selected.
You can also use template attributes
in the User-defined attribute
element. In marks, you cannot use
template attributes such as
MODEL_TOTAL that refer to the whole
model. Marks only check the
information from the object in the
drawing and not from the whole
model.
Plate side marks Specified creates plate side marks to
plate dimension (page 233) using the
specified color, size and offset. Offset
means the distance of the mark from
the dimension line.
The option Automatic is available
only in intelligent drawings, that is
when the advanced option
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWE
D is set to TRUE.
Exaggeration Specified exaggerates narrow
dimensions (page 726).
Select the Direction: Left/ Down,
Right/Up or Both.
Set the Origin, Width, Position and
Height.

Drawing settings reference 859 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
Tags tab
Tags area Add tags to dimension lines
(page 176). You can enter text in the
tag box or add elements by clicking
the ....
When you click the ... button next to a
tag box, a dialog box for the particular
tag is displayed and you can define
dimension tag contents by adding
elements. You can also modify the tag
element appearance.
• Rotation --> Perpendicular to
dimension line rotates the tag.
• Rotation --> Parallel to
dimension line does not rotate
the tag. This is the default value.
• Frame around elements: Type
and Color define the element
frame type and color individually
for each element.
• Add frame allows you to add
frames around elements. Font:
Color, Height and Font define the
font type, color, and height used in
element texts individually for each
element. Clicking Select gives
more font choices.
• Units: Unit and Format allow you
to set the unit and format for
length elements. Unit settings can
be modified only when a length
element is selected.
• You can also use template
attributes in the User-defined
attribute element.
In tags, you cannot use template
attributes such as MODEL_TOTAL
that refer to the whole model.
Tags only check the information
from the object in the drawing,
and not from the whole model.
Include part count in the tag Yes includes part count in the tag.

Drawing settings reference 860 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
Exclude parts according to filter Select a drawing view filter that
removes desired content from the tag
(page 178).
Curved dimension tag type Select a tag type for a curved
reinforcing bar (page 182) dimension
line. The tag type controls how the
tags are aligned to the dimension.

See also
Add manual dimensions (page 168)
Add manual dimensions to general arrangement drawings (page 174)
Add dimensions to reinforcement (page 182)

Dimensioning properties - General tab (Integrated

dimensioning)
Use the General tab in the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and
modify the general settings of the dimensions. This dialog box is displayed if
you use Integrated dimensioning type in dimensioning.

Option Description
Dimensioning type Standard is used for almost all
dimensioning.
Truss meets the specific
requirements needed to dimension
truss drawings. It dimensions the
position and length of the diagonals.
The dimensioning is done only if the
diagonals are secondary parts that
are welded to upper and lower
chords, which are main parts and not
welded to any parts. If the truss

Drawing settings reference 861 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
welding is done some other way,
standard dimensioning is used.
Number of views: Minimize Yes minimizes the number of views
that Tekla Structures creates.
Also check the settings in the drawing
View properties dialog box.
Combine dimensions Combines (page 714) several single
dimensions into one dimension line.
In Options, select the combination
level. The larger the number, the
more Tekla Structures combines
dimensions.
Option 4.5 uses a combination of
option 5 for main part and option 4
for secondary parts.
The Distance means the distance
within which Tekla Structures
combines internal dimensions.
If the distance between two details is
less than the defined Minimum
distance, Tekla Structures combines
the dimensions.
Close dimensions Close dimensions (page 713)
completes dimension lines to include
the entire part.
No does not close dimensions
In X only closes dimensions in the x
direction and leaves others open
All closes all dimensions
This setting is not relevant to profile
shape dimensions.
Close dimensions: Short Yes closes short dimensions.
dimensions
With No, the open dimension is the
middle one rather than the short end
dimension.
When you leave short dimensions
open, Tekla Structures leaves out the
longer dimension line in dimension
lines that contain two dimensions. If
dimension lines contain three
dimensions, Tekla Structures leaves

Drawing settings reference 862 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
out the middle one. This option does
not affect dimension lines with more
than three dimensions.
Placing: Forward offset Forward offset (page 718) defines the
distance Tekla Structures uses to
search for the base point of a
dimension. If Tekla Structures does
not find a base point (corner) within
the Forward offset search distance, it
uses an edge point.
The Centered bolt setting affects on
how the dimension is displayed.
Necessary internal dimensioning: Recognizable distance (page 719)
Recognizable distance defines the limit for dimensioning
asymmetry in secondary parts. In
some cases, it is important to look at
the asymmetrical relationship of
parts, so that an asymmetric
secondary part is correctly connected
to a main part. You can use
Recognizable distance to have
asymmetry reflected in dimensioning.
If the asymmetry is smaller than the
distance you enter here, Tekla
Structures represents it using a
dimension.
Part mark on dimension line None creates no part mark on the
dimension line.
Assembly overall dimensions
creates a part mark on the assembly
overall dimension line.
Extreme bolts creates a part mark on
the dimension line between the
outermost bolts.
Main dimension position Defines the side on which Tekla
Structures places the Assembly
overall, Main part work point, and
Knock-off dimensions.
Auto treats the main dimensions in
the same way as other dimensions.
Above places the main dimensions
above the part (or to the left for
vertical parts).

Drawing settings reference 863 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
Below places the main dimensions
below the part.
Above places the skew position
dimensions of the main part below
the part and Below places them
above.
Grid dimensions Creates grid dimensions (page 719).
The values are: None, Individual
spans, Overall or Individual spans
and overall.
Grid dimension position Sets the grid dimension position. The
values are:
Main view - above
Main view - below
Top view - above
Top view - bottom
Bottom view - above
Bottom view - below
Back view - above
Back view - below
All views - above
All views - below.
Dimension properties
Straight dimensions Sets the dimension type for straight
dimensions using the settings in the
properties file you select.
In X direction Otherwise same settings as in straight
dimensions but overrides the straight
setting for horizontal dimensions. If
you use the blank option, Tekla
Structures uses the Straight
dimensions option settings. The x
direction usually means dimensions
parallel to the drawing x axis.
Arrow shape: US Absolute Controls the type of mark used with
dimensions the dimension line in US Absolute
dimensions.
Arrow shape: Level dimensions Controls the type of mark used with
the dimension line in level
dimensions.

Drawing settings reference 864 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
Angle dimensions Sets the dimension type for angle
dimensions using the settings in the
properties file you select.
Check dimensions Sets the dimension type for check
dimensions using the settings in the
properties file you select.

See also
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Dimensioning properties - Position dimensions tab

(Integrated dimensioning)
Use the Position dimensions tab in the Dimensioning Properties dialog box
to view and modify the settings for the position dimensions in single-part,
assembly and cast unit drawings.

Note that the contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type,
and all the options listed below are not available for all drawing types. This
dialog box is displayed if you use Integrated dimensioning type in
dimensioning.

Option Description
Position bolts/parts to Controls from where Tekla Structures
creates the part/bolt position
dimensions.
None creates no position dimensions.
Main part creates the dimensions
from the main part reference line.
Working points creates the
dimensions between the work points,
such as the intersections of main and
neighbor part reference lines.
Embedded objects Creates position dimensions for
locating embedded objects in cast
unit drawings. The embedded objects
are custom components attached to
the cast unit.
As secondary objects dimensions
embedded objects in cast unit

Drawing settings reference 865 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
drawings the same way as secondary
parts.
By reference points dimensions
embedded objects to their reference
point, which is the origin of the
custom component.
Secondary part Creates dimensions to bolt holes or
edges of the secondary part.
None creates no position dimensions
for secondary parts.
By bolts dimensions bolt hole
locations in the secondary parts.
By parts dimensions edges of
secondary parts.
By both dimensions bolt hole
locations and edges of the secondary
part.
Secondary part dimension Aligns dimensions with the main or
direction neighboring part. Only for skewed clip
angles or shear plates.
Position from Sets the start point for running
dimensions. Only for skewed clip
angles or shear plates bolted to a
neighboring part.
Reversed direction for running Yes changes the direction of running
dimensions dimensions. With this option, you can
set the zero point to the end of a
member rather than to the start.
Main part bolt position On creates dimensions to the bolt
hole locations in the main part.
Main part skew position Yes creates horizontal and vertical
check dimensions representing the
skew position of a brace. Created
between the work points of the main
part.
Skew check dimensions are located in
the front view. Their location depends
on the Main dimension side setting
selected on the General tab. When
the main dimensions are above the
part, the skew dimensions are below,
and vice versa.

Drawing settings reference 866 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
Skew position Defines how Tekla Structures
dimensions skewed secondary part
positions.
None creates no dimensions for
skewed secondary part positions.
Angle creates an angle dimension for
the secondary part.
Dimensions creates dimensions for
the skewed position of the secondary
part.
Both creates both the angle and the
dimensions.
Centered part Controls the dimensions of centrally-
placed parts. These settings have an
effect only if position dimensions are
created.
Internal dimensions the centered
parts overall size.
Position dimensions the part to the
main part center lines.
None creates no centered part
dimensions.
Centered bolt Controls the dimensions of centrally-
placed bolt groups.
Internal dimensions the centered
bolts spread.
Position dimensions the bolts to the
main part center-lines.
Centered bolt overrides the
Secondary part bolt internal option
for centered bolts. This only applies to
bolts located centrally on the part.
Elevation dimension On creates elevation dimensions.
Combine equal dimensions Combines equal dimensions. The
choices are None, 3*60 or 3*60=180.
The accuracy of combining equal
dimensions is 0.1.
Minimum number to combine Defines the minimum number of
dimensions to combine.

Drawing settings reference 867 Dimension and dimensioning properties

Dimensioning properties - Part dimensions tab (Integrated
dimensioning)
Use the options on the Part dimensioning tab of the Dimensioning
Properties dialog box to view and modify part dimensioning settings for
single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings.

Note that the contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type,
and all the options listed below are not available for all drawing types. This
dialog box is displayed if you use Integrated dimensioning type in
dimensioning

Option Description
Internal Creates internal dimensions for
secondary parts connected to the
main part.
None creates dimensions for
secondary parts.
Necessary creates only the
dimensions that are necessary for
assembling the parts.
All creates all dimensions for the
secondary parts.
Main part overall dimensions Once creates one overall dimension
for the main part.
All creates overall dimensions for
main parts in all views.
None creates no overall dimensions
for the main part.
The Assembly part overall
dimension settings have some effect
on these options.
Assembly part overall dimensions Length only creates overall
dimensions for an entire assembly or
cast unit in the x direction only.
All creates overall dimensions for an
assembly or cast unit in all directions.
Off creates no overall dimensions for
an assembly or a cast unit.
Main part work points On creates a check dimension
between the outermost work points.

Drawing settings reference 868 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
Main part shape (Shape On creates dimensions to show the
dimensions) shape of a main part.
By default, Tekla Structures
automatically draws shape
dimensions on both ends of a beam,
even if the ends are symmetrical.
Main part radius dimensions On creates radius dimensions for
(Radius dimensions) curved chamfers and round holes in
the main part.
This option is available only if you
have set Main part shape
dimensions to On.
Note that this option does not create
radius dimensions for curved beams
or polybeams with chamfers.
Bevel dimensions On creates linear dimensions of a
bevel.
Bevel angle Creates an angle dimension and
defines which side of the bevel to
dimension. The choices are None,
Angle of cut and Angle of beam.
Knock off dimensions On creates check dimensions from
the edge of the main part to the work
point.
Preferred dim side Sets the preferred view (front or side)
for part dimensions.

From the nearest floor level to part On creates dimensions indicating the
distance from the closest floor level to
the bottom and/or top of the parts.
From grid to part center line On creates dimensions showing the
offset of a part from the grid to the
part center line.
From grid to part ends On creates dimensions showing the
offset of a part from the grid to the
near or far end of the part.

See also
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Drawing settings reference 869 Dimension and dimensioning properties

Example: Part dimensioning (page 704)

Dimensioning properties - Bolt dimensions tab (Integrated

dimensioning)
Use the options on the Bolt dimensions tab of the Dimensioning Properties
dialog box to select which bolt dimensions to create and how in single-part,
assembly and cast unit drawings.

Note that the contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type,
and all the options listed below are not available for all drawing types. This
dialog box is displayed if you use Integrated dimensioning type in
dimensioning.

Option Description
Main part bolt internal dimensions Creates internal dimensions for bolt
groups in the main part.
None creates none of the internal
bolt dimensions.
Internal creates bolt group internal
dimensions (distances between bolts).
All creates edge distance and bolt
group internal dimensions. Edge
distance is the dimension from the
outermost bolt to the part edge.
Main part bolt internal dimensions: Indicates whether the dimensions are
Skewed bolt group parallel to the part or the bolt group.
The choices are No dimensions, In
part direction, and In bolt group
direction.
Secondary part bolt internal Creates internal dimensions for bolt
dimensions groups in the secondary part.
The choices are None, Necessary,
Internal, and All.
Secondary part bolt internal Aligns the bolt dimensions with the
dimensions: Skewed bolt group secondary part or bolt group.
The choices are In part direction, No
dimensions, and In bolt group
direction
Distance between extreme bolts: Creates check dimension between the
Extreme bolts outermost bolts.
The choices are None, Main part,
and Assembly.

Drawing settings reference 870 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
Distance between extreme bolts: Creates check dimensions from the
Extreme bolts to work points outermost bolts to the work points.
Yes creates the check dimensions.
Preferred dim side Sets the preferred view (front or side)
for bolt dimensions.

Combine bolt dimensions Sets the format of the combined bolt

group internal dimensions.
You can combine bolt group internal
dimensions and display them in the
format 3*60 or 3*60=180, or have
single dimensions.
Minimum number to combine Defines the minimum number of
dimensions to combine.

See also
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)
Example: Combine bolt group dimensions (page 717)

Dimensioning properties - Dimension grouping tab

(Integrated dimensioning)
Use the Dimension grouping tab in Dimensioning Properties dialog box to
view and modify settings for dimension grouping in single-part, assembly and
cast unit drawings.
Note that the contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type,
and all the options listed below are not available for all drawing types. This
dialog box is displayed if you use Integrated dimensions dimensioning type
in dimensioning.

Option Description
Activate dimension grouping Selects the objects for grouping.
Parts Groups according to parts.
Bolts Groups according to bolts.
Components Groups according to components.
Cuts/Shapes Groups according to cuts or shapes.

Drawing settings reference 871 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
Automatic tagging Defines how to display information in
a dimension line.
Display tags Displays tags.
Include part count in the tag Includes part count in the tag.
Do not display marks for the Does not display part marks for
grouped items grouped items.
Available elements Elements available to define identical
conditions.
Add Adds items to Selected elements list.
Remove Removes items from Selected
elements list.
Move up Moves the element higher in the list.
Move down Moves the element lower in the list.
Update grouping when model Yes updates dimension grouping
changes automatically when the model
changes.

See also
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)
Group identical objects to the same dimension line (page 699)

Dimensioning properties - Sub-assemblies tab (Integrated

dimensioning)
Use the options on the Sub-assembly tab of the Assembly - Dimensioning
Properties dialog box to view and modify which dimensions to create and how
for sub-assemblies.

Note that the contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type,
and all the options listed below are not available for all drawing types. This

Drawing settings reference 872 Dimension and dimensioning properties

dialog box is displayed if you use Integrated dimensions dimensioning type
in dimensioning.

Option Description
Dimension parts inside sub- Defines whether to dimension parts
assemblies inside sub-assemblies.
Yes creates internal dimensions for
parts inside sub-assemblies.
No does not create internal
dimensions for parts inside sub-
assemblies.
Measure sub-assembly position Defines the position from which the
from sub-assembly is measured.
None does not measure the sub-
assembly position.
Bolt measures the position of the
sub-assembly from the bolts. If bolts
are not included in the sub-assembly,
or if it is not possible to measure the
position from bolts, Tekla Structures
measures the sub-assembly position
from the reference point.
Extreme points measures the
position of the sub-assembly from the
bounding box of the sub-assembly.
Reference point measures the
position of the sub-assembly from the
reference point.

See also
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)

Drawing settings reference 873 Dimension and dimensioning properties

Dimensioning properties - Reinforcement dimensions tab
(Integrated dimensioning)
Use the Reinforcement dimensions tab in the Dimensioning Properties
dialog box to view and modify the setting affecting the creation of
reinforcement dimensions and how they are displayed.

This dialog box with this tab is displayed if you use Integrated dimensions
dimensioning type in dimensioning cast unit drawings.

Option Description
Dimensions for reinforcing bar On creates dimensions for reinforcing
groups bar groups. This also activates the
other selections on this tab.
Mark location Sets the mark type and location.

Selecting the first choice in the

list creates dimension marks.

Selecting one of the other

options in the list creates tagged
dimension marks. The location of the
tag is indicated by the small rectangle
in the option.
Edit mark contents Opens the Dimension mark content
dialog box where you can select what
you want to include in the dimension
mark.
Close dimension to binding Yes automatically adds closing
geometry dimensions to the edge of the part.

See also
Add automatic view-specific dimensions using dimensioning type Integrated
(page 697)
Example: Reinforcement dimension (page 721)

Dimensioning properties - Grid tab (GA drawings)

Use the Grid tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view
and modify settings for grid and overall dimensions in general arrangement
drawings.

Drawing settings reference 874 Dimension and dimensioning properties

To open this dialog box:
• On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> GA drawings
and click Dimensioning.
• In an open GA drawing, double-click the drawing background, and click
Dimensioning.

Option Description
Grid line dimensions On creates grid dimension lines.
Overall dimensions On creates the overall dimensions.
Dimension positioning: Horizontal Positions the vertical grid and overall
dimension lines to the Left or Right
side of the drawing or on Both sides.
Dimension positioning: Vertical Positions the horizontal grid and
overall dimension lines Above or
Below the drawing or Both.

See also
Add automatic dimensions to general arrangement drawings (page 736)
Example: Grid and overall dimensions (page 738)

Dimensioning properties - Parts tab (GA drawings)

Use the Parts tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box to
view and modify settings for part dimensions in general arrangement
drawings.

To open this dialog box:

• On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> GA
drawings and click Dimensioning.
• In an open GA drawing, double-click the drawing background, and click
Dimensioning.

Option Description
Maximum leader line length: Controls how close the dimension
Outside dimensions lines are positioned to the parts they
are dimensioning. Defines that the
outside dimension lines take the
maximum leader line length from the
grid line.
Maximum leader line length: Inside Controls how close the dimension
dimensions lines are positioned to the parts they
are dimensioning. Defines that the
inside dimension lines take the

Drawing settings reference 875 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
maximum leader line length from the
part reference point.
Include parts not entirely in view On dimensions the parts partly
outside the view. Off will not
dimension these parts.
Maximum number of outside Specifies the maximum number of
dimensions dimension lines allowed outside the
grid. When you dimension different
objects on different dimension lines,
using this setting helps you to create
cleaner drawings.
Once the desired maximum is
reached, Tekla Structures creates the
dimensions inside the grid.
Object group dimensioning rules Specifies different object groups to be
dimensioned on different dimension
lines.
Object group The object group to be dimensioned.
Positioning No dimensions does not create
dimensions for the parts.
Inside grid creates dimensions next
to or near the parts being
dimensioned. All part dimensions are
placed inside the grid when the parts
are inside the grid. The dimension will
still be outside, even if you have
selected Inside grid because of
where the parts are in the end bay
and the end being dimensioned to is
next to the outside.
Outside grid creates dimensions to
parts and positions them outside the
grid.
Either creates dimensions to parts
and positions them either inside or
outside the grid depending on the
part position and the setting of the
option Maximum number of
outside dimensions.
You must use the Either option if you
define the Maximum number of
outside dimensions, so that Tekla
Structures can position dimensions
inside the grid when the maximum

Drawing settings reference 876 Dimension and dimensioning properties

 Option Description
number of dimensions is reached
outside the grid.
Horizontal position Left side positions all dimensions to
horizontal parts to the left of the grid.
Right side positions all dimensions to
horizontal parts to the right of the
grid.
Distributed to both sides positions
all dimensions to horizontal parts to
the grid nearest the part they are
dimensioning.
Vertical position Above positions all dimensions to
vertical parts above the grid.
Below positions all dimensions to
vertical parts below the grid.
Distributed to both sides positions
all dimensions to vertical parts to the
grid nearest the part they are
dimensioning.

See also
Add automatic dimensions to general arrangement drawings (page 736)
Example: Position part dimensions (page 743)
Example: Limit the number of outside dimensions (page 742)
Example: Dimension parts partly outside the view (page 741)
Example: Maximum leader line length options (page 740)

9.7 Mark properties

You can adjust the mark appearance and contents before creating a drawing
and also in an open drawing.

Click the links below to find out more:

• Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and Appearance tabs
(page 878)
• Leader line types (page 883)
• Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks (page 884)
• Drawing weld mark properties (page 885)

Drawing settings reference 877 Mark properties

• Model weld mark visibility and appearance properties in drawings
(page 888)
• Level mark properties (page 891)
• Mark elements (page 892)

Mark properties - Content, General, Merging and

Appearance tabs
Use the General, Merging and Content tabs in the properties of different
types of marks to view and modify the settings affecting the mark content and
appearance. For some marks, there is a separate Appearance tab.

Note that all the listed settings are not available for all marks.
To open mark properties:
• On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties, select the
drawing type, and go to mark properties directly by clicking the button of
the respective mark (GA drawings) or through view properties.
• In an open drawing, double-click the drawing background, and go to mark
properties directly by clicking the button of the respective mark (GA
drawings) or through view properties.
• In an open drawing, double-click the drawing view frame and click the
desired mark in the options tree on the left.
• Double-click a mark in an open drawing.

Setting Description
Content tab:
Content For some marks, you need to select from this list
the object that you are defining the marks for.
For example, for part marks, you can define part
mark settings independently for main and
secondary parts, and for sub-assembly main and
secondary parts.
Available elements Available elements lists the elements that are
available for the current mark.
Elements in mark
Elements in mark lists the elements that you have
selected to include in the mark.
For more information about mark elements, see
Mark elements (page 892).
For a list of elements that are common to all
marks, see Common elements in marks
(page 893).

Drawing settings reference 878 Mark properties

 Setting Description
< Add frame Add frames around individual elements in side the
mark.
Frame around Defines the element frame type and color for one
elements: Type and or several elements. To select all elements in the
Color Elements in mark list to apply the same
modification to all of them, hold down Shift on the
keyboard, and click the last element in the list.
Font: Color, Height and Defines the font type, color, and height used in
Font element texts in one or several elements. To select
all elements in the Elements in mark list to apply
the same modification to all of them, hold down
Shift and click the last element in the list.
Clicking Select... gives more font choices.
Units: Units and Change the units and format of the length, height,
Format spacing or diameter element that you have
selected from the Elements in mark list.
General or Appearance tab:
In main parts These settings are for bolt marks.
In secondary parts Visible displays bolt marks.
In sub-assembly main Not visible does not display bolt marks.
parts
In sub-assembly
secondary parts
Visibility in view distributed distributes the marks in the view. Tekla
Structures only creates marks that are not visible in
the other views.
always always creates marks in the view,
irrespective the settings in other views.
preferred acts as distributed, but the preferred
view has a higher priority.
Select distributed to one view only in a drawing. If
you set other views to distributed, the marks are
located only in the view that has the setting
Visibility in view set to preferred.
none creates no marks.
Parts out of view plane This setting is available only in view level
properties.
Visible displays marks outside of the view in the
drawing.
Not visible displays no marks outside the view.

Drawing settings reference 879 Mark properties

 Setting Description
Bolt size limit This setting is for bolt marks.
Filters standard-sized bolt marks out of drawings,
which means that Tekla Structures does not display
bolt marks of the defined size in drawings.
There are some advanced options that can be used
in addition to the Bolt size limit setting so that you
irst give the ignored size and then set the
advanced option:
XS_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE defines if the
ignored size is the size of the bolt (value BOLT) or
the hole (value HOLE).
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE can be used for filtering
out ignored bolt marks on the basis of the bolt
standard. Enter the name of the bolt standard as
the value, for example, 7990. You can also use
wildcards, such as * or ?.
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE can be used
for filtering out ignored bolt marks on the basis of
the bolt type. The values are SITE, SHOP, and
SITE_AND_SHOP.
Merge marks This setting is for part marks and surface
treatment marks.
On merges marks.
For more information about part marks merging
distance, please see Merged part marks (page 768).
By default, the maximum merging distance is 1200
mm from the part.
Frame around mark: Define the frame to be used around marks, and
Type and Color the color of the frame.
Background mask Select Opaque to hide the part of the drawing that
is covered by the mark.

Drawing settings reference 880 Mark properties

 Setting Description
Select Transparent to show the part of the
drawing that is covered by the mark, so that line
work is visible, for example.

Leader line: Type and Define the leader line type and line arrow type, and
Arrow and Use hidden select to hide leader lines for hidden parts.
lines for hidden parts.
Rotation Define the part mark rotation.
Alignment Select one of the alignment options:
Left
Center
Right
Leader line
The Leader line option is available in following
mark types: bolt marks, connection marks, part
marks, neighbor part marks, pour object marks,
reinforcement marks, neighbor reinforcement
marks, merged reinforcement marks and surface
treatment marks.
Place... Clicking the Place button opens the placing dialog
box.
Placing: free allowsTekla Structures to search for
the first suitable location for the mark.
Placing: fixed allows you to place the mark in any
location.
When you use the option fixed, the mark stays
where it is even though you update the drawing,
whereas with free, Tekla Structures tries to find the
optimal place for the annotation object.
Search margin is the empty margin that you want
to leave around the mark.

Drawing settings reference 881 Mark properties

 Setting Description
Minimum distance is the minimum distance of
the mark from the part.
Maximum distance is the maximum distance of
the mark from the part.
Note that if you use a high Search margin and
Minimum distance values, the mark placement
does not work properly.
Quarter defines the areas where Tekla Structures
searches for a position to place the mark.

(1) Search margin

(2) Minimum distance
(3) Maximum distance

Setting Image Description

Merging tab
Use the Merging tab in Reinforcement mark properties to view and modify
the settings affecting the merging of the reinforcement marks in cast unit
drawings.
For more information about merged reinforcement marks, see Elements in
merged reinforcement marks (page 900), and Merge reinforcement marks
automatically (page 771).
Identical marks in One leader line to
same cast unit group creates one
leader line for a group of
reinforcing bars.
One leader line per
row merges the marks
and creates one leader
line for a row of
reinforcing bars.
Parallel leader lines
merges the marks and
creates parallel leader
lines.

Drawing settings reference 882 Mark properties

 Setting Image Description
Leader lines to one
point merges the marks
and draws all leader
lines to one point.
No merge does not
merge marks. Tekla
Structures creates an
individual leader line for
each mark.
If you select No merge,
you still need to define
the mark content for the
marks that Tekla
Structures automatically
merges on the Merging
tab.
Preferred direction of Merge vertical merges
merge the marks in the vertical
direction of the drawing.
Merge horizontal
merges the marks in the
horizontal direction of
the drawing.

See also
Define marks (page 752)
Add automatic marks (page 754)
Define view labels and view label marks (page 616)
Modify section properties in drawings (page 164)
Add part marks manually in drawings (page 251)
Delete marks for selected parts (page 261)

Leader line types

You can use leader lines with text, symbols, associative notes and marks to
make it clearer to which item it is related to.

Drawing settings reference 883 Mark properties

 Option Description Click the links below to find
out more
Texts Add text in drawings (page 271)

Symbols Add symbols in drawings

(page 487)

Level marks Add level marks in drawings

(page 253)

Part marks Add automatic marks (page 754)

Add part marks manually in
drawings (page 251)

Revision marks Add revision marks in drawings

(page 279)

Surface treatment Define automatic surface

marks treatment in drawings
(page 816)

Reinforcement Define automatic reinforcement

marks and reinforcement mesh
properties (page 821)

Associative notes Add associative notes in

drawings (page 255)

Drawing settings reference 884 Mark properties

Positioning properties of view label, section and detail
marks
Use the Position tab in the Mark Contents dialog box in view properties to
set the positioning options for view labels marks, section marks and detail
marks.

Option Description
Show on For section marks.
Defines if the section marks are
shown at both ends of the cut line or
at the left or right end.
Text position Defines the position of the mark text
in relation to the line or in relation to
the symbol or symbol center line.
Horizontal offset sets the horizontal
offset of the mark text from the line.
Vertical offset sets the vertical offset
of the mark text from the line.
Text rotation For section marks.
Defines the rotation of the mark text.
Alignment For view label marks.
Defines if the view label mark is
aligned to the center, right, or left.

See also
Define view labels and view label marks (page 616)
Modify section properties in drawings (page 164)

Drawing weld mark properties

In Weld Mark Properties dialog box you can view and modify the properties
of a weld mark that has been manually added in a drawing.

To open the weld mark properties, do one of the following in an open drawing:
• Double-click a manually created weld.
• Hold down Shift and click Weld mark on the Drawing tab.
• On the Drawing tab, click Properties --> Weld mark.

Option Description
Prefix a= design throat thickness, s= penetration throat
thickness, or z= leg length

Drawing settings reference 885 Mark properties

 Option Description
Size The size of the weld. If you select a partial
penetration weld as the weld type, you can enter
two sizes.
Type The type of the weld.

For a list of available weld types and their

descriptions, see List of weld types.
You can customize some of the weld type symbols,
see Customize weld type symbols (page 362) for
more information.
Angle The angle of weld preparation, bevels, or groove.
Tekla Structures displays the angle between the
weld type symbol and the fill type contour symbol.
Contour The fill type contour of a weld can be:
• None
• Flush
• Convex
• Concave
Finish Tekla Structures displays the finish symbol above
the weld type symbol in drawings. The options are:
• G (Grind)
• M (Machine)
• C (Chip)
• (Flush finished weld)

Drawing settings reference 886 Mark properties

 Option Description
• (Smooth blended weld face)
Length The length of a regular weld depends on the length
of the connection between the welded parts. You
can set the exact length of a polygon weld by, for
example, defining the start and end points of the
weld.
Pitch The center-to-center spacing of welds for non-
continuous welds. Pitch is shown in the weld mark
if the value is greater than 0.0.
To create a non-continuous weld, define the
center-to-center spacing and the pitch of the
welds. Tekla Structures calculates the distance
between the welds as the pitch minus the length of
the weld.
By default, Tekla Structures uses the – character to
separate weld length and pitch, for example, 50–
100. To change the separator to @, for example,
set the advanced option
XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR to @.
Effective throat The weld size used in weld strength calculation.
Root opening The space between the welded parts.
Reference text Additional information to appear in the weld
symbol. For example, information about the weld
specification or process.
Edge/Around Indicates whether only one edge or the entire
perimeter of a face should be welded.
A circle in the weld symbol in drawings indicates
the Around option has been used.
Workshop/Site Indicates where the weld should be made.
Stitch weld Set this option to Yes to create a staggered,
intermittent weld.
Stitch welds are staggered on both sides of the
welded part. Tekla Structures shows the weld type
symbols as staggered in weld symbols.
If you set this option to No, a non- staggered
intermittent weld is created. To show the pitch in a
weld mark, set Pitch to a value greater than 0.0.
Placing Search margin is the empty margin that you want
to leave around the mark.
Minimum distance is the minimum distance of
the mark from the part.

Drawing settings reference 887 Mark properties

 Option Description
Quarter defines the areas Tekla Structures
searches for a space to place the weld marks.
Placing is the method used to place welds marks:
• free lets Tekla Structures decide the location
and direction of the mark.
• fixed allows you to place the weld at any point.

See also
Add manual weld marks in drawings (page 361)

Model weld mark visibility and appearance properties in

drawings
You can select which model weld marks are visible in drawings, and define the
content that is displayed in weld marks. In assembly drawings, you can define
the visibility of welds in sub-assemblies.

Use options in Weld mark properties (or Welding Mark Properties in general
arrangement drawings) to set the visibility and contents of model weld marks.
Single-part and assembly drawings
1. On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type.
2. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that you want to
change, and click View properties.
3. Click Weld mark in the options tree.
General arrangement drawing
1. Click Drawings & reports --> Drawing properties --> GA drawing .
2. Click Weld mark.

Option Description
Weld number Yes shows the weld number.
Tekla Structures assigns a number to
each weld when the weld is created.
You can select whether to show or
hide the weld number.
Welds None displays no welds in the
drawing.
Welds in sub-assemblies (assembly
drawings) Site displays only site welds in the
drawing.

Drawing settings reference 888 Mark properties

 Option Description
Workshop displays only workshop
welds in the drawing.
Both displays both site welds and
workshop welds in the drawing.
Welds in hidden parts Select how to show the weld marks
for welds in hidden parts:
• None: If the part is hidden, the
weld mark is not drawn.
• Site: If the part is hidden, weld
marks for site welds are drawn
only.
• Workshop: If the part is hidden,
weld marks for workshop welds
are drawn only.
• Both: Weld marks are always
drawn for hidden parts.
Weld size limit Enter a weld size to filter welds of that
size out of the drawing. This is useful
when you only want to show non-
typical welds in a drawing.
To set whether the weld size limit is
an exact or minimum value, use the
advanced option
XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE.
To filter out a standard weld types,
use the advanced option XS_
OMITTED_WELD_TYPE.
Above line, Below line and Other If there is no check mark in the
Visible column next to the following
properties, the properties are not
displayed in the weld mark. These
settings are set separately to above
line and below line:
Prefix
Size
Type
Angle
Contour
Finish
Length

Drawing settings reference 889 Mark properties

 Option Description
Pitch
Effective throat
Root opening
Reference text These settings are common to above
line and below line. If there is no
Edge/Around
check mark in the Visible column
Workshop/Site next these properties, they are not
displayed in the weld mark.
Place... Placing:
• free allows Tekla Structures to
search for the first suitable
location for the mark, dimension,
weld or another annotation object.
fixed allows you to place the
mark, dimension, weld or another
annotation object in any location.
• When you use the option fixed,
the annotation object stays where
it is even though you update the
drawing, whereas with free, Tekla
Structures tries to find the optimal
place for the annotation object.
Search margin is the empty margin
that you want to leave around the
mark.
Quarter defines the areas Tekla
Structures searches for a space for
placing the mark.
Minimum distance is the minimum
distance of the mark from the part.
Note that if you use high Search
margin and Minimum distance
values, the mark placement may not
work properly.
Color Sets the color of the text.
Height Sets the height of the text.
Font Sets the font of the text. Click Select
to show more options.
Type Sets the type of the line.
Color Sets the color of the line.

Drawing settings reference 890 Mark properties

 Option Description
Background mask Select Opaque to hide the part of the
drawing that is covered by the mark.
Select Transparent to show the part
of the drawing that is covered by the
mark, so that line work is visible, for
example.

See also
Welds in drawings (page 346)
Examples: Model welds in drawings (page 349)
Modify model weld mark visibility and appearance in a drawing (page 355)

Level mark properties

Use the options in the Level mark properties dialog box to view and modify
level mark contents and appearance.

To open the dialog box in an open drawing, go to the Drawing tab, and click
Properties --> Level mark .

Option Description
General tab
Prefix Displays text before the mark.
Prefix for positive level + displays a + character in front of the value.
Visibility of numeric Defines if the numeric values are visible or hidden.
value
Postfix Displays text after the mark.
Level mark format: Defines the precision of the level mark dimension.
Precision
Level mark format: Defines the format of the level mark dimension.
Format
Level mark format: Use Defines whether to use different grouping options
grouping to represent the level mark dimensions.
Level mark format: Defines the units used in level mark dimensions.
Units The available values are automatic, mm, cm, m,
foot - inch, inch and feet.

Drawing settings reference 891 Mark properties

 Option Description
Placing Search margin is the farthest distance Tekla
Structures uses when searching for an empty
space for the level mark.
Minimal distance is the closest distance Tekla
Structures uses to search for an empty space for a
level mark.
Quarter defines the areas Tekla Structures
searches for a space to place the level marks.
Placing is the method used to place level marks:
• Free lets Tekla Structures decide the location of
the level mark.
• Fixed allows you to place the level mark at any
point.
Appearance tab
Text: Color, Height, Defines the text color, height, font and angle.
Font, Angle
Frame: Type, Leader Defines the frame to be used around marks, the
line, Color type of the leader line, and the color of the frame.
Frame: Background Select Opaque to hide the part of the drawing that
mask is covered by the level mark.
Select Transparent to show the part of the
drawing that is covered by the mark.
Arrow: Type Defines the type of the arrow.

Defines the height and the length of the

arrowhead.

See also
Add level marks in drawings (page 253)

Drawing settings reference 892 Mark elements

9.8 Mark elements
The elements and options selected on the mark properties Content tab define
the contents of the marks in drawings.
To add marks to a drawing automatically using the drawing properties, see
Add automatic marks (page 754).
To add part marks manually in an open drawing, see Add part marks manually
in drawings (page 251).
To add marks manually in reinforcement, see Add reinforcement marks
manually in drawings (page 252)
Click the links below to find out more:
• Common elements in marks (page 893)
• Part mark elements (page 894)
• Bolt mark elements (page 896)
• Reinforcement and neighbor reinforcement mark elements (page 898)
• Reinforcement and neighbor reinforcement mesh mark elements
(page 899)
• Pour object mark elements (page 902)
• Elements in merged reinforcement marks (page 900)
• Connection mark elements (page 901)
• Surface treatment mark elements (page 902)
• Section and detail mark elements (page 903)
• View, section view and detail view label mark elements (page 903)

Common elements in marks

There are some mark elements that can be used in most of the mark types.

Element Description
User-defined attributes Available for building object marks.
Adds a user-defined attribute to the
mark. You can also use template
fields for user-defined attributes.
In marks, you cannot use template
attributes such as MODEL_TOTAL that
refer to the whole model. Marks only
check the information from the object

Drawing settings reference 893 Mark elements

 Element Description
in the drawing and not from the
whole model.
For more information about adding
user-defined attributes in marks, see
Add attributes in automatic marks
(page 776).
Text Opens a dialog box where you can
enter text in the mark. The maximum
number of characters is 255.
Symbol Opens a dialog box where you can
change the symbol file in use and
select a symbol from the Tekla
Structures symbol file to add to the
mark.
<> Adds spaces between mark elements.
<--’ Adds a line feed between the
elements to create multi-row marks.
The default space between the lines
depends on the text height and can
be changed with the advanced option
XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR.
<-- Adds a backspace between the
desired elements to remove the
default space between them. The
default space between the elements
depends on the text height and can
be changed with the advanced option
XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR.
Template Available for building object marks.
Adds in the mark a custom graphical
template created with Template
Editor. Opens a dialog box where you
can select the template.
For more information about adding
templates in marks, see Add
templates in marks (page 780).

Part mark elements

You can define part mark contents independently for main and secondary
parts and for sub-assembly main and secondary parts.

Drawing settings reference 894 Mark elements

The following table lists all elements specific to part marks and neighbor part
marks. Some of the available elements are not listed here, because they are
common to many types of marks, and listed separately (page 893).

Element Description
Assembly position Adds the prefix and position number
of the assembly.
Part position Adds the prefix and position number
of the part.
Profile Adds the profile name of part,
assembly, or cast unit main part.
Material Adds the material of part, assembly,
or cast unit main part.
Name Adds the name of part, assembly, or
cast unit main part.
Class Adds the class of part, assembly, or
cast unit main part.
Finish Adds the finish of part, assembly, or
cast unit main part.
Size Adds the size of the part or the
assembly or cast unit main part.
Length Adds the length of the part or
assembly, or of the cast unit main
part.
You can change the unit and format
of the length.
Camber Adds the camber of the part or the
assembly or cast unit main part (if this
user-defined part attribute is set).
Fittings (NS/FS) Displays the near side/far side marks
in the part mark. (only available in
front views).
Face direction Displays main compass direction
(North, East, South, West) of the face,
where the mark is added. The
direction can only be shown if
• the face is vertical
• the direction is the same for all
assemblies with the same
assembly position number

Drawing settings reference 895 Mark elements

 Element Description
In other cases, the element produces
no text to mark.
Furthermore, face direction is not
shown for columns in general
arrangement drawings, if you have
set Mark always to center of
column in GA drawings to Yes in File
menu --> Settings --> Options -->
Orientation marks .
Gage of outstanding leg Adds the hole gage.
You can control the format of this
option with the advance option
XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_ST
RING .
Center-to-center distance Adds center-to-center distance in the
mark.
You can control the format of this
option with the advanced options
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_
IN_ONE_PART_STRING and
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_
IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING .
Rotation angle Adds the rotation angle of a spiral
beam in the mark. For other parts this
element gives an empty value.

Bolt mark elements

You can define bolt mark options independently for site and shop bolts.

Below is a list of the elements specific to bolt marks. Some of the available
elements are not listed here, because they are common to many types of
marks, and listed separately (page 893).

Element Description
Bolt length Adds the length of the bolt.
You can change the unit and format
of the length.
Bolt diameter Adds the bolt diameter.
You can change the unit and format
of the diameter.

Drawing settings reference 896 Mark elements

 Element Description
Hole diameter Adds the hole diameter.
You can change the unit and format
of the diameter.
Material Adds the bolt material grade.
Standard Adds the bolt standard.
Short name Adds the bolt’s short name. This can
be the commercial name of a specific
bolt, for example.
Full name Adds the complete name of the bolt.
This name is visible in the dialog box
list.
Assembly type Adds the bolt assembly type.
Number of bolts Adds the quantity of bolts.
Slot length (x, y) Adds the slot length in the x or y
direction.
You can change the unit and format
of the length.
Slot length Adds the slot length.
You can change the unit and format
of the length.
Slot height Adds the slot height.
You can change the unit and format
of the height.
Size Adds the hole size.
You can change the unit and format
of the size.
Countersunk Adds countersink in the countersunk
bolt marks.
Gage of outstanding leg Adds hole gage.
You can control the format of this
element with the advanced option
XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_ST
RING .
Center-to-center distance Adds center-to-center distance.
You can control the format of this
element with the advanced options
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_
IN_ONE_PART_STRING and
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_
IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING .

Drawing settings reference 897 Mark elements

See also
Define size in bolt marks using advanced options (page 786)

Reinforcement and neighbor reinforcement mark elements

You can define mark contents separately for single reinforcing bars, bar
groups, and reinforcement meshes.

Below is a list of the elements you can include in all reinforcement and
neighbor reinforcements marks. Some of the available elements are not listed
here, because they are common to many types of marks, and listed separately
(page 893).

Element Description
Name Adds the name of the bar or mesh.
Grade Adds the material grade of the bar or
mesh.
Diameter Adds the nominal diameter of the
bar.
Class Adds the class of the bar or mesh.
Length Adds the total length of the bar.
You can change the unit and format
of the length.
Number Adds the quantity of the bars.
Position Adds the reinforcement position
number.
Shape Adds the shape of the bar or mesh.
Weight Adds the weight of the bar or mesh.
cc Adds the center-to-center spacing of
the bars. The options are:
• cc adds the spacing value if
spacing does not vary
• cc min adds the smallest spacing
value of the bar group if spacing
varies
• cc max adds the largest spacing
value of the bar group if spacing
varies
• cc exact lists all spacing values of
the bar group

Drawing settings reference 898 Mark elements

 Element Description
• cc target lists all reinforcing bar
target spacing values
You can change the unit and format
of the cc options.
Pull-out picture Adds a pull-out picture of a bar to the
mark.
For more information about pull-out
pictures, see Add pull-out pictures in
automatic reinforcement marks
(page 789)

See also
Add automatic marks (page 754)
Elements in merged reinforcement marks (page 900)

Reinforcement and neighbor reinforcement mesh mark

elements
You can define mark contents separately for reinforcement meshes.

The following elements are specific to the reinforcement and neighbor

reinforcement mesh marks, other elements are the same as for reinforcement
marks (page 898). Some of the available elements are not listed here, because
they are common to many types of marks, and listed separately (page 893).

Element Description
Size Adds the nominal diameters of the
mesh bars, dimensions of the mesh,
and the spacings of the bars in the
longitudinal and crossing directions.
Mesh length Adds the length of the reinforcement
mesh.
Mesh width Adds the width of the reinforcement
mesh.
cc You can define cc individually for the
longitudinal and crossing bars in the
mesh.
Adds the center-to-center spacing of
the bars. The options are:
• cc longitudinal/crossing adds the
spacing value if spacing does not
vary

Drawing settings reference 899 Mark elements

 Element Description
• cc min longitudinal/crossing
adds the smallest spacing value of
the bar group if spacing varies
• cc max longitudinal/crossing
adds the largest spacing value of
the bar group if spacing varies
• cc exact longitudinal/crossing
lists all spacing values of the bar
group
• cc target longitudinal/crossing
lists all reinforcing bar target
spacing values
Diameter longitudinal Adds the diameter or size of the
longitudinal bars.
Diameter cross Adds the diameter or size of the
crossing bars.

See also
Add automatic marks (page 754)

Elements in merged reinforcement marks

Some extra elements are available for merged reinforcement marks, in
addition to basic reinforcement marks.

Element Description
Block prefix Adds text or a value to the beginning
of each repeated block. Opens a
dialog box where you can enter the
prefix.
You can use the following variables as
block prefixes:
%NUMBER% includes the number of
marks merged to the mark.
%NUMBER_IN_PLANE% includes the
number of marks merged in the plane
of the drawing to the mark.
%NUMBER_OUT_OF_PLANE% includes
the number of marks merged in the
depth direction of the drawing to the
mark.

Drawing settings reference 900 Mark elements

 Element Description
Single mark content Adds the content of the single
reinforcement mark selected on the
Content tab to the mark.
Distance between groups Adds the center-to-center distances
between reinforcing bars or bar
groups included in a merged mark.
Symbol separating blocks in mark Adds a symbol between the blocks in
the merged mark. Opens a dialog box
where you can define the symbol.
The elements that appear before this
element on the mark content list
generate a block.

See also
Reinforcement and neighbor reinforcement mark elements (page 898)
Add automatic marks (page 754)
Merge reinforcement marks automatically (page 771)

Connection mark elements

In connection marks, you can show the connection code, name, number, and
running number, the group they belong to, potential errors, and the related
DSTV code.

Below is a list of elements specific to connection marks. Some of the available

elements are not listed here, because they are common to many types of
marks, and listed separately (page 893).

Element Description
Code Adds the connection code. This is a
user-defined code you give for the
connection in the connection dialog
box. The code can be either a text
string or a number.
Name Adds the connection name, for
example, Tube_splice.
DSTV code Adds the DSTV code.
Connection number Adds the number of the connection.
Running number Adds the connection running number.
All connections are automatically
numbered with a running number.
Group Adds the connection group.

Drawing settings reference 901 Mark elements

 Element Description
Connection error Adds the connection error. The
numbers correspond to the
connection symbol colors:
• 1 = green
• 2 = yellow
• 3 = red symbol

See also
Add automatic marks (page 754)

Pour object mark elements

Pour objects have some mark elements of their own, in addition to common
mark elements (Text, Symbol, User-defined attribute, Template).

Element Description
Material Adds the defined pour material.
Pour number Adds the identifier that groups the pour objects in
the same group, for example, to be poured at the
same time.
Pour type Adds a property of the pour based on the name of
a part.
Concrete mixture Adds the defined concrete mixture.

See also
Common elements in marks (page 893)

Surface treatment mark elements

In surface treatment marks, you can show the name, material, Tekla
Structures-specific name, and the code of the surface treatment.

Here is a list of elements specific to surface treatment marks. Some of the

available elements are not listed here, because they are common to many
types of marks, and listed separately (page 893).

Element Description
Name Adds the name defined in the Name
box in the Surface treatment
properties dialog box in a model.

Drawing settings reference 902 Mark elements

 Element Description
Material Adds the surface treatment material.
Class Adds the class of the surface
treatment.
Code Adds the code of the surface
treatment.
Surface treatment name Adds the name selected from the
Surface treatment name list in the
Surface treatment properties dialog
box in a model.

See also
Add automatic marks (page 754)

Section and detail mark elements

In section and detail marks, you can show the name of the section/detail, the
name of the current drawing, and the name of the source drawing.

Below is a list of elements specific to section and detail marks. Some of the
available elements are not listed here, because they are common to many
types of marks, and listed separately (page 893).

Element Description
Section name/Detail name Adds the name of the section or the
detail (A, B, C, and so on).
Drawing name Adds the name of the current
drawing.
Source drawing name Adds the name of the drawing where
the view is.
Source drawing name when moved Adds the name of the drawing where
the view is. This is shown only if the
view is not in the same drawing as the
section/detail mark.

See also
Modify section properties in drawings (page 164)
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks (page 884)

Drawing settings reference 903 Mark elements

 View, section view and detail view label mark elements
In view labels, you can show the name of the view, section or detail, the view
scale, drawing name, and source drawing name.

Below is a list of the elements specific to view, section view and detail view
label marks. Some of the available elements are not listed here, because they
are common to many types of marks, and listed separately (page 893).

Element Description
View name/Section name/Detail Adds the name of the view, section or
name the detail.
Scale Adds the scale of the view.
Drawing name Adds the name of the current
drawing.
Source drawing name Adds the name of the drawing where
the view has originally been created.
Source drawing name when moved Adds the name of the drawing where
the view has originally been created.
This is shown only when the view has
been moved from its original drawing.

See also
Define view labels and view label marks (page 616)
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks (page 884)

9.9 Part and neighbor part properties in drawings

Use the options in Part properties or Neighbor part properties to check and
change the part or neighbor part properties. In Neighbor part properties you
can also control the visibility and appearance of neighbor part bolts.
To go to part or neighbor part properties:
• On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties, select the
drawing type and go to Part/Neighbor part properties.
• In an open drawing, double-click the drawing view frame, select View
creation, select a view, click View properties and click Part/Neighbor
part. In GA drawings, just double-click the view frame and click Part/
Neighbor part.
• In an open drawing, double-click the drawing background, and go to Part/
Neighbor part properties.
• Double-click a part or neighbor part in an open drawing.
All part properties do not contain all of the settings listed below.

Drawing settings reference 904 Part and neighbor part properties in drawings
Content tab:

Option Description
Part representation Outline shows parts as solid objects.
Exact shows parts as solid objects.
This choice also draws the fillet edges
and chamfers in the profile cross
sections. For some profiles, Outline
shows them as well.
Symbol draws parts as lines.
Symbol with partial profile shows a
partial profile of the part. You can also
adjust the length of the partial profile
(Length), and the offset of the partial
profile from the middle point of the
part (Offset from middle point).
Workshop form draws round tube
profiles as wrap-around templates.
Bounding box draws parts as boxes
surrounding the actual profiles.
Base box shows parts as boxes and
uses the h and b values from the
profile catalog as box dimensions.
Symbol offset Defines the distance of the end points
of reference lines and center lines
from the end points of the object.
Inner contours Shows the inner contours of a tube.
Hidden lines If the Hidden lines check box is
selected, Tekla Structures shows
hidden lines in secondary and
neighbor parts.
If the Own hidden lines check box is
selected, Tekla Structures shows
hidden lines in main parts.
Center line Select whether you want to show
center lines.
Select the Main part > Beam, Plate
or Polygon check box to show center
lines in main parts.
Select the Secondary part > Beam,
Plate or Polygon check box to show
center lines in secondary parts.

Drawing settings reference 905 Part and neighbor part properties in drawings
 Option Description
Reference lines Select wether you want to show
reference lines.
Select the Main part > Beam, Plate
or Polygon check box to show
reference lines in main parts.
Select the Secondary part > Beam,
Plate or Polygon check box to show
reference lines in secondary parts.
Additional marks Select the following check boxes to
show additional marks in drawings:
• Orientation marks shows
orientation marks (page 801).
• Connecting side marks shows
connecting side marks (page 803).
• Pop-marks shows pop-marks
defined in NC settings.
• Edge chamfers shows edge
chamfers (page 326).
• Fillet edges shows fillet edges
(page 332).
Bolt representation (neighbor parts) Select bolt representation. The
options are Solid, Exact Solid,
Symbol, Symbol 2 , Symbol 3, DIN
symbol, and User-defined symbol.
DIN symbol corresponds to German
standards (DIN). The only DIN
symbols you can control are:
• Symbol 24 for normal workshop
bolts
• Symbol 25 for normal site bolts
• Symbol 26 for front countersunk
site bolts
• Symbol 27 for back countersunk
site bolts
• Symbol 28 for front countersunk
workshop bolts
• Symbol 29 for back countersunk
workshop bolts
• Symbol 30 for front countersunk
holes

Drawing settings reference 906 Part and neighbor part properties in drawings
 Option Description
• Symbol 31 for back countersunk
holes
User-defined symbol is a symbol
that has been created in Symbol
Editor.
Symbol content (neighbor parts) Select whether to include hole or axis
in the symbol.

Neighbor parts have a Visibility tab:

Option Description
Neighbor parts None does not show neighbor parts.
Connected parts shows all parts
connected to the model object.
Connecting parts shows only the
parts the model object is connected
to.
All components combines the
Connected parts and the
Connecting parts options.
By extreme shows all parts within the
boundaries of the main and
secondary part.
Main/Secondary parts Main parts shows only neighbor
parts that make the main part of an
assembly or a cast unit.
Secondary parts shows only
neighbor parts that are secondary
parts of an assembly or a cast unit.
Both shows both main and secondary
parts.
Skew parts Yes shows skew parts as neighbor
parts in the drawing, No does not.
Bolts Yes shows the bolts in the neighbor
parts, No does not.

The Appearance tab is similar in all of the properties of all kinds of building
objects (parts, neighbor parts, bolts, welds, surface treatments, reinforcement,
and meshes).

Option Description
Visible lines Sets the Color and Type of the visible
lines.

Drawing settings reference 907 Part and neighbor part properties in drawings
 Option Description
Hidden lines, Center line Sets the Color and Type of the
hidden lines.
Sets the Color of the center lines.
Reference lines Sets the Color and Type of the
reference lines.
Text: Color Sets the Color of the text.
Text: Height Sets the Height of the text.
Text: Font Sets the Font of the text. Click Select
to show more options.
Line: Type Sets the Type of the line.
Line: Color Sets the Color of the line.
Bolts: Color Sets the color of the bolts in neighbor
parts.

Both parts and neighbor parts have a Fill tab. To add a fill for outer part faces,
use the Part faces area, and to add a fill to cross sections in section views, use
the Sections area.

Setting Description
Type Defines the fill type. Clicking the
button next to the list opens a
preview of the hatch patterns
(page 809).
Automatic selects the fill type
automatically from the hatch pattern
schema files.
None uses no fill.
Color Defines the color for the fill.
You can select a predefined color or
use Special color that is not
converted to black in printouts.
Background Defines the background color for the
fill.
Background color selection is
disabled for hardware hatches.
Background color can be set for
automatic hatches, but it has effect
only if automatic hatch is not defined
for the material in the hatch pattern
schema file.

Drawing settings reference 908 Part and neighbor part properties in drawings
 Setting Description
Scale Automatic scales and rotates the fill
automatically.
Custom allows you to select scaling
and rotation manually.
Scaling in direction x and Scaling in
direction y define the scales in x and
y direction.
Keep ratio of x and y retains the
relative proportions in the hatch
pattern.
Angle rotates the fill. Angle 0.0 is for
horizontal and 90.0 for vertical.

See also
Define automatic drawing part properties (page 794)
Define automatic neighbor part properties (page 797)

9.10 Bolt content and appearance properties in drawings

Use the options in bolt properties to check or change the bolt content and
appearance.

To go to bolt properties:
• On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties, select the
drawing type and go to Bolt properties.
• In an open drawing, double-click the drawing background, and go to Bolt
properties.
• Double-click a bolt in an open drawing.
All bolt properties dialog boxes do not contain all of the settings listed below.

Option Description
Solid/symbol The options are Solid, Exact Solid,
Symbol, Symbol 2, Symbol 3, DIN
symbol, and User-defined symbol.
DIN symbol corresponds to German
standards (DIN). The only DIN
symbols you can control are:
• Symbol 24 for normal workshop
bolts

Drawing settings reference 909 Bolt content and appearance properties in

drawings
 Option Description
• Symbol 25 for normal site bolts
• Symbol 26 for front countersunk
site bolts
• Symbol 27 for back countersunk
site bolts
• Symbol 28 for front countersunk
workshop bolts
• Symbol 29 for back countersunk
workshop bolts
• Symbol 30 for front countersunk
holes
• Symbol 31 for back countersunk
holes
User-defined symbol is a symbol
that has been created in Symbol
Editor.
Symbol content Indicates whether to include the Hole
and Axis symbols in the drawing.
Visibility Control the visibility of bolts in main
parts, secondary parts and sub-
assemblies separately. Visible shows
bolt group holes in main parts or
secondary parts. Not visible hides
them. In assembly drawings you can
also define whether to show or hide
bolt group holes in sub-assemblies.
Color Change the bolt color.

See also
Define drawing bolts (page 804)
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)
Define automatic bolt properties in drawings (page 805)

9.11 Surface treatment visibility and content properties in

drawings
Use the options in surface treatment properties to check or change the
surface treatments drawing properties.

Drawing settings reference 910 Surface treatment visibility and content

properties in drawings
 Option Description
Visibility Visible shows the surface treatment.
Not visible does not show the
surface treatment.
Representation Defines the appearance of the surface
treatment. The available options are
Outline, Exact, Workshop form,
Symbol, Bounding box, and Base
box.
Show pattern Defines whether the hatch pattern is
shown.
Hidden lines Defines whether hidden lines in
secondary and neighboring parts are
shown.
Own hidden lines Defines whether hidden lines in main
parts are shown.

See also
Define drawing surface treatment (page 815)

9.12 Surface treatment hatch pattern properties

(surfacing.htc)
You can change the properties of the hatch patterns for each surface
treatment type separately.

The properties of the hatch patterns are defined in the surfacing.htc file,
located by default in ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments
\common\system . In addition to this file, the surface treatment code file
product_finishes.dat is needed. It is located in the same folder.
If you create your own surface treatment hatch patterns in your company, you
can store surfacing.htc and product_finishes.dat in the firm folder
defined by the advanced option XS_FIRM.
Note:

NOTE When you edit a schema file, you must reopen the model to apply the
changes.

The syntax of surfacing.htc file is:

Surfacing Type, Surfacing Code, Hatch name, Scale, [Color],
[Automatic Scaling and Rotation]
Example:

Drawing settings reference 911 Surface treatment hatch pattern properties

(surfacing.htc)
1,MF,ANSI31,0.7
1,SMF,ANSI32,0.7
1,WT,ANSI33,0.7
1,HT,ANSI34,0.7
1,LSB,AR-SAND,0.7
2,SM1,CROSS,1.0
2,SM2,CHECKERED,1.0
3,TS3,FBBRICKC,1.0
4,FP,ANSI31,1.0
4,UP,ANSI32,1.0

Option Description
Surface treatment type • 1 = concrete finish
• 2 = special mix
• 3 = tile surface
• 4 = steel finish
Surface treatment code This is the abbreviation used in
drawings and reports, for example,
MF for Magnesium Float. The
product_finishes.dat file
contains a full list of surface
treatment codes.
Hatch name You can check the hatch pattern
names and related hatch patterns by
going to the Fill tab in Part
properties, selecting a hatch pattern
from the Type list and clicking the ...
button next to the list. The selected
hatch pattern is marked with a red
frame.
Scale Scale is a numeric value that Tekla
Structures uses to scale hatches.
Color (optional) 0=black (default)
1=white
2=red
3=green
4=blue
5=cyan
6=yellow
7=magenta

Drawing settings reference 912 Surface treatment hatch pattern properties

(surfacing.htc)
 Option Description
120= Special (use this color for gray
shade)
The hatch color defines the line width
for the printer. If you do not define a
color for a hatch in the
surfacing.htc file, Tekla Structures
uses the color defined on the
Appearance tab in surface treatment
properties. The Visible lines color
and type is used for the front of the
surface treatment, and the Hidden
lines for the back.
Automatic Scaling and 1=true
Rotation (optional)
0=false (default)

See also
Define automatic surface treatment in drawings (page 816)

9.13 Reinforcement/Neighbor reinforcement and mesh

properties in drawings
Use the options in the Reinforcement or Neighbor Reinforcement
properties to check and modify the reinforcement and mesh visibility,
appearance and content.

Option Description
Visibility of all reinforcing bars Visible shows the bars or meshes.
Visibility of all meshes Not visible does not show the bars or
meshes
Representation single line draws a single line with
radiused bends.
single line with filled ends draws a
single line for parallel bars and filled
ends for perpendicular bars.
double lines draws an outline of the
bar with radiused bends.
double lines with filled ends draws
an outline of the bar with radiused
bends and filled bar ends.

Drawing settings reference 913 Reinforcement/Neighbor reinforcement and

mesh properties in drawings
 Option Description
filled line draws a solid bar with
radiused bends.
stick draws a single line without
radiused bends.
outline shows the shape of the mesh
using an outline rectangle or polygon,
and a diagonal line. Applies only to
reinforcement meshes.
Visibility of reinforcing bars in all shows all bars in a group or mesh.
group
first bar shows only the first bar in
Visibility of longitudinal wires the group or mesh.
Visibility of crossing bars last bar shows only the last bar in the
group or mesh.
first and last bar shows the first and
last bar in the group or mesh.
bar in the middle of group shows
one bar in the middle of the group or
mesh.
two bars in the middle of group
shows two bars in the middle of the
group or mesh.
customized indicates that you have
specified the location of the only
visible reinforcing bar. Applies only to
bar groups and meshes.
Hide lines behind parts Hides the lines behind the part. This is
useful, for example, with lifting
anchors where the reinforcing bar is
partly outside the part.
Hide lines behind other rebars Hides the lines behind other
reinforcement bar lines.
Symbol at straight end

Reinforcing bar end symbols are

always drawn in solid line type,
regardless of the selected
reinforcement line type.
Applies only to reinforcing bars.

Drawing settings reference 914 Reinforcement/Neighbor reinforcement and

mesh properties in drawings
 Option Description
Symbol at hooked end

Applies only to reinforcing bars.

Reinforcing bar end symbols are
always drawn in solid line type,
regardless of the selected
reinforcement line type.
Mesh symbol Defines the mesh symbol to be used.
The mesh symbol appears in the
middle of the diagonal line.
Symbol 1

Symbol 2

Symbol 3

Mesh symbol size Defines the size of the mesh symbol.

Visible lines Defines the color and type of the
visible lines.
Reinforcing bar end symbols are
always drawn in solid line type,
regardless of the selected
reinforcement line type.
Hidden lines Defines the color and type of the
hidden lines.

Additional ways of modifying reinforcement

In addition to the settings in Reinforcement properties, you can modify the
reinforcement in any of the following ways:
• Increase the size of the bend and end symbols (in drawing units) using the
advanced options XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE and
XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE in File menu --> Settings -->
Advanced options --> Concrete Detailing .

Drawing settings reference 915 Reinforcement/Neighbor reinforcement and

mesh properties in drawings
 • Use the advanced option XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS in File menu
--> Settings --> Advanced options --> Concrete Detailing to change the
end symbols to a different direction.
• Modify the reinforcing bar bending schedule, rounding of bar dimensions,
symbols for meshes, strands, and unbonding, and appearance of
reinforcement pull-outs in the rebar_config.inp (page 916) file.

See also
Define drawing reinforcement and meshes (page 820)
Part and neighbor part properties in drawings (page 904)

9.14 Reinforcement settings for drawings

(rebar_config.inp)
Tekla Structures uses the settings in the rebar_config.inp file in the ..
\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments
\<environment>\system folder to define the following reinforcement-
related issues in drawings:
• Selected area-specific reinforcing bar bending schedule
• Rounding of bar dimensions
• Available symbols for meshes, strands, and unbonding
• Appearance of reinforcement pull-outs
The entries in the rebar_config.inp are listed and described below:

Entry Description
MergeOneFormat No longer used. Define these properties in the
MergeTwoOrMoreFormats drawing properties.
MergeAndFormat
LeaderLinetype
DimensionMarkSpacingSep ="/"
arator
Affects the separator in reinforcement marks.
ExactDimensionMarkSpaci =" + "
ngSeparator
Separator between different exact spacing
values in reinforcement marks.
ExactDimensionMarkPcsSe ="*"
parator
Separator between the number of bars and
their exact spacing value in reinforcement
mark.

Drawing settings reference 916 Reinforcement settings for drawings

(rebar_config.inp)
 Entry Description
BendingAngleTolerance Set a tolerance value for the angle. Angles that
differ from the set tolerance value less than
the tolerance are recognized and lead to a
correct bending shape.
Enter the tolerance value as a radians, not as a
degree. The default value is 0.001 radians,
which is 0.0573 in degrees. This applies to all
bending shapes.
BentRebarTolerance Set a tolerance value. Depending on the value,
slightly curved reinforcing bars get straight
shape.
If reinforcing bar diameter is 20 mm and
radius is 200 m then value 20/200000 =
0.0001.
This variable defines correct curved
reinforcing bar in case of long reinforcing bars
to get a correct shape for the bar. This option
is used in comparing the relation of the
reinforcing bar diameter and radius. If the
relation is smaller than
BentRebarTolerance, the reinforcing bar is
of bend_type_1, otherwise it is of
bend_type_34.
PullOutBendingRadiusAsM Set to 1 to show the pullout bending radii
ultiplier using multiplier instead of mm.

GroupBarMark No longer in use.

MarkingDimAttributes No longer in use.
ScheduleCountry Defines which bending schedule is used.
Affects bending shapes in templates and

Drawing settings reference 917 Reinforcement settings for drawings

(rebar_config.inp)
 Entry Description
reports. The available schedules are FIN, SWE,
UK, US.
When you number the model, the bending
shape for the bar is given according to this
information. For example, in the Default
environment, the bending shapes are letters
A, B, C, and so on.
ScheduleDimensionRoundi Options:
ngDirection
• "UP": rounds bar dimensions up
ScheduleTotalLengthRoun
• "DOWN": rounds bar dimensions down
dingDirection
• "NEAREST": rounds bar dimensions either
up or down
ScheduleDimensionRoundi Sets the rounding accuracy for bar
ngAccuracy dimensions. Default is 1 mm.
Tekla Structures rounds individual bar
dimensions up or down according to the
option you select for
ScheduleDimensionRoundingDirection.
ScheduleTotalLengthRoun Sets the rounding accuracy for the total bar
dingAccuracy length. Default is 10 mm.
Tekla Structures rounds individual bar
dimensions up or down according to the
option you select for
ScheduleTotalLengthRoundingDirection
.
BentSymbolFile Points to the symbol file that contains the
available reinforcing bar bent symbols. By
default, points to the file bent.sym, which in
the default environment is located in the
folder ..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures
\<version>\\environments\common
\symbols.
MeshSymbolFile Points to the mesh symbol file that contains
the available mesh symbols. Affects the
available reinforcement mesh symbols in
drawings.
By default, points to the mesh.sym file in
the ...\Tekla Structures\<version>\
\environments\common\symbols folder.

Drawing settings reference 918 Reinforcement settings for drawings

(rebar_config.inp)
 Entry Description
StrandSymbolFile Points to the strand symbol file that contains
the available strand symbols. Affects
drawings.
By default, points to the strand.sym file in
the ...\Tekla Structures\<version>
\environments\common\symbols folder.
UnbondingSymbolFile Points to the unbonding symbol file that
contains the available unbonding symbols.
RebarMeshSize Template for rebar mesh size.
PullOutDimensionFormat Defines the format for displaying the
dimensions.
The format follows the dimension properties
format.
Options:
• 0 = ###
• 1 = ###[.#]
• 2 = ###.#
• 3 = ###[.##]
• 4 = ###.##
• 5 = ###[.###]
• 6 = ###.###
• 7 = ### #/#
• 8 = ###/##.###
PullOutDimensionPrecisi Sets the level of precision. The precision is
on calculated using the following formula: 1/value
= precision.
In metric systems, you may want to use the
values 1, 10, and 100, and in imperial systems,
the values 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32, for example.
PullOutDimensionUnit Defines the units to use.
Options:
• 0 = auto
• 1 = mm
• 2 = cm
• 3=m
• 4 = inch

Drawing settings reference 919 Reinforcement settings for drawings

(rebar_config.inp)
 Entry Description
• 5 = foot and inch
PullOutColor Sets the color for the pull-outs in
reinforcement marks.
Options:
• 1 = black
• 2 = red
• 3 = bright green
• 4 = blue
• 5 = cyan
• 6 = yellow
• 7 = magenta
PullOutVisibleLineType Sets the line type for reinforcing bar shape in
pull-outs.
Options:

1=

2=

3=

4=

5=

6=

7=
PullOutRepresentation Sets the representation type.
Options:
• 0 = single
• 1 = double
• 2 = filled
• 3 = stick
PullOutAngleColor Sets the color for the angle in pull-outs.
Options:
• 1 = black
• 2 = red

Drawing settings reference 920 Reinforcement settings for drawings

(rebar_config.inp)
 Entry Description
• 3 = green
• 4 = blue
• 5 = cyan
• 6 = yellow
• 7 = magenta
• 8 = brown
• 9 = green
• 10 = dark blue
• 11 = forest green
• 12 = orange
• 13 = gray

PullOutAngleLineType Sets the line type for angle lines in pull-outs.

Options:
• 1=
•
2=
•
3=
•
4=
•
5=
•
6=
•
7=
PullOutLeaderLineMinLen Sets a minimum length for the small leader
gth lines that point to the dimension text. The
default value is 10 mm. To switch leader lines
off completely, use a large value.
PullOutShowDuplicateDim Defines whether duplicate dimensions are
s showed multiple times for one bar.
Options:

Drawing settings reference 921 Reinforcement settings for drawings

(rebar_config.inp)
 Entry Description
• 0 = duplicate dimensions are not shown
(default)
• 1 = equal and parallel dimensions are
shown, but similar hook dimensions are
not shown
• 2 = equal and parallel dimensions are not
shown, but both hook dimensions are
shown
• 3 = all dimensions are shown
• 4 = hook dimensions are not shown
• 5 = hook dimensions, or equal and parallel
dimensions are not shown
PullOutShowUSHookDims Defines if the US/NA style of dimension will be
shown for hooks over 90 degrees.
Options:
• 0 = shows European hook dimension (= leg
length, default)
• 1 = shows US hook dimension (= straight
length) for hooks >90 degrees
See the image below for the difference
between the US/NA (A) and European (B) hook
dimension.

See also
Hard-coded bending type identifiers in reinforcement shape recognition
Add pull-out pictures in automatic reinforcement marks (page 789)
Define automatic reinforcement and reinforcement mesh properties
(page 821)
Reinforcement/Neighbor reinforcement and mesh properties in drawings
(page 913)

Drawing settings reference 922 Pour object and pour break properties in
drawings
9.15 Pour object and pour break properties in drawings
Use the options in Pour Object Properties and Pour Break Properties in
general arrangement drawings to control the visibility of the pour objects and
pour breaks in drawings.

Pour object properties

To open Pour Object Properties:
• On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> GA drawing
and then click Pour object.
• In an open drawing, double-click the drawing background and click Pour
object.
• In an open drawing, double-click a pour object.

Option Description
Content tab - Hidden lines
Hidden lines on/off Click on to display pour object hidden
lines.
Own hidden lines on/off Click on to display own hidden lines.
Content tab - Addional marks
Edge chamfers on/off Select on to display edge chamfers
(page 326).
Fillet edges on/off Select on to display fillet edges
(page 332).
Appearance tab - Visible lines
Color Select the color of the visible pour
object lines.
Type Select the type of the visible pour
object lines.
Appearance tab - Hidden lines
Color Select the color of the hidden pour
object lines.
Type Select the type of the hidden pour
object lines.
Fill tab
To add a fill for outer pour faces, use the Pour faces area, and to add a fill for
cross sections in section views, use the Sections area.

Drawing settings reference 923 Pour object and pour break properties in
drawings
 Option Description
Type Defines the fill type. Clicking the
button next to the list opens a
preview of the hatch patterns.
Automatic selects the fill type
automatically from the hatch pattern
schema files.
None uses no fill.
Color Defines the color for the fill.
You can select a predefined color or
use Special color that is not
converted to black in printouts.
Background Defines the background color for the
fill.
Background color selection is
disabled for hardware hatches.
Background color can be set for
automatic hatches, but it has effect
only if automatic hatch is not defined
for the material in the hatch pattern
schema file.
Scale Automatic scales and rotates the fill
automatically.
Custom allows you to select scaling
and rotation manually.
Scaling in direction x and Scaling in
direction y define the scales in x and
y direction.
Keep ratio of x and y retains the
relative proportions in the hatch
pattern.
Angle rotates the fill. For example,
Angle 0.0 is for horizontal and Angle
90.0 for vertical.

Pour break properties

To open Pour Break Properties:
• On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties --> GA drawing
and then click Pour break.
• In an open drawing, double-click the drawing background and click Pour
break.
• In an open drawing, double-click a pour break.

Drawing settings reference 924 Pour object and pour break properties in
drawings
 Option Description
Content tab - Hidden lines
Visibility Defines if the pour breaks are visible
(Visible) or not (Not visible).
Hidden lines on/off Click on to display pour break hidden
lines.
Appearance tab - Visible lines
Color Select the color of the visible pour
break lines.
Type Select the type of the visible pour
break lines.
Appearance tab - Hidden lines
Color Select the color of the hidden pour
break lines.
Type Select the type of the hidden pour
break lines.

See also
Pours in drawings (page 464)
Show pour objects, pour marks and pour breaks in drawings (page 819)

9.16 Placement properties for marks, dimensions, notes,

texts and symbols
Use the settings in the Placing dialog boxes for dimensions, marks, notes,
texts annotation objects and dimensions to control how the annotation
objects are placed in a drawing.

You can set automatic placement properties for dimensions and marks before
you create a drawing. In an open drawing, you can modify the placement
properties of marks, notes, texts, symbols and dimensions.
To open the Placing properties in an open drawing:
• In an open drawing, on the Drawing tab, click Properties and then click
Text, Note, Symbol, Dimension or one of the mark types. After that, click
the Place... button.
• In an open drawing, double-click a text, mark, symbol, note or dimension.
After that, click the Place... button.

Drawing settings reference 925 Placement properties for marks, dimensions,

notes, texts and symbols
 Option Description
Search margin Defines the empty margin that you
want to have around the the
annotation objects.
Note that if you use a high Search
margin value, the mark placement
does not work properly.
Minimum distance Defines the minimum distance of the
mark, weld mark, dimension or
another annotation object from the
part.
Note that if you use a high Minimum
distance value, the mark placement
does not work properly.
Maximum distance Defines the maximum distance of the
mark, dimension or another
annotation object from the part.
Quarter For marks and manually added
annotation objects.
Defines the areas Tekla Structures
searches for a space to place the
annotation object.
Weld placement depends on the
welding direction. Welds can only be
placed in certain sectors, so the
Quarter options are not available.
However, this option is available for
manually added welds in the final
drawing.
Placing free allows Tekla Structures to search
for the first suitable location for the
mark, dimension, weld or another
annotation object. fixed allows you to
place the mark, dimension, weld or
another annotation object in any
location.
When you use the option fixed, the
annotation object stays where it is
even though you update the drawing,
whereas with free, Tekla Structures
tries to find the optimal place for the
annotation object.

Drawing settings reference 926 Placement properties for marks, dimensions,

notes, texts and symbols
 Option Description
Direction Available only for manual dimensions.
Defines the side of the dimensioned
object where Tekla Structures places
dimensions. This setting affects the
free setting.

The following image illustrates the search margin, minimum distance and
maximum distance of a mark:

(1) Search margin

(2) Minimum distance
(3) Maximum distance

See also
Define object protection and placement settings in drawings (page 603)

9.17 Model weld properties in drawings

You can select which model welds are visible in drawings and drawing views,
and set the weld color and line type.

• To set the automatic welding properties in single-part and assembly

drawings: On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and
select the drawing type. Click View creation, select the view and the
properties that you want to change, and click View properties. Now click
Weld in the options tree and adjust the settings as required.
• To set the automatic welding properties in general arrangement drawing:
On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type. Click Weld and adjust the settings as required.
• To modify the welding properties on drawing level in a general
arrangement drawing: Double-click the drawing background and click
Weld.
• To modify the welding properties on view level: Double-click the drawing
view frame and click Weld in the View Properties dialog box.

Drawing settings reference 927 Model weld properties in drawings

 Option Description
Content: Visibility
Welds Not visible does not display any welds in the
selected view/drawing.
Welds in sub-
assemblies Site weld visible displays only site welds in the
view/drawing.
Workshop weld visible displays only workshop
welds in the view/drawing
Both visible displays both site welds and
workshop welds in the view/drawing.
Weld size limit Enter a weld size limit to filter welds of that size
and bigger out of the drawing. This is useful when
you only want to show non-typical welds in a
drawing.
To set whether the weld size is an exact or
minimum value, use the advanced option
XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE.
To filter out a standard weld type, use the
advanced option XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE.
Content: Representation
Representation Select Path or Outline.
You can also select, whether to show Hidden lines
or Own hidden lines.
Weld solids are shown in drawings in the following
cases:
• Weld solids are shown in drawings for those
weld types that have real solid support. Welds
that have no real solid support are shown in the
model with a hexagonal placeholder, and in
drawings weld solids are not shown.
• Welds that have custom cross-sections are also
supported.
Appearance: Visible lines
Color Sets the color of the weld lines.
Type Sets the type of the weld lines.
Appearance: Hidden lines
Color Sets the color of the hidden lines.
Type Sets the type of the hidden lines.

Drawing settings reference 928 Model weld properties in drawings

 See also
Welds in drawings (page 346)
Model weld mark visibility and appearance properties in drawings (page 888)

9.18 Drawing sketch object properties

You can draw different kinds of sketch objects (graphical objects) in your
drawings (lines, rectangles, polylines, polygons, arcs, circles) and use the
sketch objects for highlighting particular spots of interest, for example. Use the
properties dialog boxes of different sketch objects to check and change the
appearance of the shapes.

To open the properties dialog box of a sketch object, go to the Drawings tab,
hold down Shift and click the sketch object command. When you have added
a sketch object in a drawing, you can open its properties by double-clicking the
object.
The settings you have in the dialog box vary depending on the sketch object
type.

Setting Description
Behind model objects When set to Yes, places the graphical
object behind model objects.
Line: Type Defines the line type of the object.
Line: Color Defines the color of the object lines.
Line: Bulge or Bulge for all lines. Values 0 - 1.The bulge factor defines
the curvature of the curved segments
of objects using the calculation:
Arc height = Line length * Bulge factor
Changing the bulge factor of a
polyline or polygon modifies all the
segments of that object.
Line: Radius Defines the radius of arcs and circles.
Arrow: Position

Drawing settings reference 929 Drawing sketch object properties

 Setting Description
Arrow: Type

Arrow: Height

Arrow: Length

Fill: Type Defines the fill type to be used in the

object. Clicking Select to shows the
available hatch types.
Fill: Color Defines the color of the fill.
Fill: Background Defines the background color of the
fill.
Scaling in direction x Defines the fill scales in the x and y
direction.
Scaling in direction y
Keep ratio of x and y
Angle Rotates the fill. Angle 0.0 is for
horizontal and 90.0 for vertical.
Offset Moves the fill pattern inside the
object to in the x and y direction by
the specified value.

See also
Define hatches in drawings (page 807)
Draw sketch objects in drawings (page 301)

9.19 Drawing grid properties

Use the Grid properties to view and modify the grid settings in drawings.

• To set the automatic grid properties in single-part and assembly drawings:

On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing properties and select the
drawing type. Click View creation, select the view and the properties that

Drawing settings reference 930 Drawing grid properties

 you want to change, and click View properties. Now click Grid in the
options tree and adjust the settings as required.
• To set the automatic grid properties on drawing level in general
arrangement drawing: On the Drawings & reports tab, click Drawing
properties and select the drawing type. Click Grid, and adjust the settings
as required.
• To modify the grid properties on drawing level in a general arrangement
drawing: Double-click the drawing background, click Grid and adjust the
settings as required.
• To modify the grid properties on view level: Double-click the drawing view
frame and click Grid in the View Properties dialog box, and adjust the
settings as required.

Option Description
Grids Visible shows the grids.
Not visible does not show the grids.
Visible in all views shows the grids in
all drawing views. This option is not
available for general arrangement
drawings.
Only grid labels visible shows only
the grid label and a short section of
the grid line. The length of the
displayed grid line depends on the
value entered in the Text placing box.
In the drawing level, this option is
only available for general
arrangement drawings. On the view
and object level this option is
available for all types of drawings.
Text placing Sets the side to show the grid labels
and the length of the grid line
extension (the distance between the
end of the grid line and the text).
Text: Color, Height, Font and Frame Defines the grid label text color,
height, font and frame.

Other ways to adjust grids

Additionally, for example XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH,
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR and
XS_GRID_TEXT_FONT allow you to adjust the grid labels further.

See also
Define drawing grids (page 791)

Drawing settings reference 931 Drawing grid properties

Define automatic grid properties (page 792)

Drawing settings reference 932 Drawing grid properties

10 Disclaimer
© 2018 Trimble Solutions Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.
This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced
Software. Use of the Software, and use of this Software Manual are governed
by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets
certain warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other
warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted uses of the
Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software.
All information set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth
in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License Agreement for important
obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Trimble
does not guarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or
typographical errors. Trimble reserves the right to make changes and
additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by
international treaties. Unauthorized reproduction, display, modification, or
distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and
criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Tekla BIMsight, BIMsight, Tekla Civil, Tedds, Solve,
Fastrak and Orion are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Trimble
Solutions Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other
countries. More about Trimble Solutions trademarks: http://www.tekla.com/
tekla-trademarks. Trimble is a registered trademark or trademark of Trimble
Inc. in the European Union, in the United States and/or other countries. More
about Trimble trademarks: http://www.trimble.com/trademarks.aspx. Other
product and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be
trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-party product or
brand, Trimble does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement
by such third party and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except
where otherwise expressly stated.
Portions of this software:
D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2010 Siemens Industry Software Limited. All rights
reserved.

Disclaimer 933 Drawing grid properties

EPM toolkit © 1995-2006 Jotne EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights
reserved.
Open Cascade Express Mesh © 2015 OPEN CASCADE S.A.S. All rights reserved.
PolyBoolean C++ Library © 2001-2012 Complex A5 Co. Ltd. All rights reserved.
FLY SDK - CAD SDK © 2012 VisualIntegrity™. All rights reserved.
Teigha © 2002-2016 Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved.
CADhatch.com © 2017. All rights reserved.
FlexNet Publisher © 2014 Flexera Software LLC. All rights reserved.
This product contains proprietary and confidential technology, information
and creative works owned by Flexera Software LLC and its licensors, if any. Any
use, copying, publication, distribution, display, modification, or transmission of
such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the
prior express written permission of Flexera Software LLC is strictly prohibited.
Except where expressly provided by Flexera Software LLC in writing,
possession of this technology shall not be construed to confer any license or
rights under any Flexera Software LLC intellectual property rights, whether by
estoppel, implication, or otherwise.
To see the third party open source software licenses, go to Tekla Structures,
click File menu --> Help --> About Tekla Structures and then click the 3rd
party licenses option.
The elements of the software described in this Manual are protected by
several patents and possibly pending patent applications in the United States
and/or other countries. For more information go to page http://
www.tekla.com/tekla-patents.

Disclaimer 934 Drawing grid properties

Index

2 printing (old).......................................... 540

absolute dimensions.................................. 851
2D....................................................................17 appearance............................................ 726
2D Library orientation............................................. 726
adding details........................................ 335 zero at start point..................................726
details..................................................... 335 adding
distributing.............................................335 associative notes................................... 255
DWG files................................................335 bolt marks.............................................. 251
exploding................................................335 closing dimensions............................... 236
folders.................................................... 335 connection marks................................. 251
images.................................................... 335 dimension points.................................. 237
inserting details in a drawing...............335 dimension points in a nchor bolt plans....
limitations.............................................. 335 233
modifying details...................................335 dimension tags...................................... 176
opening.................................................. 335 dual dimensions....................................180
storing.................................................... 335 fold marks.......................................532,552
frames............................................. 532,552
hyperlinks...............................................277
3 level marks............................................. 253
links to DWG/DXF files.......................... 280
3D....................................................................17 links to images.......................................281
drawing views.................................145,844 links to other drawings.........................278
isometric drawings..................................50 links to text files.................................... 274
rotation of views....................................844 manual dimensions.............................. 168
3D part marks..............................................251
drawing views........................................ 152 reinforcement marks............................ 251
3D views......................................................... 50 revision marks....................................... 279
single-part views in assembly drawings
.................................................................155
A surface treatment marks..................... 251
A1.................................................................. 568 symbols.................................................. 487
A2...........................................................557,568 symbols in marks.................................. 785
A3................................................... 557,568,578 texts........................................................ 271
printing (old).......................................... 541 weld marks.............................................361
A4................................................... 557,568,578 AddSurfaceSymbols....................................493
aligning dimension texts............................ 735
aligning
drawing objects..................................... 288
drawing views.................................162,647
alternative scales........................................ 600
anchor bolt plans..............................45,51,844

935
 creating.....................................................83 stairs......................................................... 59
dimensions............................................ 748 viewing direction of columns...............627
included objects...................................... 85 assembly position ...................................... 894
including assemblies...............................86 assembly type............................................. 896
including objects..................................... 84 associative annotation objects..................243
anchor bolts...................................................53 associative notes................................... 255
angle............................................................. 929 level marks............................................. 253
angle dimensions.......................................... 83 modifying............................................... 257
angle dimensions .......................................851 part marks..............................................251
annotation objects .....................................123 updating................................................. 261
annotation objects........ 143,243,282,603,607 associative notes...........................................21
associative................................................21 adding.....................................................255
independent............................................ 21 in edge chamfers...................................329
modifying............................................... 257 leader lines.............................................270
appearance.................................................. 904 placing.................................................... 925
of bolts....................................................805 associativity.............................................. 17,18
of frames................................................ 760 refreshing............................................... 124
of leader lines........................................ 760 associativity symbol
of mark text........................................... 760 ghost associativity symbol..................... 18
of marks................................................. 878 AutoDrawings................................................ 69
of model weld marks in drawings.......888 automatic
of neighbor parts.................................. 797 dimensions..................................... 649,722
of parts................................................... 794 marks.............................................. 752,754
of reference models..............................501 autoscale......................................................600
of surface treatment.............................816 autoscaling........................................... 598,601
arcs........................................................ 301,929 autosizing............................................. 598,601
dividing................................................... 316
arranging
drawing objects..................................... 287
drawing views........................................ 163
B
arrows...........................................................264 back drawing views............................. 152,844
customizing.................................... 231,487 back views....................................................613
in dimension lines................................. 231 background mask....................................... 891
in leader lines........................................ 487 bar class....................................................... 898
in sketch objects....................................929 bar diameter................................................898
leader lines.............................................270 bar length.....................................................898
assemblies bar marks.....................................................900
including in anchor bolt plans............... 86 bar name......................................................898
assembly drawings....................................... 57 bar quantity................................................. 898
viewing direction of beams and bracings bar shape..................................................... 898
.................................................................627 bar weight.................................................... 898
creating..................................... 67,86,90,93 base points........................................... 270,762
dimensioning......................................... 868 beams
example.................................................... 58 in cast unit drawings............................... 62
freezing...................................................512 viewing direction in assembly drawings
including single-part drawings............ 620 .................................................................627
rails............................................................60 bent plates
single-part views....................................155 unfolding................................................ 637
block prefix.................................................. 900

936
bolt diameter ..............................................896 center-to-center distance............707,894,896
bolt length....................................................896 chamfer marks
bolt marks....................................................754 adding.....................................................329
elements......................................... 786,896 chamfers
modifying............................................... 257 in drawings........319,326,327,328,329,330
bolt plans....................................................... 83 change clouds, see change symbols........ 265
bolt standard............................................... 896 change coulds, see change symbols........ 265
bolts change symbols.......................................... 264
appearance............................................ 805 hiding......................................................265
bolt symbols.......................................... 805 removing................................................ 265
combining dimensions......................... 717 changing
contents................................................. 805 drawing revisions.................................. 516
dimensioning..................................707,870 check dimensions....................................... 702
examples................................................ 806 circles.................................................... 301,929
in drawings..................................... 804,805 class.............................................................. 894
properties...............................................909 cloning models............................................ 117
bolt’s full name............................................896 cloning template models............................. 77
bolt’s short name........................................ 896 cloning templates................................ 104,110
bottom drawing views.........................152,844 cloning
bottom views............................................... 613 a drawing to a new sheet..................... 125
boundaries, see view boundaries checking cloned drawings.................... 123
of drawing views....................................159 cloned objects....................................... 123
building objects..................17,21,143,324,844 cloning templates................76,77,116,117
modifying............................................... 324 dimensions............................................ 122
bulge.............................................................929 drawings.................................. 115,118,120
by print area................................................ 557 using cloning templates from other
models....................................................117
when to clone........................................ 115
C closing dimensions..................................... 713
adding.....................................................236
calculated drawing sizes............................ 568 closing
calculated sizes........................................... 578 drawings.................................................141
camber ........................................................ 894 clouds....................................................264,300
cast unit definition method COG, see center of gravity......................... 225
By cast unit ID.....................................67,86 colors
By cast unit position.......................... 67,86 changing pen number (old printing)...559
cast unit drawing in drawings............... 282,283,495,498,500
freezing...................................................512 pen numbers......................................... 559
cast unit drawings......................................... 61 special colors......................................... 500
creating................................................67,86 columns
creating one by one................................ 87 in cast unit drawings............................... 62
dimensioning......................................... 868 viewing direction in assembly drawings
precast beams......................................... 62 .................................................................627
precast column........................................ 62 combining
precast stairs............................................63 dimension lines..................................... 238
cc............................................................898,899 dimensions..............................714,717,861
center lines.................................................. 324 sketch objects........................................ 305
center of gravity compass direction.......................................800
dimensioning......................................... 225

937
complex line types...................................... 307 cut lines.................................................. 299
complex lines...............................................307 drawings........ 43,67,75,86,92,100,116,126
connecting side marks............................... 904 empty drawings....................................... 82
connecting side empty general arrangement drawings. 66
showing marks ..................................... 803 fillet......................................................... 318
connecting general arrangement drawings............. 82
dimension lines..................................... 237 moment connection symbols..............490
connection marks....................................... 754 revisions................................................. 515
modifying............................................... 257 round chamfer in drawing................... 319
connections straight chamfer in drawing.................319
DSTV code.............................................. 901 curved section views...................................149
error........................................................901 custom presentations................................ 367
group...................................................... 901 custom weld symbols.................................362
marks......................................................901 custom weld type symbols........................ 362
name.......................................................901 customizing
number...................................................901 drawing grids......................................... 470
running number.................................... 901 line types................................................ 832
content......................................................... 904 Master Drawing catalog....................... 101
contents master drawings....................................101
of bolts....................................................805 print file names.............................. 545,546
of drawing parts.................................... 794 cut lines
of drawings.............................................. 15 creating...................................................299
of marks................................................. 892 deleting...................................................300
of neighbor parts.................................. 797 managing............................................... 298
of surface treatment.............................816 updating................................................. 299
coordinate systems
changing.................................................622
fixed........................................................ 622
horizontal brace.................................... 622
D
local.........................................................622 deck plans...................................................... 48
model......................................................622 deformed parts
oriented..................................................622 undeforming..........................................638
user coordinate system (UCS)............. 174 deleting
vertical brace......................................... 622 cut lines.................................................. 300
copying drawing revisions.................................. 516
a drawing to a new sheet..................... 125 drawings.................................................518
drawing views........................................ 156 moment connection symbols..............493
drawings.................................................113 selected part marks.............................. 261
sketch objects........................................ 317 selected reinforcement marks............ 261
with offset.............................................. 317 unnecessary drawing files....................507
countersunk.................................................896 detail boundary...........................................166
cover-up line................................................ 301 detail marks................................................. 150
cover-up polygon........................................ 301 adding.....................................................254
cover-up polyline........................................ 301 detail name............................................ 903
cover-up rectangle...................................... 301 elements.................................................903
cover-up tools..............................................321 modifying............................................... 166
creating source drawing name........................... 903
anchor bolt plans.................................... 83 detail symbols............................................. 166
detail views.................................................. 145

938
 creating...................................................150 edge shape.............................................691
marks......................................................166 examples of view-level dimensioning.691
moving to another drawing................. 156 filter for holes and recesses......... 680,681
name.......................................................903 filters............................................... 678,682
start letter or number...........................152 integrated...............................................687
view label mark elements.................... 903 of recesses, shapes and holes............. 683
view labels...................................... 150,166 on view level............................655,657,683
detailed object level settings.... overall dimensions................................691
23,31,33,36,38,844 precast..................................... 687,688,691
details properties...............................................850
adding detail marks.............................. 254 view-specific...........................................655
creating...................................................335 dimensions............................................. 21,123
exploding................................................335 absolute.......................................... 726,851
in 2D Library.......................................... 335 adding.....................................................168
inserting................................................. 335 adding dimension tags......................... 176
dg files.......................................................... 518 anchor bolt plans.................................. 748
removing................................................ 507 angle....................................................... 851
dimension format....................................... 854 appearance............................. 230,725,856
dimension lines arrow size............................................... 856
combining.............................................. 238 automatic............................................... 722
creating extensions...............................725 automatic tagging................................. 699
customizing arrows...............................231 bolt dimensioning................................. 707
linking..................................................... 237 bolts........................................................ 870
unlinking.................................................237 center of gravity.................................... 225
dimension marks........................................ 230 check dimensions................................. 702
dragging................................................. 241 cloning.................................................... 122
dimension points closing............................................. 713,861
adding...................................... 233,236,237 combining................................714,717,861
removing................................................ 237 contents................................................. 168
dimension rule properties coordinate system................................ 174
applying.................................................. 660 creating...................................................697
creating...................................................660 creating manually..................................167
dimension tags.................................... 230,858 creation method....................................844
automatic tagging................................. 699 dimension format................................. 854
content................................................... 176 dimension lines...................... 182,242,413
contents................................................. 168 dimension marks....................168,182,413
elements.................................................168 dimension points........................... 233,237
filtering content.....................................178 dimension tags....................... 168,182,413
in dimensions........................................ 176 dual dimensions....................................180
removing default content.....................176 elements.................................................168
rotating................................................... 176 elevations............................................... 700
dimensioning enlarging................................................ 726
integrated...............................................689 exaggerate selected.............................. 229
dimensioning tool........................ 688,689,691 exaggerating.......................................... 726
dimensioning...............................................682 examples....
automatic............................................... 649 170,704,707,708,713,714,717,718,719,
defining rules.........................................657 720,721
dimensioning rule properties.............. 669 extension lines............................... 239,851

939
flipping outside dimensions................ 234 sloped..................................................... 735
formats................................................... 851 specifying on view level........................ 651
forward offset................................ 718,861 straight................................................... 851
GA drawings...........................................736 sub-assemblies......................................872
general arrangement drawings.... tags.................................................. 721,858
736,737,874 tags, see dimension tags......................230
grid dimensions in GA drawings......... 738 transparent............................................ 856
grouping.................................. 699,851,871 type......................................................... 861
hide dimensions in drawings...............282 types....................................................... 851
in reinforcement............................ 182,413 unfolded parts....................................... 723
level.........................................................851 units.................................................851,854
limiting outside dimensions in GA updating format.................................... 777
drawings.................................................742 US absolute............................................851
line arrow............................................... 856 dim_operation.ail........................................ 700
line arrows............................................. 231 dim_planes_table.txt.................................. 732
marks................................230,241,697,858 direct editing of layouts............................. 584
maximum leader line length in GA direction marks........................................... 645
drawings.................................................740 direction
minimizing views................................... 861 view direction marks.............................645
modifying........................................167,230 distance between groups...........................900
object groups.........................................736 distances
object groups in dimensioning............737 recognizable...........................................719
opaque................................................... 856 distribution lines..................................182,413
part dimensions.............................704,875 dividing
part dimensions in GA drawings......... 743 arcs..........................................................316
parts in general arrangement drawings lines.........................................................316
.................................................................174 double dimensioning..................................180
parts partly outside the view in GA double dimensions..................................... 180
drawings.................................................741 dragging
placing.............................. 603,610,851,925 associative notes................................... 270
plate side marks.................................... 233 dimension marks.................................. 241
plates...................................................... 729 drawing objects..................................... 295
position dimensions...................... 708,724 end of dimension line...........................242
position properties............................... 865 grid labels in drawings..........................481
positioning...................................... 743,875 marks......................................................270
precision......................................... 851,854 model weld marks................................ 359
preferred dim side................................ 720 texts........................................................ 271
prefix of radial dimensions.................. 728 weld marks.............................................359
profiles....................................................732 Drawing content manager......................... 244
properties................................850,851,868 drawing files
recognizable distance........................... 861 deleting...................................................507
recreating............................................... 181 drawing filters.......................................... 33,85
reinforcement... 182,191,413,422,721,873 drawing fold marks.....................................568
reinforcing bar dimension lines... 182,413 drawing frames........................................... 568
reinforcing bar groups.................. 182,413 drawing layouts............................................. 20
relative....................................................851 addinf table layouts.............................. 573
setting start point..................................235 adding.....................................................573
settings................................................... 697 adding tables......................................... 573

940
 creating...................................................573 drawing snapshots..................................... 139
direct editing..........................................584 drawing view filters........................ 36,176,678
examples in pour drawings................. 468 drawing view labels
selecting a new...................................... 596 section views..........................................164
drawing level properties...............................33 drawing views.........................................20,145
drawing levels 3D............................................................844
object level............................................... 31 3D views................................................. 152
Drawing List................................................. 127 aligning................................................... 162
cloning drawings................................... 118 arranging........................................ 156,163
contents.......................................... 128,133 assembly drawings............................... 620
filtering................................................... 133 automatic............................................... 612
opening.................................................. 128 automatic settings................................ 612
sorting.................................................... 133 back.........................................................844
status flags............................................. 131 back views.............................................. 152
drawing mode............................................... 19 bottom....................................................844
drawing objects........................................... 243 bottom views......................................... 152
aligning................................................... 288 coordinate system................................ 844
annotation objects.................................. 21 copying................................................... 156
arranging................................................ 287 creating....
associativity..............................................17 146,149,150,152,153,154,155,613
building objects....................................... 21 creating automatic................................ 656
detailed object level settings............ 31,36 deformed parts..................................... 638
dragging................................................. 295 detail views............................................ 150
loading object properties....................... 31 direction marks.............................. 645,844
modifying properties.............................. 30 end.......................................................... 844
moving....................................................295 front........................................................ 844
reshaping............................................... 295 front views..............................................152
resizing................................................... 295 key plans................................................ 579
sketch objects.......................................... 21 linking..................................................... 159
drawing properties modifying............................................... 164
applying.................................................... 40 moving....................................................161
creating...................................................655 moving to another drawing................. 156
detailed object level settings..31,33,36,38 neighbor part visibility..........................630
drawing level............................................ 33 of entire model view............................. 153
drawing property files.......................... 104 of reinforcement meshes.....................456
modifying automatic.............................563 of selected area in a drawing...............155
modifying in an open drawing...............29 of selected area in model.....................154
modifying on view level.......................... 28 part orientation..................................... 621
object level............................................... 30 projection type...................................... 618
setting before creating drawings...........27 rotating................................................... 163
view level.................................................. 38 rotating parts......................................... 624
drawing property files................................ 107 scale.................................................600,844
drawing revisions section.................................................... 844
attributes................................................517 section view properties........................ 849
drawing sheets............................................ 568 section views.................................. 146,149
drawing size.................................................601 settings................................................... 844
calculated sizes......................................578 shortening parts....................................634
fixed sizes...............................................578 showing openings and recesses..........639

941
 single-part views....................................155 layouts................................ 20,568,573,596
size.......................................................... 600 links to other drawings.........................278
top...........................................................844 locking.................................................... 511
top views................................................ 152 managing............................................... 509
unfolding polybeams............................637 master drawings....................................101
view boundaries.................................... 159 modifying properties......................... 29,30
view label marks....................................616 multidrawings.......................................... 64
view label symbols................................ 844 multiple drawing sheets of the same
viewing direction of beams, bracings and part............................................................99
columns..................................................627 object properties................................33,38
drawings.......................................................126 old printing............................................ 537
dimensions............................................ 649 opening.................................................. 136
adding texts........................................... 271 preview images......................................114
anchor bolt plans............................... 51,83 printing (old).................... 539,542,543,545
assembly drawing................................... 57 printing to multiple sheets (old printing
automatic drawing settings................. 563 .................................................................548
autoscaling.............................................601 properties..........................28,31,36,40,563
autosizing............................................... 601 protection....................................... 605,607
before creating........................................ 65 recreating................................................. 41
cast unit drawings................................... 61 reference models.................................. 501
changing color....................................... 498 removing................................................ 105
checking cloned drawings.................... 123 renaming................................................ 144
checking if parts have drawings.......... 136 revisions................................................. 515
cloning..................................... 115,116,118 rule sets.................................................... 92
closing.....................................................141 saved settings.......................................... 86
colors....................................... 282,283,495 saving......................................................506
contents....................................................15 screen layout........................................... 19
creating.....43,67,75,82,86,92,100,116,126 searching................................................134
creating general arrangement drawings selecting................................................. 135
................................................................... 66 setting properties before creating
deleting...................................................518 drawings................................................... 27
drawing filters..........................................33 settings............................................563,835
drawing objects....................................... 21 single-part drawings............................... 52
drawing size....................................598,600 snapshots...............................................137
drawing templates................................ 126 status flags............................................. 131
drawing view scale................. 598,599,600 status information................................ 131
editing.....................................................143 table layouts.......................................... 579
filters....................................................33,38 tables...................................................... 570
fold marks.............................................. 551 text files.................................................. 274
frames.................................................... 551 three levels of modifying........................23
freezing...................................................511 titles........................................................ 144
general arrangement drawings............. 45 types......................................................... 45
grid lines.................................................469 unlocking................................................511
grids.................................................469,791 updating.......................................23,42,509
hiding and showing objects..........282,283 user-defined attributes................. 827,828
hyperlinks...............................................277 view filters................................................ 38
in drawings...............................................20 views...........................................20,612,613
issuing.....................................................514 with black background......................... 495

942
 wizards......................................................92 enlarging
dual dimensions dimensions............................................ 726
adding automatically............................ 722 erection elevation drawings.........................49
adding manually....................................180 erection elevation drawings, see general
DWG and DXF files arrangement drawings................................. 45
adding in a drawing table layout.........579 exaggerating dimensions...........................726
in drawings.............................................280 exaggerating
scaling options.......................................280 selected dimensions............................. 229
DWG files examples
inserting to drawings............................ 335 bolts in drawings................................... 806
DWG/DXF files.................................21,123,570 cast unit drawings.............................. 62,63
adding to drawing layout..................... 584 cloning drawings................................... 120
DWG dimensions in drawings....
re-ordering in drawings........................306 236,704,707,708,713,714,717,718,719,
720,721
edge chamfers in drawings..................330
E hatch patterns....................................... 814
manually added dimensions in drawings
edge chamfers..............................255,795,904 .................................................................170
adding chamfer marks......................... 329 part representation in drawings......... 795
in drawings............... 326,327,328,329,330 printing (old)............................540,541,542
editing welds in drawings.......................... 349,364
drawings.................................................143 exploding
elements plug-ins...................................................300
in bolt marks.................................. 786,896 sketch objects........................................ 305
in connection marks............................. 901 extension lines
in detail view label marks.....................903 of dimensions........................................ 239
in dimension marks.............................. 168 extrema, see view boundaries........... 146,159
in dimension tags..................................168
in marks.......................................... 892,893
in merged reinforcement marks......... 900
in neighbor reinforcement mesh marks F
.................................................................899 face direction....................................... 800,894
in part marks......................................... 894 file names
in reinforcement marks........................898 in printing...............................................546
in reinforcement mesh marks............. 899 in printing (old)...................................... 545
in section view label marks.................. 903 fill.................................................................. 904
in surface treatment marks................. 902 fill, see hatches............................................807
in view label marks............................... 903 fillet edges....................................................904
elevation views............................................ 145 fillet
elevations creating...................................................318
datum point........................................... 844 fills.................................................................809
dimensioning......................................... 700 filtering
embeds...........................................................53 dimension tag content......................... 178
end views.............................................. 613,844 drawing filters..........................................33
aligning with main view........................ 647 Drawing List contents........................... 133
view direction marks.............................645 using drawing filters in anchor bolt plans
enlarged views ................................................................... 85
adding dimension points..................... 233 view filters................................................ 38

943
filters
examples in dimensioning.... 680,681,682 G
excluding stirrups .................................682 GA drawings, see general arrangement
in dimensioning rules........................... 678 drawings................................................. 45,174
in drawings...............................................33 GA drawings
on view level.............................................38 creating.....................................................82
finding defining automatic view properties.... 615
drawings.................................................127 gage of outstanding leg...............707,894,896
parts with drawings.............................. 136 general arrangement drawings................... 45
finish............................................................. 894 3D views................................................... 50
firm folder anchor bolt plans.................................... 51
for images and symbols....................... 494 creating using ribbon command........... 66
fittings (NS/FS) ............................................ 894 deck plans................................................ 48
fixed.......................................................168,361 defining automatic view properties.... 615
fixed drawing main view ........................... 626 dimensioning parts to grids.................174
fixed drawing sizes......................................568 dimensions..............................736,737,874
fixed sizes.....................................................578 erection elevation drawings...................49
flags foundation plans..................................... 46
in drawings.............................................131 framing plans...........................................47
flipping outside dimensions...................... 234 freezing...................................................512
fold marks.................................................... 551 isometric drawings..................................50
in printed drawings....................... 532,552 plans............................................... 47,48,50
folders slab plans................................................. 47
in Master Drawing Catalog....111,112,113 views....................................................... 615
folding printed drawings............................551 general arrangement drawings
foldmarks.....................................................551 creating.....................................................82
format ghost outlines...................................... 282,283
dimensions............................................ 777 graphical drawing objects ......................... 123
level attributes.......................................777 graphical objects..................................301,929
forward offset...................................... 718,861 re-ordering............................................. 306
foundation plans...........................................83 grid dimensions.......................................... 874
frames.......................................................... 551 in GA drawings.......................................738
around marks........................................ 760 grid labels
in printed drawings....................... 532,552 in drawings..................................... 481,930
framing plans.................................................47 grid lines
free................................................................168 hiding in drawings.................................482
freezing in drawings.............................................469
and associativity.................................... 513 modifying in drawings.......................... 469
and cloning............................................ 513 grid UDAs..................................................... 470
assembly drawings............................... 512 grids
cast unit drawings................................. 512 customizing in drawings.......................470
drawings.................................................511 hiding in drawings.................................482
effect on drawings................................ 513 in drawings...................... 469,470,791,792
general arrangement drawings........... 512 labels in drawings................................. 930
single-part drawings............................. 512 modfying in drawings........................... 469
front drawing views......................152,627,844 moving grid labels in drawings............481
front views................................................... 613 properties in drawings......................... 930

944
 user-defined attributes for customizing
drawings.................................................470 I
grouped dimensions identical objects
tagging.................................................... 699 grouping dimensions............................699
grouping images
dimensions..................................... 699,871 in drawings.............................................281
identical objects.................................... 699 in templates........................................... 494
preview images......................................114
re-ordering in drawings........................306
H scaling options.......................................281
in Master Drawing Catalog........................ 114
handle points in leader lines..................... 298 independent annotation objects
handles DWG and DXF files................................ 280
in drawing objects................................. 295 hyperlinks...............................................277
hatch patterns images.................................................... 281
examples................................................ 814 links.........................................................278
insulation............................................... 814 modifying............................................... 282
schema files........................................... 812 revision marks....................................... 279
surface treatment................................. 911 text file....................................................274
hatches.........................................................807 texts........................................................ 271
hatches insulation
neighbor parts.......................................809 hatch patterns....................................... 814
parts........................................................809 Integrated dimensioning............................697
schema files........................................... 809 integrated drawings......................................17
shapes.................................................... 809 internal bolt dimensions............................ 707
hidden lines................................................. 324 issuing
reference models.................................. 501 drawings.................................................514
hidden parts
listing............................................... 282,283
showing frames and leader lines........ 773
hiding K
change symbols.....................................265 key plan views..............................................145
dimensions in drawings....................... 282 key plans...................................................... 570
drawing objects..............................282,283 adding to drawing layout..................... 584
grid lines in drawings............................482 adjusting drawing views....................... 579
grids in drawings................................... 482 knock-off dimensions................................. 702
parts in drawings........................... 282,283
reinforcing bar lines..............................822
highlighting
in drawings.............................................264
L
parts with drawings.............................. 136 labels
hole diameter.............................................. 896 drawing view labels...............................616
hole dimensions..........................................661 section views..........................................146
hole size....................................................... 896 landscape
holes printing (old).......................................... 540
dimensioning......................................... 683 layers
hyperlinks............................................... 21,123 reinforcing bars..................................... 370
adding.....................................................277 Layout editor............................................... 584
modifying............................................... 282 layouts.....................................................20,568

945
 adding tables......................................... 584 line width..................................................... 527
creating...................................................573 lines....................................................... 301,929
direct editing..........................................584 customized line types........................... 832
moving tables........................................ 584 dividing................................................... 316
re-anchoring tables...............................584 extending............................................... 314
selecting a new...................................... 596 shortening..............................................314
table layouts.......................................... 571 trimming.................................................314
leader lines.................................................. 767 linetypes.......................................................832
associative notes................................... 270 linking
base point location............................... 270 dimension lines..................................... 237
customizing arrows...............................487 drawing views........................................ 159
for reinforcing bar group marks..........766 links.................................................................21
handle points.........................................298 hyperlinks...............................................277
marks......................................................270 modifying............................................... 282
maximum leader line length in GA to DWG/DXF files................................... 280
drawings.................................................740 to images................................................281
modifying............................................... 298 to other drawings..................................278
part marks..............................................761 to text files............................................. 274
setting advanced options.....................761 listing hidden parts..............................282,283
types................................................ 765,883 location
length .......................................................... 894 of beam marks...................................... 764
lengthening parts........................................633 of bracing marks................................... 764
lengthening of column marks................................... 764
shortened parts.....................................637 of end views........................................... 647
level attributes.............................................777 of marks.......................................... 763,798
level dimensions......................................... 851 of section views..................................... 647
level marks...................................................123 locking
adding.....................................................253 drawings.................................................511
properties...............................................891
levels
drawing level............................................ 23
object level............................................... 23
M
three levels of modifying drawings....... 23 macros
view level.................................................. 23 adding surface treatment symbols in
limitations in printing................................. 519 drawings.................................................493
limiting outside dimensions in GA drawings main views............................................145,613
.......................................................................742 managing
line extensions............................................ 725 cut lines.................................................. 298
line thickness .............................................. 527 drawings.................................................509
line thickness moment connection symbols..............490
pen numbers......................................... 559 manual dimensions.............................168,170
line type........................................................324 margins
line weight ...................................................527 in table layouts...................................... 573
line weight mark drawings ready for issuing ..............513
pen numbers......................................... 559 mark elements
line weights (old printing) pours.......................................................902
changing.................................................559 MarkDimensionFormat.dim...................... 777
in printouts............................................ 559 marks............................................... 21,608,844
view label marks....................................903

946
adding............................................. 244,754 using templates.....................................784
adding symbols..................................... 785 view direction marks.............................645
adding templates...........................776,780 visibility...................................................756
appearance............................................ 878 weld marks.............................................361
automatic........................................752,754 Master Drawing Catalog....................... 75,104
bolt marks.......................................786,896 adding master drawings.......................102
checking mark count............................ 244 applying object level settings.................81
color........................................................ 760 cloning templates.......................... 104,110
common elements................................ 893 copying drawings.................................. 113
connection marks................................. 901 customizing............................................101
containing templates............................ 782 managing............................................... 101
content................................................... 878 managing folders...........................111,112
contents................................................. 892 master drawing properties...........106,107
deleting...................................................244 preview images.............................. 114,115
detail marks........................................... 903 removing drawings........................ 105,113
detail view label marks......................... 903 rule set properties................................ 108
drawing weld marks..............................885 sample images.......................................114
element unit settings............................774 searching................................................100
elements..................................760,892,894 wizard files............................................. 109
font..........................................................760 master drawings......................................... 101
frames.................................................... 760 adding.....................................................102
height......................................................760 adding preview images.........................115
in dimensions........................................ 858 adding thumbnail images.................... 115
in view labels..........................................616 cloning templates............................ 77,104
leader line types.................................... 765 properties....................................... 106,107
leader lines.............................................487 removing................................................ 105
level marks......................................253,891 rule sets.............................................79,102
location.............................763,764,767,798 saved settings.......................................... 77
merged reinforcement marks ............ 900 searching................................................100
merging............................ 267,767,768,770 types......................................................... 76
model weld marks......................... 349,888 wizards......................................................80
neighbor reinforcement....................... 898 material........................................................ 896
part marks..............................................251 material ....................................................... 894
placing............................................. 603,925 material grade............................................. 898
positioning............................................. 884 maximum leader line length..................... 875
properties....................................... 754,877 maximum number of outside dimensions....
reinforcement................................ 372,898 742
reinforcement marks.....................770,899 maximum position dimensions................ 724
revision marks....................................... 279 merging
section marks........................................ 903 marks....................................... 267,767,770
section view label marks...................... 903 part marks..............................................768
settings................................................... 752 reinforcement marks......267,270,770,771
showing frames and leader lines........ 773 weld marks..................................... 267,366
surface treatment marks..................... 902 mesh class................................................... 898
text appearance.................................... 760 mesh diameter............................................ 899
units........................................................ 825 mesh length.................................................899
updating................................................. 261 mesh name..................................................898
user-defined attributes........................ 776 mesh shape................................................. 898

947
mesh size..................................................... 899 creating empty multidrawings...............73
mesh weight................................................ 898 creating of selected parts.......................74
mesh width.................................................. 899 of selected drawings............................... 73
mesh updating................................................. 509
creating a drawing view........................456 multiple drawing sheets of the same part....
in drawings..................................... 820,821 99,100
in neighbor parts...................................821
properties...............................................913
properties in drawings......................... 821
minimizing views.........................................861
N
minimum position dimensions................. 724 name.............................................................894
model objects................................................ 17 named size...................................................557
in drawings.............................................324 names
model weld marks drawings.................................................144
adding in drawing................................. 361 neighbor part marks...................................754
model welds......................................... 346,817 neighbor parts.............................................793
dragging marks......................................359 in drawing views....................................630
modifying appearance in drawings.... 357 in drawings.............................................797
visibility of marks in drawings............. 355 properties...............................................904
modeling direction......................................763 view extension................................630,844
modifying neighbor reinforcement marks
annotation object properties...............257 elements......................................... 898,899
building objects..................................... 324 new printing.................................................520
detail properties....................................166 north marks................................................. 801
dimension properties........................... 230 notes
drawing grid line properties................ 469 associative notes................................... 255
drawing grid properties........................469 number of bars........................................... 898
drawing grids......................................... 792 number of bolts ......................................... 896
Drawing List contents........................... 133 numbering..................................................... 65
drawing view properties.......................164
drawings................................................... 23
independent annotation objects.........282 O
leader line shape...................................298 object groups...............................................102
section properties................................. 164 in dimensioning............................. 737,875
symbol properties................................. 489 in dimensioning GA drawings..............736
wizard files............................................. 109 object level settings............................... 23,844
moment connection symbols....................482 applying in Master Drawing Catalog..... 81
creating...................................................490 objects
deleting...................................................493 associative annotation objects............ 243
managing............................................... 490 building objects..................................... 324
updating................................................. 492 cloned objects....................................... 123
moving drawing objects....................................... 21
drawing views........................................ 161 modifying in drawings............................ 30
drawing views to another drawing......156 shapes.................................................... 300
end of dimension line...........................242 offset............................................................ 929
objects in drawings............................... 295 forward offset................................ 718,861
multidrawings................................................64 opening
creating.....................................................72 Drawing List........................................... 128

948
 drawings......................................... 127,136 lengthening in model............................633
openings and recesses lengthening shortened parts............... 637
showing in drawings............................. 639 line types................................................ 324
showing in views................................... 844 orientation...............................621,797,801
orientation marks....................................... 798 properties....................................... 795,904
showing.................................................. 801 representation.......................................795
orientation symbols....................................801 settings................................................... 795
orientation shortening..............................................632
of parts............................................621,797 shortening in model............................. 633
of plates..................................................628 shortening view by view....................... 325
overall dimensions......................................661 pattern line.................................................. 301
in GA drawings.......................................738 Pattern line editor.......................................301
creating pattern lines............................307
pattern lines................................................ 301
P adding in drawings................................307
patterns
paper size............................................. 542,557 hatches................................................... 807
part marks pdf files
adding.....................................................251 creating (old printing)........................... 543
advanced options for setting leader lines pdf
.................................................................761 customizing file names.........................534
compass direction.................................800 printing................................................... 520
containing templates............................ 782 pen number.................................................527
deleting...................................................261 pen numbers............................................... 559
elements.................................................894 pen numbers (old printing)
leader lines..................................... 270,761 changing.................................................559
level attributes.......................................777 placement settings.......................603,608,610
merging........................................... 768,770 placing
modifying............................................... 257 annotation objects................................ 603
rotation angle........................................ 459 associative notes................................... 925
showing frames and leader lines........ 773 dimensions..............................603,610,925
spiral beams.......................................... 459 fixed.................................................168,361
updating................................................. 261 free..........................................................168
using templates.....................................784 marks....................................... 603,608,925
part position ............................................... 894 notes....................................................... 608
parts symbols...........................................608,925
representation in drawings..................324 texts................................................. 608,925
additional markings in drawings......... 324 views....................................................... 611
color........................................................ 324 welds.......................................................603
compass direction.................................800 plan drawings........................................... 47,48
connecting side marks..........................803 plate side marks
developed parts in drawings............... 638 showing.................................................. 233
dimensions..................................... 704,875 plates.............................................................. 54
dimensions in GA drawings................. 743 dimensioning......................................... 729
fill options.............................................. 324 orientation in drawings........................ 628
fills...........................................................809 plot files, see print files.............................. 546
hatches............................................324,809 plotter
in drawings..................................... 793,794 sending to.............................................. 520
lengthening............................................ 632

949
plotting, see printing........................... 544,546 printer drivers...................................... 554,560
plotting, see printing (old)..........................537 printer instances......................................... 560
plt Abode postscript printer instances.....556
printing................................................... 520 adding...................................... 554,555,556
plug-ins print-to-file instances............................555
exploding................................................300 setting up............................................... 554
polybeams printers................................................. 554,555
unfolding................................................ 637 printing (old)
polygons............................................... 301,929 to file....................................................... 545
polylines................................................301,929 XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG....
pop-marks....................................................904 541,551,554,556,557
portrait adding printer instances...............554,556
printing (old).......................................... 541 drawings.................................................537
position dimensions................................... 708 examples.........................................540,541
maximum............................................... 724 fold marks.............................................. 551
minimum................................................724 in landscape...........................................540
positioning properties in portrait............................................... 541
section marks........................................ 884 line weights............................................ 559
view label marks....................................884 multiple drawings................................. 542
pour breaks on A3.......................................................541
properties...............................................922 on A4.......................................................540
showing in drawings............................. 819 paper size...............................................557
pour objects print area h*b........................................ 557
modifying............................................... 466 printer instances................................... 554
pours settings................................................... 549
examples of drawings and reports..... 468 single drawings......................................539
in drawings..................................... 464,922 to multiple sheets................................. 548
pour break symbol in drawings...........467 to paper printer.....................................554
pour breaks............................................464 to pdf............................................... 543,556
pour objects...........................................464 XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG..539,540,542
properties in drawings......................... 922 printing (old)XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG
showing in drawings............................. 819 A3 on A4................................................. 542
precision.......................................................854 examples................................................ 542
predefined reinforcement dimensions.... printing.........................................................546
182,413 adding printer instances...................... 555
preferred dim side...................................... 720 Color Table............................................. 559
preferred scale............................................ 600 customizing file names.........................534
preventing hints and tips......................................... 560
automatic drawing updates................... 42 limitations.............................................. 519
preview images line weight..............................................559
creating...................................................114 pen numbers......................................... 559
in Master Drawing Catalog........... 114,115 plt............................................................ 520
print area h*b..............................................557 settings files........................................... 530
print files...................................................... 546 to file............................................... 544,555
print paper size........................................... 520 to pdf...................................................... 520
printer.......................................................... 520 to plotter................................................ 520
Printer Catalog............................................ 554 product_finishes.dat................................... 911
Printer Catalog (old printing)...... 554,555,556 profile .......................................................... 894

950
profiles recreating
dimensions............................................ 732 dimensions............................................ 181
projection type............................................ 618 drawings................................................... 41
properties files rectangles............................................. 301,929
drawings.................................................655 reference dimensions, see check
properties dimensions.................................................. 702
associative annotation objects............ 257 reference lines.............................................324
automatic drawing properties............... 27 reference models.......................................... 21
bolts........................................................ 909 hidden lines........................................... 501
drawing properties..................... 28,29,563 in drawings.............................................501
grids in drawings................................... 930 own hidden lines................................... 501
marks......................................................877 reflected views.............................................844
meshes................................................... 913 refreshing
parts........................................................904 associativity............................................124
reinforcement........................................913 reinforcement marks..................................754
surface treatment................................. 910 adding pull-outs.................................... 789
symbol properties................................. 489 deleting...................................................261
protected areas....................................605,607 elements..................................898,899,900
protection settings......................................603 leader line base points......................... 762
pull-out pictures.......................................... 898 leader line types.................................... 767
reinforcement................................ 392,395 location...................................................767
pull-outs merging....................................270,770,771
in reinforcement marks........................789 modifying............................................... 257
pullout pictures........................................... 916 splitting...................................................270
reinforcement mesh................................... 820
creating a drawing view........................456
R properties...............................................913
properties in drawings......................... 821
radial dimensions reinforcement position.............................. 898
changing the prefix............................... 728 reinforcement settings for drawings........ 916
rails................................................................. 60 reinforcement
re-ordering adding dimensions........................ 182,413
sketch objects ....................................... 306 closed dimensions................................ 721
ready for issuing......................................... 513 dimension lines..............................182,413
Rebar group dimensioning application....182 dimension marks........................... 182,413
Rebar layering marker................................370 dimension tags...............................182,413
rebar marks dimensioning..................................191,422
deleting...................................................261 dimensioning reinforcing bar groups....
Rebar mesh view creator........................... 456 182,413
RebarClassificator....................................... 370 dimensions..................................... 721,873
rebars, see reinforcing bars............... 182,413 hiding lines in drawings........................822
rebars in drawings..................................... 820,821
dimensioning..................................191,422 marks.............................................. 252,372
marks.............................................. 252,372 neighbor reinforcement....................... 821
pull-out pictures.............................392,395 properties...............................................913
rebar_config.inp.......................................... 916 properties in drawings......................... 821
recesses pull-out pictures.............................392,395
dimensioning......................................... 683 reinforcing bar layer information........370
recognizable distances............................... 719

951
 representation options.........................823 revisions....................................................... 515
reinforcing bar group marks changing.................................................516
leader line types.................................... 766 creating...................................................515
location...................................................766 deleting...................................................516
reinforcing bar groups rich lines....................................................... 307
dimension lines..............................182,413 rotating plates in drawing.......................... 628
dimensioning..................................182,413 rotating
distribution lines............................ 182,413 drawing views........................................ 163
reinforcing bars parts in drawing views..........................624
adjusting the location........................... 370 rtf
dimensioning bar groups............. 182,413 adding a link.......................................... 274
dimensioning rebar groups.......... 182,413 rule properties
hiding lines in drawings........................822 in dimensioning.....................................669
in drawings...................... 369,370,820,821 rule sets........................................ 76,79,92,109
layer information.................................. 370 creating drawings.................................... 93
properties...............................................913 in Master Drawing Catalog...................102
relative dimensions.................................... 851 modifying............................................... 108
removing rules
change symbols.....................................265 dimensioning rules............................... 737
dimension points.................................. 237 in dimensioning.....................................657
dimension tag content......................... 178
drawings.................................................113
unnecessary drawing files....................507
renaming
S
drawings.................................................144 sample images
reports creating...................................................114
examples for pours...............................468 in Master Drawing Catalog........... 114,115
representation options saved settings................................ 76,77,82,86
for reinforcement..................................823 in Master Drawing Catalog...................104
representation modifying............................................... 107
of parts in drawings.............................. 795 saving
resetting drawings.................................................506
user coordinate system........................506 scale..............................................................600
reshaping scales
drawing objects..................................... 295 in tables.................................................. 579
resizing of drawing views.....................598,599,600
drawing objects..................................... 295 schema files..........................................809,812
drawing view boundaries..................... 159 screen layout
restriction box, see view boundaries........159 in drawings...............................................19
revising drawings........................................ 515 screen shots
revising drawings, see revisions................ 515 preview images......................................114
revision marks............................................. 123 sample images.......................................114
adding.....................................................279 screenshots
arrows.....................................................279 preview images......................................114
deleting...................................................279 searching
modifying............................................... 282 drawings.................................................134
placing.................................................... 279 master drawings....................................100
revision tables............................................. 570 section marks.......................................146,644
adding.....................................................254

952
 elements.................................................903 mark properties.................................... 877
modifying............................................... 164 marks......................................................752
positioning properties.......................... 884 merged reinforcement marks............. 900
section name......................................... 903 neighbor reinforcement mark elements
setting properties..................................642 .................................................................898
source drawing name........................... 903 part and neighbor part properties......904
section view labels...................................... 146 part and shape hatch pattern properties
modifying............................................... 164 .................................................................812
section views......................... 145,613,644,844 part dimensioning properties...... 868,875
aligning with main view........................ 647 part mark elements.............................. 894
creating........................................... 146,149 placement properties........................... 925
cut box....................................................146 position dimensioning properties.......865
cutting line............................................. 146 positioning properties.......................... 884
label mark elements............................. 903 printing (old).......................................... 549
labels.......................................................146 reinforcement and mesh..................... 913
modifying............................................... 164 reinforcement dimensioning properties
moving to another drawing................. 156 .................................................................873
name.......................................................903 reinforcement mark elements.............898
properties...............................................849 reinforcement mesh mark elements..899
setting properties..................................642 reinforcement settings for drawings.. 916
titles........................................................ 146 saved settings.......................................... 86
view direction marks.............................645 section and detail mark elements.......903
selecting settings affecting the recreation of
drawings.................................................135 drawings................................................... 41
settings sketch objects........................................ 929
bolt dimensioning properties.............. 870 sub-assembly dimensioning properties
bolt mark elements...............................896 .................................................................872
bolt properties.......................................909 surface treatment hatch pattern
common elements in marks................893 properties...............................................911
connection mark elements.................. 901 surface treatment mark elements...... 902
dimension appearance properties..... 856 surface treatment visibility and content
dimension format................................. 854 properties...............................................910
dimension grouping properties.......... 871 view, section view and detail view label
dimension mark properties................. 858 marks......................................................903
dimension properties............ 850,851,861 weld mark visibility options................. 888
dimension tag properties.....................858 shapes...................................................143,300
dimensioning properties......................850 arcs..........................................................301
drawing view properties.......................844 circles...................................................... 301
drawing weld mark properties............ 885 clouds..................................................... 301
drawings.................................................835 cover-up area.........................................301
grid and overall dimensioning properties cover-up line.......................................... 301
.................................................................874 dimensioning......................................... 683
grid properties in drawings..................930 fills...........................................................809
leader line types.................................... 883 hatches................................................... 809
level mark properties............................891 lines.........................................................301
mark appearance.................................. 878 polygons................................................. 301
mark content......................................... 878 polylines................................................. 301
mark contents....................................... 892 rectangles...............................................301

953
short dimensions........................................ 610 skew limits................................................... 801
shortening and lengthening parts............ 632 slab plans....................................................... 47
shortening parts in a model...................... 633 sloped dimensions......................................735
shortening....................................................844 slot height.................................................... 896
parts in drawing views..........................634 slot length ................................................... 896
view by view........................................... 325 snapshot overlay
showing in drawings.............................................139
drawing objects..............................282,283 in model................................................. 139
plate side marks.................................... 233 snapshots.....................................................139
pour breaks in drawings.......................819 creating...................................................137
pours in drawings................................. 819 drawings.................................................137
reference models in drawings............. 501 preview images......................................114
reinforcing bars in drawings................ 369 sample images.......................................114
single continuous line................................ 301 sorting
single continuous lines...............................301 Drawing List........................................... 133
single mark content.................................... 900 spaces
single-part drawing views.......................... 155 in drawing layouts.................................573
single-part drawings..................................... 52 special colors............................................... 500
anchor bolts............................................. 53 specified size............................................... 600
creating................................................67,93 spiral beams
dimensioning......................................... 868 dimensioning......................................... 459
embeds.....................................................53 in drawings.............................................459
example.................................................... 54 part marks..............................................459
freezing...................................................512 rotation angle........................................ 459
plates........................................................ 54 splitting
single-part drawings arcs..........................................................316
creating.....................................................86 circles...................................................... 316
single-part views......................................... 145 lines.........................................................316
size................................................................ 894 polylines................................................. 316
sketch objects.........................................21,929 stairs............................................................... 59
arcs..........................................................301 in cast unit drawings............................... 63
circles...................................................... 301 start point
clouds..................................................... 301 for dimensions...................................... 235
combining.............................................. 305 status flags...................................................131
cover-up line.......................................... 301 in Drawing List....................................... 131
cover-up polygon.................................. 301 straight dimensions.................................... 851
cover-up polyline...................................301 sub-assemblies
cover-up rectangle................................ 301 dimensioning......................................... 872
creating...................................................301 superscript...................................................273
exploding................................................305 adding in texts, dimensions and marks....
lines.........................................................301 273
polygons................................................. 301 surface treatment....................................... 493
polylines................................................. 301 hatch patterns....................................... 911
rectangles...............................................301 in drawings..................................... 815,816
sketch objects properties...............................................910
re-ordering............................................. 306 surface treatment
sketch objects .............................................306 class........................................................ 902
sketching tools..............................300,301,306 code........................................................ 902

954
 marks......................................................902 replacing in table layouts..................... 579
material.................................................. 902 revision tables........................................570
name.......................................................902 table layouts................................... 571,579
surface treatment marks........................... 754 title blocks.............................................. 570
merging.................................................. 770 tags............................................................... 699
modifying............................................... 257 in dimensions........................................ 721
surfacing.htc................................................ 911 tags, see dimension tags....
switches 168,176,178,182,230,413
for print file names............................... 546 template attributes
Symbol Editor.............................................. 482 adding in marks.....................................776
symbol separating blocks in mark............ 900 Template Editor.....................570,596,782,784
symbols........................................... 21,123,893 templates
adding in drawings................................487 as tables in drawing layouts................ 570
adding surface treatment symbols in cloning templates..................................116
drawings.................................................493 editing in Template Editor....................596
associativity..............................................18 in marks........................... 780,782,784,893
bolt symbols.......................................... 805 modifying tables....................................596
change symbols.....................................264 table layouts.......................................... 571
changing current symbol file............... 486 template library.....................................126
creating...................................................486 text files...................................................21,123
defining a firm folder............................494 adding in drawings................................274
in drawings.............................................482 text
in marks..................................................785 in marks..................................................760
modifying........................................282,489 modifying............................................... 282
modifying symbol files......................... 484 texts................................................. 21,123,893
placing.................................................... 925 adding.....................................................271
symbol files.....................................482,486 dragging................................................. 271
viewing symbol files.............................. 484 in drawings.............................................271
SymEd, see Symbol Editor......................... 482 in marks..................................................893
placing.................................................... 925
using superscript...................................273
T thumbnail images
in Master Drawing Catalog...................115
table layouts................................................ 568 thumbnails...................................................115
adding a DWG/DXF file......................... 579 tips
adding in drawing layouts....................573 printing drawings.................................. 560
margins...................................................573 title blocks....................................................570
replacing tables..................................... 579 titles
setting table scale................................. 579 in drawings.............................................144
setting table transparency................... 579 section views..........................................146
setting the location of tables............... 579 toggling between user coordinate systems
spaces.....................................................573 .......................................................................506
tables............................................................ 568 top drawing views................................152,844
adding in table layouts......................... 573 top views...................................................... 613
adding to drawing layout..................... 584 TplEd, see Template Editor........................ 596
DWG/DXF files........................................570 transparency
editing in Template Editor....................596 of tables..................................................579
in drawing layouts.................................570 trimming
key plans................................................ 570

955
 lines in drawings....................................314 creating...................................................829
types creating in drawings..............................829
dimensions............................................ 851 in drawings.............................................829
drawing types.......................................... 45 user-defined attributes
of leader lines........................................ 883 adding in marks.....................................776
of master drawings................................. 76 grids........................................................ 470
in drawings..................................... 827,828
in marks..................................................893
U
UCS, see user coordinate system...... 504,506
UCS V
see user coordinate system.................505 value fields
UDA, see user-defined attributes..............827 in templates....................................782,784
UDAs, see user-defined attributes............893 view boundaries..........................................146
undeformed.................................................844 resizing................................................... 159
undeformed parts...................................... 638 view direction marks.................................. 645
unfolded.......................................................844 view extension for neighbor parts............630
unfolding......................................................723 view extrema, see view boundaries..........159
bent plates............................................. 637 view filters.................................................31,38
polybeams..............................................637 view label marks
unfreezing drawings............................511,512 positioning properties.......................... 884
general arrangement drawings........... 512 view labels
units mark elements...................................... 903
in dimension tags..................................825 marks......................................................616
in drawings.............................................825 name.......................................................903
in reports................................................825 view level properties.....................................38
in templates........................................... 825 view properties
units..............................................................854 defining for general arrangement
in mark elements.................................. 774 drawings.................................................615
unlinking view restriction box, see view boundaries....
dimension lines..................................... 237 159
unlocking view-level dimensioning
drawings.................................................511 examples................................................ 687
updating of shapes, holes and recesses............. 683
cut lines.................................................. 299 view-level dimensions................................ 651
drawings...................................... 23,42,509 viewing direction
moment connection symbols..............492 beams and bracings in assembly
multidrawings........................................509 drawings.................................................627
part marks..............................................261 columns in assembly drawings........... 627
weld marks.............................................261 views along grid lines................................. 145
user coordinate system..............................504 views............................................................. 579
creating dimensions............................. 174 aligning............................................162,647
resetting................................................. 506 arranging drawing views...................... 163
setting.....................................................505 cloning dimensions...............................122
toggling between two systems............ 506 drawing name........................................903
user interface drawing views........................................ 613
in drawings...............................................19 fixed........................................................ 611
user-defined attributes i frames.................................................... 161

956
 free..........................................................611 modifying in drawings.......................... 257
in drawings..................................... 145,612 modifying model weld objects in
label mark elements............................. 903 drawings.................................................357
linking drawing views............................159 placing.................................................... 603
moving drawing views.......................... 161 properties in drawings......................... 817
name.......................................................903 solids.......................................................346
rotating drawing views......................... 163 visibility of marks in drawings............. 355
scale........................................................ 903 weld marks..................................... 359,364
source drawing name........................... 903 wizard files................................................... 109
visibility.........................................................904 wizards................................................. 76,80,92
of marks................................................. 756 work point....................................................702
of model weld marks............................ 888 workshop drawings
of reference models..............................501 assembly drawings..................................57
of surface treatment.............................816 single-part drawings............................... 52

W X
weld marks........................................... 349,885 XS_USE_OLD_PLOT_DIALOG............... 537,543
adding............................................. 244,361
dragging................................................. 359
examples................................................ 364
merging.................................................. 366
model weld mark visibility in drawings....
888
model weld markappearance..............888
modifying............................................... 257
modifying model weld properties.......346
updating................................................. 261
weld numbers
showing.................................................. 888
weld symbols....................................... 346,817
customizing............................................362
welding properties......................................927
welds............................................................ 361
adding drawing weld marks.................361
adding model weld marks................... 361
automatic............................................... 817
custom symbols.................................... 362
examples................................................ 349
in drawings..............................346,366,817
mark properties in drawings............... 885
model weld mark appearance.............888
model weld mark visibility in drawings....
888
model weld marks................................ 355
model weld properties......................... 927
model welds in drawings..................... 349
modifying........................................346,817

957
958